Atlas Chinensis being a second part of A relation of remarkable passages in two embassies from the East-India Company of the United Provinces to the vice-roy Singlamong and General Taising Lipovi and to Konchi, Emperor of China and East-Tartary : with a relation of the Netherlanders assisting the Tarter against Coxinga and the Chinese fleet, who till then were masters of the sea : and a more exact geographical description than formerly both of the whole empire of China in general and in particular of every of the fifteen provinces / collected out of their several writings and journals by Arnoldus Montanus ; English'd and adorn'd with above a hundred several sculptures by John Ogilby.

A THIRD EMBASSY TO THE EMPEROR OF China and East-Tartary, Under the Conduct of the Lord PIETER VAN HOORN, CONTAINING Several Remarks in their Journey through the Provinces of Fokien, Chekiang, Xantung, and Nanking, to the Imperial Court at Peking.

Sent from Batavia, Anno 1666. the third of Iune; whither he return'd Anno 1668. in Ianuary, &c.

WHat Troubles, Charges, and Endeavors the Netherland East-India Company, and their Magistrates in India, have some Years since us'd from time to time, on se∣veral Occasions, for the gaining of their so long wish'd for Chinese Trade, it would be needless here to describe, because we may plainly perceive it from other Dis∣courses, especially by the former Embassies and Expe∣ditions under the Conduct of Peter de Goyer and Iacob de Keizer, sent out Anno 1655. and 1656. And likewise from those of Balthazar Bort, Iohn van Campen, and Constantine Nobel, in Anno 1662.

Yet after long Referrings, Debates, and serious Considerations, it was at last again concluded, on the twenty eighth of May, Anno 1666, by the Lord General and Council of India, to send a Magnificent Embassy, with rich Pre∣sents, to the Tartars Court, to the Great Emperor of China and East-Tartary, that if possible, they might at last attain to their so long desir'd Free Trade through the whole Realm of China.

To this purpose was elected and chosen his Excellency the Lord Peter van

Hoorn, Privy Counsellor and Chief Treasurer of India, as he was intituled in his Commission, given him the third of Iuly in the same Year.

Constantine Nobel was also chosen as Chief Counsel in the Embassy, and Prime Head and Governor of the Trade in Hoksieu, or Focheu, the Metropolis of the Territory Fokien. He also was commanded, for several Reasons, to travel in the Degree before-mention'd up to Peking, and upon the Ambassa∣dors Decease, to succeed him in his Place, and Negotiate that Affair to the Companies best Advantage.

Furthermore, the Embassy was by the Lord General and his Council order'd to consist in the following Persons.

• The Lord Peter van Hoorn.
• Constantine Nobel Chief Counsellor in the Embassy, and Governor of the Trade.
• Iohn Putman Factor, and Master of the Ceremonies.
• Iohn vander Does Secretary.
• Gysbert Ruwenoort Steward.
• Six Gentlemen, viz.
  • Banning,
  • Berkman,
  • Frents, and
  • Ruysser,
  • Van Alteren,
  • Van Doorn.
• A Chyrurgeon.
• Six Men for a Guard.
• Two Trumpetters, and
• One Cook.

During their Journey up to Peking, it was order'd, That David Harthower, Cornelius Bartelsz, and Maurice, should provide all things below in Hoksieu.

On the third of Iune before-mention'd, the Commissions were read aboard the Vlaerding, by the following Lords,

• His Excellency the Lord General Maetzuiker.
• Charles Hertzing Chief Comptroller.
  Usual Counsellors of India.
  • Nicholas Verburgh,
  • Laurence Pit,
  • Matthew vander Brook,
• ...
  Counsellors Extraordinary.
  • Iohn Thysz,
  • Iohn van Dam,

After a kind Farewell, the foremention'd Persons return'd ashore.

For the more Honorable carrying on of this Embassy, a Fleet of five Sail, Laden with Presents and Merchandise, and Mann'd with Soldiers and Sea∣men, was fitted out from Batavia, consisting in these Ships, viz.

The Vlaerding, Afen, Constance, Gilded Tygre, and The Blyswiik Frigat, Commanded by Iohn vander Werf. Iohn Naelhout. Iohn Hendricks. Henry Bommer. Peter Iansz.

Several Chineses also Shipp'd themselves in the Fleet, to return to their Na∣tive Countrey, from whence they came some Years before, and had setled themselves in Batavia.

The fourth, being Sunday, in the Morning the Fleet set Sail, and lying by the Lee about the Islands, they staid for some ready Moneys, and other Necessa∣ries, which about seven a clock were brought them by one Simon de Danser, Master of the Exchequer. Then the Fleet weighing Anchor again, ran East∣erly, between the Isles Edam and Alkmaer, that they might have the advantage of the Eastern Mouson (but the Wind, on the contrary, in the Afternoon came

about to the West) and then tack'd to and again, having the Wind about seven a clock at Night to the South-West; then they steer'd their Course Northerly, and so proceeded in the same Course as we have fully mention'd in their for∣mer Journals from Batavia; and therefore we think not fit to trouble the Rea∣der with needless Repetitions of the same things.

The fifth of August about Noon they came to the Netherland-Haven, where a Tartar came aboard of the Ambassador in a small Vessel, who said that he was sent from the Governor of Minjazen, to inquire what People and Ships they were, and also from whence they came, and what Persons of Quality were in them? Whereupon being answer'd accordingly, the Tartar return'd ashore, to give an Accompt thereof, having first inform'd them of the General Lipovi's Death.

The sixth in the Morning, while they still rode at an Anchor, waiting for the Fleet to carry them into the Netherland Haven, there also came a Tartar Vessel aboard, with the third Person of Minjazen, to ask in the Governors Name, What Ships they were, and if an Ambassador was come with them to the Emperor? Whereupon the Ambassador answer'd him accordingly, and also told him, That they intended to send the Master of the Ceremonies, and Mr. Ruwenoort, with the Interpreter De Hase, to Hoksieu, with Letters to the Vice-Roy Singlamong, and the new General which was come from Peking in the deceas'd Lipovi's Place: To whom the Mandarin proffer'd his Service to carry them to Hoksieu, alledging, That he was sent from the Governor for that pur∣pose.

After having receiv'd Thanks from the Ambassador, he return'd with the foremention'd Persons aboard of the Blyswiik, where the Letter was translated into the Chinese Tongue: The Contents were to this purpose.

That this Letter was to advise their Excellencies from the Lord Ambassa∣dor, of the coming of five Ships, laden with several Merchandises, and Pre∣sents for his Majesty, and their Excellencies the Vice-Roy, General, and Con∣bon, or Governor, and likewise of his coming from Batavia in the beginning of the last Month, with the Merchant Constantine Nobel, and their safe Arrival in the beginning of the New Moon before the River of Hoksieu.

Their Highnesses also were desired to permit the Merchant Constantine No∣bel with the first opportunity to come to Hoksieu, to complement their Ex∣cellencies from the Ambassador, and acquaint them with his Intentions.

About Noon the Holland Ambassador arriv'd in safety in the Netherland-Ha∣ven, where he drop'd Anchor with the Vlaerding and Blyswiik, and was visited by the chief Pilot of the Tygre, with a Letter from Hendrick Bommer Master of the Tygre, written to the Ambassador, signifying, That the Pilot beforemen∣tion'd, having been several times in the Netherland-Haven, made no question to bring the Tygre thither; so that he desir'd his Order, because the Ship would be safer there than in the Bay of Sothia. On which the Ambassa∣dor made answer, That he ought to govern himself according to the Agree∣ment made on the fifth Instant, of which the Copy was sent him, and first steer his Course to the Bay of Sothia, till further Order came from above.

The Ambassador observing, That the entring into the Mouth of the River Hoksieu was dangerous, because of the Rocks call'd the Pyramides, commanded all the Masters and Pilots to consult about it, and give their Opinions in Wri∣ting, that other Ships that should come after, might make use thereof.

The seventh against Noon three Mandarins were sent from the new General

Siangpovi, to see how many Ships and Men were come, and likewise what Pre∣sents they had brought, from whence the Ambassador came, and what Retinue he intended should go with him to Peking. But the Ambassador did not think it convenient to inform him of all things, because the Master of the Ceremo∣nies and Interpreter were not yet come from Hoksieu; therefore he told the Mandarins onely, That he was come thither with five Ships, of which three lay in the Bay of Sothia, and two in the Netherland Haven; and that he had four hundred Men aboard: but as to the Presents, he could not readily give an Ac∣count, because he must first unpack them, and then draw an Inventory in Chi∣nese: neither could he yet tell them the Number of the Persons that were to attend him to the Court; but if they pleas'd to stay till to morrow (when he ex∣pected the Master of the Ceremonies and Interpreter would be there) he would resolve them. Then the Mandarins ask'd, If there were no more Ships that had put into other Harbors on the Coast of China? To which they were answer'd No. Then they demanded further, From whom the Lord Ambassador was ad∣dress'd? to which they receiv'd a suitable Answer. The Ambassador had also a Chinese Letter given him from the Governor of Minjazen, the Contents being onely to congratulate his Welcome, which the Ambassador answer'd civilly in like manner. Hereupon the Mandarins departed, saying, they would send one on the Morrow to know the Quantity and Quality of the Presents.

The Ambassador soon after was inform'd by Nobel, That the Mandarin which bore the chief Command over the Jonks that lay there, had understood the day before, that the Emperor was inclin'd to allow the Hollanders and Tartars the Isles Eymuy and Quemuy, to set up their Factories and Trade.

The eighth the Master of the Ceremonies, Mr. Ruwenoort, and the Interpre∣ter De Hase, came aboard again, relating, That they had been at Hoksieu, and there deliver'd the Ambassadors Letters to the Governors: The General, who first granted them Audience, had after the reading of the Letter ask'd them several Questions, as amongst others, Whither they had a Design upon Formosa, or came onely upon Embassy? To which they answer'd, That the Ambassa∣dor was come thither but with five Ships, of which two lay in the Netherland Haven, and three at Tinhay; and that they had no other Design but to wait up∣on the Emperor, according to the Contents of their Credential Letters and Commission. After this, they gave the Conbon or Governor of Hoksieu a Visit, who shew'd himself very joyful at the news of their arrival. And next they visited the General, and gave him an Account of the Ambassadors arrival, who sent two Mandarins to go along them.

About Midnight in their Return they came before the Castle of Minjazen, where they lay till the next Morning, and then desir'd the Governor to fur∣nish them with a Vessel to carry them aboard, to which he very willingly con∣descended.

The ninth Nobel, Harthower, Secretary Vander Does, and the Mandarins which came down the next day in a Pleasure-Boat sent to the Fleet for that purpose, were carried aboard, having a Letter of Advice with them, to make use of when occasion should serve.

The same Day this Present was prepar'd for the Governor of Minjazen.

• A Pair of Pistols,
• A small Quilt,
• Four Pieces of fine Linnen.
• Two Swords,
• Two great Pieces of Sandal-Wood.

From that time nothing happen'd of remark, only some Jonks came to an Anchor close by the Ambassador, to watch the Netherlanders Transactions, as had been done from the beginning, ever since they arriv'd; sometimes fresh Jonks relieving others.

The eleventh in the Morning, the Ambassador sent the Blyswiik's Boat to the Bay of Sothia, with a Letter; by which he Commanded the Captains of the three Ships, the Alfen, Tyger, and Constance, to come to him with the first fair Weather, to consult once more about the bringing in of the Ships to Hoksieu.

The twelfth, the Captains came according to the Ambassadors Letter aboard his Ship in their Sloop, and just at low Water they went with Captain Vander Werff, and Peter Iansz Vlieg, to the River of Hoksieu, to know the Soundings and the breadth of the Channel.

Afternoon, Siangpovi's Interpreter came aboard with some Tartars, to tell the Ambassador, that Nobel Landed the Night before in Hoksieu, and that Horses were provided against the Morning to carry him to the Governors to have Audience. Moreover he told him, that he was sent from the General Siang∣povi, to inquire about the Ambassadors Health, and if he wanted any thing, or if any surly People slighted or neglected, to supply them with what necessa∣ries were fit, and they requir'd.

The Ambassador caus'd his Interpreter De Hase to ask the Tartars, How the Governor of Hoksieu resented the Hollanders, and whether he should be civilly receiv'd? Whereupon he reply'd, That he needed not question his glad Re∣ception.

Furthermore, he doubted not but that they should have all their desires gran∣ted when so er'e they arriv'd at Peking.

The Tartar Interpreter also acquainted the Ambassador, that it would be convenient to invite the Captain of the Jonks that lay to watch to a Treat; which some hours afterwards was perform'd by Putmans, and the Interpreter De Hase; who coming to the Captain, and Mandarin, were kindly entertain'd, with answer, that according to their Requests, they and some other Mandarins would wait upon them the day following: They also sent a Present to the Am∣bassador, of Capons, Geese, and a Vessel of Chinese strong Drink.

Towards Evening, the Masters and Pilots came aboard again to the Am∣bassador, and told him, That he had search'd the Bay of Hoksieu, of which they would give an account in writing, how the Ships should get in and out with most safety, as was done the day following.

In the afternoon the Vlaerdings Boat brought a supply from Hoksieu, of Beeves, Porkers, good Liquor, and several Fruits, with Letters from Nobel, Harthower, and Vander Does, that on the eleventh they were arriv'd at the Bridge of Lamthay; and at their passing by, the Governors of Minjazen Treated them kindly; and at Hoksieu they were presently admitted to the Presence of the Ge∣neral Siangpovi, the Vice-Roy, and the Conbon or Governor.

All these Visits were past with many kindnesses, and upon the delivery of their Letters from Batavia, with an Inventory of the Presents, were told, That the Ambassador was Welcome, and according to his Request should be hono∣rably and kindly Entertain'd, and that he would be pleas'd presently to come ashore, that they might the better inform his Imperial Majesty of his arrival; with which, the Ambassador being acquainted, gave Order for his Landing the next day.

The next day they were to Treat about Commerce, which they suppos'd to be of great Consequence; the more, because by Proclamation every one was on pain of Death forbidden to Trade with the Hollanders without Licence.

When a rumor was spread in Hoksieu, that the Fort Quelang in Formosa had been Besieg'd two Moneths by three thousand Tayowan Chineses; but at last were forc'd to Retreat to Tamsuy, with the loss of their General, &c.

The fifteenth, being Sunday, nothing happen'd of remark to the Ambassa∣dor, but onely expected further Tydings from Nobel, and his other Friends in Hoksieu.

The sixteenth, four Mandarins came from the General Siangpovi and the Con∣bon, sent to the Ambassador to Present him with an hundred and twenty Cana∣sters, or four Tun of Rice, thirty couple of Capons, as many Ducks, forty great Vessels of their best Drink, six fat Beeves, twenty Porkers, a Score and a half of Geese, and a hundred Water-Lemons.

Because the Name of Chinese Beer will be often us'd, it will be requisite to give a short Description of it.

THe Drinks which the Chineses use are many: The first call'd Samfoe, or Sampe, made of Rice, is of a clear Colour, like white Wine; wherefore they also name it, Sampe, signifying pure White.

The second call'd Looszioe, is of a brown Colour like Dutch Beer, of a plea∣sant Taste, but very strong.

The third nam'd Tzonzui, and by some held for the best and strongest Li∣quor in all China; is of a bright Brown, very clear, and resembles Brunswick-Mum, yet tastes like Sack, and as strong in its Operation.

Which Liquor Vulgarly the Hollanders generally call Mandarins and Chi∣nese Beer.

The fourth being a sort of Distill'd Water, is call'd Hotzioe, and is not only clearer, but much stronger than Brandy, therefore by the Netherlanders call'd Strong Arak.

The fifth Drink is call'd Kietzjoe, and by the Hollanders Kniep; and is also a Water Distill'd, yet not so strong as the former, of a ruddy Colour, and much drank in the Chinese and Holland Ships, during their stay on the Coast of China.

Most of all these Liquors are made and Extracted out of Rice.

They say, That in the Emperor Yu's Raign, above two thousand Years be∣fore* 1.1 the Birth of our Savior, this famous Chinese Drink, Extracted of Rice, was first made: The Inventer thereof was call'd Ilie, who having Presented the Emperor with the new and pleasant Liquor, when he had well tasted it, said, What great Misfortune hath brought this Drink into the Realm? Now I foresee the fall of my Family, and the ruine of the Empire by this inebriating Drink: Whereupon, he straight, instead of reward and honoring him for his happy Invention, being such an assistant to weaken Nature, banish'd him the Em∣pire for ever; and Commanded further upon pain of Death, that none should imitate or experiment the same: But though Yu Banish'd the first finder, yet he could not prevent the Art of making it, from spreading through his whole Dominions.

Besides these Drinks, there is an ordinary sort boyl'd of the Root Tee, or Cha; and likewise another, by the Netherlanders call'd Bean Broth, which, as some say, is Milk mixt with Peking Butter.

The Chineses also Press several sorts of Juyces, or Wines out of Fruit; as among other out of the Fruit Lichi.

Yet in no place, do they know any Liquor made of Grapes; that kind of Tope only belonging to the Province of Xensi, though they have store of Grapes and Vineyards in other parts of China; for the Chineses either dry or Preserve their Grapes, to eat them in Winter, which they do by Boyling in a great Pot, and then pour dissolv'd Sugar upon them.

Upon the delivery of the foremention'd Presents, Singlamong was not once made mention of, which occasion'd some jealous thoughts.

And now, because the Ambassador expected that he should Land shortly, he made an Order for his Attendants, and Information to the Comptroller, to be observ'd at his Landing, thereby to shun all Confusions, according to which every one was to govern himself.

Orders for the Attendants of the Embassy.

OF what concern this Embassy is, every one may apprehend: How circum∣spectly it ought to be perform'd, in respect to our selves; and also how much Honor and Profit our Nation may reap by it, cannot be sufficiently express'd.

Therefore since the good Orders, Vertue, and fair Carriage of the Persons that shall attend us, must be observ'd and maintain'd as the Chief Point, it may be judg'd what care and diligence ought to be us'd in it, that our bad Conversation may not hinder a good Event.

This being consider'd of, we have thought it necessary and fitting to pre∣scribe some short Orders to all our Followers, with express Commands, that every one shall exactly observe them upon their Perils.

• I. Coming ashore, every one shall go to the appointed place, without separating himself, or going from the Train without special Orders from the Ambassador.
• II. Every one shall look to his Office, and be diligent and careful in what he is imploy'd.
• III. None shall go out of the Ambassadors Lodging, without his, or the Secretaries knowledge.
• IV. The Comptroller Ruwenoort shall have the second Command over the Gentlemen and Soldiers, but no Power to send any one out, or Discharge him without the Secretaries knowledge, who shall, if it be requisite, acquaint the Ambassador therewith.
• V. Every one, of what Degree soever, shall have a special care, and abstain from too much Drinking and Quarrelling, which oftentimes arise from it, on forfeiture of three Months Wages the first time, and the second, of all his Pay, loss of his Place, and be sent to Batavia; he that shall occasion a Quarrel or Contest between any Person, shall receive the same Punishment.
• VI. Every person shall carry himself very humble, and be bare headed in the Ambassa∣dors Presence; as also, the Gentlemen, Soldiers, and other Officers shall be Dutiful and Obedient; but above all, be very Courteous and kind to the Chineses.
• VII. Putmans being Master of the Gifts and Presents, shall have a great care of the packing and dividing of them, that they may be look'd after and secur'd from spoiling, or Rain, and keep an exact account of all, by entring them down in a Book of Presents; he shall also, as Master of the Ceremonies, observe that good Orders he kept in that concern.
• VIII. On the Ringing of a Bell ashore, or by the way, every one shall come to Prayers

• in his peculiar place, which shall be in the Evening at seven a Clock, perform'd by the Secre∣tary or some Person else, on forfeiture of a Rix-Doller, for those that without great reason stay from it.

Information for the Comptroller.

I. OF the Comptroller is requir'd, that he take upon him a Grave Formality, neither shew∣ing a lightness in his Behavior or Conversation, and justly to pay every one their Due; he is to be Governor of the Gentlemen, Clerks, Assistants, and Soldiers, and so necessarily requir'd to be a good Example in Vertue to others; and also to be Courteous and Civil to all Persons, especially to the Chineses and Tartars, with whom lies our greatest Concern.

II. The Comptrollers Office and Government shall consist in Domestick Affairs, that all things may be done orderly, and kept clean; to which purpose are allow'd him as Assistants, Frents, as Chief Butler, and Banning as Steward, who shall act in their Offices accord∣ing to Putman's Direction, and take care not to wast and lavish, but to see that nothing be lost: Also two Assistants more are allow'd Putman, to look after all the Travelling Utensils and Necessaries, viz. Cuiper, and Van Altern, which shall look to the Bed∣ding, Housholdstuff, and other things thereto belonging, and keep an exact account there∣of, at the Shipping or using, that they may not be damnifi'd, that when the Ambassador shall resolve to Land, or go, and come from one place to another, and the Secretary acquainting them with it, they shall presently order the getting of them ready.

Three Tables shall daily be kept and furnish'd at twelve a Clock at Noon, and eight at Night, viz.

The first Table being the Ambassadors, shall be Oval, with room for eight or ten Persons; at this shall Eat the Ambassador; at his right Hand Nobel, Putman's, and Vander Doe's the Secretary; at his left Hand, Iohn Van Hoorn, the Ambassadors Son, and as many more Plates shall be laid ready for Strangers. This Table shall be attended by the Comptroller Ruwenoort, who must stand behind the Ambassador; besides two Gentlemen, viz. Frents, and Doornik; at every Course serving up, the Trumpeters shall Sound, and betwixt, the other Musicians play.

The second, being the Comptrollers Table, Mr. Ruwenoort shall sit, with six Gentlemen, who shall all be attended by the Negro Boys, except a Soldier to Wait upon the Comptroller.

The third Table shall consist in six of the prime of our Guard, the Inter∣preter and Master-Cook, who rising, the under Waiters shall take the re∣mainder.

About the Dressing of the Meat, and the quantity, great care must be us'd. To which purpose Putmans, the Secretary Vander Does, and the Comptrol∣ler Ruwenoort shall first consult about the Bill of Fare, and then give or∣der for it.

Every Week the Comptroller shall deliver a Bill of his Charge to the Secre∣tary, which when look'd over, shall be enter'd in their due places.

Berkman shall be as Master of the Horse, and therefore is to look over them, that they have their Provender in due season, and that it be good and not Musty; and likewise be careful of their Furniture, that all things may be kept clean and in repair.

At their Landing and going up to the Court at Hoksieu this order shall be observ'd:

First, Two Trumpets shall Ride before, then six Soldiers with Carbines and Swords, next Captain Vander Werf, and Pilot Peter Iansz de Vlieg, then the

Lord Ambassador himself; after him Bekmans and Iohn Dubon Halberdiers; Iohn Van Hoorn, the Ambassadors Son; Nobel and Putmans; Vander Does and Ruwenoort; after these the six Gentlemen, Banning, Ruysser, Berkman, Van Alteren, Frents, Van Doorn, and lastly, Hans and Sluiter.

The same day nothing happen'd of remark, only the General Povi's Inter∣preter came to visit the Ambassador, and tell him, That the Vessels which were to take in the Steeds, would either come that Night, or early in the Morning.

The following day, soon after Sun-rising, the foremention'd Interpreter, with two Captains belonging to the Jonks, came aboard of the Ambassador, to acquaint him of the two Vessels arrival, to fetch the Emperors Presents, the Horses and Oxen.

After some Discourse it was concluded, That the foremention'd Captains should the next Ebb go and fetch the Horses with their great Jonks; to which purpose, the Comptroller Ruwenoort was sent with them.

In the afternoon, the Ambassadors Boat came again from above the River, with the Secretary Vander Does, who besides his own Relations, brought two Letters, one from Nobel alone, and the other Sign'd by three, in which was written, That they had acquainted his Highness of the Ambassadors intentions to Land, whereupon they had obtain'd leave to send the Secretary Vander Does with the Boat.

In which were also brought a dozen Porkers, four Baskets with Artichokes, two with Cucumbers, and fifty Pots of a 2.1 Chamchoe; and that it was conclu∣ded, that twelve Men should first go ashore with the Ambassador, and that he should bring the Emperors Letter with him.

By the same Letters they also inform'd him, That the General had desir'd them to procure some Glasses, Quilts, Blood-Coral, and several other things for him which they had aboard, and could have wish'd, that they had been Shipt uppermost, because his Favor was of great concern, and they might do some good with him by the way of Presents, as they were inform'd, he being of a more affable Character than his Predecessor. And Nobel and Harthower told him, That the Ambassador was not concern'd in the Trade, but it was intrust∣ed wholly to them; so that without doubt, the Ambassador would not be troubled about it; therefore they would on this first undertaking so prosecute their business, that it might tend to his Honor; so that they desir'd he would please to leave it to their care. They added further, that they esteem'd them∣selves happy by the Ambassadors grave counsel to be provided against the Chi∣neses Treachery. In the Trade nothing was to be done, but to use care and prudence, as in former times. If they intended to effect any thing, they must wait, yet not depend too much upon it. The Jonks which were should the Horses at Minjazen, were judg'd to be unfit to go to Sothia; therefore the Tar∣tars desir'd, that they might be brought into the Netherland Haven, in one of the Ships, from whence they would convey them up the River.

The Governors had lately chosen a place on the other side of the River, where they intended to request of the Emperor, that the Hollanders might build a Store-house; but they knew not whether it was done out of their own incli∣nation, or by the Emperors Order, (which perhaps had long since granted it.) They were inform'd, that about eight or ten days since, a Mastless Vessel ran into the Storm-Bay, and soon after went away again, and that the Comman∣ders of her said, that they were sent from Batavia to Iapan, and likewise that

an Ambassador was come thither with nine Ships; by which they suppos'd, that it was the Newpoort, because no other Ships knew of the Ambassadors coming.

There went also a rumor, That some Portuguese Ships were arriv'd at Makaw, and of an Ambassadors going to Peking, that came over in them.

The single Letter from Nobel was to this purpose: That Hopes and a good Heart was half their Business, and he much rejoyc'd at what the Ambassador had been pleas'd to write; but nothing more concern'd him, than the pro∣moting and making the Embassy more Honorable, that it might be perform'd with all fitting Splendor and Magnificence, of which there were fair appear∣ances. But because nothing could be assur'd from the Chineses looks, therefore time must produce it.

They declar'd, that all the Governors were exceedingly rejoyc'd at the Am∣bassadors coming, and had never shown such great incouragements to their Design.

The nineteenth, the great Jonk which went the same day to fetch the Hor∣ses, return'd, and brought a Letter from the Commander to this effect.

That that Morning he had receiv'd the Ambassadors Order, for the sending of the Horses and Oxen; according to which he had Shipt them in the Jonks, with three Chests full of Saddles, all in good condition, and that at their put∣ting off, he had fir'd seven Guns in Honor of the Emperor, and the Ambassa∣dor, which he hop'd he would opprove off.

His Excellency Commanded Ruwenoort, that so soon as it was Flood, he should go up with the Horses to Hocksieu, which was perform'd accordingly; and the Ambassador writ a Letter to Nobel and Harthouwer, advising them, that he had receiv'd theirs by the Secretary, and prepar'd himself to go in the expected Vessels to Hoksieu; and in the mean while, had sent the Horses and Oxen, as also their Saddles, and the Coach provided for the Emperor.

The twentieth, nothing happen'd of remark.

The one and twentieth in the Morning, two Pleasure-Boats came with three Mandarins, two from the Vice-Roy and General, and one from the Go∣vernor of Minjazen, to attend and bring in the Ambassador, who desir'd two days for the fitting and accommodating all things for his more convenient Landing.

The three and twentieth in the Morning, the two Pleasure-Boats before∣mention'd, that came with the three Mandarins, were ready to take in the Am∣bassador, but prov'd much too little to carry him, his Attendants and Goods up the River. And because they proffer'd as many Jonks on the one and twen∣tieth as he should need, therefore they were desir'd to procure one more, which they scrupling, he said he had been told, that they were a well Go∣vern'd Nation, and therefore wonder'd that they kept not their own promise, that he should have as many as he needed; therefore he would send one up to Hoksieu to fetch written Orders from the General, according to which he would Govern himself. Upon the news thereof, without any more ado, they sent a Jonk to carry his Goods, or any thing else; whereupon he gave Order for the Shipping of his Goods and Attendants.

At Noon, the Ambassador Imbark'd himself to go up to Hoksieu, and about three a Clock arriv'd at Minjazen; of which place the Governor sent him a Complemental Letter, informing him of his indispos'dness, which prevented him from giving the civility of a meeting. Moreover, he caus'd the Ambassa∣dor

and his Retinue to be Entertain'd with a 2.2 Bean-Broth, and Bak'd Meats.

The Governor of Minjazen also sent to desire the Ambassador to stay some short time, because he would send a Letter with him; and soon after, some Mandarins coming aboard said, That they were sent from the Governor to search all Chests and Trunks, which was so ill resented by the Ambassador, that he said with a displeas'd Countenance, the Mandarins had promis'd him, That his Goods should without trouble or molestation be deliver'd; and if they could not, he would rather return aboar'd, than suffer such affronts, which words made them wave their receiv'd Orders; yet he went away in the Even∣ing without a Letter. The Ambassador, by reason of the Ebb meeting him, was forc'd to Anchor at Lamthay, and about Flood setting forward again, about Day light arriv'd at the Bridge of Lamthay. Here the Mandarins went to ac∣quaint the General of the Ambassadors arrival, and also to know, if it pleas'd his Highness, that he should first go into the Netherlanders Inn, or come to his Highness: The Ambassador also made his coming immediately known to No∣bel and Harthouwer, who came to welcome him; of whom he demanding, in what Postures Affairs stood; They told him, they had no present cause of dis∣satisfaction, because the last Night Singlamong's Secretary had come and told them, that seven hundred Bales of Silk lay in store, which were to be ex∣chang'd for the Netherland Commodities, and also that Singlamong would have half a share in the Trade; The General two third parts in the other half, and the Conbon a third part.

The four and twentieth, after several Houses shewn, and deny'd, a Manda∣rin came to ask if the Ambassador would be pleas'd to send one of his Servants to see the House which was chosen for him. Whereupon he sent Nobel, Putmans, and Ruwenoort to the General, to desire him, to give Order for a House.

The Mandarins which had fetch'd the Ambassador, and were that Morning gone to the General, to make his coming known, return'd with Horses to con∣duct him to the Vice-Roy Singlamong.

And Nobel, Putmans, and Ruwenoort came with the foremention'd Mandarins, to tell the Ambassador, that a House was making ready for him; also that his Highness expected him at Court, and before the Ambassador should have done his business with his Highness, the House would be ready.

The General also said, That if they had known of the Ambassadors coming from Batavia before hand, the Emperor would have given Order for the build∣ing a new House.

And accordingly, although it Rain'd very hard, yet the Ambassador prepar'd himself to go to his Highness.

First, between the sound of several Instruments, he was conducted to the Vice-Roy Singlamong, who bad him Welcome, and shew'd him to sit on a Bench at his left Hand, (by the Tartar accounted the upper) and next him Nobel, Harthouwer, Putmans, and the Secretary Vander Does, on a piece of Cloth spread on the Ground.

Then the Vice-Roy wish'd the Ambassador much joy, for which the Am∣bassador with many Ceremonies thank'd him; so that this first Visit ended on∣ly in Coplements.

He at last ask'd, If he had about him the Letter from his King to their Em∣peror; and also, that with the first opportunity, they should give an account to the General, how many Chests and Trunks they wanted to carry up their Goods, that they might be got ready against the appointed time.

And likewise, that the General might give Order for the Jonks and Vessels to fetch the Presents for the Emperor ashore: To which the Ambassador an∣swer'd, That he had not brought the Letter with him, because of the badness of the Weather, but his Highness might Command it when he pleas'd; the number of Cases and Chests, he would also give an account of, as they had occasion, and so soon as they could come at the Presents, acquaint his High∣ness with it.

Moreover, The Ambassador desir'd the Vice-Roy's advice, and instruction in this Embassy, which he would be sure to observe, and other such like Discour∣ses. To which the Vice-Roy answer'd, That he would invite the Ambassador to his Court, and then they would further consult concerning all affairs.

From thence they went to the General, who enquired after the Ambassadors Health, and how all Friends far'd in Batavia? To which the Ambassador an∣swer'd, and return'd him Thanks for sending the Mandarins to fetch him in, and also for the fresh Provisions. Then he ask'd the same question as the Vice-Roy had done before, whereon the Ambassador reply'd, That the Goods which were to be sold, lay upon the Presents; but he would give Order to Nobel to fetch them up, that they might be seen, and if they were damnifi'd, they should immediately be shown to his Highness; which said, his Highness was well satisfi'd, saying, That he would then write concerning it to the Court at Pe∣king. The Ambassador also desir'd his Highness's advice, because he knew not the Customs and Fashions of the Countrey.

Moreover the Ambassador said, That he would on the Morrow present his Highness with some Glasses, and other such like Rarities, which he desir'd he would please to accept. His Highness inquir'd also of the Ambassador, if he had left good Orders on board, that his People us'd no Outrages, nor carry'd any Goods privately ashore; to which, the Ambassador said, Yes, and if any one should break such Orders, he should be severely punish'd.

The General shew'd the Ambassador two Mandarins, which (said he) shall wait upon you, when I intend to acquaint you with any thing of consequence, therefore desir'd him to grant them Audience. On which the Ambassador ta∣king leave, was intreated by his Highness to Eat with him first, which was perform'd, and at Table said, That he would with the first opportunity in∣vite the Ambassador to his Court, to Discourse with him concerning the Embassy.

From hence they went to the Conbon, whither they came about the Evening, and were kindly receiv'd and bid Welcome by him.

Moreover, the Conbon said, That the Ambassadors coming would prove an advantagious business to them, promising to assist him in all things he would desire. Whereupon the Ambassador taking leave, came to his Lodging about eight a Clock; about ten arose a mighty Storm out of the North, which last∣ed till Midnight.

The twenty fifth in the Morning, they receiv'd the bad news, that the Jonks Laden with all their Travelling Necessaries was cast away, driven from the Anchor, and shatter'd in pieces against the Bridge of Lamthay. But Putmans and the Secretary were sent to see what could be sav'd of the Damnifi'd Goods. Towards Noon, the Vice-Roy and General sent them in all sorts of Kitchin Provision, of what the Countrey afforded, and some Vessels of their best Liquor.

The General sent likewise a Pass to the Ambassador, for the fetching ashore the Emperors Presents; to which the Ambassador reply'd, That it could not be done before he Traded: But the Mandarin answer'd, That it must be, or else the General could not write to Peking: Whereupon the Ambassador told him, That he would visit the General on the morrow, and discourse with him about it; on which he went away.

Next Morning Captain Putmans went to Complement his Highness Singla∣mong, and in the Ambassadors Name to present him with some Rarities, who himself was ready to repair to the Court, where a Mandarin gave him notice, That he was immediately expected; whither instantly going, and after some Complements had pass'd, he deliver'd him the Copy of the Letter to his Im∣perial Majesty, with a List of the Persons Names that were to go to Peking with him; and also a Schedule, being an Abstract of the Embassy, which was to this purpose.

That the Lord General Maetzuiker and the Council of India say, That the Hollanders look upon it as the best way of effecting Business, to be just, and endeavor Friendship; which hath been hitherto attested by all People that have dealt with us, either upon the score of Alliance, Commerce, or both: But the way of Traffique is look'd upon as the best Foundation, whence sprouting, it may grow up and branch like a Tree, so to enrich each other in Peace, and assist in all Exigencies of War.

That the Hollanders have many years endeavor'd both Traffick and Alli∣ance with the Chineses; to which purpose the General and Council of India ten years since sent their Ambassadors with Presents to the Emperor in Pe∣king, which were kindly receiv'd, and his Majesty accepted of the Hollanders as Friends, and declar'd them so publickly.

The Hollanders have now again by the Lord General and Indian Council address'd their Ambassador with Presents to the Emperor, with hearty wish∣es, That his Imperial Majesty may live for ever, and that this their desir'd Affinity may last as long as the Sun and Moon endureth.

The Ambassador desires of the Vice-Roy, General, and Conbon, That they would assist him in this Negotiation, because their Mediation may facilitate, and so the sooner effect the Business.

This being translated, was, together with a Copy of the Batavian Missives to the Emperor, presented unto the General, who after inquiry concerning the brave Horses and Oxen which were to be given to the Emperor, desiring to see them, they fell into other Discourses concerning the Presents, and about land∣ing the Merchandise, upon which there had like to have hapned some Con∣trast; but the Ambassadors discretion seasonably broke it off, and so depart∣ing, went from thence to the Vice-Roy, where they were conducted through another Gate than they went the day before, into the Inner Court, or Privy Chamber, in which the Ambassador, after having shew'd Reverence to the Vice-Roy, was by him bid to sit on his left Hand, on a small Bench, and next him his Prime Officers; to all whom the Vice-Roy seem'd to be somewhat more affable than the General, saying, That the Hollanders were now no Strangers, and that he had been acquainted with them in Canton, and done them several good Offices in their Negotiation there; and that he was as rea∣dy now to serve them as heretofore, especially because a Person of greater Quality was imploy'd with like Addresses to his Imperial Majesty. Where∣upon the Ambassador modestly reply'd, That he had been well inform'd of

his Highness former Affection and Favor to their Nation at Canton, and also of the late continuation of the same Civility and Goodness to Constantine Nobel, ever since his residing there, for which he return'd him especial Thanks, not doubting but he would keep up his Hospitable Character to Strangers, in as∣sisting them in this their present Embassy, in which they desir'd nothing but what was Just and Honorable, and might be beneficial to both Nations: Which he promis'd very seriously, and that he would write in the Ambassadors behalf to all his Correspondents in the Council of State at Peking: Then the Vice-Roy inquiring in the same manner as the other did about the Presents and the Lading, the Ambassador fearing that some Contest might arise, as formerly with the General, waved the Dispute, onely replying, That they would be all ready in good Season; but the Merchandise he did not concern himself with: Whereupon the Vice-Roy said, Well, let it pass; but desir'd the Ambassador to lend him his Chyrurgeon for a day or two, which he pro∣mis'd, when Dinner being upon the Table, breaking off all further Discourse, the Vice-Roy desir'd them to sit at his own Table, on his left Hand, which is there the chief place, where they did eat in the same Dish, and drank in the same Bowl with the Vice-Roy: So having been plentifully treated, they took their leave, and return'd to their Lodging.

At their going away, two Mandarins follow'd the Ambassador, telling him, That the Vice-Roy return'd him many Thanks for the Presents which he had sent in the Morning, but durst not receive them as yet; therefore he desir'd him to send for them home till they went to Peking: Whereto the Ambassador made Answer, That they were onely a few Trifles for his Children; and de∣sir'd that they would please to proffer them once more to his Highness, which they promis'd to do; but however, towards Evening they were return'd again with the same Excuse.

Next Morning, being the twenty seventh, the Ambassador consulted with his Council of what had hapned to him the day before, and ask'd what was further to be done for the advancing of this great Embassy; and also read over the Instructions given him in Batavia: after which, having seriously con∣sider'd, they unanimously concluded and agree'd, That Nobel and Harthouwer should that Morning go to the General, to tell his Highness, That the Ambas∣sador endeavoring to satisfie him in all Points whatsoever, therefore desir'd that the Blyswiik and two Jonks might come up thither with the Merchandise and Presents, and that then he should receive them.

But whilst they were yet busie about this their Resolution, three Mandarins came to desire Nobel to come to the Vice-Roy, where the General also expect∣ed him; thither he and Harthouwer went immediately.

At this time the Governor of Soansifoe sent the Ambassador as a Present a couple of fat Oxen, besides other good Kitchen Provision.

Mean while Nobel and Harthouwer came back from the Court, and related, That they still desir'd that the Merchandise and Presents might be brought ashore; which they excus'd, urging the several Inconveniences; but told them that all should be done in good time, when the Presents and Frigats might by unlading be least damnified, concerning which they would come and Treat with his Highness to Morrow.

The twenty eighth in the Morning, about day-light, the Secretary carried the Message to the General, who at his return told, That having staid an Hour ere he was admitted to his Presence, and having complemented his Highness

in the Ambassadors Name, he answer'd him roughly, saying in a teasty man∣ner, That he had spoke with the Ambassador two days since, and granted him as many Jonks as he desir'd, for the unloading of his Goods; and come you now to ask more? Let it be so (said he); I will supply them with Twenties, and if that will not serve, with Hundreds; but in brief, none of their Ships shall come up the River. Tell your Master (continu'd he) that I am a Man that keep my Word, no Promise-breaker; therefore what I grant, they may be as∣sur'd of. I know that you are come hither from remote Countreys, through long and turbulent Seas, with Ships freighted with Merchandise; How then should I be so inhumane as not to serve you in what I may towards the ac∣complishing of your Desires? But first land your Presents, and when I have seen them, I will write in your behalf to Peking. And the more to manifest my good Intentions, and the Love I have for the Ambassador, I will suffer one of his Ships to come up to the Bridge, but accompanied with my Jonks; for which Favor the Secretary return'd him thanks in the Ambassadors Name, promising to give his Master an Account thereof.

The Ambassador order'd Nobel and Harthower to go to the General so soon as it was possible, and thanking him for his Kindness, further to request a Pass to bring up the Blyswiik Frigat, and send two Mandarins to help them, that all things might be done according to his desire.

The twenty ninth in the Morning the Comptroller Ruwenoort went with the Chyrurgeon Hans Voorechter to the Court, to carry their Highnesses the follow∣ing Letters, and desire their Answers. The first being to the Vice▪Roy Singla∣mong, contain'd,

That the Ambassador had sent his Chyrurgeon to his High∣ness Service.

The rest was written to the same purpose with the other three, viz.

That the Ambassador desir'd to know when his Highness pleas'd to accept of a Visit, and treat about the Embassy.

The thirtieth nothing hapned of Remark.

Next Morning two of the Generals Officers came to the Ambassador, and in their Lords Name privately proffer'd him three hundred Tail (which they had brought with them) for the Chain of Blood-Corral and Quilt, Goods which he desir'd to be sent; on which the Ambassador smiling, return'd, That he was no Merchant, neither bought nor sold; but if the General would please to accept of those Trifles as a Present, he would take their Reception as a high Honor; and if his Highness hereafter might have a fancy to buy any Goods belonging to the Hollanders, that their Merchant Nobel should furnish him: With which Answers the foremention'd Persons return'd, to give an Account thereof to the General.

In the Afternoon the Vice-Roys Officers return'd with many Thanks to the Ambassador for his Presents, which his Highness had kindly receiv'd, and as a grateful Return, had sent him eight Pieces of Chinese Brocadoes, which they desir'd the Ambassador to accept, and he courteously receiv'd, though not va∣lued at above eighty Tail of Silver.

In the Evening after Prayer the Comptroller Ruwenoort deliver'd his first Ac∣compt of Charges and Expence, which the Ambassador gave to Putmans and the Secretary Vander Does to look over, and also to inquire if the Provision should be brought in by greater quantities than they us'd to have it before, it might not be had at a cheaper Rate; thereby to be as saving as they could.

The first and second of September nothing hapned worthy recounting.

The third in the Morning the Vice-Roy Singlamong's Intepreter sent the Chi∣nese

Gienso to ask the Ambassador when he pleas'd to come to visit his High∣ness, and shew him the brave Horses, that he might give his Lord an Account of it; Whereupon he was answer'd, That it was left to the Choice and Plea∣sure of his Highness, and that the Ambassador was always ready at his Com∣mand.

In the Afternoon two of the Vice-Roys chief Factors came to Nobel, and told him, That they had Order from his Highness to ask if the Company de∣sir'd to have much White Raw Silk; which if they had, his Highness would endeavor to perswade the General, because the Transportation was strictly forbidden by the Emperor; and that it might be observ'd, five Persons of Qua∣lity were sent into every Territory bordering the Sea, from Peking; so that it would be very difficult to get their Consents: Therefore they ask'd (a Price never heard of) two hundred and fifty Tail for a Picol, desiring to have an An∣swer upon it immediately, that they might give an Account to his Highness. Whereto Nobel made answer, That notwithstanding the time did not permit to send to Japan, yet they would exchange those Merchandises which they had brought with them, for a Parcel of Silk, to carry to their Native Countrey; but he would have them to know, not at such Prices; and therefore if they would not come nearer to the matter, he would neither Treat about it, nor make any Proffer, desiring them to be better advis'd: Whereupon they re∣ply'd, That they had no other Order, and therefore desir'd the Hollanders to consider of it, and so let it rest for that time.

Mean while the General and Conbon's Factors also came thither, but made no mention of the foremention'd Business. The Ambassador to oblige them, and that they might seek to get their Masters to affect the Hollanders, invited them to Dinner; which ending, they, after they had been handsomly treated, with kind Thanks took their leaves.

Not long after the General also sent two Mandarins to tell the Ambassador, That he had been inform'd how the Hollanders in the Netherland Haven would not hasten the unlading of the Emperors Presents as they should, because they had onely loaden three Jonks full of Merchandise, and would not make use of the other Jonks, which made their Highnesses doubt (as they said) whether the Ambassador would go up to Peking, or not: They had writ to the Emperor of the Ambassadors arrival; but now they must assure him, that they had seen the Presents; therefore they desir'd a second time, that his Excellency would please to send Order to the Ships, with one of their Vessels, that they might immediately go about that Business: On which they were answer'd, That such Orders had already been given, and that their Highnesses need not doubt of the care and diligence that should be us'd in the Embassy; yet however, that he was inclin'd for their satisfaction to send another Letter thither, which they promising to tell the General, took their leave.

The fourth against the Evening four Jonks with Pepper arriv'd at the Bridge at Lamthay, which they had taken out of the Blyswiik and Vlaerding Fri∣gats. The Persons that came with them gave an Account, That the Blyswiik Frigat lay at Anchor between the Tower and the Bridge of Lamthay, and hop'd that before the next Morning she would also come up to the Bridge; and like∣wise that the Constance was come safe into the Netherland Haven, and that all things were in good Condition with the Ships, which the Ambassador was glad to hear.

The same day two Mandarins came to the Ambassador in the Generals name,

to inquire how many Men there were in the Blyswiik Frigat? If any Soldiers came in her? And why they brought so many? To which they were answer'd, That there were no Soldiers in her, and but forty seven Men in all, which were requir'd to govern the Ship, and other Employments: Whereupon they return'd.

Mean while two eminent Mandarins sent from the General came to look after the unlading of the Goods, for which the Hollanders prepar'd Boats and other Vessels. The foremention'd Mandarins said also, That if the Ship did not come up to the Bridge that day, they would on the morrow fetch out the Presents with their Barques, and then send her down again to fetch others.

All the Factors belonging to his Highness, except the chiefest, came likewise to tell Nobel, That their Masters had agreed to deliver their Silks to the Com∣pany; and that it was now time to Trade, because some Commissioners were expected daily from Peking, at whose coming there would be no likelihood to transport one Catty of Silk: Whereto Nobel made answer, That he would wil∣lingly deal with them, but he must first see the Silk, and likewise agree about the Merchandise; but if they demanded two hundred and fifty Tail, as they had done the third Instant, it would not be worth the speaking of it. They having (as they said) no other Order, departed.

On the twenty ninth of July a Fly-boat nam'd the Poelsnip, the thirtieth, the Nieuport Pink; and the fifth of August, the Overveen, came thither without their Masts, which they had lost in a Storm about the Macaw Islands, and going after∣wards to repair their Breaches at the Isle of Quemuy, the Tartar-Chineses told the Commanders, That the Coxingan-Chineses had Besieg'd Quelang; and many other things concerning that Isle.

The sixth in the Morning two Mandarins came to tell the Ambassador from the General, That the Governor of Minjazen had advis'd him▪ that another Dutch Ship had arriv'd in the Netherland Haven, which made his Highness de∣sirous to know what Ship it was, and if it came from Quelang, which if it did, it should immediately return.

In answer to which, they were told, That the Occasion of the coming of this Ship would be made known to his Highness by a Letter which was wri∣ting.

According to the Resolution taken the last Night, the Secretary went to the Court to deliver the Letter, the Contents whereof were to this effect.

That the Ambassador could not but acquaint their Excellencies, That a small Ship was arriv'd there from Quelang, bringing News, That four Months since the Coxingans had Besieg'd the Fort there, but were beaten off with great loss: Then he desir'd that he might send the said Ship again to Quelang with some Necessaries, as Tar, Kadjang, Timber, and the like Necessaries. And lastly, That all diligence was now us'd to get the Emperors Presents ashore, the greatest part of them being already arriv'd at the Bridge in the small Holland Vessel; concerning which, or ought else, he would be glad to speak with their Highnesses, when they pleas'd to command him.

The Secretary came first to the General; but he having some Mandarins with him, could not in Person grant him Audience, but sent one of his Factors to the Secretary for the Letter, which was given him, and a speedy Answer de∣sir'd upon it.

After an hours stay, the foremention'd Factor came to the Secretary, to present him in the Generals Name with a Cup of Bean-broth, and tell him in

answer to the Letter, That so soon as the Mandarins (that were with his High∣ness) went away, he would consult on their Request, and acquaintthe Am∣bassador with his Resolution by his Mandarins.

From hence the Secretary went to the Vice-Roy Singlamong, where the Let∣ter, as at the Generals, was receiv'd by a Servant, under pretence, That the Vice-Roy being indispos'd, could not grant him Audience.

An Hour after, the Interpreter came also to give the Secretary a Cup of Bean-broth, and tell him, That the Vice-Roy had understood the Ambassa∣dor's Mind by his Letter, and had granted his Request, nay, would have done it, had it been of greater concernment; but the Hollanders must first seek the Generals Consent, which he doubted not but they might easily obtain: Where∣upon the Secretary acquainted his Highness with the General's Answer, who said, That it was well, and he would speak with him about it.

His Highness also caus'd him to be ask'd, Why the Horses and Oxen were not brought to his Court, since he had a great fancy to see them? and to de∣sire that it might be done about two days after. To which the Secretary re∣ply'd, That it was true, they had promis'd his Highness; but he had sent word, That they should refer it till all the Presents were ashore, and that then he would see them together: Whereupon his Highness told them, That the Ge∣neral had made that Answer, and not He; and therefore desir'd, as before, to see them, whether the Presents were ashore or not, two days thence: Which the Secretary promis'd to acquaint the Ambassador with; and rising to de∣part, two Mandarins came from the General, to inform the Vice-Roy of the Ambassadors Request, so that he was commanded to stay a little. The Manda∣rins going away again, the Vice-Roy sent him word, That the General had un∣derstood that those of Quelang were by the Netherlanders furnish'd with Provisi∣ons and Water; but as for the transporting of Timber, Stones, Tiles, and Nails, it could not be granted: However he had prevail'd so much, (alledging that they were but Trifles, which since Quelang had been besieg'd, were wanting for the Repairing of the Houses) that by the said Mandarins they had in the Ge∣nerals Name granted the Ambassadors Request; for which Kindness the Secre∣tary humbly thanking his Highness in the Ambassadors Name, took his leave.

In the Afternoon two Mandarins came again to the Ambassador, to give him an Answer to his Request which he had made in the Morning, which they deliver'd, after some Complements, in this manner: That the Netherlanders were Licensed to transport what Provisions they had desir'd, Timber and Nails excepted, to which his Highness could not consent; which contradict∣ed that which the Vice-Roys Interpreter had told the Secretary, viz. That the General and the Vice-Roy had permitted it: But there were daily Commissio∣ners expected from Peking, to search those Havens; and that his Highness did not doubt but they would grant it him.

Towards Evening the Blyswiik Frigat arriv'd at the Bridge of Lamthay, with the Presents: The Ambassador also sent a Letter, with the Constance's Boat, to the Merchant David Harthouwer, informing him, That the four Jonks laden with Pepper out of the Vlaerding and Blyswiik, arriv'd there yesterday, but were not all weigh'd: The Blyswiik Frigat had also been in sight, but durst not come to the Bridge. The Proposal to unlade the Alphen into the Fly-boat, was lik'd very well, and that then she might be brought in with care, and more safety; to which purpose they should send the Polesnip to Sothia, to take in the Alphens Goods (so to give little or no suspition to the Tartars) and take as much Pepper

and other Goods out of her, as they could conveniently carry, and then let her come up the River with it, because the fore-mention'd Vessel should in few days go with Provisions to Quelang.

The Ambassador judg'd it fit, and it would be convenient in that juncture of time, to have a strict Eye upon the Concerns of Quelang, and therefore ad∣vis'd them to Consult about it; to which purpose Harthouwer, Captain Vander∣werf, with the Commander de Vlieg, were sent for to come up in the Blyswiik, and likewise Captain Bitter.

The Blyswiik that Evening came up to the Bridge, and in the Morning in∣tended to Unlade her Presents, and two days after (if it were possible) she should be sent to fetch the rest.

The seventh about Sun-rising the Boat set Sail, and Orders was also given for the Unlading of the Blyswiik.

In the Afternoon a Mandarin coming from the General, ask'd the Ambassa∣dor if he would send the Provisions to Quelang by the Blyswiik, because his High∣ness had not known that that Ship would have come up so high? On which he was answer'd, That it should be done so soon as the Blyswiik had made one Turn more to fetch the remaining Presents.

Towards Evening all the Goods design'd for Presents were Landed out of the Blyswiik, but it being too late to bring them into the Merchants Lodge, they were forc'd under good Guards to lie in the Barques all Night: but in the Morning, being the eighth, they were all brought into the Lodge.

The same day Putmans, Master of the Ceremonies, and the Comptroller, went with the Horses and Oxen to the Court, to shew them to their Highnes∣ses, according to their Request two days since. Coming home again they re∣lated, That they had pleas'd their Highnesses exceeding well, and that Singla∣mong, to whose view they went first, ask'd if they were wild or tame? to which they had answer'd, Tame: He had also highly commended the Oxen, and had caus'd them to be carry'd and shewn to his Women, by whom they were beheld with great admiration: his Son had also been Mounted on one of the Horses. After which his Father ask'd concerning the Ambassadors Health; and also desir'd his Chirurgeon might come to him the next day. The Gene∣ral had also view'd and lik'd them; asking likewise about the Ambassadors Health, if he had any good Doctors? for if he had not, he would send his; and why the Hollanders sent down the Boat without leave, since he never had refus'd to grant them any of their Requests? and withal when the Blyswiik Frigat went again to fetch the rest of the Presents? Whereupon Captain Putmans reply'd, That the Ambassador was pretty well recover'd, and he knew not any thing to the contrary but that he had a good Doctor; yet humbly thank'd his High∣ness in the Ambassadors behalf for his kind Proffer: why the Boat went down without leave he could not give any account; but as to the Blyswiik Frigat, she was now Unlading her Pepper, and would at farthest be gone again within two days.

The Commander of the Blyswiik Frigat complain'd to Nobel, that the Tar∣tars hinder'd him in the Unlading of the Pepper, he having call'd two Barque∣men aboard, which accordingly came; but the Tartars seeing them took them, notwithstanding he interceded for them, and said that he was the occasion of their coming, and caus'd them to be carry'd to Prison in Fetters, which made Nobel send Ienko to complain to the Commission'd Mandarins about it.

Mean while a Factor was sent to Nobel from the General, to enquire about

the Ambassadors Health, and if he had any good Physicians, because his High∣ness would else send him his.

In the Afternoon the Interpreter Ienko came with some Mandarins and Mer∣chants to the Blyswiik Frigat, to redeem the Prisoners, and give order for the Unlading of her, which was begun immediately.

Next Morning, being the ninth, the Ambassador sent to the Vice-Roy Sing∣lamong, to excuse him, that he could not accommodate him with his Chirurge∣on, because he also was indispos'd, but so soon as he amended he should be immediately sent to him.

In the interim the Tyger Sloop arriv'd there with a Letter from the Mer∣chant David Harthouwer; in which the Ambassador was inform'd, that with the other Officers he had thought it convenient not to let the Ship Alphen come into Netherland Haven, because it was too dangerous to come thither against Wind and Tyde: which Resolution they acquainted the Commander of her with, that when he thought convenient he might remove from Sothia to Tinhay; who had sent an Answer, That he would observe it, and consider with his Officers about it, and then send his approbation.

The fifteen Chests brought hither by the Polesnip, were put into the Constance, and in the room of them they had Laden her full of Pepper out of the Constance and Tyger, which weighed forty nine thousand six hundred sixty eight Catties; by which means the Ships had made so much room, that they could not conve∣niently come at all the Goods design'd for Presents, so that they onely waited for the Blyswiik to Ship them in her.

The Polesnip Fly-boat was now ready to come up, if they had leave and a Pass for her; but the Povi's Commissioners would not permit it without Or∣ders from above.

The Vlaerding had on the sixth instant Unladen thirty two thousand one hundred forty five Catty of Pepper into a Chinese Jonk, which lay there still; so that at last with great trouble they got to the Sandal Wood that was to be Pre∣sented.

In the Afternoon two Merchants were sent from the General, to enquire af∣ter the Ambassador's health; which Visit he order'd his Comptroller to re∣quite, by giving them six Hens, five Gammons of Bacon, some Pomegranates, Chesnuts, and Pears.

The same day the Ambassador desir'd the General, that he might have the use of his Doctor but for a Day, because he was much troubled with Gripes in his Bowels; upon which Request he came immediately and prescribed him something, which he had no sooner taken, but found present ease.

The tenth in the Morning the Doctor came again to give the Ambassador some more Physick. A Factor came also to enquire of his health, and if the Medicines the Doctor had given had done him any good) to which he was answer'd, Yes, and that the Ambassador had found great ease by it, desiring the Factor to thank his Highness in his behalf; which he promis'd to do.

The Bliswyk and the Tigers Sloop were put off from going that day, and or∣der'd to stay till the next, because some Mandarins scrupled the carrying away of so much Provision; about which they would first speak with the General.

In the Afternoon two Mandarins came into the Lodge with a Pass for the Bliswyk Frigat, and the Tygers Sloop; and said also, That they were sent to Sail down with the Frigat.

The eleventh the Frigat and Sloop set Sail to Netherland Haven.

[illustration]

On Sunday Noon, being the twelfth, two Factors came to the Lodge, to present the Ambassador in the Generals Name with some a 2.3 Connemomy, and to tell him, That the Ambassador had been a considerable time ashore, and that the Emperors Presents were not yet Landed: then the Ambassador desir'd that his Highness would please to give order that they might be suddenly de∣liver'd, because he much longed to see them; nor that they could proceed in any Trade before the Goods were ashore, and likewise that then preparations should be made for his Journey to Peking.

Whereupon the Ambassador sent this Answer, That the rest of the Presents would suddenly be ashore, and that he thank'd his Highness for his Connemomy, and in requital of it desir'd him to take a few Conserves of Nuts, Cloves, and the like: So having been well entertain'd by the Ambassador, the Factors took their Leave.

In the Evening it was consider'd, That for several Reasons which the Governors had alledg'd by their Factors, it might happen, so soon as news came from Peking for the Ambassador to take his Journey thither, that their Highnesses might press his going, and that they (nothing being as yet in readiness, and all in a hurry) might be put to a great inconvenience; There∣fore the Ambassador, to begin betimes, proposed, If it would not be ne∣cessary to acquaint their Highness's to morrow, That most of the Pre∣sents were ashore, and the rest expected in few days; if therefore they might begin to Pack them, and cause Chests to be made for them; of what big∣ness the Chests must be, and how many Men must carry them, and also the Sad∣dles and Furniture for the Horses; and likewise if their Highnesses would please to send Commissioners before the Presents? if the Sandal Wood, being very big, could be carry'd by Land as it was, or in what Pieces it ought to be cut? that they must also carry several other Goods with them to Peking to give to the Council of State, and other eminent Persons; if they saw it conve∣nient, to desire their Highnesses to accept of the last Presents, being onely Trifles, sent to them by the Ambassador, because they had no Place in the Lodge to keep them; If their Highnesses should chance to speak of Trading, to press it forward, and to order that two Ships might about two Moneths hence be sent to Batavia, and from thence to Holland, to give an account of the Ambassador's Proceedings, and the like.

This the Ambassador and his Council agreed upon, and Nobel and Putmans order'd to go and acquaint their Highnesses with it.

The thirteenth in the Morning Nobel and Putmans (according to the Resolu∣tion taken the Night before) went to the Court to speak with their Highnesses. About Noon coming home again they related, That they had not seen them, it being their Full-Moon, and Singlamong indispos'd; yet they had sent their Bu∣siness to them by their Interpreters, and receiv'd in answer, That when all the Presents were brought ashore, their Highnesses must be inform'd of it, and that then they would send their Commissioners, to see and be present at the Packing of them; The Chests might be made for them, and about the bigness to contain a hundred Catty weight; The Sandal Wood must not be cut, but sent as it came from the Lord General Maetzuiker; The other Goods which the Hollanders would carry with them to give away when an occasion did present, should be set down with the Chests and Packs, that they might know exactly how many Porters they should want.

The fore-mention'd Trifles they could not receive before all the Emperor's

Presents were brought up. Because they did not speak with their High∣nesses themselves, they had not made any mention of the Business concerning Trade.

The fourteenth about Noon the Vlaerdings Sloop arriv'd there from Netherland Haven, with Harthouwer and Captain Vander Werf, who related, That all things as well in Sothia as Netherland Haven, were in good condition at their departure from thence, and that all the rest of the Presents were taken out of the Constance and Tyger, and put into the Bliswyk Frigat.

The fifteenth the Bliswyk arriv'd there with the rest of the Presents, and al∣so the Jonks with three hundred forty four Bags of Pepper out of the Vlaer∣ding. In the Blyswiik Frigat also came Captain de Bittor, who had been Gover∣nor in Quelang.

A general report also went, that nine English Ships were on the Coast of Chi∣na, about the Isles Eymuy and Quemuy, and that they had been in Canton, and desir'd to Trade there; but the Tartar-Chineses, not willing to take four hundred Tail for the granting of them their Trade, were sent away from thence, and were now come afresh to prosecute their old Design.

The Governor having sent word to the Ambassador by Nobel and Putmans on the thirteenth instant, That so soon as the Presents were all Landed, he should inform them of it; therefore he judg'd it convenient to advise their Highnesses of the arrival of the remaining Presents in a Letter by the Secretary, that if they pleas'd (about two days hence, when they were sorted) they might come and see them in Person, or send their Commissioners, that they might make fit preparations for them.

The sixteenth in the Morning the Secretary went first to the General, to de∣liver him the following Letter in the Ambassadors Name, that the rest of the Presents were now come ashore, and that the next day they would all be put in order; therefore if his Highness pleas'd to come in Person, the Am∣bassador would most kindly entertain him; or else send his Commissioners to see them.

In like manner he desir'd a Pass for the Boat, that she might go up and down without being stopp'd to enquire the certainty of the News concerning the English Ships.

No sooner was the Secretary's coming made known to the General, but he sent for the Letter, and an hour after gave this Answer; That it was not cu∣stomary for the General to come in Person to see the Goods, but he would send his Interpreter if the Presents were as the Hollanders had reported them, and then consult whom he should send: as to what concern'd the Boat, he would send a Pass for her by his Mandarins.

The rumor was at Court, that the General intended that Afternoon to see the Dutch Ship; to which purpose several Flags, Halberds, and the like, were stuck in the Street.

From thence the Secretary went to the Vice-Roy's Court, where after some stay he was brought into the Presence in a back Hall. His Highness having ask'd concerning the Ambassador's health, and the Secretary given him a re∣spective Answer, deliver'd his Highness the Ambassador's Letter, advising him that all the Presents were now Landed, and if his Highness pleas'd, to send Commissioners to see them. Whereupon his Highness made Answer, That he was glad to hear that the Presents were all safe ashore, and that he would not fail to send his Commissioners the next day to see them: And after having

drunk to him in a Cup of Bean-broth, and entertain'd some frivolous Dis∣courses within, the Vice-Roy gave him leave to depart.

Mean while the General's Interpreter came with some Factors into the Lodge, to bring an Answer on the Letter that was brought in the Morning to his Court, which was after this manner:

That a Pass should be brought for the Boat the next Morning; but when she had made one Voyage, that they should always bring the Pass to his Highness again, and at her depar∣ture ask for a new one.

Moreover the Interpreter said, That the General was not well pleas'd that the Ambassador should desire him to come and see the Presents in his own Person; yet the Interpreter had appeas'd and satisfi'd him.

Hereupon the Ambassador answer'd the Interpreter, That by the Discourse of the People he had heard that the General would come himself to see the Presents, and therefore had written, that he should esteem himself happy if it might be so; but had he known, that either the Vice-Roy or General would have been angry, he should not have done it. With which Answer the Inter∣preter took his leave.

The remaining Presents were this day all brought out of the Blyswiik Frigat into the Lodge.

The seventeenth in the Morning the same Interpreter that had been there the day before came to the Lodge, to ask if the Presents were Landed; on which he was answer'd Yes, and that they were brought thither the last Night, and they onely stay'd till the Mandarin saw them.

At Noon an eminent Mandarin came to tell the Ambassador from the Gene∣ral, That his Highness had heard that all the Emperor's Presents were going to be brought to his Court, therefore ask'd him how many Coelis, which are Porters, could carry them: Whereupon the Ambassador answer'd, That he knew nothing of it; and withall, that the bringing of them to the General's Court could not well be done, because of the bigness of the Packs of Sandal Wood, and other things: but if his Highness desir'd it, he entreated him to send a written Order by his Mandarins, they being not his, but the Emperor's Presents, and also that he would not bear the blame if any of the Goods should chance to be damnifi'd by their Carriage thither. Which Discourse prevail'd so much, that the Mandarin said, His Highness should onely send for a Piece of each sort to see them. To which the Ambassador answer'd, That all which his Highness should give order for in Writing he would obey. Hereupon the Mandarin rising up reply'd, That his Highness should send a written Order.

The eighteenth in the Morning, another Factor came into the Lodge, sent from the Vice-Roy, to ask concerning the Ambassador's health: and amongst other Discourses Nobel ask'd him what they should do concerning Trade? all the Presents were now ashore, and the time come which their Highnesses had limited: To which the Factor answer'd, That it would be convenient to send a Letter to Singlamong about it, and therein express, That his Highness had for three years together given them leave to Trade, and that he would also be pleased to do it now, and assist them in it; and that Nobel might be admit∣ted to speak with him more at large about it; so made no question but all things would fall out according to his desire. He ask'd moreover if the Hollan∣ders would sell the two hundred Bags of Pepper lying in the Storehouse to him. To which Nobel answer'd, Yes, if they could agree. Mean while two Manda∣rins came into the Merchants Lodgings from the General, telling them that all the Cloths, Perpetuana's, Crown-Serges, and other Goods belonging to the

Emperor's Presents, should on the morrow (if the Weather permitted) by an Order from the Governors be fetch'd to the Vice-Roy Singlamong's Palace, where all the great Persons would be ready to see them; the Chests to fetch the Presents in were making ready, and as for the bulky Packs that were not so curious, they should not trouble themselves.

The foremention'd Mandarins were also impower'd by the General (as they said) to search the Holland Ships, if there were no more Pepper, or other Mer∣chandise in them, desiring that two of the Netherlanders would please to go along with them, who at their Return related that all things were according to the Cargo.

Since now, according to the Governors desires, the Emperor's Presents were brought ashore, and they had promis'd that the Hollanders should begin to Trade, of which as yet they saw no likelihood, therefore Captain Nobel was on Sunday the nineteenth sent with the following Letters from the Ambassador to the Vice-Roy Singlamong and General, being to this purpose, viz.

That the Vice-Roy had known the Hollanders several years, and always shewed them respect and favor, and assisted them in obtaining Dispatches in their Affairs. The a 2.4 Houpou understood the last year from the Vice-Roy and Lipovi, That an Ambassador must of necessity address himself to the Em∣peror this very year, whereupon they should immediately drive their Trade; which the Houpou gave account of to the General in Batavia; who thereup∣on hath sent a Person of Honor, one of his Council as Ambassador, and brought the Emperor's Presents ashore upon your Highnesses desire, and promise, that so soon as that should be done they would begin to Traffick; therefore the Houpou humbly desires, that his Highness would be pleas'd to permit it, and give order to the Factors and Merchants about it, that the Houpou may be the sooner ready to go with the Ambassador to Peking, and the rather, because that two Moneths after the Date thereof, two Ships must go to Batavia; by which the Ambassador must give an account to the Gene∣ral there, and also to the Province of Holland, of his success in that Empire. The Houpou was very desirous to send some Goods with those two Ships, which he would buy of the Factors; therefore he humbly requested that the Trade might now commence.

To which Nobel receiv'd an Answer from Singlamong, That he wonder'd at the Hollanders hastiness, since the Ambassador was not to travel up to Peking till the new Year, and that an Answer was expected from thence in twenty days; therefore they must stay till that time, because the Cargo that they had brought (which in respect of what the Hollanders carry'd into the Empire of Iapan was very small) could be sold in five days; and that the forementi∣on'd Ships might then go away time enough. However, his Highness by No∣bel's perswasions granted that they might conclude with the Factors about the Prices for the Goods which the Hollanders intended to Vend there, and for those which they should receive in Barter for them, and drive their Trade privately, without publishing it before Orders came from Peking, because he knew not but that the Emperor might desire all, or a part of their Commodities.

The General Siangpovi, to seem resolute and bountiful, promis'd to Nobel, That so soon as he had seen the Presents, he would send his Factors to the Lodge to agree with him concerning his Merchandise, provided the Hollanders ask'd modestly, and not more than the value for them. He also boasted much of his good inclination towards the Hollanders, because he had lent them his

Jonks to bring their Merchandise ashore, of which they had lost nothing; and that he resolv'd from that time forward to continue his kindness, and endea∣vor by all means possible to advance them. About the sending of the two Ships for Batavia he seem'd somewhat backward, because according to his judgment nothing of consequence could be advis'd by them: but being some∣what better inform'd about it, made answer, That the first Orders were expe∣cted from the Emperor in fifteen days, therefore would have them stay till then. Their Highnesses also ask'd courteously concerning the Ambassadors Health; and hearing of his Recovery, seem'd much to rejoyce at it.

The Mandarin Han lavja came also to the Lodge to tell the Ambassador, that the General had order'd him to go along with his Excellency as Guide to Peking, and that four Standards must be made to be carry'd before the Ambas∣sador in his Journey, out of which two must be mark'd with Dutch, and two with Chinese Characters; and moreover, that he had been inform'd the Gover∣nors in few days would grant the Trade.

The one and twentieth and two and twentieth nothing hapned worthy of note.

The twenty fourth in the Morning, a Mandarin came to the Lodge, asking if the Ambassador did not know when the Chineses that came from Batavia went away? and from what Place? if they were first carry'd over with the Holland Ships? and what was their native Countrey and Names?

The Mandarin receiv'd in answer, That some went over the last year as Ser∣vants with Nobel and Pedel to Batavia; and as to what concern'd the rest, they came thither from Canton, Tayowan, Chinkfieuw, Hoksieu, and other Places, both in Ships and Jonks, but the Places of their Birth and Names were unknown to him, because he had never enquir'd after them. They desir'd at Batavia to be Transported to their native Countrey again, which was accordingly grant∣ed them.

The same Mandarin had a Letter given him, in which a Pass was desir'd from the General, for the Blyswiik Frigat to carry down some Goods that were to be sent to Quelang, and come up again with Merchandise; and likewise from the Vlaerding Sloop.

The twenty fifth about Noon a Mandarin brought a Pass for the fore∣mention'd Ship and Boat to go up and down the River.

The twenty sixth in the Morning the Comptroller made several Com∣plaints to the Ambassador, That the Chineses at the buying of the Necessaries for Quelang (appointed by the General) had prevented the Person, who daily brought him Flesh, Fish, Herbs, and the like, into the Lodge, from bringing any more as he us'd to do, and had complain'd of him, and made him so odi∣ous to the Mandarins, that they had put him and the Coelies Master (which had assisted the Netherlanders in buying of Provisions for their Ships) into Irons; by which means the Coelies, and other labouring People that work'd in the Lodge, durst not come any more thither, which put the Hollanders to a great inconvenience.

There also came an eminent Mandarin to the Lodge, to give order for the Pressing of Jonks at Minjazen, to fetch the Merchandises out of the Ships.

In the Afternoon, it being fair Weather, the Blyswiik Frigat went away with the Necessaries that were to be sent to Quelang, and also for fresh Provisions for the Ships in Netherland Haven.

In the same Frigat Captain Vander Werf, and Vander Does the Secretary,

went down to take an account of those Chinese Goods which came over in the Dutch Ships from Batavia, and seize on all their Moneys and Merchandise of any value, because on the two and twentieth the Ambassador had found in one of the Chinese Chests to the value of a thousand Rix-Dollers in Money, con∣sisting in Spanish Dollers and Iapan Boat-Silver, which was strictly forbidden in Batavia.

The Merchants Nobel and Harthouwer went in the Afternoon by the Vice-Roy, General, and Conbon's direction, to Treat about the Trade. When among other things Harthouwer and Nobel proposed, That upon Sale they must fetch the Pepper and Sandal Wood out of the Netherland Ships in the Haven; which the Factors refus'd, saying, That the Goods should be deliver'd to them in the Ambassador's Lodge. But at last they agreed, That the Goods being fetch'd out of the Netherland Ships, and brought up the River in Jonks by the Gene∣ral's Order, were to be deliver'd on the Shore, on the hither side of the Bridge, after the same manner as in former years. Then they desir'd the particular Parcels of the Merchandise brought thither by the Netherlanders, and how ma∣ny, and what Goods they would have in Return of them; which they writ down accordingly in their Notes, as China Root, ordinary Tee, Galya, Allom, Preserv'd Ginger, Hatten, Gold, &c.

Seeing the great quantity of Allom and Gold Wyer, besides Gold which the Hollanders desir'd, they seem'd to be much amaz'd, and judg'd, that the two first sorts could never be afforded for the Prizes that were set down for them by the Netherlanders; and demanded, why the Hollanders had not ask'd for Silk: To which they were answer'd, That it could not be done before the Prizes were setled on the Dutch Commodities, and that then an account might be made of their Stock; which they seeming to approve of, soon after departed.

The twenty eight in the Morning, two of the General Povi's Factors came into the Lodge, of which, one being Povi's Intimate, went with the Interpre∣ter Apari to the Ambassador, and desir'd him to give him some account of what he had yesterday written to Povi: Whereupon his Excellency made an∣swer, That amongst other things, he would willingly speak with Povi con∣cerning the Trade, and also his going up to Peking: To which he reply'd, That he being his Favorite, could do much in it; but he would advise to pre∣sent him with some more Blood Coral, which he dust assure would not be lost, and that about two days after, the Ambassador might come to visit Lipovi, be∣cause that and the next were kept as Fast-Days of the first Moon. The Am∣bassador hereupon answer'd, That he depended upon the Noble and Heroick Disposition of the General, and therefore desir'd his Highness to repose Con∣fidence in him, as being a Person of so clear a Spirit, as would endeavor to re∣taliate the General's Favors. So the Factor being Presented with ten Yards of Red Cloth, and Vowing to serve the Ambassador to the utmost of his Power, took his leave and departed.

The twenty ninth in the Morning, Putmans went with the Interpreter Ienko to the General, to inquire if he was any ways busie, because that was the appointed time for the Ambassador to visit him: Whereupon they were answer'd, That the General was always imploy'd, but that the Ambassador might come when he pleas'd; which they at their return acquainting his Excellency, he instantly went to Court, and Presented some Blood Coral to the General. Whereupon his Highness told him, That he well knew the generous Nature of the Ambassa∣dor: Who reply'd, That he esteem'd the Favors and kind Receptions which

he had receiv'd from the General, that he was oblig'd to study Requital.

Then the Ambassador desir'd to know the time, when, and which way he should go to Peking. Whereto he answer'd, That it was now the ninth Moon, and that he might set forward on his Journey very suddenly.

Next, the Ambassador desir'd that they might begin to open Trade, that the Houpou (meaning Nobel) might be ready to go along with him. To which was answer'd, That the Presents must first be view'd, and that the Mandarins there∣to imploy'd, had been four days busie about their Orders, which was now done, and the Presents should be look'd over in two or three days, and then the Trade should Commence. Their Discourse ended, after a handsome Treat, the Ambassador went very well satisfi'd to his Lodgings.

Coming to the Lodge, they were soon after visited by the Generals intimate Factor, to tell them, that the General had consider'd about the Coral Chain, and durst not accept of it; yet at length through his perswasions, and that it came from the Ambassadors own Hand, he had taken it. The Factor likewise desir'd a great Blood Coral, which was given him, in hopes that he might assist them in their Trade.

The thirtieth in the Morning, the Ambassador sent a Letter by Putmans, and the Interpreter Ienko, to the Vice-Roy Singlamong to this purpose.

THe Ambassador had long since heard, and now understood, that Singla∣mong had a kindness for the Hollanders; therefore he hop'd, that he would please to assist him in all things hereafter, which would be no small Ob∣ligation only to himself, but also to his Masters, and desir'd to visit his High∣ness, to speak with him about the Journey to Peking.

Against Noon, Putmans came again to the Lodge, relating, That he could not speak with the Vice-Roy, but after delivery of the Letter receiv'd answer, That he should be busie four or five days, so that he could not give the Ambassador Audience, and that nothing could be said about the Journey to Peking, till the Presents were look'd over, which would be done in few days; with which answer Putmans took his leave.

Against the Evening, the General Povi's Interpreter came to the Lodge to tell the Ambassador from his Master, that when the Presents were view'd, (which should be done in a day or two,) he would desire the Ambassador to be free as he would be to him, and to ask freely for what ever he wanted, who gave the Interpreter five Yards of Red Cloth for his Message.

The first of October in the afternoon, the Mandarin Liu-lavja came with Orders* 2.5 from the General, to fetch all the Chineses from the Dutch Ships with their Goods; and to that purpose desir'd a Note to the Commanders of them, to which he was answer'd, that the Netherland Secretary was gone thither to search their Goods, which Liu-lavja desir'd might be brought into the Lodge; whereupon the Ambassador gave the Mandarin two Letters, one to Captain Vander Werf, and one to the Secretary Vander Does, advising them, that the Chi∣neses might be deliver'd, provided they had been search'd and examin'd before by the Secretary, who if he found any thing of concern, should according to his last Letter, secure it aboard till further Order, with which the Mandarin departed.

The second and third being Sunday and Monday nothing happen'd of note.

The fourth, the Ambassador had Audience granted him by the Vice-Roy, who after Salutations, complain'd, that he was indispos'd, having great pains in his Head and Back.

The Ambassador first thanking him for the Honor he receiv'd by his pre∣sence; then desir'd to know the time when, and what way he should travel to Peking: To which his Highness answer'd, That if news came from Peking that day, he might go on the morrow; whereupon the Ambassador desir'd that the Trade might Commence, that Nobel and he might be in a readiness: To which the Vice-Roy answer'd, That the Ambassador need not to trouble himself about the Trade, because the sale of all the Goods they had brought might be dispatch'd in four or five days; but they must first Pack up all the Emperors Presents, and bring them to the Royal House, and that day on which they were brought they might begin their Trade on the next. On this the Am∣bassador reply'd, He would depend on his Highness's Royal Word, and there∣fore would not trouble him any farther, but that he would give Order, that the Presents should with all speed be brought into his Palace.

Then the Ambassador's Son presented him for his Daughters a great and small Chain of Blood Coral, which he accepted; yet said, he durst not receive, but that they were a Present from the Ambassador's Son, for his Children; and though himself was much indispos'd, yet he desir'd, that the Ambassador would stay and refresh himself a little; which being perform'd, after Dinner, just at his Departure, the Vice-Roy's Daughters, as a thankful return for the Coral, Presented the Ambassadors Son with six Rolls of Silk Stuffs.

Coming to the Lodge, the Ambassador gave Order for the making of sixteen Cases against the next day, to Pack the Presents in, and carry them to Singla∣mong's Palace. Soon after, Liv-lavja came to visit the Lord Van Hoorn, telling him, that he should go with him to Peking, but the time when, was yet unknown.

The fifteenth in the Morning, a 2.6 his Lordship sent a Letter by the Inter∣preter Ienko to the Conbon, advising him:

THat he knew very well the good Inclination which he bore to his Countrey-men, and also that he had always assisted them, which they would ever acknowledge with much Thankfulness, in regard the Conbon had for some time been very busie, that he could not have the Honor to speak with him; now he desir'd, that he might come to proffer his Service to him.

The Interpreter for all this civility, after their Proud manner, brought on∣ly in return, an excuse of indisposition, and that in three or four days he might give him a visit.

The sixth in the Evening, Ienko the Interpreter came to tell the Ambassa∣dor, that the Mandarin Liv-lavja was come with all the Chineses from the Ships up to Lamthay Bridg, and desir'd to know why he had detain'd some of their Goods; On which the Ambassador answer'd, that he had express Order from the General and Council of India, that he should do it, because the Chineses de∣sir'd that they might be only brought over with their Necessaries; therefore, if either Money or Merchandize was found by them, it was forfeited, as it was likewise with his own Men: Whereupon he reply'd, That the General resen∣ted, and that the Mandarin Liv-lavja would speak with the Ambassador about it the next day.

Nobel also inform'd the Ambassador, that the Factor had told him that very day, that he had privately been inform'd, that they would have suddenly news from Peking; and also that the Ambassador should not go thither him∣self, but that the Presents should be sent thither, and that he should stay in

Hoksieu, to Treat with the Governors about the Trade, which the Hollanders look'd upon as a Discourse without Truth or Reason.

The seventh and eighth, nothing happen'd of remark, but only some false rumors that troubled the Ambassador, that the Emperor had order'd the Pre∣sents to be brought to Peking, and he to stay at Hoksieu; and on the other side, Singlamong was as much concern'd at the seizure of the Chineses Money, which was forfeited according to the Maritime Law.

The ninth about Noon, they receiv'd an account, that all things remain'd in a good condition at Tinghay, and Netherland Haven, only some new Dis∣putes with the Mandarins and Messages concerning the Chineses forfeited Goods, which were for the most part Silver, Camphire, Coral, and Seed-Pearl.

The tenth, the Blyswiik Frigat arriv'd at Lamthay Bridge, laden with Pepper, taken out of another Vessel, and also the remaining Necessaries for the Ambas∣sador and his Retinue, likewise some Packs for his private occasions. The Mandarins (which as Commissioners) had been down with the Frigat, and re∣turn'd in her, coming to the Lodge, were by the Ambassador presented with as much Cloth, as would make each of them an upper Garment.

The eleventh, it was resolv'd in Council, to unlade the Tyger and Constance with the first, and send them to Tinghay, there to make themselves ready to go for Batavia, at the latter end of the Moneth.

Lapora the Factor inform'd the Ambassador, that the next day the Presents would be brought to the Vice-Roy Singlamong's, there to be view'd; in order to which all things were prepar'd.

The twelfth in the Morning, about Day light, the Netherlanders prepar'd all the Presents in a fit manner to be carry'd to Court, expecting the Mandarins; but in stead of them, the Factor Lapora brought what they little expected, that they should not bring the Presents to Court, till further Order; by which Di∣latoriness, he perceiv'd, that they were not willing as yet, to suffer them to open and vend their Cargo: Therefore he propos'd to his Council, If it would not be convenient, for these Delays that he should shew his Dislike by Letter; and withal desir'd, that he might return aboard, until they had liber∣ty to Vend their Goods, or receiv'd Orders for their Journey to Peking, which they approv'd.

But next Day, while he was preparing the Letter, Lapora coming to the Lodge, he told him what he was about to Write, and resolv'd to send immediately; who desir'd him by all means to forbear two or three days longer, to which he was perswaded, which fell out the better; for the next Morning he sent for the Presents.

At this time, the Ambassador heard there were many Vessels making ready at Lamthay Bridge, whereby he judg'd, that they were preparing, that when ty∣dings came for him to come to Peking, then they might hurry him away upon a sudden, which made him ask what Vessels they were, and who was to go with them? To which the Interpreter reply'd, That they were in few days to go with some Tartar Lords, and perhaps with the Ambassador to Peking; for which, and that he might be the freer hereafter to acquaint him with the like, he made a Present of five Yards of Red Cloth.

The fourteenth, in the Forenoon, the Emperor's Presents were carry'd to the Vice-Roy's Court, accompany'd with the Ambassador, Nobel, Harthouwer, Putmans, the Secretary, and the whole Train, the Presents being carry'd before, were follow'd by the Ambassador and his Retinue; who coming to the Pa∣lace

were brought to the Common-Hall, to stay there while the General's coming, at last they were call'd into the Presence Chamber, where the Vice-Roy and General sate on Stools one by another, and next them on their left Hands, three Commissioners sent from Peking, to inquire what Chineses had car∣ry'd themselves valiantly at the Conquering of Eymuy and Quemuy; which also after the Hollanders were enter'd, took their leave, being Conducted by the Vice-Roy to the Stairs descending into the Court, by which they suppos'd them to be great Lords: The Ambassador was also desir'd to sit down on a low Stool at the Vice-Roy's right Hand, and his Attendants in order next him; opposite to them sate the Poetzjensy, the Magistrates of the City and other great Mandarins; the Chests with the Presents standing just without in a Gallery. When the Vice-Roy began with their usual Complement to inquire of his Health, afterwards the Chests and Packs with the Presents being open'd, the Goods were taken out in several Parcels, brought and laid before their High∣nesses to see them; seeming to be well pleas'd with them, especially some cu∣rious Lanthorns, and Celestial and Terrestrial Spheres and Globes: Having sa∣tisfi'd their longings, and pleas'd their curiosity with viewing and re-viewing, they commanded them to be laid up handsomly, and in good order again: Which done, after some familiar Discourses, they Treated them very pleasant∣ly with store of good Liquor; when on a sudden the General went away, being Complemented by the Vice-Roy to the middle of the Stairs descending into the Court. But the Vice-Roy returning again into the Hall, gave leave to the Ne∣therlanders to depart; whereupon they also went away: At their going out, No∣bel was desir'd by Singlamong's Factor, that he and Harthouwer would be pleas'd to come to his House, that they might Treat with him concerning the Trade, which they promis'd to do. The Ambassador having sent a Rundlet of Sack to the Vice-Roy, desir'd him to accept of it, which he did, and return'd him Thanks.

According to the Factors Request to Nobel the day before, he and Harthou∣wer went the fifteenth in the Morning to his House, to Discourse with him about the Trade: Soon after their coming, the Factor Rode to Singlamong's Palace; from whence he in an hours time return'd again, but could not come to any absolute Resolution, onely telling them, that he had a Parcel of Silk of about forty Pikol, which he would willingly sell: Who said, That it might be done, but that he would consider, that they could not send any Silk to Ia∣pan that Year, but that they must first carry it from thence to Batavia, and then send it to Iapan the next Year, so that they should run a great Risk in sending of it to and fro; yet nevertheless, if they would deal reasonably, they would take a considerable quantity; asking the Price, which the Factor durst not tell, because the Generals and Conbon's Factors were not there present, but pro∣mis'd to consult about it, and let them know their resolution on the Morrow, when they would come to the Lodge, and let them know the Prizes of all their Goods, and so begin to Trade.

He also advis'd the Dutch Merchants, that they should go to the General, or to his Factors, and give him an account of what they had done, which the Hollanders did not think convenient, because they had not been with the Vice-Roy, but went to his Factors, who also promis'd to come to them on the Morrow, desiring that they would also acquaint the Conbon's Factor with it, which was perform'd accordingly.

The Ambassador by the Interpreter De Hase, sent the General a small Rund∣let of Sack, which he kindly receiv'd.

Then calling to mind, that the Conbon was not at the looking over of the Presents, and also having understood that he was not well pleas'd, the Am∣bassador sending for his Factor, desir'd to know the reason: To which they reply'd, That the occasion was, because his Presents which were deliver'd on August 26. were much less than the Vice-Roy's or General's, which he took ve∣ry ill, being as great a Lord as Povi. The Ambassador somewhat troubled at this Relation, intreated his Factors to desire their Lord that he would please to admit, that he might wait upon him, and endeavor to give satisfaction; with which they promis'd to acquaint him, and bring an answer the next Morning, as he did, letting the Ambassador know he might come to his Ma∣ster two days after.

The Interpreter Maurice having again been with Sibontok, to present him with three Swords in the Ambassadors Name, which receiving with Thanks, he promis'd to do the Hollanders what Service he could; and withal, gave no∣tice, that having Dined the day before at the Generals, He there understood of some Mandarins, that the Netherlanders were in ten or twelve days to travel to Peking, and that he had receiv'd his Commands to go before, and to wait for the Ambassador at Iemping, being his Dominion through which they were to pass. He therefore desir'd, that the Ambassador would please to bring with him some Coral, Amber, Sword-Blades, Pistols, Musquets, Cloth, Perpetuanaes, Linnen, Looking-Glasses, some Gold Rings, and Sparks or Pebbles, which he had an intent and desire to buy of him.

All the Governors Factors, except Singlamong's chiefest, came that day to the Lodge to give the Prizes of their Commodities, and endeavor to make a Bar∣gain. Nobel and Harthouwer gave them account of these Merchandizes, viz. Pep∣per, Sandal-Wood, Arek, Cloves, Nutmegs, Lead, Tin, Calicutor-Wood,, &c.

The Commodities which the Factors gave the Dutch an account of, consisted in Gold Wyer, China Root, course Tee, Galiga, Allom, Quicksilver, Cubebs, Pre∣serv'd Ginger, Hatten, Gold: As for raw Silk, one of Povi's Factors said, that the Netherlanders could carry none from thence that year.

Not long after, the Stewards appear'd with a Pass for the Constance Boat, and the Vlaerdings Ship, which set Sail at high Water, Laden with Provisions to the Ships in Netherland Haven.

The eighteenth, the Ambassador went to visit the Conbon, where he was no∣bly entertain'd; and after Dinner, the Cups merrily went round, Health pres∣sing Health, so long, till both sides began to yield to the Intoxicating Liquor.

The nineteenth about Noon, two Factors sent from the General, came to the Lodge to present the Ambassador in their Masters Name with six Pots of Liquor, in requital for the Rundlet of Sack, which they said was very accep∣table to him.

The Ambassador asking them if they knew not whether any News was come from Peking: They reply'd, That they knew of none, but that it was expected there in five days time.

The twentieth in the Morning, the Governors Factors came a second time to Nobel and Harthouwer, to agree about the Price of the Goods, but parted with∣out coming to a Conclusion.

In the Evening, a Sea-man came ashore from Minjazen without the Tartars knowledge, with a Letter sent from Captain Naelhout, who inform'd the Ne∣therlanders,

That yesterday he was coming up in the Vlaerdings Sloop, but was stopt at Minjazen, which necessitated him to go again to the Ships, and had in the Night undertaken the Journey anew, hoping in the Dark to have pass'd by Minjazen; but that also fell out contrary to his expectation, because the Chineses that kept the Watch in a Jonk that lay in the middle of the Water, had perceiv'd and kept them there; so that they were detain'd at Minjazen, therefore desir'd a Pass from the Ambassador to come to him, without which they saw no likelyhood of getting thither.

The Mariner further related, That all things about the Ships were in a good condition, onely the Tygers Men going ashore in the Crab-Hole, to cut Wood, one of them was suddenly seiz'd on, and devour'd by a Tyger.

The Ambassador causing the Interpreter Ienko to be call'd, commanded him to go betimes the next Morning to the Governor of Minjazen's Lodgings (who was yet there) to ask him why he detain'd his People at Minjazen? And desire him, to give Order, that his Men might pass; which if he refus'd, the Ambas∣sador must be forc'd to complain to the General about it.

The one and twentieth in the Morning, the Interpreter Ienko brought an∣swer, That the Governor of Minjazen was gone thither the last Night. The Ambassador considering that the time appointed for the Ships setting forth to Batavia began to approach, thought fit the next day to send a Letter about it to the General; and also to desire a Pass for a Boat to go up and down the River, that they might hear daily from the Ships, which then much concern'd the Hollanders.

The two and twentieth, the Ambassador went to visit Singlamong's Son, and present him with two Pieces of Black Crown Serge, four of fine Stuffs, four of Linnen; one Piece of Amber, weighing one Pound and an half, half a dozen of Sword Blades; one Pair of Pistols, and a Fire-Lock, the Stock In-laid with Silver. All which he receiv'd very courteously, and Entertain'd the Am∣bassador after a Princely manner.

Mean while, the Secretary Vander Does went according to the Resolution ta∣ken the day before, to deliver him the following Letter, viz.

It is very acceptable to the Ambassador to understand, that the Hollanders should by him be esteem'd as Children and Friends of one Family, of which the Ambassador did not doubt, because Talavja's Word (from whom he had it) was like a Rock, never to be mov'd; therefore he desir'd that the little Holland Vessel might be deliver'd here, and sent down, because a Ship must be sent to Batavia in eight days. He also requested, that his small Boat may come up again; and to that purpose, that he might have a Pass, as in former Years.

To which the Secretary brought answer: That after he had made his co∣ming known to the General, he staid three or four Hours upon promise of Ad∣mission; yet at last the Interpreter came to tell him, that Talavja was so extra∣ordinary busie, that he could not give him Audience; and therefore if his bu∣siness was such that he could not send his Message, he must come some other time: Whereupon, the Secretary not being willing to loose his labor, gave the Letter to the Interpreter, to deliver to the General, and desir'd him to tell Talavja, that the Netherlanders at that time wanted a Pass, more than ordinary, for the free going up and down of their Boats.

To which the Interpreter brought answer from Talavja, That he had read and understood the Letter, but that some days since he had given a Pass for

the Boat and Sloop; which the Secretary answering said, That it was true, but that Pass mention'd nothing, but to go from thence down the River, but not that they might come up again; which appear'd by one of them who was returning to Hoksieu with the Commander of the Ship Riding at Tinghay, and was stopt at Minjazen; and withal told him, That if the Ambassador had a Pass for a Vessel to go and return, he must not deliver it but on an extraor∣dinary occasion.

The Interpreter having related this to the General, his Highness sent word to the Secretary, that he would send for the Mandarin Liu-lavja, and by him send the Netherlanders such a Pass as they had the last year, with which they might go and come when they pleas'd.

The twenty third, nothing happen'd worthy relating.

On Sunday, being the twenty fourth, because the promis'd Pass was not come to the Comptroller, Ruwenoort and Interpreter De Hase, were sent to the Mandarin Liv-lavja, to see if he had it ready, and if not, to repair to the General for it. These coming to the Mandarins House, not finding him at home, went to the General, and let him know the occasion of their coming; Who sent them answer, That they should go to the Mandarin Liv-lavja, he having Or∣ders to give out the Passes: To whom making application, the Mandarin told them, That he would come to the Lodge, and bring them a Pass for a Boat to Sail up and down the River; but when they intended to send any Provi∣sions down, they should onely send him word by their Stewards, and he would grant them a particular Pass for that purpose. The General also sent back his Interpreter with the Hollanders, to tell the Ambassador, that no Ships might go to Batavia, before they heard from Peking. But to this they answer'd nothing, as knowing, that the General could not prevent the going away of their Ships, but that they were highly prejudic'd by not having a Pass, they being desirous to know the condition of their Ships every day; and that he would please to make Talavja sensible of the injury he should suffer by it.

The twenty fifth in the Morning, Liu-lavja and Haykong came to the Lodge, bringing with them a Pass for a small Vessel or Boat to go and come empty, up and down the River, which they gave to the Ambassador, saying, That when a Vessel had been down, and up again, they must return the Pass to Liv-lavja, till another went away, and that then they need only to fetch it again, which the Ambassador promis'd to do.

About Noon, the Factor Lapora came with a Tartar to the Lodge, to acquaint the Ambassador, that a small Letter was come thither from Peking, and that his Excellency might now prepare himself for his Journey; because upon the coming of the Emperor's Letter he would immediately be sent away, and the Trade should Commence.

The six and twentieth in the Morning, the Secretary went to Singlamong's Court, to request him, If Nobel might be permitted to speak with his High∣ness about some business of great Concern: He was also Order'd as he past by to go to the Conbon, and to Present him with some Elephants Teeth in the Am∣bassador's Name; Who refusing them, said, He durst not as yet receive them, but he humbly thank'd the Ambassador for his kindness.

At the Secretaries coming to the Court, he was inform'd, That the Vice-Roy was gone to the Generals, so that he return'd home without effect.

The twenty seventh in the Morning, the Secretary went again to the Vice-Roy, to intreat his Highness, that Nobel might come to visit him; whereof

being told by the Interpreter, he sent word, that being troubled with Gripes, he could not grant him Audience; and also that he should be busie for four or five days about extraordinary Occasions, and therefore could not let the Hou∣pou come to speak with him; but so soon as the News came from Peking, which was daily expected, the Vice-Roy would so order his Affairs, that the Houpou might come and see him when he pleas'd. The Secretary was also command∣ed to call on the Mandarin Liu-lavja, for a Pass for the Blyswiik to carry down Provisions for the Ships: To which Liu-lavja made answer, That he could give Passes for small Vessels to carry Provisions to the Fleet, but not for so great a Ship; yet he would go to the General to procure a Pass for her, which if he could get, he would send it by a Mandarin that should go down with the Frigat on the morrow following.

The twenty ninth in the Morning the Vice-Roy Singlamong's Chief Coun∣sellor came to the Lodge, with three other great Lords, to see the Horses and Oxen, which they were much pleas'd with, and were entertain'd very nobly by the Hollanders.

In the afternoon arriv'd the Vlaerding and Blyswiik's Sloops, from Netherland Haven, with Captain Iohn Naelhout, informing them, That all things were in safety and good condition, both in Netherland Haven, and at Tinghay.

The thirtieth, because the promis'd Pass for the Blyswiik did not come, Nobel went to the General to desire it, and also to give Order for the making a Ship ready to sail to Batavia (which ought to have been gone fourteen days before) that so soon as News came from Peking, she might set Sail, alledging, it requir'd two or three Weeks before she would be fit to go to Sea. He went likewise to the Mandarin Liu-lavja, to shew him the Pass which was brought back by the Sloop, according as they had promis'd him, and to desire it again, because another Boat was to be sent down the next morning.

But Nobel could not come to speak with the General, being very busie about other Occasions; but was inform'd, That the Mandarin Liu-lavja had Order to prepare the Passes: Whereupon Nobel going to the Mandarin, was told, That the Pass for the Ships had been writ some days, and was at the Generals to be Sign'd, which he would not fail to bring as soon as done.

The one and thirtieth, being Sunday, the Ambassador sent Ienko once more to desire the Pass for the Ships from the General, but could not come to speak with him, which made him go to Liu-lavja, who had promis'd to bring it.

The Vice-Roy Singlamong's Factor came the same day to tell Nobel, That his Highness for some days had been very busie, which had prevented him from granting Audience; but now being somewhat better at leisure, he de∣sir'd, That if he had any thing to request, he would come to him.

The first of November in the Morning Singlamong's chief Factor sent a Messen∣ger* 2.7 to Nobel, that according to the appointment made the day before he might come to Court, where he was expected; whereupon he immediately went thither, with Captain Naelhout, that according to the Ambassadors Order they might acquaint his Highness, First, That they were inform'd no Silk could be transported from thence that Year; and also, that others, on the contrary, said, That the Factors should not Trade with the Netherlanders, unless they would take their Raw Silks at high Rates against the Dutch Commodities: Besides, that he understood, that the Ambassador upon the receipt of the Em∣peror's expected Letter, should immediately begin his Journey; and that therefore he must be in a readiness, which was impossible to be done, because

Nobel, who necessarily must go up to Peking with him, must first be there pre∣sent at the driving and finishing of the Trade; besides, that in the four fol∣lowing Months the River could not be Navigated, because of the Ice. Lastly,* 2.8 to desire his Highness, That he would be pleas'd to assist the Hollanders in the Trade, that so the Ships might be sent to their respective Places; the more, because two of them must on necessity go to Holland. After which, the Vice-Roy ask'd concerning the Ambassadors Health, and then answer'd, That the Emperor was very glad that the Hollanders came to Trade in his Domini∣ons: As to what concern'd Silk, it was forbid to be transported; but if the Factors could agree with the Hollanders for a Price that might be to their satis∣faction, they would allow the Transportation of it. He wish'd also, That the Prices of their several Commodities might be speedily agreed on. Here∣upon Nobel (in regard the Factors seem'd so shie in bidding a good Price, told the Vice-Roy, That if he had brought too much Pepper or Sandal-Wood thi∣ther, they might onely take as much as they wanted, and that he would carry the rest away again; adding moreover, That it was but reason the Hollanders should sell for advantage now, in regard of the vast Expence of their present Embassy. This was immediately answer'd by his Highness, saying, That they might be supply'd by him, as he had done in Canton to former Embassadors. Concerning the Ambassadors Journey to Peking, which will be in the approach∣ing Winter, he ought to furnish himself with good Furr'd Clothes; and where they could not go by Water, they should have Horses and Palakins to travel by Land: And that the Hollanders ought rather to bring more of their Commodi∣ties thither, than carry any away from thence. Whereupon Nobel presented his Highness, in the Ambassadors Name, with the Chain of Blood-Corral, which he so long desir'd, and accepted with many Thanks: Then taking his leave, he was conducted into another Chamber, and treated very nobly with variety of Dainties.

In the afternoon the Steward Onquemoy came to the Lodge to acquaint the Ambassador, That the Pass was brought for the Ship to go down with the Provisions; but that the Governor of Minjazen had it, to whom it must have been deliver'd at its passing by Minjazen: Whereupon the Ambassador sent the Interpreter De Hase to the foremention'd Governor, to ask if any thing was specifi'd in the Pass, for a Boat to come up again, to bring News from the Ships: To which the Interpreter Hase at his Return brought this Answer, That he could not speak with the Governor himself, but his Secretary had told him, That the Pass made mention of nothing else, but to let the Ship and Sloop go down, but not come up again.

The Ambassador not satisfied with such an answer, the next morning sent the Secretary Vander Does to know the Contents of the Pass; but not being permitted to speak with the Governor, he onely brought back word, That the Pass contain'd no more than what was told the Interpreter the day before; and therefore if the Netherlanders desir'd another Pass, they must go to the Ge∣neral for it. Whereupon the Secretary was immediately sent to the Mandarin Liulavja, to desire the standing Pass which he had promis'd to make, for the Boat to go up and down the River, and send it together with that for the Ship; and withal tell him, how necessary it was for them constantly to know the Condition of their Ships and People: But the Secretary coming thither, and being inform'd that he was gone to the Lodge, return'd home.

In the afternoon the foremention'd Mandarin came with the desir'd Pass,

drawn after the same manner as the former had been; but a while after the Interpreter Ienko, sent from Liu-lavja, came to fetch the Pass again, under pre∣tence that a Name was forgotten, which must needs be put into it, promising to return it immediately.

The same day the Factors came to the Dutch Merchants Lodgings, to con∣clude an Agreement about the Prises of their Merchandise; but parted again, without making an end.

In the evening the Ambassador sending for the Interpreter Ienko, shew'd himself much dissatisfi'd that he did not return the Pass for the Vessels to go to and again, he having promis'd, That so soon as a Name was put in, it should be re-deliver'd: To which he answer'd, That Liu-lavja had command∣ed him to ask for it, because the Mandarins Name which was to go down with it, was to be inserted; and why it was not brought again, he knew not.

The same day Captain Iohn vander Werf set Sail in the Blyswiik to Netherland Haven, where by the Ambassadors Election he was to bear the chief Com∣mand, and observe all Transactions, and keep things in good order.

The Treasurer acquainted the Ambassador, That the fifty Picol of Kadjang, and twenty Gammons of Bacon, were not yet brought for the Ships, because the Steward had told him, That there was an Order that no Kadjang nor Gam∣mons of Bacon might be transported: Whereby the Ambassador seeing, that seldom any Provision was sent to the Ships without the greatest trouble ima∣ginable, judg'd it convenient to write a Letter to the General, to this purpose.

That the Ambassador had always found Talavja kind and affable, and therefore thank'd him: That he likewise knew that he had much Business, wherefore he would not be troublesom to him: That the Holland Sea-men must in this Mouson be provided for with Meat and Drink, or else they could not live: That the Ambassador had continually been put to much trouble to get fresh Provisions; therefore he desir'd, that the Husband-men might every eight days carry Porkers, and the like fresh Provisions, with their own Vessels, and sell them to the Ships, which would save both him and Talavja a great deal of trouble.

This Letter Nobel and the Secretary Vander Does carried to Court, to deliver it to the General; but coming to the City Gates, they were stopp'd by the Watch, who said, That Order was come from the General, not to let any Hol∣landers into the Town; whereupon they resolv'd to return, which the Guards seeing, call'd them back, and suffer'd them to pass to the Generals, whither coming, they sent him word of their being there, for which he sent to know the Reason; whereupon they deliver'd the Ambassadors Letter to his Inter∣preter, who brought them this answer, That Talavja was very busie, and could not grant them Audience; but that he permitted the Netherlanders to carry as much Provision out as they pleas'd, first giving an account of it to the Manda∣rin Liu-lavja, that the General might afterwards sign it▪ But he did not under∣stand that any Person should buy all manner of Goods, and carry them aboard, without being willing that the Waiters should perform their Office, in search∣ing the Ship, whereby they should give an account of what they transported; and likewise, that they must use their own, and not Chinese Vessels.

Mean while the Interpreter Ienko brought back the Pass for the Sloop to go up and down the River. The Blyswiik Frigat, the Water being somewhat faln, stuck about a Cannon-shot from the Bridge, where she was forc'd to stay till High-water.

The fourth there was nothing done, but a Dispute concerning the Waiters stopping the Frigat, and clapping her aboard with four or five of their best Jonks, and that some Mandarins desir'd she might be brought back to the Bridge.

The next day all the Governors Factors came to the Lodge, but went away again without speaking any thing concerning the Trade.

In the evening the Vlaerding Sloop arriv'd there again from Netherland Ha∣ven, with a Letter from Captain Iohn Vander Werf, where he found the Pole∣snip that came from Quelang riding at an Anchor; wherefore he thought it con∣venient to send his Book-keeper thither, to acquaint his Excellency with it by a Letter, and to advise him, That all things about the Ships were in good con∣dition, and also that they had not seen any Ships either going to or coming from Iapan.

The fifth in the Morning the Ambassador sent the Interpreter Ienko to the General, to acquaint him with the Fly-boats arrival, and also to desire that Nobel might come and speak with him. The Interpreter returning with two Mandarins, told the Ambassador, That the General was so busie about some private Concerns of the Empire, that he could not give any publick Audience. Mean while a Ship did afterwards come thither from Quelang, which the General had privately permitted to go away again with Provisions and other Necessaries; but she was now return'd, which his Highness did not under∣stand, and therefore the Ambassador must give immediate Order for her to be gone. Hereupon the Ambassador answer'd the Mandarins, That it should be done; and desir'd them to bring a Pass for the Sloop to go to and fro to carry Tydings, which they promis'd without fail to perform.

The sixth, a Servant bringing a Pass from the Mandarin Liu-lavja, for a Ves∣sel to carry Provisions to and again, said, That the Sloop must at farthest go away the next Morning.

The seventh against noon, with the Ebb, the Vlaerdings Sloop went down with certain Writings, kept by Caroli their Clerk and Maurice the Interpreter; but they return'd again, telling, That the Governor of Minjazen would not suffer any fresh Provisions, as Hogs and Fruitage, to be carried down; whereupon the Ambassador commanded them to take nothing but the Papers and Writings.

The tenth in the morning Ienko the Interpreter related, That a Chinese Jonk sent from Batavia to Hoksieu with Pepper and Sandal-wood, was forc'd (not being able for contrary Winds to reach her desir'd Port) to put into Huiting, there being about forty Chineses in her: The Master of her coming by Land, had been in Hoksieu to attend the General, but was return'd with his Letters, without effecting any of his propos'd Designs.

In the afternoon a Clerk belonging to the Conbon's Secretary came to bring the Hollanders a Copy of what had been done concerning their Business in Pe∣king, and also said, That a Currier was come before with Letters, and that in a few days the express Orders would be there; which News he supposing would be very acceptable to the Hollanders, he had endeavor'd to be the first Person that should bring it. The Ambassador gave little credit to this Report, by reason of the meanness of the Person that brought it; but told him, If his News were true, he would remember him with a Present, which he suppos'd he wanted.

In the evening the Conbon's Factor came, confirming the News which the Poor Man brought in the morning, and wish'd the Ambassador Joy in his Ma∣sters

Name with the Good Tydings: Whereupon the Ambassador immediate∣ly sent to the Mandarin Liu-lavja for a Pass for the Blyswiiks Sloop, that she might go and see if the Fly-boat which was order'd to stay at Tinghay till the twelfth Instant, could yet be found to carry this News to Batavia: To which purpose he immediately wrote a Letter, inclosing the Copy which came from Peking, to be Translated at Batavia, he having no time to do it himself: But the desir'd Pass came not.

The twelfth in the Morning the Ambassador sent the Blyswiik's Sloop down with the foremention'd Letter, to which he added the Reason why he could not send before. Mean while all the Governor's Factors came to wish the Am∣bassador Joy with the Good Tydings he had receiv'd from Peking, moreover desiring, that they might have leave to Trade with the first.

It was also reported, That Commissioners were come to Complement the Liquean Agents, and Present them in the Emperor's Name, because it was not thought convenient to let him come to Peking.

In the Afternoon the Vlaerding's Boat, with the Blyswiik's Sloop, return'd, coming too late to overtake the Polesnip, she having set Sail for Batavia that morning.

In the evening the Interpreter Ienko told Nobel, That he was order'd the next Morning to go to the Commissioners that were come from Peking to Comple∣ment the Liquean Agents; but what it was for, he knew not.

The thirteenth the Ambassador sent Ienko to the Mandarin Liu-lavja, to know the Reason why no Provision might be sent down in the Boat: In Answer to which, he brought word, That Liu-lavja promis'd on the morrow to go to the General in their behalf.

On Sunday in the evening, being the fourteenth, Ienko inform'd Nobel, That the General had sent for him to go to the Commissioners about the Liquean Busi∣ness, because he had not been there the day before, according to their Request: But now going thither, the Commissioners ask'd him if the Hollanders had no Blood-Corral, little Dogs, and other Trifles to sell: To which Ienko had re∣ply'd, That he knew not; but was sure they had Pepper, Sandal-Wood, Cloth, Crown-Serge, and other such like Commodities.

The fifteenth against Noon, Singlamong's Interpreter came to the Ambassa∣dors Lodging, who ask'd him concerning the News that on the eleventh Instant came thither from Peking, and what the Vice-Roy thought of it; but he seem'd to be ignorant thereof, which made the Ambassador shew him the Letter, and ask him a second time whither it was true or not, desiring him to take the Co∣py, and shew it to the Vice-Roy.

And because the Pass for the Boat to carry down Fresh Provisions was not yet brought, and that the Steward which furnish'd the Hollanders with all such Necessaries, had so often deceiv'd them by delays; therefore it was judg'd fit to send a Letter to the General, and therein advise him what trouble they had continually before they could get any Provision sent down.

The seventeenth in the morning the Mandarin Han-lavja came to visit the Am∣bassador, who among other Discourse ask'd him, If when he desir'd to speak with the General, he must send notice into the City? To which he reply'd, That such was Talavja his Order.

Against Noon the Pass was brought for the Boat, so that the Provisions were immediately put aboard, That she might be ready to go off at High Water.

The Ambassador wrote a Letter with the Provision to Captain Vander Werf, advising him of the whole Intrigues of that Place: Notwithstanding all which, in the Evening Stulburgh and Smitsen came to tell them, That the Chi∣neses would not let the a 2.9 Kadjang pass, saying, It must first be grown'd, before the Netherlanders should transport it; supposing, since they carried such great Quantities out, that they might sowe it in some other place: Whereupon al∣though the Ambassador himself went to the Steward Onquemoy, yet he prevail'd no more, but that the Kadjang was weigh'd, and ten Picol sent aboard, with some other Provision for the Ships.

The same day the Commissioner sent from Peking to meet the Liquean Agents, came to the Lodge to see the Horses and Oxen, whom the Hollanders civilly entertain'd.

The eighteenth in the morning Hanlavja the Mandarin came to acquaint the Ambassador, That the General would speak with him as soon as he pleas'd, and that he might bring the Presents.

In the afternoon the General sent the Ambassador two Letters written from the Emperor at Peking, concerning his Business; which having perus'd, they consulted about the delivery of the Presents.

It was judg'd fit, that those intended for the Vice-Roy Singlamong, should be deliver'd to him first, he being the Chief in Quality: Upon which Result, the Ambassador immediately sent Factor Lapra thither, to complement his High∣ness, and deliver him the Presents sent from Batavia: But the Vice-Roy being busied about entertaining the Emperors Commissioner, nothing for the present was done in it.

The nineteenth in the forenoon the Netherlanders preparing themselves, first went to the General with his Presents, where coming, and being seated as for∣merly, after complemental Salutes, the Ambassador thank'd him for his kind Writing in the Hollanders behalf to Peking, and told him, that they had brought the Presents along with them, sent to his Highness from the Lord General and Indian Council, which they entreated him to accept: But Siangpovi refu∣sing, said, That till such time as the Emperor had his, and they were return'd from Peking, he could not receive them; but advis'd the Ambassador to have all things in a readiness for his Repair to Peking, which he believ'd would be within ten or twelve days. Whereupon the Ambassador desir'd, That in re∣gard of the present Winter, and for that the Trade was not finish'd, it might be put off till February. To which Talavja answer'd, That in the Journey the Emperor's Orders must be follow'd and observ'd in all Points, and that the Ambassador ought to have all things in readiness: As to what concern'd the Trade, he would be assistant to him, that it might speedily be finish'd: And notwithstanding it was a Custom, that the Ambassadors must first deliver their Presents, before they were permitted to Trade; yet because the Holland∣ers were come from such remote Countreys, and also that they might the bet∣ter defray their Expences, he granted them to Trade before they went. Then after a handsom Treat, with many thanks to his Highness for his Kindness to∣wards them, they return'd to the Lodge.

The twentieth about day-break the Vlaerding's Boat arriv'd there from Nether∣land Haven, with the Commanders Hendrick Bommer and Peter Iohnz de Vlieg: The Pilots Mate also deliver'd a Letter to the Ambassador from Captain Vander Werf, advising him, That he had receiv'd all the Provisions sent with the Boat in safety; but he doubted that they lay in some danger, because several Jonks

of War came daily Cruising there, and several Guards were plac'd between the Straits of Minjazen, and more Guns planted every where.

The same day, according to Order, the Lord Hoorn went with the Presents to Singlamong's Palace; where coming, and some Complements pass'd, the Am∣bassador requested his Highness to accept of what he had brought; to which he answer'd, That since the Business went well at Peking, he kindly accepted of them, and order'd them to be deliver'd to him. Then he ask'd Nobel, who was there present, if he had not put them in the right way, when he told them, That if they sent an Ambassador to the Emperor, they could not miss their Desires? and that for the future they might rely on his Judgment. The Am∣bassador asking his Highness how he would please to Order his Journey, and when it would be? reply'd, That the Letter from the Hopous and Pingtouws was expected there in five or six days, to provide Coelies, which are Porters, Vessels, and other Necessaries for his accommodation, and that then he should know exactly when he was to set forth. After the Presents were open'd be∣fore him, and he seeming to be well pleas'd with them, he ask'd the Ambassa∣dor, spying some rich Furrs amongst the Goods, if there was cold Weather in his Countrey? who answer'd Yes; and pointing at the Furrs, said he should Clothe himself well with them. After a sleight Caress the Hollanders desir'd leave to depart, which was granted them, his Highness excusing himself, that because of his Distemper he could not be present to Entertain the Ambassador, who with all his Attendants went again to the Lodge.

The one and twentieth the Conbon's Factor came to tell the Ambassador, That if he pleas'd, he might that day come and speak with his Master: whereup∣on the Ambassador laying hold of the opportunity, went immediately thither; coming to his Palace, and the first Ceremonies pass'd, the Ambassador desir'd him to accept the Presents, which with much perswasions and many arguments he did. Then the Ambassador desir'd him, that since he had always assisted the Hollanders, he would now also be pleas'd to continue his favor by Letters of Recommendation to Peking in their behalf; which he promis'd.

The one and twentieth and two and twentieth the Governors Factors came again to Nobel to Treat with him about the Price of their Goods, yet return'd without making any Conclusion.

The twenty third nothing hapned worth observation.

The twenty fourth the Generals Factors came to fetch their Majesties Presents.

And now in regard the time began to approach when the Dutch Ships were to Sail from the Coast, and the Emperors Letter came thither the eighteenth Instant, yet the Ambassador had not receiv'd the least benefit of it more than be∣fore, because the Chinese Merchants, so long as no other Bills were put up before the Lodge than what had been there ever since his coming, they durst not come to buy the Netherland Commodities; therefore he wrote a Letter to the Gene∣ral, That since the Emperors Letter was come from Peking, he did not doubt but the Trade might be driven, and Proclamations of his Majesties Letters be put up, as in their former Years; and also that the little Ship might be suffer'd to go down to fetch some Merchandise. This Letter translated into the Chi∣nese Tongue the Interpreter would not carry; neither were the Hollanders suf∣fer'd by the General's Order to come into the City; wherefore it was unani∣mously concluded, That the Ambassador should immediately in Person go to the General, and tell him the Contents of it verbatim, with many other things; and

if his Excellency should be stopp'd at the City Gates, he should return without taking any further notice, and then send away the Blyswiik without a Pass.

The Ambassador hereupon made himself ready to go to the Court; but going to sit in his Sedan, or Palakin, there were no Coelies, or Porters to be had to carry it, the Mandarin that kept the Guard at the Lodge having forbidden them: Yet resolving to prosecute his Design, he went thither on foot, not∣withstanding it was above an hours Walk: coming to the City Gates he was stopp'd a little, because the Soldiers that were on the Guard would first send to acquaint the General with it before they would let him in: whereupon he going back a little, ask'd the Guards if they had order to keep him out? who though they made the former Answer, yet suffer'd him to pass; whereupon sending notice to the General of his being there, after several Excuses he was admitted and brought before him; by whom being plac'd, he desir'd him to excuse the Hollanders for being thus troublesom to him, as being forc'd thereto: for whereas they hop'd, that after the coming of the Emperor's Letter they should have been permitted to drive their Trade, and enjoy more freedom than before; on the contrary, it was worse and worse: for their Letters could not be deliver'd, nor their People admitted into the City: nay more, the Manda∣rin that had the Guard of the Lodge had forbid the Coelies to do their duty to himself. To which the General answer'd, That he never forbid the Coelies, nor had given order to keep him out at the Gates; but that it was onely meant to the Sea-men, that came to buy several things in the City which he would not suffer. Then the Ambassador deliver'd him the Letter writ that Morning; which having read, he answer'd, That the little Ship might go down freely; to which purpose he would send either a Pass or a Mandarin. The Trade granted by the Emperor he also permitted them in the same manner. Moreover he would order other Bills to be writ, and put before the Lodge, that the Nether∣landers might Trade with whom they would; but they must remember not to buy any Goods which in the Proclamation were forbidden to be Transported, viz. Silk, Pelangs, Panjes, and the like Stuffs. And as concerning their Mer∣chandise, they held them up too high, &c.

Nobel hearing him speak of Trade (which was his Business) answer'd, That they did not set too high a value on their Commodities, but that the Factors would not give so much for them now as heretofore, and if they should dis∣pose of their Goods at their Rates they should lose by them; therefore desir'd his Highness to send other People to deal with them, not being willing to have to do with his Factors.

Hereupon the General seeming to be somewhat displeas'd, diverted the Discourse, asking the Ambassador when he would take his Journey? he re∣ply'd, When the Trade was finish'd; also that several Goods to be given to the Council must be fetch'd from Netherland Haven: To which he made no Answer, but look'd strange when he heard the Council of State mention'd.

Then the Ambassador told him by his Interpreter, That as he would be obe∣dient to his Highness in all things, and govern himself, according to the Cu∣stom of the Countrey; so he hop'd the General would give order that he might not lose his Reputation, nor be sleighted; desiring his Highness to take notice, that he was the Representative of the Netherland Nation, and would rather die than his Masters, the States of Holland, should suffer any Reproach through his miscarriage. To which he reply'd, That no such thing was in∣tended, that should either be a prejudice to their Honor, or dissatisfaction to

himself as their Ambassador. Whereupon he requested, that his Highness would give order to his Factor for the sudden dispatch of the Trade, as he would also to Nobel.

In the Afternoon the Mandarin Liu-lavja came to the Lodge, being sent from the General to the Ambassador, with two exact Copies of the Letters from Peking, who ask'd him if he would sell all his Commodities there, or carry them to Peking? To which he answer'd, That he would vend them there. Moreover, the Mandarin desir'd to have a List of his Followers that were to at∣tend him in his Embassy to Peking, that he might provide Coelies for him. He promis'd also to bring a Pass for the Ship the next Morning; and likewise Bills to stick up before the Lodge.

The twenty ninth and thirtieth nothing hapned of note.

In the Evening the first of December the Blyswiik set Sail, Laden with several* 2.10 fresh Provisions for the Ships in Netherland Haven and at Tenhay.

Next Morning Harthouwer and Vander Does went with the Boat to Netherland Haven, to take an exact account of all the Money and Goods seized on and ta∣ken from the Chineses, and to send them with the ten Chests of Silver belong∣ing to the Company, with the Blyswiik Frigat to Lamthay near Hoksieu, where the Ambassador resided with his Retinue.

The fourth the Factors, after having some days before agreed on the Prices of the Goods, began in the presence of the two Mandarins, Liu and Liu-lavja, to weigh and receive the Pepper at the Lodge.

The Ambassador also the same day writ to the General to this effect:

THe Prices of the Merchandise are now agreed on, and the two Ships may come into the River up to the Town; but the great Ship at Tenhay must deliver her Goods there: That the Ambassador depends upon Talavja's goodness; wherefore he was embold∣ned to request, that the two Ships might come one by one up to the Tower: to which purpose he desir'd they might have Passes, that so the Merchandise might be taken out of them with the more convenience and celerity: That if Talavja would please to order, that the Pep∣per and Sandal Wood might be weighed by the Factors below in the Ships, the Ambassador would take it as a great favor.

This being carry'd by the Interpreter de Hase, he receiv'd this Answer, That the General would speak with the Factors about it, and then send his Re∣solution.

The fifth they spent in weighing of Pepper.

The sixth the two Chineses from Batavia came to the Ambassador, desiring that they might go with him as Interpreters to Peking, having been detain'd with the rest of the Prisoners two Moneths in a Spanish Jonk in Hoksieu, and now set at liberty upon Security.

The seventh nothing was done.

The eighth in the Morning the Ambassador sent the Interpreter de Hase to the General, to have an Answer of the Letter sent to him the fourth Instant.

The same day Harthouwer and the Secretary Vander Does came with the Vlaer∣ding Boat from Netherland Haven, and gave an Account to the Ambassador, That they had done all things there according to his Excellencies Order; that the Vlaerding was Unladen of all her Pepper, and the Blyswiik Laden full with Calicutor and Sandal Wood, so that there was nothing remaining in the Vlaerding but a little of the fore-mention'd Woods, a small parcel of Tin, and some Lead, with which they had left the Blyswiik at the great Tower. The seized

Chinese Goods and Moneys they had open'd, and added the Coyn to the Am∣bassador's Accounts. When going down to Netherland Haven they saw War∣like Preparations, of which making enquiry, they told them that thirty Coxingan Jonks were seen hovering near the Point of Hoitang: whereupon the Gover∣nor of Minjazen receiv'd order, not onely to put himself in a posture of Defence, but also to drive them from the Coast. From thence being got to Netherland Haven, towards the Evening the Mandarin which kept Guard with the Jonks came aboard the Vlaerding, to inform them, That several Coxingan Jonks were come to Tenhay, who counterfeiting themselves carry'd the Tartars Colours, and that two of them had put in to Netherland Haven, and he left them there at his coming from thence: Wherefore the Vlaerdings Boat went thither with the Secretary by the Night-tyde, to give notice thereof to the Alphen, one of their Vessels, Riding at an Anchor there, to keep good Watches, and be very care∣ful. When the Secretary arriv'd at Tenhay, the Sea-men of the Alphen inform'd him, That the Night before fifteen Coxingan Coya's (which are little Vessels of forty and sixty Tun, with a single Mast) had view'd their Ship, but at the firing five Guns at them they all fled; besides twenty four great Jonks, which onely shewed themselves about the Islands, without making any attempt upon their Ship.

The fifth in the Morning fifteen Tartar Jonks coming out of the Hole, Sail'd to the Crocodile Islands, and return'd again in the Evening, with intention to run in at Tenhay; but those of the Alphen firing their Cannon prevented their Design.

The same day the Interpreter de Hase (who had been sent the fourth In∣stant to the General) came back with his Interpreter, to tell the Ambassador in his Masters Name, That the Ship might freely come up to the Tower, and that he would write about it to the Governor of Minjazen; and ask'd more∣over, if the Ambassador would be ready against the twenty fifth Instant to re∣pair to Peking: To which the Ambassador sent the following Letter as an Answer to the General, which was to this effect:

THe Ambassador thanks Talavja for his good Inclinations. The Pepper which was in the Lodge, being about two thousand three hundred Picols, hath been deliver'd to the Factors; therefore the Ambassador desires that Talavja will be pleas'd to order the Factors, that the Allom, Gold-wyre, and other Commodities may be deliver'd to the Hopou; that in a little time one of the Ships may Sail to Batavia, and the Ambassador make himself ready for his Journey to Peking.

About three days after the Ambassador and his whole Retinue were invited to come to the Vice-Roy on the eleventh Instant to a Wayang, desiring him also to bring his Musicians along with him, because he had a great desire to hear them.

The eleventh in the Morning Singlamong's Factor came to the Lodge to wait upon the Ambassador according to the Invitation: who coming to the Court, and being conducted to the common Hall, there came some Chineses to him, which two years since had deserted Coxinga, and submitted to the Tartars; who with the Netherlanders were also conducted into the Presence, and plac'd opposite to each other on his right Hand. He having enquir'd after the Am∣bassador's Health, said that he had no time till then to entertain his Lord∣ship, but seeing so fair an opportunity, of relaxing from publick Concerns,

he desir'd that they might rejoyce and be merry together. Whereupon the Tables being spread with variety of Dishes, whilstt hey sat and pleas'd their Palats with diversity of Acates; their Eyes also were feasted with mimick Entries of several Antimasques; when the Vice-Roy desir'd some of their Mu∣sick, and to hear their Musicians Play, which fill'd up the Intermeans with great satisfaction. Thus having spent most part of the day with a continu'd Feast, and variety of Divertisements, the Ambassador returning Thanks, and they being all in good humor, took his Leave, and in the Evening went to his Lodgings.

About Noon the next day the Mandarins, Liu and Lavja, came to demand the detain'd Chinese Goods, urging many Reasons to that purpose. But the Ambas∣sador answer'd, That he neither could nor durst restore them, till he had Or∣ders from Batavia. Which Demand and Answer rais'd a great Heat on both sides: Whereupon the Ambassador, by the advice of his Council, sent a Letter to Talavja, the substance whereof follows:

THat the Ambassador hath always receiv'd favor and respect from Talavja, for which he is very thankful; yet he hath now sent twice to com∣mand him to restore the Goods belonging to the Chineses that came from Bata∣via: The General well knows, he was desir'd to take notice, that the Chineses have driven a private Trade formerly in the Holland Ships, and with their Com∣modities; therefore the Lord General had directed the Ambassador to observe them strictly and prevent it: That his Highness would be pleas'd to consider, that the Ambassador cannot restore them without order from his Masters; therefore he desires the General to have patience till he had writ to them and receiv'd their Answer: That he shall, according to Talavja's Pleasure, use all means possible to perswade that the Goods may be restor'd, and then he shall be satisfi'd, and the Ambassador be blameless.

The General's Factor came the same day to invite the Ambassador to ano∣ther Feast or Wayang, and desir'd him in his Masters behalf that he would bring his Musick with him, because he was very desirous to hear them. To which he answer'd, That he would be there at the appointed time, and satisfie his Masters Request.

The fifteenth in the Morning the Interpreter Ienko went with the fore-men∣tion'd Letter to the Court, to shew it the General: from whence returning he brought in Answer, That his Highness expected him at Dinner, and then he would talk further. But before he went he advis'd with his Council, what was best to be answer'd, if the General should first move the Business, and ask where the Goods were? what they amounted to? where they would leave them while they took their Journey to Peking? and if they intended to re∣store them or not? 'Twas judg'd convenient, that to the General's Question, Where the Goods were? the Ambassador should answer, Aboard the several Ships: The value of them, and what they were? They would give an ac∣count of at convenient time: concerning the restoring them, he should say, That it could not be done without order from Batavia: and if he ask'd where they would leave them? to reply, That the Money should be made use of for their Expences; but withal to assure him, that no part of it should be dimi∣nished, but upon Orders from Batavia be repay'd.

Hereupon the Ambassador went to the Court with all his Attendants: where coming, and having stay'd a short space in the common Hall, they

were conducted into an Anti-Chamber near the publick Place of Audience: where the General sat on a Stool before a Table, with other Tables standing on both sides of him, furnish'd with several Dishes. The Ambassador was plac'd next Talavja, and his chief Followers on Benches on each Hand of him; when being all seated, they were serv'd very plentifully with variety of Meats and Drinks, and betwixt their Courses Farces presented to them, whilst the General drank very freely, and pressed the Hollanders to turn up their Bowls and be merry. After having spent some time, the Ambassador's Musick was order'd to Play; with which the General was much delighted. The time ap∣proaching for their departure, the Interpreter bid the Ambassador speak to his Highness about the Chinese Goods: which caus'd him to ask if he had receiv'd the Letter which he had sent to him in the Morning? who reply'd, Yes, he had, and understood the Contents. Moreover he said, That in the time of the War some of the Chinese Inhabitants fled, which now in time of Peace came to their Countrey again, bringing with them what by long trouble and labor they had got together: He had spoke with the Vice-Roy about it, who also thought it was an unhandsom action to detain their Goods; and therefore he would have them restor'd, having an Inventory of them from the poor Men they were taken from.

The Ambassador in answer thereto reply'd, That he would not contest with the General, but that he could not, nor durst restore them, but if he would take them by force he might. To which the General making no reply, chang'd his Discourse, saying, That a Chinese Jonk coming from Batavia was cast away before Canton, whose chief Commander very well knew the Ambas∣sador and Constantine Nobel: wherefore he ask'd if that Jonk came in company with them from Batavia? and if the Ambassador knew any thing concerning it? who answer'd, That he was ignorant of it, much less that they came with them from Batavia. Which Discourse ended, the Ambassador desir'd leave to depart, which was accordingly granted.

The same day the Conbon's Factors came to invite him on the sixteenth to a Feast, or Wayang, to which he promis'd to come.

The sixteenth nothing pass'd worthy of observation, onely the Factors deli∣ver'd some Allom.

According to the Invitation on the fifteenth by the Conbon's Factors, the Am∣bassador went thither with his Attendants; and coming to his Palace he was conducted into a Hall, when after a short stay, because some Mandarins were busie with the Conbon, he was call'd into the Presence Chamber, where the Ta∣bles were ready cover'd; and being bid Welcom, was desir'd to sit down at a Table, standing on the left Hand, and his Attendants each in their respective Place, where they pass'd the time in Feasting till the Evening, when the Am∣bassador took his Leave of the Conbon and departed.

BUt now to digress a little concerning their Chinese Wayangs, or Stage-plays;* 5.1 Trigaut reports that they are strangely delighted with such Divertise∣ments; and the Actors on the other side have an extraordinary faculty therein, so that an incredible number of their Youth maintain themselves by Acting, every where shewing both Comick and Tragick Presentations.

The first Inventer of their Drammaticks, who (as they say) not onely writ, but taught them Action, and how to tread the Stage, was one Sheeking; who for his merits in such Poesie stands ranked in no mean Place amongst their

[illustration]

Gods, and held in especial Veneration by the Actors; for they never begin their Interludes before a solemn Invocation and Offering made to him their chief Deity; nay, so much are they devoted to his Worship, that the meanest amongst them wears his Effigies, or Medal, hanging by his Side, always imploring that he would please to strengthen their Memory, and quicken their Fancy, to Act and Personate well their Parts, never regarding to understand their Author, more than ours do: but in such esteem did the Chineses hold them, that all their Thanksgivings for their Deliverances and Victories, are instead of Christian De∣votion and solemn Praises, set forth in glad Eulogiums, adapted to the several Stories, with various Personatings on the Stage. Some are such as having a kind of Licence, strolling from Town to Town through the Empire to erect Stages; others have Theatres setled in the chief Cities, and sent for from thence upon all occasions, to Act such Plays as are desir'd, at all celebrated Feasts to height∣en their Entertainments: To which purpose they have a Book with a Cata∣logue of what they are ready to Act, being commonly true Stories set forth in a Poetical Dress. They deliver their Parts in a kind of Tone betwixt Speaking and Singing, such as we call Chanting, varying according to the Argument and Humor they present. Their Habits when they represent Tragicks are ve∣ry gawdy; their Comicks as ours, according to their Matters. But although they observe all the Decorums and Ornaments of the Stage as much as any in Europe, yet none, even of the meanest Chineses, in their Lives and Conversations are more debauch'd and vitious.

The eighteenth nothing hapned of any note, being spent onely in the recei∣ving of China Roots and Quicksilver.

The nineteenth the Secretary at his going out met accidentally with two Hollanders, which seem'd to be Strangers, and were carrry'd on travelling Chairs made of Canes, who saluted the Secretary with taking off their Hats, but passing by a great pace, as in transitu, he had no time to speak to them.

The Interpreter de Hase acquainted the Ambassador, that he had heard from

some Chineses, that a Holland Ship was arriv'd at Sincheu; who making enquiry after it, was inform'd that two Holland Ships lay at Sanchefoe; and also that two Hollanders belonging to the said Ships were that Morning gone to the General.

In the Afternoon the Mandarin Liu-lavja came to tell the Ambassador from the General, that he was to take but twenty of his Train with him to Hoksieu: whereupon the Ambassador ask'd if the Horses and Oxen should not be brought up to Peking▪ for then more Men would be necessarily requir'd? but he would leave it to the General to order as many as he pleas'd. He also ask'd if there had been no Hollanders with the General? he reply'd, That when he came from Talavja's Court he saw two Hollanders stand at the Door, which were come thi∣ther by Land from Sincheu, but that he knew not in what Ship they came thither.

The twenty fourth in the Morning the General's Interpreter came to the Lodge, to tell the Ambassador from his Lord, that the Vessels, Horses, Coelies, and all things necessary for the Journey were now ready, therefore ask'd when he would please to set forward? Moreover he said, That a Mandarin was come from the Vice-Roy Singlamong, to know the time; and that he did m•…•…h won∣der what made the Netherlanders so dilatory in the Journey, which at first they were so hasty for; therefore he desir'd them to appoint the certain Day, that he might acquaint his Master. Which the Ambassador thus answer'd, That there were some Goods yet remaining in the Ships which were for the Lipovies, that must be unladen and pack'd up before he could go; and also the Trade must be finish'd, and the Factors Goods be deliver'd, because the Hopou Nobel must go with him. On which the Interpreter ask'd, how long time it re∣quir'd before all could be finish'd? In a short time, reply'd the Ambassador, it may be done, if they ascertain their Weights, and deliver their Silk according to the Patterns.

While they were arguing these Matters, the Mandarins, Liu and Liu-lavja came to the Lodge with Orders from the General; in which he commanded that the Netherlanders should restore the seized Chinese Goods; which were to this purpose:

THe General of Fokien helps his Natives. Liu and Liu-lavja, both Manda∣rins, have acquainted the General in Writing concerning the Batavian Chinese Goods, detain'd in the Netherland Ships; which the General sends this Mandarin to fetch thence: To which purpose the Ambassador is hereby desir'd to send one of his Servants to go down with him to shew the Goods, that they may be taken away: When they are come hither, the Chineses shall set them down Piece by Piece, and shew them to the General; then after further Orders from the Emperor they shall be deliver'd to the Owners. The Chineses are also commanded to keep an exact account of what Goods are brought up of theirs in the Barque to Lamthay.

Hereupon the Ambassador told them, that Nobel, Harthouwer, and Vander Does should go to the General, to ask if that were his Will and Command: To which the Mandarins reply'd, That they would stay and go with them, to hear Talavja's Order, and govern themselves accordingly. The Mandarin Liu-lavja also said, That two Hollanders which had been at Tayowan, were now at the Generals, and ask'd if the Ambassador knew them? who answer'd, How should he know them, when he had never seen them; but desir'd that they might be shewn to some of his Servants, who might perhaps know them.

Dinner being ended, Nobel, Harthouwer, and the Secretary Vander Does, went with the fore-mention'd Orders to the General; into whose Presence after some stay being admitted, they ask'd if that was his Highness's Writing and Order? whereupon he answering Yes, pointed to the Seal, saying, That it was his, and none else gave such a Mark; and therefore he wondred why they detain∣ed the Goods; but there were two Hollanders come thither, which he would give them. To which they reply'd, That as to what concern'd their Coun∣trey-men, if his Highness did restore them, they would be thankful for it; but they could not deliver the Chinese Goods without Orders from Batavia; that the Ambassador had seized them in the Lord Maetzuiker's Name, being brought by the Chineses against his Order, in stead of Necessaries; therefore if the Am∣bassador could restore them again without his knowledge, they desir'd his Highness to consider: who reply'd, That he was a great Lord, and also one of the Lipous, he did not desire the Goods, but was oblig'd, they being his Sub∣jects, to speak for them: whereto was answer'd, That the Ambassador was also a Person of Quality, and one of the Indian Council, neither did he desire the Goods, nay, rather wish'd they had not been brought aboard; but since it was so, he could not let them go without Order: whereupon the General said, He should let the Business rest, till News came about it from the Empe∣ror; but when his Imperial Majesty commanded the Netherlanders, then they must restore them whether they were willing or not: then changing his Dis∣course, ask'd when the Ambassador would go his Journey; and all the Coelies, Horses, and Vessels being now ready, he could not imagine what was now wanting; he had writ to the Emperor three times that the Ambassador should come up, but he saw as yet no likelihood of it, therefore knew not what he might think; what-ever they had requested of him he had granted, yet still they came with new Desires, so that he knew not how to deal with them, nor could imagine why they came thither; and that they now gave him cause to think they were a People, on whose Words was no depending, saying one thing to day, and another to morrow. Hereupon he was answer'd, That they stay'd onely for the Trade, because the Hopou Nobel must go to Peking, but be∣fore he could go the Trade must be finish'd. To which the General reply'd, That he had granted them to Trade, he had provided Barques and Jonks for the unlading of their Commodities; nay more, that one of the Ships might come up to the Tower, that they might make the quicker dispatch: and it was true, that he had commanded no Quick-silver should be Transported, because the Emperor had forbid it; however, he would have wink'd at it; but because the Netherlanders had told some of his Mandarins, that they had got it from the Vice-Roy, he would have it taken away again, and not suffer one Conderin weight to be Transported. As to what concern'd the other Commodi∣ties* 6.1 which were not prohibited, the Netherlanders might carry out as many as they pleas'd. Whereupon he was answer'd, That they did not know who had told any of his Mandarins that the Quick-silver was bought of the Vice-Roy, but that the Factors were the occasion of all those Differences, because they hindred them in their Business: the Ship lying at the Tower would by this time have been unladen, if they had proceeded in weighing the Goods as they ought; but they us'd false Weights, which the Netherlanders finding out, left the Ship and went ashore. To which the General answer'd, That the Pepper in the Ship was mix'd with Sand, and therefore the Factors had us'd such Weights: The Netherlanders (said he) would have the repute of fair Dealers,

but they are none; for to mingle their Pepper with Sand and Water was no honest part. To which they answer'd, That they knew nothing concerning any such thing, therefore they would willingly go with any of his Factors Aboard to view the Pepper, in which if they found either Sand or Water, they would undergo both the penalty and scandal: In the mean time they urg'd that they might carry out the Quick-silver for that time, since it was al∣ready Shipp'd. To which the General made no Reply, but onely that his Fa∣ctors should the next Morning go Aboard and agree with them, that the Am∣bassador might the sooner go set forth to Peking.

The two Europeans were according to Liu-lavja's Promise shewn to the Ne∣therlanders, and found to be Renegado's; the one being the first, that desert∣ing the Castle Zelandia, on the Island Formosa, went to the Chineses; which at the first questioning they acknowledg'd. And according to their Relation, they were on the eighth Day of the twelfth Moon, in Formosa, and were come in a Chinese Vessel from thence to Trade to the Coast of China; that onely one Renegado was alive in Tayowan. But the Netherlanders being just at that instant call'd to the General, had not time to examine them further; but taking their leave of him, they desir'd that they might take the Renegado's along with them to the Lodge; which the General refusing, said that he must first examine them.

The twenty fourth in the Morning came the Mandarin Liu-lavja to the Lodge, with Orders from the General to fetch the Quick-silver out of the Blyswiik Fri∣gat. Whereupon the Ambassador desiring him to stay a little, wrote the fol∣lowing Letter to the General.

THe Ambassador knows very well that Talavja is a Person of Honor, and just▪ and therefore he is assur'd, that when he shall be rightly inform'd of all things, he will be satisfi'd. And as to the Quick-silver and Pepper, he hop'd that Dispute was over; That the Ambassador wishes to go to Peking with the first opportunity, and therefore desires that the Factors may hasten the unlading of the Ships, that the Presents which are for the Lipous and Lavja's may be Pack'd, and put into a readiness.

With this Letter the Interpreter de Hase went to the General, but brought no other Answer than this, That the Ambassador should shortly know his Mind.

The Emperor's Factors having been with Nobel, they told him, That they would not deliver any Silk, but pay him for his Commodities with ready Money; and likewise that they would not go to the Tyger Frigat for any more Pepper.

A Mandarin came also to tell the Ambassador in the Generals behalf, That he must so order his Business, that within ten days he might go to Peking; and likewise ask'd for the Names of those that were to go with him.

The twenty fifth in the Morning the Council resolv'd to make preparation for the Packing of the Presents, according to the Inventory written by Nobel on the eleventh Instant, that the General might see the Ambassador resolv'd to go; and also that Nobel and Harthouwer should go to the Factors, and ask them if they would go down to receive any more Pepper or not? and likewise to speak with Singlamong's prime Factors concerning the Silk, and tell him, That the Ambassador was to take his Journey a few days hence; therefore they must in short declare their Intentions, that the Hollanders might govern themselves

accordingly; and also endeavor to make them abate the Price of the course Silk; in which Case they should be impower'd to make an Agreement. More∣over it was concluded, that a List of the Names of those Persons that were to go to Peking should be sent to Talavja, being in number twenty seven Hollan∣ders and six Blacks; all which was accordingly perform'd.

In the Afternoon two Interpreters came to the Lodge from the General to tell the Ambassador, That the Quick-silver must be taken out of the Ships again, because it was publickly known, and would come to the Emperor's Ear, who had prohibited it: but hereafter if they kept it private, the Nether∣landers might carry out as much as they would. To which the Ambassador an∣swer'd, That there were Mandarins gone to the Ships to fetch it out; and if the Ship should chance to be gone to Netherland Haven, he would give order that the Quick-silver should be kept in it and brought up again; for which he pro∣mis'd to be Security till it was done. Moreover the Ambassador bid them tell Talavja, That they were now busily Packing up their Goods, to be ready against the limited time of ten days; therefore he desir'd him to command his Factors to make an end of the Trade.

In the Afternoon, a Sea-man came in a Batziang from Netherland Haven, with a Letter from Captain Iohn Vander Werf, Dated the twenty fifth instant, from the Vlaerding Frigat; by which he advis'd the Ambassador, that three Man∣darins were come from the General aboard the Vlaerding, and commanded him, that he should not take the Quicksilver out of the Blyswiik, till further Order; Wherefore he desir'd to know, what he was to do in that affair.

Hereupon the Ambassador wrote immediately an answer: That since the General had prohibited Quicksilver, he might let it remain in the Blyswiik, and with the rest of the Goods out of the Vlaerding; and what was more wanting, to make up her full Lading, he might take out of the Constance, and (as soon as he could) also come himself.

The six and twentieth, the Lord Van Hoorn observing that the sending away of the Vlaerding could be no longer put off, wrote a Letter concerning it to this purpose to the General.

THe Ambassador shall never fail to acknowledge Talavja's Favors in all* 8.1 things, and accordingly, makes himself ready, that he may with the first opportunity go to Peking, and therefore as a token of his Respect, he gives notice to Talavja, that in four days time, a Ship shall go to Batavia; as also, two more a little after; therefore if his Highness will please to write to the Lord General and Indian Council in Batavia, it will be well, but it is at his own option.

With this Letter Harthouwer went to Talavja, who being busie about other affairs, so that he could not speak with himself, he sent the Letter by his Inter∣preter, and bid him tell his Master, that the reason why they had some days since desir'd that the other Ship might come up to the Tower was, because the Factors would not receive the Pepper out of that Ship there present.

The Interpreter coming back, brought this answer.

THat having receiv'd the Ambassador's Letter, and understood the Con∣tents* 9.1 of it, he would the next Morning send him an answer by some of his Mandarins; but let him know before, that not above twenty Persons in all could go with the Ambassador to Peking, because the Emperor had so Com∣manded.

He also caus'd the two Mandarins that were to go with the Hollanders to tell Harthouwer, that if they had ought else to request of the General, they should do it speedily, because they had Order to grant it.

Mean while, Nobel went to the Governors Factors to receive Money of them in stead of Silk; Who answer'd him, That they would pay their Debt within three or four days.

At the same time, the Vice-Roy and General's Interpreters came to tell the Ambassador, that it would be necessary to be ready for his intended Journey in five days. To which Van Hoorn answer'd, That he would endeavor (if pos∣sible) to obey their Highnesses Commands, having already put the business in good forwardness.

The two Mandarins which were appointed to go to Peking, came to have the List of the Names of his Attendants.* 9.2

In the Morning, being the twenty ninth, Nobel according to their resoluti∣on taken the day before, went to the General with a Letter, to desire a Pass of him for the Blyswiik Frigat to go down again: The Contents of which were as followeth.

THe Ambassador hopes that Talavja will not be offended for coming again* 10.1 to beg a Request of him, being now ready to set forth towards Peking; in which regard, and for that he must write all his business at large to the Lord Maetzuiker in Batavia; therefore the Ambassador desires, that the small Vessel may go again to Tinghay, to take the Goods out of the great Ship, and that he will please to grant a Pass for her, and the Boat with fresh Provisions; and also that he will send half a dozen Jonks with them to fetch Goods from Tinghay to Lamthay, that then they might finish their Trade, and the Ships go away; for which the Ambassador shall most highly be oblieg'd to Talavja and the Emperor.

The Ambassador hath understood by the Hopou, that two Netherlanders are brought Prisoners to Talavja, which he desires may be permitted to come and speak with him.

Nobel coming back, related that he could not speak with the General, but sent him the Letter by his Interpreter; Who brought answer, That he should not fail to hear from him in the Afternoon; which was accordingly per∣form'd: for the Mandarins, Liu and Liu-lavja, came to the Lodge to tell the Am∣bassador, That the Netherland Ships must be unladen in five days, and the Con∣stance Frigat might freely come up to the Tower, that they might the sooner be unfreighted; but no Ship might go away before the seized on Chinese Goods were come ashore; that all things must be ready for their Journey in fifteen days; and that three and twenty Hollanders might go to Peking, but not more. The Secretary, because he was a Scholar, might not go to Peking with the Ambassador, but the General would give order for two Interpreters. For the unlading of the Alphen at Tenhay the General would send six Jonks thither with the Blyswiik; and likewise a Pass for the fore-mention'd Frigat to go down again.

To the rest of their Desires Talavja had sent them no Answer.

The General's trusty or chief Factor, call'd Liu, came two several times to* 10.2 Nobel the same day with another Story, That if they would, they should one∣ly address themselves to him, and he would do their Business; and that his Master had so much ready kindness for them, that he aim'd at nothing more

than to please their King Maetzuiker, by giving them all the dispatch and satis∣faction he might.

To this civil Proffer (which the other Factors had chosen him to present)* 10.3 Nobel reply'd, That they would willingly deal for some Silks, if they would let them have the best, as they would do by them. Whereupon the Factor reply'd, That he would consult with the rest, and doubted not but to please them.

But as to that part of Siangpovi's Resolve, That nothing should be done un∣less the Chinese Goods were restor'd, the Ambassador and his Council consi∣dering, unanimously agreed, That the Goods should be put into such a po∣sture, that they might take them and convey them from thence, as if by force, leaving an outward Door lock'd, on purpose to be broke open.

The thirtieth in the Morning the Interpreter de Hase, according to yester∣days Resolution, went to Talavja's Court to him with a Letter, which was to this effect:

THat the Ambassador congratulates Talavja's noble Disposition, in granting that the Ships shall be unfreighted. The Ambassador will endeavor to be ready to go to Peking in fifteen days. He will satisfie Talavja about the Chinese Goods, that then the Holland Ships may go to Batavia; upon which he desires some private Conference.

This Letter was no sooner deliver'd, but there came Orders quite contrary, That the term of fifteen days was too long for their departure; That no Ships should Sail from thence before the Ambassador's return from Peking: At which the Ambassador much startled, reply'd, That it seem'd very strange to him; for yesterday the Mandarins, Liu and Liulavja, had told him quite other∣wise; so that he knew not what to say, or which to believe, for sure they could not both be the General's Order.

On the one and thirtieth the Ambassador sent Nobel and Vander Does to the General, to ask him if he would write any thing to the Lord Maetzuiker by the Ship that was the next Morning to set Sail for Batavia, and to assure him, that since he had been pleas'd to command no Ship might go to Batavia, before the seized on Chinese Goods were brought ashore to the Lodge, That the fore-men∣tion'd Goods were not in that Ship; but if he would please to send any of his Mandarins they should be shewn him where they were, that if he would he might take them, and they satisfie Talavja in all Points; and likewise that the Ambassador would be ready in eight days to go to Peking; in the mean while desiring him to give order for the six promis'd Jonks, and a Pass for the Blys∣wiik, that with the Jonks she might go to Tenhay, and there unlade the great Ship.

Nobel and Vander Does going to the Court, and having acquainted Talavja with their coming, he sent for his chief Factor Liu to receive their Message;* 11.1 of which having notice they were admitted, when the General told them, That as to what concern'd the Ship, it could not go away before the Ambassador went to Peking, it being customary there, that any Vessel which brought an Ambassador, could not be dismiss'd till he had made his Address in Person to the Emperor. To which they reply'd, That the Ship was sent to Batavia one∣ly to give an account of their Proceedings hitherto; which ought to have been done two Moneths since, according to their Orders, but it was put off upon his Highness's desire; but now it neither must nor could be any longer delay'd, because the Lord General, during the Ambassador's arrival there, having re∣ceiv'd

no news of his Excellencies Adventures and success in his Embassy, would not know what to think, and they coming to Batavia, suffer for their supine negligence.

The General reply'd, He advis'd the Hollanders not to let the Ship go away* 11.2 without his Order, because there were Jonks in Netherland Haven to prevent her; which would cause some clashing, and perhaps mischief might be done, which was much better to be avoided; neither should their stay be longer than two days at most: in which time the Vice-Roy Singlamong would come home again, with whom he would consult, and then send for Nobel to the Court, and give him their Resolution. Concerning the Chinese Goods, he de∣sir'd them not, they might leave them aboard, or bring them ashore as they pleas'd themselves, till Orders came from the Emperor. That he had given order for the Jonks, and also a Pass for the Blyswiik, but he made no mention of the time limited for the Ambassador's departure, onely that when he came to Peking, he should strictly observe what he said or did.

Then the Hollanders asking the General for the two Renegado's, he reply'd, That they were convey'd to Canton, where, they said, their Parents and Friends liv'd; and withal, that they were no Hollanders.

Whilst Nobel and Vander Does were at the General's, the Mandarin Liu∣lavja came again to the Lodge about the Chinese Goods, but was sent away again till their return; when they were inform'd of Talavja's Order, and told, that it was convenient to take the Goods out of the Blyswiik (in which they were) and bring them ashore: whereupon Liu-lavja desir'd to go thither, that having seen them, he could give the better account thereof to Talavja; which being granted, he and two other Mandarins went with Nobel and Vander Does to the Blyswiik, lying about half a League from the Bridge; from whence they return'd with the Goods in the Evening.

The first of Ianuary, Anno 1667. the Blyswiik Frigat set Sail, laden with Goods* 11.3 for the Coast of Coromandel, consisting in course Tee, Chests of Gold-wyre,* 11.4 Allom, and likewise Quick-silver, sent Aboard by the Factors the day before. The Commanders of the Frigat had order, that after the delivery of the Goods into the Vlaerding, they should immediately steer to Tenhay, to unlade the Ship Alphen into the six Jonks.

The second in the Morning Captain Iohn Vanderwerf went with a Batsiang to Netherland Haven, to make himself ready, and prepare the Vlaerding to Sail for the Coast of Coromandel so soon as the Ambassador should give order. He had also three Letters given him; one for the Master of the Alphen lying at Tenhay, to acquaint him of the six Jonks coming to unlade his Ship, and likewise to order him to hasten the Business; the second was to the Master of the Constance, Peter Iansz de Vlieg, by which he was commanded with all speed to come to the great Tower to unlade there, that the Ships might be clear'd for their departure; the third was to the Governor and chief of the Council at Malacca; by which he was advis'd of the Ambassador's arrival in China on the third of August, and his Landing on the twenty fourth at Hoksieu; on which day he also had Audi∣ence granted him by the three prime Governors; that an Order was come from Peking; the Trade driven, and so brought to pass, that the Vlaerding Frigat was got ready with her Lading on the first of Ianuary, to set Sail for Malacca.

About Noon the Mandarin Liu-lavja came to the Lodge, being sent (as he said)* 11.5 to see the Chinese Goods and tell their Money; which the Ambassador would not suffer him to do, saying, That if Talavja would take the Goods from him,

they might do what they would with them. Moreover, this Mandarin told them, that the Hollanders must be ready in eight days to go to Peking, and that not above twenty four Persons should go along with him; and that three days hence he would come and take an account of all their Packs and Chests.

The third nothing hapned, but that a Parcel of Pepper and Sandal Wood was deliver'd to the Factors, as also the next day after.

Furthermore, the General promis'd, so soon as the Vice-Roy Singlamong was come home, to speak about the Ships going to the Coast of Coromandel, and that then he sending to Nobel would give him an account of it: But this was hitherto not done, and three days already pass'd since Singlamong's coming home, and no Person come from Talavja to call Nobel; Therefore it was judg'd convenient (since the utmost time for the Ships departure was at hand, and that it already was the fourth of Ianuary) to send Nobel and the Secretary Van∣der Does the next Morning to the General's, to put him in mind of his Promise, and also tell him that the Ship must go away the day following, though no order was given, which they desir'd his Highness would not take ill.* 11.6

The fifth in the Morning Nobel and the Secretary went to the General, but found him not at home, being gone to the Vice-Roy's; but having stay'd a little while, he returning: by his Interpreters they acquainted him with the occasion of their coming. To which he answer'd, That he had spoke with the Vice-Roy about the Ships going away, who would not by any means permit it; and advis'd them to go to him themselves, to see if they could perswade him to it, which they did; but coming thither could not be admitted to his Presence: for Singlamong, inform'd of their coming, sent them word, that they should come again the next Morning (because at that time he was troubled with the Gripes, and weary with Travel) and that then he would give them Audience. On which it was resolv'd to give their Highnesses full satisfaction, and to put off the Vlaerdings departure so long.

Mean while the General's Factor call'd Thesin, came to tell the Ambassador, That he had understood of his Master, that the Ship might be gone, but that Hogenhoek must first speak with the Governor of Minjazen about it.

In the Afternoon the two Mandarins, Liu and Liu-lavja, came to the Lodge with an Order from the General, to fetch all the Chinese Goods from thence, which was to this effect:

I Give order to Thesin and Haykong, that they carry the Batavian Chineses to the* 12.1 Ambassador, that they may see their Goods; and that then these Mandarins shall deliver them Parcel by Parcel to Tsiong and Sinshong, who shall be careful to look after them till farther order, that they may not be diminish'd. If the Hollanders have open'd the Chests, and taken any thing out of them, it is very ill done; therefore if any of them be missing, Thesin and Haykong must speak with the Ambassador about it, and desire him to restore them. Moreover an Order is expected from the Emperor, which when it comes, the Goods shall be again restor'd to the Batavian Chineses.

On which Order, without asking for them, they took away those Goods* 12.2 that were nearest at hand, and of small consequence, opening the Chests, and carrying them to their appointed Places; which they also thought to do with the Money and primest Commodities, standing in the Secretaries Chamber, had not the Ambassador prevented them; for the Netherlanders would not deli∣ver those themselves, but onely shew'd them where they were; from whence

they fetch'd their own Servants, and went to convey them out of the Lodge; which again was hindred by the Ambassador, who would first have the Goods weighed, and the Money told to them: He would moreover have a Receipt of them for so many several sorts of Commodities and Money for the use of the Batavian Chineses, which the Mandarins after having look'd them over per∣form'd, and then went away with them.

These Goods taken away by force, and the General's Order, it was thought convenient to Copy out the Receipt signed by the Mandarins, and carry it the next Morning when Nobel and Vander Does went to the Vice-Roy, to the Ge∣neral, and to tell him that the Mandarins, Liu and Liu-lavja, had by his Order taken the Goods out of the Lodge, of whose number and quantity they had, according to the Mandarins Receipt, brought him an account and Copy, that if the Goods hereafter should be diminished, the Netherlanders might be blame∣less.

The sixteenth in the Morning Nobel and the Secretary went to the Vice-Roy* 12.3 Singlamong, to speak with him about the Ship; before whom after a little stay they were brought to have Audience. After he had, according to the Tartars Custom, inquir'd of the Ambassador's Health, Nobel and Vander Does told him the occasion of their coming, viz. That the next day a Ship must go to Batavia. To which at first he said nothing else, but that they must speak with Talavja about it, till which time they must defer her going. Whereupon the Netherlanders told him, that the Ship must upon necessity go to Batavia, and her going could not be put off any longer, because, according to the Lord Maetzuiker's Order to the Ambassador, the Ship should have been gone two Moneths sooner, to carry news of their safe arrival, and what they had done in the Trade▪ and that the Ambassador was to take his Journey to Peking in four or five days, at which the Lord General would be highly pleas'd. To which the Vice-Roy reply'd, That they might let the Ship go away privately without telling any Person of it, and make themselves ready for their Jour∣ney; which done the Vice-Roy would impart something to them. More∣ver his earnest Request was, That nothing might be writ to Batavia of what had hitherto hapned.

From thence Nobel and Harthouwer went to the General, that according to* 12.4 yesterdays Resolution they might shew him the Receipt for the Chinese Goods; but before they went thither they sent a Soldier to the Ambassador, to tell him the Vice-Roy's Answer. Coming to the General's they were forc'd to stay a considerable time before any Person came to them; yet at last one pas∣sing by, they took occasion to send notice of their attendance: who brought them answer, That he knew of the fetching of the Goods by the Mandarins, Liu and Liu-lavja, in which they had done very well; and withall that he was busie about his Offerings, therefore could not grant them Audience, which* 12.5 made them not deliver the Receipt, but return home.

Van Hoorn being inform'd of the Vice-Roy's Answer about the Ship, re∣turn'd, being on his Way going to Singlamong's prime Factor, who had invited him to a Feast and Wayang, or Play, in Person to send away the Vlaerdings Boat, which waited onely for order when the fore-mention'd Ship should set Sail. To which purpose he wrote a Letter to Captain Vander Werf, That the Vice-Roy had at last consented that he might set Sail with his Ship, therefore he should put to Sea with as much silence as he could, without looking for any thing.

The Indian Council at Batavia seem'd much concern'd to hear News of the Ambassador's success in China; whom at his coming from thence they had commanded, that he should endeavor from Peking by Moskou, if it were pos∣sible, to send advice to the States of Holland. Therefore it was judg'd conveni∣ent on the fourth to send with the Vlaerding (for because of the Differences be∣tween the Governors Factors and the Hollanders, about the receiving of the Goods and delivering of Silks, they had lost their hopes of sending the Tyger time enough to Batavia, that from thence she might Sail with the last Ships* 12.6 that were bound for Holland) a Copy of the Letter written to Batavia, and sent by the Polesnip on the eleventh of October, that from Malacca it might be sent through Persia by Land to Holland: and likewise the Copies of the Letters which had been written were also sent to go thither with the Tyger. Besides which Van Hoorn also sent a Letter apart to the Lords before mention'd, which serv'd as a cover for all the other. The said Letters, though open, were sent to the Governors Balthazar Bort and Paviljon, with Orders to send them away with all speed. Bort was also commanded, that if an opportunity did present it self there, to send Copies of those Letters that were directed for Holland, to the Indian Council at Batavia.* 12.7

After the Boat was sent away with the fore-mention'd Letters, Van Hoorn went again to the chief Factors House, where he was nobly entertain'd. At their departure Nobel and Harthouwer led the Factor into a private Room, and ask'd him if he would let them have any other Silk? which he much scrupled at, fearing lest it might be discover'd; yet if they would faithfully promise not to speak of any such thing, or make mention thereof at Peking, he would deliver them some: which the Hollanders on the other side as much scrupling, they broke off farther Discourse, and so parted.

The next Morning they went again to the Factor about the same Business, and told him, That before their Journey to Peking the Hopou must make all things even; that the Tyger being unladen, must go again to Netherland Haven; and the Alphen would also be suddenly deliver'd, therefore they must now ei∣ther receive Money or Silks to divide and lade into the Ships. Moreover, as they pass'd by they call'd at the Vice-Roy's, and ask'd him when his Highness would be at leisure to permit the Ambassador to come and confer with him about his addressing himself to the Court. Whereupon the prime Factor seem∣ing to be somewhat dissatisfi'd, ask'd if ever they remain'd in their debt, that the Hopou should so much press their setling and making even of Accounts be∣fore he went to Peking, with many other Discourses to the like purpose; yet at last promis'd they should have Money the next Morning, it lying ready for them: with this Answer the Netherlanders took their leave; and as they pass'd by went to the Vice-Roy's Court, who sent them word that the Ambassador might within two days come and speak with him about the Embassy.

Mean while two Mandarins came to the Lodge to tell the Ambassador from the General, That he must make himself ready for his departure at farthest in seven days, demanding a List of the Names of the Persons, and number of the Packs, Chests, and other things that were to go with him; which immediately was deliver'd to them.* 12.8

The eighteenth two Mandarins came to the Lodge, to ask the Ambassador why he did not set forth on the twentieth of their Moon? To which he an∣swer'd, That all things had been and were ready, and that it was not his fault, having stay'd onely for an Answer to the Request about the Ships set∣ting

[illustration]

Sail. Then the Mandarins reply'd, The Generals do give leave that three Ships may depart, and also that the Blyswiik might fall down; wherefore they must prepare for their Journey, because the General was not satisfi'd that they stay'd so long. Neither did the Hollanders stay after these good tydings, but immediately Shipp'd off all their Goods, and prepar'd to begin their Voyage.

In the Morning, being the nineteenth, four Mandarins came to the Lodge, two sent from the General, and two from the Vice-Roy, to drink to the Am∣bassador's health and good success in their Journey, and at Peking also, inform∣ing them how they should carry themselves there: and also two Interpreters, Ienko and Liulako, which came with the Mandarins, being sent by their High∣nesses to observe the Hollanders Transactions; nay, they were to do nothing without their advice, because they knew the Custom of the Countrey, and al∣so what was best to be done, or otherwise. The Netherlanders willing to be led by them, answer'd, That they would endeavor in all things to give the Vice-Roy and General satisfaction: Whereupon the Mandarins took their leave, being Presented each of them with a Piece of Crown Serge.

The Merchant Harthouwer had a written Order given him, according to which he was to govern himself during the Ambassador's absence, and like∣wise the Names and numbers of the Persons that were to stay with him in Hoksieu.

The twentieth in the Morning, after all their Goods and Necessaries were* 12.9 Shipp'd in thirty eight Barques, they went away with the Flood, and came about Noon to Hoksantiouw Bridge, two Leagues distant from Lamthay, the Suburbs of Hoksieu; where they found the Vessels, with their Mandarin and Guides lying at Anchor. Here the Netherlanders were forc'd to stay till all their Barques came thither. Harthouwer and some other Persons which had accom∣panied the Ambassador to this Place, return'd in the Evening.

They were no sooner gone, but several Mandarins came to ask the Nether∣landers* 12.10 how many their Train consisted of, being two and thirty, whereof five were Negro Boys. To which they reply'd, That neither the Vice-Roy nor General would suffer above twenty four Persons in all to go, because it was written to the Emperor so many should come.

In the Afternoon about four a Clock the Hollanders, being twenty four in* 12.11 number, that belong'd to several Offices, went at the Flood with about fifty Barques Westerly up the River Min▪ and came in the Evening about seven a Clock to an Isle, lying about a Cannon-shot from the Village call'd Unwono, where they stay'd that Night, being got a League to the Westward.

The two and twentieth at Day-break they set Sail again, and about nine a Clock pass'd Howtong, a Village lying on the right-side of the River, In the Af∣ternoon they Sail'd by Petjong, Hongia, and Tiksoya on the same Shore; they came in the Dusk of the Evening before Congimon, having that day by Rowing and Sailing gotten five Leagues more to the Westward.

All the fore-mention'd Villages were thick built with Houses, that were lit∣tle better than our Huts or Hovels, but the adjacent Fields abounding with Rice and store of other Grain.

The three and twentieth in the Morning they proceeded, (the Wind still favoring them) and about nine a Clock pass'd by Binkin, a Village by some call'd Mincing, three Leagues from Congimon, standing behind a Hill a little up in the Countrey, on the left-side of the River Min.

This Town is adorn'd with fair Buildings, and a high Steeple, which ap∣pears

with its Spiry top above the Mountain, and seen by all those that pass by it.

In the Afternoon they had in view Anike, Siaivang, and Twavigh; the first of which Towns lies on the right, and the other two on the left Hand, the last being about three Leagues from Binkin: at four after Noon they arriv'd at Chukaw, where they rested that Night, to get Coelies to Tow their Boats, because the Stream ran very slack, having that day made six Leagues and a half more Westerly.

The Verges of the River here are nothing but hilly and barren Cliffs.

The twenty fourth in the Morning, the Wind at North-East, they got two Coelies for every Vessel, and going on their Journey about eight a Clock pass'd by Caukawa, a Village on the left side of the River, a League from Chukaw, and in the Evening Landed at Poutcham, where they saw some decay'd Houses, ha∣ving that day gain'd, though with no small danger of Rocks and strong Water-falls, three Leagues.

The next Morning, being the twenty fifth, they left Poutcham, and about two a Clock in the Afternoon pass'd by Tiongopan and Iunchiam, both lying on the left side of the River, the last being two Leagues distant from Poutcham; and in the Evening they came over against Ukekaun near a Watch-house, ha∣ving not gotten above three Leagues all that day, because of the Sholes and contrary Current.

The twenty sixth in the Morning putting forward, they were drawn up over Sholes and Rocks, which by the violent Precipes and fall of the Stream seem'd very dreadful, and not without imminent danger, as appear'd by the Barque in which the Comptroller Ruwenort was, which Rowing about as they suppos'd for advantage, ran on a Rock and sunk immediately; yet most of the Goods were sav'd, though we•…•…. In the Afternoon they reach'd Kantang and Poinpang, Villages standing on the right side going up, and in the Evening Landed near a Watch-house call'd Bokkay; where they reposed that Night, ha∣ving gone but two Leagues and a half that day, and with great trouble.

The twenty seventh about Day-break they weigh'd, and before Noon saw several Priests Houses and Hamlets, built on the hangings or declivings of the Mountains, and in the Afternoon about four a Clock they came to Seghia and Siong, two Villages opposite one to the other, about two Leagues from Bokkay; from whence passing on they arriv'd at another Watch-house call'd Soujong, where they stay'd the following Night, having with great danger got∣ten two Leagues and a half to the West.

The twenty eighth in the Morning they came between two great Towers about nine a Clock, each standing on a Summit fronting the other on the side of the River; behind which appears the City Iemping, or Ienping, or Ienpingsoe. The Ambassador passing through the Bridge, was by two Mandarins, sent from the General of that Place, call'd Sioubontok, invited to Dinner to his Palace; whither he went with some of his Attendants: So soon as he came with his Barque to one of the City Gates, he was kindly receiv'd by Sioubontok, and nobly Entertain'd after the Chinese manner with variety of Dishes, and several Entries of their Wayangs, or Stage-plays.

No Discourse of any concern hapned here, onely Sioubontok ask'd if the Ne∣therlanders had Quelang? and how many Men kept the Place? Which the Am∣bassador answering according, and taking his leave, went in the Evening Aboard; where they sound some fresh Provisions, sent thither by the General's Order,

consisting in Oxen, Swine, Hens, Ducks, and Herbs, for which the Beaters receiv'd five Crowns of Silver; and the Ambassador, according to the Custom of the Countrey, gave the Wayang Actors, and also the Servants that attended him at the Table, five Dollars apiece.

In the Evening Sioubontok came in Person Aboard, and a little after the Go∣vernor of the City, being a comely proper Man, with a long Beard, Habited after the Chinese manner in Mourning for a deceased Relation, both welcom∣ing the Ambassador and Haulavia the Mandarin that was sent with him as his Guide, who would not come to Sioubontok's Feast, though invited several times. After the Netherlanders had given them a taste of their Spanish Wine, and they view'd the Horses and Oxen, and Sandal Wood that were to be presented to the Emperor, they took their leave and walk'd to their several Houses in the Dusk of the Evening. Sioubontok after his departure sent the Ambassador some Geese, and six Picol of Rice. After which he sent the Interpreter Maurice Iansz Vis, to the General Sioubontok, to enquire how the Netherlanders Business stood at Peking, because Maurice was very familiar with him, having been his Servant when he was a Prisoner amongst the Chineses. Maurice at his coming back brought word from Sioubontok, That the Netherlanders were in great esteem at Court, and that he doubted not but they would obtain what ever they desir'd: but there were some great Persons at Peking which they must seek to please and get their favor, by which they need not doubt to have all their Requests grant∣ed. Moreover he desir'd Maurice to entreat the Ambassador in his behalf, that when the Emperor should chance to speak with him about the conquering of Tayowan, (which without doubt he would do) that he would please to speak in his behalf, that he might go with them to the subduing of the Place, because he had a Wife and Children, and several Goods there.

The twenty ninth in the Morning, Sioubontok sent more fresh Provisions, as Poultrey, Swine, Sallet Herbs, and Provender for the Horses; for all which the Secretary Vander Does went and presented him in the Ambassadors Name with a Fowling-piece, a Pair of Pistols, a Couple of Knives, a Chain of Amber Beads, one Piece of Amber weighing ten Ounces, ten Dutch Ells of fine Cloth, and likewise an Inventory of the Presents design'd for him, which if he would not accept now, he might receive them at the Ambassador's Return. The Se∣cretary was also commanded to desire Sioubontok to instruct the Netherlanders how they should carry themselves to the four Zoetaysings which he had spoken of to the Interpreter Maurice, and likewise inform them of some other Lords that might assist them in their Business in Peking.

The Secretary at his Return related, That he had shewn Sioubontok the In∣ventory of his Presents, who said he would receive them with many thanks; proffering moreover his Service to assist the Hollanders in what ever they pleas'd to desire of him. After some Discourse the Secretary ask'd him concerning the four Zoetaysings, or Great Men, and what Lords they were best to address themselves to in Peking? Whereupon commanding all his Attendants to avoid the Presence, he reply'd, That when the Netherlanders came to Peking, they must endeavor to gain the four chief Councellors, or Zoetaysings favor, (who during the Emperor's Minority were Guardians, or Protectors of the Empire) which was very easily be done, if they did but employ some faithful Persons to intercede for them, and in their Name Present them with Money and Gifts, which they loved very well: To which purpose, that he might assist them, he would send a Letter with them to Peking, to a certain Mandarin which was in

great Repute there, and was formerly one of his Deputies, who would on his Recommendation be very serviceable to them; and that he had also Presented some prime Councellors each with a Negro Boy, which were also his Friends, and would aid the Hollanders in their Business; They should not repose too much confidence in the Proffers of several Persons pretending to belong to the Court; for many cunning Villains would come and perswade them to be∣lieve that they were such and such great Lords which they were not, as he himself had found when there in Person, therefore they ought to have a great care that their Followers were not talkative, which might prove a great disad∣vantage to their Business: but if they could get into the four Councellors of States favor, they could but ask and have; for what-ever they requested would certainly be granted them. There are also (said he) several Officers belong∣ing to the Councel, to which he would recommend them and their Business. Whereupon the Secretary taking his leave, thanked him for his good advice, and so went Aboard.

The Presents design'd for Sioubontok being brought to Land, though not without some difficulty, were by Captain Putmans carry'd to him, who sent the Ambassador twenty Pieces of Stuff for the Clothing of his Retinue, and some Fruits, in return for them; whereupon the Stuffs were immediately distribu∣ted amongst the Men.

In the Afternoon Lunlakko the Interpreter brought the Ambassador from his* 12.12 Mandarin twelve Pieces of Chinese Boat-Silver, to bear his Expences, telling him it was by the Emperor's order; and also that the Ambassador was at such Places to have twelve Condarins, or fifteen Stuivers; Nobel, fourteen Condarins, or twelve Stuivers; Putmans, twelve Condarins, or ten Stuivers; all which Money it was thought fit to refuse: but because the Mandarins and Interpreters durst not receive it again, saying, That what the Emperor had commanded must be obey'd; and if they would not accept of it, they might keep it and return it in Peking: Whereupon it was deliver'd to the Comptroller Ruwenoort to keep till they came thither.

The City Ienping, or Ienpingfoe, the next to the prime City, or Metropolis of* 12.13 the Province of Fokien, lies at the going up of the Stream on the right Hand, or on the Westerly Shore of the River Min; from whence it maketh a handsom Prospect on the side of a Hill, the Edifices rising gently by degrees.

This Mountain is for the most part inaccessible, making the City rather a Fortress, and to be esteem'd as the Key of the whole Province.

The City is a League long, but not above a Mile and a half broad, full of fair and large Buildings. Every House is furnish'd with Water convey'd from the Mountains in Cane Pipes, the like not elsewhere to be seen in China.

All Provisions are to be had there in great abundance, and at a cheap Rate; the Streets and Houses also throng'd with Inhabitants.

On the East side of the City two great Rivers, the Min and Zi, uniting their Waters, make a great Lake; through which Ships come thither from all parts of the adjacent Countrey. Each of these Rivers hath a fair Bridge; and in the City are three beautiful Temples.

Most of the course China Paper is made here; but the whitest and finest sort in a Village call'd Siege, three Leagues beyond more Westerly, which is all that is there of remark; onely this City boasts that her Inhabitants speak the most elegant Phrase of all the Chineses, and therefore it is call'd the Man∣darins, or Court Language.

[illustration]

[illustration]

That Night the Netherlanders lay a little from the City near the opposite Shore; from whence they Row'd and set Sail the thirtieth in the Morning to Honjong, a Village about a League from Ienping, where all their Fleet Rendez∣vouz'd, having had a narrow and dangerous Passage thither. Hence they set Sail again about nine a Clock, and in the Afternoon▪ pass'd by Louquon, Hoeyong, Linkentome, and Tafa; the two first of which lie on the right, and the two last on the left side of the River, about half a League distant one from another.

In the Evening they anchor'd before Ongsoutow, having that day gain'd three Leagues in a Northerly Course.

The one and thirtieth in the Morning setting Sail again, they pass'd by a long Village call'd Bonsjouko about eight a Clock, and at ten by the Village Liucuir, Posjen, and Ubaka; the first and last on the right side, and the second on the left.

In Ubaka much Paper is made, which appear'd by several Vessels that lay Freighted onely with such Goods to go up the River.

About Noon they saw Konchian, Sioeukke, and Tayping; the two first on the right, and the third on the left side of the Stream, close by one another.

In the Afternoon about three a Clock they came to Chiakiang, where they Rode till the next day.

The next Morning, being the first of February, they set Sail again, and in* 12.14 the Afternoon pass'd by five Villages, viz. Siejokaun, Itantauw, Bayapo, Siema, and Filictauw; the two first lying on the right, and the two last on the left side of the River; and about Noon they arriv'd at the City of Kienning, or Kienning∣foe, where the Horses were immediately put ashore, because the Barques in which they came were judg'd too big to carry them up any higher; but not getting any smaller that day, they were set up till the next Morning.

Here the Netherlanders had the Gates shut against them, being not permitted to enter the City; so that they were not able to get any fresh Provisions; nay, none were suffer'd to sell any thing to the Netherlanders without the Interpre∣ters

leave, who acted as Comptrollers where-ever they came, and especially Ienko, as appear'd by a Soldier that belong'd to Sioubontok, General of the City▪ Ienping; who having bought some Fruit for the Ambassador, and bringing it to him, was, so soon as the Interpreters were inform'd of it, taken by the Mandarins Order, and ty'd Neck and Heels together, and had not the Ambassa∣dor interceded for him, they had sent him a Prisoner to Hoksieu, where he would have been severely punish'd; but the Ambassador at last prevail'd so much that he was set at liberty.

The second, after the Vessels were prepar'd to carry the Horses, they were immediately imbarqu'd again, and all safely put Aboard; the Tartars being highly pleas'd with them, had dress'd them so neatly, that they were slick as Glass.

In the Evening the Mandarins which were the Netherlanders Guides, presented them with some boyl'd and roasted Meats.

Thus having gotten all things in a readiness, they left the City Kienningfoe on the third, the Governors thereof being so surly, that they not once bid the Ambassador welcom, or wish'd him a good Journey at his going from thence, nor presented him with the least Provision, which no way grieved them, who by that means kept their Chests lock'd.

This Kienningfoe being the fourth, and so one of the most eminent Cities in* 12.15 Fokien, lying on the Eastern Shore of the River Min, is something inferior in Beauty and Riches, but not in bigness to the Metropolis Focheu, and larger than Ienping, but not so close built, because several Corn-Fields are inclos'd within her Walls. The Streets are all Pav'd with Pebble, and very full of In∣habitants, that drive no other Trade but making of course Paper. They are Rul'd by two Governors, which sway alternately, the one not so much as once daring to contradict the other in his time.

China affords several sorts of Paper, made of several Materials, viz. of the Body and Leaves of Cane-tree, Cotton, Silk, and Flaxen Clothes: that which is made of Cotton is not altogether so white as our French Paper.

In the County of Vuchaufu, belonging to the Countrey of Huquang: They make also great quantities of Paper, of the Canes and Leaves, which grow there in great abundance.

In the Forenoon having left Kienningfoe, they pass'd by Gaetchan, Maschetany, and Petchin, Villages lying close together on the left side of the River; the last lying about a League from Kienningfoe. In the Afternoon they saw by the Village Kekau, Vazoeo and Gautauw; the two first on the right, and the last on the left side of the River. Towards Evening they came before, and Landed at a ruin'd and decay'd Village call'd Chiaphong, where they remain'd all Night. Here they directed their Course almost North, having a little of the West.

The next Morning, being the fourth, leaving Chiaphong, they pass'd by Chincheuw, seated on the right side of the River, a League from Chiaphong; and in the Afternoon by several Hamlets, Houses and Pagodes, that stood here and there apart from the rest, along the Margents of the River. In the Evening they arriv'd at a ruinous Town call'd Sjovova, on the right side of the River, having that day gain'd but two Leagues with great trouble.

The fifth in the Morning setting Sail again, they left the Villages Tachoe and Pagou on their left hand, and in the Afternoon pass'd by Swinckin, situate on their right hand; and arriving at Suchiap about three a Clock they Landed, ha∣ving that day gain'd two Leagues and a 〈◊〉〈◊〉.

[illustration]

[illustration]

[illustration]

The sixth in the Morning leaving Sichiap (where they had chang'd their Coelies, or Pugs, for the Towing forward of their Vessels,) they pass'd by Tin∣tenna, Cholunga, and Leantong, three Villages seated on the right hand. In the Afternoon they ran by the Villages Losjouwa and Sichem, built on the same side; and towards Evening anchor'd opposite to the Village Hochiechien, having gain'd three Leagues that day.

The seventh proceeding on their Journey, they pass'd Hoesuna and Nagan, and at Noon arriv'd at Quiquan; where they stay'd for the Vessels that brought the Horses, which by reason of the shallow Water could not get up the River so fast; but at last arriving, the Masters of them complain'd, that by drawing over the Sands they were grown very leaky, and that it was impossible to go any further with them before they were mended and trimm'd up a new; for which cause it was judg'd convenient to put the Horses ashore, and send them by Land to Poutchin, by others call'd Puchin, a good Town not above five Leagues from Quiquan. The Horses being got safe ashore were set up till next Morning. The Comptroller Ruwenoort, Interpreter Maurice, and the four Grooms, were order'd to Ride them thither; and also twelve Chinese Sol∣diers by order of their Mandarins were sent to conduct them. That Night the Vessels lay at Anchor before Quiquan.

The eighth they left Quiquan at Day-break, and about Noon pass'd by the Village Souswenna, standing on the left hand: soon after they got sight of a great▪ Town call'd Swipia, near which appear'd several ruin'd Houses, and also a large, but broken and decay'd Stone Bridge; and about four a Clock they came before Chintewa, a Village lying on their left hand, a Mile from Swipia, and towards Evening dropt Anchor near a Watch-Tower, about which were built a few Houses, having that day with great danger gain'd three Leagues.

The ninth in the Morning weighing, they pass'd by two Villages call'd Gotanga and Quotinha, the first lying on the right, and the second on the left hand: at Noon they saw a Temple, which being built over a Moat, or Sluce

like a Bridge, under which at High-water Vessels might pass, was round about adorn'd, after the Chinese manner, with Imagery, to which they ascended by a pair of Stairs rais'd on one side of it. After Noon they pass'd Saloekia, and se∣veral other Places ruin'd in the last War, onely some Pieces of Walls remain∣ing. The Night approaching, they cast Anchor before a Sandy Plain, about a League from Poutchinfoe, having with much ado that day gain'd three Leagues.

The tenth in the Morning they set Sail about eight a Clock through a bro∣ken Bridge, formerly laid cross the River, and about Noon came to Poutchin,* 12.16 the fourth eminentest City belonging to Kienningfoe. Here the Comptroller Ru∣wenoort came to the Ambassador, to tell him that the Horses came safely thither the last Night, and were put into a Stable joyn'd to the House, prepar'd for them to stay in, till the Coelies were come to carry the Emperor's Presents. The Ambassador commanded the Secretary to ask the Mandarins that were come with him, because the Houses prepar'd for him and his Attendants were very old and rotten, and scarce fit to Lodge in, if he might stay so long in the Barques till such time as the Coelies were come up, and they ready to go far∣ther. But the Mandarins said that it could not be, because all the Goods must be taken an account of, that they might see how many Coelies they should want to carry them. Whereupon they found it convenient to Land all their Goods the next Morning, and put the Oxen ashore that Afternoon. In the Evening the Netherlanders were presented with some fresh Provisions, by some Mandarins belonging to the Conbon of Hoksieu, and likewise by their Mandarine Guides; for which Van Hoorn (they having presented him several times before) gave them a small Piece of Plate.

The eleventh in the Morning all the Presents were unladen and carry'd to* 12.17 the House prepared for that purpose, which was not onely very old, but of no convenience, the Rooms being so bad and so few, seeming rather a Hog∣stye than a Dwelling-house: but they no way able to better themselves were forc'd to be contented. In the Evening order was given to watch the Goods, because they were constrain'd to lie in open Places, incident to filching Pilfer∣ers. Every Person was also strictly commanded not to stir abroad without the Ambassador's leave, thereby to shew the Chineses, who had forbid the Hol∣landers from going into the City, that they did not value it, there being nothing to do for them.

The thirteenth the chief of the Coelies, as the Mandarins their Guides inform'd the Ambassador, came to his Lodging to take an account of the number of the Chests and Packs, and to see how many Coelies would be requisite to carry them: after the weight and number were written down, they found that they should want six hundred Coelies for the carrying of the Presents and other Goods.

The fourteenth in the Morning both the Mandarins came again, with Ienko and Liu-lako the Interpreters, to the Netherlanders in their Lodging, to tell them that the number of the Coelies for the carrying of the Goods far exceeded the number express'd in their Warrant given them by the General, because onely two Persons were allow'd for the carrying of a Pack or Case, whereas now there were several amongst them which two Men were not able to carry, and thereupon would want two hundred Porters: and moreover, that the Manda∣rins of the City durst not do contrary to the General's Order; in allowing them more Coelies than was express'd in their Warrant. Whereupon Van Hoorn reply'd,

That if the Hopou and Pimpous in Peking had given such Order, it was well: Moreover, he would pay for the Carriage of what was over and above that which was mention'd in the Pass; and that it seem'd strange to him, since in Hoksieu the number of the Cases and Packs that belong'd to the Embassy were deliver'd in Writing to the General's Officers, which had seen them, and might well have discern'd that there were several Chests amongst them which could not be carry'd by two Men: but it was no great matter, for if they got no Coe∣lies they were the less obliged: Nay, he knew the former Ambassadors never wanted Men to carry their Goods, and had also much more honor and respect shewn them than was done to him, never travelling through any Place but they were fetch'd in, and nobly entertain'd by the Governors thereof; whereas now on the contrary the Gates were shut up against him, and he forbid to come in∣to the City. To which the Mandarins made no Reply.

Mean while the City Mandarin who commanded the Coelies, came in Person to the Ambassador; whereupon a Contest began between him and the Manda∣rine Guides; which being no way pleasing to the Ambassador, he said that he would have no Quarrel about the Emperor's and his Goods, for he would pay those Coelies which were wanting above the number express'd in the General's Warrant: Whereupon as many Coelies were provided as they wanted; and the Ambassador wrote a Letter to the General in Hoksieu to this effect:

THat the Ambassador would never forget the many great Favors which he receiv'd from his Highness in Hoksieu, and doth not doubt but that he will continue the same: In return whereof, he desires that Talavja might be assur'd, that neither in the Court at Peking, nor any other Place in the World, he would seek or do any thing to his disliking or disparagement. That himself hath well arriv'd at Chinkon in Pouchin, and finds that he wants more Coelies than are express'd in the Pay or Warrant granted him, whom if his Ex∣cellency think fit, he will cause to be paid by the Hopou in Hoksieu.

This Letter deliver'd to the Mandarins, the Ambassador ask'd when they should proceed on their Journey? to which they answer'd, Two days hence. Then he enquir'd if the Horses and Oxen might not be sent away before, be∣cause the Oxen travell'd but slowly: which being granted, they prepar'd all things accordingly. But in the Evening a Chinese Secretary, call'd Sinko, said that the Mandarins caus'd Frames to be made to carry the Oxen, because it would be impossible for them to go over the Mountains: at which the Am∣bassador seem'd very well satisfi'd, and accordingly put off their going.

In the Morning, being the sixteenth, Hiu-lavja, one of the Netherlanders Man∣darine Guides came with the Frames for the Oxen to the Ambassador's Lodg∣ings; who asking him when they should go from thence? reply'd, Two days hence: Then he desir'd to know the reason why they must stay so long, because the Mandarin had on the fourteenth Instant also told him, That he should go two days hence: Whereupon he said, That it was because the Coelies which they wanted above the number mention'd in the Pass granted by Talavja, was not yet allow'd by the City Mandarins, who had promis'd, that within two days all things should be ready, himself wishing that the Hollanders were gone. To which the Ambassador reply'd, That he knew that the Lepous were some∣what displeas'd about their so long tarrying at Hoksieu, being detain'd there by the Vice-Roy, therefore it would be very inconvenient to lose more time there; so that if the Lepous should chance to ask him about it in Peking, he

could freely declare that it was not his, but the Mandarins fault, who made him wait for Coelies. Which Discourse prevail'd so much, that Porters were im∣mediately sent to carry the Sandal Wood, with which they walk'd before, it being very troublesom for its length and heaviness to be got over the Moun∣tains.

The eighth in the Morning an hundred Coelies came to the Ambassador's Lodging, to tie and pack up the Presents to be carry'd in Burthens, and to go with their Loads before with the Horses and Oxen; with which the Secretary Vander Does was also order'd to Travel before; the Ambassador, Nobel, and the rest intending to follow them in the Afternoon: but because one of the Horses had receiv'd a hurt on his Head above the left Eye, the Ambassador thought it convenient to stay a day or two longer in Poutchin, and to keep one Horse more besides the fore-mention'd, to see in that time what could be done to him, and then give order for his stay, or taking along with him. Whereupon the Se∣cretary, with two Horses, the Oxen, and the hundred Coelies, with their Loads went before, Nobel and Putmans being order'd to follow him in the Afternoon; but because the tying up of the Goods spent too much time, it was deferr'd till the next Morning.

The Horse being pretty well recover'd, the Ambassador went from Poutchin* 13.1 the one and twentieth in the Morning; and having travell'd half a League by the Village Olian, and in the Afternoon by Sisanly and Singan, and some Pa∣godes or Temples, towards Evening came to Guliaen, where they reposed that Night.

The next day being Snowy and Rainy, they rested themselves in expectati∣on of fair Weather.

The twenty third the Skye being pretty well clear'd, notwithstanding the Mountains were still cover'd with Snow, the Ambassador leaving Guliaen pro∣ceeded on his Journey, and in the Morning pass'd over a high Hill, and so through Huysjounton, Hangsion, Outangay, Ontongne, Kieumoe, and Ousalinga; from whence they saw divers Pagodes built on the Declivings of several Mountains. In the Afternoon they travell'd in sight of the Villages Movana, Loutiatona, Go∣linga, Longkia, Kiekova, and divers Hamlets and Temples, of which very many stand all along this Road; amongst whom they saw one on the top of the Mountain Liougtouw, and call'd by the same Name.

Here are the utmost Limits of the Province of Fokien and Chekiang, or Chet∣chiang, between both which the foremention'd Temple stands; so that now leaving Fokien, they entred into that of Chekiang, and going on came towards the Evening to a Village call'd Limathova, having that day travell'd five Leagues, four in the Territory of Fokien, and one in that of Chekiang.

This Province, though less than others, yet exceeds all the rest in fertility* 13.2 of Soil, delightfulness of Prospects and Riches, beginning in the South under twenty seven Degrees and five Minutes Northern Latitude, and extending Northerly to thirty one Degrees and twenty five Minutes, a Tract of sixty five Leagues, the greatest breadth from East to West being almost of the same length. It borders Easterly on the Sea, where the shortest Cut is to Iapan, and not above a days Sailing, as some say, with a fresh Gale of Wind; in the South and South-West, upon Fokien; in the West and North, upon Nanking, and like∣wise touches with a small part upon Kiangsi. It is divided into eleven great* 13.3 Counties, almost as large as some Provinces (for one of them being Hancheufu, and the chiefest of them, is ample and powerful enough to be a Province or

Kingdom) viz. Hangcheufu, Kiahingfu, Hucheugfu, Nienchufu, Kinhoafu, Kieucheufu, Chucheufu, Xaohiugfu, Ningpofu, Taicuheufu, and Vencheufu, having several great and small Towns, to the number of eighty three, belonging to them, be∣sides unwall'd Places, and an incredible number of Castles and populous Villages.

The chief Tract of Land call'd Hangcheufu, borders Northerly on Hucheufu, and Kianhingfu; in the East, at the River Chee, between Kianhingfu and Xao∣hingfu; in the South, at Nienchufu; and in the West, at Nanking.

In ancient times this County belong'd to the Vice-Roy of V. and was afterwards possess'd by the King of Cu, and by the Family of Chin nam'd Cien∣tang: by the Emperor Sui it was first styl'd Hangcheu; by the Family Tang, Iuhang; by Sung, Lingan; but the Taimingian Family restor'd this Country to its old Name.

This Division contains eight Cities, of which Hancheu is the chiefest, the rest▪ are Huining, Tiuquang, Inlang, Liugany, Yuum, Sinching, and Changhoa.

The second County call'd Kiahingfu, every where water'd with Rivers and Lakes, borders in the East, upon the Sea; in the South, upon a part of the Ocean, and part of Hangcheufu; Westward at Hucheufu; and in the North, at Sucheufu and Sungkiangfu, the Territory of Nanking, and a part of the Lake call'd Tai.

This Shire contains six Cities, viz. Kiahing, Kiaxeny, Hayeni, Pinghu, Cungte, and Tungchiang.

The Metropolis Kiahing was formerly a small City, and subject to Sucheu; but growing in Riches and Greatness in the Reign of the Taimingian Family, it was made the Head City, or Metropolis, and chang'd its former Name Siucheu to Kiahing.

The City Kiahang, being the most Northern of the whole Province, lies as if it were Moated about with Rivulets of Water, full of stately and well built Stru∣ctures, flourishing with variety of its own Product, having in all Places Riches and Plenty. All the Streets of the City are Arch'd, under which they walk as in a Piatzo, or Exchange, free from Wind and Weather, and sheltred from Sun and Rain. Without the City are several Triumphal Arches erected; and on the West side near the River, in one peculiar Place which they Sail by with their Ships or Vessels, stand sixteen of these Arches in a Square, all built of Marble. Athwart the River stands a Bridge of Marble, with many Arches, seventy Paces long, and likewise a Tower thrusting forth towards the Skye, nine Pinacles or Spires. All the Shores without the City are wharfed with square Free-stone; of which also the lesser Bridges are made that lead over them: There are forty more fair Bridges leading to several parts of the City, besides a great many less, scarce to be numbred.

The third County being Hucheufu borders in the East with Kiahingfu; in the South, upon Hangcheufu; in the West, verges the Province of Nanking; in the North, at the Lake Tai.

This was formerly a Kingdom of it self, and nominated Tung; which first was possess'd by King V. and afterwards by Ine, then by Cu.

The Family Cyn gave this County and its Head City the Name of Uching; that of Tang call'd it Hucheu, that is, The City of the Lake, because of the neigh∣boring Lake Tai; for Hu signifies a Lake, and Cheu a City: the Royal Line of Sung nam'd it Chaoking; but the Taimingian Family restor'd the old Name Hucheu.

Here are five Temples, the chiefest of which stands within the City Walls: they were founded in honor of the five first Emperors.

This Division contains six Cities, viz. Hucheu, Changhing, Tecing, Hiaosung, Unkang, and Gankie. Hucheu is not onely the chief, but reckon'd one of the biggest, and flourishes in Trade and Riches: It is adorn'd with many beauti∣ful and large Buildings.

The fourth Niencheufu, is a mountainous and rough Countrey, and borders Eastward on the River Chee; South, at Kincheufu; the West, on Nanking; and the North, on Hancheufu. It was formerly call'd Suntu; next by the Family of Han, Lecheu; and lastly by that of Sung, Niencheufu. It contains six Cities, Niencheu, Xungan, Tungliu, Suigan, Xeuchang, and Fuentui.

The Metropolis Niencheu stands upon a rising Ground, between the Singan and Chee; which two Navigable Rivers before the Walls conjoyn their Waters.

The fifth Kinhoafu, touches North and East upon Xaohingfu and Taiche•…•…fu; in the South, upon Chuche•…•…fu; in the West, conterminates with Kincheufu; and the remainder bounded by the River Chee.* 13.4

King Loang call'd this with its Metropolis first by the Name of Kinhoa, that is, Venus Flower; for the Chineses say that the Goddess Venus striving here with another which they call Vuniu, (that is a Masculine Woman, and the same which the Poets call Pallas) a Flower; which obtaining, they styl'd her King∣sing, that is, Golden Star, and the City receiv'd the Name of Kinhoa, that is, Venus Flower.

This City Kinhoa was formerly very populous, and full of well built Edi∣fices; but in the late Tartar War, in which they held out a considerable time, was in a manner buried in Ruines: yet nevertheless it is almost re-erected, and especially one Stone Bridge on the West side hath obtain'd its former lustre.

This County hath eight Cities, Kinhoa, Lanki, Tungagang, Yui, Iungkang, Vuy,* 13.5 Pukiang, and Tanki.

Near the small City Lanki you may see another Bridge over the Chee, some few years since re-built, and now much better than the former burnt by the Tartars.

The sixth call'd Kincheufu, being the most Southern of all this Province,* 13.6 borders in the East at Kinhoafu; in the South-East, at Chincheufu; in the South-West, upon Fokien; in the West, on that of Nanking; and in the North, at Niencheufu.

In the time of the Kings Reigns, this Province with the two former suffer'd divers great Changes and Alterations: the Family Cyn, after they had taken all China, call'd its Metropolis Taimo; Han nam'd it Singuan; and the Family Tang gave it the Name which it now hath. It contains five Cities, viz. Kin∣cheu, Lungyeu, Changxan, Kiangzan, and Kaihoa.

The City Kincheu lies on the Eastern Shore of the River Changyo, three days Journey from Fokien, between steep and troublesom Mountains to pass over.

Paulus Venetus calls this City Kugui, according to the Tartar pronunciation, (with whom he travell'd in an Embassy thither) who in stead of Cheu, say Gui, both Words signifying Great City; wherefore Paulus may easily have made Kugui to be Kuicheu.

The seventh Division or Shire Chucheufu, inviron'd with several high Moun∣tains,* 13.7 borders in the East at Veucheufu; in the South-West, at Fokien; in the North-West, at Kuicheufu; in the North, upon the County Kinhaofu.

In the time of the Kings this Countrey was also subject to various Revolu∣tions and strange Alterations: The Family Tang gave it the Name of Hocheu; the Taimingian, that of Chucheu.

This Chucheufu contains ten Cities, of which Cheucheu is the Metropolis; the* 13.8 rest are Cingtien, Ciniquun, Sungyang, Sunchang, Lunguven, Kingyven, Iunko, Sivenping, and Kingning, besides three famous Temples.

The City of Chincheu, which is very populous, lieth upon the River Tung, which falls into the Sea, and able to carry Ships of good burthen.

The eighth Tract of Land, being Xaohingfu, borders in the East, with Ning∣pofu;* 13.9 North, upon the River Cientang; in the West, at that of Chee, and oppo∣site to Hangcheufu; in the South, at Kinhoafu and Taicheufu.

The Family Sung first gave this Countrey the present Name Xoahing; but it was formerly by the Family Tang call'd Iucheu. It reckons seven Cities,* 13.10 Xaohing, Siaoxan, Chuki, Yuyae, Xangyu, Xing, Sinchang.

The City of Xoahing, though not so big, yet in handsom Buildings exceeds the Metropolis; being seated in a pleasant Plain Moated with fresh Water, ve∣ry much resembling Venice, the Water gliding through every Street, which are all curiously Pav'd, and the Walls of the Houses all built of Free-Stone, which in China is very rare, and scarce to be seen in any other Place in the whole Empire. The Bridges also over which they pass the River and Lake, are all built in the same manner, being very numerous. The Banks of the River, which extends it self to three days Journey, are on each side wharf'd and wall'd in with Stone of the Quarre: at the end of which appears a great Dam, that receives and keeps the Waters, which swelling to a convenient heighth, Vessels that come thither, are with little help floated over into another Stream.

This Current serves onely to bring small Vessels up to the City Ningpo, for the great ones go about by Sea.

Near this City are also many Triumphal Arches; for building of which they have ready accommodation, because the Quarres that serve all China are close by their Doors.

The ninth Division call'd Ningpofu, borders in the East with the Sea; in the* 13.11 West, with Xaochingfu; South, upon a River flowing between this and the County Tancheufu.

The Kings Iue gave this and its Metropolis the Name of Iungtung; the Fami∣ly of Yang, Nungcheu; those of Sung, Kingchyven; but at last by the Taimingian, Ningpo, that is, Reconciler of Strife.

The Kings of Han brought this Countrey under the Territory of Huiki.

Ningpofu hath five Cities, viz, Ningpo, Cuki, Funghoa, Finghai, and Siangxan.

Not far from Ningpo lies a Promontory, which the Portuguese formerly very* 13.12 much frequented, who corrupted the Name to Liampo.

Some say, that from this Point in serene Weather they can discern the Mountains of Iapan; whereas the most exact Chinese Cards or Maps make the Sea much broader than to discover any such Prospect.

The Metropolis Ningpo, situated close by the River In, boasts store of hand∣som Buildings. On whose Eastern Shore stand several Triumphal Arches, and two Steeples with seven Galleries one over another: The Banks of the said River are all rais'd of Free-Stone; at the end the Water is also stopp'd with a Stone Dam, over which they hale the Vessels into a larger Channel.

In the little City Cuky are two Bridges, one with Stone Supporters, and great Pieces of Timber three hundred Rods long: another which is very high, and all of Stone, stands on three Arches.

The tenth County call'd Taicheufu, being a great Tract of Land, verges* 13.13 Eastward with the Sea; Southward, with Vencheufu; Westward, with Kinhoa∣f•…•…; Northward, with Xaohingfu and Ningpofu.

In the time of the Kings this Countrey belong'd to V. afterwards to Iue; but was at last by the Family Cyn brought under the Territory of Minching. The Family Han gave it the Name of Changan; Tang, of Haicheu; and soon after* 13.14 that of Taicheu, which it retains to this day.

This Countrey comprehends six Cities, viz. Taicheu, Hoanguien, Tientai, Cien∣kiu,* 13.15 Ninghai, Taiping.

This City Taicheu is situate on a Hill, lying on the East side of the River San.

The eleventh call'd Veucheufu, conterminates in the East at the Sea; in the* 13.16 South, with the Territory of Fokien; in the West, at Cucheufu; in the North, at Taicheufu.

This Countrey is for the most part very mountainous, but hath in the South, before you approach the Hills of Fokien, a large and spacious Plain.

Formerly this Countrey belong'd to the Kings of Iue; afterwards to those of V. King Loang gave it the Name of Iungkia; and was by the House of Tang first call'd Tunkia; and soon after Voucheu; by Sung, Xuigan; and lastly by the Taimingian, Veucheu.

This Province Veucheu possesses six Cities, viz. Veucheu, Xuigan, Locing, Ping,* 13.17 Yang, and Taixium.

The City of Veucheu, seated on the River Iungkia, because it is also like the Metropolis Hangcheu, standing on a Morass Soil, and adorn'd with many fair Edifices, is by the Inhabitants call'd Little Hancheu.

The City is very populous, and a Residence for many Merchants, whose Ships find good and safe Harbors in the great River Iungkia; the Sea ebbing and flowing up to the City Walls.

Near the Sea-shore in this Territory are fifteen Garisons, built against the* 13.18 Incursions of the Iapanners, and safeguard of the Sea, viz. in Veucheufu, Nan, Ningtung, Sining, Huigan, Tunchi, Cumen, Puohin, Xetic; in Taicheufu, Sinho, Cioki, Ninghai; in Ningpofu onely Tinghai; in Kiahinfu, Hiacing, Kinexan, and Chincam.

Several Isles neighbor this Countrey, inhabited by Husband-men and* 13.19 Fisher-men, of which Cheuxan is the greatest; the next are Chanque, Chaopao, besides several other lesser. Cheuxan lies directly East from the Metropolis Hancheu, opposite to the River Cientang, in thirty one and thirty two Degrees Northern Latitude, thirteen Leagues from the Main Land, and hath in length from North to South sixteen, and in breadth eight Leagues. When antiently the Chinese King Lui, worsted by the Tartars, and flying with his scatter'd For∣ces to this Isle, from all Parts many of the Chineses flock'd thither, so that ever since, what was before inconsiderable, hath been a populous and well planted Isle, for they number in this small Isle above seventy Towns and Villages, most of them verging the Sea in such Places where Inlets and Bays make convenient Harbors: neither wants their King a considerable Fleet, which keep his Coast safe from the Incursions and Landing of the Tartars Horse, wherein they are most formidable. And the Tartars as much in awe of the Islanders, keep con∣tinual Guard in the Fort of Tinghay, rais'd on the Main Land, with a Fleet of Crusing Chineses.

Before the Province Taicheufu, near the Garison Cioki, lies an Island call'd Ychoan, which is, Precious Circle, so call'd for its convenient Havens, the whole

being in a manner so surrounded with Mountains; it breaks off all Winds, leaving onely a Gap, or Entrance for Ships to come in at.

The whole Province of Chekiang is every where cut through with Rivers, Rivulets, and murmuring Streams, some brought in by Art, others of their own accord.

Most of the Channels of those Rivers which run Southward, fall in such order, as if Nature on purpose had contriv'd their Course; so that the Tra∣veller may pass through the whole Territory either by Land or Water which way he will, still supply'd with all conveniencies.

The River Che, from whence this Countrey hath its Name, runs from the* 13.20 South to the North, and divides it exactly in the middle, in an Eastern and Western Canton: but it changeth its Name at Hangcheu, and there is call'd Ci∣entang; and again where it takes its original out of the Mountains in the Pro∣vince Hoeicheufu, they name it Singan.

The eighteenth day of the eighth Moon (which is our October) a prodigi∣gious Spring-tyde happens worthy of admiration; for it is onely on that day, and begins to flow exactly at four a Clock in the Afternoon, and comes with a Head at the first appearance, high and strangely mounted above the Waters, and suddenly turns Topsi-turvy what ever either by neglect or care∣lesness lies in the Way; roaring extremely in his ascent, beyond the loud mur∣mur of Cataracts or Water-breaches, to which, as a wonderful spectacle, where they have secure places, the Magistrates, Strangers, and a great number of Peo∣ple resort to see (though horrid) the annual Spectacle.

The River Ho takes its Original near Cinijuw, the third substitute City to the seventh Province Chucheufu, and from thence follows by the Metropolis Kuihoa to the City Lanki, where it disembogues in the Stream Che.

The Rivulet Lung begins Westward of the City Seuchang, from whence it flows to Chucheu, where it cometh with its Waters near the River Tung, and there is call'd Vonxa.

In the Prime County Hancheufu, near the City Changhoa, on the Mountain Cienking, is a Lake, though not very great, yet famous for the Golden-colour'd Fishes taken there, which the Chineses from their colour call, Kinyu.

In the same Shire, Eastward from the Metropolis, lies the famous Lake Si∣kin;* 13.21 between which and the City Walls is a fair Street, Pav'd with Stone, and almost a Mile long, where they divertise themselves, in stead of Walks of Plea∣sure. The whole Lake Wall'd in, comprises about five English Miles in compass, and upon the adjacent Hills, (supply'd with various Rivulets and Fountains) appear several Temples, Palaces, Cloysters, Colledges, and the like. The Banks of the Lake, which is the Foot of the Mountain, are Pav'd on the top with Free-Stone, and ath wart the Lake lie several Bridges, so that they may walk over it, and see the Lake in all places. The foremention'd Ways are all Plan∣ted with divers shading Trees, and accommodated with Benches, Arbors, and the like, for the conveniency of such as walk there, when they are weary to sit down and repose. The Water in the Lake being so translucent and clear, that they may see the smallest Stone in the bottom.

This Lake hath no Out or In-let for Vessels to pass, but only a Sluce, by which the Water swoln too high by assiduous Showres, is discharg'd: Yet ne∣vertheless, it bears many Pleasure-Boats, built on purpose, which may rather be call'd Golden floating Palaces, being so richly Gilt, and also curiously Pain∣ted; in which they accustom to keep their great Feasts, Revels, and other de∣lightful Pastimes.

These Vessels thus furnish'd, Sail about the Lake without fear of Wrack or Tempest, so that it is no wonder, why the Chineses call this place and City A Delightful Garden, or Earthly Paradise.

In the County of Kincheufu, near the City Kaihoa, is a little Lake call'd Pehiai,* 13.22 from the white Crabs which it produceth, for Pehiai signifies White Crabs.

In the Territory of Ningpofu, near the City of Tunghoa, appears Yapou a small* 13.23 Pool, but very deep, whose Water, if the Chinese Writers may be believ'd, has this quality, that when they have a mild and prudent Governor, it becomes much clearer than Christal; but if a Tyrant or an Oppressor of the People, dark and Cloudy.

In the County of Kiahingfu, the Chineses catch a Bird in Harvest which they* 13.24 call Hoangcio, that is, Yellow Bird, which being kill'd, they steep in Wine made of Rice, and is sold as a Dainty all the Year.

The Territory of Ningpofu hath by reason of its nearness to the Sea, great plen∣ty of Fish, which they dry in the Sun without Salting. They also have abun∣dance of Oysters, Crabs, and Lobsters, with which they supply the whole Em∣pire of China. The Shepherd Fish they catch all the year, and in the beginning of the Spring, another Fish call'd Hoang, that is yellow, which will not keep an* 13.25 hour out of the Water without tainting. But because the Chineses account them a great Dainty, and an excellent Fish, they preserve them with Ice, and so bring them to the Market.

The Countrey of Chekiang abounds with Tygers; those on the Mountains* 13.26 near Kutien, do no hurt to Humane Creatures; whereas on the contrary, those that frequent the Neighboring Woods are very Ravenous and Wild, which ta∣ken and brought to the foremention'd Mountains, become tame and innocent as the former.

In a Pond of about two hundred Paces in Circumference, lying on Mount Sienking, in the County of Hiangchefue, the Chineses catch Fish of a Gold Co∣lour, wherefore they call them Kinyu, for Kin signifies Gold, and Yu, Fish) with a bright and glistering Skin; but chiefly their Backs are speckled as with Gold; they are never bigger than a Mans Finger, and have a three forked Tail, but not dangerous; the Chineses account them as a great rarity, preserving them in their Houses and Gardens, in several Vessels made for that purpose. The Grandees often take these Fishes with their own Hands, which in their presence (as if they knew who was their Lord, and what a pleasure they did to their owners, by sometimes shewing themselves) often play, and leap up and down above the Water. One of them though so small, costs commonly three or four Crowns.

In the eleventh County Veucheufu, are a strange kind of small Oysters, which* 13.27 are sow'd there in Marshy Grounds; for taking the Oysters they first dry, then stamp them small, which Powder they cast up and down the Fields like Seed, from whence grow other Oysters of a most delicious taste.

Through all the Countrey are plenty of Swine, Sheep, Poultry, and Fowl both tame and wild.

In the County of Kiahing, belonging to the Province Chekiang, grows in* 13.28 standing Waters, a round Fruit call'd Peu, which is not much bigger than a Chestnut; the Kernel lies cover'd with a grey Skin, but appears very White in the middle, full of Juyce, and of a pleasing taste, somewhat harder than an ordinary Apple, and tartish: If you put a piece of Copper with this in your Mouth, it will so mollifie the Mettal, that you may chew it with the Fruit, as we do Bread with our Meat.

In the County of Kinhaofu grows a small Tree with a Flower, which the* 13.29 Portuguese in India call Mogorin; it is very white, not unlike the Iasmyn, though much fuller of Leaves, and of a more pleasing scent; so that a few of these Flowers perfume a whole House, wherefore it is not undeservedly held in great esteem by the Chineses, who in the Winter preserve the Tree in Pots fill'd with Earth. In the same Countrey grows another Plant, call'd Kieuyen, which* 13.30 produces a kind of Fat, of which like Tallow, very good and white Candles are made, not Greasing the Hands when touch'd like the ordinary Tallow Candles.

This Tree is of a pretty bigness, and in Leaves and shape not much unlike a Pear-Tree; it bears white Blossoms, which when fallen off, a round Cod succeeds as big as a Cherry, cover'd with a blackish thin Skin; under which is a white Pulp, which when grown Ripe, and the Skin breaks, appears; these being pull'd off, are boyl'd in Water, which melting, the Body turns to Fat, and when grown cold, becomes hard like perfect Tallow: From the remain∣ing Kernels, they Extract very good Lamp-Oyl, so that this Plant supplies them, both with Lamps and Candle light. In the Winter, the Leaves become red, which looks very pleasant, because many of them growing together, shew like a blushing Wood. Lastly, the Leaves falling off are a most ex∣cellent Food, because of their fatness, for Sheep and Cows, which by Eating them, thrive in an extraordinary manner.

In the County of Chucheufu, near the City Kingning, grow great Thickets of Canes and Rushes in the River Lupeu, by the Chineses with a general name call'd Che, (for there are several sorts of them) and by the Indians, Mambu, which the Portuguese have turn'd to Bambu, and the Netherlanders to Bamboes. There also grows in most places all manner of Herbage and Grain, and in the County of Kinhoafu many great Plums, which they Transport to other parts.

In the seventh Shire, being Chucheufu are many Woods and Wildernesses of Pine-Trees, whence the Chineses have their Timber for the Building of Houses and Ships: They say, that near the City Sunghiang, that is, Earth of Pine, there are such thick ones found, that eighty Men cannot Fathom; nay, some whose hollow Wombs contain thirty or forty Men.

In the County of Ninchufu, their Hills produce store of Copper Mines.

In Kinhoafu, they make the best Drink that is in all China of Rice and Water; and in the same place are also the chiefest Gammons of Bacon, which bear a great esteem through all the Empire. There is likewise a sort of Gum, in the Chinese Tongue call'd Cie, or Cia; and in the Portuguese, Cairo, which drops out of the Trees, and is very like Turpentine; the Chineses gather and colour it how they please, the best bears a Gold colour, and the next to that Black; be∣fore it is quite dry, it yields an infectious Smoak or Damp, which causes a swelling in the Faces of those that are not us'd to it.

The curiosity and excellency of this shining Gum, Europe hath long since been acquainted with by those Chests and Coffers brought thither out of Iapan and China, for they both colour all their Wood-work over with it, and also their Ships, Houses, Tables, Bedsteds, and other Houshold-stuff.

The Revenue which this Province pays yearly to the Emperor amounts to* 13.31 what may seem an incredible sum of Money, viz. two hundred fifty one thou∣sand two hundred ninety nine Bags of Rice; three hundred and seventy thou∣sand four hundred sixty six Pound of raw Silk; two thousand five hundred seventy four Roles of Silk Stuffs; seventy eight hundred thousand four hun∣dred

ninety one Bundles of Straw; besides the ordinary Customs paid to the two Custom-Houses, standing in the Metropolis Hangcheu: First, for the Mer∣chandize in the North part of the City. Secondly, for the Wood in the South part; for the Chineses use much Wood for the building of their Houses, Ships, Coffins, and the like; and the Wood-Merchants being vast rich People, pay no small part of their gain to the Emperor. Moreover, this Province sends yearly four Imperial Ships, call'd Lung-ychuen to the Emperors Court, laden with Silk Clothes or Stuffs, wrought after a peculiar manner.

These Silk Stuffs are interwove with Gold and Silver, and also with the Pictures of the Bird call'd Funguang, Dragons, and the like: None are per∣mitted to wear these Stuffs, but only the Emperor, and those of Imperial Blood; unless his Majesty out of a peculiar favor, gives them leave; and these badges of Clothes distinguish them from meaner People, as much as our Badges of the Cross and Garter, or the like, be marks of Noble Orders.

There are those that reckon the yearly Revenue of this Province to amount to above fifteen Millions of Crowns, fifteen hundred thousand Duckets, or se∣ven hundred and fifty thousand Pound Sterling.

BUt to return again to our Ambassador, who proceeded on his Journey the* 13.32 twenty ninth of February, travelling over the Mountains of Iakoling, which because of their steep ascent make carriage difficult and dangerous. On the tops and sides stood several Pagodes or Temples, built after a strange man∣ner, and surrounded with Trees: But at last leaving them behind, they past through the Villages Sambathova, Sagebatauw, Longhia, Longzango, Poangtiou, and Hachova, where they were drawn upon a float of Canes, over a River, which divided Hachova into a Southern and Northern part, in which last the Hollanders took their repose that Night, having that day gained a League and a half to the North.

The twenty fourth in the Morning, leaving Hachova, they travell'd the fol∣lowing part of the day through Kolontja, Quanimg, and Souzinhova, and in the af∣ternoon came to Pinhoea, where Putmans, Vander Does, and the rest that travel'd be∣fore, met the Ambassador, and told him of their safe arrival there the day pre∣ceding, and also that the Goods design'd for Presents were already Shipt in twenty seven Vessels, and that others lay ready to take in him, and the rest of the Goods: Whereupon, Van Hoorn was no sooner come into the Village before∣mention'd, but he gave order for all his Necessaries to be Shipt off immedi∣ately, and likewise caus'd the Oxen to be Imbarqu'd, that they might go for∣ward on their Journey the next Morning. The Horses were forc'd to go five Leagues further by Land, because there wanted convenient Vessels to carry them.

The twenty sixth about Noon, after all things were ready, they set Sail from Puchoeu, going North-East up the River Chang, with a Fleet of about forty Vessels, amongst which were ten that carry'd the Mandarins Guides.

About three a Clock, they came to the City Tjanchia, otherwise call'd Chang∣xa;* 13.33 and having Sunthia, a pretty Village on their Larboard, cast Anchor that Night about three quarters of a League from Tjanchia, before a Sandy Plain, ha∣ving gain'd two Leagues that afternoon.

The twenty seventh in the Morning, they Weigh'd, and pass'd between two Towers adorn'd with seven Galleries, one over another, built after the Chinese

[illustration]

manner, for a safeguard of that place; and likewise by the Villages Poetza, Sangsa, Singhia, Mocthauw, Ponvasa, Vanksivoe, and Vansoe; the first four on their Starboard, and the last on their Larboard: And in the afternoon Sail∣ing by eight Villages more, standing on both sides of the River, (of which the Pilots knew not the Names) they arriv'd at Sinkkia in the Evening, where they staid all Night, having gone that day with the Currents on several Courses above five Leagues.

The twenty eighth in the Morning about Day-break, they set Sail again, and at nine a Clock Landed at the City Kitsjouw, or Kutchieuw, otherwise call'd Kiucheu; here they chang'd their Vessels.

The first of March, all the Goods were Ship'd again into other Vessels. At* 13.34 Noon, two private Persons of the City presented the Ambassador with some fresh Provisions; in return for which, they receiv'd six Ells of Gingerline co∣lour'd Cloth, which Putmans carry'd them; for which, they again in the Even∣ing sent twelve Tail of ready Money, and three Silver Cups; but the Ambas∣sadors modestly refus'd the Presents, and thanking, sent them back.

Kiucheu, the sixth City of the Province Chekiang, lying on the Eastern-Shore* 13.35 of the River Chang, three days Journey by Land from the Territory Tiokien, over steep and difficult Mountains, seems pretty large, yet but meanly Inha∣bited, and of small Concourse, and so having little or no Trade, yet the Streets are handsomely Pav'd, and all Provisions very cheap.

The second in the Morning, they left Kiucheu, and about nine a Clock pass'd by Sigajum, a Village lying on the right side, at the going up the River, in a pleasant place, surrounded with Arable Grounds: The remaining part of the day, they Sail'd by abundance of Villages standing along the River, a little way up into the Countrey, and in the Dusk of the Evening arriv'd at Loujujenne, where they staid that Night, having that Day gain'd five Leagues on several Courses.

From Loujujenne, having gotten two Coelies to Tow every Barque, they Weigh'd again the third in the Morning; and coming a little way from the Village, they saw a stately Tower built after the Chinese manner, with jutting Stories.

The Countrey every where well Manur'd, was also full of populous Villa∣ges. In the afternoon they came to Lanqui, where their Goods and Persons were again to be put aboard other Barques. Soon after their arrival at this place, the Governor came to welcome the Ambassador, and present him with some fresh Provisions. This being the first Town where the Hollanders had receiv'd so much civility from the Governors; their Journey that day was three Leagues.

The Shipping of the Goods into other Vessels was referr'd till the fourth, because of the Rainy Weather. In the afternoon, the Lord Ambassador enter∣tain'd the Governor, who in the mean while sent him in a Calf and a fat Wea∣ther, and other Provisions, besides four Vessels of their Beer. This Mandarin shew'd himself very courteous to the Hollanders, for which kindnesses he was presented with five Ells of fine Cloth.

The fifth in the Morning, the adjacent Hills were all cover'd with Snow; but the Weather growing fair, their Goods were put aboard, and all things made ready to go away the next day.

The sixth, they left Lancqui before day.

This place, though not large, yet makes a handsome shew, being well built, and very populous, occasion'd by the many Trading Vessels that come thi∣ther.

It is pleasantly seated all along the River side: Hither abundance of Al∣lom is brought from Humsie.

In the forenoon, they pass'd by the City Sansjenne, a League and a half from* 13.36 Lacqui: On the left side as they went up the River, the Shore near the Water rises very high, and not inhabited, but in the Valleys stand some few Houses and Villages.

In the Evening they came to Ponkousong, where they staid all Night, leaving the City Niencheufu on their left Hand a quarter of a League, having that day gain'd five Leagues.

The next Morning, two hours before day, the Mandarin Guides caus'd the Drum to be beaten, that all might be ready to be gone immediately, which they did; but the Vessel in which the Ambassador was, struck upon a Sand, so that the rest which were behind, were ready to fall foul upon his Ship, such was the force of the Current; but day-light coming on, they got off again, and pass'd by divers Villages, Temples, and Hamlets, and also by a Pagode, in which stands the Image of a Philosopher, call'd Nienchlin.

With the Dusk of the Evening, they arriv'd at Tungh, where they staid that Night, having gotten seven Leagues that day, by Steering several Courses.

The eighth in the Morning they set Sail again, and in the forenoon saw on their left Hand the River Tu, which glides towards the City Cinsung, or Sinc∣hung, which having pass'd it, divides into two Branches, and at last discharges his Water into the Grand Che.

This City being the seventh, in order to the Metropolis Hancheu, lies on the* 13.37 North side of the Tu, pretty close built, and surrounded with Plow'd Lands.

In the Evening they arriv'd at the City Fojang, or Fujang, scituate on the West* 13.38 side of the River Che, and Northward from the Stream Fuchun, which takes its Original a little Westward from the City Liengan, and joyneth its Waters South∣ward from Fujang, with those of the Che. The Ambassador having gotten five Leagues forwarder on his Journey that day, lodg'd in Fujang that right.

The ninth in the Morning, they left Fujang before day.

Here the River Che is about two English Miles broad, yet hath but few Villa∣ges on its Banks, most of them standing more up into the Countrey, by rea∣son of his overflowing in great Rains; every where Manur'd and Planted with Fruit-Trees.

In the Evening they arriv'd at the South Suburb of Hangcheu, or Hancsieuw,* 13.39 call'd Chankeeuw, half a Leagues distance from Hangcheu; here all the Goods were forc'd to be Landed, then carry'd to the North Suburb of Hangcheu, where they were again Shipt, so that they staid there the following Night.

The next Morning, being the tenth, Huilavja, one of the Mandarin Guides, went to acquaint the Governor of the City with the Netherlanders coming, and to desire Barques for their further Voyage: He returning again in the Evening, told the Ambassador, That the foremention'd Governor intended to invite his Excellency the next day to Dinner, and that the Pinghtouw, or third Person in Office would do the like the day after, and give speedy Order for the prepa∣ring of the Barques.

The same day, the Mandarin Guides, for the trouble they had already had, and to oblige them the more, were by the Ambassador, each of them, presen∣ted with five Ells of Cloth.

The next Morning, being the eleventh, the Ambassador and his Council* 13.40 considering, that the Governor would that day invite them to Dinner; and

[illustration]

also if they should obtain the free Trade, what good this person might do them, judg'd it convenient, if he did invite them to take and present him with the following Gifts.

Ten Ells of Red Cloth, two Pieces of Perpetuanaes, four Pieces of Linnen, a Fowling-Piece, a pair of Pistols, two Sword Blades, two Perspective Glasses, and a String of Blood Coral.

But the Invitation came not that day, because Huilavja said a grand Tartar was come from Peking, with whom the Governor was in private consulting about State Affairs.

Some Mandarins coming to visit and welcome the Ambassadors, were kindly entertain'd by him. The same day, above six hundred Horse were Ferry'd over the River Che.

The twelfth in the Morning, the Pinghtouw, or third Person of State in Han∣cheu,* 13.41 which had the Command over all the Vessels, came aboard the Ambassa∣dor to bid him Welcome, and also present him with a fat Weather, a Porker, some Poultery, Rice, and other fresh Provisions; desiring to be excus'd for his delay in not coming to visit the Ambassador sooner, being hinder'd by some grand Mandarins, that were lately gone up from thence to Peking, who had taken all the greatest Vessels with them, yet he should be careful, that the Ambassador should be well Accommodated, and that he would willingly invite his Excel∣lency to Dinner, but durst not, before he had been at the Governors, but then he would be bold to desire him to come and be his Guest; for which kind proffers, he was civilly Entertain'd; and having seen the Horses and Oxen, he took his leave.

In the afternoon, the Interpreter Genko came to tell the Netherlanders, that the Governor of Hancheu had enquir'd of him how the Ambassador was plac'd at his Entertainment by the General in Hoksieu.

The next Morning, being the thirteenth, several Horses came to the Am∣bassadors* 13.42 Vessel, to fetch Him and his Retinue to the Governor's Court, whi∣ther he went in a stately Equipage; taking those Presents with them, which they resolv'd to give him two days before. Coming to his Palace, they were after a little stay brought to his Presence, and the Ambassador Welcom'd by the Governor; who said, this Embassy would be very pleasing to the Empe∣ror. Then he ask'd where the Pepper and Sandal-Wood grew? How big Hol∣land was? How far distant from China? If there was any Silk in Holland? and many more such Questions, to which his Excellency answer'd him according∣ly. Then the Tables being spread, they were desir'd to sit, and plentifully entertain'd.

Thus having spent some time, the Ambassador deliver'd him a Note of the foremention'd Presents, and with a Complement, desir'd him to accept them; which having read over, he excus'd himself, that he could not accept the Pre∣sents, because he had never done the Hollanders any such Service, as the Vice-Roy and General in Hoksieu had done. Moreover, That they would have enough to do, in giving Presents at Peking, for there, every one gap'd for some∣thing; and thereupon gave the Note again to the Interpreter Genko, which was again taken from him by one of the Governor's Secretaries which stood by him, and kept it. Whereupon the Ambassador desir'd, that the Governor would only please to accept of the Presents, as a sign of his good Inclination* 13.43 towards him; and that hereafter, an opportunity might present, wherein he might assist the Hollanders. Moreover, the Ambassador Commanded the In∣terpreter

Gemko to tell the Governor, and desire him in his behalf, That when any of the Netherland Ships should accidentally by Storms or Tempestuous Weather, be forc'd to put into this River, or to Ningpo, that he would please to look upon them as Friends, and be assisting to them. The Interpreter seeming not to understand it well, was again Commanded by the Ambassador to Interpret it right, or else he would get another that should do it: Where∣upon, telling it to his Highness, he made answer, That this was also the Em∣peror's Haven and Countrey, and his Imperial Majesty's Order should be ob∣serv'd in it: Moreover, he could not accept of the Presents, but he would con∣sider till the happy return from Peking.

A little after, the Ambassador giving him many thanks for his kind Enter∣tainment, took his leave; and upon the Governor's advice, he went to visit the Conbon of the City, who courteously receiv'd him with many Comple∣ments, and a Cup of Bean Broth.

No Questions of remark did he propose to the Ambassador, only he related, That in their eighth Moneth, (which is our October) the last Year a Ship was at Priests Island, he desir'd to know whether it was a Dutch▪ Man or not? To which the Ambassador reply'd, That he knew nothing of it, but that perhaps it might be a Hollander Sailing to Iapan: Whereupon taking his leave, the Con∣bon advis'd him to go and Complement the Tartar Manchu, who had the chief Command over all the Militia in Hancheu; whither he accordingly went, but could not get admittance, being excus'd by his indisposition, so that in the Evening he return'd again to his Vessels.

The twenty fourth in the Morning, the Ambassador writ Complementing Letters to the Governor, Conbon, and Manchu, and presented the two last with some Gifts, thereby to win their Favor and good Opinion; the Letter to the Chief Governor was to this effect:

THe Ambassador is much oblig'd to the Governor, for his generous Incli∣nation* 14.1 and Nobleness to him, and hopes to express his Thanks, more by Deeds than Words; to which he doubts not, but the Heavens will grant him a fit Opportunity. He desires his Highness to accelerate his Journey to Peking, with the Chinkon, that he may the sooner return and find him in good Health.

The Conbon's Letter was to this purpose:

THat the Ambassador did not expect so soon to have had an occasion to* 15.1 present his Service to him, and desires he would be pleas'd to accept of these Presents, as a sign of his good Inclination, and for such his Favor, he shall exceedingly rejoyce.

That to the Manchu was of the same effect.

With these Letters was sent an Inventory of the Presents; those to the Con∣bon consisted in five Ells of Cloth, one piece of Perpetuanaes, two pieces of Linnen, one string of Amber, one piece of Amber, and two Rhinocerots Horns.

Those to the Manchu, two Knives with Gilded Hafts, one Fire-Lock, one Car∣bine, one string of Amber, one Quilt, and five Ells of Cloth.

These Letters and Inventories, Nobel and Vander Does were order'd to go to the several places, and deliver; but because of the Rainy Weather, it was referr'd.

Mean while, a Mandarin came with one of the Conbon's Factors, to present the Ambassador in his Master's Name with two Hogs, two Sheep, four Geese,* 15.2 eight Hens, two Pots of Liquor, Rice, and some other Provisions, which the Netherlanders receiv'd with many Thanks, and judg'd it convenient, to deliver the Notes of the Presents to them, to give to •…•…eir Masters: But the Factor and the Mandarin being scrupulous to take it without some of the Netherlanders went with them; it was judg'd convenient since it still Rain'd very hard, and it being above an hours walk, to keep it till dry Weather, that then it might be carry'd with the rest, as before mention'd.

In the Evening, Hiulavja came to tell the Hollanders, that he had been with the Barques lying on the other side of the City, which were all ready, so that the Goods might be sent aboard the next Morning: If there should not be Coe∣lis or Porters enough to carry them all in one day, they should send away as many as they could, and leave the rest till the day after: Whereupon, the Hollanders gave immediate Order, for the getting of all things ready against the next Morning, yet they were hinder'd by the great Rain, the Ways being made (in a manner) unpassable thereby.

Mean while, the Ambassador considering the Prime Governors answer to his Motion about Ships having liberty to put in there in Stormy Weather, Pro∣pos'd to the Council, If it would not be for their advantage, to make a trial of it, and Order one of the Frigats, which from Batavia were expected at Hoksieu to come to Ningpo, with a Lading of such Goods, as they should think conve∣nient, to be Barter'd for Silk; and this trial in his judgment could never be made in a better time, than whilst they were there present: Whereupon it was concluded, that Nobel and the Secretary, when they carry'd the Letters to the Governor and Conbon, they should again speak to them concerning the coming thither of a Ship, and then they might govern themselves ac∣cordingly.

The sixteenth in the Morning, the Hollanders were by the Chief Governor's* 15.3 Order presented with two fat Weathers, two Porkers, some Poultery, and other Provisions; which they receiv'd, and gave the Bearers some Money for a Gratuity. So soon as the Weather began to grow fair, as many Goods were unladen, as there were Coelis to carry them, with which Putman's went to the other side of the City to give Order for their reimbarquing.

Mean while, Nobel and the Secretary Vander Does went to the Governor of* 15.4 the City, to deliver the foremention'd Letters. They took the Horses also with them, because one of the Guides had told the Ambassador, that his Highness was desirous to see them; whither being come, after a short stay, and the Go∣vernor having view'd the Horses with great delight, Nobel and Vander Does de∣liver'd his Highness the Letter, and return'd him humble Thanks for the Pre∣sents which he had sent the Ambassador the day before.

Then they also ask'd, (it suiting with their present Discourse) If it should happen that a Hollands Ship should come thither, if it would be Welcome to his Highness, and the People us'd as courteously as they were? To which the General answer'd, That such strangers as they, which come from remote Countreys, to seek Friendship, and Present the Emperor, ought to have kind∣ness shown them; therefore what reason should he have to deal discourteously with the Netherlanders, when ever they come thither? They might rest satisfi'd, for he assur'd them, that if they came into his Jurisdiction, he would take care for them, and shew them all the kindness he could.

After which answer, the Netherlanders taking their leave went to the Conbon,* 15.5 to whom they also deliver'd the Ambassador's Letter and Note of the Presents, telling him, that no Blood Coral was mention'd in the Note, because they had none at the present, but they hop'd, that a Ship would shortly come thither, and that then, they would furnish his Highness with what quantity he pleas'd; using this Discourse purposely, because they would have the better opportuni∣ty to speak of the Ship. Then they desir'd, that if a Holland Vessel should chance to come thither, whether he would be courteous to the Netherlanders? To which he answer'd as the General had done, adding, That the Hollanders must Command their People to use no Hostility where ever they came with their Ships.

The Presents design'd for him he would not accept of, till they return'd from Peking. From thence they went to the Manchu, but could not (because of* 15.6 his indisposition) come to speak with him, but sent them in answer to the Let∣ter and Note of the Presents, that he thank'd the Ambassador, but he durst not accept the Presents; with which answer, the Netherlanders return'd.

This foremention'd Reply of the General and Conbon, and that of the thir∣teenth* 15.7 instant, made to the Netherlanders, being consulted on in the Council, it was unanimously agreed on, to send for the smallest Vessel expected from Ba∣tavia at Hoksieu, to come to Ningpo, (under pretence, that she should go to Ia∣pan) with a Lading of convenient Merchandize, as Sandal-Wood, Pepper, Fran∣kincense, Myrh, Cloves, Lead, Caliatur-Wood, Black Paragon, and Scarlet-Cloth, some Blood Coral in strings, and the like.

To which purpose Van Hoorn wrote a Letter to Harthouwer in Hoksieu, that* 15.8 he had found it convenient, that one of the smallest Vessels which were ex∣pected from Batavia in the Bay of Sothia, under a pretence to Sail to Iapan, should come to Ningpo: But however, the Ship was not to stay any longer than the first of September at Ningpo, and then, whether the Goods were sold or not, set Sail to Iapan, that the foremention'd Commodities might come time enough, to be dispos'd of in Iapan, and so prevent all manner of Losses or Da∣mages that might happen. Mean while, the Weather being pretty fair, the re∣maining Presents and other Goods were unladen and carry'd to the North side of the City.

The Ambassador, Nobel, and the rest of the Retinue following them through the City of Hanchu, and the Suburbs, came in the Afternoon to the places where the Barques lay, being above a League distant from the other in which they came.

The eighteenth, it was thought convenient to Present the Pingtow, which had furnish'd the Netherlanders with Barques; and likewise in requital for his Presents, sent them the twelfth instant, five Dutch Ells of Red Cloth, one* 15.9 Piece of Perpetuana's, one string of Amber Beads, six Flasks of Rose-Water, one Perspective Glass, and some Spectacles, which the Secretary setting down in a Note, proffer'd to him: Who returning, brought word, that the Pingtow would receive the four first sorts of Goods; but as for the Perspective Glasses and Spectacles, he knew not what to do with them; and sent also his Servant back with the Secretary, to Present the Ambassador with two Bottles of Tee, and to fetch the Presents, because he was fearful to receive them, if they should be brought by the Netherlanders, and deliver'd in the presence of other Persons, because the General and Conbon did not accept of theirs.

In the Evening, the Horse were Imbarqu'd in the prepar'd Vessels, and all things were made ready for their departure the next day.

The nineteenth in the Morning, the Ambassador leaving Hanchu, came in the Evening to Tangseeuw, a handsom Village, where they staid all that Night, having that day Sail'd three Leagues.

Soon after their arrival there, the Interpreter Ienko came to tell the Ambas∣sador,* 15.10 that he was inform'd, that the Emperor, besides his Order of not Transporting any Silk, had strictly forbidden, that no Silk should be carry'd out of the Province Chekiang to any other Territory.

The twentieth in the Morning they left Tangseeuw, and were that day Tow'd by many Rusticks Houses, which were built along the Banks of a deep Trench or Graff. The Countrey hereabouts is all Champain, well Manur'd, and in many places Planted with Mulberry-Trees, which yield food for their Silk-Worms,* 15.11 for no place in all China breeds more than this Province of Chekiang; for it not only furnishes its own Counties, and all China with all sorts of Silk Stuffs, but also the Neighboring Isles of Iapan, the Spaniards in the Philipines, nay, all India, and the remotest parts of Europe, for the Hollanders buy much Silk in Hoksieu, lying in the Province of Fokien, which is all brought thither from Chekiang. The Silk Stuffs made in this Province are esteem'd the best in all China, and are to be had at such low Rates, that ten Men may better be main∣tain'd there in Silk, than one Man with Cloth in Europe. They cut the Mul∣berry Trees generally once a year, as in Europe we do our Vines, and suffer them not to shoot up to any great height, because by long experience they have found that the Leaves of the smallest and youngest Trees produce the best Silk, which difference they know in the Spinning of the first and second Threds; for the first is that which comes from the fresh budding little Leaves, and the second comes from the strong and full grown Summer Leaves, which alteration of Food given to the Worms, makes the difference in the Silk. Which is also perhaps the reason, that the Silk which is made in Europe, is generally much thicker and courser than that in China.

Between the Prizes of the first and second Spinning, the Chineses make a great difference, notwithstanding the greatest Silk-Throsters in Europe have no knowledge to distinguish the one from the other: The best Silk they Spin in Lent, and the coursest and biggest in Iune, so that both sorts are made in one Year. The breeding of these Worms is all one trouble, and requires as much care as they do in any places of Europe. Wherefore it is a meer Fable, that all the Silk in China is made by the Silk Worms upon the Trees, without the labor or industry of Man.

Martinius tell us, That the breeding of Silk Worms, and the manner of ma∣king* 15.12 Cotton and Silk, is an ancient invention of the Chineses; for they say, that the Emperor Ya's Consort, who Raign'd before the Birth of our Savior, Anno 2375. was the first that us'd it, and afterwards taught it her Subjects: For though the breeding and ordering of the Silk Worms was not unknown to the Chineses before that time, yet they were ignorant of that Art, to make Silk Clothes of them, as generally at the first Discovery of things, we are unskilful in the proper use. But however, the Chineses may justly claim the honor, that from them, as the chief Fountain, the Art of making Silk was carry'd to other remote Countreys in Europe.

BUt to return: The Ambassador having pass'd many beautiful Stone Bridges, in the Afternoon they came to the City of Kunghti, or Cunghte, the fifth substitute City of the second Metropolis Kiahing, in the sixth Province, lying on the left side of the River, and in the Evening arriv'd at a Village call'd Sum∣mingsing, where they stay'd that Night, having that day gotten four Leagues further.

In the Morning, leaving Summingsing, they Sail'd, as the day before, by many Rusticks Houses; and about the Evening arriv'd at Chiangfoe, otherwise Kia∣hing, the sixth City in this Province, along which they ran Westerly to the North Suburb, where they staid that Night to get other Coelies to Tow them, having that day made four Leagues forward in a Northerly Course.

The two and twentieth in the Morning, they proceeded, and were Tow'd, coming about a Cannon shot from the Suburb of Kiating, between two For∣tresses, and so to the Village Iankanking, seaving it on their Lar-board; in the Afternoon, by Pinghaw; on the South side of which lies a small Lake call'd Fuen, which separates the Province Chekiang, from that of Nanking, so that they enter'd the Province of Nanking.

After the Netherlanders were arriv'd about Noon, in the Village Pingchwan, they from thence past by Ukiam, and leaving it about a Cannon shot from them on their left hand, they went up to the Suburbs, where they cast Anchor to stay that Night, and provide themselves with other Men to Tow their Barques, having that day pass'd four Leagues, of which, two in the Province of Nanking.

This great Province of Nanking, by the Tartars at this day call'd Kiangnam,* 15.13 being the chiefest of the nine Southern, Verges in the East and South-East with the Sea, in the South it borders upon Chekiang, in the South-West upon that of Kiangsi, in the West touches Huquang, in the North-West Honan, and the remainder, the Territory of Quantung.

Although the Chineses reckon (except the chief Province of Peking, wherein* 15.14 the Court and Seat of the Emperor is kept) that of Kiangnang the next in honor and order, yet setting aside the Emperor's residence there, it cannot be com∣par'd to this of Nanking, either in Magnitude, Fertility, or ought else; nay, their Histories affirm, that the ancient Chinese Emperors, as V, Cyn, Sun, Ci, Le∣ang, Chin, and the Family Tang, first Planted the Seat of the Empire in this Province, although afterwards, Transported thence to Peking, by the Taymingian Family, the better, and with the more ease to oppose the Tartars incursions, being nearest to their Borders.

The whole Province is divided into fourteen great Territories, viz. Kiang∣ningsu,* 15.15 or Nankingfu, Fungyangfu, Suchenfu, Sunkiangfu, Changcheufu, Chingkiangfu, Yancheufu, Hoaiganfu, Lucheufu, Gankingfu, Taipingfu, Ningquefu, Chicheufu, Hoei∣cheufu, besides four small Counties, as Quangte, Hocheu, Chucheu, Siuchtu, every one having great and small Towns in them, to the number of an hundred and ten.

The first County Kiangningfu, hath for boundaries on the North-East, Yancheufu;* 15.16 in the East, Changcheufu, and Sucheufu; in the South, Ningquefu; in the West, Taipingfu, and Hocheufu; in the North, and North-West, Cheuchufu.

This County contains seven Towns, viz. Nanking, or Kiangning, the chief* 15.17 and Metropolis of the whole Province, Kucyung, Lieyang, Lieuxui, Caoxun, Kiang∣pu, and Loho.

[illustration]

[illustration]

The first Builder of the City of Nanking was Guoi, King of Cu, who call'd* 15.18 her Kinling, that is, Gilded Tract of Land, The first Raiser of the Family Cyn nam'd it afterwards Moling; the Kings V. which kept their Court there, Kienye; the House of Tang, Kiangning; but the Taimingian Family chang'd the Name of Kiangning to that of Ingtien; but at last the Tartars, after having harrased the whole Empire of China, restor'd it the ancient Name Kiangning.

This Kiangning lieth in thirty two Degrees and fifteen Minutes Northern Latitude, about six Leagues from the Eastern Shore of the River Kiang, in a pleasant and delightful Plain; for the River Kiang flows through broad and deep digg'd Graffs, not onely by the City Walls, but also into it with several Navigable Channels.

In like manner the East side of the City, lying in a pleasant Valley, is inter∣woven with broad Graffs, by which means they may as well come to this part of the City in Barges, as to that side which verges with the River Kiang, and may there likewise lade and unlade Vessels of ordinary Burthen.

Over all these Graffs lead several Stone Bridges, supported on divers Arches.

Over the fore-mention'd Channel, which runs from the River Kiang into the City, is a Bridge with fourteen Arches.

According to the opinion of the Chinese Geographers, this City doth not onely exceed all other Cities on the Earth in bigness, but also in beauty; and indeed she is inferior to few: for as to what concerns her inward part is most plain, except some pleasant and easie Ascents. It stands surrounded with a* 15.19 double Wall; the first and innermost of which is six German Miles in circumfe∣rence, or according to Trigaut and Martinius, eighteen Italian Miles; yet the City it self is not above six Leagues in circumference.

This Wall incloseth the Palace, and most part of the City.

The second, or outward Wall is much bigger, but not continu'd round, or joyn'd together in all places, but stands onely as a Defence in those places where the City is weakest. When two Troopers (for so the Chineses describe this Wall) are sent from one another in the Morning to Ride about the City, they meet not again till Night; by which may easily be judg'd the bigness of the Wall and City. Notwithstanding within the circumference of this Wall there are great and spacious Gardens, Lakes, Mounts and Warrens, yet the greatest part thereof is full of Inhabitants.

The first Wall, which is above thirty Foot high, whose under part consists of Free-Stone, but the upper onely of bak'd Stones, or Bricks, is rais'd very even, and hath Battlements, round about strengthned with Redoubts and Watch-houses. It reckons thirteen Gates, some of which have four, and* 15.20 others five Posterns, whose Doors are cover'd with Iron Plates. Every one of these Gates are continually Guarded by strong Parties of Soldiers. The chiefest Streets are about twenty eight Paces broad, and being as direct as a Line, are in the middle Pav'd with broad blue Stones, and on each side with Pebbles. The common Citizens Houses are neither fair nor costly, but mean and with∣out Conveniences, being but one Story high, standing all with their Gable∣ends towards the Streets, with onely one Door. The Front hath a square Hole in stead of a Window, before which they have a woodden Shutter, which they let down, and those that drive any Trade lay their Commodities upon them to sell, and to prevent People from looking in, they generally hang a Rush Mat before it in stead of a Glass Window. The whole House on the out-side

is from top to bottom Plaister'd with very white Mortar or Lime, and the sloaping Roof cover'd with white Tyles. In most of the Houses are Shops, fill'd with all manner of Chinese Commodities, as Cotton, Silk-Stuffs, Porcel∣lane, Pearls, Diamonds, and other rich Merchandises: others also have Pedling Wares. Before every Shop stands a Plank or Board, and before some two, on which the Master of the House his Name is written in Letters of Gold, and what Commodities he hath to sell: Next these Boards stands also a Post, or rather a Pole, which is higher than the House, on which they put a Penon, or Flag, whereby they may distinguish every ones Habitation, as here in Europe they do by Signs.

Here are also many fair Edifices, as Temples, stately Triumphal Arches, Palaces, and other publick Buildings.

There was formerly a very magnificent Palace, built square, being the* 15.21 Court and Residence of the ancient Chinese Emperors, but now lies ruin'd on the South part of the City; one side of it may still be measur'd, and bears an Italian Mile and two hundred Paces in length, and is inclos'd within the inner Wall, which encompasseth the greatest part of the City. It was formerly sur∣rounded with three Walls, and deep Moats. According to the remaining part of this Wall, the fore-mention'd Trigaut reckons the circumference to be four or five Italian Miles. In the middle there yet appears a broad Way Pav'd with Free-Stone, which runs through the whole Work like a Cross. On each side of it may be seen curious Carv'd Stones, which stand four Foot high, and behind them a little Rivulet of clear Water. The Tyles on the Roof were of hard Stone, wrought with Dragons, and the Emperor's Arms Painted in a Gold colour, so that when the Sun shin'd upon them they glitter'd like Gold.

In the last Tartar Wars this stately Edifice and Court was burnt and pull'd down to the Ground, so turning that which before was the wonder of the World into a heap of Rubbish; yet no other way bereaving the City of her ancient lustre: which was done out of a peculiar hatred that the Tartar bore to the Taimingian Family, because Hamvu, or Che, the first promoter of that Family, drove the Tartars out of the Empire, after they had possess'd it a hundred and eight years, and planted the Branches of their own Stock in the Throne in this fore-mention'd Palace, till such time as it was remov'd from thence to Peking.

The City is very populous, and said to be inhabited by ten hundred thou∣sand, or a Million of Souls, besides a Garison of forty thousand Tartars: for the Governor of the Southern Provinces Resides here in the Emperor's Name.

But above all we ought not to forget a Tower, built on a high Hill, which* 15.22 may justly be call'd A Tower of Art, because three artificial Pieces of Work are kept in it, the like of which are not in the whole World: The first a Celestial Globe, distinguish'd by its Equinoctial, and other equidistant Lines; the se∣cond is an Armilla aquatoria, consisting in a Perspective Glass, with two Circles, each movable upon their Point; the third is a Sphaera armillarii, very like our European; every one of them hath twelve Feet upon the Aequator, or middle Line, made of Copper, Gilt and curiously wrought: They stand upon Dra∣gons cut of Copper, and are so exact and artificially made, that the most ex∣perienc'd Astronomer cannot discern the least fault in them: and notwith∣standing the Tartars of the Family Iuen plac'd them there three hundred and seventy years since, yet they retain their ancient lustre, as if but newly made.

On the out-part of the City stands a famous Pagode, or Temple, by some* 15.23

[illustration]

call'd Paolinxi, and by others Paulinying; for we may observe, that by the Name of Paolinxi the Chineses do not onely express the Temple it self, but also a great Plain at the Foot of a Mountain, adorn'd with many fair Buildings, Pagodes, Porcelane Towers, and other fair and stately Edifices; amongst all which one, being a Temple, exceeds all the rest: it is adorn'd with ten thousand Images, made of Mortar; and curiously Painted; the largest are as big as the Life, and the smallest not exceeding a Hand; both which stand in several Entries, or Gal∣leries round about the Wall, four or five Rows one above another, the greatest on the top, and the smallest at the bottom.

In the middle of the Plain, to which they ascend by twelve Steps, stands* 15.24 a high Tower of Porcelane, which for costliness and all manner of rare work∣manship, hath not its paralell in all China. It consists in nine (though ac∣cording to Semedo scarce in six) Vaulted Stories, to be ascended on the in-side by a hundred and four Steps. Round about every Story is a Gallery, curiously adorn'd with Images and Windows; on both sides of which are square Holes for the Light to come in at, with Ivory Bars; all the Work on the out-side Polish'd or Glaz'd with divers Colours, as Red, Green, and Yellow: The whole Structure made of several Pieces so curiously Cemented together, that it seems to be one intire thing. Between the Galleries are Juttings out, made like Pent-houses, and colour'd with Green; at each corner whereof hang small Copper Bells, which mov'd by the Wind make a continual and pleasant tink∣ling. The upper part of the Tower, to which none can get, unless they climb up the out-side, is Crown'd, as the Chineses say, with a great Pine-Apple of Massy Gold: from which upper Gallery they may see, not onely over the whole City of Nanking, but all the adjacent Plains, as far as the Eye can reach. They say, that when the Tartars, Anno 1200. first conquer'd the Empire of China, they forc'd them to build this Structure in commemoration of their Victory: for which reason, as it appears, the Tartars, when in our Age they conquer'd the Empire a second time, they never offer'd to deface it, but let it stand in its full glory, when as they pull'd down all other antient Monuments, Buildings, and Chinese Emperors Tombs to the Ground.

Without the Walls of the City are the Tombs of the antique Kings; near which stands a Grove of lofty Pines, surrounded with a Wall of three German Miles in circumference.

Within this Inclosure also appears a Hill, whereon likewise are erected seve∣ral Tombs; and not far distant a most magnificent Temple, a Royal Building, as well for its Prospect as State: It consists for the most part of Wood, except the Walls, which are of Brick, and stands on a Summit inviron'd with Free-Stone: you go into it by four pair of Stairs, opening to the sour Winds: It hath five Galleries, about which stand two Rows of wooden Pillars, each thirty six Foot high, and above two Fathom thick: On these rest great Pieces of cross Timber, and on them stand other lesser Pillars, whereon lies the Roof, of Carv'd and Gilt Boards: The Doors are Figur'd with Laurel Leaves, and cover'd with Gilded Plates. The Imagery of the outer Galleries and Win∣dows are incircled with Gilded Wyres to keep the Birds from either making their Nests, or defiling them; yet the Wyres are so thin and wide, that they may easily see through: which is also observ'd in all great Buildings, espe∣cially the Emperor's Palaces. In the middle of the Temple stand two Thrones, wrought with great Art, and beset with Pearls, and all manner of Precious Gems; on them stand two Chairs, in one of which the Emperor sits

when he makes Offerings; to do which none else is permitted; and the other stands empty for their Deity, who they say, sits therein, and receives the Of∣fering. Without the Temple stand many Altars of Red Marble▪ which repre∣sent the Moon, Sun, Hills and Floods: and according to the Chineses Relati∣ons, all these Altars are plac'd without the Temple, that none might worship them, but that every one should know they are of the same Structure which the Emperor worships in the Temple. Round about are several Chambers, or rather Cells, which formerly, as they say, were us'd as Bannia's, in which the Emperor, when he went to Offer, Bath'd himself with his Attendants.

To this Temple, and to the Emperor's Tombs, lead very broad Ways, on each side planted with five Rows of Pine-trees, at equal distance, and in a direct Line; from which none might break a Bough on pain of death.

All these Buildings were ruin'd in the late Tartar Wars, the Trees pluck'd up, the Tombs defac'd, and the Temples and Palaces utterly laid waste.

The County of Fungiangfu, a great Tract of Land, gives Limits in the* 15.25 East and North-East to Hoaiganfu; in the East, to the Lake Piexe and Chucheufu; in the South and South-West to Hocheufu and Lucheufu; in the West, to the Territory of Honan.

This pleasant and fruitful Countrey, vein'd by several great Rivers, is fa∣mous, because two of her Natives of mean Extract were rais'd to the highest degree of Honor; the first call'd Lieupang, bred among the scum of the Com∣monalty, nay, among Robbers and Rebels, subdu'd the Imperial Family Cyn, and rais'd that of Han.

The second being Humvu, or Chu, was a mean Priests Son; who at first turning Robber, soon after the expulsion of the Tartars got into the Throne, and establish'd the Crown on the Taimingian Family.

The Emperor Yu also did not a little enrich this Countrey, when by his Predecessor Ya he was Crown'd King in the City of Mao. It is also said that Lahu, the first Inventer of the Epicurean Learning, which liv'd before the great Philosopher Confut was born in that City of Mao.

The County Fungyangfu contains eighteen Towns, of which Fungyang is the chiefest, the next are Liuhoai, Hoaiyuen, Tingyuen, Uho, Hung, Hokieu, Munching, Su, Hiutai, Tienchang, So, Lingpi, Ing, Tacho, Hao, Ingxan, Su, So, Ing, Hao, all great Places.

The Metropolis Fungyang lying on a Mountain, incloseth many Hills with∣in its Walls, built with fair Edifices, both publick and private.

This Division was by the Emperor Yu brought and joyn'd to the Province of Yang, to be Govern'd by Teu.

In the time of the Kings this part of the Countrey was call'd The Kingdom of Tuxam; which the Kings of Cu afterwards included in their Dominions: but the Family Han made it again Tributary, call'd Chungly: yet this Place was not honor'd with the Title of Teu, or Metropopolis, untill the fore-mention'd Chu, which rais'd the Taimingian Family, and was born in this City, enlarg'd it, building new and strong Walls, fifty Furlongs in circumference, and adorning the Tombs of his Predecessors, and gave it the Name of Metropolis, setting over it a Vice-Roy, giving it Jurisdiction over other Cities, intituling it Fungyang, that is, Nobleness of the Phenix.

The third Sucheufu, conterminates in the North and North-East with the Mouth of the River Kiang; in the East, with the Sea; in the South, with Sun∣kiang and Kiahingfu; the West borders Kiangningfu; and the North-West, Chan∣cheufu.

The first which inhabited this Countrey amongst the Chineses, was one Taipe, of the Family Cheu, who coming out of the North planted his Seat here, and reduced those that formerly were wild and savage, to be rational and under∣standing People.

In the Emperor Vu's time this County obtain'd Royal Dignity, being call'd The Kingdom of V. after whose Death it was taken by the Kingdom of Iue, who possess'd it but a little while, being routed by Cu, who subdu'd the Countrey.

Lastly, the promoter of the Family Cyn conquer'd all those Kingdoms; and brought them under the Province of Hoeiki.

The first which call'd this Countrey and its Metropolis Sucheu was King* 15.26 Sui: the Family of Tang gave it the Name of Changcheu; Sung, that of Pnkiang; but the Taimingian Family restor'd the old Name Sucheu.

The Countrey is in all Places interlac'd with Branches of Rivers and Graffs, along which they may Sail from the City to the Sea.

Sucheufu contains seven Towns, of which Sucheu is the chiefest; the rest are* 15.27 Quengxan, Changxoe, Ukiang, Kiating, Taicing, Cungmung, and Cungming, which lies on an Island in the Sea.

The fourth Tract of Land being Sunghiangfu, is a small County, yet fruitful* 15.28 and a good Soyl, bordering in the North with Sucheufu; in the East, with the Sea and Hangcheufu; in the South and West at Hangcheufu onely; and the remainder on Sucheufu.

This Countrey, as the former, lies most in Water, the East part of it being wash'd by the Sea, and the rest surrounded by Rivers, which with their Bran∣ches cutting through the middle, and all Places else of it make the whole Na∣vigable: It contains onely three Towns, which in bigness, populosity, and* 15.29 variety of Commodities may stand in competition with many more eminent Cities; the first and chiefest is Sunkiang, the other two Langhai and Cingpai.

The City Sunkiang verges with the Sea on the Northern Shore of a River, which at its Mouth is fortifi'd with a strong Castle, from whence they may Sail to Iapan.

In ancient times this Countrey and City before mention'd shar'd also in the Tartars Cruelties. The Family of Tang call'd it Houting; the Tartars of the* 15.30 House of Iuen not onely gave it the present Name, but also the Title of Fu, or Great City, having formerly but the Priviledges and Name of a mean Town▪ and belong'd to the third County Sucheufu.

The fifth County Changcheufu reckons for Limits in the North and North-East,* 15.31 the River Kiang; in the South, Sucheufu; in the South and South-West, the Lake Tai; in the West, Yancheufu.

This County contains five Towns, viz. Changcheu, Vufie, Kiangyn, and Ginkiang.

There are also five Temples, of which one built near the City Vufie, in ho∣nor to Taipe, the Supporter of the People, exceeds all the other.

The City Changcheu lies near the fore-mention'd Moat, which runs from the City Sucheu to the River Kiang: the Stone Banks of which near this City, are much more curious and artificial than any where else. There are also some Triumphal Arches, which add a great beauty to the City. It hath receiv'd its Denomination Guihing from the exceeding fineness of the Earth, of which the Tee Cups are made, for Guihing signifies Rare Earth.

The sixth Territory Chinkiangfu borders in the North at the River Kiang;* 15.32 in the East, at Changcheufu; in the South, at the Lake Tai; and in the West, at Kiangnangfu.

This County reckons three Cities, viz. Chinkiang, Tanyang, and Kintan.* 15.33

Chinkiang, by Martinius taken for Cingiam so call'd by Paulus Venetus, lies Northward from the River Kiang, on the East side of a Channel, which falls into the Kiang. On the other side of the Channel to the West lies a Suburb, neither lesser nor emptier of People than the City it self. Between these lie se∣veral Bridges, over which they pass out of one into another: beyond the Bridges the Channel extends it self to a greater breadth, and receives Water from several Places; which makes so great a Navigation by that City, that it cannot be express'd; for all the Ships or Vessels that come from the Province of Chekiang and the other Eastern Towns, to go to Peking and other Places, must stop here, to put up their Masts, and hold out their Sails, not being able hitherto to use them, because of the many Bridges in that Channel; for from hence to the Grand Metropolis Peking no Bridge is suffer'd excepting one to draw up.

This City by some justly call'd Kinkeu, that is, The Mouth of the Court, be∣cause there are continually Freighted Vessels going from hence to Peking.

The seventh Division call'd Yangcheufu, borders in the North, at the River* 15.34 Hoai; East, at the Sea; Southward, upon the Stream of Kiang; West, on Nankingfu, and the little County Chucheufu; and the North and by West con∣terminates with Fungyangfu.

This contains ten Cities, viz. Y•…•…ngcheu, Ychin, Taihing, Kaoyeu, Hinghoa, Paoyng, Tai, Iucao, Fung, and Haimuen, of which Kaoyeu and Tai are the biggest.

Northward over the River Kiang is a great Sluce near the Garison Quacheu, where the foremention'd Channel takes its beginning; along which they Row up to the City Yangcheu, which lies on the East-side of it, as on the West the Suburb, which formerly stretch'd a German League, but was ruin'd in the last Tartar War.

The City Yancheu is full of large and stately buildings and in many Places moistned with Graffs of fresh Water, over which lead Stone Bridges, consisting of twenty four Arches, besides many lesser, not to be reckon'd. There is also a Custom-house for the Emperor's use.

The chief Trade which the Inhabitants follow is the dealing in Salt; for in the East of this County near the Sea are many Salt-pits.

The eighth, being Hoaiganfu, Confines in the East, upon the Sea; in the South, with the River Hoai; in the South-West and West, with Fungyangfu and Sucheufu; and in the North, with the Province of Xantung. The whole Tract of Land is cut through with Rivers and Lakes. It contains ten Towns, Hoai∣gan the chief, Cingho, Gantung, Taoyven, Moyang, Hai, Canyu, Pi, Souven, and Ciuning; Hai and Pi are great Cities.

In the time of the Emperor Yu this County belong'd to that of Iancheu, un∣der the Government Ten, and belong'd first to King V. afterwards to Iue, then to Cu.

In the time of the Family Hun the City Hoaigan was onely a small Town* 15.35 call'd Hoaiyu; afterwards Han call'd her Linhoan; but the present Name and Title the House of Sung gave her.

This City lying on the Eastern Shore of the digg'd Channel is divided into two Parts, a Southern and a Northern, yet both inclos'd in one Wall; of which the South side bears the Name of Hoaigan, and the North of Yeuching. The one side is enlarg'd with a Suburb, which extends in length along the Banks of the Channel a German Mile; out of which they enter into the Yellow River.

In the Suburb are two Custom-houses, in the one the Customs for Goods are paid, and in the other for Ships according to their Burthen; all which Mo∣ney is kept and bestow'd upon the repairing of their Sluces in the Channel against the force of the Water (for to the Northward of this City are three Water-falls;) yet nevertheless a great part of it goes to the Emperor's Trea∣sury.

In this City the Vice-Roy, being the Emperor's Purveyor, hath his Resi∣dence; who Commands with arbitrary Power over the seven Southern Pro∣vinces.

The ninth Lucheufu, borders in the North at Fungyangfu; in the East, at* 15.36 Hocheufu and the River Kiang; in the South, at Gankingfu; and in the West, at the Province of Huquang and Honan. It contains eight Cities, Lucheu the chief,* 15.37 the rest Xuching, Lukiang, Vuguei, Cao, Logan, Iugran, Hoxan, most of them lying on the Shore of the famous Lake Cao; Vuguei and Logan are the biggest.

In ancient Times this Countrey stood like the former, subject to the Family Cheu, under whom it became an intire Kingdom, and nam'd Lucu; but soon after was taken from them by the Kings Cu. In the time of the Family Han it was with its chief City call'd Lukiang; but the present Name given by the Emperor Sui.

Near the small City Logan are two stately Temples and a large Bridge.

The tenth County Gankingfu borders in the North at Lucheufu; in the East and South-East, at the River Kiang; in the West and North-West, at the Province of Huquang.

This Countrey contains six Towns, viz. Ganking, Tunchiang, Cienxan, Taihu, Sosung, Vangkiang, was formerly call'd Von, and subdu'd by King Cu; after which the Family of Tang nam'd it Sucheu; that of Sung, Ganking.

The City Ganking stands situate on the Eastern Shore of the River Ganking, and for Wealth and Trade compares with the famousest Cities in this Pro∣vince; for all that comes out of the other County to go to Nanking, comes first hither.

Because this Tract of Land joyns the three Provinces, Kiangsi, Huquang, and Nanking, and lies well for any Warlike Undertaking, it hath a Vice-Roy, who maintains a strong Garison in the Castle Haimusen, for a defence of the Lake Poyang and the River Kiang.

The Family Tang caus'd an Iron Pillar to be erected there of three Rods high, and of a proportionable thickness, Anvil'd out of an intire Piece.

The eleventh Shire, being Taipingfu, is surrounded with the River Kiang, or* 15.38 rather lies between two of her Branches; and moreover verges in the East with a part of the Lake Tanyang, where it borders with the County of Kiangning.

This County belong'd formerly to the Kingdom of V. afterwards to Iue, next to Cu, but was at last by the Family of Cyn reduc'd under that of Chang. The House of Han call'd it Tanyang; Tang, Nanyu: Sung first nam'd it Pingnan;* 15.39 and lastly, Taiping; which Name it retains to this day. It contains three Ci∣ties, viz. Taiping, Vehu, and Fachang; of which Vehu, the biggest and richest, hath also a Custom-house, and lies on an Island between the two Arms of the Ri∣ver Kiang, which afterwards joyn together at the City of Nanking.

The twelfth, being Ningquefu, borders in the North, at the River Kiang; in* 15.40 the East, at Quanghefu; in the South, at Hoecheufu; and in the West, at Chicheu∣fu. It is a mountainous Countrey, and contains six Towns, viz. Ningque the* 15.41 Great, and Ningque the Less, King, Taiping, Cingte, Nanling.

The chief City Ninque lies on the Eastern Shore of the River Von.

Within her Walls are pleasant Hills, Warrens, magnificent Buildings, and abundance of Chesnut and Pear-trees.

Nea•…•… the little City King stands a fair Chappel, in the Chinese Tongue call'd Hiangsi, that is, A sweet smelling Hart, and is Dedicated to five Maidens, which when they were taken by Pyrats, would rather endure death than suffer their Honor to be blemish'd.

The thirteenth County Chicheufu, borders in the East upon Ningquefu; in the* 15.42 South-East touches Hoeicheufu; in the South-West lies the Province Kiangsi; the North-West hath the River Kiang; and in the North, a Promontory at the same River for Boundaries.

This Countrey was formerly under the Kingdom of V. soon after under Iue; next under Cu. King Loang call'd it Nanling; Siu, Cieupu; and the Family* 15.43 of Tang, the present Name Chicheufu. It comprehends six Towns, viz. Chicheu the chief, Cinyang, Tungling, Xetai, Kiente, Tunglieu, and four stately Temples.

The City Chicheu stands seated on the Southern Shore of the River Kiang.

The fourteenth Division Hoeicheufu, being the most Southern of all this* 15.44 Province, conterminates in the East, with the Province of Chekiang; in the South, with a Promontory; in the South-West, with that of Kiangsi; in the North-West, with Chicheufu; and in the North, with Ningquefu.

This Countrey in the time of the Kings suffer'd the same misfortune as the* 15.45 fore-mention'd. The Name Hoeichu it receiv'd of the Family Sung, and posses∣seth six Towns, viz. Hoeichu the chiefest, the rest are Hicuning, Vuyveng, Kimuen,* 15.46 In, Cieki.

This Hoeichu is a Place of great Trade, especially famous for making the best Chinese Ink and wax'd Chests.

The four small Territories of this Province are Quangte, Hochen, Chucheu, and Siucheu, every one call'd by the Name of their principal City.

The first of them being Quangte, borders Eastward upon the prime County Kiangningfu, and Hangcheufu; in the South, upon Hoeicheufu; in the West, looks at Ningquefu; and in the North runs with a Point to the River Kiang.

This County hath two Towns, Quangte the chief, and Kienping, both situate at the Foot of a pleasant Mountain call'd Hong and Ling.

The City Quangte is not onely fair, but also abounds with Silk.

The second call'd Hocheu, hath for Limits in the North, the third small, and twelfth great Territory Chucheu; in the East and South; Kiangningfu; and in the West, Lucheufu.

This Shire contains two Cities, of which Hocheu is the chiefest, and Hawxan.

The City of Hocheu is famous, because heretofore the Residence of a great Robber Chu, who Anno 1368. drove the Tartars out of China.

The third little County in which the great City Cheucheu stands, whose De∣nomination it bears, verges in the North and West with the second Territory Pungyangfu; in the East, with the Lake Piexe and the seventh great Shire Yang∣cheufu; in the South, with Kiangningfu and the two little Territories of the City Hocheu.

This County contains three Cities, of which Chucheu is the chiefest and big∣gest, and the other two much less are Civenciao and Laigan.

The fourth small County, in which the great Siucheu is situate, is the most Northern of this Province, and borders in the East, upon Hoaiganfu; in the South, upon Tunyangfu; in the West, upon Honan; in the North, at that of

Xantung. In the middle it is cut through by the Yellow River, and is of great consequence, because it conterminates with four Provinces, and contains five Cities, Sieuchu, Siao, Tangxang, Fung, and Poi.

On the North-West side of the City Siucheu lies a Bridge, made of thirty five Ships linked together with Iron Chains.

Here also is another Bridge that runs athwart the River Pieu.

This City Sieucheu is also famous, because the Emperor Lieupang, promoter of the Family of Han, after he had taken the City of Poi, set forth from hence to conquer the Empire.

Thus much of the Province of Nanking; now we will return to our Embassy.

AFter the Netherlanders had gotten fresh Men to Tow them, they set for∣ward* 15.47 again over the River Sung on the twenty fifth, and Landed about ten a Clock at the City Sucheu, where they chang'd their Barques. No sooner they arriv'd at the West Gate of the City, where they were to Embarque again; but the Mandarin who had the Command of the Vessels, came to bid them wel∣com, and invited them to Dine with him the next day; and moreover, pre∣sented them with two Porkers, as many Sheep, four Hens, two Pots of Drink, several sorts of Fruit, and twelve Pices of Silk-Stuffs, which were all deliver'd to the Ambassador himself, with request that he would please to accept them. Van Hoorn thanking him for his good inclination and trouble which he had ta∣ken upon him; and also for the Presents said, That he would accept of the Provision (because he would not seem to despise them) but as for the Stuffs he could not do it, because it was not customary, therefore he desir'd them to ex∣cuse him: Moreover, that he could not possibly come to Dine with him the next Morning, partly for his indisposition, being tir'd with his Journey, and partly fearing to displease the Conbon of the City, if he went any where to a Feast before he went to him; with which Excuses they seeming to be satisfi'd took their leave.

The next Morning, being the twenty sixth, the Horses (being till that time prevented by Stormy Weather) were Landed and put in Stables ashore.

The twenty seventh nothing hapned of note, onely some Mandarins came from the Vice-Roy Singlamong (who keeps in this City to the number of twen∣ty five) to Complement and Welcom the Ambassador, whilst the Netherlan∣ders waited for fresh Vessels to be gone again, of which they then saw no likelihood, notwithstanding the Mandarine Guides had told them the day before, that without fail they should have them as that day. They also saw little hopes of their going, there being no convenient Vessels to be had to carry their Horses.

The Conbon having the day before sent to ask the Hollanders, if they had no Pistols, nor Sword-blades to dispose of? it was judg'd fit on the twenty eighth, (observing what Courtesies the fore-mention'd Lord might do them in their coming thither) to present him with a pair of Pistols, two Sword-blades, five Ells of Scarlet, one String of Amber, two Pieces of Linnen, and a Quilt: But the Conbon would not accept any thing of the Presents, which were carry'd to him by the Secretary, onely the Pistols and Sword-blades; so that the rest he brought back again.

In the Evening a Mandarin, sent from the Conbon, came to Present the Ambas∣sador,* 15.48 in requital for his Pistols and Sword-blades, with twelve Pieces of Silk-Stuffs,

four Porkers, four Goats, Geese, Hens, and other fresh Provisions, which were accepted, but the Silk-Stuffs sent back again.

The twenty ninth Genko the Interpreter inform'd the Ambassador, that at his coming an Envoy had been there, who just before was sent from the Empe∣ror at Peking, to bring the Chineses of Tayowan, under his Obedience.* 15.49

The same day more Presents, and also the Oxen, were put into new Barques; and likewise the Horses were Embarqu'd again into the same Vessels which they came in, there being no convenient Vessels to be got for them there. Soon after they prepar'd all things to be gone the next day, onely staying for Fodder for the Horses, of which at this Place they were to provide themselves quite to Peking.

The thirtieth in the Forenoon the Conbon sent the Ambassador by one of his* 15.50 Mandarins ten Picols of Hay for a Present, which since none could be bought for Money, was accepted with many thanks, and a reward to the Mandarin that brought it.

In the Afternoon a Grand Mandarin, who had the Command over the Mili∣tia* 15.51 and the Emperors Wardrobe in this City, came to Complement and Wel∣com the Ambassador; who having presented him with a Glass of Wine, and shewed him the Horses and Oxen, took his leave.

The one and thirtieth in the Morning, being furnish'd with all Necessaries,* 15.52 they left Siucheu, and were Tow'd along a digg'd Channel, which reaches from Siucheu, Eastward of the Lake Tai, to the City Chinkiang, and disembogues it self into the great River Kiang. Having stay'd eight days for new Vessels to Embarque themselves in, and yet not able to get enough, were forc'd to keep four of their Hanksieu Barques, two for the Horses, and two for the Presents.

The two Masters of the Havens, sent by the General of Hanksieu to conduct* 15.53 the Netherlanders, took their leave at the North Suburb of Siucheu, where lea∣ving the Ambassador they intended to Sail again to Hanksieu; Van Hoorn for their care which they had over the Vessels, gave each of them a Piece of Perpe∣tuana; and also with this opportunity sent the following Letter to the Gene∣ral of Hanksieu, and the Conbon.

GRatitude is accounted the greatest Vertue amongst the Hollanders. The* 16.1 Ambassador cannot forget the many Favors which the generousness and Civility of Talavja had conferr'd on him. The Ambassador cannot find words to express his hearty thanks, but hopes at his Return from Peking and for the future to manifest by Deeds, how much the Realm of Holland and the Am∣bassador are oblig'd to Talavja.

The whole City Siucheu hath its Situation on the Banks of a great standing River, which cuts through the City cross-ways, and is Navigable both for small and great Vessels. The Walls of the City, according to the Chinese Geo∣graphers, are forty Chinese Furlongs in circumference, and with the Suburbs above a hundred: As the Netherlanders were inform'd, the City covers a Spot of three Leagues in circumference. Without and within are many stately Bridges of Stone, resting on several Arches. It is but thinly built, and the Hou∣ses are erected on Pine-tree Masts, many of them being very sleight.

Siucheu, because of its nearness to the Sea and the River Kiang, is a Place of great Trade, and hath many Ships belonging to it; nay, the Netherlanders saw so many Boats in all Places, that there was scarce room to get through them.

Much Amber is us'd in this City: for the Hollanders passing through several Streets, saw none but Workers of Amber.

All things, not onely for the subsistence of Man, but also for pleasure, may be had here in great plenty. It is one of the famousest Places in all China, be∣cause all the Portuguese, Indian, Iapan, and other Commodities that come from foreign Countreys, are brought thither not onely by Strangers, but the Chine∣ses themselves. There also come many Merchants from Nanking and other Places to Trade, which makes, that from year to year there is a continual Trade here, and Ships going from hence to other Provinces and Cities: and because the Ships should not be in danger when they Sail cross the neighbor∣ing Lake Tai, there is a Channel made on the North side of the Lake, which runs from the City Sucheu to that of Chinkiang; so that it discharges its Waters in the River Kiang; but yet the Course of it is stopp'd up there by a Sluce, which is drawn up, or let down when they please. But as they travel from Sucheu to Ukiang, or from Ukiang to Sucheu, is a Stone Bridge, resting on three hundred Arches, by which the Channel is divided from the Lake Tai. On this Bridge they draw their Vessels along by a Line, it being built for that purpose, that they need not lie still there with their Ships.

Without the Walls of the City stands a Custom-house, where they pay no Custom for Goods, but for the Ships according to their Burthen: and it is said that this Custom comes Annually to ten hundred thousand Ducats, or five hundred thousand Pound Sterling; whereby it may easily be judg'd how ma∣ny Ships go constantly up and down this River; whereas all the Emperor's Vessels, or those that carry any thing to the Court, pay nothing.

Many of the Emperor's greatest Barques, call'd Lunchyven, past by whilst the Hollanders Rid at Anchor there.

The City is Govern'd by a Conbon or Governor, who at that time was a Leao∣hing Chinese, and highly belov'd by all Persons.

After the Netherlanders were gone about a League from the City they pass'd by Xuciquan, a large Village, and in the Afternoon saw two hundred of the Emperor's great Barques lying at Anchor. In the Evening they arriv'd at the South-East side of the Suburb Usie, having that day with Sailing and Towing pass'd six Leagues in several Courses.

Usie, the second substitute City to the fifth Metropolis Changcheu, signifies* 16.2 Wanting of Tin; for formerly on Mount Sie near Fusie, the Chineses found a great deal of that Metal; but in the beginning of the Reign of the Imperial Family of Han, most of the Mines were exhausted, for which reason the City receiv'd that Denomination.

Here the Hollanders found many Stone Ovens, in which they Bake, or har∣den with Heat to that purpose, all manner of Stone.

In the Morning, being the first of April, they proceeded on their Journey,* 16.3 and Sailing about a Musquet-shot from the Walls of Usie, which leaving on their Lar-board, they arriv'd at the North-Suburb; where having stay'd some time for Coelies, or Men to Tow them, they went forward again. About Noon they Sail'd through Unquouw, a Village situate on both sides of the Channel, where they saw divers Vessels full of Indigo (which the Masters of them said was to be had at Sinchian and Sucheu,) and towards the Evening arriv'd at the Village Gongling, where they stay'd all that Night, having that day Sail'd three Leagues and a half in a Northerly Course.

The second in the Morning leaving the Village Gongling, and after half a

Leagues Towing through the Village Syksiovyem they dropp'd Anchor in the Evening on the North side of the City Siucheuw, otherwise call'd Cbangcheu, that there they might furnish themselves with fresh Coelies; but none being to be had there so suddenly, they were forc'd to stay that Night, having not gain'd above two Leagues in a North-West Course all that day: The reason why they made no greater speed was, because the Channel was very full of the Emperor's Barques, which by reason of their Bulk and deep Lading made but little way, and the Channel so narrow, that they could not pass them.

The sides of this Channel near the City are rais'd with much braver Stone than the other parts.

The third in the Morning going on farther, and passing through the Vil∣lage Laytschem, they arriv'd at Luesinga in the Evening; where dropping An∣chor they stay'd all Night to get fresh Coelies to Tow their Vessels, with which they came that day but three Leagues, because of the slow progress of the Emperor's Barques.

The fourth leaving Luesinga, they came, after they had been Tow'd through the Village call'd Sucouw, to the City Tanyang: in the Afternoon Sailing along* 16.4 the Walls thereof to the East Suburb, where they stay'd that Night to get new Coelies, having that day Sail'd and been Tow'd in a Northerly Course three Leagues.

The fifth in the Morning they set forth again with fresh Coelies, and leaving the City Tanyang, pass'd by a Lake, which by three Sluces empties her Waters into this Channel. In the Afternoon they came to a little Village call'd Hongunpek, where they spent some time in resting themselves, being much tir'd by slippery Ways, and the Wind being against the Vessels, whose high build∣ing had the greater force of them. So soon as they had eaten they went away again, and in the Evening arriv'd at the Village Singfon, where they were for∣ced by tempestuous Weather to drop Anchor, having that day by several Courses been Tow'd two Leagues and a half.

The sixth in the Morning leaving Singhfon, they saw several Stone Ovens: about Noon passing by the Walls of the City Sinkiang, or Chinkiang, they dropt* 16.5 Anchor at the North Suburb, to make preparation for their going up the Nan∣king Stream, or River Kiang, and likewise (as their Mandarine Guides said) to exchange some Barques, having this day been Tow'd about two Leagues.

The seventh in the Morning several Tartar Mandarins came to Complement the Ambassador, and bid him welcom, whilst he entertain'd them with a Glass of Wine. One of them after his departure sent the the Ambassador a Porker, a Goat, and some Fruit, which he thankfully receiv'd, and in return sent him some counterfeit Pearls, which he would else have bought. The Ambassador* 16.6 was also by a Mandarin invited to Dinner with the Governor of that Place; whither he went in the Afternoon (another Mandarin coming from the fore∣mention'd Governor with Horses to fetch him) with Putmans the Secretary, and all his Retinue, except Nobel, who could not go because of his indisposition; and coming to the Governor they were courteously receiv'd and welcom'd.

This Lord gaz'd so exceedingly upon the Netherland Ambassador and his Retinue, that he forgot his Eating and Drinking; by which means also no Discourse hapned amongst them of any remark; so that the Netherlanders af∣ter a civil Entertainment took their leave.

In the Evening the Interpreters, Ienko and Liulako, came to tell the Ambassa∣dor, that they had a second time been sent for to the fore-mention'd Governor,

who ask'd them for the number and quality of the Emperor's Presents, which as far as they knew they had given him an account of in Writing, whereat he was exceedingly amaz'd, saying, That without doubt they would be very acceptable. Moreover, he ask'd them if the Ambassador had no Blood-Coral, Pistols, Sword-blades, counterfeit Pearls, and the like? because he would willingly buy some of them, and therefore desir'd that they would please to speak to the Ambassador: Which being consider'd by the Netherlanders, and observ'd that this was a Tartar, and a Man of great Quality, who in and about the City bore the Command over a great number of Soldiers, and that he might do much for their advantage at Peking, they judg'd it conveni∣ent in the Morning to send and present him with five Ells and a half of Stam∣mel,* 16.7 five of Sky-colour'd Cloth, a Perspective Glass, two Pieces of Linnen, one String of Amber Beads, and some counterfeit Pearls; and with them were sent a Complementing Letter to this effect:

THe Ambassador is extreamly satisfi'd with, and oblig'd for Talavja's or his Lordships Civilities, and desires him to accept of these small Gifts as a token of Friendship; and in so doing will farther oblige the Hollanders:

Captain Putmans was order'd to carry the Governor the fore-mention'd Presents and Letter that Morning, but saw him come early Riding towards the Barques; so that it was thought fit to stay till his Return. Mean while the Ambassador's Son went with the Pilot and Interpreter Maurice a Fowling on the Banks of the River Kiang. The Governor returning, in the Afternoon came with four of his chiefest Lords to see the Oxen and Horses, and also to visit the Ambassador, protesting he could not avoid waiting on him, being so much pleas'd with his Conversation: Whereupon the Ambassador call'd for his Musick; with the pleasure of which he seem'd even ravish'd: After which being entertain'd with Spanish Wine and Sweet-meats, he departed.

The Gifts design'd for the Governor were now ready to be presented; but he modestly refus'd them, saying, He could not accept of them as yet, giving him many thanks in the mean time. Then asking Genko and Liulako the In∣terpreters, who were there present, if the Geueral of Hanksieu, and Conbon of Seucheu had receiv'd any Presents of the Ambassador? To which they an∣swer'd, That the General of Hanksieu had not, but the Conbon of Sucheu was pleas'd to cull out a couple of Swords: Whereupon he a second time refus'd the Gifts; but adding, That if any Swords had been mention'd in the Note, he would have been glad of them. Wherefore the Ambassador after his departure chose a Sword from a peculiar Parcel, (for they had but few) and in stead of a Pistol, of which also they had no great store, (for all the enquiring was for those two sorts of Arms) added a Carbine to the Presents. Which done, Putmans went a second time to the Governor with them. The Swords, Carbine, Sky-colour'd Cloth, and counterfeit Pearl he receiv'd, but the rest he sent back; when several of the Generals Children coming to see the Ambassador in his Barque, were in respect to their Parents presented with Amber Necklaces and other Trifles.

After the Netherlanders had stay'd till towards the Evening waiting for Ves∣sels to Ferry them over the River Kiang (for there were none but a great Boat, which the Mandarin Guide Hiulavja kept for himself, under pretence that that which he came in was grown leaky) they went with all their Vessels to the Mouth of the Haven before a Pagode, where they stay'd all that Night,

whilst the Guide Mandarins offer'd a Goat and a Swine to their Deity, before which, as they say, they durst not Sail up the River.

The chiefest of them went into the Pagode or Temple, carrying the slain Sa∣crifice to lay it on the Altar; when the Priest at their approach fell devoutly upon his Knees, and began to Mutter and Pray to himself. In the Temple, being Painted Red, hung several Lamps, which burnt Night and Day for the Deceas'd Souls: On one side of the Altar stood a Trough, wherein they laid the Victim; and on the other, a Rush Box with small pieces of Canes, which were the Sortes or Lots cast by the Priests, to know future Events.

Presently after Noon, the Governor of Sinkian came with a Train of great Lords to the same Temple; which he was no sooner enter'd, but he sent for the Ambassador, desiring him, he would Command his Musick with him, which the Ambassador did; and so repairing to the Temple, the Governor Entertain'd them with Bean-Broth, and the Ambassador on the other side, Cordiall'd them with Preserv'd Nutmegs, which the Governor and his Manda∣rins having never tasted of before, Eat with great delight, while the Musicians plaid on their several Instruments.

After some stay, the Governor desir'd to see the Horses, which the Ambas∣sador caus'd to be brought out of the Barques, which they all beheld with great admiration, saying, That they had never seen the like, therefore they doubted not, but they would be very acceptable to the Emperor; after they had seen the Horses, the Governor return'd again to the City, and the Hollan∣ders to their Barques.

On Sunday, being the tenth, and Easterday, they set Sail with a South-East Wind from the City of Sinkiun; the Ambassador with twelve Barques more, went Northerly cross the River Kiang, and after having Tack'd too and again about an hour, they arriv'd at the North-side of the River, about a quarter of a League distant from the Garrison of Quasieu, or Quacheu, through a great Stone Sluce, in an artificial Channel, running Northerly by the seventh Metropolis Xangcheu, to the Lake Piexe. This Trench is digg'd directly through the Coun∣trey, to make a way for Shipping out of the River Kiang, (which in that place sends no Branches to the North, but runs direct East towards the Sea) into the Yellow River.

It was at first in the Embassy of Peter de Goyer, and Iacob de Keys, by Nieuhof call'd, The Royal Channel, partly for her breadth and pleasantness, and partly, be∣cause it was built at the King's Charge.

They were Tow'd thorow the same in several Courses, having divers Reaches and Windings in half a League: At the end of which they arriv'd at a Village call'd Tongnanghong, where they rested a little, whilst the Ambassa∣dor walk'd ashore to see the foremention'd Sluces; and going also towards a Temple, was met by two Mandarins, (one a Sinksieuwan, and according to his own saying, the second Person of Quasieu, and the other a Tartar, and Gover∣nor of that Village) who both civilly welcom'd him, for which he return'd them Thanks. He of Sincksieuw being ask'd by the Ambassador concerning* 17.1 Tayowan, whether it would be deliver'd, answer'd, That he was well satisfi'd, that this Embassy, and chiefly the Presents which the Netherlanders brought, would be very acceptable to the Emperor; and that he doubted not of their good success in their Business, and that all their Wishes were, that the Nether∣landers were enter'd into a League with the Tartars, in the Countrey of China, and that they might come there to Trade with them, and then they should

hope, that the Foraign Traffique would again be permitted as formerly; whereas, because of the strict Watches at the Sea-Port Towns, nothing could be done; and that the Countrey People could not put off their Commodities; and if you Fee the Courtiers well, nothing will be deny'd at Peking▪

As to what concern'd Tayowan, it was in a mean condition, because they were obstructed from Trading to any place in China, and likewise all their best People were gone; therefore if the Emperor would only joyn twenty Jonks to the Netherland Ships, it might easily be taken.

That about five Moneths since, a Messenger had been there from the Em∣peror, to bring all the Chineses there present under Subjection, who had also Order, that if those of Tayowan did not hearken to his Proposals, that then at his return he should destroy all the Sea-Port Towns which were yet in being, and to give strict Orders in all places, that not one Jonk should either come in, or go out, but if they would submit themselves to the Emperor, that then all places should be left as they were. Now this Messenger being return'd fruitless, there was such Orders given in all the Havens, that not one Vessel can either come out or in to them, which was formerly winked at.

Not many days since, another Messenger was sent to Tayowan (being the same of whom Ienko the Interpreter had inform'd the Ambassador at Sucheu) whose return they much long'd for.

The Ambassador after this Discourse invited the Mandarins, with some other that came thither in the interim to this Barque, where they were entertain'd with a Glass of Spanish Wine, which having drank they departed.

This Mandarin of Sincksieuw, sent the Ambassador as a Present, one Porker, one Sheep, four Hens, two Geese, a Vessel of their Drink, and some Herbs, and the Governor of the Village some Dishes of Meat ready dress'd.

Afternoon, the Vessels going thorow the foremention'd Sluces, the Manda∣rin Guide Hiu Lavja came to an Anchor at the end of the Village, before a Pago∣de, and from thence Rode to make merry at the City of Quazieu; wherefore the Ambassador seeing that this day would be spent idly, went with the Barques wherein the Presents were Laden, to the Village Palipoe, and staid all Night; but the Mandarin inform'd of the Netherlander's departure, soon after follow'd them to the foremention'd Villages.

This day they gain'd about three Leagues.

The eleventh in the Morning, they set Sail again, and pass'd by several small Towns and Villages, and also by a great Tower, with seven jutting Galleries, standing on the South-side of Tongnaphan; between which and the foremention'd Tower, a Channel runs up Westward into the Countrey.

Against Noon they came to the South Suburb of Iamcefu, otherwise call'd Iancheu, the third City of Note in this Territory, where was also a Tower with four Galleries, by which being Tow'd to the City Walls, they resolv'd to change their Coelies, having given those that brought them thither, leave to go home, notwithstanding it was late before they got new Men; yet they went away, and pass'd through a Bridge with six Arches, opposite to a Custom-House, and so Eastward, having that day been Tow'd up the River two Leagues and a half.

In the Morning, being the twelfth, they proceeded on their Journey about Day-break, from Yancheu, against the Stream, by and through Wantoe, a Vil∣lage separated by a Channel that runs up into the Countrey of Wayopoe, or* 17.2 Stone Bakers, from the abundance of Kilns that are there; the West part

of it being under Water, represented a great Pool, or Lake.

At Noon they pass'd by Sjopouzink, a Village that a far off seems a City, and also three Sluces, thorow which the Water runs out of this Channel into the Manur'd Grounds.

Towards the Evening, coming to a small Village of seven or eight Houses, call'd Louting, where was a Cloyster of their Votaresses or Nuns, they dropp'd Anchor, having gain'd five Leagues on several Courses.

The thirteenth in the Morning, leaving the Village Louting, they pass'd by many Cottages, standing on the East-side of this Channel, to the Westward of which the Countrey lay all drown'd.

In the Afternoon they arriv'd at Kayoven, or Kaoyeu, the fourth City of Note* 17.3 next Hangcheu, where they were forc'd to stay, because their Coelies could not pass, the Ways being so deep by continual falling of Rain.

The City Kaoyeu lieth on the East-side of this Channel, on the brinks of the Lake Piexe, which supplies the Stream with Water.

Formerly, all the Ships that would go from Nanking, and the other Sou∣thern Territories along the River Kiang, and this Channel up to Peking, and so to the Northern Province, were forc'd to cross the foremention'd Lake, to their great hinderance and inconveniency, being in Stormy Weather many times compell'd to stay at Kaoyeu for fair Weather.

But in process of time, to prevent this trouble, and that at all times the Ships might proceed on their Journey, and not be necessitated to cross the Lake, a broad Channel was digg'd of seventy Furlongs, on the East-side of it, and Wharff'd or Inclos'd on each side with Free-stone: The City stands on a Clay Ground, the same with the adjacent Countrey, very good for Rice, which they have there in abundance.

The Countrey to the West of this Channel lies most under Water, yet pro∣duceth abundance of Canes, which serve for Fuel, for no other Wood grows here.

The fourteenth in the Morning, they set Sail with a stiff Gale of Wind out of the North-North-East, from the South Suburb of Kayoven, and for a quarter of a League, they had the City on their Starboard, and the Lake on their Larboard, till they were past the North Suburb; then Steering a Northerly Course up the Royal Channel, they left the foremention'd Lake on their Larboard.

Between this Lake and the Channel, is only a narrow Bank of three Foot high, which separates the one from the other: On their left Hand, the Coun∣trey lay all under Water, yet in some places stood a few small Huts dry, being the Residence of Countrey People.

In the Afternoon, they past by the Village Loantsia, which lay on their Star∣board; here the Countrey on the East-side began to shew somewhat pleasanter, being Till'd in several places.

In the Evening they Anchor'd at a Village call'd Kuisjo.

The fifteenth in the Morning, leaving Kuisjo, they past by Laensui, and Lou∣japou,* 17.4 and in the Afternoon Landed at Paoing, the sixth City of Note under the seventh Metropolis Yangsheu; it lieth on the East-side of this Channel, and is surrounded with strong Walls, about a League and a half in Circumference: On the North-side of the City stands a fair Temple, neatly built after the Chi∣nese manner.

Here they staid sometime waiting for fresh Coelies, which having gotten, they went farther, and in the Evening arriv'd at Kinho, where they staid all Night, having that day by several Courses gain'd five Leagues.

Between the City Paoing and the Village Kinho, the Bank Westward of the Channel which separates that and the Lake Piexe, is broken in several places, through which the Water rushes with such a force out of the Channel into the Lake, that they had great labor to keep the Vessels from falling there into.

The sixteenth about Day-break, proceeding on their Journey, they past through and by many Villages and Hamlets, lying on each side of the Channel; and about Noon, arriv'd at the West Gate of the City Hoaigan, having by Noon* 17.5 been Tow'd and Sail'd three Leagues and a half in a Northerly Course. Here (as the Mandarin Guides told them) all their Vessels in which they came were to be chang'd; whereupon they immediately apply'd themselves to the Com∣missary of that place, that they might be dispatch'd with what speed possible.

No sooner were they come to an Anchor with all their Barques, but there also Landed the Masters of the Haven of Hanksieu, which on the last of March, went from Sucheu with the Ambassador's Letter to the General, which Letter they said, they had safely deliver'd.

Their business, for which they came thither, was to fetch back the four Hanksieu Jonks, which were yet amongst the Fleet.

Some Mandarins also came to Complement and bid the Ambassador Wel∣come, in the name of the Governor of that place; for which Civility they were Entertain'd with two or three Glasses of Spanish Wine.

In the Night there arose a great Storm out of the North mixt with Thun∣der and Lightning, which continu'd all the next day.

The eighteenth, the foremention'd Governor invited the Ambassador and* 17.6 his whole Retinue to a Feast, in a great House, at the West-Gate of the City, before which they lay with their Vessels, whither they accordingly went about Noon, and were no sooner come there, but they were brought to the Gover∣nor's Presence, who kindly Congratulated the Ambassador's Arrival and Health. After some other Complements were past, every one was plac'd at a peculiar Table, and plentifully serv'd.

Among their Table-talk at Dinner the Governor ask'd, What the Ambas∣sador thought of China, and if it was not a great Countrey? Who reply'd, Yes Sir, not only a great, but a very fair Countrey, full of Fertile Grounds, and Delightful Objects: Then he began to Discourse with the Guide Mandarins (which were there present) about the Vessels: Wherefore the Ambassador de∣sir'd the Governor (being inform'd before, that there were few Barques to be had there) that since he was come so far with the Emperor's Presents, having never wanted any Conveniencies, that he would be pleas'd to take care, to procure them good Vessels so soon as possible, (because he was yet to go the most dangerous part of the way) having already spent so long a time in their Journey. All which this Lord promis'd, and excusing the meanness of the present Treat, hoping when they came back from Peking, to be provi∣ded for their better Entertainment. On which Van Hoorn proffer'd to Present him with a parting Cup of Spanish Wine, which he modestly refusing, would not suffer.

Thus the Netherlanders taking their leaves, and departing to their several Barques, two Mandarins came to them, (which had, whilst the Netherlanders

were Entertain'd at the foremention'd Lords, sate just over against them) to ask in the Governor's Name, if their Entertainment had pleas'd them? where∣upon the Ambassador, in respect to their Master, Presented each of them with five Ells and a half of Red Cloth, which after some Complements they accepted.

The nineteenth in the Morning, according to the usual Custom, the Secre∣tary Vander Does went with a Complementing Letter to the Commissary, and to Thank him for his kind Entertainment: The Contents were these.

THe Ambassador so highly esteems Talavja's Civility, that he cannot ex∣press* 18.1 his Thankfulness in these few Lines; but at his return from Pe∣king, He hopes to find Him in good Health, when he will manifest and confess himself much oblig'd by his Lordships Favors.

The Ambassador was inform'd by the Mandarin Guides, that notwithstand∣ing the Commissary had promis'd Yesterday, that he would take care to pro∣vide Vessels for his farther Journey: The Touwatja had said, That there were none to be had, therefore the Secretary was commanded, that when he came to the Commissary, to desire him a second time to assist them, that they might depart with all speed, and then to go from thence to Touwatja, and ask him if any Vessels were to be had? and if he answer'd no, he should acquaint him, that they would hire Vessels themselves, for they could wait no longer; and if he reply'd, there were, then to desire him, that they might be sent to them that very day.

The Secretary at his return, inform'd that he had been at the Commissary's House, but could not be admitted to speak with him; but that he had given the Letter, and whatever else he had to say, to his Servant, who presenting it to his Master, brought answer, That his Lordship thanked the Ambassador for his kind Wishes; as to what concern'd the Vessels, he knew no otherwise but that the Ambassador was already furnish'd, but since they were not, he would immediately send to the Touwatja, and Order him, to procure them; which if he did not do, he would complain to the Emperor of his neglect. The Secretary had also been with the Touwatja, and enquir'd of him concerning the Barques: To which he was answer'd, That there were Vessels enough, but they lay at Sinkianso, a Village at least three Leagues from thence, and that he would send some of his Men thither with the Guide Mandarins, to look upon them, and if they were Equipt and Tight, to hire them.

But because the Ambassador suppos'd the Guides Mandarins not to be very expert in Naval business, he sent his Secretary with them; who returning in the Evening, brought word, That he had chose two convenient Barques for the purpose, which Touwatja had promis'd to hire, but he could find none to carry the Horses, Oxen, and their Persons, therefore the Touwatja believ'd it con∣venient, that the Ambassador and Nobel should remain in those Barques which brought them thither, and go up farther in them; and the Touwatja would sa∣tisfie the Owners of them for it, and also furnish them with all other Necessa∣ries for their Journey.

As for Barques to carry the Horses, he would send for them from the other side of the Yellow River, which with the two Barques that the Secretary had cho∣sen, would be there the next Morning; to which purpose, Lakka the Interpre∣ter was left there, that he might come down with them.

The twentieth in the Morning, the Mandarins (which the day before had* 18.2 been Presented with five Ells and a half of Red Cloth) came in return to Pre∣sent the Ambassador with two Cowes, two Sheep, six Ducks, six Hens, four Steans of Chinese Drink, seven Pieces of Silk Stuffs, and two Silver Cups.

The Provisions were kindly accepted of, but the Silver Cups and Silk Stuffs he return'd.

In the Afternoon, the Interpreter Lakka came back without any Barques from the Village Sinkiansoe, with news, that the Touwatja's People wrangled, and would not agree with the Owner of the two Barques which the Secretary had chosen, offering them less than their Fare; whereupon Nobel went immediate∣ly to the Touwatja, to ask him a second time, What he intended to do about the Barques, and withal tell him, That he if he did not suddenly provide them with Barques, they would go and hire some themselves, or else go away with them in which they were.

Nobel at his return brought the Touwatja along with him, who excus'd himself, that he could not yet provide Vessels for them; and desir'd, that the Ambas∣sador would please to have patience till the next Morning, against which, he would send to all places, and if he could find none, they might remain in those wherein they were, and so go on in them at least two days after.

The next day being the one and twentieth, no likelihood of any preparati∣on appearing, Van Hoorn judg'd it convenient to write to the Governor to this effect.

THe Vice-Roy Singlamong hath earnestly desir'd, that the Ambassador* 19.1 should hasten his Journey to Peking, because the Lipous were somewhat dissatisfi'd at his long stay; now the Ambassador hath already been three Moneths from Fokien.

The Horses, Oxen, and other Goods of the a 19.2 Chinkon, are subject to hurt, and may suffer in their Transporting.

And because the Emperor's Favor is concern'd in this Chinkon, the Ambassa∣dor desires, that his Lordship would please to give Order for the speedy pro∣curing of Vessels for the Chinkon to go up to Peking, or that the Ambassador himself may hire, because he can neither well answer his long stay to the Em∣peror, nor his Master the Lord Maetzuiker in Batavia.

To this Letter carry'd by Putmans, the Governor answer'd.

THat he had just cause to complain; also that he himself had sent some Barges, and that he would take further care to accommodate the Am∣bassador so soon as it was possible.

In the Evening the Touwatja came again to the Ambassador, to promise and assure him, that he should be provided the next Morning for his Journey, and therefore intreated his patience till then: To which Van Hoorn answer'd, That if he perform'd his promise, he would take it kindly.

The two and twentieth, the Mandarin Guides came to tell the Ambassa∣dor, that the Vessels were come to take in the Horses, and Oxen, and that the Shipwrights were busie in mending and repairing the Decks. The Commissary having sent them as his own, and likewise a great Boat to put the Presents in out of those Vessels which were not in condition to go further.

The Netherlanders immediately going to see the foremention'd Barges, and

finding them to be pretty good, they immediately gave order for the remo∣ving of them into those Vessels, and so, all things being ready, they left the City Haoigan with seven Vessels, which carry'd their Goods and Persons, besides eight more for the Mandarins and Interpreters. Coming beyond the North Suburb of Haoigan, the Governor of the City, who was there busie receiving the Emperor's Customs and Tribute, Drank to the Netherlanders good Voyage in a Cup of Bean-Broth, which he sent Aboard by his own Servants; for which as they pass'd by him they return'd him many thanks, and gratifi'd the Servants with two Rix-Dollars.

Haoigan, the eighth City of prime remark in the Province of Nanking, lieth on the East side of the Channel on a Plain, being all a Morass, not far from the Sea, and in the North near the Yellow River. It is but one City, yet consisting of two Parts, both which are inclos'd within one Wall: that which lies to the South is properly call'd Haoigan, and that to the North-East Yenching: It is enlarg'd by a Suburb, which on each side of the Channel extends it self above a League.

In this City the Vice-Roy of that Province hath his Residence, who takes care, as Purveyor, for the Emperor's Annual Provisions, and Commands with arbitrary Power over the Southern Provinces. His Office is to send for Provisions and other Necessaries from the adjacent Countrey, which in an in∣credible number of the Emperor's Jonks are sent from thence to Peking. When they come to this City they are all search'd and measur'd by the Vice Roy's Order, who afterwards sends them to the Court.

In this Suburb are also two Custom-houses, one for Merchandises, and the other for Ships, but not for the Emperor's use. The Money which is hereby rais'd is bestow'd on the repairing of Sluces, Graffs, and Banks near several Water-falls; yet notwithstanding a great part thereof goes to the Emperor's Exchequer. On the North side of the City in this Channel are three Water∣falls, of which the first and nearest to the River Hoai is the most troublesom, because out of this River the Water comes with great force; which is stopp'd by nine great Banks, that it may not overflow the whole Countrey.

Not far from Haoigan the Netherlanders pass'd by Pantja and several other Villages, and also by a great number of the Emperor's Jonks laden with Tri∣butary Goods. In the Evening they arriv'd at Zinkhiunzoe, where they were to pass by a Sluce, having by Noon been Tow'd almost three Leagues.

The next Morning being the twenty fourth they got safely through the foremention'd Sluce, and from thence by a Village call'd Sinkjanzoe, which scattering extends it self along this Channel above a League and a half, and about Noon were in sight of the Village Namenno, or Namemio, or Neymemia, before which stood a Place of Execution, as appear'd by several Mens Heads stuck on Poles: Here they were also forc'd to pass another Sluce, which was somewhat dangerous; for coming near it, they were forc'd to stay till some of the Emperor's Barques, laden with Revenues, were gotten through. Mean while the Horses and Oxen were put ashore, for fear, as the Men pretended, when the Barques should come to the Sluce with them (where the Water, be∣cause of its narrow Passage makes a great roaring) they would not stand still, and thereby endanger the oversetting of the Barques. In the Afternoon all the Vessels got safe through, yet with much trouble; for every Vessel was forc'd to be drawn with two hundred Men; for the Water on the upper, or North side is above four foot higher than that below on the South: Thus they were

[illustration]

tow'd along till they came to the end of the Village, where they Anchor'd be∣fore a Pagode, where the Barque-men, according to their Custom, went to of∣fer and pray for a safe Passage through the Yellow River, which they were now to enter, having this day gain'd about three Leagues.

The twenty fifth about Noon leaving Namemio, they cross'd the Yellow River,* 20.1 which runs South-East and North-West by the foremention'd Village to the Western Shore, on which the Coelies were Landed, opposite to the Village Sing∣ho, and then tow'd them North-North-West up the Yellow River, till they came to the Village before-mention'd, where they stay'd for fresh Men.

Mean while a Siampan or Boat came aboard with a Priest, and two Persons* 20.2 calling themselves Magicians, or Cunning-men, one of them having a Bod∣kin stuck through his Cheek, and continually shaked their Bodies, as if they had been possess'd, which they made the poor People believe, also telling the Men in the Ambassadors Vessel, That they should have a fair Wind the next day, and a successful Voyage; whereupon the Master, who stood quaking be∣fore them, gave them some Silver (which was all they desired) and also some Gold and Silver Paper, which he entreated them to offer to their Deity: Van Hoorn also to be rid of them, gave them some Money.

There are many of these sort of People in China, which by strange Gestures, and scourging of themselves after a peculiar manner, so get Alms from the Charity of the People.

Some lay red-hot Cinders on their bald Heads, where they let them burn so* 20.3 long, till the stench of the Broyling offends the Spectators, whilst they by cry∣ing, wringing of their Hands, and the like, enduring so great Torment, move all that are present to a charitable Benevolence.

There accustom also in the chiefest Cities, and Places of greatest Com∣merce, especially at Annual Fairs, whole Companies of blind Beggars, which at the uttering of some Words which they mutter, strike themselves so violent∣ly with a sharp and cutting Stone on their Breasts, that sometimes the Blood trickles down their Bellies.

Others knock their Foreheads one against another with such violence, that they seem to crack one anothers Skulls; which they continue till fainting they fall in a Swoon, unless prevented by a considerable Alms. Some again lying along on the Ground, beat their Heads against the Stones till they have great Swellings as big as Eggs upon their Foreheads.

Besides these, there are many other Idle People in China, who by several Cheats maintain themselves by the Gifts of Charitable Persons. The Beggars amongst others go up and down in Companies, as our Gipseys, who for their debauch'd living are accounted as the most infamous of the Nation. Most of them are deform'd, either born so, or else made so wilfully by their Parents in their Infancy, with incredible Torture; for there are some with wry Necks or Mouths, crook Backs, long hooked Noses, or squint Eyes, and lame Arms or Legs.

There are likewise many Mountebanks, who use several wild Beasts, especi∣ally Tygers, made tame by Degrees, on which, to the admiration of the Be∣holders, they sit and ride through many Cities and Villages, which walk along the Streets very softly, with a Branch in its Mouth, which holding wide open, is very fearful to look upon, besides his Tail, which he swings to and fro, yet hurts none.

The Rider, who knows without either Bit or Bridle to govern the Tyger, onely by moving his Body and Feet, hath a wide Coat over his under Clothes, with Sleeves so large, that they hang down half way to the Calfs of his Legs: Over his right Shoulder comes a Girdle, which is made fast under his left Arm, in manner like a Scarf▪ In his left Hand he grasps a Sword, with which he cuts the Air, and now waves it over his Head, and then side-ways, crying and extol∣ling, like our Stage-Doctors, his Balsoms, Unguents, and Plaisters, good against all Wounds and Distempers whatsoever.

This Mountebank is generally accompanied with many deform'd People, some following him on Crutches, others with Rattles; most of them go na∣ked; others again wear wide Coats, full of Patches of divers Colours and Stuffs; others, which is strange to behold, have stiff Wings on their Temples, on each side of their Heads.

IT was late in the Afternoon before fresh Toers came from the Village Singo; nevertheless the Netherlanders going forward, pass'd by Sinkiazuan, and about Night arriv'd at another small Village, containing about ten or twelve Houses, call'd Ioupou, where they dropp'd Anchor, having that day been tow'd but two Leagues and a half.

The twenty sixth they went by break of day from Ioupou, and came, having pass'd Conghiveao, Tsantzan, and Govetchia, the two first on the East, and the last on the West side of a River, about a Cannon-shot Southward from the City Taujenjeen, where they were forc'd to stay for fresh Coelies, having that day gain'd* 20.4 three Leagues and a quarter, according to the Course of the Yellow River.

Taujenjeen, otherwise call'd Taoyven, scituate on the Western Shore of the Yel∣low River, is surrounded with broad and strong Mud or Earthen Walls, fortifi'd above with Stone Breast-works.

The twenty seventh they proceeded on their Journey with fresh Toers, and leaving the City Taujenjeen, went on Easterly, and at Noon pass'd by Suyt∣sien, lying on the East side of the Yellow River, and also by divers Rusticks Hou∣ses, which stood on each side thereof. At Noon they came to a nameless Ham∣let,

of seven or eight Houses, on the West side of the Stream, where they stay'd all Night, because the Mandarins, it beginning to blow somewhat hard, durst not venture further. This day they were got about three Leagues on∣wards of their Journey.

The next Morning, being the twenty eighth, they reach'd the Villages Goes∣jan, Pojancho, and Gousuntu, the one on the East, and two last on the Western Shore of the Stream. In the Afternoon they arriv'd at Tsinsing, where they lay still expecting fresh Coelies, being got three Leagues and a half that day on se∣veral Courses. Somewhat Easterly from Tsinsing appears a fair Castle, with∣in a Wall, which towards the North takes in a Mount.

The twenty ninth in the Morning weighing from Tsinsing, they came, ha∣ving sail'd a League Westerly, to Kousango, a Village where the Channel call'd Iun takes its beginning, and discharges its Waters through a Sluce; viz. This Channel Iun begins on the Northern Borders of the Province of Peking, in the Territory Hoaiganfu, Northward from the City Socien, on the North side of the Yellow River; out of which the Ships that go to all Places in the Nor∣thern part of the Empire, are brought into the Channel Iun, which spreads it self North-West from thence through the second County Iencheufu, in the Pro∣vince of Xantung to the City Cining, Southward of the Lake Nanyang, then through those of Tungchunfu, and through the Nanyang, and lastly at the end of that Territory it disembogues in the River Guei, which separates the Provinces of Xantung and Peking.

But because this Channel in many Places is too shallow for Vessels of Bur∣then, there are above twenty Sluces, which they call Tungoa, built artificially with Stone: every Sluce hath a large Water-gate, which is open'd when any small Boats or Vessels are to pass, and strongly barr'd up with Posts and Planks to keep up the Water. These fore-mention'd Gates are open'd with an Engine, or Wheel-work, with little trouble, to let the Water through, and so from one to another till they have past through, like the Sluces at our new River at Guilford. But half way before they come to the City Cining, they let as much Water out of the Lake Usianghoe, or Can, through a very great Water∣gate, as they have occasion for them, locking it again, that the Lake may not be quite exhausted.

When the Ships come to the Lake Chang they cross it not, but go with great∣er ease along a Channel made near the side, and Confin'd with two broad Banks. At every Water-gate are People, which for small consideration pull the Vessels through with Ropes. In this manner the Ships go out of the Yel∣low River to Peking.

Certainly if the European Builders, or Layers of Water-courses, did come along this Channel Iun, and behold the thickness and heighth of the Banks on both sides, and the stately Water-gates, which are also of Free-Stone, or the firmness of the Work, they would justly admire the Contrivance and Art of the Chineses in this their way of Aqueduct, not to be paralell'd by the prime Pieces of the best Masters in Europe.

After all the Boats were Tow'd through the fore-mention'd Water-gates, they Sail'd up the Channel Iun, in a Northerly Course with a fair Wind by the Villages Mochoctan and Uwtaotchou, the first on the West, and the last on the East side of the Channel, and in the Evening came to Maulovao on the Western Shore, having this day wrought out six Leagues and a half.

Here they they were forc'd to exchange their Coelies, because the other that

came from Sinsing (a Place two Leagues and a half distance from thence) had gone their Stage.

Van Hoorn no way satisfi'd with these delays, told the Mandarin Guides, that* 20.5 they ought to have sent Coelies before, that they might have been ready against his coming thither, and then rehearsed the long time which he had already spent, when as they might have finish'd their Journey in six Weeks; all which (said he) you can scarce answer in Peking, if the Emperor's Presents should be any ways damnifi'd, which they are subject to.

The thirtieth at Noon, no Coelies coming, they went with some Soldiers into the Countrey to Press some of the Rusticks; which was done so leisurely, that it was almost Night before they got from Maulovao, and Sail'd the whole Night, though with a slow pace, because their Vessels often rak'd upon the Sand.

In the Morning the first of May they past by Kiakio and Sankomiao, two de∣cay'd* 20.6 Villages on the East side of the Channel somewhat up into the Coun∣trey, and about Noon pass'd by Thoetsuang; beyond which they lay still a little while till their Toers had Din'd. Then going on again they arriv'd in the Evening at a small Village call'd Sjousincha, and Anchor'd before a Water-gate, having since the last Night gain'd six Leagues in several Courses.

The second in the Morning about nine a Clock they pass'd through the Water-gate, before which they lay the Night before, being hindred there by a strong North-West Wind. In the Afternoon coming to Twansingiao, they again lay before one of the Water-gates till the Wind was something abated. Whilst they lay there, one of the Emperor's Barques, laden with Tributary Goods, just to the Northward of the Village, was accidentally set on fire, but soon quenched, onely burning her Stern, and very little of her Lading. Towards Evening they pass'd the fore-mention'd Water-gate, and Sail'd in the Moon∣shine through Singhjamiao and its Water-gates, and about Midnight Anchor'd before Wansensua, having that day gain'd but a League and a half. About day-light they got through the fore-mention'd Sluce, and at Noon arriv'd at Milanchia, where they were to pass another, but because the Wind blew very hard they cast Anchor before it.

This Village of Milanchia separates the Province of Nanking from that of Xantung, being seated on their Borders. Against the Evening, the Weather growing more calm, they went with their Vessels through the Water-gate be∣yond the Village, at the end of which they stay'd, having the whole day not gain'd above three quarters of a League, and pass'd out of the Province of Nanking into that of Xantung.

The Province of Xantung, being the fourth of the Northern, verges South-East and North with the Sea; and on the West side surrounded with Rivers: in the North it borders upon the Province of Peking; in the South, on that of Nanking, from which separated by the Yellow River. The remainder thereof lies inclos'd within the Rivers of Iun and Guei.

The fourth in the Morning weighing again, they pass'd through Tsingchia and Hanghsuansa, and also through two Water-gates.

To the Westward, or behind this Village, a great Lake, by the Chineses call'd Yzianghoe, takes its beginning, and through two Sluces discharges Waters into those of Iun.

In the Evening, though late, they came to the Village Tzizang, where they stay'd all Night, being got three Leagues and a half farther in several Courses that day.

The fifth about Day-break they went forward, and about Noon reach'd Iaixinho, or Iaxhinno, a little Town consisting of thirty six Houses, all built like Forts, or defensive Towers. Here they stay'd some time for fresh Coelies, who being come they weighed again, and first pass'd through a Water-gate, lying in the fore-mention'd Iaixinho; afterwards through Tsonoiacha, and two Water∣gates more. In the Evening they arriv'd at Maaliaeao, where they stay'd all Night, having gain'd four Leagues that day.

Here, as before, began to appear a Lake on the East side of the Channel. The Countrey to the Hills seeming to lie thereabouts under Water.

The sixth in the Morning before day setting forward again they pass'd* 20.7 through ten Flood-gates, and also by and through Tsouteucha and Naeyang, Lout∣chiajeen, Tongnang-fong, Tsiongiaceen, Chinkio, Sinchia, Tsoufee, and Sohousum. In the Evening they arriv'd at the South Suburb Tzinningfoe, or Cinning, and Anchor'd* 20.8 before a Flood-gate, through which they were to pass. This day they had gain'd eight Leagues.

Here, according to the Mandarin Guides Saying, the Hoaigan Barques, which were in the Fleet, must be chang'd, and therefore they must stay till the Governor of the City had provided others for them.

Here the Ambassador, to oblige Hiulavja, one of his Guides, that he might make haste, gave him a String of Blood-Coral.

The eighth in the Morning the Governor of the Militia of that Place, being a Tartar, came to Complement the Ambassador; for which Civility he was entertain'd with a Glass of Wine, and at his going away saw the Horses and Oxen, which he much admir'd.

In the Afternoon the Mandarin Guide Hiulavja came with the two Vessels to shift and take in the Horses and Oxen, but the Netherlanders searching them, found them to be very old and crasie, and therefore sent them back again.

The ninth in the Morning a Grand Mandarin, a Native Chinese, came with Hiulavja to visit the Ambassador, who kindly entertain'd them: amongst other Questions the Ambassador ask'd them when they should go forward on their Journey; whereupon Hiulavja answer'd, That the City had not yet provided Toers, Rice, Money, and other Necessaries, which should be got∣ten with all expedition, that they might have the least hindrance possible. But the Ambassador suspecting it to be onely delays, judg'd it convenient to send the following Letter to the Conbon, or Governor of that Place, to this effect:

THe Ambassador is arriv'd here from a remote Ploce with the a 21.1 Chinkon, and therefore hopes that his Lordship will forward the Iourney; for they have been a long time on the Way, and the Presents are subject to receive hurt and damage, therefore the Ambassador desires Talavja, that he would please to give order that there may be good Barques prepar'd for the Horses and Oxen, and that the Ambassador may be dispatch'd to go with all speed to Peking.

This Letter being carry'd to the Conbon by the Secretary Vander Does, and read over, he reply'd, That it was never known, nor customary either go∣ing to, or coming from Peking, to change Vessels in that Place. To which the Secretary rnswer'd, That he hop'd he would excuse the Ambassador, because he knew not the Custom, as being a Stranger; he had made this Request on the advice of his Mandarin Guides, who made him believe that the Hoaigan Barges must be chang'd here. The Conbon after this Discourse said, That all the Emperor's Goods should remain in the same Barques in which

they came thither, and that he would give order that the Barques should be furnish'd with all Necessaries; that the Hollanders might depart when they pleas'd. He also in the Secretary's presence sent a Mandarin to the Touwatja, or Master of the Vessels, with Commands that he should immediately furnish the Barques with all manner of Necessaries, and by no means detain the Hol∣landers.

The tenth in the Morning a Mandarin, sent from the Conbon of that Place,* 21.2 came to present the Ambassador with two Hogs, two Sheep, two Ducks, six Hens, two Pots of Chamzoe, or Zamzou, that is, Liquor of Rice, and some other fresh Provisions; which were all kindly accepted of, and the Bearers rewarded with three Tail of Silver.

About Noon they pass'd through the Water-gates, before which they had lay'n with all their Vessels, and lay still before another Sluce till the eleventh in the Evening; then setting forward again they arriv'd at Cinning, or Tzin∣ning, or Cuningsiu, the fourteenth City of note under Yengche•…•….

This is a pleasant, though an ancient City, lying on the East Shore of the Channel Iun, in a plain and Morassy Soil. The Suburbs thereto belonging, which spread themselves on each side of the Channel, are very large and popu∣lous, and hath on each side of the Trench two strong Water-gates.

In the dark they Sail'd by the Villages Oeling, Siliphoe, and Ghansu; and in the Afternoon dropp'd Anchor at the Village Poetuen, a League and three quarters from the City Tzinning.

The twelfth in the Morning weighing again, they shot three Water-gates, and also pass'd by and through two Villages, Longhwanghmuao and Nangwangao, lying close by one another, near the Place where the River Onghoo runs into this Channel, so that the Current which had hitherto in this Graff been against them, was now somewhat with them, by which means they reach'd the Vil∣lage Poelcely that Evening; and not long after arriv'd at Koygoeva, where they Anchor'd before two Sluces, having that day gain'd about four Leagues.

The thirteenth they pass'd the Sluces, and so leaving Koygoeva they Sail'd through three Flood-gates, and by the Villages Inlako, Tsinti, Kingkiacouw, and Oesienno: coming beyond the last, the Wind began to blow very hard out of the North, so that they were forc'd to Anchor near the Shore to expect fairer Weather, having this day Sail'd four Leagues.

The fourteenth being calmer they weighed again, and Sail'd about three quarters of a League, when they came before a Flood-gate in the Village Oe∣sienno, where they lay till the Evening, because the Mandarins said there was not Water enough to float the Vessels. Towards Evening they weighed again, and in the Dusk pass'd by Siliphoe, Ulchelapoe, and Oeliphoe; and in the Afternoon arriving at Toukjamtuao, they dropp'd Anchor before a Water-gate, two Leagues and a quarter from Oesienno.

The fifteenth in the Morning about nine a Clock they pass'd the Sluces, and leaving the Village Tunkjamtuao, they came about Noon to Xantsuy, a City, where they stay'd a little while for fresh Coelies; which when come to them, they immediately went on.

The City of Xantsuy lies on each side of the Channel Iun, which on the West side at the going up of the Trench, and fortifi'd with strong Castles built square, and about an hours walking in circumference; the Walls of Stone, strengthned with Stone Breast-works: there are also many stately Buildings, which for want of Inhabitants are faln to decay. Amongst other Edifices ap∣pears

a famous Pagode, or Temple, Teywan Miao, inclos'd within a Wall rais'd half with Free-Stone, and the other half with red and green Bricks. The Tem∣ple it self consists all of Free-Stone; the Roof on the in-side is of a Vermilion colour, and on the top cover'd with yellow glaz'd Tyles; without the Walls is a standing Water, where, according to the Relation of the Chineses, some years since a stately Temple suddenly sunk, with the whole Congregation, Priests and People.

Towards the Evening they came to Kimonsa, and dropp'd Anchor before a Water-gate, having that day gain'd three Leagues and a half.

The sixteenth in the Morning they shot the Sluces with all their Vessels, before which they had lay'n that Night, and came to another about a Musquet Shot thence; through which they could not get till the Afternoon, because of the shallow Water. From thence they arriv'd before another in the Village Oasting, which they went through in the Evening; and in the Dusk arriv'd at Tsaotsing before a Flood-gate, having that day been Tow'd but three quarters of a League; it was very difficult too for the great Vessels to get through these Sluces, which were in a manner quite dry on the North side, and on the South side not above three Foot and a half of Water, which being let out, there would not remain a Foot and a quarter, when as the great Barges drew two Foot and a half so that the Water must at least be a Foot higher before they could get through; wherefore they lay still two days, viz. the seven∣teenth and eighteenth; but on the nineteenth they got through, and after a little Sailing coming to the Village Gihaatsysy they dropp'd Anchor before a Water gate, having this half day been Tow'd somewhat more than a League.

The twentieth in the Morning they went through the Sluce, and at Noon another; and also by the Village Zoatiajeen, In the Afternoon arriving at Lieg∣hayway they Anchor'd before a Water-gate, having gain'd two Leagues this day.

The one and twentieth in the Morning having shot the last Sluce, they ar∣riv'd about nine a Clock at the South Suburb of Tungjanfoe, otherwise call'd Tungchang, the third City of eminency in the Province of Xantung.

This little City of Tungchang stands in a Valley, built square, and about an* 21.3 hours walking in circumference, with defensive Walls. In it are two eminent Streets, which run cross through the Town, in the middle of which stands a Triumphal Arch, or a high Structure with four Vaulted Posterns, and as many Roofs one above another. The Gates are very strong, and have on each side four Bulwarks, which they can, when Storm'd, clear and make good. On the North side is a Bridge of a hundred and thirty Paces long, leading cross a Wa∣ter that incircles the City. On the South is a very populous Suburb of great Trade. On the East stands an Iron Pillar, four Fathom and a half thick, and about twenty Foot high, Engraven at the bottom with several Chinese Chara∣cters, which according to their Relation was set up there seven hundred years before, as a Monument; under which lay the Body of an Heroe, famous for his valorous Atchievements, and good Service done his Countrey.

The two and twentieth in the Morning they left the South Suburb of Tung∣hang, having gotten fresh Toers, for which they stay'd, and Sailing a Mus∣quet Shot Eastward by the City, came about Noon to Sinsia, where they An∣chor'd before a Sluce, having Sail'd above a League this half day.

Here they were forc'd to lie all the Afternoon and the next day, before they could get through for want of Water.

[illustration]

The twenty fourth in the Morning they shot the fore-mention'd Sluces, and about Noon another; and also pass'd by Xoesu, Liancotsue, Liancotza. In the Afternoon they came to Toetsao, where they Anchor'd before a Water-gate, ha∣ving been Tow'd above a League that day.

The twenty fifth setting forth again, they pass'd another Sluce, and about Noon they came to Woersjavaan; where taking fresh Toers they went away immediately, with hopes to reach the City of Linsing that day; but being past Ooetsjaven, Taykiasa and Tayhiaven, they saw that the Channel lay full of the Em∣peror's Vessels, laden with Tributary Goods; which by reason of its narrow∣ness and sholeness in some places they could not pass by, which forc'd them (though but half a League from Linsing) to stay till the Water grew higher, ha∣ving that day gain'd three Leagues.

The twenty sixth in the Morning they went forward again, and about nine a Clock they arriv'd at Linsing; into which they went with their Barges (for the Channel runs through the middle of it) till they came before a Flood-gate, through which they were to pass, having this Morning been Tow'd half a League in a Northerly Course. All Places hereabouts lay full of the Empe∣rors Barges.

The Governor of this Place, as the Mandarin Guides related, was depos'd, and a new one expected in two or three days from Tungchianfoe; for which rea∣son they could not pass the Sluce before which they lay, it being lock'd up with Iron Chains.

The twenty seventh and twenty eighth nothing hapned of remark.

The twenty ninth, being Whitsunday, the Ambassador was told, that the Go∣vernor of Tungchanfoe was come, and had taken possession of his Place; so that he thought fit the thirtieth in the Morning, for the hastening of his Journey, to write the following Letter to him.

THe Holland Ambassador is come from remote Countries, and hath staid here at Linsing above four days. The Chinkon hath been a long time a coming, and by that means subject to be spoil'd; therefore the Ambassador desires, that they may with all speed go to Peking; and to that purpose the Sluces may be open'd, which will be service∣able to the Emperor, and a great kindness to the Ambassador.

Nobel carrying this Letter, related at his return, that he had been with the new Governor, who in answer to the Ambassador's Letter had told him, That he was sensible how far a Journey the Netherlanders were come, and that he knew (having two years since been at Emuy and Quemuy) what service they had done for the Emperor; therefore he would not detain them, but send a Manda∣rin to search the Barges (because there being a Custom-house, no Goods but the Emperors were to pass through without paying) in which the Emperors Goods were, to see if any other private Commodities were in them, or not; which should no sooner be done, but he would give them leave to be gone, and accordingly a Mandarin was forthwith sent, who at first was very earnest about searching of the Goods: But when the Ambassador answer'd him, that he might do it and begin at his Vessel, but he would permit no Chests nor Ca∣ses to be open'd, he went away without looking upon them; being first pre∣sented by the Ambassador with two Pieces of Linnen, which was all he aim'd at.

The next Morning about Day-break, passing the Sluce with all the Vessels,* 22.1 they went through the City of Linsing, till they came to the River Guei, or Geu, which comes from the South to another part of the City.

Thus they left the Channel Iun, in which they had past through forty seven Sluces, or Flood-Gates, not without great trouble, and Expence of two and thirty days time; yet according to the Chineses saying, they were gotten hap∣pily and speedily out of it, because some years since, there was so little Water in that Channel, that the ordinary Vessels had been forty five, and fifty days coming from Tunchiangfoe, and Linching; which places are not above six Leagues distant one from another.

In the Afternoon they got beyond Linsing, which exceeds all other Cities in* 22.2 this County for Populousness, fair Buildings, (though on the West side it is much decay'd) and Traffique; nay, it need not give place to any City in the whole Empire, for it stands at the end of the Channel Iun, where the foremen∣tion'd Channel and the River Guei commix their Waters; by which means there is extraordinary Conveniencies for Shipping, the Vessels and Barques that come Laden to this City with all sorts of Merchandize, from most places in China, here pay Custom to three Treasurers chosen for that purpose.

On the North side, you may see a Bridge with nine Arches, over which they pass from one part of the City to the other; one of which Arches is made so artificially, that it may be remov'd, and give Passage to the biggest Vessels, after they have paid their Custom.

The City (seated in a plain and Sandy Soil) hath a Mud-Wall, Fortifi'd on the top with Stone Breast-works, having on the North side fifteen Bulwarks, and two Redoubts.* 22.3

Half a League from the Walls, on the North side of the City, is an exceed∣ing high Tower, built with eight corners, rising from the Ground with nine Galleries, every one nine Cubits above another, so that the whole heighth amounts to ninety Cubits. The Out-Wall consists of fine Porcelane Earth,

curiously adorn'd with Imagery and Painting; the Inner, of various colour'd Marble, Pollish'd as smooth as Glass, especially the Black: The Ascent is by a pair of winding Stairs, not made in the middle, but betwixt two Walls, which hath its Entrance at every Story, and from thence to the Marble Gal∣leries, and Gilded Iron Rails, which as an Ornament are made round about the Galleries; at whose corners hang little Bells, in such a manner, that being mov'd by the Wind they make a pleasing sound: On the uppermost Story stands a great Image, thirty Foot high, Cast of Copper, and Gilt, to which, being a Goddess, the Tower is Dedicated: From the upper Gallery, the whole City, with the adjacent Countrey, yield a pleasing and delightful Prospect.

On one side of this Tower stands a fair Pagode or Temple, worth the seeing, for the great Gilded Images which are in it.

In the Afternoon they were Tow'd along the River Guei, through the Vil∣lage Wantouwo; and in the dusk of the Evening, they arriv'd at Ifong, a little Village, where they Anchor'd, being gotten three Leagues with the Tyde from Linsing.

This River Guei takes its Original on the West side of Gueihoei, the fourth Ci∣ty* 22.4 of Eminency in the Province of Honan, and from thence runs with many crooked Meanders, between Xantung and Peking; and at the Castle Tiencin dis∣embogues into a Bay call'd Cang, which borders on the great Indian Ocean.

The first of Iune, Weighing again, by break of Day they had sight of Oepoeye,* 22.5 and Wankelo, two pretty Villages; at Noon they were Tow'd Easterly by the City of Vohincheen, but without stay; so in the Afternoon passing Sangnes, about the Evening they arriv'd at Chianmaing, where they were to change their Toers, having that day gain'd five Leagues in several Courses.

The second in the Morning, having gotten fresh Coelies, they set out from Chiamaing, and past by Tsasuang and Singkiakouw; and in the Evening they ar∣riv'd at the City of Oesingjeen, or Uciening, otherwise call'd Vuching, the four∣teenth City belonging to the Metropolis Tungchang, in the Province of Xantung, where they cast Anchor.

Vuching lies Inclos'd with a square Wall on the East side of the River, having* 22.6 on the same a well-built Suburb.

This day they gain'd five Leagues and a half, according to the Course of the Stream, which thereabouts is full of windings and shallow Water.

The third in the Morning they reach'd the Villages Thunloo, Soenusoe, and Teckchiouw; and at Noon arriv'd at the City Taatchiouw, otherwise call'd Tachu.* 22.7

This City lieth in a Square, (as most of the other Cities in China) built on the right side of the River Guei, as you go up the same; it is inlarg'd with a fair and Populous Suburb: The City it self, though full of handsom Houses, yet hath lost much of his former Luster, suffering in the last Tartar Wars.

The Wall is about thirty Foot high, well built, and Fortifi'd with Bulwarks and Breast-works.

The chiefest Trade of the Inhabitants consists in the Brewing of (as we may call it) Chinese Beer, which the Tartars Transport from thence to other places. Here they lay still a little while, waiting for fresh Toers, which having got∣ten, they Weigh'd again, and came that Evening to Soukuntang, a Village, where they staid to change their Toers again, having this day gain'd six Leagues and a half.

The next Morning, being the fourth, having gotten other Coelies, they pro∣ceeded on their Journey, and past by some Vessels that were come from Pe∣king, in one of which was the General of the Province of Quantung, sent thither to succeed him that was then there, having (in regard of his great Age) desir'd a Writ of Ease.

About nine a Clock they Landed at Sangjueen, where they tarry'd some time; from thence going on in the Afternoon, they came to Ghanning and Seufeukhouw; and against the Evening at Lienuchoe, where they Anchor'd, having that day gone six Leagues.

According to the information of the Villagers, here the Province of Xan∣tung parted from that of Peking; though others will have it, that those two Pro∣vinces are separated by the City Taatchiouw.

The fifth in the Morning, they Weigh'd at break of Day, and Sailing down the River with a fair Wind from Lienuhoe, they past about eight a Clock by Taloeveen, at nine a Clock Westward, by the City Tonquangchien, or Tung∣quiang, on the South side of the River Guei, about a Musquet shot up into the Countrey.

This City (as the rest) built Square, contains about an Hours walk in Cir∣cumference, Inviron'd with strong Walls, and deep Moats: In the Market∣place, in the middle of the City stands a great Iron Lyon; and the Countrey about is planted with all manner of Trees, pleasant to behold.

At Noon they Landed at Ieusang; in the Evening, at Poethouw, where they dropt Anchor, waiting for new Toers, having this Day Sail'd four Leagues in the Province of Peking.

The next Morning, so soon as Day-light appear'd, they left Poethouw with a fair Wind and new Toers; and in the Forenoon, past Suskiajeen, Sjenzo∣ctan, Swykvao, Sakkiavoy, Siensiteen, Fonkiakoul, Sangui, and Suangcho; and at Noon arriv'd at the City of Siangchiouw, where they found other Toers rea∣dy, with which they immediately went away again, and past that Afternoon by Paliswang, Zaysisung, Ulchilitung, Soucoulthon, Suckiaswun, Sang, Isuang, Ul, and Vly, besides many Pagodes and Hamlets of decay'd Houses, and arriv'd in the Evening at the City of Chinche, where they lay still that Night, to be furnish'd with fresh Coelies.

The seventh, before Day-light, new Coelies coming, they immediately went on their Journey, and very early past by and through several Villages, viz. Sanquesucan, Iaquacouw, Tonchekouw, Palisuang; and about eight a Clock, they went Eastward along by the City Chingchee. By this City, a River running up into the Countrey, takes its Course to the South; soon after, they went by Sayetwang, Masang, Haysoemat, and Suang.

At Noon, they past thorow Lioucho, where they should have chang'd their Toers; but the Wind blowing very fair, they past by without striking Sail, which favoring them all the Afternoon, they went by nine Villages, viz. Sou∣coulthung, Koutche, Tankoulthung, Soutouwa, Gehockia, Chingsuan, Likiathue, Sincea∣theen, Canthea, Suatheen; and in the Evening, to the City of Chinchay, lying on the Eastern Shore of this River, where they dropt Anchor to stay all Night, having this day Sail'd eight Leagues and a half.

The eighth they set out again with fresh Coelies and a South Wind, from the City of Chinchay; and in the Forenoon, as they had done the day before, they past by many Villages, lying on each side of the River, as Oelifoang, Loulysuang, Thou∣liouw, Taywansuang, Oekiamiao, Boatsaac, t' Zongkiasuaan, Sangjue, Iangleotzing, Lie∣kiatwang,

Tzautsocauw, and Piechie; and in the Afternoon arriv'd at the City of* 22.8 Tjensinghway, otherwise call'd Tiencin, where they dropt Anchor, having that day Sail'd six Leagues.

The General of the Militia in this place, being a Tartar, and a Man of great* 22.9 Quality, whose Sister was one of the present Emperor's Fathers Concubines, came to Complement and welcome the Ambassador, and also to invite him the next day to a Treat, for which civility the Ambassador returning Thanks, said, That he was tired and indispos'd, and therefore durst not venture to go out, but desir'd his Highness to excuse him. Whereupon the General reply'd, That he would prepare the Entertainment in one of his Barques, and come and lie with it by the Ambassadors, that he might not trouble himself to go ashore: On which, Van Hoorn seeing that it could not be otherwise, provided to come.

The ninth in the Morning, the General sent for the Ambassador, whereon, he, with Nobel, Putmans, and the Secretary Vander Does, went with some of the Retinue to his Barque, lying a little behind the Ambassadors, where they were courteously receiv'd, and immediately plac'd at Tables which stood all* 22.10 ready before their coming; soon after came also the Toya or Governor of the City, who also seem'd to be invited there, and was plac'd by the General at his own Table: Then the word being given, the Dishes were brought in, fill'd with variety of Meats, dress'd after the Chinese manner: The General urging no Discourse, nor asking the Netherlanders any Questions, only us'd his endeavor to perswade them to be Merry, and Eat and Drink freely.

After the Hollanders had well Feasted, and Thank'd the General for his kind Entertainment, they took their leave: When the Ambassador judg'd it con∣venient, in Requital of the General's kindness, to Present him with two Pieces* 22.11 of Linnen, a String of Amber Beads, five Ells of Stammel, one Piece of Perpe∣tuanaes, a Perspective Glass, and two Bottles of Rose-Water; all which, with a Letter, Putmans was to carry the next Morning: The Letter was writ∣ten to this effect.

THe Ambassador returns humble Thanks for his kind Entertainment, and lets his Lordship know, that since that, he is recover'd again, and in good Health.

The Ambassador shall always remember his Honors Favors; in Requital of which, and as a sign of his good inclination, he Requests, that he will please to accept of these Presents, which will highly oblige him.

Putmans returning, brought word, that the General would not accept of* 23.1 them, but had desir'd him to refer it till they came back from Peking; thanking the Ambassador with a Complementing Letter.

The City or Garrison of Tienein lies in a Triangular form, at the Promon∣tary of Xang, where all the Rivers of the Province of Peking meet; and after having pass'd her high Walls, disembogue themselves into the Sea.

The Inhabitants of this City Trade much, for which it stands very conve∣nient: all the Ships that come out of the Sea, or from any In-land places which will go up to Peking, must pass by it, wherefore there is always an in∣credible many Vessels; there is also generally the choice of all Merchandize, because this City is free for any one to Trade in, and pay no Custom.

The City it self is surrounded with high, defensive Walls, and defended by a strong Garrison.

Against Noon, leaving Tiensingway, after they had Sail'd a little way, though still in the Suburb, they left the River Guei, which had help'd them very much by her Ebbing Water, and went into another, which came out of the North in∣to that of Guei; so that they had both Wind and Tyde against them, and by that means went but very slowly; yet by Toing, they got past Quanfa, Sijkoelda, Iangsang, and Peytsang, lying on each side of this River; and in the Evening dropt Anchor at P'Hoekoel, having since their departure from Tiensingway, Sail'd about a League and a half.

The eleventh in the Evening, they left P'Hoekoel, and went that day with Sailing and Towing, by Thanquasue, Poecue, Ganchol, P'Hoekhouw, Hangchue, and Mactiachoa.

The Country hereabouts is plain, Manur'd, and full of Houses.

In the afternoon they arriv'd at a great Village, call'd Iangtzin, where they waited for fresh Toers, having this day gain'd three Leagues on several Cour∣ses, twice or thrice surrounding the Compass.

The twelfth in the Morning, the Mandarin Guide Hinlavja, sent to acquaint the Netherlanders, that there were no Coelies to be had there, therefore ask'd the Ambassador if he would hire Men. But Van Hoorn answer'd, That since he had not done it all this Journey, he would not do it now; so that they went away with a good Wind, which at first prov'd successful to them, but some turn∣ing, by reason of the crooked Windings of the River, they were forc'd by all the Coelies, to be Tow'd one after another; yet notwithstanding this, they past that day by Zeetiatwangh, Phinkoulutin, t' Zatzuen, and three other Villages. In the Evening they dropt Anchor at Gosathun, where they staid that Night, having this Day Sail'd two Leagues and a half.

The next Morning, being the thirteenth, the Wind blowing fair, they set Sail again; yet the Barques often sticking fast on the Ground, they made but little way; yet having past Wankafan and Sitiafoe, they came late in the Evening* 23.2 to the City of Gioechioe, where they staid all Night, having this day Sail'd but two Leagues and three quarters.

About nine a Clock in the Evening, the Mandarin Guide Hanlavja, and the Chinese Secretary Soukjen, and the two Interpreters Ienko and Liulako, came in a small Boat to the Ambassadors Barge, telling him, that they were going to meet the new General that came from Peking, and was hard by (as the Nether∣landers could see by the Lights in his Boats) going to Hoksieu, to Depose the there present Tziangpovi.

This news was not very strange to the Hollanders, having been often told by the Guide Mandarins and their Interpreters, that the foremention'd General in Hoksieu was Depos'd, and that the Vice-Roy Singlamong was condemned to pay two thousand Tail of Silver, because he had let the Netherland Ships go away without the Emperors leave, (which the Hollanders look'd upon (it being mixt with no true words) to be only a Tale; but that perhaps (since they saw that another came to Depose him) he might for some Misdemeanor or other, be sent for to Peking.

At Midnight, the foremention'd Hanlavja, the Secretary, and Interpreters came aboard to tell the Ambassador, That they could not speak with his Excellency that Evening, he being gone to sleep before they came, but they would go to him early the next Morning; as accordingly they did; desiring to know of the Ambassador what time he might wait upon him. But returning, they brought word, That his Excellency durst not permit it, because he had not

yet had Audience from the Emperor. Mean time his Highness Sail'd by the Netherlanders, accompany'd with twenty great Barges.

The City Gioechioe is a Ruin'd place, bury'd almost in heaps of Rubbish, oc∣casion'd by the last War.

After they had gotten Coelies, they left that City, though with slow advance,* 23.3 because the River (notwithstanding the Wind was good) in many places (as they had seen the day before) was full of dry Sands; yet at last, passing by Sanghkiatwangh, they could (because of the Night coming on) get no further than Wanghiapan, where they came to an Anchor, having, notwithstanding they had a good Wind, Sail'd but two Leagues and a little more.

The fifteenth in the Morning they Weigh'd again, and with Sailing and Towing, past by Ponsinghou and Googothien; and in the Afternoon arriv'd at Goe∣chin, where they staid all Night, having this day gain'd three Leagues.

About half a League from Goechin, lies the City Goeycen, North-West into the Countrey, which appear'd but little to the Netherlanders, (for they did not put in to it) but seem'd rather like a large Castle than a City.

A little before they arriv'd at Goechien, a grand Mandarin, a Tartar (as it was said) Nephew to the present Emperor, came to Complement and Visit the Ambassador in his Barge; where he was entertain'd with a Glass of Spanish Wine, which having drank, and seen the Horses, he took his leave.

The sixteenth, leaving Goechien, they proceeded on their Journey, and pass'd by many Houses, built on both sides of the River; and also by some Villages, as Kongidieen, t' Santan, Nainaimeao, Iaumeao, and Xantiento, the Suburb of Sang∣singhwey; and in the Evening, arriv'd on the East side of the same City, before a great Plain, lying between the City Walls and the River; having this day Sail'd three Leagues.

Here they were to lie (because the River being in a manner dry, they could get no higher) till the Emperors Order came to unlade the Presents, and go with them by Land to Peking, which was four Leagues distance.

The seventeenth, nothing happen'd of remark.

The eighteenth, several Mandarins came to Visit and Welcom the Ambassa∣dor; and likewise that Mandarin which was with him on the fifteenth, which was said to be the Emperors Nephew, who gave the Ambassador two Sheep for a Fire-Lock, which he much desir'd.

Amongst other Discourses, Van Hoorn ask'd this Lord, If no other Ambassa∣dors from any other place were in Peking? To which he answer'd, None, but some from the Corean Isles, which were shortly to return.

There happen'd little of note here, only the Mandarin Guide came to acquaint the Ambassador, that the next Morning Carts and Coelies would come to carry the Goods to Peking, and that one of the Lipous would be at a Town call'd Tonghsieuw, four Leagues from thence, to receive the Ambassador in the Empe∣ror's Name, and conduct him to Peking.

The next Morning, being the nineteenth, many Carts, Coelies, and Horses came to fetch the Presents, with all the Persons belonging to the Embassy, and their Goods, to Peking by Land; whereupon, the Ambassador gave immediate Order for the unlading of them, in which they spent all the Morning.

The Ambassador gave the Barge-men (though every one apart) which came with him and his Retinue from Sucheu and Hoaigan, eighty six Tail of Silver, with which they were very well contented.

[illustration]

About Noon, the Netherlanders set forward on their Journey to Tongsieuw, with the Presents and their other Goods, which were guarded by some Troo∣pers, and between a concourse of thousands of Townsmen, Rusticks, Women, and Children.

About three a Clock, coming to Tongsieuw, all the Goods were put into an* 23.4 old decay'd House, where the Netherlanders also Lodg'd, but found small con∣veniencies.

The twentieth, setting forth by Day-light, and having Rid thorow Palikua, Swango, and Kapucheen, they came within half a League of Peking, where they were Welcom'd by one of the Lipous, call'd Liu Lavja, a Native Tartar, who kindly receiv'd them; and after some Complements, conducted them to the City, which they enter'd just about Noon in good order.

Coming within the Gates of Peking, they thank'd God for his Mercy, in* 23.5 bringing them so great a Journey all in good Health, being a Way of many Leagues, in which they had spent six Moneths, Travelling both by Water and Land, by and thorow thirty seven Cities, three hundred thirty five Villages and thirty four Temples.

They were led by the Emperors Palace to the Tartars or Prime Chancellors Court, standing behind the Emperors, where all his Imperial Majesties Pre∣sents, according to order were to be left; and then the Hollanders to go to their Lodgings prepar'd for them.

The Streets through which they pass'd swarm'd with People, thousands standing on each side of the way, which made so great a Dust (to which incon∣veniency the Streets in Peking are very subject) that they could scarcely see; wherefore they were bid to sit down under the Gate or entrance of the Court, from amongst the croud of the People, which by thousands stood before it, there to stay for the Presents which were left somewhat behind in their Riding through the City.

Having staid about a quarter of an Hour under the Gate, and drank a Cup of Tee, the Goods came; whereupon the Hollanders were led into a Chamber, leaving Putmans and some of the Retinue to look to, and separate the Emperors Presents from the other.

The Ambassador and Nobel, with the rest, coming into the Chamber, they found some Secretaries sitting on a Table, which pointed to Van Hoorn to sit on the Floor; but he said, he could better stand, which they observing, bid him sit on the same Table where they sat, which he accordingly did.

Then the foremention'd Secretaries began to ask the Ambassador, by Order* 23.6 of the Lipous, the following Questions, viz. Concerning his Quality: From whence the Horses and Oxen came? How old they were, and how many Miles every Horse could go in a Day? To all which Questions he gave them fitting answers.

They likewise ask'd who was the chief in Quality? Whether the Ambassa∣dors Son or Nobel? because the General of Hoksieu had plac'd the Ambassadors Son first: To which was answer'd, That the Lord Van Hoorn's Son, was accord∣ing to the Lord Generals Order in Batavia, to have the upper place; besides ma∣ny other frivolous Questions, not worthy rehearsal.

Mean while, the Lipou which had fetch'd in the Netherlanders, came to bring them some Meat dress'd after the Chinese manner, which they kindly accepted of, having eaten nothing all that day before.

Putmans also came to tell the Ambassador, that after the Netherlanders had ta∣ken nineteen Chests with the Emperors Presents out of the Carts, the Tatan or Prime Chancellor coming thither with another Person of Quality, had forbid them to unlade any more, and that they would have the Emperors Letter,* 23.7 which after much trouble, being found, having happily a day or two before been wrapt up in a yellow Cloth; the Ambassador bare Headed, bowing him∣self three times, laid it with both Hands on a Table cover'd with Red Cloth, (behind which stood the first and second Tatan) not having time to deliver it in a Silver Charger, or any thing else of value; which done, the Netherlanders were again conducted into the Room in which they were before, without a Word spoke on either side.

Soon after, the remaining Presents, Horses, Oxen, and other Goods were dispos'd into proper places.

As they went to their Lodings, they were told that the Horses must be Sad∣dled,* 23.8 and the Oxen put into their Waggon, to be brought to Court the next Morning; because the Emperor had design'd to see them.

And now the Ambassador coming to his new prepar'd Lodging, was much amaz'd that there was not so much room as would hold the Goods, Horses, and Oxen, nor no convenience for himself nor his People; Whereupon chiding the Mandarins that brought him thither, he ask'd, if that was a House fit for an Ambassador which came so great a Journey, and had brought such Rich Pre∣sents, and whose Countreymen had done the Emperor such remarkable Ser∣vice; Withal, that it was impossible for him in that place, to take out the Sad∣dles for the Horses, and also the Coach; yet nevertheless he would do his en∣deavor, although he fear'd much that it could not be done.

The Mandarins observing the small conveniencies that the Netherlanders would have in that place, said, That they would acquaint their Master with it, and perswade them that they might have better Lodgings next day; mean∣while, the Ambassador must by no means fail to Saddle the Horses, and fit the Oxen, that they might be brought to the Court next Morning; but the Am∣bassador telling him that it was no way possible, unless they wrought the whole Night; The Mandarins took their leave.

About Midnight two Mandarins came again to the Ambassador's Lodging, sent from the Lipous to tell him, that the Horses and Oxen must be brought to the Court before Day, and if they could not be Saddled, to bring them without, for the Emperor would be there in Person to see them, which would be no small Honor.

The one and twentieth, about three a Clock in the Morning, one of the Li∣pous came to fetch the Horses and Oxen to the Court; whereupon, they were immediately Caparison'd and Harness'd, but the Chariot being fitted up, could not come out of the Door, so that being forc'd to leave it, Nobel and the Secre∣tary, conducted by the Lipous, went with the Horses and Oxen to the Court; from whence returning, at nine a Clock, they gave the Ambassador the follow∣ing account:

That entring the Emperor's Court at break of Day, they past through four strong Gates, then they walk'd along by the Walls of the foremention'd Palace, about a quarter of a Mile, at the end of which they went through a fifth Gate into the inner Court, where the Horses and Oxen were first view'd by the chief Zoutaizin or Councellor of State, who was a brown Tartar, with one Eye, and a White Beard, about sixty years old, who, as they said, by his con∣duct

Valor and Prudence, Govern'd almost the whole Realm. He also told Nobel and the Secretary, that they should go and stand back a little, for the Emperor was coming in Person to see the Horses and Oxen, and that when his Imperial Majesty came out, they should Kneel. But the Horses stood still, held by four Hollanders, in the same place where the before-mention'd Zoutai∣zin had seen them; and the Oxen also held by two, were about twenty Paces from the place where the Emperor afterward came to view them: The Grooms were likewise commanded to Kneel; a little while after, four Horses with Yellow Saddles came in at the inner Court Gate, on one of which the Em∣peror sitting, stood still, just without the middle Gate of the inner Court.

The Emperor, according to Nobel and the Secretary's Relation, was a Per∣son* 23.9 of a middle Stature, pretty White, and about sixteen Years of age, not gor∣geously Habited, having only a Blue Silk Damask Coat on, Imbroyder'd be∣fore, behind, and on the shoulders, with Yellow Boats, looking stedfastly up∣on the Horses for a considerable time; at length, drawing his Eyes from them, smiling, he spake to the foremention'd Governor about them, by which the Hollanders perceiv'd that his Majesty was well pleas'd with them. Then the Em∣peror gave Order, that two of the Horses should be Rid by the Commissary Berkman, and one Horse and an Ox be brought nearer him, where he look'd up∣on them with a more curious Eye.

After which, the Horses and Oxen being led a little way thence, his Im∣perial Majesty alighting, sate down on a little Bench, in the same place where he had stood with his Horse; and likewise the two first Zautaizins, or Councellors of State, sate down about four or five Paces from the Empe∣ror, on his left Hand, on Carpets of Cloth; the first of the two, was the Person that had seen the Horses and Oxen alone; the other was also a Tartar: When upon his Majesties Order a Cup of Bean Broth was given him, and also to the Netherlanders, who drank it on their Knees: Moreover, the Emperor Commanded to ask them, How far Holland was from Batavia, and Batavia from Hoksieu? and also, by whom the Ambassador was sent? To which they re∣ply'd, That Holland was eight Moneths Sailing from Batavia, and Batavia* 23.10 about six Weeks from Hoksieu; and likewise, that the Ambassador by Orders of their Prince in Holland, was sent from the Lord Maetzuiker in Batavia, which was all that was ask'd them; But the Horses and Oxen on the Emperor's Or∣der, taken from them, and led into a Stable, opposite to the Gate of the inner Court; after which, the Netherlanders had leave to depart (when to their full satisfaction, they had seen the Emperor above half an hour) the same way they came, leaving his Imperial Majesty sitting in the foremention'd place.

Soon after, Nobel and the Secretaries return with the remaining Attendance, two Mandarins sent from the Emperor, came to desire two Hollanders, one to dress the Horses, and another the Oxen, and shew his Grooms the manner of it, which the Ambassador immediately granted.

The Lipou Liu-Lavja, which had the day before fetch'd in the Ambassador,* 23.11 came also to his Lodgings to tell him, That the remaining Presents must im∣mediately be made ready to be carry'd to the Court; to which purpose Carts would immediatly be brought thither to fetch them; likewise, that the Lord Ambassador, his Son, and as many Persons more as he pleas'd, might come along with them, because he ought to be Present when the Goods were look'd over, to see if none were wanting, which was not needful at the Horses and Oxen, and therefore they were accepted of; whereupon, the Ambassador ma∣king

himself ready, Order'd the Presents to be put into the Carts, and went with Nobel, Putmans, the Secretary, and eleven Persons of his Retinue, towards the Court; but was first carry'd to the Council of State's House, where he had left the nineteen Chests with Presents: Here having sorted all the Goods (ex∣cept five Chests with White Pepper, which the Tatan said were needless) they were sent to the Emperor's Palace; whither soon after the Tatan (who Rid before through another Gate with the Goods) the Ambassador and all his Re∣tinue follow'd.

Coming to the inner Court, where the Emperor saw the Horses in the Morn∣ing, they found the Carts with the Goods there before them, and also the Tatan sitting in the open Court. Here the Ambassador and his Attendance were also shewn to sit down on the Ground behind him, which they accordingly did, on Coats brought with them for that purpose.

Having staid about half an hour, the two Prime Councellors or Zoutaizins of the Emperor, came also thither, and seated themselves on their Pieces of Cloth on the Ground; and having rested themselves a little, they call'd the Tatan, who kneeling before them, receiv'd their Commands, which was, to tell the Ambassador, That the Emperor ask'd if the Lord Maetzuiker in Batavia was in good Health? To which kneeling on one Knee, he answer'd, that he was.

Then the Councellors ask'd, If they were all four Persian Horses, and the Oxen Bengael? And also, If the Netherlanders were at Peace with the Persian and Bengael? To which the Ambassador reply'd, That they were, and had many years liv'd like Brothers, and real Friends. They also ask'd, What sorts of Grain there grew in Holland? To which they gave a fitting account. Then the Oxen were order'd to be put into the Chariot, and the Ambassadors Son to come and shew him Reverence.

Soon after the Presents, except the Lanthorns, were carry'd away again without the Emperor's coming to look upon them, and leave granted to the Ambassador to return to his Lodgings.

Mean while, Putmans and Ruwenoort staid in the Court to undo the Lan∣thorns, which the Emperor, after the Ambassador's departure came to see; and likewise the Oxen drawing the Chariot, in which he Order'd two of his Atten∣dants to sit, and be drawn in it; so that Putmans and Ruwenoort also saw the Emperor.

Several grand Mandarins went to Visit the Ambassador in his Lodgings; all which he Entertain'd with great kindness, and according to the convenien∣cy of the place.

The two and twentieth, early in the Morning a Secretary belonging to the Lipous, came to the Ambassador's Lodgings, to tell him, That Putmans must come to the Tatan's House to unpack the Emperor's Presents, and look them over; whereupon, Putmans accordingly went thither.

This Secretary humbly proffer'd his Service to the Ambassador, saying, He would rejoyce, if by his advice, or ought else, he might be serviceable to his Excellency; for which he receiv'd many Thanks from the Ambassador, who answer'd him, That he would slip no opportunity to make use of him.

The same day, Ienko the Interpreter inform'd the Ambassador, That he had been told from credible Persons, that he should be brought within three days before the Imperial Throne, to have Audience granted him, which although he did not absolutely believe, yet he prepar'd all things in a readiness.

There also came a Commissioner with four Mandarins, sent from the Prime

Counsellor, or Zoutaizin of the Emperors, to ask the Ambassador if he had no Blood-Coral, Perpetuana's, or other Goods to Sell, because the Emperor would perhaps buy some of them? Whereupon the Ambassador reply'd, That the Ong, or General of Batavia, had strictly forbid him to sell any thing, but what he had was at the Emperor's Service: which said, they took their leave.

There likewise came two Mandarins to keep Watch in the Ambassador's* 23.12 Lodgings; so that the Netherlanders were then Guarded by four Mandarins, and twenty Soldiers, that every one was kept from going out (except those whom they pleas'd) or coming into the House. The Mandarin Guides also, which since their coming thither had been Lodg'd there, were remov'd to ano∣ther Place; but the Chinese Interpreter Soukjen, stay'd with them.

At Noon Putmans returning, said, That he had again been in the Tatans House, and laid a Piece of every sort of Goods to view, all which was Seal'd up in a Chest to shew the Emperor, and that the rest were left in Chests to be look'd over.

In the Afternoon one of the Lipous Secretaries came on Horseback to the Gate of the Ambassador's Lodging, saying onely to the Interpreters, That the Lord Ambassador must make himself ready against Midnight, to appear be∣fore the Emperor, and to deliver the Presents himself to his Majesty: which said, he immediately hasted away again without any Answer. Van Hoorn made himself ready against the fore-mention'd time.

The same Afternoon Putmans was again sent for to the Tatan, that he might (as they said) take the rest of Presents out of the Packs, that they might be shewn to the Emperor altogether the next Morning, and be in readiness to be deliver'd by the Ambassador to his Imperial Majesty.

Putmans returning very late in the Night related, That he had been with the Tatan, and had taken all the Goods out of the Chests, yet laid them in again. Moreover, he was commanded to tell the Ambassador, that he should make himself ready betimes to go to the Court the following Night.

The twenty eighth, two hours before Day-light, the Ambassador was with* 23.13 all his Retinue fetch'd to the Court by some prime Mandarins, being led through three other Gates than those which they pass'd the day before, to an inner Court: having pass'd the third Gate, they saw in a great Plain before the Portals of a stately House, all the Presents set on the Ground, and close by them the second Tatan, who also pointed to them to sit down by the Presents, which they did.

About half an hour after the Ambassadors from the Corean Isles, being three* 23.14 in number, came also thither with fifty Attendants, Habited after the Chinese manner, with long Hair, yet poorly Dress'd, and of mean Aspects; which were order'd to sit a good way behind the Netherlanders, on the left side of the going in at the Door.

In the interim, whilst the Netherlanders stay'd above two hours, some Dis∣course* 23.15 pass'd between the Lipou Lilavja and the Ambassador, about a Letter which the Interpreter Genko said the Ambassador would deliver to the Empe∣ror; which the Lipou advis'd him not to do, saying, That it was not customary there; for if they would Request any thing of the Emperor, they must first acquaint the Lipou with it, that they might again impart it at convenient times to the Emperor: Whereupon the Ambassador reply'd, That he would do nothing but what he advis'd him to, because he was a Stranger and knew not

their Customs. As to what concern'd the Letter which the Interpreter had told him of, it was nothing else but a Complement of thankfulness to his Imperial Majesty, which he design'd to speak to him, and whether it would be fit to de∣liver it to the Emperor before all his Business was done.

There likewise came another Lipou to the Ambassador, saying, That he had understood by one of the Zoutaisins, that it might happen, that the Emperor would ask the Ambassador some Questions, which if he did, he advis'd him to make short and brief Answers.

Lastly, the Ambassador was told, that he might again return to his Lodg∣ing, because the Emperor would not that day come out to see the Presents; yet that Putmans must stay there to see the Chests and Packs open'd, if any thing should be order'd to be taken out of them; all which was accordingly per∣form'd: But the Ambassador being in the last Gate to go out of the Court, was desir'd to stay a little, where Putmans came to him, saying, That Genko the Interpreter had demanded the Keys of the Chest in which the Presents were, which having open'd he was order'd to follow the Ambassador. A little after he was told, that he might go home with his Retinue, which he did, and was no sooner come thither, but he found a List written in the Chinese Tongue; in which was set down the Provision that the Emperor allow'd the Ambassa∣dor every day, viz.

For the Ambassador, his Son Iohn Van Hoorn, and Nobel, two Geese, four* 23.16 Hens, three Fish, six Catty of Meal, three Tail of black Tee, a pound and a half of Waetsjoe, one of Mesoe, one of Soya, one of Oyl, nine Catty of Herbs and Gar∣lick, six Cans of Liquor, and every five days a hundred Pears, five Catty of Grapes, or Raisins, five Catty of dry'd Prunes, a hundred and fifty Apricocks, and like∣wise every other day a Sheep.

For six Men every day twelve Catty of Pork, six of Meal, six of Tauwhoe, three Tail of black Woetsjoe, one Catty and a half of Misoe, the like of Soya, the like of Oyl, and six great Vessels of Drink.

For fifteen Persons every day seven Catty and a half of Pork, two of Herbs, one of Salt, five Jugs of Liquor.

In the Afternoon Genko the Interpreter came to acquaint the Ambassador, That all the Presents being taken out of the Chests and Packs, were brought before the Emperor in his Court, where his Imperial Majesty had seen them, and accepted of them; which did not a little rejoyce the Netherlanders, when they heard that all the Presents were deliver'd without any of them being dam∣nifi'd, except some flaws in the Lantern.

There also came two Commission'd Mandarins from the Lipous, to ask if the Ambassador could about two days hence go to Zamboie, that is Complement the Emperor? and withall, to go for the Emperor's Privy Seal the next Morn∣ing? To which he answer'd, That he was ready at all times to obey his Im∣perial Majesties Command.

The Ambassador also ask'd these Mandarins whether the Emperor had ac∣cepted of the Presents? and if he had done with them? To which they re∣ply'd, Yes. Whereupon the Ambassador said, That he was sorry, his House being so small, he could not entertain them according to his good inclination: To which they answer'd, That the Ambassador's good will was sufficient, and that three days hence he should remove into a great House, which was prepa∣ring for him.

The next day, being the four and twentieth, about nine a Clock a Mandarin

came to the Ambassador's Lodging, to tell him that it was time to go and shew Reverence to his Imperial Majesties Seal: Whereupon he went thither, with his Son, Nobel, Putmans, the Secretary, and five of his Attendants, whom the fore▪ mention'd Mandarin conducted into an old great Mandarins House that stood behind the Tatans; which when entred, they saw through one of the Palace Gates the Place where the Seal is kept, being a little eight corner'd House, and were directed to sit under the Gate, to defend themselves from the heat of the Sun; where, having stay'd half an hour, they heard a Voice bid∣ding them Ascend; having pass'd on about fifteen Paces they heard the same Voice crying, Kneel; and afterwards again, Bow your Heads three times together, which done you may rise; soon after it said, Kneel down again, and once more bow your Heads three times; so that they were to bow eighteen times and kneel six; all which being pass'd over, they cry'd, Stand up, and go to your Lodgings, which ac∣cordingly they did.

After the Ambassador had been at home about half an hour, he was told, that the chief Councellor of State, or Tatan, would be there presently: where∣upon they made themselves all ready to entertain his Highness, who soon after came thither with two Lipous: They ask'd the Netherlanders by an Interpreter several Questions, viz. How long Holland had been in being? Near what Kingdoms it border'd? What Goods and Merchandises were to be had from thence? To all which his Highness receiv'd satisfactory Answers: So having spent half an hour in asking Questions, and it beginning to grow very hot in the Ambassador's little House, it being about Noon, he said that he would go home, and leave the two fore-mention'd Lipous there, to be resolv'd of some more Questions by the Ambassador; who caus'd two Pistols, one Fire-lock, and two Sword Blades to be shewn to his Highness, with Request that he would take them with him in commemoration of Holland; but he excusing* 23.17 himself, said, That the Ambassador's good inclination was enough; which said, he departed.

The two Lipous ask'd him many frivolous Questions, not forgetting the least* 23.18 thing; nay, desir'd to know what Tails the Sheep and Hares had in Holland: in which Discourse they spent most part of the Day, the Ambassador giving them their desired Answers. After their Secretary had written down all things, they took their leave: The Ambassador proffer'd them some Presents, thereby to draw their inclinations towards him, but they refus'd them like the Tatan.

Mean while the Emperor sent eighteen Tartar Saddles, with all their Furni∣ture, to the Ambassador's Lodging, to use whilst he stay'd there.

The four Watch Mandarins were the same day presented by the Ambassador with a Piece of Perpetuana, and five Tail of Silver.

The twenty fifth the prime Secretary to the Lipous came with two Manda∣rins* 23.19 (all three Habited after a stately manner, fit to shew obedience to the Emperor) to the Ambassador's Lodgings after Midnight, to tell him, that it was time to go to the Palace: Whereupon the Ambassador went thither with most of his Retinue, which were all led through three Gates into the same Plain wherein they sat the Morning before, and there order'd to stay till Day∣light, when the Emperor would appear sitting in his Throne. Having spent two hours, and the Day beginning to appear, they saw the Plain full of Man∣darins richly Habited, that were come thither to Zamboie, or shew Obedience to the Emperor; so that the Hollanders divertis'd themselves with looking upon the Multitude. Having sat till half an hour after Day-break, they were con∣ducted

farther to a fourth Gate; about fifteen Paces from which they saw five Elephants, with Gilded Towers on their Backs, (three on the right, and two on the left side of the Entrance,) and likewise four of the Emperor's Wayns without Horses, standing on both sides of this Gate, which hath three Passages. They were conducted through the left Gate between the Elephants, which they had no sooner pass'd but they saw a fifth Gate, built like the fourth, but▪ somewhat higher; to which they went by an ascent, and found it also to have three Passages, through the middlemost of which (where on the right side stood the Emperor's Palakin) they go directly to the Imperial Throne: but they were, as at the fourth Gate, led through the third Entry (because none dare go through the middlemost but the Emperor himself;) which having pass'd, they came in∣to a spacious Court; at the end whereof stood the Palace wherein the Throne was erected; to which they ascend by Marble Steps. The Court was full of Mandarins, Cloth'd after the best manner, sitting in Rows one by another. On each side of the Throne stood many Umbrella's, Flags and Standards, of yel∣low,* 23.20 blue, and white; below the Marble Steps, on each side of the Ascent of the Throne stood about thirty Persons in a Row, Cloth'd in the Emperor's Li∣very, being Yellow, and also ten white Horses with yellow Saddles, five on each side. The Ambassador and all his Retinue were plac'd on the left side of the Throne, at the end of the first Row of Mandarins; where having sat a ve∣ry little while, they were forc'd to rise up to make way for some Grand Lords that were going to the Throne. About half an hour after a small Bell was heard to Ring, and four Persons making a noise, or flacking with Whips, which was just as if a Field of Canes had been set on fire. Soon after they heard a Voice, which proclaim'd something in the Tartar Language; where∣upon many prime Lords and Great Persons went and stood directly before the Throne between some blue Stones (which were laid there about half a Foot high, to the number of eighteen or twenty) and upon the Proclamation of a Herald they shew'd their Obeisance to the Throne, by thrice Kneeling, and nine times bowing of their Heads: During this, a sweet Harmony was heard of several sorts of Instruments. When these Grand Lords had made their Obeisance, the Ambassador, being call'd by the Herald, was by two Lipous led with his Assistants between the fore-mention'd blue Stones, and plac'd just be∣hind the sixteenth, where they could neither see the Emperor nor Throne, yet made Obeisance in the same manner as the others had done before, the Musick beginning to Play when they Kneel. This done, the Lipous went again to their Places where they sat before; but the Ambassador, his Son, and Nobel, were through a by-way led up the Marble Steps that ascended to the House where the Throne stood; where they were plac'd next to the second Tatan, or Chancellor, from whence they saw the glittering Throne, and the Emperor in Cloth of Gold, the Imperial Stool not being above fourteen Paces from the Place where the Ambassador sat. Soon after Van Hoorn, his Son, and Nobel, were presented with a Cup of Imperial Bean-Broth; which they had no sooner drank, but the Emperor rising from his Throne, seem'd to come to them, but* 23.21 went out behind the Throne. He being a brown slender Youth, about sixteen years old, had, as the Netherlanders were inform'd, twelve Kings for his Guard. After his Imperial Majesties departure, the Ambassador also went soon after* 23.22 with all his Retinue to his Lodgings, not without great joy (because he found himself somewhat indispos'd) that he had made an end of this grand Business.

Having been at home half an hour, the prime Secretary to the Lipous came

thither, to ask him how far such and such Places were distant from Holland? and if there were any Tygers, or other ravenous Beasts in Holland? To which having receiv'd due Answers, he took his leave.

To the Mandarin that provided Horses for the Netherlanders, and conducted them to the Court, the Ambassador gave five Ells and a half of Stammel, which he accepted of, and us'd great diligence to get it out of the Ambbassa∣dor's Lodgings.

Since the Council in Batavia had expresly commanded, that when the Em∣peror had been Complemented, and his Presents deliver'd to him, they should also present the Taisins, or Councellors of State, therefore the Ambassador pro∣pos'd in Council, in what manner it was best to be done, and to which Per∣sons: whereupon it was judg'd convenient, that it should be to the following Persons, because they were to assist the Netherlanders during the Emperor's Mi∣nority, viz. the four Zoutaizins, being of his Imperial Majesties Privy Council,* 23.23 who Govern'd the Empire during his Nonage, should be presented with half a Piece of Scarlet, half a Piece of black Cloth, and half a Piece of Sky-colour'd Cloth, two Pieces of Crown-Serge, three of Cloth-Serge, ten Ells of Holland Velvet, one Quilt, ten Pieces of fine Linnen, two of fine Guinee Linnen, two large Carpets, two fine Chitsen, one Piece of Sandal-Wood, twelve Pieces of Blood-Coral, four Pieces of great Amber, one Fire-lock, one pair of Pistols, two Swords with rich Gilded Handles, one pair of Pocket-Pistols, two Pieces of Whalebone, two Rhinocerots Horns, two Unicorns Horns, six pair of Spe∣ctacles, one Perspective Glass.

To each of the three other Tatans, or Chancellors, the chief in the Lipous Assembly, that they might impart the Hollanders Requests to the Emperor, were presented half a Piece of Crimson, half a Piece of black, and half a Piece of sky-colour'd Cloth, one Piece of black Cloth▪ Serge, one of Crown-Serge, one Piece of Sandal Wood, ten Ells of green Velvet, six Pieces of Adathiis, two of fine Guinee Linnen, two Carpets, one String of Amber Beads, three Pieces of great, and three of small Blood-Coral, two great Pieces of Amber, one Sword-Blade, one pair of Pistols, two Unicorns Horns, two Rhinocerots Horns, one Perspective Glass, six pair of Spectacles, and some Glass▪ works.

To each of the three Lipous, or Speakers for Strangers, acting in all Ambas∣sador's* 23.24 Affairs, were presented half a Piece of Crimson, half a Piece of black, and half a Piece of sky-colour'd Cloth, one Piece of Cloth-Serge, one of black Crown-Serge, ten Dutch Silk-Stuffs, four Pieces of Adathiis, one of Guinee Lin∣nen, one Carpet, one ordinary String of Amber Beads, six Pieces of Blood-Coral, one great Piece of Amber, one pair of Pistols, one Carbine, one Sword-Blade, and two Rhinocerots Horns.

Every one of the Secretaries belonging to the Lipous were presented with ten* 23.25 Ells of Stammel, one Piece of Cloth-Serge, one of Perpetuana, one Carpet, two Pieces of Adathiis, one of Guinee Linnen, one String of ordinary Amber Beads, one Sword-Blade, two Rhinocerots Horns, one Carbine, and one Piece of Crown-Serge.

And that the Inventories of the Presents should be safely deliver'd, and the Ambassador no way cheated therein, it was order'd that Nobel should go thither with the first opportunity, to deliver them in his own Person, and send a Dutch Letter with them, that they might shew it by such Person as they pleas'd the Ambassador should deliver their Presents to.

The twenty sixth in the Morning, Nobel and Putmans were sent for to the* 23.26

Assembly of the Lipous; whither (having acquainted the Ambassador with it) they went, and at their Return related, That they had been before the three Lipous, who sat in Consultation of their Business; where they were ask'd if the Ambassador had ought to request of the Emperor, by order of the Lord Maet∣zuiker in Batavia? and if he intended to present the Emperor with any thing else? if so, he should write down his Requests, and the Presents which he would give, and come with Nobel the next Morning to their Assembly and de∣liver it himself, that hereafter he might not trouble them with any more Re∣quests. Moreover, they ask'd if the Lord Maetzuiker had written a Letter to the Pou of Hoksieu? To which they replying Yes, said that the Contents thereof was unknown to them, but that the Ambassador might perhaps inform them of it. They inquir'd also the difference in Quality between the Ambassa∣dor's Son and Nobel, which was answer'd according to the truth. The Lipous also said, that Carts and Coelies should come the next day to fetch their Goods out of their straitned Lodgings, and carry them to a greater.

Nobel and Putmans acquainting the Ambassador herewith, he call'd his Council, where they seriously consider'd their Instructions: whereupon it was first judg'd no way convenient to complain of the Vice-Roy Singlamong, as was mention'd in them, because of the great Power which he had in that Place, by which means there might arise a confusion, and a hatred against them, and a great prejudice if the Trade should be forbid them in Hoksieu. Moreover, since the General there was already depos'd, and the Vice-Roy con∣demn'd to pay two thousand Tail for suffering the Netherland Ships to go away, they ought by no means to be the occasion to bring any more trouble upon him. Nay, though the Ambassador would have fulfill'd his Instructions he could not do it, because none (as fearing to incur displeasure) would have translated it into the Chinese Tongue.

Many other Complaints mention'd in the Instructions were thought fit not to be taken notice of till a more convenient opportunity, they being com∣manded to set down onely what they had to request of the Emperor. All which being rightly consider'd of, it was concluded to write the following Points, and get them translated into the Chinese Tongue, that the Ambassador and Nobel might the next Morning carry them to the Lipous, viz.

The Realm of Holland, and the General of Batavia have commanded the* 23.27 Ambassador to request of his Imperial Majesty the following Points:

• I. THat the Hollanders may always, and every year come with as many Ships as shall be requisite, to Traffick in the Realm of Tayzing.
• II. That the Holland Ships may come and Trade at Quantung, Singcheu, Hok∣sieu, Ningpo, and Hanksieu.
• III. That the Hollanders may Trade with all Persons, and Buy and Sell without being forc'd to deliver their Merchandise against their wills.
• IV. That the Silk and Silk-Stuffs may be Bought and Transported by the Hollanders, as also all other Merchandise, except those which the Emperor pleases to prohibit, of which the Ambassador desires he may have knowledge, that they may obey the Emperor's Will and Pleasure.
• V. That the Holland Ships, so soon as they are arriv'd, may Trade and go away again when they are ready.
• VI. That all manner of Provisions, and other Necessaries, may be bought by the Hol∣landers and carry'd to their Ships.
• ...

• VII. That the Hollanders when they come to Trade, may have a convenient Habita∣tion for their Money, to stow their Merchandise in and sell them, and also to preserve them from Fire; because the Chinkon was in great danger at Hoksieu.
• VIII. That the fore-mention'd Particulars may be ratifi'd with Seal'd Letters from the Emperor, and that his Vice-Roys may be commanded to observe and take notice of them: Which if the Emperor grant, the Ambassador hath Order to consult farther about the Chinkon.

Moreover, the Ambassador propos'd, if he ought not for his particular part to present the Emperor (because it was customary there;) which being approv'd of, they set down the following Presents, viz. four Strings of Am∣ber* 23.28 Beads, one Amber Box, one Silver Charger, one Silver Box with Mother of Pearl, four Casuaris Eggs, ten Pieces of yellow Cloth, two double Barrel'd Pistols, two Pocket Pistols, two Sword Blades, one Buff Coat, twenty Flasks of Rose-water, four Perspective Glasses, six Pieces of Calamback Wood, two Unicorns Horns, one Piece of Amber, one Copper Horse upon a Pedestal, one Copper Lyon, two Copper Dogs, one Copper Mount, one Persian Quilt, two small Mortar-Pieces.

The twenty seventh in the Morning the Ambassador and Nobel were fetch'd by a Mandarin to the Lipous Assembly; where coming, they were led into an Anti-Chamber, and from thence, after half an hours stay, to the Lipous; to whom, after the delivery of the several Requests, and Inventory of the Pre∣sents, they were again led to the fore-mention'd Chamber, without a word speaking on either part.

A little while after there came two Lipous to ask the Ambassador some* 23.29 Questions by the Tatans Order, viz. That the Holland Ambassadors were in the thirteenth Year of the Emperor Zungte order'd to come by Quantung, and he was now in the fifth Year of Conchi come thither from Hoksieu, why he did not come by Quantung? also which way was nearest, from Quantung or Hoksieu? The Ambassador answering these, desir'd that if they had any more Questions to ask him, they would please to deliver them to him in Writing, that he might answer them again in the same manner, that by that means all mistakes, which might happen to arise by the Interpretation of them, might be prevented. This the Lipous willingly consenting to, deliver'd them a Paper written in the Chinese Tongue, in which the Questions were all set down.

Van Hoorn and Nobel going from thence went to their new Lodgings, which* 23.30 were the same wherein the Ambassadors Goyer and Keizer had Lodg'd thirteen years before, and now also the four Corean Ambassador, who went from thence the day before, having been there a whole Moneth.

The Place whereon this House was built being of a large circumference, was surrounded with Stone Walls, and full of Chambers and other Apart∣ments; yet very inconvenient, though better than where they were before.

Soon after their coming into this their new Habitation, the Lipous which had been there before, came again with their Secretary, to tell the Ambassador, that the Tatan would come in Person and see those Presents which the Ambassador would present to the Emperor apart, that he might give the better account of them to his Imperial Majesty. To which the Ambassador reply'd, That so soon as the Goods came thither, he would lay them ready for him.

Not long after Putmans and Vander Does came thither with all the remaining Presents and other Goods: whereupon the Ambassador gave immediate order,

that those new Presents which he had design'd to give the Emperor, should be taken out of their several Chests: which was no sooner done, but the Tatan came with several great Lords; where looking on all the Goods, he ask'd from whence this or that came, and what use it was for? to which Question having receiv'd an Answer, he took his leave; but coming just without the Gate he sent one of his Secretaries to tell the Ambassador, that he must get the Presents all in readiness against the next Morning, if the Emperor should chance to send for them.

The twenty eighth about Day-break, a Mandarin came to the Ambassador to have a written Answer to the Questions deliver'd in Writing the day before by the Chancellor and Lipous to the Ambassador and Nobel: whereupon the Ambassador causing them immediately to be translated, found them to be as followeth; and thereupon judg'd it convenient to answer according to what was there written, under every Question.

The Emperor and Lipous ask of the Ambassador and Hopou these following Questions.

I. Question. In the thirteenth Year of the Emperor Zungte, the Holland Am∣bassadors came to Quantung. The Lipous in the same Year writ to the Empe∣ror, and he hath granted that the Ambassadors shall always come by the way of Canton. In the fifth Year of the Emperor Conghi, the Ambassador is come from Hoksieu; and why did he not come from Canton?

Answer. Because the Hollanders in the Wars, and routing of the Pyrate Coxinga, put into Hoksieu.

II. Qu. Which Way is nearest, from Quantung, or Hoksieu?

Answ. The Way from Quantung is three or four days nearer; yet that is according as the Winds blow.

III. Qu. If the Way from Quantung be three or four days nearer than from Hoksieu, why did not the Ambassador come from thence?

Answ. The reasons thereof are mention'd in the Answer to the first Question.

IV. Qu. In the thirteenth Year of the Emperor Zungte, the Holland Ships were in Quantung, and since there are many Shelves and Rocks, how did they get through them?

Answ. Concerning the Rocks, and being at Quantung, we can say nothing of them, because neither the Hopou nor Ambassador were there; but yet they both know that some of the Holland Ships were cast away there.

Whilst they were answering these Questions, two Lipous came to the Am∣bassadors* 23.31 House, asking a Pattern of each sort of the peculiar Presents which the Ambassador intended to give to the Emperor, that they might shew it; which being given them, they again ask'd some other Questions, from whence this thing or that came? and what use it was for? as the Tatan had done the day before. To which they receiv'd Answers as formerly. Soon after they be∣gan to Pack up all the Goods to be carry'd to the Court.

The Ambassador taking hold of this opportunity, judg'd it convenient (since two days before he could not have any time) to deliver the Zoutaizins, Tatans, and others, the Inventories of their Presents; which was done accor∣dingly, after the Ambassador had taken both of them apart from the other Mandarins: but they (notwithstanding all the arguments that could be us'd to perswade them to accept of them) excus'd themselves, saying they could not

as yet take them, alledging that they would stay till they had done the Am∣bassador's Business. This said, they ask'd if the Ambassador had brought any thing to sell? and also if any of his Retinue had any thing to dispose of, which if they had, they should give them the quantity of them in Writing, before they sold their Goods, which (as they said) was the Custom there of all Stran∣gers. Whereupon the Ambassador gave them the same Answer as he had done on the two and twentieth, viz. That they had nothing to sell, but that which they brought with them was to give away to Persons that assisted them in the obtaining of their Desires. Whereupon they looking upon one another, said nothing, but that they durst not accept of the Presents.

Moreover, the Ambassador requested that they would please to order him* 23.32 a certain Purveyor, to buy all his Provisions and other Necessaries for him and his Retinue, because they could not agree with those that were there then, by reason they were chang'd every day; and likewise that they might have a Carpenter to make some Conveniences for them. The first they granted, tel∣ling them of two Persons which should assist them; but the second they could not consent to, because (as they said) none might come into the Ambassadors House whilst the Emperor's Presents were there.

They also ask'd for an Answer to their Questions made the day before; to which the Ambassador reply'd, That it was ready to be deliver'd to them so soon as it was Translated: To which they answer'd, That when it was done they should deliver it to the Mandarins whom they would send; which soon after was perform'd: and they took their leave without taking any of the Emperor's Presents with them, which the Ambassador had Pack'd up: neither was it done till the twenty third, when by three Secretaries belonging to the Lipous, they were with the rest of the Presents (according as they said) to be deliver'd all together to the Emperor.

The thirtieth the Ambassador and Nobel were sent for to the Lipous, and car∣ry'd* 23.33 to the chief Tatan's House, where they commonly assembled; whither coming, after a little waiting, they were ask'd by the Tatan if they had any Goods to buy or to sell? To which they answer'd, No; and that it was not customary for any Ambassador to trouble himself with Merchandizing. Whereupon the Tatan ask'd how it was with the Ambassador's Health: after which his Excellency and Nobel were carry'd into an Anti-Chamber; where being seated, they ask'd the Ambassador concerning his Sons Quality? and if* 23.34 he came upon order and knowledge of the Lord General. To which Van Hoorn reply'd, That his Son was of no Quality more than as being his, and that he onely came to bear his Father Company, which the General had given him leave to do. Moreover, they ask'd why this Embassy did not come by Quan∣tung and Canton, but from Hoksieu, alledging that they were not well satisfi'd in the written Answer to this Question, because they had not ask'd about the War with the Coxingans, and if they were come thither by that means; but why the Embassy did not now come by Quantung? and if they and the Lord Maet∣zuiker did not know that the former Emperor's Order was, that all Embassies must come from Quantung? Whereupon after consultation they answer'd, That they knew not of the former Emperor's Order; and that according to the Lord Generals Command they were come by Hoksieu, and whether or not he knew the former Emperor's Order they could not tell. Which Answer they said was sufficient, and accordingly written down. They also ask'd con∣cerning Putmans and the Secretary's Quality; which being resolv'd, the Am∣bassador and Nobel took their leave.

The first of Iune in the Morning one of the Lipous call'd Songlavja, and four* 23.35 Grand Mandarins, came to the Ambassador's House, with Request that he would command his Musick to Play, which they much desir'd to hear. He knowing the Lavja's to be very civil People, entertain'd them nobly, and or∣der'd his Musicians to Play their best Tunes; which pleas'd them so well, that they return'd him many thanks, and at last took their leave.

In the Evening the Ambassador propos'd, That they had made some In∣ventories* 23.36 of Presents for the four Zoutaizins, three Tartar Tatans, three Lipous, and four Secretaries; and that their Letter of Requests was, as they reported, already deliver'd to the Emperor, and that in a short time they might have an Answer; that also in their Instructions they were order'd to present the Coun∣cellors of State before their chief Business was done, as the Ambassador had al∣ready us'd some endeavor to deliver the Schedule of the Presents, without being able to do it; as also by one of their Mandarin Guides to the Zoutaizins, which likewise came to no effect: Whereupon considering, that they could trust none without being cheated, it was therefore propos'd what way would be best to present the Councellors: After serious Debate it was resolv'd, that Nobel and Putmans should the next Morning go to the Lipous, and acquaint them, That the Ambassador rejoyc'd at the Emperor's kind acceptance of all the Presents, and withal desir'd, there being some Presents for the Zoutaizins and other Grandees, sent them from the General, that they might be acquaint∣ed with it, and they admitted to deliver them. Whereupon the Mandarins of the Guard were call'd, and desir'd by the Ambassador, that they would go to the Lipous in the Morning, and request of them, that Nobel and Putmans might be admitted to impart something to them; which they promis'd to do, and said they would bring the Ambassador an Answer at their Return.

The second in the Morning the Mandarins return'd to tell the Ambassador, that Nobel and Putmans might freely go to the Assembly, and that a Mandarin was come to conduct them thither. Whereupon they immediately went, and at their Return related, That they were carry'd by the fore-mention'd Manda∣rins to the Tatans House into a Chamber, by the Lipou Songlavja, who had ask'd them if they would acquaint him onely with their Requests, or the whole As∣sembly? to which they answer'd, That they would do as he pleas'd: where∣upon he desir'd that they should onely impart it to him, which was done after the same manner as it was agreed on the Night before: which having heard, he went in, and after half an hours stay coming out again, and sending away all his Servants, he told them, That for that time the Lipous were risen, but the Tatan had promis'd to propose it to the Assembly in the Afternoon, and would send them an Answer the next Morning, whethe Nobel should come to the Assembly or not; and if no Messenger came, he migh tstay at home. Songlavja had also ask'd several times if the Lord General had sent the Presents? and if there were no Letters with them. To which Nobel replying, said, That there were none; but he knew that the Ambassador was commanded by the Lord Maet∣zuiker to present all the fore-mention'd Grandees: which said, they took their leave.

The third, two Mandarins came to tell the Ambassador, That the Lipous on the Proposal of the Presents made yesterday by Nobel and Putmans, desir'd that he would write the Persons Names which he intended to present, and if they were sent from the General, or given onely by the Ambassador: To which he sent an Answer in these following terms:

THe General of Batavia hath commanded the Ambassador, after the delivery of* 24.1 the Chinkon to the Emperor, also to Present the Taizins; for he being ignorant of the Customs here, hath order'd the Ambassador to do according as he shall find it con∣venient.

With which Letter Nobel and Putmans went to the Lipous Assembly, and at their Return brought word, That they had again, as yesterday, been at the Tatans House, and by two Lipous led into a private Chamber, where they deli∣ver'd the fore-mention'd Letter; which when they had read they deliver'd to Nobel again. Whereupon Nobel desir'd of the Lipou Songlavja (which was one of the two) that he would be pleas'd to assist the Ambassador, he not know∣ing their Customs, and advise him what was best to be done: At which seem∣ing not to be well pleas'd, he went to the Council, whither Nobel and Putmans was also call'd: There they saw three Tatans, being two Tartars and one Chi∣nese, to whom they again deliver'd the fore-mention'd Letter: The Tatans ha∣ving read it, ask'd to whom they would deliver the Presents? Nobel and Putmans desir'd that they might speak with the Ambassador about it: But they ma∣king no Answer went away without effecting their Business, the Letter being also by the Tatans demanded from the Interpreter de Hase, to whom they had first given it.

In the Afternoon a Mandarin, whom Van Hoorn had some days since present∣ed with five Ells of Stammel, came and brought it again, saying, When the Ambassador's Business was done he would take it, but now he durst not keep it. He also inform'd the Ambassador, that he was come of his own ac∣cord to tell him, that the Letter to the Lipous to present the Zoutaizins did not please them; nay, that they would perhaps send some Lavja's, to ask how and where the Ambassador heard of the Zoutaizins? and advis'd him to answer them, That he suppos'd the Zoutaizins, Tatans, and Lipous, were all one.

The Ambassador look'd upon this as a strange Discourse, because he had seen the Zoutaizins, and they ask'd him concerning the General's Health; so that he suppos'd the Lipous did this onely to prevent him from presenting the Zoutaizins, and get the Presents amongst themselves.

The twenty ninth in the Morning Van Hoorn and Nobel were sent for to the* 24.2 Lipous, and carry'd before their Bench, where they were ask'd what Lords the Ambassador meant by the Name of Zoutaizins? and how they knew that there were any? To which he answer'd, That he had seen two of them in the Em∣peror's Palace, and they told him that there were two more, which were then sick; and also that he had spoke to them when they ask'd him about the Gene∣ral's Health. To which the Lipous said, Mean you them? Whereto Van Hoorn reply'd, So he understood his Orders.

Moreover they desir'd that the Ambassador would declare what Lipous he meant by the other, and that he would express the Lipous thereby; which was done accordingly. This pleasing them, the Ambassador was by some of the Lipous led out of the Council Chamber into a private Room, and there told, That in the second Year of the Emperor Conghi, a Mandarin call'd Tanghlavja, had been in Hoksieu impower'd as Taizin, and had brought word that they would every year come to Peking; whether or no that was true? To which Van Hoorn answer'd, That that was not the meaning, but that they would come every year to Trade. So after several other Questions of small conse∣quence, the Ambassador and Nobel took their leave.

The fifth in the Morning the Ambassador and Nobel were again sent for to* 24.3 the Lipous, and coming to the Tatans House were led into an Apartment, out of which after two hours stay they were call'd before the Assembly; where the Tatan first ask'd concerning the Ambassador's Health, and afterwards said, That it had often hapned that Ambassadors proffer'd to present the Zoutaizins and Lipous, but it was not customary there to receive them, therefore the Am∣bassador must not credit those which told him so, and that they had not ad∣vis'd him well: after these and such like Discourses were ended, they departed.

In the Evening the Mandarin, who had hitherto been chief Steward for the Ambassador's Provisions that were allow'd him and his Retinue by the Empe∣ror, came to tell him, That being preferr'd to a greater Place, he could not wait upon him any longer, but that another would supply his Room: The Ambassador to gratifie him for his former care, gave him five Ells of Stammel.

The sixth in the Afternoon came four Mandarins to the Ambassador, to tell him that they were expresly sent from the Emperor, to have his Answer to the following Questions, viz. First, from whence the Rose-water came, and* 24.4 what it was for? likewise the Unicorns Horns and the Copper Mount, which were amongst the Bengale Copper-works? Moreover, what Birds the Casuaris were? all which the Ambassador answer'd to the best of his knowledge; which they having set down, went away again.

The seventh and eighth nothing hapned, nor saw they any Strangers.

The ninth in the Afternoon Genko the Interpreter inform'd the Ambassador, That he and the Mandarin Guides were that Morning sent for to the Lipous, where they had understood that the Ambassador and all his Retinue should about three days after be invited to the Emperor's first Feast, and perhaps with∣in ten days go away again.

The eleventh nothing hapned of note; but on the twelfth in the Morning* 24.5 a Mandarin (which generally went with the Netherlanders to the Court) came to tell the Ambassador, That he and his Retinue should make themselves rea∣dy to go to the fore-mention'd Feast of the Emperor; which was immediate∣ly perform'd, and the Ambassador conducted to the Tatans House, to stay in the usual Chamber; from whence he was soon fetch'd, and by the Lipou Song∣lavja led into the Hall, where finding the Tatan, and having with him kneel'd down and bow'd their Heads three times towards the Emperor's Palace, they were seated after the following manner: The Tatan sat uppermost, and on his right Hand a little distant the Ambassador, behind him Nobel, Putmans, and the Secretary, and behind them the rest of the Retinue, to the number of seven∣teen; on the Tatan's left Hand, at a pretty distance sat some Lipous, and other great Lords: When they were plac'd, a Cup of Bean-broth was fill'd round, and drank up kneeling with one Knee on the Ground; after which the Ta∣bles, Garnish'd with thirty three Silver Plates, were plac'd before the Tatan, Ambassador, and those of his Retinue that were of Quality, and before the other Retinue five and five to a Table, fill'd with all manner of Fruits, and Meal Bak'd in Oyl; then every one receiv'd a Cup of Imperial Liquor, which was also drank by those that lik'd it on the Knee, after they had bow'd their Heads; which done, they fell to eat, the Tatan giving the Lipous and other great Lords some from his own Table. After they had pretty well eaten, the Tatan ask'd the Interpreters, if the Netherlanders had brought no Bags to put the Offal, and what remain'd in? being answer'd No, and that it was not their

[illustration]

custom, he immediately caus'd some Bags and Clothes to be brought: But the Interpreters not long considering, threw in all that was left one amongst another into the Bags; which was no sooner done, but another Course was brought, viz. on the Tatan's, Ambassador's, and other Persons of Qualities Table, were set two Dishes and two Plates; on the Retinues Tables, one Dish of boyl'd Rams flesh, and another of Lamb: Before the Lipous and other Lords, a Mat was spread on the Floor, without either Table or Dish, the flesh exceeding fat and good, though unhandsom to look on, weigh'd at least fifteen Pound a Joynt.

The Hollanders were much pleas'd to see the Lipous and other Lords eat so heartily thereof; also observing the manner us'd by the Tartars at Meals, which was rather like Beasts than rational Creatures: Having spent some time in Eating, the Souldiers taking away the Meat from the Tables, the Ne∣therlanders rising and kneeling, bow'd their Heads, with the Tartars, three times towards the Emperor's Court, and so return'd to their own Lodgings.

No sooner was the Ambassador come home, but Genko the Interpreter* 24.6 inform'd him, That he was Commanded to tell the Ambassador, that four days hence, (being the twentieth of ours, and the six and twentieth of their Moon) there would be a second Feast, and two days after, the last, or third: Moreover, that two or three days after that, he should depart, which being ob∣serv'd by the Ambassador in his Councel; and also, that it might be design'd, that just at their departure, the Emperor's Answer on their Requests might be* 24.7 made known to them; after which time there would be no opportunity to alter any thing that might not agree with their Instructions; therefore they thought fit to entreat, that the Merchandize which would come in those Ships that should fetch the Ambassador, might be sold at their arrival: Whereupon they wrote the following Letter to the Assembly of the Lipous.

THe Ambassador hopes, that the Lipous have well understood his Letter of Requests,* 25.1 and hopes for a good Answer from the Emperor: Now his further Desire is, that he may receive the Commands, and Answer of the Emperor, ten days before he goes away, that he may the better (having time to consider) understand his Imperial Majesties Will and Pleasure, and may faithfully render an account thereof to the General in Batavia; and that the Hollanders may for the future, Obey, and faithfully perform the Emperor's Com∣mands, as well in the Chinkon, as ought else.

Nobel and Putmans went with this Letter to the Lipous Assembly, and were directed to use such perswasive arguments, as they should think fit, to make them understand the Ambassador's Request; to which purpose, the Mandarins of the Guard were desir'd by Van Hoorn to go for him to the Assembly of the Lipous, and desire of them, that Nobel and Putmans might be admitted into their Presence; which they promising to do, related at their return, that the Lipous had told them, that the Ambassador on the twenty sixth of their Moon (which was the sixth of Iuly) when he should be Entertain'd at the Emperor's second Banquet, might then acquaint them with what he had to Request.

The fourteenth, nothing happen'd of Note.

The fifteenth in the Forenoon, the Lipou Songlavja came with two Mandarins to the Ambassador's Lodging, to ask him what his Requests were about, which he desir'd to speak with the Council; Whereupon Van Hoorn gave him the Letter written two days before, but he was afraid to take it, until the Chinese Se∣cretary Soukjen had explain'd it to him: The Ambassador ordering him to read

it, which being done, he answer'd, The Ambassador is come hither with a Let∣ter to the Emperor, therefore his Majesty will not let him go away without another, and as soon as the Emperor had resolv'd on his Business, he should not fail to have his answer in Writing deliver'd him with the Emperor's Letter to the General; To which the Ambassador reply'd, That is all I desire, and therefore ask'd the Lipous, if he might to Morrow shew the Tatan the fore-men∣tion'd Letter, or not? Whereto Songlavja reply'd, That he might, if he pleas'd, but it was all one, since he knew the Contents of it; and that he would speak with him further about it to Morrow, at the Emperor's second Feast.

Mean while, six grand Mandarins more came to the Ambassadors House, at which the Lipou Songlavja taking his leave, advis'd the Ambassador to entertain the six Lavjas, which he perform'd, by keeping them to Dinner, and delighting their Ears with his Musick; after which they departed well satisfi'd.

The next Morning early, being the sixteenth, the Lipous Mandarins came to* 25.2 give notice to the Ambassador, to make himself ready to go to the Emperor's second Feast: Which the Hollanders immediately perform'd, and were again conducted thither, and entertain'd after the same manner, as on the twelfth instant, without any alteration, only they did not Kneel before the Tatan: Who by the Interpreter Genko told the Ambassador, that he need not deliver the Letter of Requests which he had brought with him, because he had understood the Contents of the same from the Lipou Songlavja, which made him keep it; and taking his leave, went away, without asking or speaking any thing else, with all his Retinue: Where he was no sooner come, but the Mandarin which in the Morning had fetch'd him to the Court, came and told the Ambassador, That he and his Retinue must make themselves ready, that they might go to Morrow Morning before Day-light, to the Emperors Palace, to receive his Imperial Majesty's Presents; which the Ambassador promis'd to do. This Mandarin said also, That his Excellency should on the thirtieth of their Moon (being the tenth of our Iuly) come to the third Imperial Feast, and three days after that go away, which made the Ambassador long for the Emperor's reso∣lution on his Request.

The seventeenth in the Morning, two hours before Day, he was fetch'd with his Retinue to the Court, to receive the Imperial Presents, and conduct them through three Gates into the Emperor's Court, on a Plain, before the fourth Gate, which faces the Throne; where, on Iune the 23. they had seen the Coreans shew Reverence to the Emperor, and their Presents lie on a Table. Here the Netherlanders rested till Day-light; about an hour after they saw some Lipous drest after a stately manner coming into the Court; and soon after, a Table was brought in, cover'd with a Piece of Red Cloth, which was set in the same place where the Corean Ambassadors stood; only this stood before the Gate at the Tartars upper Hand; when as that of the Coreans stood on the left. A little while after, some Stuffs and Money was laid upon it, which done, the Ambassador, his Son, Nobel, Putmans, and the Secretary, were call'd and plac'd just before the midle Gate, which was opposite to the Throne; yet they could not there discern the least glimps of it; for that the fifth Gate stands so high, that although it be open, yet they can see nothing belonging to the Throne.

After they had fac'd the Throne, and upon the Order of a Herald, kneel'd thrice, and bow'd their Heads nine times; they brought the Ambassador first those Presents that were for the Lord General, which he receiv'd kneling; and

afterwards, those which were for himself: This done, Nobel receiv'd his like∣wise; next Putmans, then the Secretary, and the rest of the Retinue, every one what was order'd for them: Which finish'd, the Mandarin Guide, Hiu and Hui∣lavja, the Chinese Interpreters and Soldiers which came with them, receiv'd theirs.

The Presents which they receiv'd from the Emperor were as followeth:

For the Lord General three hundred Guilders of fine Silver, consisting in six* 25.3 Boats, two Pieces of Chinese Cloth of Gold, two more of the same with Dra∣gons, four Pieces of Flower'd Silk, with Dragons; two Pieces of Flannel, twelve Pieces of divers Colour'd Sattin, eight Pieces of Damask▪Silk, ten Pie∣ces of rich Flower'd Stuff, ten Pieces of Pelangs, and ten Pieces of Pansjes.

For the Ambassador an hundred Guilders of fine Silver▪ four Pieces of Pelangs, four Pieces of Pansjes, four raw Pieces of Hokjens, three Pieces of Blue single Sattin, six Pieces of single Damask, two Pieces of Cloth of Gold, with Dragons.

For his Son, one Piece of black Flannel, fifteen Guilders of fine Silver, two Pieces of Raw Gazen, two Pieces of single Damask Silk.

For Nobel, fifty Guilders of fine Silver, one Piece of Chinese Cloth of Gold, one Piece of Flannel, three of Damask Silk, one Piece of Sattin, two of Gazen, two of Pelangs, and two of Pansjes.

For Putmans and Vander Does, which had both alike, were forty Guilders of fine Silver, two Pieces of Damask Silk, one of Flannel, one of Sattin, one of Pelangs, one of Pansjes, one of single sleight Damask, and one Piece of White Goes.

The Interpreters, Maurice Iansz Vish, and Dirk de Hase, had each two Pieces of Black Sattin, two of White Goes, two of Pansjes, two of single sleight Damask.

For every one of the Retinue, fifteen Guilders of fine Silver, two Pieces of raw Gazen, and two of single Damask.

For the Guide Mandarin Hiu Lavja, one Horse without a Saddle.

For the Guide Mandarin Hanlavja, and the two Chinese Interpreters, one Silk Damask Coat, Edg'd about with Gold, which they were immediately to put on, and for each of the Soldiers that came with the Ambassador, one sleight Silk Damask Coat.

After every one had receiv'd what was laid out for them, the Ambassador was with his Retinue led back to the place where he Kneel'd before, and did it again, as a sign of thankfulness; after which he was by the Mandarin Song-Lavja, and some other Mandarins conducted out of the Court; whereat, the Am∣bassador ask'd of the Lipou Song-Lavja, when the Emperor's Letter to the Lord General, and his answer on their Requests would be deliver'd? To which he reply'd, All in good time, yet it should be three or four days before his depar∣ture: Whereupon, the Netherlanders return'd again to their Lodgings.

In the Afternoon, a young Vice-Roy, not above twenty years old, and Ne∣phew to the present Emperor, came to visit the Ambassador, and to hear his Musick; which having delighted his Ears, and tasted two or three Glasses of Sack, he took his leave, seeming very well satisfi'd.

The nineteenth in the afternoon, another grand Lord, who had the Com∣mand over the Nobility at the Court, came to the same purpose, which was accordingly granted him, and entertain'd with a Banquet; which ended, he departed.

[illustration]

The fourth instant, the Tatan told the Ambassador and Nobel expresly, that none there might receive any Presents, and those who told him otherwise did very ill: Wherefore the Ambassador seeing them to be in earnest, sent a Letter to the Lipous and Zoutaisins, to desire, that those Goods which he had brought with him to give away, since they would not accept of them, he might have leave to sell them; but he could get no answer upon it.

The twentieth, the Ambassador was fetch'd to the third Feast of the Empe∣ror, and again, as before, conducted to the third Tatans Court, where he was entertain'd after the same manner, as on the sixteenth.

The Ambassador, after all this trouble and Expence, both of time and other∣wise, gain'd no more, but to be at last dismiss'd, with a Seal'd Letter from the Emperor, to the Lord Maetzuiker in Batavia.

So on the fifth of August, he set forth from the Imperial City Peking, to mea∣sure back his former tedious Journey; and first reach'd a Temple about a League from the Town of Tonsjouw, and two from Peking, where they lay all that Night.

AS to what concerns the Metropolis Peking, it shall be with its whole Pro∣vince at large describ'd in our following Discourse of the Empire of Chi∣na or Taising.

The great Citizens, and other Prime Court-Ladies, are here, as also through all China, seldom seen to walk in the Streets, but are carry'd in close Sedans, or Palakyns, accompany'd by a great Train of Waiting-Women, and other Servants.

In the Houses, their Lodgings are apart from the Men, where likewise they have Wildernesses, Groves, and pleasant Gardens, where they delight themselves in Planting curious Flowers, and keeping all manner of Singing-Birds.

But the high-going Madams take another manner of State upon them, espe∣cially the Emperor's Concubines, who appear very rich and gorgeously Drest

[illustration]

in their Houses, (in manner, as are represented in the following Print, in Silk Coats, which trail on the Ground after them with very wide Sleeves; their Heads cover'd with a costly Cap, is round, and turn'd up before, cut and inden∣ted like the Points of a Coronet.

The sixth they proceeded on their Journey from Tongsjouw, and at Noon came to the Vessels lying at the City of Siensingway, where the same Boats re∣ceiv'd them that brought them thither.

The seventh, leaving Siensingway, and passing by many Hamlets and Villa∣ges, they Anchor'd before some Houses, about a League from Giochioe.

The ninth about Day-break, Weighing again, they arriv'd in the Forenoon at the foremention'd City, from whence, after they had gotten fresh Toers, they set Sail at Noon, and dropt Anchor that Night before the Village of Ianzin.

The eleventh, they came to the City of Siensingway about Noon, where they waited for more Toers, because the Current was against them, and the strong∣er, by reason of the Rain lately faln.

The next Morning, Putmans went to the Sienkin of that place, to proffer him the Presents which were laid out for him on the tenth of Iune, in their Journey up to Peking, which he had then refus'd, and put off the accepting of, till their return: From whence he sent the following Letter, with the Goods.

THe Ambassador is safely arriv'd here: The Civilities which he hath receiv'd of your Lordship, shall not be forgotten: The Lipous have Commanded the Ambassador to make what speed he could possible in this his Iourney for Fokien and Batavia, there to deliver the Emperor's Letter; therefore the Emperor desires Talavja, that he would give speedy order, and dispatch.

Putmans at his return inform'd, That the Talavja had accepted of the five Ells of Stammel▪ and two Flasks of Rose-Water, but sent the rest back again; and as to what concern'd their speedy departure, he took no notice of, because it

did not concern him, he having only the Command over the Soldiers.

Soon after, the Sionkins Interpreter came to tell the Ambassador, That his Master, in requital for the Presents, had sent him two Hogs, two Sheep, one Pikol of Rice, and some Fruit, with Request, That his Excellency would please to accept of them: Whereupon the Ambassador reply'd, That he would receive it, on condition, his Highness would also take the rest of the Presents; which the Interpreter promis'd to tell him, and at his return, acquaint the Am∣bassador with his answer. Not long after, coming back, he said, That Talavja was double satisfi'd with those Presents which he had already receiv'd; yet however, to please his Excellency, he would accept of a Piece of Green Perpe∣tuana, if they had it, which he gave immediate Order to lay out, but was for∣gotten by the Interpreter.

Also the Interpreter was Presented by the Ambassador, with two Pieces of Linnen, and two Flasks of Rose-Water, because he had ask'd to buy them.

The Netherlanders Weighing Anchor, went with their Vessels to the South side of the City, that they might proceed on their Journey the next Morning.

The Toya also sent them some Presents thither, viz. Sheep, Apples, Pears, and the like, for which he return'd him the Piece of Perpetuana, which Sion∣kins Interpreter had left behind him; But his Servants soon after brought it back again, saying, that their Master judg'd it too much, but if the Ambassa∣dor had any Sword-blades, Pistols, or such like things, he would willingly ac∣cept of them; Whereupon, the Ambassador sent him by the Interpreter Mau∣rice, a Carbine, a Sword, and a handsom Knife, which he receiv'd with many Thanks.

After Noon, having been nobly entertain'd in one of the Sionkin's Barques, they Weigh'd from the Suburb, and the next Morning being the fourth, set Sail from the City of Tiensingway, and in the Evening Anchor'd at Sangjue.

The following day, in the Afternoon, they arriv'd at the City of Chinchay, where having staid about an hour and half, they set Sail again, and at Night dropt Anchor before Sincoacheen.

The seventeenth they proceeded on their Journey, and in the Evening ar∣riv'd at Chiuche.

The eighteenth at Noon, they past by the City of Siangsjouw, without put∣ting in, but in the Evening Anchor'd at the Village Talodueen.

The nineteenth they rested at Poethouw.

The twentieth in the Afternoon, they past by Tunquancheen, and staid all Night near Lienulhoe, where the Province of Peking, and that of Xantung is separated.

The one and twentieth, they Sail'd six Leagues in the Province of Xantung, and dropt Anchor at a Village call'd Lonkuntang; and next day, after Noon, staid for fresh Toers in Tuatchiouw, which having gotten, they set forward, and on the three and twentieth arriv'd at Chinjeen.

The twenty fifth, passing by Uchincheen, they dropt Anchor that Night at Oepoeso.

The six and twentieth, going on again, about Day-light they came in the Evening to Linsing, being got out of the River Guei, in the Royal Channel Iun; and that Evening past through the first Sluce, as in the Morning they did the second, made in Linsing, and dropt Anchor before the Custom-house, where a Chain was put cross the Channel, that no Vessels might pass without paying.

The Governor of this place came in the forenoon to visit the Netherlanders in their Vessel, and bid them Welcome; who, after having been well entertain'd, took his leave.

After his departure, sending the Ambassador some Presents, Putmans was or∣der'd to carry him a Pair of Pistols, a Sword Blade, a Piece of Perpetuana, and a Piece of Say in return.

The foremention'd Lord receiv'd many Letters in Putmans presence, advi∣sing him, that the Emperor had Raign'd three days, and that his own Chiap or Seal was abroad.

The Guide Mandarins inform'd the Netherlanders, that all the Governors, as well Povis, Conbons, Poutsensies or Farmers, which were up and down in the Pro∣vinces were sent for, and that Tartars were to be put in their places.

In the Afternoon, the Governors of this place came to invite the Netherlan∣ders to a Banquet, which they would willingly have refus'd; but that they being very importunate with them, were forc'd to grant their Request; so that the Ambassador told them, that so soon as the Chain was unlock'd, and his Vessels past through, he would come and wait upon them: To which they reply'd, That they would give immediate Order for it, as accordingly was done, and the Vessels permitted to pass.

Against the Evening, Messengers came to fetch the Ambassador to the Go∣vernors: But he excusing himself, said, That he could not go out of his Barque in the Night; wherefore the Governors sent him several Dishes with prepar'd Meats to his Vessel, which was distributed amongst the Barge-men. Mean while the chief Commander of this place sent the Ambassador some Silk Stuffs, which he return'd again.

The twenty ninth in the Morning, they set out from the City of Linsing. In the Evening they Anchor'd at Linancotsue, which leaving on the thirtieth, they past by Tungsjaufoe, and lay that Night before Gihautchie, having past through five Water-gates that day.

The one and thirtieth, Weighing Anchor, they came to Xansui; and in the Evening arriv'd at Gansjan, through six Sluces, which they all found open to their great advantage.

The first of September they left the Gansjan, and shooting that day four Wa∣ter-gates,* 26.1 they dropt Anchor in the Evening at a Village call'd Kaygoeva.

The next Morning, being the second, setting Sail again, they past that Fore∣noon by Namwang, and a Pagode thereto belonging, call'd Longwangmiao, where the River unites with this Channel; so that they had the Tyde with them, by which means they reach'd Sinning that Night, having past through three Sluces, when they Anchor'd before the fourth and last in the Western Suburb of the City Sinning, expecting when it should be open'd, that they might get through that also, which being not before the Afternoon, they went only a Canon shot from thence, and lay still for that Night.

In the Morning, the Toya of the City coming to Visit and Welcome the Ambassador, Presented him with some fresh Provisions, which he accept∣ing, sent Putmans after him with five Ells of Stammel, in Requital of his Favor.

The fourth in the Morning, leaving Sinning, and having a fair Gale of Wind, they got to a Village call'd Naogang that afternoon, where they waited for fresh Toers, having that day shot seven Sluces or Flood-Gates.

The fifth, setting Sail again, they arriv'd in the Evening at Iaxinho, passing through seven Water-gates that day.

The next day they lay still, wanting Toers.

The seventh in the Morning, leaving Iaxinho, they Anchor'd towards Even∣ing at the Village Miliancho, where the Province of Xantung is separated from that of Nanking.

The eighth they enter'd the Province of Nanking, and lay the next Night before Kiakia; which leaving on the ninth, they arriv'd that Morning with a fair Wind at Maulovao, three Leagues and three quarters from Kiakia, where they chang'd their Toers, which came not till the Evening, because they were fetch'd from Singsing a League and a half distant from thence.

The tenth in the Afternoon, setting Sail again, they arriv'd in the Even∣ing before the Mouth of the Lake Usantjouw, into which the Yellow River disembogues.

The Bank in this place being broken, they had made a Dam in the River Geu, which takes its Original in a Village a League and a half from thence; here the Ambassador dropt Anchor, to stay for some of his Barques to come up with him, which were a good way behind. Towards Night they arriv'd at a little Village, opposite to the City Taujenjeen, which leaving again in the Morning, they reach'd the Village Namemiao at Noon, and withal got out of the Yellow River, which has so swift a Current as creates much danger.

The thirteenth, putting forward again, they came to the great Village Sin∣kianpoe at Noon, where the Conbon of Hoksieu, according to the Information of the Guide Mandarins, arriv'd the same day, being on his own Request rid of his Office to come thither.

The Ambassador writing a Complemental Letter to him, he sent to invite his Excellency to come to him; Whereupon, he immediately going thither, was kindly receiv'd and entertain'd by his Highness; who told the Ambassa∣dor, that it was a great Honor, that the Netherlanders had been with and seen the Emperor, and that he had left some Presents in his Factors hands in Hok∣sieu for to be deliver'd to the Ambassador, for the Lord General and himself, which the Ambassador would find there at his coming: The Conbon also com∣mended himself for the good inclination which he had bore to the Hollanders in the time of his Governorship: To which the Ambassador answer'd, That he was very sensible of it, and that they should ever be oblig'd to his Highness for it. Lastly, The Conbon said, that he was desirous to make one small Pre∣sent more to the Ambassador, being only four Hogs, some Geese, and other Poultrey, which he desir'd his Excellency would be pleas'd to accept; whereon the Ambassador promis'd he would, provided his Highness would again receive the like Present from him: Which last the Interpreters durst not tell the Conbon, because several other Lords stood about him, so that there was no mention made of it.

So after a handsom Entertainment, the Ambassador took his leave.

The fourteenth in the Morning, the Ambassador in Requital of his Friend∣ly Reception the day before, sent a Letter to the Conbon, and judg'd it conve∣nient, since he might do much by his Recommendation in Peking, to the bene∣fit of the Company, to present him with ten Ells of Stammel, ten of black Cloth, ten of Blue, one Piece of Saye, one of Crown-Serge, four Pieces of Lin∣nen, two of Guinny Linnen, one fine Carpet, one String of Blood Coral, and two pair of Spectacles; and the Ambassador to oblige his Interpreter, and that

he might put his Master in mind of the Hollanders, gave him five Ells of Stam∣mel, one Sword-blade, and a pair of Spectacles.

This done, leaving the great Village Sinkianpoe, they past by the Conbon's Barques, which consisted of fifty six great and small.

In the Afternoon they came to the North-Suburb of Haoigan, where they lay still before a Bridge, till the Townsmen had furnish'd them with Provisions.

The sixteenth, against Noon, the Ambassador was presented with some Pieces of Stuffs, by the Toya of that place, who was Brother to the new Gene∣ral at Hoksieu; which the Ambassador judg'd not convenient to accept, but sent them back again, and with them five Ells of Stammel, partly, because he might assist the Hollanders, and do much for them by writing a Letter in their behalf to his Brother; and secondly, that they might be speedily dispatch'd from thence; which prevail'd so much, that the Netherlanders left the City Haòigan in the afternoon, and arriv'd in the Evening at Paoing. The next Morning, going from thence again, at Noon they met with a Factor belonging to the General, call'd Tziang Povi Thesia, who according to his Relation, came from Hoksieu the fifth of August, and was going for Peking; who inform'd the Am∣bassador, that three Ships were arriv'd from Batavia at Sothia, and that four more were gone to Tamfui and Quelang: Moreover, that all things were well with the Hollanders in Hoksieu, only none might go to the new arriv'd Ships, nor any come ashore out of them, neither was any Provision permitted to be sent to them.

The Vice-Roy Singlamong and General were coming to Peking, being sent for, because they let the Netherlands Ships go away, and that the new General which was to Depose his Master met him near Lancquy: The Ambassador ask∣ing him if he had brought any Letters from Harthouwer, he answer'd, No: but that fourteen days before he came from thence, two Letters were writ to the Ambassador by Harthouwer, and sent with that which the General dispatch'd to Peking, about the arrival of the foremention'd Ships: After his departure, the Netherlanders putting forward, they arriv'd in the Evening at the City of Kayo∣ven, where they staid all Night.

The next Morning, being the eighteenth, they left the City, and with Sail∣ing and Toing, reach'd the City of Ianchefoe about Noon, where they lay be∣fore a Custom-house.

The following day, the Ambassador judg'd it convenient to procure a spee∣dy dispatch, by Presenting the Toya of that place with five Ells of Stammel, one Piece of Perpetuana, two Adathys, and a Book Looking-glass; with these he sent a Complementing Letter by Putmans, yet he accepted of nothing but the two Adathys, and the Looking-glasses; in return of which, he sent one Hog, one Pikol of Meal and Rice, and a parcel of Fruit; of which the Ambassador accepted only the Fruit, and sent back the rest; yet the civility of their offer avail'd so much, that the Hollanders were permitted to pass by the Custom∣house, and in the Afternoon Sailing by the City Ianchefoe, arriv'd at Quasui.

The twentieth in the Morning, Weighing again, they cross'd the River Ki∣ang, and at Noon arriv'd at Singkiangfoe, where he sent his Secretary to the Sion∣kin, Brother to one of the Lipous in Peking, to Request his Highness, that he might be dispatch'd from thence with all speed: For which Courtesie, all that he had should be at his Command and Service: To which his High∣ness (according to the Secretaries Relation at his return) answer'd, The Ambassador not needing to exchange his Barques there, might go when he

[illustration]

pleas'd. Soon after the Secretaries return in the Barque, came his Highness Interpreter to give the Ambassador a Cup of Bean-broth in his Master's Name; for which he, by the Interpreter Maurice, Presented him with a pair of Pi∣stols, which he accepted with many Thanks; his Men also had a quarter of a Piece of Perpetuana.

A Captain who had the Command over a thousand Men in this City, and had Presented the Ambassador with some Provision, came to bid him Wel∣come; for which Civility he receiv'd five Ells of Stammel.

The one and twentieth, in the Morning, leaving the City of Sinksianfoe, they Sail'd along the outside of it, where they saw abundance of Jonks and Cojas, (as at Ianchufoe) which were newly repair'd; of which, the Netherlanders ask∣ing the reason, receiv'd answer, that it was customary for all Towns to repair their Vessels once in three years.

In the Evening they arriv'd at Tayanchcheen, where casting Anchor for that Night, they Weigh'd again the next Morning, being the two and twentieth: Upon the way, the Ambassador was inform'd by some Barge-men that came from Suchu, that the Vice-Roy Singlamong was arriv'd there with his Train to go from thence up to Peking.

In the Afternoon they reach'd the City of Yanghsu, and the next day An∣chor'd at the City of Uchinopeen, and on the twenty fourth at Xuciquan, a Vil∣lage two Leagues from Suchu, before a Custom-house, where they lay all Night.

The next Morning passing the Boome, they arriv'd in the Afternoon at the City of Suchu, where two Blacks belonging to the Vice-Roy Singlamong's two Sons, came aboard the Ambassador, to tell him, that their Masters were a Month since gone by Land to Peking, and that they follow'd with their Goods; adding moreover, that Singlamong was yet in Hoksieu, and was to remain there, so that the Barge-mens relation prov'd false. In the Afternoon about three a Clock, they arriv'd at the West-gate of the City of Suchu.

Here the Hollanders were met by two Conjurers, one a Man, and the other a Woman, both in handsom Apparel, of which there are great numbers in all parts of China, that for a small reward, proffer their Service to foretel all future Events, and procure a good Wind; they also came to the Netherlanders, to put their Art in practice, to hasten or shorten their Journey; but they not appro∣ving of such Magical assistance, sent them away with a small Gift.

This Conjuring is at large describ'd in the following Description of the Em∣pire of China.

The Governor of this place came to visit the Ambassador, and Present him and the chiefest of his Retinue, as Nobel and Putmans, with a well-tasted Li∣quor, for which he receiv'd some Ells of Stammel.

Divers sorts of Liquors made of Rice, are drank by the Chineses.

In the fifth▪ Territory, Fuencheufu, in the Province of Xensi, is a very pleasant Drink, and not inferior to either French or Rennish Wine, being made of Rice and Kids flesh, which last being bruis'd, is laid to soke in the Juyce of the Rice. This Liquor is highly esteem'd by the Chineses, being strong of operation, and of a sweet and pleasing taste to the Palate.

In the fifth County Hinhoa, of the Province of Chekiang, they boyl the best Li∣quor in all China, of Rice and Water.

The six and twentieth in the Morning, the Netherlanders left the great City Suchu with a fair Wind, and came that Evening to the South Suburb of Ukia∣jeen, which City is neatly built, and though not very big, yet it is surrounded with strong▪ Walls. The Inhabitants thereof maintain themselves with Mer∣chandizing and Husbandry.

In the Morning setting Sail from thence, and having got about three Leagues and a half farther, they were forc'd, the Evening coming suddenly up∣on them, to make to their Harbor.

The twenty eighth in the Morning, they set Sail again from thence, and in the Afternoon past by Kiangfoe, where they went out of the Province of Nan∣king, into that of Chekiang, and in the Evening arriv'd at a Village call'd Sinning.

The twenty ninth, Weighing again, they had in sight the City of Ukiajeen, which having past, in the Evening they rested at Tangheg.

The thirtieth they came to the North-Suburb of Hanksieu, before a Custom∣house, where the Channel being shut up by a Gate under a Bridge, the Am∣bassador sent to desire that it might be open'd, and the Barques suffer'd to go through; but the Watch-men answer'd, That they must first have order from the Poutsjensy, or the Emperor's Farmer; so that the Secretary Vander Does was sent to the Governor and Conbon at Hanksieu with a Letter, in which the Ambas∣sador desir'd to be speedily dispatch'd, and if their Highnesses pleas'd, he would come to Complement them. Moreover, the Secretary was Commanded to ask them, If their Highnesses would permit the Ambassador to come and speak with them, and bring those Presents, of which their Highnesses had receiv'd the Inventory at their Journey up to Peking.

In the Morning, the first of October, the Gate being open'd, the Ambassador went through with his whole Retinue: Soon after, the Secretary coming aboard again, related, That he had been at the Generals the last Night, but could not be admitted to Audience. To the Letter which he sent him by his Clerk, he had return'd answer, That he would send a Mandarin early the next Morning, to let the Ambassador through the Gate, and withal, conduct him

to his House; but it being too late for the Secretary to go to the Conbon that Night, he went thither the next Morning, to deliver his Highness the Ambas∣sador's Letter, and met him as he was coming out of his Court-gate, (to Com∣plement a great Lord, which the day before came thither from Hoksieu) and re∣ceiv'd in answer, that his Highness humbly thank'd the Ambassador for his Ci∣vility, and that he would expect him.

Mean while, the Vessels went so far into the Suburb, that they came to An∣chor against a Bank.

The second, the Toya of that place came to Welcom the Ambassador in his Vessel.

The third, nothing happen'd of remark.

The fourth, all the Goods were taken out of these, and put into six other Barques, lying on the other side of the Bank; with which Putmans and Vander Does went the next Morning to the other side of the City, there to Reimbarque; the Ambassador, Nobel, and some of the Retinue going before by Land, to give order for Shipping of the Goods.

On the seventh in the Morning, leaving the South-Suburb of Hanksieu, they arriv'd in the Afternoon at Foejenjeen; the ninth at Nienchefoe; and the tenth at Lanqui, where the great Barques were chang'd for small; because here the Ri∣ver began to be very shallow.

The Governor of this Village invited them to Dinner, which in regard they could not put off, they went thither, and were very kindly enter∣tain'd, with various Meats, Musick, and Drolls, towards Evening ta∣king leave.

On the twelfth in the Morning, they left Lanqui; and on the thirteenth came to the City of Longuen; as on the fourteenth, to Kietsieu.

The sixteenth in the Evening, the Ambassador came with his Vessel to Sin∣hoe; but the rest staid behind, not able to follow for the shallowness of the Wa∣ter, and strong contrary Tyde; yet on the seventeenth in the Morning, they ar∣riv'd there in safety.

The Ambassador and his Retinue were also lodg'd in the same House, where∣in they lay at their Journey going up.

Here all things were prepar'd to travel over the Mountains, when the Am∣bassador finding that there wanted three hundred and fifty Coelies to carry the Goods and People, he ask'd the Mandarin Guides how many Coelies were allow'd by the Emperor's Order, for the carrying of the Goods, and prepar'd by the Pimpous? To which they reply'd, an hundred and eighty nine; and because one of the General of Hanksieu's People had told the Ambassador at Fojenjeen, that he should find so many Porters ready to carry the Goods over the Mountains, he sent the Secretary on the eighteenth in the Morning to Tjangtjen, a League and a half from thence, to enquire of the Mandarin, who had the Command of that Village, and there Resident, what Orders he had from the General of Hanksieu? Whereupon he declar'd, That he had no other Order concerning any Coelies, than what he had from the Pimpous; so that the Ambassador gave immediate Order for the hiring of an hundred and fifty Coelies, with which he went on the next day; and on the two and twentieth came to Poutchinfoe in the Province of Fokieu; and on the three and twentieth, Nobel, Putmans, and Vander Does, return'd Thanks to the Almighty, for helping them safe over the steep Mountains.

The twenty fifth, having Shipt their Goods, and Imbarqu'd themselves, they set Sail with the Tyde, from the City of Poutchinfoe, and rested before a Watch-House at the Village Siphea.

The twenty sixth, going forward, they came, having Sail'd two Leagues, to a Rocky place, where the River was very shallow; by the strong Current, one of the Ambassadors and one of the Mandarin Hiulavja's Barques were beaten a∣gainst a Rock, whereby they grew very Leaky. This Night they also lay still before a Village, wherein was also a Watch-house.

The twenty eighth, they dropt Anchor again before another Watch-house, and on the twenty ninth arriv'd at the City of Kienningfoe, where staying till the next day, they set Sail again on the thirtieth, and arriv'd on the last at Ien∣pingfoe, which since their departure from thence in March, was above a third part consum'd by fire.

The first of November, the Ambassador and his Retinue proceeding on their* 26.2 Journey, were unexpectedly in the Afternoon about twenty Lys from a Vil∣lage call'd Sukauw, met by the Merchant David Harthouwer, and some other from Hoksieu, informing him of the condition of their Affairs. Towards Even∣ing they came to Sukauw, where they lay all Night▪

On the second before Day-light, going from thence, they came in the After∣noon to Lamthay, the Suburb of Hoksieu, after a Journey of nine Months, and twelve days.

Going all together to their old Inn, they found there the Toucy Liulavja, who told and shew'd them a written Order from the General, That all those Goods which they had brought with them must be search'd: Whereupon the Ambas∣sador answer'd, That this manner seem'd very strange to him, and that he had never heard of any that search'd an Ambassadors Goods; nay, that it was not done in Peking, nor any place else in all their Journey: But if the General would have it so, he might follow his Order, and begin with the Ambassador's Chest first.

This Answer somewhat chang'd his Intentions, granting moreover, That the Ambassador's, and other Persons of Quality's Chests, should not be search'd, but those of the Retinue, and in which the Presents were, could not pass with∣out; whereupon, they being all brought in and open'd, all things that were in them were set down; in which Toucy Liulavja spent all the Afternoon.

The fourth in the Morning, one Lapora and the Mandarin of the Inn came to tell the Ambassador, That the Vice-Roy Singlamong had sent for his Excellency to the Court, to bid him Welcome; wherupon they all went thi∣ther, and were kindly receiv'd by his Highness. After many Complements past on both sides, the Vice-Roy ask'd the Ambassador, If he had not told them the truth of all their Adventures before they went to Peking? They would not be∣lieve him then, but now having been in Peking, themselves might judge that he was a Man of Truth: To which the Ambassador answer'd, That his Majesties real Intentions had sufficiently appear'd, and the Lord Maetzuiker in Batavia, would without doubt be thankful to him for his Favors: They were also sen∣sible, that the King's Envoy in Peking had been a great instrument, and help'd much in their receiving of great Honors from the Emperor, Taisins, Kings, Li∣pous, and other grand Lords: Moreover, he hop'd that from this Embassy there would follow more Friendship, to the profit of both Nations, than had hitherto been: Whereupon Singlamong reply'd, That those were only outward businesses, but he had done so much for the Hollanders, that it cost him two

thousand Tail, and the General his Place. To which the Ambassador answer'd, As to what concern'd himself, he would do all that lay in his power to serve the Vice-Roy, but as for the two thousand Tail or the General, he knew nothing of it; but he was heartily sorry that no better News was come from above. The Vice-Roy reply'd, That he had onely told it cursorily to the Ambassador, and that they should henceforth speak no more of it. Soon after the Tables being furnish'd with Meat, and the Ambassador having eaten a little took his leave, the Vice-Roy advising him to go and visit the General. Coming into the Vice-Roy's base Court, a Mandarin that was to conduct him to the General told him, that if his Highness were not at leisure to speak with him, that then he might return to his Lodgings; so that the Ambassador staying in the Vice-Roy's Court, sent the Secretary Vander Does, with the Interpreter de Hase, to enquire if the General were at leisure to grant the Ambassador Audience: Not long after returning, he said that the General had sent Answer, That it was not customary to make an Address to him the same day that they had been at the Vice-Roy's, therefore his Excellency would do well to come the next Morning, and then he would grant him a Hearing. Whereupon the Netherlan∣ders going to their Lodging, found the Mandarin Liulavja with express Order from the General, That the rest of the Chests that were not search'd must be open'd, which the Ambassador suffer'd to be done without any contradiction.

At Night it was judg'd convenient for divers reasons, that their intended Visit to the General the following Day, should onely be Complemental, with∣out speaking a word of any Business; but to tell him, that what the Ambas∣sador had to impart to his Highness should hereafter be done in Writing.

The fifth in the Morning they went to the General, who after some stay per∣mitted them to come into his Presence; where the Ambassador was plac'd on his left Hand (but the upper among the Tartars) on a Stool a little distance from his, and Nobel, Harthouwer, and others on his right Hand, on Stools and Benches. Being thus seated, the Ambassador (the General being silent) said, That he was very joyful to see Talavja in good health, and that he was permit∣ted into his Presence. To which he reply'd, That it was but his Duty to grant Audience to all Strangers. Then the Ambassador proceeding said, That the Embassy was now finish'd, and that he had the Emperor's and Lipous Let∣ters by him, which being Seal'd must be deliver'd to the Lord Maetzuiker; so that now, since Talavja's Word was as much there as the Emperor's, they would seek in all things possible to obey him. To which the General ma∣king no Reply, after a little silence, ask'd for the Ambassador's Son: to whom the Interpreter said, That if the Ambassador had any thing to re∣quest of his Highness, he should acquaint him with it now. Whereupon he desir'd that the Merchants might fetch in their Debts, and balance their Accounts; and that the rest of the Goods of the last Year, and those which they had brought back with them from Peking, might be sold, that he might prepare himself for his Return to Batavia. To which the General said, He knew very well that the Debts must be paid; but he had receiv'd a Letter from the Emperor, in which the Hollanders were forbid to sell their Goods. Whereupon the Ambassador reply'd, That in Peking it was meant the new-come Goods, but his Desire was onely that the last years Trade which was granted by the Emperor, might be finish'd. Moreover, that they might lay out the Silver which they had brought from Peking, that by that means it might remain in the Countrey, which else would be carry'd away. The Ge∣neral

answer'd again, That he must observe the Emperor's Orders, as the Ambassador the Lord Maetzuikers, and that they might not sell prohibited Goods; not but that he judg'd it better for the Silver to stay in the Land, than to be carry'd out from thence. Lastly, the Ambassador desir'd that he might onely send some Provisions to the Ships; which the General granted, giving him a Note of them. Then the Ambassador saying he durst not detain Ta∣lavja any longer, desir'd to take his leave: The General reply'd, That he was glad to hear such civil Expressions from him; and so they parted.

The Ambassador coming to his Lodgings, judg'd it convenient, since he was permitted to send some Provisions to the Ships, to take hold of the opportuni∣ty, and to send the Hilversan Flyboat with all the Papers and Answers to Bata∣via, with a Letter to advise the Council there of their success. Likewise, that he might oblige the Conbon and General to be assisting in their Business, he thought good to present the General with half a Piece of Purple Cloth, one String of Blood Coral, six Pieces of Linnen, two of Says, two of Amber, two of Cloth-Serge, one Gun with a Stock of Palm-Wood, two Swords, a pair of Pistols, one Sword-Blade, ten Flasks of Rose-Water, and one Piece of black Cloth. To the Conbon they intended one Piece of red Cloth, six Pieces of Linnen, two of Says, two of great Amber, two of Cloth-Serge, one String of Blood Coral, one Gun, two Swords, one Piece of Perpetuana, ten Flasks of Rose-Water.

The same day Nobel, according to their Resolution, went to the Factor La∣pora, to enquire if any Silks could be bought for Silver or Merchandise; but Lapora telling him the difficulty of it, they attempted no farther.

The sixth in the Morning the Ambassador and the chiefest of his Retinue went to the Conbon's Court to Complement his Highness; before whom being brought, having waited a considerable time, several Complements pass'd as at the Generals, viz. That the Ambassador was glad to see Talavja in health, and that he had the favor to appear in his Presence; adding, That the Hollanders had receiv'd many Civilities from the late Conbon, and hop'd that they should also participate of his Highness's Favors. Whereupon the Conbon ask'd if the Ambassador enjoy'd his Health in his Journey to and from Peking? whereto he answer'd Yes; and that he had receiv'd great Honor there, and was come away in Friendship, desiring nothing more, than to leave Hoksieu also in Love and Amity, for which he desir'd his Highness's assistance. The Conbon replying said, That the Ambassador had brought the Chinkon to Peking, wherein the Em∣peror had taken great pleasure, why then should not he be kind to him? he did not meet him by the Way, therefore he would now send him some Provisions for a Present. Soon after the Conbon ask'd the Ambassador when he intended to go from thence? To which he answer'd, When the General and Conbon pleas'd; and that he never doubted but the Goods of last Year might have been sold with freedom, and they might also lay out their Silver for Commodities; but since he understood that it could not be permitted, he therefore desir'd to avoid all trouble, that he might be gone so soon as it was possible, and would rather suffer damage, than do contrary to the Emperor's Order. Here∣upon the Conbon said, that he was not well inform'd therein; and withall ask'd the Ambassador if he would immediately be gone, or stay a little longer? To which the Ambassador reply'd, That so soon as the Merchants had receiv'd their Debts, and all things balanc'd, then he would be gone, the sooner the better. After which no other Discourse passing, the Netherlanders took their leave.

Mean while Putmans went to the Generals Court with an Inventory of the Presents which the Ambassador had design'd for him the Day before, to shew it to his Highness, but was forc'd to return without Audience, being order'd to come again the following Day: wherefore the Ambassador sent Nobel and Putmans again on the seventh, and also to proffer the Conbon his Presents, but they had as ill success as Putmans the Day before, for they could not be permit∣ted to Audience.

After the Interpreter had taken the Inventory of the Generals Presents from them, and shew'd it to his Highness, he brought Answer, That the General would accept no Presents.

Towards the Evening the Interpreter Kako came to the Lodge, with Com∣mands to search the Blyswiik Frigat.

The eighth in the Morning the Vice-Roy Singlamong's Interpreter, and his prime Factor call'd Iongsavija, came to bring the following Presents: First, for the Lord Maetzuiker sixteen Pieces of Sattin, twenty of Sarsnet, four Brokkado's, six hundred and ten Pieces of Porcelane, one Picol of Tee.

For the Ambassador, eight Pieces of Sattin, two Brokkado's, ten Pieces of Sarsnet, a hundred Pieces of Porcelane, and one Picol of Tee.

For Harthouwer, six Pieces of Sarsnet, two Brokkado's, eight Pieces of Sattin, half a Picol of Tee, and a hundred Tee Cups.

Moreover, they said that the Vice-Roy at that time had no such fine Goods by him as he could have wish'd for, to have presented the Lord Maetzuiker and the Ambassador withall; desiring that his Excellency would not refuse these Trifles; adding also, That their Lord was very sorry the Hollanders had no better success in their Business at the Court of Peking, and that he declar'd it was not his fault; but on the contrary, had us'd his utmost endeavor to assist them for the obtaining of their Desires: but since it so fell out that the Em∣peror would not grant them, they must have patience (because nothing could be done against the Emperor's Order) and hope for a better Event. To which the Ambassador answer'd, That he humbly thank'd the Vice-Roy, and since he could not refuse his Kindness, he would accept of the Stuffs: but as to their Business he knew nothing of it, because the Emperor's and Lipous Letters were deliver'd to him Seal'd, and he commanded in that manner to deliver them at Batavia; and that the Orders therein mention'd (whatever they were) should be strictly observ'd. Furthermore the Ambassador said, That he de∣sir'd nothing else now, but that he might sell the Commodities which were remaining of the last Year, and afterwards go away, without being willing to request the disposal of those Commodities which were come since, because he would not stay for an Answer from the Emperor; or that they might not write to him about it. To which they reply'd, That they would acquaint the Vice-Roy with it; yet it was a Business which did not concern him, but the General and Conbon, therefore the Ambassador must request it of them. The Ambassador replying said, That there would immediately be a Letter ready for that purpose, to be carry'd to the General and Conbon. Some Complements passing on both sides, and the Ambassador giving them a Gratuity, they return'd.

Soon after the Ambassador sent Putmans with the following Letter to the General, which was to this effect:

THe Ambassador hath understood by a Letter from your Highness, that three Hol∣land Ships are arriv'd at Tenhay to fetch the Ambassador; and also that a

Ship at her going by to Japan put in there for Letters from him. Talavja hath com∣manded that the Ambassador should send down thither to command the going away of the three Ships. The Ambassador hath acquainted the Lipous in Peking, that three Ships were to come from Batavia to fetch him. The Ambassador knew not but that the Trade granted the last Year by the Emperor might be finish'd; wherefore he desires that he may dispose of the rest of those Goods (of which he here sends an Inventory) in such manner as was done in Peking; and that then the Ambassador would immediately go away with all his Ships and Men. The Ambassador would be very sorry if any more trouble should happen. And to manifest that the Ambassador will not onely obey and serve Talavja in words, but in deeds, he humbly desires, that if the remaining Goods may not be sold, that he may obtain leave of your Highness to go away with all his Retinue and Goods with the first opportu∣nity, and that in few days after no more Ships should be seen.

Putmans returning said, That he not onely could not be admitted to Audi∣ence, but that the General would not take the Letter.

The ninth in the Morning the Ambassador sent a Letter by the Factor La∣pora to the Vice-Roy Singlamong, being to return him thanks for the Presents receiv'd the Day before, which was to this effect:

THat the Ambassador hath found sufficiently since his Return to Hoksieu, his High∣ness's good Inclinations. That the Honor and Friendship which the Ambassador receiv'd in Peking he believes did proceed from the Vice-Roy's Recommendation. The Am∣bassador declares, that he hath endeavor'd in this Chinkon as much as possible he could, to preserve the Honor of the Realm of Holland, the General in Batavia, and also his own Reputation. The Ambassador is exceedingly rejoyc'd, that the Vice-Roy Singlamong's Heart is really inclin'd to him, and therefore esteems his Presents, being from so great a King, very much. That the King in Batavia hath been pleas'd to present the General is his High∣ness's Civility. The Ambassador is very well satisfi'd, and exceeding thankful for them; but he finds that this satisfaction is mix'd with a great desire to know how and after what manner he shall manifest his thanks; therefore wishes that he may be inform'd either by his Highness, or some Person else, if the Ambassador during his stay there, or in Batavia, or where-ever it might be, could do the King any acceptable Service, which if it be in the Ambassador's power, he will account it a great happiness, that he may manifest that he esteems more to do well, than to write or speak well.

The thirteenth in the Morning the Secretary Vander Does, Nicholas Berkman, and the Interpreter Maurice, went with a Chinese Vessel down to Netherland Haven and Tenhay, that according to their Resolution the Night before they might dispatch the Helverzum Flyboat, and the Pimpel Pink, and likewise take a view of the Ships.

After their departure the Toucy came to tell the Ambassador, That the Ge∣neral and Conbon would buy all the rest of the Goods, and that he should write down the lowest Prices of them on a piece of Paper, and that then their Fa∣ctors should come to receive and pay for them with ready Money. The Am∣bassador hereupon shew'd him to the Merchants, who were busie making an Invoyce of them, which when done was given to him.

The fourteenth and fifteenth nothing hapned of note.

The sixteenth a Servant sent from the Toucy brought a written Order (as he said) from the General, that the Store-houses must be searched, because some Counterband Goods were come with the Embassy, and the like▪ Whereupon

the Ambassador immediately sent the Merchant Harthouwer and Interpreter de Hase to the Toucy, with Commands to tell him,

• 1. That the Toucy would be pleas'd to pay that which he ow'd to the Com∣pany, being seven hundred Tail.
• 2. That the Toucy knew very well, that the Debt which was owing from the late Talavja, or General, and others, was above four thousand Tail; also that he should seek to procure the payment thereof, and bring the Silver to the Lodge.
• 3. That the Ambassador would henceforth suffer no more Searching, except by express Order from the General.
• 4. That if he had search'd the Ambassador's Chest by the General's Order, it was well; but if not, the Ambassador had suffer'd disgrace by it, because he had not been so serv'd in Peking, nor any other Place in China.

At his Return Harthouwer related, That the Toucy excus'd himself to the Ambassador, alledging that it was not his fault; the last written Order was not sent to him, but to the Interpreter, to see for some Bundles of Gazen, which were not set down by his People: Moreover, that he receiv'd nothing but civility from the Ambassador; and as for the Searching, it was by the Gene∣ral's Order; that he would come the next Morning to pay his Debts, and also lay out some Goods for the General and Conbon to buy; that the rest might be sold to other People; likewise that the other Debts should be brought to the Lodge.

The seventeenth the Toucy Liulavja came with a Note of the rest of the Pre∣sents, with the Prices at which the General and Conbon would buy the Goods.

The Ambassador order'd Harthouwer to tell the Toucy, That he did not cre∣dit him, neither would he have any thing to do with him, but would send to the General himself to know if those Prices were set down for them, and that then he should have an Answer. Whereupon the Toucy desir'd Harthouwer to come to his House the next Morning, and then he would go with him to the Conbon to ask the Question.

In the Afternoon the Secretary Vander Does, Nicholas Berkman, and Maurice, arriv'd from Tenhay and Netherland Haven, with relation of the good condition of all things about the Ships, and that the Men long'd onely for fresh Pro∣visions.

The twenty fourth the Ambassador commanded Nobel and Harthouwer, that they should go to the Toucy's House the next Morning, that according to his Request they might go together to the General and Conbon, and to ask if the Prices were for their Highnesses? and likewise to whom they would have their Presents deliver'd, that they might not be defrauded, and in the last place earnestly to desire, that they might have liberty to send fresh Provisions to the Ships, otherwise the Ambassador would desire to be gone with all the speed possible.

The eighteenth in the Morning Nobel and Harthouwer went to the Toucy, and coming with him to the Conbon's they stay'd till Noon, yet could get no Audi∣ence; but the Conbon sent them word, that they should deliver the Presents, and also the rest of the Merchandise to the Toucy Liulavja, except the Strings of Blood Coral, which they must deliver to himself the next day, when he would grant them Audience.

Against the Evening the Toucy Liulavja coming to the Lodge to fetch the fore-mention'd Goods, said that Nobel and Harthouwer need not come with the

Blood Coral the next day, but that the Ambassador must in Person appear at the Conbon's Court about six days hence, and then bring the Coral, and also an Account of those Debts that were owing, along with him, and then the Ne∣therlanders would have Orders to be gone within ten days.

The remaining Goods with the Presents being accordingly deliver'd to him, for the most part he carry'd away that Night, and fetch'd the remainder the next Morning.

The nineteenth Poutsiensy, Assensy, and the General's Interpreter came to the Lodge, to ask when the Ambassador would be ready for his departure? Where∣to he answer'd, That so soon as the Accounts of the owing Debts, being Audited, were paid, he would give them no farther trouble, but take Shipping immediately. Whereupon they reply'd, Would he please onely to give them a Schedule thereof, and they would take care that satisfaction should be made in three or four days. The Ambassador answer'd, That if what they promis'd were cetarin, he should be clear for his Voyage within a Week. Then the Ambassa∣dor ask'd if the Hollanders might buy no manner of Goods? To which they answer'd, That he might buy course Commodities, as Porcelane and the like; but they must first acquaint the General with it; mean while the Hollanders should draw up what Provisions they wanted for their Voyage, which was im∣mediately done, and deliver'd to the Mandarin Liulavja.

The twentieth in the Morning the Ambassador sent Nobel and Harthouwer to Court with this following Letter.

THe Ambassador seeks in all things to obey Talavja, and give him satisfa∣ction. a 29.1 The Poutsiensy and Assensy hav eask'd him what day he would be gone? to which he answer'd, That he could be ready on the twelfth of this Moon, and therefore desires that the Provisions for their Voyage may be brought according to the inclos'd Bill, and sent down to the Ship at Nanthay, and likewise the Silver and Porcelane. The Ambassador requests likewise that he may buy and carry the following Goods along with him, viz. China Roots, Tee, Anniseed, course Porcelane, some Stuffs, Stools, Cabinets, and other Trifles.

Nobel and Harthouwer returning in the Afternoon gave account, That they could not be admitted to Audience by the General, but after the Letter being deliver'd to him by his Interpreter, he permitted the Ambassador to buy the Provisions which he desir'd, but nothing else.

Soon after the Toucies, Liulavja and Hayongloja came again to tell the Ambas∣sador, That the General considering better on his Request, had granted that he might buy eight or ten Picol of China Root.

The one and twentieth nothing hapned of any note.

The two and twentieth the fore-mention'd Toucies came to the Lodge to tell the Ambassador, That his Retinue▪which came with him from Peking, must produce all those Stuffs which they had bought by the Way, because they would buy them again: This they said was the General's Order, which if they would not obey, he would search their Chests, and if he found any Stuffs in them, he would seize them as Forfeit.

The Ambassador hereupon calling his Attendants together, commanded them, whoever they were, excepting none (because he would not come in any trouble) to bring out all their Stuffs, and deliver them to the fore-mention'd

Lavja's; which being accordingly done, their Mandarins taking them, put them into a Chest, and carry'd them out of the Lodge.

At Noon, according to the Resolution taken the Night before, Nobel went to the Vice-Roy's Court, to proffer his Highness a String of Blood Coral; which he freely and kindly accepted in the Presence of all his Attendants.

Mean while the Mandarin Liulavja came to the Lodge from the General and Conbon, bringing Money with him for the remaining Goods which they had bought.

This Mandarin also inform'd, that the Overveen Frigat, and Balfour, who had brought some Renegade Chineses from Quelang, might not go away with the Ambassador, but must stay there till they had order from the Emperor concern∣ing it. Moreover, the Ambassador must go to the Conbon the next Morning, and afterwards to the Assensy, and two days hence to the General and Poutsiensy, to speak with them about the fore-mention'd, and what other Business else: which the Ambassador promis'd the next Morning to observe.

The next Morning, being the twenty third, the Ambassador went with No∣bel, Harthouwer, and others, to the Conbon, taking with him a Note of the sold Merchandise, and also the String of Blood Coral, which on the fifth Instan they resolv'd amongst other Goods to present to his Highness, as the Toucy Liulavja had told the Netherlanders on the eighteenth. Coming to the usual Hall they found the Toucy Liulavja, who soon after was call'd to the Conbon, and at his Return told the Ambassador privately, That because there were so many People with him, his Highness had judg'd it best, that the Ambassador should deliver the Chain of Coral to him, that he might deliver it to his Highness, who was afraid to receive it in the presence of so many Persons, and for the weight thereof, and Pieces of Coral, he might place in the Note amongst the other Merchandise if he would not trust him with them, which the Ambassador also did. His Highness, as Liulavja said at his return, had re∣ceiv'd the Coral with many thanks. Not long after the Ambassador was also call'd in, and seated by his Highness, who after some Complements said, That he would willingly have Entertain'd the Ambassador now, but because he had not been Treated by the General, he would stay till that was over. The Am∣bassador thanking him for his Civility, desir'd, that since he intended to be gone very suddenly, and his Servants were now busie Packing up their Goods, that his Highness would please to excuse him from coming to his Feast, and that he esteem'd this Visit as much as the greatest Entertainment. To which his Highness reply'd, That he would consider of it, and if he did not invite him, he would send the Dishes prepar'd to the Lodge. Then he ask'd when he thought he should be ready to go his Voyage? who reply'd, Against the twelfth of their Moon, or the twenty sixth of ours: which pleasing his High∣ness very well he said, That he could not assist the Hollanders in the Transport∣ing some Silk-Stuffs, alledging that it was none of his fault, but the Emperor's Order, who had strictly forbid it. Then the Ambassador gave him the Inven∣tory of the Goods that were sold, and an Account of the Moneys that were owing; likewise a Note of the Gifts ready to be presented, adding that he humbly thank'd his Highness for permitting him to sell the remaining Goods. After having look'd over the Note of the Presents, the Ambassador told his Highness, that the Mandarin Liulavja had the day before inform'd him, That the Ship come thither with the Renegade Chineses and David Balfour, might not go away with the Ambassador, but must stay in Netherland Haven, and Balfour

at Lamthay, till Order came from the Emperor about it, to whom they had written: The Ambassador therefore desir'd, since the Vessel was very old, not being fit to stay there, that she might go away with him; but if this could not be granted, he would be obedient, and press no farther, but leave her be∣hind. Whereupon his Highness in excuse said they had contriv'd to dismiss all the Ships together, but the Mansjuwee would not consent till they had an An∣swer from Peking.

The Ambassador also ask'd a second time if they would please to dismiss them all from Lamthay. Whereupon his Highness answer'd him, That the Am∣bassador should not trouble himself about the Ship, for he would take care that it should be furnish'd with all Necessaries; nay, if the Emperor would not be at the Charge, he would pay it out of his own Purse; asking besides, if the Person that came with the Chineses from Quelang was at Lamthay? To which being answer'd, He was, he said that he would consult with the General if any others should stay, or all have their Pasport.

Then the Ambassador demanded if he might not deal for some fine Porce∣lane or Tee? To which his Highness first answer'd as if he permitted it; but afterwards beginning to retract, he chang'd his Discourse, beginning to en∣quire how many Men they had, that thereby they might the better accom∣modate them with Provision: which said, the Ambassador took his leave, and went away.

Coming into the outer Court, he found the Mandarin Liulavja, whom he ask'd if he should now go to the Assensy? To which he was answer'd, No, be∣cause he had not been Entertain'd by the Conbon; but he must go to the Gene∣ral's Court the next Morning.

After this Nobel acquainted the Ambassador, that he had spoke with Lapora and one of Singlamong's Factors, about Bartering for Silk, and that Lapora had told him the Vice-Roy would deliver Silk to the Netherlanders at Tenhay, pro∣vided they would leave Money for Security at Hoksieu.

The twenty fourth in the Morning the Ambassador went to the General, into whose Presence he was brought, after a stay of half an hour in the Court; being plac'd by him, the General said, That the Embassy now was compleat, and he might depart when he pleas'd; for he had receiv'd a Letter from the Emperor, in which he was commanded not to detain, but to dispatch him so soon as possible; so that his Excellency had already stay'd beyond the limited time. To which the Ambassador answer'd, He would now therefore endea∣vor to part in Friendship, and as he had said before, be gone by the twelfth of that instant Moon, which if his Highness judg'd too long, he would go sooner: who straight reply'd, That if the Ambassador went away by that time, it would be very well; but he must carry no Silk-Stuffs with him, because they were Counterband Goods: yet the Ambassador being come a remote Journey, he granted him to carry Porcelane, and the like Trifles; for which he return'd thanks: which pleasing his Highness, he said, That he knew not of the Am∣bassador's coming, which if he had, he would have prepar'd something for his Entertainment; but however he hop'd he would accept of a Collation at his Lodgings. Then the Ambassador thanking his Highness, and seeing that the General did not make mention of the Overveens stay, said (as he had done the day before to the Conbon,) That the Toucies had told him, that the Ship which was come with the Renegade Chineses from Quelang, and likewise the Company that Mann'd it must stay there; therefore the Ambassador desir'd, if it were

possible, that the Ship might go along with him. The General having consi∣der'd a little answer'd, That the Ship must stay; but if his Lordship would leave any body at Lamthay, was in his own choice: After some Discourse con∣cerning it, the Ambassador said, That if his Highness would please to credit him, it was all one to him whether he left any one at Lamthay or not.

Mean while the Conbon coming thither went first into a private Chamber, and a little while after plac'd himself by the General. Then the Ambassador began again to speak of the staying of the Ship: To which the General an∣swer'd, The Ambassador need not be afraid, he would take care concerning the Vessel, that nothing of any harm should befall the Hollanders. Which An∣swer satisfying the Ambassador, he deliver'd such another List of the remain∣ing Goods that were to be sold, and his Presents, as the day before he had done to the Conbon; after which taking his leave he departed.

In the Afternoon the General's Interpreter came to tell the Ambassador, That the General, Conbon, and Manichuer would come in Person to the Lodge to search the Goods.

In the Evening it was resolv'd, since the General had put it to the Ambassa∣dor's choice, to leave any of his People there or not, to leave none; but if any farther mention should be made, to pretend as if they would willingly leave some there, because it was known that the Tartars always did contrary to the Hollanders Desires: Moreover that Nobel should the next Morning go to the Poutsiensy and Assensy, and proffer them each their several Presents; and be∣cause they had ask'd to buy some Blood Coral, Nobel should take two Strings along with him, and ask but an ordinary Rate for them.

The twenty fifth Nobel, according to the Resolution taken the day before, went with the Presents to the Poutsiensy and Assensy, to deliver them the two Strings of Coral; and at his Return related, That they had receiv'd the Pre∣sents with many thanks, and the Strings of Coral at a certain Price.

Mean while the Mandarin Liulavja came to the Lodge, saying that the Gene∣ral would not come that day, but the following Morning to see the Goods, and that the Ambassador might Ship off all his bulky Commodities. Concern∣ing the China Root which the Ambassador had requested to carry out, the Ge∣neral would permit him to Transport but six Picol. The Ambassador, accord∣ing to the Mandarins Request, Shipp'd of all his great Goods, but said, that if the General would not grant him to carry more than six Picol, he would not trouble himself with any.

The twenty sixth the Ambassador Shipp'd the Money, and all such Goods as could not be sold, and likewise their travelling Necessaries.

The Poutsiensy and Assensy came to the Lodge with some Grand Mandarins, to thank the Ambassador for the Presents which he had sent them, and withal to tell him, That all those who had Chests or Trunks in the Barques, must go to the Bridge to open them, because the Conbon was there in Person to see them, which accordingly was done. Nobel and some others going thither, at their Return said, That the Conbon causing some Chests to be carry'd into the Gover∣nor of Minjazen's House, had open'd and search'd them there, and also look'd upon several Gifts which the Emperor had presented them with; which not satisfying, he went Aboard the Blyswiik Frigat, and open'd all the Chests there one after another, yet found nothing of any Counterband Goods. Then he said that the Ship which was come from Quelang should stay there, and that the Governor of Minjazen would tell the Netherlanders when they came thither,

whether Balfour should remain there or not. To which Nobel answer'd him, That he would acquaint the Ambassador with it: Whereupon taking his leave, the Blyswiik at his going away fir'd three Guns.

Because the Ambassador could not come to the Vice-Roy Singlamong the two last days, in regard he was told that the General, Conbon, and Manchuwer, would come to the Lodge to search his Goods, and that it was now done the day be∣fore by the Conbon onely, the Ambassador, Nobel, and Harthouwer went thither the twenty sixth in the Morning to take their leaves; where he was no sooner come, but had Audience immediately granted, and soon after dispatch'd; so that the Netherlanders took their leave without urging a word of any thing. Returning to the Lodge, they found the Toucy Liulavja, who hastned their de∣parture, because the limited time was already expir'd: Whereupon all things that were yet ashore were put into the Vessels, and they likewise Embarqu'd themselves to be gone at High-water.

In the Evening the old Conbon's Factor came to deliver the Ambassador twenty four Pieces of Silk-Stuffs, which he said were left him by his Lord to give to his Excellency, being half for himself, and the other half for the Lord Maetzuiker: These Stuffs the Ambassador gave to several Persons.

Not long after the Chinese Secretary Soukjen brought a written Order from the General, that Balfour must stay behind. To which the Ambassador an∣swer'd, That so soon as they were Aboard the Blyfwiik Frigat, he would speak with the Mandarins about it.

In the Afternoon the Netherlanders arriv'd Aboard the Blyswiik, into which upon the Mandarins command all the Goods were Shipp'd out of the Barques, because the Mansjuwer (of whom they were very fearful) should not see, nor search the Goods a second time; which was accordingly perform'd on a sud∣den: but the Provisions they permitted to lie somewhat longer in the Barques, that the Cattel might the better be preserv'd alive, because the Ship was so full.

The twenty eighth in the Morning some Mandarins coming to the Barques with Provisions, caus'd all things that were in them to be thrown into the Ship, by which means a great many of the Cattel dy'd; all which the Nether∣landers endur'd with patience, stowing their Goods as well as they could.

Soon after the Hollanders set Sail with a fair Wind, and a Tyde of Ebb, which coming stronger in the Afternoon, they got within a quarter of a League from the Losantat or great Tower, where they came to an Anchor; which was no sooner done but several Mandarins came Aboard them, saying that Balfour must stay, and not go from thence before an Answer came from the Emperor. To which the Ambassador answer'd, That the General had left the staying of Balfour to his choice, on which he rely'd, therefore did not believe the Manda∣rins. Moreover, as to what concern'd the Ship, they should believe him, that she should stay there on condition they would furnish her with Provisions; which if they would not do, she should go. The Mandarins us'd many argu∣ments to perswade the Ambassador to let Balfour, or some Person else stay in his stead: But the Ambassador not varying from his first Resolution, they took their leaves.

The twenty ninth the Netherlanders weighing Anchor again, drove with the Tyde of Ebb by the great Tower and Fort of Minjazen, where they found them all up in Arms. Some Batsiangs coming from the Shore call'd to the Ne∣therlanders to come to an Anchor: but they not hearkning to them, went on;

[illustration]

just before they pass'd the Fort, the third Person of Minjazen came by the side of the Ship in a small Champan, to tell the Ambassador that the Governor would fain speak with him. To which he answer'd, Tha•…•… when he was come to Netherland Haven, the Governor might come and speak with him there when he pleas'd; with which Answer they went away again, not bringing word when he would come or not.

Moreover, besides several sorts of other Vessels (as is at large related in the Description) most of the Rivers are Navigated by Champan and Batsiangs, which are small Vessels. They rise up round with a broad Head; the Stern is not joyn'd together, but on the top is separated; between which a Mat holds an Oar, wherewith he makes swift Way; the middle is cover'd with a Mat of Rushes: He which Steers (as represented in the Sculp) is Habited in a Coat made of Coco Leaves, and he in the Head hath a kind of Umbrella on his Head against the Rain.

The Chineses also keep great Feasts in their Vessels on the River, making Merry with varieties of Meat and strong Liquor; in which manner the great∣est Mandarins often recreate themselves, but in bigger Boats than the common People use, with a fine Covering over them, on each end of which stands gene∣rally a Man with a crooked Horn.

Against the Evening the Tyde of Ebb being spent, they dropt Anchor about half a League from the Overueen Frigat, lying in Netherland Haven; whither the Ambassador immediately sent his Sloop, with Orders for her Boat to come and take out some of the Cattel, and likewise that the Sloop should go to the rest of the Ships to hasten their Boats to fetch Provisions.

In the Evening the Overveens Boat coming thither, they loaded her full of living Cattel, with which they sent her again Aboard.

The thirtieth about Noon they drove with the Tyde Ebb through the se∣cond Strait, and coming within a Cannon Shot of the Overveen they ran aground on the Point of the Western Shoal in Netherland Haven; from whence getting

[illustration]

off again, about Midnight at high Water they came to an Anchor close by the Overveen.

The first of December nothing hapned.* 29.2

The second, the Ambassador hoping to put off some more of their Goods, wrote the following Letter to the General at Hoksieu, viz.

The Hollanders have sufficiently testifi'd their Reality; and the Ambassador esteems nothing more than to shew, that what he hath promis'd to Talavja may be perform'd. Your Lordship hath been pleas'd to command, that the Ship from Quelang, and the Com∣mander Balfour should stay here till an Answer came from Peking; now the Ambassador desires to know how long the Ship must stay. Besides, since his coming hither he hath found some Goods, viz. Blood Coral, Amber, Cloth, and other Merchandise, brought in the Ships from Batavia, and likely to be carry'd back again thither, unless Your Lordship will be pleas'd this one time to give leave to sell them, because they were included in this Chinkon. The Ambassador hopes that the Emperor's Letters to the Lord Maetzuiker will bring him good tydings, therefore he could not but acquaint Talavja herewith, and desire his Answer upon it, especially having seen by some Letters which he found in the Ships, that the General of Batavia might be mov'd to deliver the Castle of Quelang to the Emperor, if he would grant the Hollanders a free Trade in China.

Nobel and the Secretary Vander Does were sent to the Chinese Jonks lying in the Crab-hole, to enquire if there were none Aboard that could Translate the fore-mention'd Letter, and deliver it to the General, which if there were they should leave it with them. But their coming amongst the Jonks caus'd great amazement amongst them, neither could they be accommodated; so they went to the Jonks which lay within the second Strait, where finding some Manda∣rins and a Secretary with them, they did their Business according to their desire.

This Letter being Translated Nobel sent with a Batsiang up to Hoksieu, with promise to return with an Answer within two days; so that the Ambassador judg'd it convenient to stay so long with the Blyswiik in Netherland Haven.

The third in the Morning, the Mandarins of the Jonks came aboard the Bleis∣wyk, saying, That they durst not carry the Letter which Nobel had given them the day before, except a Hollander went with them to Hoksieu: Whereupon, the Ambassador answer'd, That if they would not deliver the Letters, they knew what they had to do; if any thing other than well did come of it, it was not his fault.

This, startling, made them change their resolution, asking if they should deli∣ver the Letter, and the General should desire, that a Hollander should come to him, if the Ambassador would then promise them to send one thither, of which they would willingly be assur'd, that they might give his Highness a positive answer.

The Ambassador, after serious consideration, judg'd it convenient to an∣swer, That they should Request of the Governor of Minjazeen, in the Ambassa∣dor's Name, if he would please to send any one with that Letter to the Sontok, and if they had an answer upon it, and that Talavja Commanded, that an Hollan∣der should come to him, that then they would consider of it; with which an∣swer going away, they took the Letter with them.

The fourth, it was thought meet by the Ambassador and his Councel, since they had nothing more to do there, only to wait for News from above, to set Sail for Tinghay, to make all things ready there; but Nobel was order'd to stay there with the Overveen, that if any News should come from Hoksieu, he might inform the Ambassador of it, and give such Orders as should be requisite.

In the Afternoon the Ambassador fell down with the Bleiswyk to the first Straight, behind the Pyramids, where they dropp'd Anchor till the next Ebb, but were forc'd by a strong Gale out of the North-East, to remove beyond the first Shole, and wait for better Weather.

The fifth in the Night, the Bleiswyk set Sail again with a Northerly Wind and Ebbing Water; and getting beyond the Calf Sands, came on the seventh in the Morning, by Day-light, before Sotias Bay, within the Turrets Isles, that in the Afternoon, with a Sea breeze, he might put into the Bay of Tinghay.

Having cast Anchor, the Ambassador went with the Bleiswyk's Sloop aboard the Victoria, to stay and go over in her.

Here it was judg'd convenient, that Nobel and Putmans, with the Ship Bata∣via, and Harthouwer, and Bartolz with the Crane, if no other News came from Hoksieu, should set Sail for Batavia.

In the Afternoon, the Bleiswyk Frigat came also to Tinghay, where the Am∣bassador immediately unladed part of her, distributing the Provisions and Mo∣ney amongst the Ships Victoria, Batavia, and Crane, that so he might not run the hazard of all in one Ship.

The eighth in the Afternoon, the Overveen's Boat arriv'd at Tinghay from Netherland Haven, with a Letter from Nobel, Dated the Night before, the Con∣tents of which were:

That two Commanders had been aboard him, with a Letter from the Ge∣neral of Hoksieu, to the Governor of Minjazeen, of which he had sent the Tran∣slation Inclos'd.

The Superscription they could not give to Nobel, for want of some to write it; the Povi, as they said, had accounted himself too good to answer the Am∣bassador, but had writ to the Governor of Minjazeen, not expecting any fur∣ther answer from the Ambassador, as might be seen by the last Clause.

To the Proposal of Quelang, he had sent no manner of answer, But that the

Lord General, according to the foremention'd Commanders sayings, must the ensuing Year write himself to the Emperor, concerning that or the like business.

And in like manner, about the selling of the Merchandize, as appears by the second Clause; by which they may plainly see, that the Ships with their Mer∣chandize must be gone again, which was strongly affirm'd by the third Clause, as appears by the Translation.

In the Translation, no mention was made in how many days an answer would be there from Peking, as the Ambassador had desir'd to know; besides, no body came to look after the Overveen, to furnish her with Provisions, which they had so faithfully promis'd, and to his judgment there was no staying for it: The Tydes and Weather were good, which with the approaching New Moon, according to the general course of that season, might turn to be bad and tempestuous.

Therefore he expected the Ambassador's Order, whether the Overveen should stay longer in Netherland Haven, or go to Tinhay: The foremention'd Transla∣tion written by the General of Hoksieu, to the Governor of Minjazeen, was to this effect.

• I. THe Povi hath receiv'd the Letter from the Holland Ambassador, wherein he de∣sir'd to know, how many days Balfour should lie there with his Ship: My Answer thereupon is, that he shall stay till Order comes from the Emperor.
• II. The Foreign Commodities are forbid by the Emperor to be sold, therefore I cannot grant the Ambassadors Request; but when the Lord General shall send Letters the following Year, then I will write to the Emperor about it.
• III. According to the Emperor's Command, it is not well done, that the Ambassador stays so long, because it will not be good for their business the ensuing Year, when they would come thither again.
• IV. Lastly, I Command you to deliver this Letter to the Ambassador, and to acquaint me so soon as he is gone from our Coast: Hereupon I expect a speedy Answer.

Nobel's writing concerning the Overveen, being by the Ambassador and his Councel consider'd on, it was judg'd convenient to send for the Frigat to Tinghay.

Therefore the Ambassador inform'd Nobel, that he had receiv'd his Letter with the Translation, and thereby understood, that Povi had answer'd very slightly concerning Balfours and the Overveens staying, without being able to depend upon it; their hopes of venting their Merchandize, was also now quite vanish'd, so that he resolv'd, and had found it convenient to send for the Overveen to Tinghay, because the Governors did not keep their promise in fur∣nishing her with Provisions.

If the Chineses should ask him the reason of the Ships going away, he should answer them, that it should lie under Tinghay, so long as they had any Provisi∣ons left whereby he might see if they intended to keep her there any longer, and govern himself accordingly.

Theninth nothing happen'd of remark.

The tenth, three Chinese Jonks that came out of the North Sail'd by the Am∣bassador in the Victoria, up the Channel of Hoksieu. In the Afternoon No∣bel arriv'd at Tinghay in the Overveen, and having dropt Anchor, he went aboard of the Ambassador, to tell him, That the eighth instant in the Evening,

some petty Officers were come aboard from the Chinese Jonks, to ask when the Ambassador would set Sail, and Nobel go from thence with the Frigat? To which he had answer'd, That the Ambassador would leave that place with the first fair Weather, and that he would be gone from thence with the Overveen the next Morning, with which they seeming to be pleas'd, took their leave.

The twelfth, it was resolv'd in Councel, upon the Ambassador's Proposal on the seventeenth instant, if good Weather, to set Sail for Batavia, without urging the Governors any more to permit them to Trade, because they saw, by all Circumstances, that no good was to be done there that year.

The fourteenth, the Overveen Frigat set Sail by Siam to Batavia, according to their resolution taken on the twelfth: Soon after her departure, two Chinese Coya's came to Tinghay, where some Officers coming to the Ambassador said, That they were sent by the Governor of Minjazeen, to enquire when the Ambas∣sador would be gone: Who answering, said, That he had been indispos'd, or else he would have been gone e're that time, but that he resolv'd three or four days hence to set Sail from Tinghay.

Moreover, the Ambassador told them, that it was very strange to him, that no advice came from Peking, about the coming of the Ships, because he had ac∣quainted the Lipous, that he expected Ships to come to Hoksieu with Merchan∣dize, and also to fetch him, and that the Lipous had answer'd him, that so soon as they receiv'd advice from the General, they would consult, and give Order concerning it: But since no order was come from the Lipous, it was a sign that the General or Governor of Minjazeen had not yet written about it to Peking; and considering he had inform'd the Lipous of it himself, they would resent it very ill, when they should hear of the Ships being there, and they were not acquainted with it, and serve this General and the Governor of Minjazeen, as the former General had been; for it would be a business of great Consequence, to let the Ambassador go away with three such deep laden Vessels. Hereupon the Officers making no reply, said, That if the Ambassador did stay some days longer, that several Mandarins would come to him in great Jonks from the Ge∣neral in Hoksieu: To which the Ambassador reply'd, That they, and who e're else came, should be welcome to him, and receiv'd as friends, desiring that they would acquaint the Governor of Minjazeen with what he had said; which they promising to do, ask'd to know the day on which the Ambassador would de∣part, which he said, would be the third from that, and if any one came to him in the interim, it was well, but if none came, he would assuredly be gone; with which answer they return'd.

The fifth in the Morning, the Netherlanders saw four Jonks, and two Coya's coming out of the Channel of Hoksieu, which the next Morning were seen about the Wood-Bay, where they stood to and again without coming nearer to the Ships: But the Coya's came close to them, out of one of which, a Servant be∣longing to the Governor of Minjazeen, came in a Champan or small Boat aboard the Ambassador, sent to him from his Master, to enquire concerning his Ex∣cellency's Health, and when he would set Sail; and said moreover, that the Po∣vi had writ to the Emperor, that the Ambassador went away from thence the twelfth of the last Moon, and now it was publickly known, that his Excellency was not yet gone; therefore he came to know the certain time, when the Am∣bassador would set Sail, and withal, to tell him, that if he intended to stay any longer, he should go and lie between the Isles, without the sight of the main Land; and to declare his mind, whether he would be gone, or not. To which

the Ambassador answer'd, That he would set Sail from thence, but that the General and Governor of Minjazeen might perhaps answer for it, that they let the Ambassador go away with three such deep laden Vessels; with which an∣swer, the Servant took his leave.

When the Netherlanders saw that the Jonks which kept without shot from them, made into the Channel again with their Coya's, they according to their resolution taken on the twelfth, made Preparations to set Sail for Batavia.

The seventeenth in the Morning, the Ambassador set Sail with four Ships, viz. the Victoria, Batavia, Crane, and Bleiswyk, from the ruin'd City Tinghay; and Steering his Course East-South-East, between the Turret-Isles, close by the Island Naerd, and about Midnight, guessing themselves to be past the Rough-Isle, they Steer'd South-West and by West: In the middle of the Morning-Watch, the Wind began to rise, and the next day prov'd very Stormy, when as they sup∣pos'd they saw the Isle of Quemuy; as the following day they judg'd from their Soundings, that they were near the Sandy Banks.

The twentieth, passing the Makaw Islands, they Steer'd their Course to the Isle of Ainan, which was descry'd on the two and twentieth, having Tinhosa about Noon, two Leagues and a half Northward from them.

The Ambassador having been indispos'd for some days, and beginning daily to grow weaker, by reason of the hollow Seas, and small Breezes, which made the Ship roul much, he sent the Bleiswyk on the twenty fourth to the Overveen and Crane, to tell them, that they should keep together, and he would with the Bleis∣wyk go before to the Island Pulo Timaon, where he would stay for them.

In the Evening, there being a Serene Sky, the Ambassador saw the Moun∣tain of Sinesecuwe on his side, and in the Morning the Cape Avarelles Valze. The Wind being at North-East, and their Course along the shore South and by West, and South-South-West, they came in the Evening up with the Point of Holland▪ from whence they Steer'd South-West and by South, to raise Paul Can∣dor, which Isle they saw in the West, on the six and twentieth in the Afternoon; and the next Evening, Anchor'd behind the Goats Horns, where the Crane also arriv'd the following day.

The last of October, the Batavia Frigat arriv'd at the South-East side of Paulo Timaon, but the Wind shrinking, she was forc'd to drop Anchor half a League from that wherein the Ambassador was aboard.

Here the Ambassador gave Order to take the Silver out of the Victoria and Crane, and put it into the Bleiswyk again, and likewise sent his Sloops to the Batavia, to fetch the Silver out of her: Whereupon, the Bleiswyk was according to their Excellencies Order in Batavia, sent with all the Silver, Gold, and other Commodities to Malakka, to the Governor Balthazar Bort, to be sent from thence to Bengale.

The Ambassador inform'd him by Letters, that he was receiv'd with all kindness at the Court in Peking, and left the same with much Honor and Friend∣ship; but could not inform him, what was obtain'd by this Embassy, because the Emperor had sent his Letters Seal'd to the Lord General; but that it was certain, that for the future they should Trade in Canton, and not in Hoksieu; in the removal of which, if all things else were well, he found little trouble.

The first of Ianuary, the Fleet left Paulo Timaon, and in the Afternoon, the* 30.1 Bleiswyk taking leave of the Fleet, steer'd her Course to the Streights of Sinkka∣pura. In the Evening, the Ambassador saw Pulo Aura, a League and a half North-East from him.

The second in the Morning, he stemm'd the Mountain Monapyn; and on the third had Pulo Lingen on his Stern.

The fourth, entring the Streights of Banka, he arriv'd on the seventh before Batavia, where the Ambassador deliver'd the Emperor's Seal'd Letter to the Lord General, and gave him an account of all his Adventures.

Thus having brought the Embassy out of China to Batavia, we will return thither again, and declare what properly concerns the Chineses, and their Coun∣trey; and first begin with their Entertainments and Diet.

Feasts, or Entertainments.

THe Chineses, according to Alvarez Semedo, spend most of their time in Feasting, with extraordinary Costs and Charges. On the meeting of Friends, and good success in any Business, they prepare a Feast; and some∣times also in Troubles and Adversities, in which they come to comfort each other; nay, at Entertainments, are the Consultations of the Chineses, advising with one another at Meals what they shall take in Hand.

This is the usual life of the Common People, and especially of Handicrafts∣men, which are divided into Companies, which they call Mane, because in eve∣ry Company are thirty Masters, (as many as there are days in a Month) which make a Feast every day by turns.

If they have not Conveniencies in their own Houses, they may hire publick Halls, in which are all manner of Necessaries, being built for that purpose; or if they will keep their Feasts in their own Houses, without any further trouble, then they only set down the number of the Persons, Guests, and Re∣tinue, and what Dishes they will please to order, which are punctually serv'd in, according to the Bill of Fare.

The Northern Chineses differ much in their Customs from the Southern, who are in general, more civiliz'd than the other.

The Southern Chineses, in their Feasts esteem of a Quelque-chose, or of Minc'd Meats and Hashes, more than great Joynts and standing Dishes, entertain∣ing more upon the score of good Society than Debauches; yet they will do their parts well at their Trencher, and as sufficiently at the turning off their Glasses: They are entertain'd with Wine before Dinner, of which they take and taste till they refuse; then they fall to their Rice, and neither speak nor Drink till pretty well satisfi'd.

The manner of the Northern Chineses is quite otherwise, for they are not Ce∣remonious nor Complemental, but delight in well-fill'd Tables, with great and full Dishes.

After the usual Ceremony which is observ'd through all China, they begin first with Eating, every one taking as much as he can on his Trencher, of what he likes best, which they eat without Drinking.

Rice is their Banquet.

After Meals, they spend an hour in talking, which ended, they seat them∣selves again, at Tables fill'd with Potation-Dishes, and Salt-Meats, as Gam∣mons of Bacon, dry'd Tongues, and the like, which they do not without cause call Ushers, or Vehiculums, preparers of the way, that the Tope may the better go down; for they no sooner take a Relishing Bit, but a lusty Go∣down follows.

They keep their Breakfasts at seven a Clock in the Morning, and their Din∣ners at five in the Afternoon, but drink no Wine at either: Only at Night, at a light Supper of relishing Meat, they give themselves full liberty and fresh scope of good Fellowship; therefore their Feasts are Nocturnal, spending the Day upon their serious, either Business, Exercise, or Studies.

In the Winter Nights they use Candles made of Oyl mix'd with Wax, but their Summer Lights are of three sorts of Wax, one of Bees, another of certain Snakes, which is very white, and the third comes from a Tree call'd Kieujeu, but that is not so good as our European, yet much better than our Tallow, and their Candles likewise exceed ours.

Persons of Quality make great Preparations for their Feasts, Erecting Ban∣queting Houses for that purpose, both in the Cities, and at their Countrey Houses, furnish'd with Pictures and other Rarities: And though the use of Hangings be very rare, yet if those that are invited to a Feast be Officers or Noblemen, they furnish their Houses with Tapestry, from the top to the bot∣tom: The number of Tables is a testimony of the greatness of their Enter∣tainment: They generally place no more than four Persons at a Table; but at very grand Meetings, every Guest hath a peculiar and sometimes two Ta∣bles, one to sit at, and the other to set away his empty Dishes.

The Tables are neither cover'd with Clothes nor Napkins, but Varnish'd with the Wax of the Gum call'd Cie: They use no Knives, for all their Meat, except Eggs, Fish, and the like, is brought before them ready Hash'd: Neither use they Forks nor Spoons, but two small Sticks two handfuls long, with which they very dexterously and neatly take up their Meat; nay, put a single Corn of Rice, either raw or boyl'd to their Mouth, without letting it fall. They never put Salt, Pepper, nor Vinegar or Verjuice amongst their Meat, but Mu∣stard and the like Ingredients, which they Compound with extraordinary Art, having several of them of a curious relish.

Their common Dishes are Flesh and Fish, boyl'd, or broyl'd on Grid-Irons, and fry'd in Pans, with variety of Sauces, not unpleasing to the Palate.

Their Pottages, of which they are great lovers, are never made without either Flesh or Fish.

The Emperor Che, who began his Reign before the Birth of our Saviour, Anno 1150. first us'd Sticks of Ivory to Eat with, and Ivory Dishes; but these Sticks are not always made of Ivory, but sometimes of Ebony, or some other such like Materials, and tipt only at the ends, with which they touch the Meat, with Silver or Gold; yet the Inhabitants of the Counties Iunningfu, in the Pro∣vince of Iunnan, a Rustick and Salvage People, use not the foremention'd Sticks, but put the Meat into their Mouths, sooping it down by whole handfuls.

The Chineses sit at their Tables, on high and artificial wrought Stools, and not cross-Legg'd like the Tartars.

Anciently they us'd neither Stools nor Tables, but sat on the Ground cross-Legg'd, after the same manner as most of the Asiatick and African People yet do, insomuch, that they have but one Character for a Table and a Carpet.

Tables were first brought in use among the Chineses, near the Raign of the Emperor Han, which ever since they have observ'd, and have them and their Stools very curious.

They use many Ceremonies, as well in the middle, as in the beginning o•…•… ending of their Feasts: The Master of the House, as their Taster, first sitting down, when he hath taken a Morsel and tasted the Liquor, then recommend∣ing,

invites his Friends to sit down, and do the like. In the middle of their Feast they change their small Dishes into great, and all present, Masters, and whatsoever, have the freedom of drinking what they please, but none inforc'd to more.

Persons of Quality make Feasts when they return from a Journey, and it often happens, that one Man will go to seven or eight Feasts in a day, only to oblige his Friends by his Presence. When they have time, they send some days before Letters to peculiar Friends, desiring them to come to their Feasts, which if they cannot, being otherwise ingag'd, then they excuse themselves again by a Letter, and they put off their Feasts till they can come; with which they ac∣quaint them by another Letter, call'd A Letter of Request: At the day appoint∣ed, those that are there first, stay without in a Hall till all the rest are come, then they go into the Dining-Room, where the Master of the House using some Ceremonies, puts all things in a readiness, which done every one seats himself according to his Quality; and the Invitor sits down in State, to animate his Guests to Eat and Drink: They sit a lo•…•…g while at Table; for besides their Discourses, they have Musick and Comedians, who strait Personate whatever they call for or desire.

Their Feasts end in many Complements, which the Guests make to the Master, to whom they send a Letter the next Morning, extolling the noble Entertainment, and all things thereto belonging, and hearty thanks for the ho∣nor which they receiv'd by it.

The Chineses, as Trigaut witnesseth, eat all manner of Dainties which we have in Europe, and very well know how to dress and prepare them, but they bring but very little of a sort to their Tables; for they account the glory of their Feast to consist in the variety of Petits and Hotch-potches: neither do they eat Flesh and Fish apart, as we, but mix them together.

Moreover, no manner of Meat being once put on the Table is taken away till Dinner is ended; wherefore they not onely fill the Tables, setting one Dish by another, but heap them up like their own Turrets. No Bread nor Rice is set on the Table before the Guests, except at some small Feasts, or to∣wards the latter end; if there be, then they drink no Wine, for the Chineses drink not any before Rice.

They have also several Games at their Feasts, like ours, where every one that loseth is forc'd to take up his Cup, at which all the rest rejoyce and clap their Hands.

The Chineses are very mannerly at Meals, and keep their Dinners early. Mushroms they account a great Dainty, sending for them from the Mountain Tienno, lying in the County of Hancheufu, belonging to the Province of Chekiang, near the small City Lingan. They are carry'd through all China, and being Salt∣ed and dry'd last good a whole year: They steep them first in Water before they boyl them, by which means they become as fresh again as when first gather'd.

In no place in all China is more Butter and Milk us'd than in the City of* 30.2 Sucheu, in the Province of Nanking; for Martinius relates, that he saw none in any place else.

The Inhabitants of this City exceed the other Chineses in preparing their Meats with Sugar, Salt, Vinegar, Wine, and Herbs.

The Inhabitants of the twelfth County Xunningfu, in the Province of Iunnan, a salvage People, stick not to eat, according to the foremention'd Martinius, all manner of Creatures that are not venomous.

The People of the fourth Territory Chingvenfu, in the Province of Queicheu, have no Salt, but use the Ashes of an Herb call'd Kine in stead thereof.

Amongst those of the Province Kiangsi are some, which all the year long ga∣ther up the Bones of dead Cattel, and lay them in Porcelane Dishes at their Feasts, to fill up their empty Platters, that their Dishes may be heap'd one upon another, according to the Custom of the Countrey.

Marriages and Matrimonial Ceremonies.

THree thousand years since to this day, according to an inviolable Law, Marriages have been observ'd in China. Antiently they us'd many Ce∣remonies in Betrothing each other; and amongst others, to give their Hands as we do; but most of them are chang'd, some quite extinguish'd, and others new. At this day they observe two kinds of Marriages, one firm, as with us, not to be dissolv'd but by the Death of one or both. In this the Woman is con∣ducted with many Ceremonies to her Husbands House. The second is a kind of Concubinate, yet suffer'd by that Countrey amongst such as have no Chil∣dren; but that limitation is a meer pretence, for the Rich take Concubines or Mistresses, without any scruple, though they have several Children.

In this the Betrothing differs much from that of a true and lawful Marri∣age; for here they Treat with the reputed Father or Fosters of a Maiden, which in truth having no Relation, but have onely brought them up with intent to sell them to the first amorous Chapman. But to speak properly this is no Mar∣riage, because neither any Promises, nor Matrimonial Ceremonies pass be∣tween them; for the Law of the Countrey permit all Women to take any other Man, if the first hath put her off. Besides, these Concubines eat apart by themselves in peculiar Rooms, and are under obedience of the lawful Wives, being at their Command as Servants on all occasions: Neither do their Chil∣dren shew that obedience to them, as those of the lawful Wives do, neither call them by the Name of Mother. At their Death those Children which are born of them, are not oblig'd to Mourn three years, nor desist from their Study, nor leave their Employment or Government, as the legitimate Issue do at their Fa∣thers or Mothers Death.

At the Man's Decease the legal Wife and Children possess the Estate in common; but if the Wife die, the Concubine still remains with the Husband, and so do the Children if she hath any.

There are some that take Mistresses onely to beget Sons; whom when grown and mature, if the lawful Wife do not affect, they are sent abroad, or else Marry'd to some other; yet the Child that is thus Begotten and Born, acknowledges no other Mother than the true and lawful Wife.

Widows are permitted to Marry if they please; but modest and chaste Wo∣men seldom do, though young and without Children, but live retir'd in their Father-in-laws House, for which they are highly esteem'd.

In lawful Marriages they commonly observe the Constitutions, Qualities, Conditions, and Likeness of the Persons; but in the other they look onely upon Beauty and Breeding.

None, according to their Laws, may Marry their Fathers Relation, in what Degree soever, nor with a Person of the same Name, but freely with their Mothers Friends, though never so near Ally'd.

A Virgin seldom Marries a Widower, they being call'd, The Bed and Plea∣sure of the House.

No Marriages are Contracted without a Procurator, though they have been never so great Friends; to which purpose one is chosen out of the number of those Men and Women who folllow no other Trade.

The Bridegroom never sees his Bride but at the going in of the Door, where he receives her as his Wife.

The Fathers bestow their Children in Marriage when they are very young, and sometimes in their Infancy, nay before they are Born, whether Male or Female: Their Promises in this kind are faithfully perform'd, notwithstand∣ing the Father dies before the time, except one of the betrothed happens to be defam'd and lose his Estate, or both Parties disagree. If the Son for some pri∣vate Reasons will not perform his Fathers Commands, he may be forc'd to it by the Laws of the Countrey.

No mention is made of the Bride or Bridegrooms Portion till their Fathers Death.

Amongst Persons of meaner Quality it is not customary to buy Women, but onely they give their Brides Father a piece of Money to buy her Garments and Attires, according to their Capacity; from whence perhaps some have averr'd by mistake that the Chineses buy their Wives.

Persons of Quality never speak of the Brides Portion, because her Father is oblig'd by the Laws of the Countrey to do what he can, and to provide them Housholdstuff from the Door (as they say there) to the top of the Chimney, except the Bed; all which seldom amounts to above fifty Crowns, so low a Price do Goods bear in China. Besides which the Father gives his Daughter two or three Maids to wait upon her, and some Silver, but never Lands or Houses, unless he be very rich, or else Marries her to a Person of Quality, or that he hath no Heir Male himself. After they are Betrothed, with their Pa∣rents consents, then begin their Complements and Courtships: And first, the Bridegroom sends the Bride a Present of some delicate Meat, Wine, and Fruit; Secondly, the Marriage-Day is pitch'd upon by Astronomers with great Ce∣remonies; Thirdly, the Brides Name enquir'd for; Lastly, the Bridegroom must send her some Jewels, Pendants, and Precious Gems.

The day before the Bride comes home to her Husbands House, her Goods are carry'd thither from her Fathers at Noon-day by certain People employ'd for that purpose, who walk two by two, some carrying Tables, others Chests, Curtains, Hangings, and the like.

The next day, as it is customary in some Provinces, the new Marry'd Man, his Father and nearest Relations, go to seek the Bride, whom having found, they conduct home in State in a Sedan.

In other Provinces more to the South, the Man sends one in the Evening to fetch his Bride in a Sedan made for that purpose, richly Lin'd; behind fol∣low a great number of People with Torches and Lanterns.

After the Mother hath done the last Offices for her that she shall do as a Maid, and bid her farewel, then she is lock'd up in the Sedan, and the Key sent before to her Husbands Mother. As she goes along, the nearest Relations walk before, and the Servant-Maids given her by her Father, go on each side of their Mistress. When they come thither, her Mother-in-law unlocks the Sedan, and desiring her to come forth, presents her to her Husband: Which done, they both walk to a private Chappel, in which the Images of their Pre∣decessors

are erected; where having kneel'd four times, according to the Custom in those Ceremonies, they come and shew the same Reverence to their Fathers, sitting in a large Hall on Stools.

Then the Bride goes away with her Mother-in-law, Chamber-Maids, and Match-makers, into the Womens Lodgings, which are kept so strictly that none dare offer to look into them, no not the Father-in-law himself, or her own Brothers; so that when a Father will punish his Son for an Offence, which is often done notwithstanding he is Married, he is safe as in a Sanctuary, if he can but get into his Wifes Chamber, because his Father dare not come thither, nor speak with his Son's Wife, except on some extraordinary occasions, such is their care for the preservation of Modesty, and the Honor of the Women.

They are also seldom permitted to go abroad, except on necessity, and then are carry'd in a Sedan, made for that purpose, and when lock'd up, not the least Cranny through which she can peep.

The Women in their Privacies, to pass away the time, entertain themselves with little Dogs, Birds, and the like pleasers of Fancy.

A Moneth after the Marriage Day the Bride returns to her own House, which they call Queinim, that is, Returning to Rest.

All the Sons have equal shares of their Fathers Goods, and those of the Concubines as the begotten of lawful Wives; for in this case the Father is the onely Person that is consider'd: but as for the Daughters, they receive nothing but what is given them on their Marriage Day.

If the Father dies before he hath Marry'd his Daughter, then her Brothers are to provide for her; and likewise if her Father hath wasted, or given away all his Estate by Marrying of his Children, then the Brothers are oblig'd to maintain themselves.

There are some peculiar Families, whereof the eldest Inherits, notwithstand∣ing he hath several other Brothers. The Children are call'd Quecun, Chu-Hui, Heupe Cheihei.

And with many Ceremonies, as Trigaut witnesseth, they Betroth one ano∣ther, which is done by the Parents when they are in their Infancy: But one thing they chiefly observe, which is, that the Bridegroom differs not many years in the age of the Bride. This Promising or Betrothing, the Parents make between themselves, without acquainting the Children, who nevertheless al∣ways consent.

All Persons of Quality Marry with their Equals, chusing their Wives of as good Families as themselves.

As to what concerns the Concubines, which every one keeps according to his pleasure, the fairest and most beautiful are in greatest esteem, not regarding Birth or Riches; for they buy them for a hundred Ducats a piece, and sometimes less.

The common People or the Poor buy Wives for a small Sum, and sell them again when they please; but the Emperor and his Family in their Marri∣ages look onely upon the Beauty of a Person, without regarding whether she be of Royal Extraction or not: But Women of Quality shun this Choice, partly because the Emperor's Women are of no authority for their life-times, being lock'd up in the Palace, and secluded from the Eyes of all Friends and Relations; and partly because the Magistrates of Marriages chuse but few out of many to be the Emperor's lawful Wives.

The Emperor hath one prime Wife, which may onely be styl'd Empress;

[illustration]

besides which he may Marry nine other, somewhat meaner, and then thirty six more, which all bear the Title of Wives. He hath also many Concubines, which are not call'd Wives, nor were ever Betrothed, whom he picks and chu∣ses at his pleasure. Those which bring forth a Son are esteem'd the most, and accepted of best; and she who hath the first Male-Issue takes place, because he is to succeed his Father in the Throne.

This is not onely usual with the Emperor and his Family, but likewise customary through the whole Empire. The prime Wife sits with her Hus∣band at the Table, and all the rest (especially those that are not related to the Imperial Blood) are Servants to the Husbands Father, and Waiting-Maids to the lawful Wife, not daring to sit in the presence of either. The Sons acknow∣ledge not their real Mother, but the prime Matron, and Mourn onely when she dies three whole years, and follow no Employment during that time, which they mind not at the Death of their Mother which bare them.

They strictly observe that no Man Marry a Woman that hath the same Sir-name which he hath, though they are no way ally'd to one another; not in the least minding how near they are a Kin to each other, if their Names do but differ; nay, the Fathers Marry their Sons to their Mothers nearest Re∣lations.

The Bride brings no Portion with her; and though at that day when she is carry'd to the Bride-grooms House, she takes so much Housholdstuff with her, that whole Streets are stopt up with it, yet all this is bought at the Bride∣grooms Charge, who some Moneths before sends her a Sum of Money to that purpose. Thus far Trigaut.

The Houshold generally consists in Stools, Benches, Chests, and Umbrella's. Moreover, the Bride must bring the Bridegroom a Horse and Bridle, four Ser∣vant Maids, and two Boys: The Bridegroom also furnishes the Kitchin with all Provision, presents the Bride with several Pieces of Silk-Stuffs, Cotton-Cloth, and a Garland of Flowers, with a Gold Bodkin; for which she, as a

sign of her constant Love, gives him a Sute of Cloth of Gold, or rich Silk. The Bridegroom also gives to her Father a hundred, and to her Mother fifty Tail of Silver: which done, the Wedding begins, first Entertaining each other eight days in the Bridegrooms House, and three days more at the Brides.

Their Weddings are very expensive, being celebrated in great State, and ended with Comedies, Masques, Musick, and the like, to the great admiration of Strangers.

The day after the Wedding, the new Marry'd Woman is conducted in a stately manner, attended by a great number of her Friends and nearest Relati∣ons to her Husbands House, either by Water in a Pleasure▪boat, or by Land in a Sedan, or Chair. Upon the side of the Shore walk several Musicians and Singers, Playing on Instruments and Singing. Upon the Brides approach the Priests hold up at a distance some Golden Half-Moons, which they give to the Bride, wishing she may not change like the Moon, but embrace him with a pure and constant Affection: A great assurance they have of these Half-Moons, believing that as long as the Woman keeps them, she will never change her Love to her Husband.

When China was Govern'd by several Kings and Lords, they took one ano∣thers* 30.3 Daughters to Wife as in Europe: but since those Governments were uni∣ted, the Emperor hath been forc'd in his own Realm to take one or other of his Subjects Daughters, it being contrary to their Law, that the Emperor should Marry any Woman out of his own Dominions. But though the Em∣peror be so bound up, yet Persons of Quality do not willingly Marry their Daughters to him, because upon trial and dislike he may send them home again. Neither may he Betroth himself to a Maid of his Alliance; therefore they search through the whole Empire for a Virgin of twelve or fourteen years of age, beautiful, and endu'd with all manner of Vertues and Breeding, after the same manner as sacred Writ testifies they sought for Abishag the Shunamite for David, and Hester for Ahasuerus: When they have found such a one according to their liking, she is put into the custody of two Ladies of Honor, antient Matrons, who search her, to see if she hath no imperfections about her Body. When those after all their Searchings have found her faultless, she is conduct∣ed to the Court with a great Train, and being accepted as a Person which from that time belongs to the Emperor, she is shewn to his Majesty in his Palace. The Emperor after the usual Ceremonies pass'd▪ gives her as Wife to the young Prince his Son, from which instant she is the true and lawful Queen. In the Palace also they order some chaste and vertuous Women to attend her; who being endu'd with all manner of Vertues, instruct her in all Courtly Behavior, that she may justly deserve the Name of a Queen, which they call Chemu, that is, Mother of the Empire.

If we would speak of them according to their Historians, all the Empresses thus brought up, have been Women of great Merits, charitable to the Poor, very Prudent, and of quick Apprehension.

Such a one was the Daughter of a Bricklayer, who being brought to the Dignity of Empress, always kept her Father's Trowel by her; and when the Prince her Son began to grow too ambitious, she shew'd him this Trowel which her Father had us'd, whereby she brought him to Obedience.

The Maidens Relations are immediately advanc'd to high Dignity, and Places of Honor, and her House and Family afterwards accounted Rich, and of great Quality, and the more she wins upon the Emperor's Affection, the higher their Friends are rais'd.

The Marrying of the Empero's younger Sons is much after the same manner, only they use not so much care in the choyce of their Wives: but the manner of bestowing their Daughters is several; for they send for twelve young Men of seventeen or eighteen years old, the tallest and handsomest that can be found, to come to the Palace, and set them in a Place where the Princess may see them; whom having view'd, she takes peculiar notice of two; which being shewn to the Emperor, he elects one of them for his Son-in-law.

When the Emperor Vanlie, Grandfather to the Emperor Theumchin, who Reign'd about Anno 40. having two Youths brought before him on the fore∣mention'd account, saw one of them very richly Habited, and the other, though comelier, in poor Apparel, ask'd him why he was not so well Habited as his Companion? whereto he answer'd, O Emperor, the poor Estate of my Father will not permit me to appear in a better Condition: The Emperor reply'd, Because you are poor I will take you for my Son-in-law.

The other Youths are sent back again, and accounted Noble, because they were allotted to this Choyce.

The Emperor's Son-in-law hath immediately a Fumme set over him, being two Learned Mandarins of the Court to be his Tutors, and instruct him in all Princely affairs.

Till the Woman hath Children, the Man is bound to shew Reverence three times a day with bended Knees, but when she is Deliver'd of a Child this Du∣ty ceases: Yet there are many Ceremonies and Shews of Obedience that con∣tinue; for which reason Persons of Quality shun to be the Emperor's Sons-in∣law; and this Custom of chusing twelve is no more observ'd.

Is the Emperor accidentally casts his Eye on a Person of Quality, or a Learned Person, to make him his Son-in-law, they humbly desire and beg to be excus'd of it, fearing to live discontentedly all his life-time, if the Princess should take any dislike against him.

As to what concerns the Emperor's prime Wife, who is call'd by the Title of Hoamheu, which is Empress, she hath her Seat behind the Emperor: the other six, and the next in Degree, are call'd Queens, and in great esteem.

Besides these, the Emperor hath thirty Ladies of Honor, the rest being Con∣cubines, to the number of three thousand, are young and beautiful Women, brought thither from all parts of the Empire, whom the Emperor visits at his pleasure, as his Fancy leads, or their Beauty attract.

The Emperor Theumchim being a Chaste Man, they said of him, Pu yu cuin, that is, He goes not into the Palaces of Women; and some others such there have been: as on the contrary, there have been more, whose wandring Affections have been so unsatisfiable, that not pleas'd with their own Fancies to chuse a Mate, they kept a little Wagon, drawn by Goats, letting them run whither they would, and into what Chamber soever they went and stood still, there the Emperor pitch'd for his amorous Dalliance.

Another that would not take that trouble to go into the Womens Palaces, caus'd them all to be presented to him in Pictures, and her whom he lik'd best he sent for. Thus far Semedo.

The Tartar Emperor which at this day Governs, being a Youth of eighteen Years, hath twelve Empresses for his Service.

[illustration]

Funerals▪ and Mourning for the Dead.

ALl the Chinese Books which Treat of their Customs, endeavor nothing* 30.4 more than to incite Children to shew Obedience to their Parents, and Respect to their Ancestors; which they shew in nothing more than in their Fu∣nerals and Obsequies: for they not onely Habit themselves in Mourning, but bestow great Cost on a Coffin.

In the preparing for their Funerals, which may rather be call'd a glorious Show, they strive to exceed one another according to their State and Quality; nay, often go beyond their Capacity. They Mourn not in black, but White. The Sons at their Parents Death wear a course Flaxen Coat, or rather Frock, which reaches down to their Feet, their Hats and Shoes are also very pitiful to behold; and they tie a Cord about their Wastes like the Franciscan Monks. This Mourning, according to an inviolable Law, for Father or Mother is strictly observ'd by the Children three whole years, for this reason (as they say in their Books,) that they should requite their Parents, and as a testimony of thankfulness that they have carry'd them three years in their Arms, and brought them up with great trouble during their Infancy. But the time which they Mourn for other Relations is much shorter; for some leave off Mourning within the Year, others in three Moneths, as in Europe.

The lawful time to Mourn for the Emperor or Empress, is also three years, which all the Subjects observe through the whole Empire: But now upon the Emperor's permission, made known by Proclamation, Days are reckon'd for Moneths, and so the whole Realm in a Moneths time express their Sorrow for the Emperor's Death in Mourning.

The Funeral Ceremonies and Customs of the Chineses observ'd at Burials, are written in a large Book, wherefore upon any ones Decease, those that are to take care to Interr the Body repair to that, wherein their Mourning Clothes,

Shoes, Caps, Girdles, and the like, are not onely describ'd in it, but also re∣presented in Pictures.

When a Person of Quality happens to die, the Son of the Deceased, or nearest Kinsman, acquaints all the other Relations and Friends with it by a Book written in a mournful Style. Mean while the Coffin is made, and the Bo∣dy put into it, and likewise the Hall or Chamber in which the Corps stands, hung, and cover'd with white Cloth; in the middle of the Chamber is an Al∣tar, on which stands the Coffin, and the Effigies of the Deceased.

Into this Chamber on certain Days come all the Kindred of the Deceased clad in Mourning; whither they bring Rice, and setting two Wax-Candles on the Altar, burn Perfumes to the Honor of the Deceased. When the Candles are lighted, then they shew Reverence to the Dead by bowing their Bodies and Kneeling four times: but they first put Frankincense into a Perfuming Pot with Fire, which is plac'd against the Coffin and the fore-mention'd Image. Whilst these Ceremonies are performing, one or more Sons of the Deceased stand on each side of the Chest crying and lamenting; behind the Coffin all the Women of his Alliance, standing behind a Curtain, cry without ceasing. The Priests have ordain'd a Custom to burn Papers, cut after a peculiar fashion, as also white Silk-Stuffs; which is done (they say) that thereby the Deceased may be provided of Clothes in the other World.

The Children oftentimes keep their dead-Fathers and Mothers in a Coffin in the House three or four years together, without the least nauseating smell coming through the Crannies, being colour'd all over with the Gum which they call Cie. All which time they set before them every day Meat and Drink as if they were alive.

The Sons during this time of Mourning do not sit on their usual Stools, but on low Benches cover'd with white Cloth; neither do they sleep on Beds, but on Mats of Straw, spread over the Floor near the Coffin. They eat no Flesh, nor drink, but upon pure necessity, not being suffer'd to be at any Feasts, nor for some Moneths to go abroad publickly, but are carry'd in Sedans co∣ver'd with Mourning Cloth.

Many other things they observe, which would be too tedious to relate.

At the Day when the Corps is to be carry'd out, the Friends and Relations are invited by another Book, and meet all in white Apparel to attend the Fu∣neral; which is perform'd like the Romans Processioning; several Shapes of Men, Women, Elephants, Tygers, and Lyons, made of Paper, but curiously Gilt and Painted, being carry'd before, and afterwards burnt at the Grave. The Priests mumbling their Heathen Prayers, follow the Corps also in a long Train, and use several Ceremonies by the Way, beating on Drums, playing on Pipes, Cymbals, Bells, and the like. Before go likewise several Men, carrying of great Copper Perfuming-Pots on their Shoulders.

Lastly, the Bier on which the Corps lieth, is brought in great State under an Arch'd Canopy, made very artificially of Wood, and hung with Flannel, which is carry'd by forty, and sometimes by fifty Men.

Behind the Bier follow the Sons on Foot, every one leaning on a Crutch, as if fainting with sorrow. Next follow the Women Kindred in Sedans hung with white Curtains, so that none can see them. The other Women which are not so nearly Ally'd to the Deceased, are also carry'd in Mourning Sedans.

All their Curch-Yards and Tombs are near the City.

If it happen that the Sons at their Parents Deaths are from home, then the Funeral is deferr'd till their Return.

Also when a Son is inform'd of his Father's Death, he prepares, if he be a Man of an Estate, a great Feast, to which he invites, and makes mournful Complaints to all his Friends; then returning home with the first opportuni∣ty, he renews the same Ceremonies again in order as before; nay, a Son is ob∣lig'd by the Law, though he enjoy the greatest Office in the Empire, or be one of the prime Council in Peking, or of the Colaos, who is the next Person of the Emperor, yet he must come home and spend three years in Mourning, before he is permitted to go again to his former Employment.

But this is onely to be understood for their Parents, and not for any other Relations.

Onely Generals and Magistrates are free from this Law at the Death of their Parents.

If any one die out of his native Countrey, then he who is left to take care of the Corps uses all endeavors, without sparing either Cost or Charges, to carry it home, that there he may be Interr'd in the Grave of his Ancestors; for every Family hath a peculiar Burying place on some Hill in the Suburb of the City. The Sepulchres are large, built of Marble, and adorn'd with several Shapes of Men and Beasts. They also erect great and stately Tomb-stones, on which are Engraven in a noble Style the famous Acts of their Predecessors.

In this manner hath Trigaut describ'd their Mourning; but we will also an∣nex what Alvares Semedo, Adrianus de las Cortes, and Adam Scall have written con∣cerning the same.

In many things concerning the Life of Man, the Chineses agree with the Euro∣pean Philosophers, but differ much about the Concerns of the Dead. The Eu∣ropeans make little ado about their Funerals, whereas the Chineses esteem no∣thing more, and are very careful in their Life-time to give Order to their Children for them, who shew all obedience and dutifulness in performing the same after their Deaths.

It is a general Custom in China, not to bury the Dead naked, though a Child of two years old, but put it into a Coffin, according to every ones Capacity; in which the richer sort, notwithstanding the Chineses are of a covetous dispo∣sition, strive to exceed one another, endeavoring to get the best and sweetest Wood that grows.

Those that have no Children, spare not to give a thousand Crowns for the Wood of a Coffin, though it be nothing near so much worth; which being made and beautifi'd with Ornamentals of Gold, Silver, Painting, Imagery, and the like, is brought home, and oftentimes set in their Chambers to delight them by looking upon it. On the contrary, those which being stricken in years have no Coffins, are always sad and melancholy.

This Custom they generally observe through the whole Empire; and as they receiv'd their Religion from the Indians, they have likewise borrow'd many other things of them, imitating them especially in three sorts of Burials, viz. in the Earth, in the Water, and in the Fire; for the Iapanners will some throw themselves headlong from the tops of Mountains; others tying Stones about their Necks, leap into Rivers; and do many other things to shorten their Lives: But the Chineses have not such stout Hearts to bury themselves alive; but poor People, who have not wherewith to purchase a Coffin, burn the Corps, and bury the Ashes.

In the Province of Suchuen the Dead are burn'd, and the Ashes gather'd and put into Vessels, and so thrown into the Rivers or Brooks.

Their Coffins are made of hard black Planks, the Seams cover'd with Iews-Glue, or Gum, by the Portuguese call'd Charan, or Giaro, and by the Chineses, Cie and Cia.

Every one hath his peculiar Place, or Tomb, without the Wall of the City, for they are not permitted within.

Some build handsom Houses there, walling them round, and planting Cy∣press, and other Trees, according to the nature of the Soyl.

These Places are valu'd according to the opinion which they have of the Ground; for if a Conjurer hath judg'd it to be lucky to Build on, they ex∣ceedingly enhanse the value thereof: nor do they ever buy any Land without the advice of those People.

At their Burials they observe one Order, to put the chief Corps of the Fami∣ly at the upper end, and set the other side by side according to their Degrees.

Their Graves are neatly hewn out of Stone, and on the top adorn'd with Shapes of Beasts, as Harts, Elephants, and Lyons, with Encomiastick Inscri∣ptions.

Persons of Quality, especially those that are single, bestow more Cost, building stately Palaces and Rooms under Ground like Cells; which are made very convenient to lay the Corps in.

Here all the Relations meet at the time of their Deaths, to do their Offer∣ings and other Ceremonies.

For the Poor which have not Money to buy a peculiar Burying-place, there is a common Church-Yard in every City, wherein they lie buried all toge∣ther.

They chiefly desire to be buried in their Predecessors Graves, though never so far from the Place where they die, as it often happens to Governors of re∣mote Provinces of the Empire, and thither their Friends, to do them the last honor, convey them.

The first Ceremony observ'd at any ones Departure is, that the Sick, when dying, is carry'd on a Mat to give up the Ghost in a Hall: Yet Persons of Quality are not remov'd, but die on their Beds.

When a Father dies, then the eldest Son plucks off his Cap from his Head, and comes with his Hair dishevel'd to the Bed, and tearing the Curtains and Sheets in Pieces, lays them on the Corps; then the Body (if a Male, by Men, if a Female, by Women) is according to their Custom wash'd; which done, they lay it in a Cotton Cloth, or else in Silk, and put on his best Appa∣rel; next to the Corps they lay the Badges of his Office, and Degrees of his Learning which he attain'd in his Life-time. The Body thus Garnish'd, is laid in a Coffin, which stands in a Hall hung round about with black. The Effigies of the Deceased drawn to the Life, with his Arms and Livery, are all plac'd at the Head of the Coffin, and at the Feet stands a Table cover'd with a Carpet, before which is a Curtain drawn for the Women to stand behind unseen. The Children and Nephews sit mournfully on Straw. In the first Gallery leading to the Entrance into the Hall, stand several Trumpeters on both sides, and two with Tabers at the Gate of the House in the in-side; before the House in the Street hangs a Bundle of Pieces of Paper made fast to a Stick which reaches down to the Ground, as a sign of their new-begun Mourning, and to give notice to their Neighbors: Afterwards the Children of the Deceased acquaint their nearest Relations and others by a Letter of their Loss; who thereupon come to visit them in this Order: First the Visitant walks into the outer

Court before the House, and there puts on Mourning, the Drums beating the whilst; which done the Trumpets sounds as he passes through the Gallery: so soon as he enters the Hall the Women behind the Curtain begin to cry, and then approaching the Table he lays a Paper Purse of Money upon it, to defray some of the Charges; after he hath bow'd his Head three or four times on the Corps, and kneel'd down, the Childring lifting him up, place him on their left sides, and shew the same Reverence to him: After all these Ceremo∣nies pass'd, every one seats himself without speaking a word.

All those Friends which come thither as Visitants are receiv'd by one of the Deceased's Relations, Clad in a Mourning Garb, who conducts them into an Anti-Chamber, where desiring them to sit, proffers them Tee, dry'd Fruit and Sweet-Meats, of which they eating but little, take and put it into their Nets and go away.

These Civilities are so strictly observ'd, that Friends, though they dwell not near, but in some other Cities, come Riding thither; or if it be too far, they send one of their Family to excuse them.

These Ceremonies ended, the eldest Son is oblig'd to go and visit every one in the City, which came to Mourn with him; yet to shun so much trouble he goes onely to their Doors, where leaving a Letter he proceeds to the next. Then they speak of the Funeral if their Purses be able to hold out, if not, they keep the Coffin in the House till the next opportunity, which happens sometimes not in a whole year. At the time appointed all the Friends are advis'd there∣of by a Thu, or Letter; who when met, go to the House: Before them are carry'd great Images of Men, Horses, Elephants, Lyons, Tygers, and other Beasts, made of Gilt Paper; then follow other Shapes, viz. of Wagons, trium∣phal Arches, Pyramids, and the like, adorn'd with Silk and Roses of divers colours: all which things are burn'd when the Coffin is put into the Ground, if it be a Person of Quality. These Images are follow'd by great numbers of People that come out of curiosity to see the Funeral: Next walk the Friends all in Mourning, then the Bonzi Singing their Prayers, and Taboring on Ba∣sons; who are follow'd by a second sort of Bonzies, that let their Hair and Beards grow, and play on several sorts of Instruments; these again by a third, that shaving their Hair, differ in their Doctrine from the rest; then come the Acquaintance, and the nearest Relations; the last are the Children and Ne∣phews all in close Mourning bare-footed, hanging down their Heads, and car∣rying a Stick of two Foot long in their Hands. All this Company walk before the Corps, which is carry'd (if of costly Wood, Gilt and Varnish'd with their Charan) uncover'd, on a great Bier, by thirty, forty, or fifty Men, for the greatness of the Funeral consists in the number of Bearers. Behind the Coffin the Women follow Crying, being lock'd up in their Sedans, and cover'd with Mourning. When they are come to the Grave, they use many Ceremo∣nies before they put the Corps into the Ground; amongst which one, and none of the least, is a great Feast for all the Company in a stately large House; which done, every one returns home, and observes the time of Mourning and the usual Ceremonies, which are as followeth, viz.

First they Habit themselves in close Mourning, which is all in White, not onely China, but also in Iapan, Corea, and many other neighboring Countries, though in Reason it cannot be suppos'd, that that Colour was from the begin∣ning made for that use, but brought in fashion amongst them onely by Cu∣stom, without any other Reason, because the Chineses know that White is a

[illustration]

joyful Colour, which they also manifest at certain times: but to give our Opinion of it, we must know, that the Chineses make all their Stuffs of Cot∣ton, and Hemp; Silk and Cotton are much too fine for course Stuffs, therefore they can make use of nothing better than Hemp, for that is naturally of an unpleasing Colour, and therefore they have chose this last for that purpose: and as Hempen Cloth is generally white, it may be believ'd, that White onely was by them chosen to be the Colour of their Mourning.

Three whole years this Sorrow continues, during which time the Children sit onely on little Benches, cover'd with White. They eat not at Tables, nor sleep on a Bedstead, but on a Mat, laid upon the Floor. They also abstain from Wine and Flesh; neither do they go to Baths or Feasts, nor abroad but in a close Mourning Sedan. But that which is more, they never converse (as they say) with their Wives all that time; nor are employ'd in any publick Business of State: and if they have any Employment, though a Vice-Roy or Colao, they are forc'd to forsake it to attend the Obsequies, and spend their time in Mourning; which when expir'd, they not onely enjoy their Places again, but are after promoted to higher Dignities. This time they account so holy, that they receive no Pay, though Captains of Companies.

Some years since it hapned, that a Commander of the Province of Canton, who was more desirous to follow his Employment than keep the full time of his Mourning, made his Account so, that the time which he spent in his Jour∣ney to the Court should be part of his Mourning time, which he wanted to make up the three years: but coming to the Court with intention to enter into his Office again, he was sent back to his House, to spend the remaining time of his Mourning, before he might appear there.

The number of three years is strictly observ'd, for an acknowledgment that the three first years they were carry'd more in their Parents Arms than on their own Legs; wherefore as a sign of Obedience they may not erre from that Order which their Predecessors maintain'd.

The Women Mourn but one year, the near Relations three Moneths, and the Acquaintance three days: And because these accidents often happen, there are few but what have Mourning Coats lying ready by them. Thus far Semedo.

Father Adrian de las Cortes, makes mention of the Chineses Mourning for their Parents after this manner, viz. The ordinary Mourning Coat, which both Men and Women wear, is very wide, made of course white Hemp, ravel'd and full of Patches. The Sons carry a Cane in their Hands, on which they lean when their Fathers die; but when their Mothers die, a Stick or Truncheon of Wood. On their Heads the Men wear a Bonnet of course Linnen; from whence a great ravel'd Cloth hangs down over their •…•…aces. The Maids wear a Coif on their Heads of course Linnen; a Girdle of Towe •…•…y'd about their Middle hangs down with one end to the Ground.

Their time of Mourning for their Father and Mother is three years, in re∣quital (as we said) of their three first years, in which their Parents suckled, and carry'd them in their Arms.

For the Death of Friends they Mourn a longer or shorter time, according to their acquaintance and obligations.

The Friends of the Deceased go not with cover'd Faces, nor Sticks in their Hands like the Sons, as appears by the inserted Sculps and Directions of the following Letters and Figures.

Mourning Habit for Father and Mother.

• A An ordinary wide Coat ravel'd, and with many Patches.
• B A Mourning Cane, serving for a Crutch when a Father dies.
• C A Mourning Stick for a Mother.
• D A Mourning Cap or Bonnet of Hemp for the Death of Father or Mother.
• E A Coif of the same.
• F A Veil for Women for their Father or Mother.
• G A Girdle of Towe for a Father.
• H A Girdle of Towe for a Mother.

Mourning for Relations which are neither Fathers nor Mothers.

• 1 A course Coif of white Linnen.
• 2 Ordinary Mourning Stockins ra∣vel'd out.
• 3 A Bonnet like a Mitre, of course Hemp.
• 4 An ordinary Mourning Girdle.
• 5 Ravel'd Mourning Shoes.
• 6 A wide Coat much ravel'd.
• 7 An Apron much ravel'd.

After the Death of either Father or Mother, amongst other Ceremonies which they observe, especially at the Funeral, they have a Custom not to sit on Stools for a certain time, nor sleep on Beds, nor eat Flesh, nor drink Wine, keep from their Wives, speak not aloud, go not out of their Houses, except in Sedans cover'd with course Linnen, and many other things more, till time hath worn away Sorrow.

Except Militia Officers, all Persons are oblig'd, though the prime Colao's, to forsake their Offices for three years for their Father or Mothers Death, which time they are to spend in Mourning for them. Thus far De las Cortes.

In this manner the Chineses perform their Funerals, or Interr their Dead;

but the Tartars, who at this day Govern the Realm of China, observe quite ano∣ther manner. The Iesuit Adam Scall describes them both in the following words:

Both Tartars and Chineses (saith he) take a peculiar care for the burying of their Dead; for they imagine that all the happiness of their Successors de∣depends upon it: wherefore they often lay by three, four, five hundred, nay a thousand Crowns in their life-time to be bestowed on their Graves: To which purpose they also gather Planks of Cedar, and other like lasting Woods, which they send for two or three hundred Leagues off, to make them Coffins, wherein they may for ever, as they suppose, lie secure; which the Iesuit Martinius testifies in these words:

It is (saith he) by them accounted a great happiness for him, who before his* 30.5 Death makes himself a Coffin of the best and strongest Wood, some of which costs sometimes two thousand Crowns; for they send for the most du∣rable and best Wood out of remote Countreys, so that there is no City but there are Coffins to be sold in it, nay most People buy them before their Deaths, and keep them in their Houses.

The upper Planks (saith Scall) of the Tartars Coffins are sloaping like a Roof, and Painted on the out-side, not regarding the thickness of the Planks, because they put their Coffins to no other use, than to hold the Body for a short time, and carry them out in; for coming to their Funeral Piles, they burn the Coffins with the Corps. But those of the Chineses are narrower at the Feet, and broader and higher at the Head, the upper Plank smooth, and reaching over the sides, that the thickness thereof may be seen, which is chiefly observ'd and taken no∣tice of. They are very careful to chuse a Burying-place; for if they have not Land of their own, then they purchase it at a great Rate. Those Places are principally made choice of in a dry Soyl, where no Rivers nor High-ways are near, nor any Temples or Towers, but must be on a Plain, which neither rises before nor behind. Such a Place being chosen, they surround it with a Bank of Earth lik a Half-Moon, which rises in the Middle, and runs sloaping down on both sides, yet not smooth but scollope-like; at the upper end of which they bury the eldest, and below him on each side the Sons and Nephews, not in one Grave, but every one apart under a little Hillock, and the chief of the Fa∣mily under the highest Hill: In the middle on a Stone Table are plac'd variety of Provisions, Perfumes, and other things, in honor of the Deceased.

Any one that amongst a Family is rais'd to a higher degree of Honor than his Predecessors, erects his own Tomb in his life-time; whereon they Carve the Shapes of Men or Beasts, according to every Mans Quality and Estate, Planting the remaining part of the Ground with Cedar Trees, and Wall'd round.

The Tartars differ herein; for though they, according to the conveniency and Place, require the same things as the Chineses, yet they observe not the same manner in their Burial; for the old People are buried apart, and the younger by themselves.

The Chineses also erect a Tomb-stone, on which is Engraven the Age of the Deceased, his Office, and the Emperor's Favors to him: and to prevent the Characters from being defaced, and the remembrance of the Deceased's Exploits from being worn out; besides the Tomb-stone they bury another square Stone in the Ground with the same Inscription, that when the first is worn out, that may appear perfect, and serve as a Memorial of all his Atchievements.

When any one dies, whoe're he be, all the Friends and Relations come about the Corps, crying and Mourning over it.

Persons of Quality send a piece of very thin white Linnen, with a Letter to their Friends, to acquaint them of the dead Corps, who at an appointed day come thither, bringing with them Perfumes, Wax-Candles, and Money; coming into the House they go to a Table, plac'd opposite to the Coffin in the midst of the Hall; having set fire on the Perfumes that stand upon the Table, they step a little backwardand shew Reverence to the Effigies of the Deceased, Painted at the Head of the Coffin, by kneeling four times, and bowing their Heads to the Ground, whilst they make a mournful Cry.

These Ceremonies being perform'd, the nearest Relations appear also on one side of the Coffin between the Curtains; and coming forth shew the same Reverence, also kneeling, and bowing their Heads four times to the Ground. The time of Visiting ended, the nearest Kindred come the next day into the House of Mourning, from whence they convey the Corps to the Grave, or at least to the City Gates; for which Kindness the Children go from House to House in Sack-Cloth, and with their Faces looking down on the Ground, re∣turn Thanks, by shewing Reverence to their Visitants, who on purpose stand at their Doors.

But the Tartars observe quite another way of Interring their Dead, viz. on the same day that any one dies, the Corps being put in a Coffin, and the Friends having Wept over it in the House, they carry it away, except the Deceas'd was a Vice-Roy or Governor.

The Relations accompany the Hearse, and afterwards placing themselves in Rows, on each side of the Funeral Pyre; those of her Family set fire of the Wood, and so burn the Body, whose Ashes on the third day are gather'd, and put into a Porcelane Urn, to be bury'd.

Yet far greater Honor is shown to the Vice-Roys, whether Tartars or Chi∣neses, for when a Tartar King dies, his Servants, after some formal Lamentati∣ons, are plac'd on each side of the Court-Gate, that they may be seen, holding his Atchievements; for some have Helmets, others Bonnets, those Girdles, others again Swords, Belts, Bowes, Quivers, and other like things in which he delighted. Thus order'd, they make a continual doleful noise all the time of their standing there.

In the same Order his Horses stand to be seen, held by his Grooms, with rich Saddles, and Caparisons of Velvet.

There stand also Camels handsomly Harnes'd, and loaden with the Goods that are to be us'd at the Funeral, and by them, under the Gates Drummers and Trumpeters.

At the appointed day the Corps is carry'd out, before which ride Trumpeters Sounding mournfully, then follow twenty or thirty choice Camels, with Silk Bridles and Saddels hanging at their Necks, and loaden with Tents and other Furniture, to be carry'd to the Grave; next follow such as bear Silk Umbrella's, and Painted and Gilded Fans; then Ensigns, Flags, Pennons, and the like, with Silver Chargers; after those, richly Caparison'd Horses, laden with his best Houshold-stuff, and led by Grooms; and lastly, the Sedans which the Vice-Roy us'd.

The place of Burial is encompass'd with a Mat in stead of a Wall, within whose Inclosure stand Tents, furnish'd with rich Goods, to be burnt. In the middle appears a great Hall, also made of Mats, to put the body in: Those

that were the last that attended the Train, appear by this Hall first, and behind them stand the rest, each, according to their Qualities: The remaining vacan∣cy within this Inclosure, and behind the Hall, being for the Women: When they are all within, standing for a considerable time, they make a hideous noise, more like howling than weeping; which done, and all things ready for the Offering, the Priests, or other Persons appointed, Garnishing Tables with Fruits and Preserves, and Meat in great Silver Chargers, they deliver a Cup with Wine to the chiefest Vice-Roy there present, who holds it up three times as an Offering to the Deceas'd.

Mean while, a Letter of Recommendation from the Emperor is produc'd, wherein the Merits of the Deceas'd are set forth, and he Honor'd with a Noble Title.

The chiefest of the present Councellors, having read this Letter with a loud Voice, throws it into the fire and burns it; so bowing their Heads three times, they rise again, and begin to cry: Then those of his Family set fire on a Pa∣per Mountain, cover'd all over with Purple Flannel, into which they throw the richest Clothes, Hats, Saddles, Gold and Silver Vessels, Sedans and Beds of the Deceas'd, which being consum'd, they gather the melted Gold and Silver, and putting it into Paper, on the third day throw it into the fire again, adding to it other Riches, till all be burnt: The Horses bereav'd o their Caparisons, are let loose, and bought by those that please for half their worth.

This done, all the Invited depart, being conducted by one of the Vice-Roy's, out at the Gate, where he thanks them.

But the Tartars are not satisfi'd with this one Funeral, for seven days after they renew it again, and a third time seven days after that, till all things be consum'd that the Deceas'd lov'd and esteem'd.

Moreover, if the Deceas'd had a more than ordinary belov'd Concubine, or Prime Favorite, they murther themselves; for the Concubine, whether willing or unwilling, is forc'd to Hang her self, to comfort, delight, and accompany (as these ignorant People say) the Deceas'd in the other World: Yet the more understanding Persons, being somewhat better instructed, have of late, dread∣ing such horrid Murthers, Petition'd the Emperor, by his Proclamation, to forbid such Cruelties; and likewise the wasting and burning of Houshold-stuff, and other Materials, which his Imperial Majesty hath accordingly Order'd, so that in stead of rich Cloth of Tissue, they only burn Gilded Paper, and have in a manner left off the Barbarous Custom of killing themselves at the Grave.

Having ended their Offerings, and crying a second or third time in the pre∣sence of all those that are afresh come to the Funeral-Pyre; they erect a Hall or Court, being the Tomb, (as if for a live Person) surrounding it with Walls, along whose sides are several Apartments, after the same manner, like those in which the Deceas'd in his life time recreated himself; in these they place the faithfullest Servants: In the middle thereof, they make the Tomb of Bricks, on a square Mount, round about which they place the Cushions and Sedans of the Deceas'd, on the Walls on each side hang his Girdle, Sword, Belt, a Quiver full of Arrows, and a Bowe: In this Hall, for a whole year, they bring Meat every day, which they put at the Foot of the Mount for the Deceas'd, as if he were to feed upon it, whilst those that bring it, stand on one side crying. These are for the Great Ones; but the Tartars of meaner quality, wanting Estates, build no Hall over their Graves, but placing only Meat, or Tee near the same, go away again.

The Chineses on the contrary, after their Friends and Relations are met, and having shewn the usual Reverence to the Deceas'd, go out of the House in this Order: Before on a long Stick is carry'd a Red Silk Cloth, whereon is written the Name, Titles, Age, and Quality of the Deceas'd, in Silver Chara∣cters; then follow a great number of Children, who carry all manner of Flowers, made of colour'd Paper, upon Canes, besides Representations of Men, Beasts, Gardens, Houses, and the like, Painted on Paper to delight the Eye: If the Deceas'd in his life time was famous for his Zeal in Religion, then his Images (curiously Painted) are born before him; after which comes next in order the Effigies of the Deceas'd, on a rich Bier, follow'd by the Bonzues, Play∣ing on Tabers, Cymbals, and other Instruments; then Anticks and Stage∣players come Riding on Horse-back, in the same Habits they are to Act in at the Grave, and all the way as they pass, shewing Tricks and using other Mi∣mick Gestures: The Orphans walk just behind the Corps, leaning on Sticks, and supported under their Arms by their Servants, as if excess of sorrow had thus weaken'd them: The Bier on which the Corps stands, cover'd with rich Silk Clothes, is carry'd by eight, sixteen, nay sometimes thirty two Bearers. When they come to the Grave, those that have attended the Funerals, throw what they have carry'd on a heap of Paper, which setting on fire, they go to the Tables that stand before the Corps, Garnish'd with several Fruits and Per∣fumes, besides a scalded Hogg and Lamb at each end; then three or four of the Eminentest set fire of the Perfumes before the whole company. Lastly, They step aside and make room for him who is to write on a Board made before, being three Fingers broad, and an Ell long, the Name and Quality of the De∣ceas'd, first they set down this Mark 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, which signifies Emperor; and for this cause they that are to do this, must be clad in such Apparel, as any of Qua∣lity might appear in before the Emperor. This Person with the Pencil in his Hand, craves pardon of all the Spectators, for his bold attempt, excusing his unworthiness of that Office; then he writes over the first Mark, on the upper end of the Board with black Ink, another in this manner 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 for then that which signifi'd Emperor is chang'd, and is as much as Lord; so that in this man∣ner, with the first under written Name of the Deceas'd, a full Sentence is made, viz. The Lord N. N. This Board the Deceased's Friends carry with his Image to his House, that it may be yearly Worship'd and remember'd by his Predecessors. So soon as this Inscription is finish'd, the Writer goes by them all, having Bow'd and Kneel'd four times: But before the Friends depart, they are either entertain'd in a House, rais'd of Mats, or in the next Chappel, at a Noble Treat, at which the first Cup is given to the Children, as they say, to wipe off their Tears. At their return home, some Tausus or Conjurers come to the Mourning House, that by the sprinkling of certain Water, they may drive away (as they say) evil Spirits, and bring Peace and Quiet to the House.

The Chineses and Tartars use one Colour, but not one Fashion for their Mourning.

All the Tartars, both Friends and Relations, wear a long Coat of Sack-Cloth, reaching down to their Feet, and gird it about their Middle with a Hempen Cord; they put on their oldest Buskins, and worst Hats, without the red Silk-Fringe, which at other times they wear for an Ornament.

The Hair of their Head or Beard is not shaven in all that time.

After the expiration of a Moneth, every one throws in a fire of Paper, and other such like Materials, their Mourning Girdle, with which they judge their

Mourning to be ended, and Habit themselves again in their usual Apparel.

Neighbors and acquaintance shew that they Mourn by pulling their Silk Fringe from their Hats.

The Tartar Women, in the time of Mourning, change their Apparel, being usually Black, into White; their Coifs, which else are cover'd with their Hair, resemble a White Cap, with Tassels that hang over their Shoulders.

The Chineses Mourning alters yearly, their first year, both Men and Wo∣men wear all over their Bodies a Sute of Sack-Cloth full of holes, with Shooes of White Cloth, and a Rope about their Wastes, seeming thus by the careles∣ness of their Garb, to express their sorrow for the Death of their Parents. The second year their Habit is made of sleight Cloth, their Hat of the usual Fashi∣on, but of another Colour, their Shooes handsomer, and their Girdles of Hemp left off. The third year they may wear Silk Clothes, and their Hats of the same Stuff, but White, or else of the usual Colour, which is generally Black.

In this time they follow no imployment, though of the greatest concern, nor may sit opposite to or by the Visitants, as others, but on a low Bench.

In the first Months, they not only abstain (as is usual in Fastings) from Flesh, Fish, Milk, Wine, and the like, but eat very unsavory things, neither season'd with Salt nor Herbs: And as the time of Mourning for a Wife, Bro∣ther, more distant Relations or Friends is much shorter, so is also their Apparel and Meat better.

The Childrens Mourning for their Parents is three year, which time the Wife must observe for the death of her Husband; the eldest Son, or his Wife, is by his Parents Mourn'd for a year, and as long a time the Man Mourns for his Wife, and one Brother for another.

This long time of Mourning, observ'd by the Children, for the Death of* 30.6 their Parents, hath (as Martinius tell us) been observ'd by the Chineses ever since the Emperor Xun's time, who Mourn'd for▪ his Predecessor Ya, being his Fa∣ther, three whole years at his Grave, without stirring thence, and intrusting the care of his Realm (during that time) to his Vice-Roys; and as the same Mar∣tinius adds, from thence it is, that they Mourn in that manner for their Pa∣rents, always staying in their Houses, laying down all Offices, changing their Meat and Furniture to meaner, and always sitting on a low Bench; upon this account also they drink no Wine, but live only on Pot-Herbs: Their Clothes are very Fantastick, made of Sack-Cloth; their Lodging Rooms meaner, nay, they frame their manner of speaking to a much more sorrowful Tone, and whereas before they us'd to write with Red on Paper streak'd with Vermilion, now they use only Yellow or Blue Colours, as a token of their Sorrow.

It is very strange to observe the Duty and Reverence which the Children shew to their Dead Parents, wherein no other People may be compar'd to them, for many (though Magistrates) when observing that their Parents be∣ing grown very old, have need of their help, they desire the Emperor to ex∣cuse them from their Office, without urging any thing, but that according to their Duty they may go to assist their aged Father, which the Emperor seldom refuses.

As to what concerns their Mourning three years, the Chinese Philosophers give this reason, That it is most fit, those which in their first three years have receiv'd their Parents Love, should spend so much time after their Death in Mourning and bewailing their loss; therefore it is no marvel, that the Chineses count it the greatest misfortune in the world to have no Children, because they

know that no body will look after them in their Age, nor at their Death Mourn for them.

The reasons why they make White to be Mourning, and not Black, is, as themselves say, because White is Natural, when as all other things are Dy'd, or Artificial; by which, as they say, is signifi'd, that in Sorrow, neither Art nor Pride must be shewn, for where a true Sorrow is, Nature sufficiently ex∣presses it. Thus far Martinius.

With great preparation and Pomp the Emperor Zungte, Father to this pre∣sent Emperor a 30.7 was Interr'd.

The next day being the eighth of their first Moon, after the Emperor's Death, his Corps was put into the Coffin about Noon: There was not one Tartar in all Peking that serv'd in publick Affairs, but he went thither with his Wife and Daughters, which so throng'd the Courts, that none were able to get thorow: The eldest were receiv'd into the first Court, next the Emperor's Lodging, where they all together bewail'd his Death, with many loud Shreeks and Cries; in which (to admiration) they obse•…•…e an exact time, with stops and pauses, as in Musick.

After all, the Tartars divided into eight Companies, let into the Emperor's Hall by two and two, there bewail'd his Death, they went away, and made room for others, so that the Cry continu'd without any cessation, the Multi∣tudes still going out, and coming in.

Mean while, there were not a few that fasted three days, not daring to go out of the Gates, nor their Servants suffer'd to bring them any Refreshment.

Father Iohn Adam Schall at that time present, there taking compassion of the People, which were ready to perish for Hunger and Thirst, Petition'd the Go∣vernors, either to furnish them with Provisions on the publick Account, or else set the Multitude return home; alledging, that there were Women amongst them, and that their weak Sex was not able to endure such Inconveniencies, and likewise ancient People, that worn out with sicknesses, were not us'd to undergo such hardship.

No sooner was Schal's Petition deliver'd, but the Governors looking upon his Request to be just, let all the People go away, with resolution, that all the Mandarins should every Morning for the seven following days, Weep half an hour in the Emperor's Chamber; after which, every one should retire and ob∣serve the establish'd Month of Fasting for the Emperor.

The fourteenth of the first new Moon, they gave the new Emperor Konchi his Oath, at the performance whereof, every Bench were in particular led into a Hall.

The chief of the first and second Order went to the upper Hall, where ha∣ving with the rest lamented over the Deceas'd Emperor's Body, the Oath was publickly read before them all; to which they all shew'd Reverence by thrice Kneeling and bowing their Heads to the Ground, and calling upon the Dead to witness the same.

Then going from the Court, they went to an Idol-Temple, where they gave him the Oath again, and finish'd their began Work with the same Ceremonies.

When on the seventh day, after the Emperor's Death, the sleight Roofs made of Mats were taken away, the chief Funeral-Priest seated himself in the open Court; after which, the chiefest being call'd into the Hall, and the rest stand∣ing at the Door, they began again to Cry, which dured longer than ordinary, because the Queen-Mother was there present, and began first with all her Wo∣men.

Then many Silver and Gold Vessels were brought out of a Tent erected for the Corps; and Tables being also set about the Coffin, richly Garnish'd with Sweet-meats in Silver Chargers, all which was thrown into the Fire. The remaining time, as from the first day when they went to lament, the City Ser∣vants and petty Governors holding all that had belong'd to the Emperor, as his Horses, Atchievements, Flags, and other things of State, stood in a Row at the Entrance of the Palace, from whence they stirr'd not till the Mandarins went away. On the first of the second Moon the Crying and fore-mention'd Ce∣remonies were again renew'd, early in the Morning in the presence of the Queen-Mother, and the Tables, which four Men could scarce carry, were again with Clothes, Carpets, and the like, thrown into the Fire. The last day they met to accompany the Corps, which was plac'd behind the Palace in a Hall on a neighboring Mount, which abounds with Deer, Harts, Stags, and the like Beasts for the Emperor's Recreations, till the Imperial Tomb should be made ready in some other Place. First the Way, which from the Palace runs to the Mount, was Grabell'd and laid plain, to prevent the rising of the Dust, to which inconvenience the Streets in Peking are very subject. Thither came all the Grandees Habited in white Mourning, to accompany the Corps; before went nine Elephants with Turrets on their Backs; forty Camels, capa∣rison'd with red Cloths and Bridles plated with Gold, and rich Symiters hang∣ing down by their Necks, were loaden with Tents and other Furniture: then follow'd an hundred Horses, led by yellow Bridles, without Gold, except the Buckles, which were onely Gilded: next in order were Drums, Trumpets, and others with Instrumental Musick to the number of a hundred; behind which were carry'd fifty Gilded Hammers, and above an hundred Flags of several colours, with wild Beasts, Birds, and twenty eight Stars, stitch'd with Thr•…•… of Gold; then again fifty Hammers, after which were led a hundred Saddled Horses, the last thirty laden with rich Flannel, and the Emperor's Clothes con∣demn'd to the Fire; next these came twenty Youths, every one holding an Im∣perial Quiver, imboss'd with Pearls and Precious Stones, besides Bowes and Ar∣rows, and just before them walk'd twelve Greyhounds; behind these came the Emperor's Sedan, born by sixteen Men, in which when living he us'd to be carry'd, richly Gilt, and on the top adorn'd with a Golden Ball; the Bearers were clad in a Livery of a Saffron colour, Embroider'd with Roses of Gold▪ next them were carry'd several Gold and Silver Chargers; behind which fol∣low'd the Bier with the Emperor's Corps, cover'd with Cloth of Tissue, Em∣broider'd with blue Clouds and Flowers, supported by thirty two Bearers, all in a Saffron-colour'd Livery, and adorn'd with Golden Roses; behind the Corps came Soldiers with Pikes and other Arms; then the Emperor's Mother in a Sedan cover'd with Purple-Silk; next hers, seven more cover'd with white Cotton, in every one of which was a Queen, or Concubine of the Emperor's; then follow'd many Grandees on Foot; lastly, all the Magistrates, and those that shew'd Reverence by kneeling and bowing to the Corps as it pass'd by, follow'd disorderly one among another to the Grave, which was inviron'd with a Wall, but the multitude pulling it down, quickly made room for all comers.

The Governors of the first Degree going into the base Court before the Hall, where the Bearers had set down the Corps, stood and cry'd all together, as likewise those that stood about them; at length one of the chiefest Vice-Roys lifting up a Golden Cup with Wine three times, they all bow'd their Heads

down to the Ground: then the Vice-Roy offer'd the fore-mention'd Cup as an Oblation: Before the Corps stood a Table strow'd full of Silver and Gold Flowers, and all sorts of Perfumes: Then they began again to cry till they all went away, leaving the rest of the Ceremonies to be perform'd the next Morning. At every Gate the chief Vice-Roy Offer'd before the Coffin a Cup with Wine, which he lifted up three times as before, and then deliver'd it to a prime Councellor, who put it aside to be Offer'd again at last with the rest.

The next Morning, being the twenty seventh day after the Emperor's Death, they all met again by the Corps, and every one standing in their ap∣pointed Places began their general Lamentation. Having perform'd all Ce∣remonies as on the day before, the Letter given by the Emperor to his Son, containing the Praise due to the Deceased, was publickly read; whereupon the Magistrates doubling their Shreeks and Cries, return'd into the base Court, whilst four of the chiefest Persons of Quality going to the Paper Mountain, co∣ver'd with yellow Silk, carry'd in an open Cloth, a Sable Sute of the deceased Emperor, with his Hat rais'd on the Crown with Pearls and Diamonds, and likewise a Sable Quilt whereon to lay his Head. Others in ten Carpets bore ten several Sutes more of the Emperor's; and Saddles and Caparisons for Horses were also laid on the Heap, besides Flags, Fans, Gold Plates, and the Emperor's Sedan; all which being brought to the Heap of Paper, cover'd with yellow Silk, they set on fire, and threw in the Tables full of Flannel Clothes, many Gold and Silver Vessels, which being melted stream'd down the Hill like a Rivulet. Then the Governors unty'd their Girdles, which being of white Cloth, they had fastned about their Middle, and so throwing them into the Flame they were released of their Mourning. Lastly, they pull'd off all their Mourning Habit, and leaving it there went home.

Three days after the prime Governors of the first Order came thither with the Tartars (the Chineses being lockt out) and prepar'd a new Funeral, at which they us'd the same Ceremonies, carrying Fans, and leading Horses and Cam∣mels. The same four Grandees brought another Sute of the Emperor's, and a Hat, having onely one great Pearl on the Crown, which they, as before, threw on Paper Heaps, and likewise some Saddles beset with Pearls and Diamonds, which done every one returned home.

All these Ceremonies are renew'd from day to day till the hundredth day; during which time no Musick may be heard, nor any Plays acted through all the City; and they continue mourning after the hundredth, for the Tartars watch by the Coffin continually.

After the expiration of two years, when the time was come to carry the Corps to the appointed Grave, twenty four Leagues from the City of Peking, all the Mandarins conducted the Corps on Foot out of the City, where they took leave of it on their bended Knees.

Zungte the Emperor of China and Tartary, made some years since a very great* 30.8 Funeral for one of his Concubines which was after this manner:

He accompanied the Corps in Person out of his Palace Gates, where the Body was laid in State till the expiration of a hundred days, at the end of which to be burnt, and by his Order to have Offerings made for it every fourth day; the Materials for which, besides the other Preparations, cost the Emperor above ten thousand Ducats. Amongst other wasteful Ceremonies he caus'd all the Ta∣bles, with their Silken Cloths to be thrown into the Fire. The Bier followd, as we said, before, by the Emperor, was cover'd with Velvet; before it were

carry'd three Sedans, seeming to be all Gold, though onely Gilt, which being beset with Precious Stones, made a glorious show; before the Sedans went three Wains drawn by Horses, which being cover'd on the top, were also richly Gilded: thousands of People made daily a great Cry, and the rest of the Ceremonies were all like the fore-mention'd, in which, they say, was spent eight hundred thousand Ducats.

With a peculiar magnificence and splendor was formerly solemniz'd the Funeral of a Chinese Emperor and Empress. Semedo describes that of the Em∣press, Mother to the Emperor Vanlie, who deceased Anno 1614. on the last of May, in the following words:

IMmediately after the Death of the Empress, the Court and City, as well Noble-men as Burgesses, Habited themselves in Mourning, and chiefly the Empresses Officers left off the Badges of their Offices and put on Mourning, wearing a Hempen Cord in stead of a rich Girdle▪ for a black Silk Hat, one of Chinese Cloth. In this manner they went four Moneths till the day of the Funeral; but the common People wore onely a Mourning Hat for the space of twenty four days; which was so strictly observ'd, that none upon pain of being severely punish'd durst leave them off. The second day the Emperor went out of his Palace into that of his deceased Mother, which lay a little di∣stant, yet inclos'd within the same. Before the Corps was Dress'd in white Linnen, and put into the Coffin, the Emperor came every day in Person with his Attendants to visit and shew Reverence to it in the same manner as all Children do to their Parents, and Offering to her the most odoriferous Per∣fumes. The same Ceremonies were also strictly observ'd by all the Emperor's Wives and Concubines, Children, Nephews, and prime Persons of his Palace. The Emperor also commanded that the Deceased's Apparel, Beds and Furni∣ture should be burnt, judging it to be a disgrace to suffer any Person of a lower Degree to make use of them. The third day the Empress was laid in the Chest wherein she was to be bury'd. The Chest, or Coffin being very large, and of thick Boards, was made of the best and most costly Wood that could be got in the whole Empire, and made fast with Silver Plates and Handles in form of Dragons: the Boards, neither Painted nor Gilt, were curiously rubb'd, the Cover onely Plated with Gold. The Emperor himself laid out the Body on a Quilt with a Pillow made for that purpose, and threw an unvalua∣ble Treasure of Pearls and Precious Stones upon it, and plac'd fifty Pieces of Gold, and fifty Pieces of Silver Cloth on each side thereof. This being done, and the Coffin lockt up, the Emperor and his Attendants shew'd Reverence again to the Corps. The fourth day renewing their Ceremonies, they put on their Mourning Apparel; at which time the Coffin stood in a large Court on a rais'd Ascent, in a manner like a Throne, with fifteen Tables about it; the first stood before the Emperor, the rest before his Women, Children, and chiefest Allies, which all in their Qualities after the Emperor Offer'd Perfumes. The fifth day was order'd foe those that were without; first all the Nobility, or Gentry, call'd Que Cum Chu Cheu Heupi, Habited in their honorable Robes, came to the Palace; after them all the Empresses Favorites, viz. those that were Marry'd to her Daughters or Neeces; and lastly the Mandarins of the six Courts of Judicature, whose Authority extends through the whole Empire, every one Cloth'd according to his Quality, and what suted his Employment' Military or Civil. All these shew'd Reverence to the Corps in the same man∣ner

[illustration]

as is already related: which ended in the Palace, several Edicts were pub∣lish'd, the Contents whereof were as followeth, viz.

• I. That all the Mandarins, as well Military as Civil, should on the fol∣lowing day appear in the Palace to Mourn for the Empresses Death, which being done, they should immediately go again to their Houses and Courts of Judicature, and there spend three days in abstaining from Flesh, Fish, Eggs, and Wine; that the following three days they should attend at the Palace Gate, and one by one come and visit the Corps, with due Reverence and shews of great Sorrow; after which every one might return home.
• II. That all the Mandarins Wives of the four first Orders, should for three days be there present in Mourning Apparel from Head to Foot, and bewail the Empresses Death, strictly forbidding to Dress themselves, or wear Jewels in their Houses during twenty seven days.
• III. That those of the Emperor's Council, call'd Hanlim, should make Epi∣taphs and Funeral Orations in praise of the Empress.
• IV. That the Quanlosu, which are the Overseers of the Emperor's Treasury, should without delay pay all the Charge which would be requisite for the Offerings and Funeral.
• V. That the Bonzies should Toll the Bells of their several Temples, as a sign of Mourning and Sorrow.
• VI. That no Meat should be sold in the Markets for seventeen days, and every one Fast, according to the Emperor's Example, who for the three first days did eat onely a little Rice and Water, and all his Retinue nothing but Roots.
• VII. The prime Councellor of their Laws was commanded to give Mourn∣ing to all Ambassadors and Agents then present at the Court, and bring them to the Palace to shew Reverence to the Corps according to the Custom of the Countrey.
• VIII. That all the Mandarins which had Serv'd out the time of their Em∣ployments, or those that aim'd at other Places, should also come to the Palace and shew Reverence, and perform their Duty in Mourning over the Corps three days.
• IX. That the Free-men of the City should come every Morning and Evening for the space of a whole Week to the chief Governor's Palace, and there shew Reverence.

They also sent Letters to all the Mandarins distributed through all the Pro∣vinces and Cities of the Empire, that after they had receiv'd tydings of the Em∣presses Decease, they should use all means possible to make their Relations, both Men, Women and Children shew Reverence, by three times kneeling and bowing of their Heads, and besides other Ceremonies Mourn twenty seven days.

This Order is expresly given to all Mandarins, as well those that are in Of∣fice as others, whether Civil or Military. It is likewise Order'd, that the Burgesses shall wear a Mourning Hat for the space of thirty days. They also forbid that any Instruments should be touch'd, either in the Mandarins Palaces or Houses, or in any Place wherein Travellers are Lodg'd upon the Empe∣ror's Charge. This was proclaim'd by certain Mandarins that follow no other Employment.

After all these Ceremonies before the Funeral, the great Magician at the Court in Peking, was commanded to chuse the Days wherein the remaining

Funeral Pomp was to be solemniz'd. After much study and care he pitch'd upon the ninth day of the sixth Moon, being four Moneths after the Empresses Death, for the Coffin to be carry'd out of the Palace, and the fifteenth of the same Moneth to the Grave. The time being come, the following Order was publish'd, to be observ'd at the Funeral.

• I. That all the Mandarins of the Court should with the chief Councellors, six days be∣fore go out of their Houses into their several Chambers at Court, and there fast three days, as is before mention'd.
• II. That the Receivers of the Emperor's Revenues should prepare all Neçessaries, as Torches, Perfumes, Images of Men, Horses, Lyons, Elephants, Silk Umbrella's, and other Ornamentals, to be burnt at the Grave: The Charge whereof was said to amount to thirty thousand Escu's.
• III. That the Lords of the Council Hanlim should make new Funeral Elegies.
• IV. Because the Emperor intending to accompany the Corps to the Grave about seven Leagues from the Palace, happen'd to be somewhat indispos'd, he would send a Grand Courtier in his stead, to perform that necessary Duty.
• V. The Martial Officers must keep Watch in the City, and by the Grave, and also to guard the Corps thither.

  At every Gate of the City (which were nine) stood a thousand Armed Men, from the Place where the Corps lay to the Grave, the way on both sides was Guarded by Soldiers. Three thousand conducted the Body, and forty thou∣sand were chosen to Watch by the Grave during the whole time of the Funeral Ceremonies.

• VI. All the Streets from the Palace to the Grave must be Rail'd in, that there may be a free Passage on each side to prevent crowding; and likewise at the end of every twenty Paces must stand Baskets with yellow Sand, to damp the Dust from rising in those Places through which the Corps was to be carry'd, besides Tents and Pavilions for the convenience of those that follow'd the Horse.
• VII. The Commanders of the Treasury had Order to provide Money to pay the Manda∣rins, Relations, Commanders, Soldiers, and all those that attended the Funeral.
• VIII. That three days before the Burial they should renew their Mourning, shewing Reverence, and making Offerings as they had done at the beginning.

All things thus prepar'd, the Emperor and the Prince his Son, went with all his Officers to the Temple of their Predecessors, which is in the Imperial Pa∣lace, where the Emperor in close Mourning shew'd Reverence to the first raiser of his Family, and Offer'd many Silk Coats and Wine to the Deceased. Then he caus'd a Book to be read, which had been written in the praise of them; which being with many other Ceremonies perform'd, they return'd to the Palace, whilst by the Emperor's Order, Coats and other Ornamentals were thrown into the Fire and burnt.

During the eight days which were yet remaining they Offer'd to the Hea∣vens, Earth, Planets, Mountains and Streams. Then Reverence was also shewn by the Emperor's Order to the Spiritual Protectors of the nine Palace Gates, through which the Corps was to be carry'd. The like also was done to the six Bridges of the River which runs before the Palace, Offering at all those Places Beasts, Wine, and Perfumes.

The Coffin with the Corps was plac'd on a triumphal Arch, richly wrought and hung with Silk, interwoven with Gold, and in many places Plated with Gold, Engraven with Lyons, Dragons, and the like; about it stood a great many Torches, and Vessels with Perfumes. The fifth day appointed by the

Magician to carry out the Corps, the Emperor appear'd, with his Wives, Chil∣dren, and Allies, at the Place where the Chariot stood. Having cry'd for the Deceased, he Offer'd to their God of the Spirits so to conduct her, that she might have a happy Journey to the Enjoyments of Peace and Quietness. Those that were commanded to attend the Corps in the Name and Place of the Emperor, and to make Offerings at the appointed Places, were all in a readiness under the first Gate, where they no sooner receiv'd the Herse, but they began to walk in such a handsom Order, State, and Silence, as was wonderful to be∣hold: Getting that day no farther than without the Walls, where stopping at the appointed Place they put the Corps under a Pavilion, made Offerings on Tables plac'd for that purpose, burnt Perfumes, and perform'd all other Cere∣monies; which no sooner done, but a Messenger was sent to the Emperor, to inform him that they were got thither and had perform'd their Duties. The following day they began with those Ceremonies with which they had ended the last Night, and then proceeded on their Journey, which lasted thirteen days, because of the Offerings and stops which they made by the Way to the Mount, where the Emperors Tombs are. The concourse of People from all Places was so great, that they were past number. When the whole Train was come thither, the Corps was taken off from the Chariot, and plac'd upon another stately and triumphal one, no less costly than the first. Then they offer'd a Steer, which they sprinkled with Wine, besides Coats and Perfumes, to the honor of the Earth, with Prayers to the God of the Spirits, that he would receive the Corps. At the same time nine Mandarins, sent from the Emperor, observ'd the like Ceremonies, and Offer'd to all the Emperor's Predecessors that lay in that Place. On the Funeral day, being the fifteenth day of the sixth Moon, they made several Offerings to conclude their Ceremonies; of which, and what they had done by the Way, they gave an Account to the Emperor, who shew'd his bounty to those that had been careful in the observing of them, and ex∣press'd his Affection to his Mother in shewing Reverence to her after her Death, and for her sake released all Prisoners that had committed but small Crimes. It was also Order'd, that those Provinces which were too highly Tax'd should have an Abatement. He took off likewise many Impositions laid upon Imported Goods, and distributed with his own Hands many thousands of Ducats, wrapp'd up in Paper according to the Custom of the Countrey, be∣ing all in honor to the Soul of the Deceased.

With the same Ceremonies a Chinese Emperor's Funeral was solemniz'd.

When an Emperor lies on his Death-bed, and that the Physicians begin to* 30.9 despair of his Recovery, the Colaos or chief Relations, and the prime Con∣troller of the Palace, call'd Suikien, come to visit him, and to know his will and pleasure from his own Mouth, and the Contents of his Testament: Then they privately go to the Prince which is Heir to the Crown, and consult with him, that they may do nothing against his will, who is ready to enter on the Throne. Being thus inform'd of the one thing and the other, they write down the Will and bring it to the Emperor, that he may approve and allow of it: from thence they go and shew it to the prime Councellor call'd Hanhyuen, who ingrosses all the Emperor's Business; which being done, the Will is Seal'd with the Imperial Seal, and kept in the Star-Chamber belonging to the Emperor•…•… Council so long as the Emperor lives.: after his Decease they shew it to the Court of Judicatory, that they may proclaim it in all Places of the Empire, and observe it punctually.

Most of the Inhabitants in the Province of Iunnan, by reason of their Neigh∣borhood* 30.10 with the Indians, lay the dead Corps on Heaps of Wood, and burn it; but those that study the Chinese Philosophy observe the Customs of the other Chineses, and use Coffins. But though they burn their Dead, yet they consume not living Persons with them as the Indians do; for the Chineses account it bar∣barous, and not to be admitted amongst the Laws of civiliz'd Men.

The Inhabitants of the City Sintien, in the Province of Queicheu, express great sorrow for either Father or Mothers Death, by cutting off the Hair of their Heads.

The Chineses, as Martinius witnesseth, are no less curious than superstitious in chusing the Ground for their Graves, judging that all their Fortune and Hap∣piness depends upon it, because of a Being for the Dragon, to whom they ascribe their Salvation; wherefore they observe the shapes of the Hills on which they intend to make their Graves, and Dig up the Ground, not sparing either Cost or Charge, hoping to find the Head, Heart, or Tail of a Dragon: for they believe that thereby all Happiness and good Fortune will attend the Deceased's Successors.

Many People experienc'd in this Art, go through all China, and observe the shapes of Hills, just as the Astronomers take their view of the Stars.

Government.

IN the first Age before the general Deluge, the Government of China was divided amongst Tribes or Families, and the chief of every Tribe had his own Government, after the same manner as the ancient Fathers Abraham and Lot; but since Anno 2952. before the Birth of our Saviour, they have been Govern'd by one sole Monarch or Emperor: for the Names of the two other Forms of Government, viz. Aristocracy and Democracy, the Chineses had never heard of: Nay, the Netherland Agents that were sent Anno 1655. to the Great Cham, Em∣peror of East-Tartary and China, had great trouble with the Chineses and Tartars, to make them understand the two last Forms of Government, which they could not apprehend.

The Emperor of China is sole Master of the Lives, Goods and Chattels of all his Subjects, he onely being chief Lord of all; wherefore the Empire of China may justly be call'd A perfect and absolute Monarchy.

It is without doubt, that in ancient times under one supream Governor* 30.11 were several substitute Lords, as Dukes, Marquesses, Earls, and the like; but eighteen or nineteen hundred years since those Titles of peculiar Governments and Power, were at once taken away and rooted out: onely in the Province of Iunnan are free Lords or Dukes to this day, that have their peculiar Domini∣ons, which is in no Place else in China: Yet they acknowledge the Emperor, but Govern with an arbitrary Power over their Countreys, and succeed each other in their Government.

The Emperors, according to an ancient Custom yet in force, regard not* 30.12 their Subjects, but look upon them as Slaves, though they are or have been never so great Magistrates: for because the sole Government consists in the Power of one onely, they esteem themselves Masters of every Mans Goods, and likewise of the Lives of their Subjects; therefore no Honor or Preemi∣nency is given but by the Emperor, neither is the ascent to the greatest Place of Dignity lockt up from any sort of People, though the scum of the Commo∣nalty,

but open'd to every one at the Emperor's pleasure▪ for which reason he is by every one honor'd as a God, on whom all things depend, and by his severe Government is terrible, and to be feared. From hence it often proceeds, that for the smallest occasion, the most deserving Persons are by him bereav'd of their Employments, and others punish'd with Death, especially those whose Valour and Experience in Martial Affairs may upon the least suspicion be fear'd. This is not unknown to Collonels and Generals, especially the Grandees which Command great Armies; who for that reason are no less mistrustful of the Emperor than he suspicious of them: from whence they often rise to a Rebellion or Mutiny; for if they after a Conquest against their Enemy have discharg'd their Soldiers, they know they cannot escape death: which not deserving, they will rather chuse to make themselves to be fear'd by their valiant and heroick Exploits: from whence in the time of War arise continual Mutinies in China; and the greater the Mutinies be, the fiercer they are maintain'd by every one without respect of faithfulness.

The Chineses, before the Europeans coming thither, firmly believ'd that their* 30.13 Empire contain'd almost the whole World: not reckoning their neighboring Kingdoms, they made their Emperor Governor of the whole terrestrial Globe and call'd him Lord of all.

According to Semedo, the Ladies of Honor, Relations and others belonging to the Palace, call the Emperor Chu, and sometimes Tienzu, that is, Son of Hea∣ven; not that they believe him to be born in Heaven, but that they look upon the Empire as the Gift of Heaven: and also to make the Respect due to the Im∣perial Majesty the greater, and to seem sacred.

The Chinese Emperor, saith Father Martin, is by his Subjects call'd Tienzu, that is, Son of Heaven; not that they derive his Original from thence, or that he was born there; but they call him Son of Heaven, because he is belov'd above all other Men, and hath on Earth given him (as they say) the greatest Dignity Heaven can afford: And because the Chineses oftentimes take Heaven, God, and the supream Godhead to be all one, therefore The Son of Heaven is as much as to say with them, The Son of God. Thus far Martinius.

But the common and most esteem'd Name of the Emperor is Hoangti, or Hoamti, that is, according to Semedo and Trigaut, Emperor, or Supream Emperor; but according to Martinius, Sole Emperor, or Emperor of the Earth; which they say is of a yellow colour, for a distinction from Zangti, that is, Supream Emperor, or God, the Governor of Heaven and Earth.

The first Emperor which was call'd Hoangti, Reign'd in Anno 2690. before the Birth of our Saviour, for whose excellent Vertues and publick In∣ventions, the pleasing sound of his Name was so belov'd, that ever since all their Princes have been call'd Hoangti, as the German Emperors from their first, Caesar.

There are yet two other Names which have the same signification of King,* 30.14 or Emperor, the one being Kium, which they use to name strange Kings by; and the other Vam, which is a Name for the Emperor's Children; to which by adding the word Kium they make a compound word Kiumvam, which signifies Imperial.

It is also to be observ'd, that a new chosen Emperor changes his Name, like a new elected Pope, who takes upon him the Name of some of his Predeces∣sors in stead of his own.

This Name of the Emperors, which they write in all manner of Procla∣mations,

and on their Coyn, is taken from a peculiar Person, Extracted of Royal-Blood.

Martinius tells us, That all those of the Imperial Blood, or Family, are by* 30.15 the Chineses call'd Fansu, as also by the Tartars, only with addition of the Let∣ter r, which the Chineses cannot pronounce, and that Fansur, or Facsur; and Fan∣su or Fansur signifies a Royal or Imperial House.

The Empire of China, from Anno 2207. before the Birth of our Savior, hath had a Successive and Hereditary Government; for at the Fathers Death, the eldest Son Succeeds; and if there be no Male-Heir, then the nearest Relation.

If the Empress, (saith Semedo) the lawful Wife of the Emperor hath a Son, in what time soever he be Born, he takes place before all those that are Begot∣ten by his Concubines, though Born before him; but if the Empress hath no Son, then the First-born, or eldest of a Concubine (who e're she be) is always Elected.

But Anciently, from Anno 2992. to Anno 2207. before the Birth of our Sa∣vior, the nine first Emperors were elective and chosen by the most Voices, and took not by Succession; but after the Death of the ninth Emperor, Yu, his Son Khi, the Founder of the Family of Hia, was for his goodness and great Deserts, by general Suffrage, confirm'd Emperor in his Fathers stead; so that the Cu∣stome of Election was chang'd to true and lawful Succession by Birth.

Sometimes it hath happen'd (though very seldom) that the youngest Son, contrary both to the Laws of Nature and the Realm, was declar'd Emperor, either for his extraordinary Valor or Prudence; as Anno 209. before the Birth of Christ, it happen'd to the Emperor Ulxi, who after his Father Cin's Death, was chosen Emperor in stead of his eldest Brother F•…•…sa.

When the eldest Son hath taken Possession of the Throne, the rest only boast of their Princely Allyance, for they have not in the least any Authori∣ty; yet the Emperor gives them each a City to reside in, with a Magnificent Palace, Attendants, and Revenues, where they keep Court in great State, and are serv'd accordingly, yet have no Command of the Citizens; and that they might not have so much together, as to enable them to raise a Commotion, the Emperor's Allowance is paid them every three Moneths, and on forfeiture of their Lives, they may not stir out of the Limits of the City, so design'd for their subsistance.

The Empire hath sometimes also been Govern'd by a Woman, for Anno 490.* 30.16 before the Nativity of Christ, the Emperor Lieupang's Consort, after the Death of Hoci her Son, Govern'd the Countrey eight years.

At the Election of a new Emperor, thirteen Contingencies are to be* 30.17 observ'd.

The first is the alteration of annual Accounts, for they begin to reckon from the Inauguration of their new Emperor, which they use not only in common Discourses, but in their Letters, and all manner of Writings: The Emperor also gives his Name to that Year in which he begins to Reign; for we must* 30.18 observe, that all the Years of any Emperor's Raign, when soe're they die, are reckon'd for whole Years, and so make his Coronation the New-Years-Day, that is, the beginning of the Year; and yet, though the Chineses immediately, and in the same Year have another, yet they still shew Honor and Obedience to the late Emperor, though Dead, till the Years end, doing all things in his Name; and likewise all Edicts and Proclamations are Seal'd and Mark'd with the same Signets, as if he were still living; but the Successor gives his Name to the following Year.

The second, they instantly Coyn new Money, with the Letters of his Name,* 30.19 which doth not abate any thing of the value of the old Coyn.

The third, his Lawful Wife is Crown'd Empress.

The fourth, they give the Name of Queen to six of his Concubines.

The fifth, they make Offerings to the Heavens, Earth, and Spirits.

The sixth, they bestow great Alms on the Poor.

The seventh, all Prisoners are set at liberty.

The eighth, all the Magistrates are nobly Treated.

The ninth, all the Women that were Concubines before, are put out of the Palace.

The tenth, the Seraglioes, which are four in number, are fill'd with fresh Beauties fetch'd from all parts of the Empire; during which time there are ma∣ny Marriages, because every one seeks to free his Daughter from such a re∣tired Life.

The eleventh, Persons of Quality, if not all, at least those of Cities, either come themselves, or send Agents to shew Obedience, and acknowledge the new Emperor.

The twelfth, all Officers from the Vice-Roys to the inferior Governors of Cities, go in Person to the Court, to shew the same Obedience, and take the Oath of Allegiance in behalf of their Towns and Provinces.

The thirteenth is, that the Emperor changes his own Name, as is before∣mention'd.

The Reverence which the Chineses anciently shew'd to their Kings, they per∣form'd in this manner.

They Prostrate themselves to him, bowing down their Bodies, and looking* 30.20 with their Faces to the North, for they say, that their Kings look always to the South; for which reason all the Gates of their Palaces, Doors of Cham∣bers, and all Draw-Bridges face the South; from whence proceeds a Proverb, That the Chineses, though at great distance, always honor their King, when with usual Ceremonies they receive their Guests.

They say, that the Tartar Prince, who at this day possesseth the Countrey of China, and resides in the Metropolis Peking, is not the great Cham or Lord of all Tartary, as hath hitherto been believ'd, but a mean Prince of the Tartars, whose Grand-father was the first King of his Family, promoted to that Dignity by the Inhabitants of his Countrey, which was only a small Province in Tartary call'd Muncheu.

The Father of this present Emperor, call'd Zunchi, was the fifth of his Fami∣ly; his Fortune seem'd to be so strange in the Eyes of other Princes of his Coun∣trey, that they compar'd him to a 30.21 Lightning, when e're they spake of him, for they usually said, that the Gods and Heavens could only prevent him in any thing.

The present Emperor Zunchi's Son is call'd Konchi, a Youth, of about six∣teen years.

The first Ruler, of whom the Chineses make mention in their Histories, was nam'd Puoncu; and after him Tienhoang, Ginhoang, and Yonjui; but in those times the Provinces were govern'd by the Heads of their Princical Families.

The first Emperors that before the Birth of our Saviour Govern'd China, and were Elected and set on the Throne by most Voices, were eight in num∣ber, viz. from the Year before the Nativity of Christ 2952. to the Year 2207. before which the Chineses allow of none in their Histories, which in that

time are stuff'd with many strange and fabulous Relations, as well concerning the Age of Men, as Years of the Governors; for if we will credit their Wri∣ters, the World stood many Thousands of Years before the Deluge.

The first Emperor was

Before Christs Birth.	Raign'd	Years.
2952	I. Fohi	115
2837	II. Xinnung	140
2697	III. Hoangti	100
2597	IV. Xaohau	84
2513	V. Chuenhio	78
2435	VI. Ko	70
2357	VII. Ya	90
2258	VIII. Xan	33

After Xun, the Empire was Go∣vern'd by Hereditary Succession, and the first House or Family Hia was rais'd under the Emperor Yu, which continu'd four hundred Years under seventeen Emperors, viz.

Before Christs Nativity.	Raign'd	Years.
2207	I. Yu	10
2197	II. Khi	9
2188	III. Taikang	29
2159	IV. Chumkang	13
2146	V. Siang	27
2058	VI. Xaokang	22
2057	VII. Chu	17
2040	VIII. Hoai	26
2014	IX. Mang	18
1996	X: Is	16
1980	XI. Pukiang	59
1821	XII. Kung	21
1800	XIII. Kin	21
1769	XIV. Cungkia	31
1848	XV. Ka	11
1838	XVI. Fau	19
1818	XVII. Kie	52

After the Family Hia, the House of Xang succeeded, being first rais'd by the Emperor Tang, from whom sprung twenty eight Emperors, viz.

Before the Birth of Christ.	Raign'd	Years.
1766	I. Tang	13
	II. Taikia	33
1720	III. Voting	92
1691	IV. Taikeng	25
1666	V. Siaokia	17
1659	VI. Iungie	12
1641	VII. Taiu	75
1562	VIII. Chungting	13
1549	IX. Vaigni	15
1534	X. Hotankia	9
1525	XI. Zuie	19
1506	XII. Zusini	16
1490	XIII. Vokia	25
1464	XIV. Zuting	32
1433	XV. Nankeng	25
1408	XVI. Yangkia	7
1401	XVII. Puonkeng	28
1373	XVIII. Siaosini	21
3352	XIX. Siaoye	18
1324	XX. Vuting	59
1265	XXI. Zukeng	7
1258	XXII. Zukia	2
1225	XXIII. Linsin	63
1219	XXIV. Kenting	21
1198	XXV. Uvye	4
1194	XXVI. Taiting	3
1191	XXVII. Tiye	37
1154	XXVIII. Che	33

After the subduing of the House of Xang, rose the Family Cheu, Anno 1122. and flourish'd till Anno 247. before our Saviors Nativity, under thirty seven Emperors.

The first of them was a Prince call'd Fa, who when he enjoy'd the Crown, chang'd his Name to V, which signifies Valiant; and they say, that from him all the Emperors since, at their entring on the Throne change their Names.

He possess'd, in the Province Xensi, a Countrey nam'd Cheu, from whence the Family receiv'd their Denomina∣tion.

Before Christs Birth.	Raign'd	Years.
1078	I. Fa, or U,	7
1115	II. Ching	38
1122	III. Kang	26

1056	IV. Cha	51
1001	V. Mo	55
946	VI. Cung	12
934	VII. Is	25
894	VIII. Hia	15
896	IX. Is	16
878	X. Li	38
827	XI. Siveni	46
781	XII. Ie	11
770	XIII. Ping	51
719	XIV. Vou	23
696	XV. Chuang	15
631	XVI. Li	5
676	XVII. Hoei	25
651	XVIII. Siang	33
618	XIX. Hiang	6
612	XX. Quang	6
606	XXI. Fing	21
585	XXII. Kien	14
571	XXIII. Ling	27
544	XXIV. King	25
519	XXV. King	44

Between which was the Empe∣ror Menguen, who Raign'd scarce a Moneth.

	Raign'd		Years.
475	XXVI.	Yuen	7
468	XXVII.	Chinting	27
440	XXX.	Ka	15

Ka is accounted the thirtieth, for after Chintung's Death, his other Sons being Kiucie and Xocie, attempted for the Empire, and in that regard were accounted, as being two, viz. the twen∣ty eighth and twenty ninth, because they acted for some time; but at last. Ka mastering them, became absolute, and so was reckon'd the thirtieth.

	Raign'd	Years.
542	XXXI Gueilie	24
401	XXXII Gan	26
375	XXXIII Lie	7
368	XXXIV Hien	48
322	XXXV Xicini	6
314	XXXVI Fo	59
254	XXXVII Cheukuni	9

After the House of Cheu, came the Family Cin, under their Advancer Ching, who was afterwards call'd Xi, in the Year 246. and continu'd but to Anno 206.

	Raign'd	Years.
246	I. Ching, or Xi	37
209	II. Ulxi	3
206	III. Ing	46

After the Family Cin, the House of Han follow'd, which flourish'd till Anno 264. after Christ. The first Raiser of this House, was

Before the Nativity.	Raign'd	Years.
206	I. Lieupang, or Kaozu	17
194	II. Hoei	7
187	III. Liuheva, a Woman	8
179	IV. Veni	23
156	V. Hiaoking	16
140	VI. Hiaou	54
86	VII. Hiaoche	12
74	VIII. Ho	7
73	IX. Siveni	25
48	X. Iuen	16
32	XI. Ching	26
6	XII. Ngay	6

These are the Names of the Emperors, every one in their Families, before the Birth of our Saviour, according as they are written in the Chinese Chroni∣cles, Translated into Latin by Father Martyn; but those that have Raign'd since the Incarnation, I have receiv'd no account of, being not yet render'd to us in any other Language.

After the Family of Han arose that of Cyn, and flourish'd after the Birth of Christ, till Anno 1419. At the same time were also five Kings, call'd Utai, which maintain'd War against one another, till by their Ruine, the Family Tang took upon them the sole Government of China, which they kept till Anno 618.

In the Year 923. the Family Sung succeeded that of Tang, and Raign'd over all China, till Anno 1278. when this House was utterly subdu'd by the Tartars, who set up the Family of Iuen, which Govern'd China till 1368. in which Year rose the House of Taiming, from a Priest call'd Chu, who drove the Tartars out

of China; but this Family was a 30.22 Anno 1644. destroy'd, and by a huge Re∣bellion, the East Tartars of Munchu, were invited to Ayd the Prince, but the way once open'd, they swallow'd all, and from their Prince nam'd the whole Empire of China, Taising.

The Magistrates or Governors in China, taken in general, are of two De∣grees or Orders; the first are such, as not only in the Metropolis officiate the places of Privy Councellors, but from thence have influence over the whole Empire; the other are such as Govern peculiar Provinces or Cities.

The general Government, or that of the first Degree, are by Alvarez Semedo describ'd in the following words:

The Prime Government of China consists in six Benches, Chambers, or Courts, which by a general Name are call'd a 30.23 Pu, that is, The Kings Benches.

These manage not only the Affairs of the Realm, in the Courts where they reside, but like the Head, on which all the other depend, Rule, and give Or∣ders to them, according to their several places.

Every Councel hath his President, which they call Chamxu, with two Assi∣stants, the one nam'd Koxilam, who is the Chief, and sits on the left Hand, (by them counted most honorable;) and the other Yeuxilam.

These are the first and most profitable Offices of the Empire, except that of Kolao's; so that a Tutang or Vice-Roy of what Province so e're it be, after he hath given Testimony of his Capacity, if he would be Promoted, thinks him∣self well provided for, though not a Prime Councellor, to be only one of the Assistants, that sit on the left, or right Hand.

Besides these, there is a Councel of Ten, which are of equal Dignity, only distinguish'd by several Titles, and deciding of different Causes: To these are to be added, the vast numbers of greater and lesser Officers, as Notaries, Secre∣taries, Clerks, Servants, Officers, and such as we call Bayliffs, besides many others, not known in Europe,

The first Councel or Court which have the greatest Command, and receive the highest Presents and greatest Fees, are the Councel of State, call'd Lipu, that is properly, Councel of Magistrates, for Pu signifies a Councel, and Li Magistrates.

To these belong all the Offices in the Empire, to change or promote them; for he who is once in an Employment, rises continually by degrees to higher Dignities.

They have also Power to restore those to their Employments that are dis∣plac'd; as if a Mandarin is for some Misdemeanor put out of his place, he may easily obtain it again, if he be in favor with this Councel.

The second Bench is call'd Pimpu, that is, Councel of War, which have as great a Command as those of State, viz. over all the Militia, with the Schools and Academies, and for instruction of Youth in Martial Discipline, and the Exer∣cise of Arms.

The third is of the Customs, call'd Limpu, which though not of great Com∣mands, yet they are of no less Quality, for the Mandarins in which it consists, are chosen out of the Emperor's Councel Hanlin, which are next to the Kolao's, the Prime place of Honor in China.

This Council hath knowledge of all Letters, and likewise of Ecclesiastical Affairs, Bonzies, Strangers, and the like.

The fourth Councel is that of the Emperor's Revenues, call'd Hupu, which take care to get in the Emperor's Treasure, Customs, Farms, and in general, all things that bring in Money.

The fifth, call'd Cumpu, look after all business of Building and Architecture, and especially what belongs to the Emperor's Palace, or those of his Children and Officers; as also the Walls and Gates of the City, High-ways, and Bridges.

The same Council are also to take care that the Rivers be cleans'd, and Ships furnish'd with Necessaries, when sent out upon the Emperor's Service.

The sixth Chamber call'd Himpiu, that is, Councel of Iustice, are to punish Ma∣lefactors, and pass Sentence of Life and Death on Criminals.

The same Councels or Chambers the Jesuit Nicolas Trigaut hath describ'd al∣most after the same manner in the following words.

The Prime Councellors or Courts are six in number.

The first call'd Lipu, signifies, The Bench of the Magistrates.

This Councel exeeeds all the rest, for they name or choose all the Magi∣strates of the Philosophick, or Learned Order of the whole Realm, which are accounted the most eminent, and continually rise higher and higher, if they have in their Inferior Offices made but the least Proofs of their Vertue and good Behavior; and on the contrary, if they commit but one Fault, they are bereav'd of their Imployments, or put into meaner Offices.

The first choice consists in the excellent Writing in Chinese Characters, of which, this Court judges.

The second Councel (by Semedo the fourth) is call'd Hopu, that is, The Court of Revenue, or Exchequer, which have the Command of the Empires Revenue and Taxes, gathering Customs, paying Souldiers, and the like.

The third Councel is call'd Lipu, that is, The Council, or Court of Ceremonies, which takes care for Common Offerings, Temples, Priests, the Emperor's Wo∣men, Schools, examining of the Learned, Weddings, and other Ceremonies to be perform'd to the Emperor, on certain times and occasions.

The same Council also give Titles of Honor to deserving Persons; incou∣rage Artificers; send Noble-men to meet Ambassadors, and return An∣swers to Letters directed to the Emperor; who looks upon it as a great dis∣grace to write a Letter with his own Hand, either to one in, or without his Dominions.

The fourth call'd Pimpu, which signifies, Council of War, Command over Ci∣vil and Military Affairs, which concern the Safety and Defence of the Empire, yet they cannot resolve on any thing, without the Emperor's consent and know∣ledge.

This Councel bestows all Military Offices, removing Cowards, and putting in Valiant Men; and likewise, honor the deserv'd with great Titles.

The fifth call'd Cumpu, that is, The Councel over all manner of Buildings, look to the Erecting of publick Structures and Palaces, for the Emperor, his Allies, and Magistrates; and likewise to the building of his Ships, and Rigging out of whole Navies, and the repair of Bridges and Walls about the City.

The sixth Councel, call'd Humpu, are Judges, to Determine and Debate of Criminals, and all manner of Differences: The whole business of Judicatory in all the Empire depending on this Court, for they have in every Province and City, appointed Magistrates and Clerks, which advise them faithfully of all Transactions; so that they in this their Office, being of great concern, have no small trouble, but that the great number of Deputies which they imploy un∣der them, ease them of the most part; for there is a Chief-Justice of the whole Court, whom they call Ciamcui, which hath two Assistants, one sits on his

right, and the other on his left Hand, being nam'd Cilam, which three Persons in the Metropolis Peking, are accounted amongst the greatest in Quality, and according to their pleasure, every Court is divided into several Degrees; be∣sides these, all Courts have their Secretaries, Clerks, Messengers, and other Servants.

The Emperor Ya, who began to Raign before the Birth of our Savior, Anno 2357. first establish'd these six Courts, according to the Relation of Father Mar∣tin, in his first Book of the History of China, wherein he says,

Afterwards the Emperor Ya brought the State of China to a new and better form, by establishing six Courts: One of which is call'd Lipu, which takes Cognizance of the Well-behaving, or Mis-behaving of the Magistrates, and to bestow on every one according to their Merits, either higher Dignities, or else bereave them of their Places.

The second is call'd Pingpu, that is, Councel of War, or Prime Martial Court, which have the same Command over the Martial Officers, as the former over the Civil.

The third is Lipu, that is, A Court of Ceremonies, or Customs, who Supervise Ec∣clesiastick Affairs, Offerings, entertaining foreign Ambassadors, and other such like Businesses.

The fourth is call'd Hupu, which Receive, and render an Account of the Em∣peror's Revenue.

The fifth is call'd Cumpu, which take care to look after the Repairing and Building of publick Structures, the Emperor's Palaces, Walls of the Cities, Ri∣vers, Ships, and High-ways, that they may not be Dirty or Incommodious.

The sixth is Hingpu, or Court of Iustice, where all Causes relating to Life and Death are Determin'd; which Courts being so Constituted by the Emperor Ya, Govern the whole Empire of China in good Order, and acknowledge no Su∣perior but the Emperor and the Kolaos.

According to others, the Privy-Councel consists in six Persons, who never Consult but about Weighty Matters of State. This Councel or Assembly is call'd Loepol; each of these hath his peculiar Chamber, and is also the Head of another Court, in which the businesses of his Camber are Debated: These Councellors take as many to their Assistants as they judge necessary.

The first of these is President of the Councel of State, and his Assembly is call'd Lipol.

The second hath Charge of all Warlike businesses, Revenues of the Empire, and hath also Power to give Commissions.

The third looks after Architecture, keeping an account of what Edifices are yearly built in the Empire; and likewise of the Charges expended in Repair∣ing of Towns, Forts, High-ways, Streets, and Moats: This is call'd Congpol.

The fourth, which takes care of the Customs and Taxes of the Empire, are nam'd Olpol.

The fifth is (as we may call him) Lord-Chief-Justice, and Pronounces the Sentences resolv'd on in his Court, call'd Ungpol.

The sixth and last hath the Command of all Places and Offices of the Magi∣strates, and gives them to those, who by their Learning, good Deportment, and civil Carriage, are accounted the most Worthy.

In this manner the Government of China hath continu'd many Ages, which after the first Conquest by the Tartars, under the Emperor Xunchi, was not chang'd; except, only adding to every one of the six Chinese Councellors, a Per∣son

of his own Countrey; so that the Grand Councel of the Realm consisted in twelve Persons, all equally Commission'd as before-said.

These Councellors of State before-mention'd, cannot resolve on any thing without a general consent; therefore no business is concluded on, but by Plu∣rality of Voices: When the Assembly is broke up, and every Councellor con∣sults with his private Cabal; then a Tartar (as we said) is added to them; but since that, in the Raign of the Emperor Konchi, the Chineses are put out of all Of∣fices, and the Tartars have wholly Appropriated them to themselves.

Besides these six, there are nine other Chambers or Benches, call'd Kieu∣kim,* 30.24 whose Offices are several, but they chiefly take care of the Emperor's Houshold.

The first call'd Thailisu, that is, The Grand Exchequer, consists in thirteen Man∣darins, viz. one Prime Councellor, two Assistants, and ten inferior Judges; This resembles the Chancery of the Realm, perusing all the Judgments given in other Courts, and according to Equity disallowing or confirming the same.

The second call'd Quanlosu, that is, Comptroler of the Court, taking care for the Emperor's Table, observing the Transactions of the Empress, Concubines, and paying Wages to all Court-Officers, and others that follow publick Im∣ployments; entertaining foraign Ambassadors and the like Persons of Qua∣lity, and consists of one Prime Councellor, two Assistants, and six petty Judges.

The third, Thaipocusu, is like the Master of the Horse, and takes care, not on∣ly for the Horses for the Emperor's Service, but likewise (as Post-Master-Gene∣ral) for all Posts, and in general, for all others which serve the whole Empire. This consists in one prime Councellor, and six Assistants.

The fourth is that of the Ceremonies, performing all manner of Duties, requisite at publick Treats of the Emperor, Festivals, and at all other times and occasions; and likewise those which are duly observ'd every Morning at the going in and out of the Palace; and consists in one Prime Councellor, two Grand, and six Inferior Assistants.

The fifth is that of the Customs in peculiar businesses; and though this differs from the first, yet they observe the same things by the help of their Assistants. They also take care to see due Offerings perform'd at the Emperor's Grave; for Artificial Hills, Woods, and all things else; as likewise for Singing-Boys, Musicians, and Beasts for the Oblations.

There is yet another Court of Justice, whose business is only to present the Emperor with all manner of Memorials, and bringing them all together into the Chancery, like the King's Remembrancers.

All manner of Businesses are shewn the Emperor in Writing, according to* 30.25 an antient Custom of the Emperor Suven, who Raign'd before the Birth of our Saviour, Anno 73. that the Emperor having consider'd thereof, he might the bet∣ter return his Answer in Writing; for it often happend (said he) that People by fine Words, and pleasing Language, might perswade him to any thing, which granting in a sudden humor, they had often cause to repent: From whence it happens, that though the Emperors do seldom appear to their People, yet they continually converse with them by Petitions or Letters.

To the six Councellors are to be added three more, the same in manner or fashion, though differing in Offices and Imployments.

Besides all these, there are yet two more; the one call'd Qholi, and the other Tauli, and though both have their eyes over several Provinces, and every one

concern themselves with Businesses within their peculiar Spheres and Offices, minding all Transactions and Disorders in the Empire. These Councellors, as it is easie to tell of others Mens Faults, act them with great freedom, and of∣tentimes commit many unjust Actions. Their manner of complaining in this kind, is to make a Copy thereof, and to shew it to the Emperor: Immediate∣ly after the same (as they say, is Facheo) that is, Coppied out and deliver'd to Clerks appointed for that purpose, which make several Writings of it, and send them by Messengers through all the Empire, so that it is immediately known by, and against what Person those Writings are publish'd, and a large Description of what he is. These Letters, which the Chineses call Iuen, thus publish'd, the Accused against whom it is written must immediately, Volens No∣lens, do two things, the first of which is to write a Petition, not to justifie or ex∣cuse himself, but to acknowledge that the Tauli had great Reason, and he in Fault; that he hath offended, for which he is sorrowful, and ready to undergo such Punishment as they please to inflict upon him: The next is speedily to be gone and leave his Place without farther intermedling, till the Emperor hath given his Answer to the Petition, which sometimes proves favorable, being permitted to re-enjoy his Office; but otherwhiles the Emperor commands him to be punish'd according to the greatness of his Crime.

It often happens, that a Mandarin by diligence in his Office, and observing his Business more than ordinary, begets Enemies; and if any of these be acquaint∣ed with, or ally'd to any Officers of these two Courts, then theydo his Bu∣siness immediately at Court, and send the Memorials from one to another, so that the poor Mandarin is in a miserable condition, and especially if he be a Judge, Deputy-Governor, or over the Militia. Yet far greater trouble they have with the Tauli and Qholi, who neglect not the least opportunity to prose∣cute to such heighth, that the Emperor himself, though he have an inclination, cannot free them.

Trigaut describes these two Councils, Qholi and Tauli, in the following manner:

Every one of them consists in above sixty Persons, all Philosophers, aged and wise People, which before have made no small proofs of their Loyalty to the Emperor and Realm.

These Consult of all private and publick Affairs, which they Judge and Determine, being thereto authoriz'd by the Emperor's special Commission, which makes them to be not a little honor'd and respected by the People. But above all, their chiefest Office is to inform the Emperor by Letters, if any thing be acted against the Laws, and also to tell the Emperor and his Allies of their Faults.

This Office, in my Opinion, differs not much from the Lacedemonian Ephori; for they never regard the Magistrates, nor miss to tell the Emperor of his Misdemeanors, such is their Authority and Respect: And notwithstanding the Emperor is often displeased with them, yet they cease not to admonish then by words, till they have perswaded and made them sensible of their Errors.

This is likewise by the power of the Law priviledg'd to all Magistrates, and not onely to them, but every particular Substitute; yet the Petitions of the Qholi and Tauli are most esteem'd, because they do it meerly as being their Employ∣ment. The Copies of the Petitions, and the Emperor's Answer thereon, are Printed in great quantities, whereby all Court Businesses are soon known in seve∣ral Places. There are those which make a Book of all the Petitions, Printed as be∣fore;

nay, if any thing be remarkable in them for their Predecessors, it is writ∣in the Chronicles.

These Governors us'd formerly an undaunted freedom and confidence in the admonishing of their Kings and Emperors, when they saw them wander from the way of Vertue, to the great admiration of the People of Europe, which are debarr'd of this freedom. It is certain that these Governors understand the Mysteries of Philosophy, and endeavor by all means possible to extol the Heavens by Praises, and other acts of Devotion. It was not onely in ancient times, but now also customary amongst the Chineses, that the Governors, when their good admonishment was not regarded by the Emperor, they laid down their Apparel and Badges of their Offices before him, declaring publickly, that they would no longer Serve in their Places; and the more boldly they throw them down, if the Emperor designs any thing which they fear may prove pre∣judicial to the Realm, and that he will not hearken to them.

It hapned some years since, that the Emperor Vanlie, who clouded all his Atchievements by his insatiably lustful desires; for notwithstanding he had a lawful Son, yet he would declare a Bastard to be Heir of the Empire: but the Peers and Governors being against it, said they would not suffer so base an Election; yet the Emperor not regarding their Saying, all the Magi∣strates that were in the City, being to the number of two thousand, went to the Palace, and forc'd him against his will, by laying off their Liveries, to de∣clare the lawful Heir to be Successor.

The like occasion hapned Anno 1651. for when after the Death of the Guar∣dian and Unkle to the young Emperor, another Tartar would Govern, alledg∣ing that the Emperor's Age was not fit for such a Management, all the Gover∣nors laid down their Badges, whereby he was forc'd to desist: and in this man∣ner a Youth of sixteen years old call'd Xunghi, being the true Heir, took upon him the Government.

Besides these Magistrates, or Privy-Councellors at the Court, there are seve∣ral* 30.26 other Offices, or Council-Chambers, for divers Businesses, but the chiefest and most honorable is that which is call'd Hanlinyuen, into which none but Learned Doctors are admitted.

Those which are in this Imperial Office, do nothing but Read several Books, and may not trouble themselves with publick Concerns, when as nevertheless they exceed those that sit at the Helm, wherefore many endeavor greatly to get into their Society. Their Business is onely to write the Emperor's Letters, Annual Chronicles, and to make Laws and Ordinances. Out of these are also chose the Tutors for the Emperor's and Princes.

In this Society are several degrees of Honor, which every one attains to by their writing a good Style; after which they are rais'd to the highest Prefer∣ment within the Court. None are chose to be of that most eminent Office of Colao, but out of them.

Those that are in this Society make great advantages by writing Epistles and Encomiums of their Friends; nay, every one accounts himself happy if he can but get them, bestowing great Charge and trouble to that end: for if they have but the Name that they are made by them, they are accounted excellent, though never so bad.

Lastly, those that are of this Society, are chief Councellors and Judges in the Examinations of Causes, both Divine and Moral, and are by the Profes∣sors of Sciences accounted Masters of Literature.

Besides all these Courts, there is one supream Court, which is the chief in* 30.27 the whole Empire. None can be receiv'd into this, unless they have been of the Imperial Society call'd Hanlin, or Hanlinyuen before mention'd, and after they have a considerable time been in Places of Government, and made suffici∣ent proofs of their Mildness, Policy and Prudence, and that no Letters of Complaint have been set out against them. This Court consists of four, or at most of six Persons, which are call'd Colaos and Coglogs.

The Emperor Vanlie, Grandfather to the Emperor Zunchin, would never suf∣fer more than one Colao, alledging that the rest were needless.

The Quality of Colao, to speak properly, is no peculiar Office, because they take care of the general Government of the State, and are just like Supream Judges of all Courts and Dominions in the whole Empire, though they are never all together but when they dispatch grand Business for the Emperor, who being not always present upon the concluding, they are many times forc'd to be in the Palace to answer those Petitions which are hourly brought to the Empe∣ror. This done, they are necessitated to find out the Emperor, and inform him of their several Results; which having heard, he doth Justice to the Parties, and pronounces the ultimate Sentence, by either confirming or altering their Conclusions.

These Colaos are in the highest esteem, and above all the Councels or Magi∣strates, who at a certain time come and shew Reverence to them as their Supe∣riors, in an open Hall. The Colaos during this Ceremony stand up, and all the Officers according to their Degrees walk cross the Hall; coming before them they turn about, and bow their Heads down to the Ground: which Ceremo∣ny is call'd Quo Tham, that is, Passing through the Hall.

There is also a great difference betwixt the Colaos Robes and those of the other Magistrates, for their Girdles are beset with Precious Stones, which they call Yuxe, which none but Colaos may wear in the whole Empire; nay, they receive their Orders by the Emperor's own Hand, as the Knights amongst us their Honor from the King himself.

Father Nicholas Trigaut describes the Colaos Authority and Office in the fol∣lowing words:

Besides these six Courts there is another, the most eminent in the whole Realm and the Emperor's Palace: those which belong to it are call'd Colaos, and are generally three or four in number, and sometimes six. They have charge of no particular Business, but mind the general Concerns of the Em∣pire, and sit in private Consultation with the Emperor daily in his Palace. And in regard the Emperor at present doth not appear in Person at Treaties of publick Affairs of the Realm, which he formerly us'd to dispatch, they stay the whole day in the Palace, and answer Petitions, which in great numbers are brought, according as they think fit: with which Answers they go to the Emperor, who Regio Nutu, by his Beck either confirms or alters them. Thus far Trigaut.

The like Quality and Office Father Martin ascribes to them in the following* 30.28 words:

The six Courts, viz. Lypu, Hupu, Pingpu, Cungpu, Hingpu, are not concern'd in publick Matters of the whole Realm, but onely with private Consultations: for the Governors make their Requests to the Emperor by way of Petition, who having consider'd of the Business, sends them to every Court to which they belong, the Assistants whereof, after serious Consideration, acquaint the Em∣peror

with their Opinons in Writing, which he then, according to his pleasure,* 30.29 either vacates or affirms; which that he may the better be able to do, he chu∣ses some of the prime Philosophers in the whole Empire for his Assistants, who are call'd Colaos, or Caising, that is, Assistants in Government. These are in the* 30.30 next Degree to the Emperor, and aid him in dispatching of Business, Consult∣ing with him in Person, as being his Privy-Council, for he is seldom seen by any other Magistrates, Judges, Justices, or Councellors. Thus far Martin.

Those which the Chineses call Colao, we (if we observe the original of the Name) should term Assistants to the Emperor; partly for their honorable Em∣ployment, and partly as being next the Emperor, the prime Governors of the whole Realm.

Thus far of the general Government and Councils, or Offices of the Realm, which so long as the Empire was Govern'd by the Chineses, had their Residence at the Courts in Nanking and Peking, for all the Councils and Magistrates which are at the Imperial Court in Peking, were formerly (except the Colaos) in Nan∣king, the Metropolis and Court of the ancient Chinese Princes; but they were far below those in Peking, because of the Emperor's absence, who held his Court in Peking, as at this day the Tartar, Emperor of China. The Court was remov'd from Peking on this occasion:

The Emperor Humvu having driven out the Tartars Anno 1368. planted the* 30.31 Seat of the Empire in Nanking. After his Decease one of his Nephews call'd Yunlo, who in the Northern Provinces lay with an Army in the Borders of the Empire as Vice-Roy, there to be a Guard against the Tartars, concluded to be∣reave Humvu's Heir of the Crown, and make himself Master of it: To which purpose having gotten the Northern Provinces to joyn with him, he came with his Army to Nanking, and got the other. Provinces either by Policy, Strength or Presents, and expell'd Humvu's Son. But because Yunlo's greatest Strength and Dependence was in the Northern Provinces, and that it was to be believ'd, that the Tartars to re-gain the Empire would fall in on that Place, he setled himself in that part of the Countrey, and in the same City in which the Tartar Emperors, when they Govern'd the Chineses, had their Residence, there to resist the Enemy if he should make any Attempt; yet still continu'd the Emperor's Palace and the Magistrates in Nanking. But after the Conquest of China by the Tartars, Anno 1644. the City of Nanking was bereav'd of her Imperial Title, and all the Magistrates belonging to the Emperor's Court; nay, the Palace of the ancient Chinese Emperors, besides many stately Memori∣als were all pull'd down to the Ground, without any other damage to the City. The Tartars also chang'd the Name of the City and Province, and in stead of Nanking call'd it Kiangnan; and the City which formerly was call'd Intien, Kiangning. All which was done by the Tartars out of an inveterate hatred against the Taimingian Family, because Humvu, or Chu, the first raiser of that House, drove them or their Predecessors shamefully out of the Empire, after they had possess'd it a hundred and eight years.

All the Magistrates, as well belonging to the Learned Council as Martial Affairs, are by a general Name in the Chinese Tongue call'd Quonfu, that is, To set before: but for their Quality and not their Office they are call'd Lavye, or Lausu, or Lavja's, which signifies Lords, or Parents. The Netherlanders, ac∣cording to the example of the Portuguese, call them Mandarins, that is, Comman∣ders, or Governors, deriv'd from the Portuguese word Mandarim, which is, A Com∣mander.

Notwithstanding all the Magistrates or Governors flie at the Emperor's Beck, and have Orders amongst themselves, yet every one Serves in his Office with full Power, except he be commanded to the contrary by his Superiors. There are so many Governors in China, and Magistrates (they being, accor∣ding to Martinius, to the number of eleven thousand) that it is hard to know their several Orders. For this reason five or six Books of a considerable big∣ness are to be bought through the whole Empire, containing the Names of the publick Magistrates, and Governors of Provinces, with the Places of their Birth, Employments and Quality. These Books, according to Martinius, are Re-printed every three Moneths; which must be done of necessity, for in such great numbers of Magistrates, without putting those into the Books that are of less Quality, are daily great Changes, some dying, others put out of their Employments, some degraded into lesser Offices, or losing their Parents; by reason of which last Accident they are forc'd to desert their Government, though never so great, and travel home, and there Mourn three years, and therefore great numbers are continually at the Court of Peking, in hopes to succeed in the vacant Places.

As to what concerns the Government of the Provinces in particular, it* 30.32 stands in this manner:

The supream Government of a Province is generally manag'd in the Me∣tropolis, and consists in Societies, that have a general Power over the whole Province. Amongst these are two prime Courts, to which all the other, as as well of Towns as Villages, must submit, because they receive their Com∣missions from the Imperial Court. This Court consists in one sole Judge, without any Assistants or other Officers, which is the Vice-Roy of the Province, in the Chinese Tongue call'd Tutham, or Kiu-Muen, whose Command extends over all the Magistrates and People of the Province. During his time of Go∣vernment, which lasts three years, he keeps several Messengers, which go to, and come from the Court at certain times, to give an account of what hath pass'd in his Jurisdiction. He is receiv'd with great State into his Dominions. After his departure from Court his Councellors and other Officers go before, and he is conducted from City to City by the Inhabitants. Some Comman∣ders with three thousand Soldiers, besides all the Magistrates and Commonalty come to meet and receive him three Leagues from the Metropolis, where he is to keep his Court.

The second Tutang, who is of no less Power, but stays but one year in his Employment, is call'd Chayven. He is much respected and feared, for he takes an account of all manner of Business, Military or Civil, Condemns or Re∣prieves Malefactors, and also looks after the Emperor's Revenue: He Exa∣mines all the Magistrates, nay the Tutang himself, and hath also Power to pu∣nish Judges, and put great and mean Mandarins out of their Employments: The Miscarriages of the grand Mandarins he informs the Emperor of by Letters, and puts them out of their Places till he hath receiv'd an Answer from his Majesty. He also pronounces the Sentences of Death which are given in all Places of the Province, and appoints for that purpose the Day and Town whi∣ther all the Malefactors must be carry'd, that he may know the number and Names of them, and marks six or seven with a Pencil, and if more, he is ac∣counted a blood-thirsty and tyrannous Man. Those that are thus mark'd are Executed in the Field, and the other carry'd again to Prison. He is also to look after the repairing of the City Walls, Castles and other Structures. He never

goes out but with a great Train, that carry Court Badges, and other marks of severity.

There is yet sometime another Extraordinary Chayven, made at the Em∣presses Request. He hath an absolute Power, but it extends no farther than to Pardon or Reprieve; for he Visits all the Prisons in the whole Province, sets those Prisoners at Liberty which for petty Crimes lie there, and have no Ad∣versaries; and likewise such as are not able to free themselves. He Pleads in all desperate Causes, and assists People that are helpless; recalls a rashly pro∣nounc'd Sentence, and is defender of the Poor. In short, his whole Office and Employment extends to Mercy. For which reason these Magistrates are du∣ring their time of Government much respected by the common People.

The third Employment is Treasurer, who takes care of the Emperor's Re∣venue in his Province, being Employ'd by the Court of Exchequer, which sit at the Emperor's Palace. He hath two Councellors allow'd him, one of which sits on his right, and the other on his left Hand, besides twenty six Mandarins, and several other Officers. His Business is to look after the Customs, Farms, and all Revenues whatsoever belonging to the Crown. He Seals the Weights and Measures, decides all Differences concerning Moneys, punishing the guilty, or sending them (if he think fit) to higher Courts, pays the Magistrates, Al∣lies to the Emperor, Commanders and Soldiers, provides Liveries and Marks of Honor which are given to famous Scholars, pays the Money for the repair∣ing of High-ways, Bridges, Courts or Palaces of the chief Mandarins, and Ships of War. Lastly, this Treasurer hath the Command of all what comes in or goes out of the Treasury. He also receives the Emperor's Presents from the Judges, Governors, and Tauli, which every one makes according to their Employ∣ments, being in Silver Coin or Bullion, all which is by him melted into Bars, each to the value of fifty Crowns, and stamp'd with the Imperial Mark and the Melter's Name, that thereby he may know whom to accuse, if the Silver should be falsifi'd. In this manner it is carry'd into the Emperor's Treasury.

The fourth Court is call'd Gandchasci, that is, The Court of Life and Death. In* 30.33 it are two Assistants, or Tauli, whose care is to Visit, and go from Town to Town to decide all Differences, punish the guilty, perform o•…•…r Duties be∣longing to their Offices, which extend over the Militia, and Affairs, in such Pro∣vinces that lie near the Sea.

The fifth resembles a Colledge of Learned Men, ordain'd to Examine* 30.34 Youths how they profit in their Studies, and especially to observe their Masters of Art till such time as they have receiv'd their Bonnet and Orders to be Dire∣ctors. The prime of this famous Society is a Chancellor, who from time to time goes to Towns and Villages to enquire after the Carriage, Deportment and Conversation of the Learned, and to punish or chastise them according to their several Offenses.

There are yet two Persons in every City call'd Hioquon, that is, Mandarins, or Magistrates of Knowledge, which also belong to the fore-mention'd five Courts, whose Command extends onely over the Students of the City: and though they have not Power to give the Degrees due to deserving Persons, but onely to chastise them, yet nevertheless they are very strict and severe, because they continually reside in one Place, and like Proctors in our Universities, come and Examine the Scholars.

All these fore-mention'd Courts Command over the whole Province, and the Cities, Towns and Villages contain'd therein.

Moreover, every City hath peculiar Governors as here in Europe, being four eminent Mandarins, or Aldermen, as one of them is like a Mayor, which is by them call'd Chifu; Chi signifies Lord, or Governor, and Fu, A Mannor, or Tract of Land; the other three are his Assistants, and call'd Tumchu, Tumphuon, and Cheuquon; every one hath his pecular Court and Officers.

Besides these are nineteen lesser Magistrates, which look after the Towns: two of them have a prime Councellor and four inferior Assistants; the other nine onely one Councellor and one Assistant; the other eight have one supream Head, who Commands over their whole Society.

The Villages have also each of them a Judge and three Justices; the Judge is call'd Chihien, the first Justice Honchin, the second Chufu, and the third Tunfu: All these have their several Courts, or Council-Chambers, and likewise Secre∣taries, Clerks, and other inferior Officers. The Judge may pronounce Sen∣tence of Death, but cannot execute it.

Beside these Mandarins which reside in Towns and Villages, there are some which have neither power to Condemn nor Punish, but onely to give their Judgments to the Society.

The great Castles that lie distant from Towns and Villages, have also Man∣darins, or Magistrates, chosen from amongst the Clerks; for the least Office that any Person of Quality aims at, is to be Judge or Justice in a Village.

Trigaut declares the General Government of every Province, as it was in his time, after the following manner.

The Towns which belong to the prime Provinces of Peking and Nanking, are Govern'd after the same manner as all the Cities and Towns in the other Provinces. The Government of each of the thirteen Provinces consists in a Magistrate call'd Pucinsu, and another nam'd Nanganzasu; the first determines Civil Causes, and the other Criminal: They keep their Courts in great State, and reside in the Metropolis of the Province. To both these belong several petty Officers, and also the chief Magistrates, which are call'd Tauli; but be∣cause they Command over several Cities they are sometimes absent from the Metropolis.

Every Fu •…•…r County (for a Province is divided into divers Counties) hath a peculiar Governor call'd Chifu, that is, Lord of the County; and likewise over every great City, or Cheu, and over each Town, or Hien, is a Governor, the first call'd Chicheu, and the last Cihien.

These Governors of all the Counties, and chief Rulers of Cities, have every one four Assistants, which aid them in all Businesses that happen in their Ju∣risdiction, being all their Deputies.

The Chifu, or Governor of the County, hath his Residence in one of the Ci∣ties, and determineth all things as Chief; for when any Businesses are consult∣of by the Chicheu and Cihien, they acquaint him therewith as their Superior, and in the first Degree.

It is to be observ'd, that the Chifu, or Governors of the Territories, and his Court, and the whole County receive their Denomination from the City in which they reside: as for example, the Governor keeps his Court in the City Nunciang, and that City gives denomination to the whole County, Governor and Court, so that they are call'd Nunciangers.

But because an account must be given of the Government of every peculiar Province to the Court at Peking, therefore they Commission two other besides the fore-mention'd Magistrates to every Province from the Imperial City, to Su∣pervisor

[illustration]

to the rest: one of them resides constantly in the Province, and is call'd Tutam; the other is yearly sent from the Court, and nam'd Ciayven. The Command of the first being great over all the Mandarins, Magistrates, Subjects, Militia, and other grand Concerns, may be compar'd to the European Vice-Roys. The last resembles a Commissioner of Enquiry; yet by the Emperor's Com∣mands he hath an Eye over the Business of the whole Province, viewing of Cities and Castles, Examines all Magistrates, punisheth the meanest, informs the Emperor of the Misdemeanors of the Grandees, and after what manner every one officiates his Place, and is the onely Person amongst all the Magi∣strates in the Province that pronounces Sentence of Death; he is fear'd and respected by every one.

Besides these Magistrates, there are many others in Cities, Towns and Vil∣lages, as also many Generals and Collonels through the whole Empire, but especially in Places bordering the Sea, and Garisons. Thus far Trigaut.

All the Magistrates (saith the same Trigaut) are under nine Orders; all com∣prehended under the Philosopher and Military Man. Every one in these Orders receives his Revenue from the publick Stock either in Rice or Mony, though but little in respect of their Authority; for the Salary of the prime and chief Order amounts not to above a thousand Ducats yearly. Those which are of the same Order receive Wages alike, whether Philosophers or Military Persons; for the chief of the Soldiers get as much as the Supream of the Learned.

All the Magistrates have a private Seal of their Office, given them by the* 30.35 Emperor Humvu. What they write in their Law they Seal onely with Red, which is a kind of Earth, so Red, that it is like a Vermilion, and digg'd out of the Mountain Tape, near the City Lingkien in the Province of Xanso. This Mark the Mandarins keep with great care, for upon the loss of it they are not onely put out of their Employments, but severely punish'd; wherefore when e're they go out they carry it with them in a Box, or Cabinet, Lockt up and Seal'd, which they never suffer to be out of their sights.

There is an excellent harmony, as Trigaut witnesseth, betwixt the superior and inferior Magistrates, and between the Governors and Privy-Council, and other Grandees and the Emperor; which they not onely manifest by their rea∣diness in obeying him, but also by outward appearance: for they never neg∣lect their usual Visits at certain times, nor the Ceremony of Presenting. Nei∣ther do the meaner Magistrates speak with the higher before the Bench, or else∣where, but upon their bended Knees, and with peculiar Reverence. The same Ceremony the Subjects use to the Governors of their Cities, notwithstanding they know that they never took their Degrees in Learning, and before their entrance to be Magistrates were chosen from amongst the meanest of the Com∣monalty.

All Chineses, if they follow any honorable Employment, though they are Mandarins, put on the Bonnet of their Office when they will speak, shew Reve∣rence, or appear before any of a higher Quality; for to come without, would be accounted uncivil.

The Mandarins Stools are round like Chirurgeons Chairs, the Back and Arms thereof cover'd with a Tygers Skin, or some other Beast. Their Beards are also set after the same manner, as may appear in the Sculp, wearing them very thin, and letting them grow down without either Clipping or Shaving their Mustacho's hanging downwards; they also shoot forth close by their Ears, but grow not down to their Lips, nor under their Chin, but most fre∣quently with three Whiskers on each side, and one underneath.

The Mandarins and other Grandees, nay the Emperor himself, let their Nails grow long, which they account no small sign of Gentility and Ornament. Some Ladies, because they would not break them, wear little Cases over them.

None of the Magistrates Officiate above three years in a publick Employ∣ment, except he be new Commission'd by the Emperor, but is generally pro∣moted to a higher Dignity. This is done because none should get too many Friends, or gain too much upon the Hearts of the People, in dependency of which he might practise against the State, as it hath often hapned.

The chiefest Governors of the Provinces, Counties and Cities, as the Pucin∣fu, Naganzafu, Cifu, Ciceu, Cihien, and the like, must every three years, according to the Emperor's Order, appear at the Court in Peking, and there shew Reve∣rence and Obeisance to the Emperor.

At the same time a general Muster is made at the Court of all the Magi∣strates, which through the whole Realm are plac'd in the several Provinces, as well of those that are there present as of those that are absent, where a strict Enquiry is made of their Behavior: From which Enquiry they conclude whom to depose, whom to promote, and whom to punish, without regarding or re∣specting of Persons; and the Emperor himself cannot alter any thing resolv'd on by the fore-mention'd Judges in this general Scrutiny.

Those that are to be punish'd are not the meanest, nor the fewest, but some∣times to the number of four thousand, whose Names are set down in a Book, which is afterwards Printed and publish'd to the whole Empire. Moreover, the Condemned are, according to Trigaut, divided into five Parties, or accord∣ing to Semedo, the chiefest Misdemeanors for which the Mandarins are punish'd, are chiefly seven: The first contains the Covetous, which have violated the Law by Bribes, and defrauded the Commonalty, and appropriated the Lands, Goods or Chattels of their Subjects unjustly to themselves: for which Offence they are not onely bereav'd of their Employments for ever, but also all the

Marks and Priviledges of Magistracy. Amongst the second are reckon'd such as have not punish'd the Criminals according to their desert, but conniv'd for favor or affection: these are also bereav'd of their Places, Liveries and Privi∣ledges. The third are very aged People, and those that are too negligent and slothful in their Offices; for which they lose their Employments, yet not their Marks and Priviledges. Amongst the fourth are reckon'd those which are heedless and hasty, pronouncing Sentence without any consideration, and go unadvisedly about publick Affairs: these are put into meaner Offices, or else sent to such Places in the Realm which are suppos'd to be of a more easie Go∣vernment. Amongst the last are those which Govern others and their own Families indiscreetly, and live debauch'd, contrary to the gravity of Magi∣strates: these are bereav'd of their Office and Quality for ever.

The same Examination is also perform'd with the Magistrate at the Court but once every year: And after the same manner, and at the same time with great strictness the Officers of the Soldiers are likewise Muster'd.

None in the whole Realm is Commission'd to Rule in that Province where∣in he was born, except onely Military Officers: This is done because the first should not favor their Friends or Relations; but the last out of a love to their native Countrey should defend it more carefully.

When any Lord Serves as Magistrate, none of his Sons or Servants may go out of the House, make Visits, Converse with any Persons, or Treat about any Business, for fear they should be suspected to take Bribes; but he is attend∣ed by Servants given to all Magistrates upon the publick Account. When he goes out himself, he Seals the Doors (either of publick or private Houses, wherein Justice is administred) with a Seal, that none of the Houshold can come out without his knowledge.

The whole Realm in the time of the Chineses was Govern'd by Philoso∣phers; to whom all the Soldiers and Commanders shew'd great Reverence, and a peculiar Ceremony and Respect. Of these Philosophers consisted the chief Council of War, their Designs and Contrivances being better respected by the Emperor than those of the Militia Officers, which seldom or never were call'd to Council: Wherefore none that were of a noble Mind and respected, concern'd themselves about Warlike Affairs, but rather endeavor'd to have the least Degree in the Council of Philosophers, than to be the greatest Comman∣der in Martial Concerns; the Philosophers enjoying the greater Estates, and being held in much higher esteem by the People. But since the Tartars Conquest of China, the Military Affairs are in greater Request, and the Chineses exercise them∣selves so much in Arms with the Tartars, that they lay aside their Learning.

Very strictly they observe the Governors and Commanders; for besides the Tauli and Quauli, which according to their Offices take cognisance of all Trans∣actions, and inform the Emperor thereof. Every Province hath a peculiar Vi∣sitor, which is to punish or accuse Offenders.

The Emperor retrenches all his Officers Charges, by which he bereaves them of the opportunity of making Parties, and running into Debt. So soon as any one receives a Commission for Employment, when he goes to take possession of it, all Charges for his Person, Servants and Family, besides those of his Jour∣ney, as well by Water as by Land, (under which are reckon'd Vessels, Wagons, Horses, Men, and all the rest of the Retinue) are paid out of the Emperor's privy Purse. He goes into no Inn all the Way which he passes, but Palaces are made ready in the Towns and Villages, with all Necessaries, in which he takes 〈1+ pages missing〉〈1+ pages missing〉

[illustration]

gaping Mouthes; one hath two Horns on the Crown of his Head, with Ears and Hair like those of a Hog, with their Hands ty'd together in a Praying posture, for both are said to be Servants to Hoaquan; the other, which hath no Horns on his Head, but one which behind turns with a sharp Point, holds in his right Hand a Pike or Lance, with a Serpent wound about the top of it.

Above on the left side of Hoaquan appears a Dragon, as it were flying out from the Clouds; besides, all manner of horrid Representations stand either at the Entrance of the Temple, or behind the Images.

Another Idol call'd Vitek, and by others Ninifo, whom they suppose to have been a very wise Man, the Chineses honor with peculiar Reverence and bended Knees, which is perform'd by the grandest Mandarins, placing his Image on the Altars in the Temples, with burning Lamps and Perfuming-pans round about him. The Idol, a deformed Monster, is often represented after that manner, as appears by the inserted Sculp, with his Breast bare, a very great Head, large Teats, and Tun-belly, the left hand holding a Garland, and great Iron Rings in the Ears, from whence, they say, the use of Ear-rings came first into China. Other Images are made sitting with their Legs across under them, after the Eastern manner: Some pick their Ears with an Ear-picker, under which they hide a great Mystery; others with a Tool like a Curry-Comb, scrape their Shoulders and Necks; all which the Chineses, especially the vulgar, wor∣ship for great Saints, and Offer Perfumes, Meat, and several other things to them.

The Priests of this Sect are call'd Ociams or Hoxons, which against the Cu∣stom* 30.36 of the Countrey continually shave their Beards and Hair, but go Cloth'd like others, differing in nothing but their Bonnets: Some wander like Men∣dicants up and down the Countrey, asking Alms; others live like Recluses in the Recesses of Rocks and Mountains, where they suffer hard Penance; others* 30.37 in publick make narrow Chambers of Boards, struck full of Nails on all sides with the Points inwards, in which they lock themselves for a whole Moneth,

[illustration]

[illustration]

and stand without Supporters; some promise to eat no Flesh, but drink onely Cha or Tee, into which they put Balls made of Beef and dry'd in the Sun before they drink it. There are others of this Sect that belong to no Cloysters, nor are receiv'd into them as Guests but onely for one day, being Exiles, Vaga∣bonds* 30.38 and Robbers: But the greatest part of them, being to the number of two or three Millions, live in the Cloysters of the Temples, and are maintain'd by the Revenues allow'd them of old by the Emperors that were liberal Be∣nefactors to their Fraternity; nevertheless they endeavor by one thing or other to maintain themselves: They despise (according to Semedo) a Marry'd Life, living five or six hundred cloyster'd together. They also live (saith he) very strictly, eating neither Fish nor Eggs, nor drink Wine. These beg Alms, Sing, and perform peculiar Ceremonies and Prayers against Fire, Tempests, com∣mon Calamities, and sudden Death: In which Services they wear onely a Hood and Fan.

These Priests are accounted the meanest of the People, and Raff of the whole Empire, because they are all Extracted from the Vulgar: for in their Infancy being sold as Servants to the Osiams, they become Scholars, and succeed their Tutors in their Office and Service, an Invention found out by them to advance themselves; for there is never any found, that of his own free will, resolving to live a holy Life, that will go into the Cloysters amongst such Company.

Through Ignorance and ill Breeding the Slave-Pupils seldom improve themselves beyond their Tutors, but are just the same in their whole Demea∣nor; and as by Nature we have a propensity to Vice, not being cultivated, so they from time to time degenerate, growing worse; wherefore they learn no Morality, nor attain to the knowledge of Literature, except accidentally some, though very few, which naturally inclin'd to Learning, endeavor the same by their own Industry. Notwithstanding they have no Wives, they are so inclin'd to the Female Sex, that they cannot be kept from conversing with

common Strumpets but by great punishments, viz. those that attempt it are, if taken in the Act, burnt with a hot Iron through the Neck or Leg, in which they put an Iron Chain of eight or ten Fathom long, besides great Shackles; in which manner the Offender must walk naked along the Streets till he hath begg'd ten Tail of Silver for the benefit of his Cloyster: And that he may per∣form this Penance, one of his Fraternity goes along with him, and with a Whip severely draws Blood from his naked Skin: The Chain by reason of its great weight is also so troublesom to his Wound, that Blood and Corruption gushes out of it. Others are for several days put into little Houses like our Cages, driven full of Nails with the Points inward, wherein the Offender not being able to lie down, is forc'd to stand upright, without either Meat or Drink.

The Cloysters of these Osciams are built in Inclosures according to every ones bigness: every Inclosure hath a constant Treasurer or Governor, whom his Scholars which he hath bought for his Servants (whereof he hath as many as he will or can maintain) succeed as by Inheritance.

They acknowledge no Superior in these Cloysters; and every one erects as many Huts or Booths in his appointed Apartment as he can, which is customary through the whole Empire, yet chiefly in the Metropolis of Peking. The Cells when built they Let to their great advantage, to Strangers which come thither to Trade, which makes these Cloysters rather seem publick Inns than Places of Sanctity, regarding nothing less than the worshipping of Idols, or teaching that wicked Doctrine.

Though the Condition of the Inhabitants of these Cloysters is mean and despicable, yet nevertheless they are by many hir'd for a small Reward to per∣form Funeral Ceremonies, and some other such like Offices.

Now at present this Doctrine is not a little come into request again, many Temples being erected for the same. All the Followers thereof are either Eunuchs, Women, or ignorant People. Yet besides these there are some which boast themselves the prime Maintainers of this Doctrine, and are call'd Ciaicum, that is, Abstinentiaries, for they refrain in their Houses all their Life∣times from eating either Flesh or Fish, and reverently worship with Offerings and Prayers a row of Images, and sometime are sent for to their Neighbors Houses to Pray with them.

The Women, separated from the Men, maintain this retir'd Life in Cloy∣sters, and shaving the Hair from the Crown of their Heads, despise Marriage. The Chineses call them Nicu, which signifies A Nun; but not many of them live together, and are far less in number than the Men. Thus far Trigaut.

These Cloysters (according to Semedo) are very large; the Walls which sur∣round them makes them seem like a City, divided into Streets, open places, and inhabited Houses, in each of which two or three have their Residences, viz. a Master and his Scholars, which are sufficiently provided for; and also all the Houses receive an equal proportion of the Emperor's Allowance.

The Governor of the Cloyster, who hath the general Command over all, takes no cognisance but of peculiar Businesses which are brought before him; and what concerns other things, and the Government of their Houses, he leaves to themselves. Yet nevertheless he gives Offices, and Titles to those that are to receive Strangers, whoe're he be that comes to see their Cloysters, and beat on a Drum that stands at the Gate; they are oblig'd to go before him to the number of thirty in their Ceremonial Habit: Coming to him they Sa∣lute

him, and walk before him to the Place where he desires to be; which they do again at his Return. They are under the Jurisdiction of the Council of Customs; but upon the Executing of Punishments, when deserv'd, they are us'd more favourably than when Tri'd by the common Law.* 30.39

The Disciples or Followers of this Doctrine, which at this Day are in great numbers, live together, never Marry, let the Hair of their Head and Beards grow very long, and wear ordinary Clothes, which differ little from the other in fashion, except in one thing, which shews that they are in Service; for in stead of a Bonnet they wear a little Garland, which covers just the Crown of their Heads. They account the last and greatest Good of Mankind to consist in bodily Goods, and the enjoyment of a quiet and peaceable Life, without toyl or trouble; They acknowledge two Deities, the one more powerful than the other; They allow one Paradice and a Hell: the Paradice, which (ac∣cording to their saying is joyn'd to the satisfaction of the Body) is not onely for another Life, but also for this on Earth, and consists herein, that by means of a certain Exercise and Obedience, some that are old may become young Children; others may make themselves Xinsien, that is, Happy on Earth, to pos∣sess what they please speedily with a wish, flie from one place to another, though very remote, and go to Feasts, and the like. They are lovers of Mu∣sick, and use several Instruments; on which account they are invited to Fune∣rals and publick Solemnities, and serve the Emperor and Mandarins in making their Offerings; They boast themselves to be Soothsayers, and promise to pro∣cure Rain, and clear Houses haunted by Spirits.

All the Chineses are strangely inclin'd to Superstition, but especially the Fol∣lowers of this second Sect, and give great credit to Sorcery, and Predictions of future things.

The Emperor's Astronomers (according to Semedo) do not a little uphold this Superstition, because they foreshew ensuing Events from the colour of the Heavens and tempestuous Weather, Thunder out of Season, by several aspects of the Sun, which they reckon to be twenty two, and from sixteen other Appearances; with all which they acquaint the Emperor: And they chiefly employ their time in foretelling either Peace or War; as also Sicknesses, Death, Changes, Insurrections, and the like: to which purpose they make Almanacks, or yearly Prognostications, which are divided into Moons, and the Moons again into Days, the Days into fortunate or unfortunate Hours, either to undertake any thing or let it alone, as to go a Journey, remove out of a House, Marry, bury the Dead, build Houses, and the like.

By this manner of Cheating the Chineses are so deluded, and so strictly do* 30.40 they follow these Observations, that they govern themselves wholly thereby; for if the Almanack commands to do any thing on such a Day, though all the Elements were against it, they will not neglect it.

These Astronomers, according to a very ancient Custom, are punish'd with Death, if they through neglect do not foretell the Eclipse of the Sun and Moon, or accidentally commit any mistakes in their Prognostication: for the Chineses account it a deadly sin not to assist the Sun or Moon when they are darkned, with Offerings and beating of Drums, and other noise, fearing else they would be devour'd by a Dog or Dragon: wherefore the Emperor in∣form'd by People experienc'd in the Course of the Heavens, of the approach∣ing Darkness, immediately sends Messengers Post through all the Cities of the Empire to give notice of the Day and Hour on which the Eclipse will hap∣pen:

whereupon the Magistrates and Citizens carefully watch for the time, and prevent the threatning danger by beating on divers tinkling and Copper Basons.

They have Temples that are drawn or Carriages made for that purpose, in which the Women deliver out their Almanacks; wherein a Receipt is written how they may Conceive.

Trigaut saith, that no superstitious Custom hath spread it self so far through the whole Empire, as that in the observation of fortunate and unfortunate Days and Hours; so that the Chineses in all their Actions observe the time exactly: To which purpose two sorts of Almanacks are Printed every year, which upon the Emperor's Command are dispersed through the whole Em∣pire, which makes the Fallacy the more believ'd.

These annual Prognostications are sold in such abundance, that most Houses have them: In them they find what they too punctually observe, not onely the critical Days, but the precise Hours and Minutes at what time they shall begin or desist in any Negotiation or Business whatsoever. Besides, these Writers of the annual Predictions go higher, Composing for their profit Books more puzling and mysterious, with large Comments on the good and evil Days, with more accurate Directions, especially concerning Buildings, Marriages, or Travel, and the like Business of consequence; and though it often happens that the Weather fall out tempestuous, let it Thunder and Lighten, Blow or Rain, yet they will begin, though they make never so little progress.

Nasirodin, a Persian Author, who flourish'd Anno 1265. tells us, that the Chi∣neses, by him call'd Katayans, have a Circle of twelve Days, which according to the Instruction of the Astronomers, they use in chusing the time to under∣take or delay any Business of consequenc.

These twelve Days are by the Chineses call'd as followeth:

• Ching, that is, Perfecting.
• Xeu, that is, Receiving.
• Cai, that is, Opening.
• Pi, that is, Locking.
• Ting, that is, Affirming.
• Che, that is, Serving.
• Po, that is, Breaking.
• Vi, that is, Running danger.
• Kin, that is, Raising.
• Chu, that is, Dividing.
• Muen, that is, Exchanging.
• Ping, that is, Making even.

Four of these twelve Days are call'd He, that is Black, and are accounted unfortunate; four Hoang, that is, Yellow, which are lucky, and promise some good; two Hoen, that is, Brown and Dark, and esteem'd ominous.

Others undertake to tell Fortunes by even and odd Numbers, and with white or black Representations of Men and Beasts, which they alter sixty four times to please the liberal Inquisitor. Some (after our manner) pick Pockets by Calculating Nativities, and from thence tell the Fortune that shall attend a Man in his whole Life; Others wheedle them out of their Money, by Phi∣siognomy and Palmestry, and such Gipsie-like tricks; others by Dreams; some from certain words which they observe in speaking; divers from the shape of the Body, or sitting of a Person, and an innumerable many actions more. Others go farther, selling the Winds, and fair or foul Weather, and take upon them the Dominion of the floating Element; for when any Mer∣chants have Ships at Sea, or some ready to set Sail, they address themselves to

[illustration]

these, who live on the Shores or Banks of the Rivers, that they may have a speedy and safe Voyage. They generally reside two and two together, as you may see by this Sculp; one sits on a Bench betwixt two great Bun∣dles of Rushes, wearing a flat Cap on his Head, and on his Body a wide Coat, carelesly folded about him, in his left Hand a Book, in which Reading he mutters a considerable time. Next him sits his Companion on two Fish-Baskets, likewise with a flat Cap, and the upper part of his Body almost naked, behind over his right Shoulder hangs a blown-up Bag, out of which he lets as much Wind as any one is minded to purchase; in his left Hand he holds a great Mallet, with which he strikes several times hard on the Ground, that the Spi∣rit of the Winds, (who, as they make them believe, appears in the Air, sitting on a great Bird in the shape of a Man, with a broad brimm'd Hat and a wide Coat) may descend. But this Fancy is not so much practis'd of late.

The Romans and Greeks agreed herein with the Chineses, and most of it is at this day us'd amongst them: one thing there is which may properly be said to be the Chineses; it consists in the chusing of Land to build private or publick Structures upon, or bury the Dead in, chusing it by the likeness of the Head, Tail and Feet of several Dragons, which they suppose to live under Ground, and believe, that on them the welfare, not onely of Families, but also of Ci∣ties, Provinces, and the whole Empire depends.

The Chineses account one Dragon, whom they call Lung, for the greatest fore-runner of good Luck.

Before the time of the Family of Hia, nay, the Emperor Fohi, who began his Reign Anno 2952. before the Birth of Christ, it is said, That a Dragon was seen flying from a Pool; and to make the Business seem of greater conse∣quence and consideration, they added, That they had observ'd sixty four Marks or Characters on his Back, which, according to their Sages, have my∣sterious significations.

The Chineses in a manner ascribe all things to a Dragon, and believe, that

not onely all humane Fortune, but also Rain, Hail, Thunder and Lightning, are as that Monster orders. They also affirm, That there is a Dragon under the Earth, but chiefly under the Mountains; and this is the reason why with such great Care and Charge they observe the parts of the Dragon in the making of their Graves; for according to the goodness of the Earth they value the Riches and Fortune of the whole Family; just as the Astronomers, from the Conjunction of several Planets, prognosticate future Events. For this reason also the Chinese Emperors bear a Dragon in their Arms, as the Romans an Eagle; nay, the Emperor's Apparel is Embroider'd with Dragons, and like∣wise on all the Furniture for his Table and whole House is Engraven the same; nay, the whole Court is every where full of painted Dragons.

But above all it is to be admir'd, that the Chineses paint five Claws at the Feet of the Emperor's Dragons. None but those who are of Imperial Blood, or peculiar Favourites of the Emperor, may bear a Dragon in his Coat of Arms: yet if others do use this same Bearing, they must on pain of Death not give above four Claws.

They say that the Foam of a Dragon impregnated one of the Emperor Ie's Concubines without the use of a Man: which Fable the Chineses thus relate:

In the time of the Family of Hia (say they) a Dragon was seen, which vanish'd on a sudden, and left a Froth on the Earth: This Froth being of a Dragon, was like a costly, nay, that which is more, a holy Relick, and lock'd up in a golden Coffer, and preserv'd till the Reign of the Emperor Siveni; when afterward at his Command, without knowing wherefore, the Chest was open'd, and this Slime leap'd forth as if it had been living, and ran to and again through the Palace, none being able to hold it, and at last got into the Seraglio, and there divirginated one of great Beauty, kept for the Emperor; from hence, after the full time (as the Chineses relate) she was deliver'd of a fair Female: The Mother fearing to gain an ill Name, and the Emperor's displeasure, laid down the Infant, which two Marry'd Peo∣ple, that accidentally walk'd by there, hearing it cry, took up, and carrying it home, brought it up as their own Child.

In the third Year of the Emperor Ie's Reign the fore-mention'd Infant being grown Marriagable, her Foster-father was on some occasion accus'd of a certain Crime, and put in Prison: whereupon he proffering the Virgin (who was endu'd with incomparable Beauty) for his Ransom to the Emperor, was not onely released, but return'd home with great Riches. But the Em∣peror was so strangely surpris'd with the exceeding Beauty of his new Mistris, that he was in a manner distracted, and forsook the lawful Empress, and his Son born by her, and took Paosua (for so the Virgin was call'd) for his Spouse, and elected Pefo, the Son of Paosua, in stead of Ikie, the lawful Son of the Empress, to succeed him in the Throne, against the consent of all his Substitute Governors.

Ikie the true Heir, being enrag'd by the great wrong which he had suffer'd, fled from his Father to his Uncle King Xin, in the South part of the Province of Xensi, at the place where the City Nanyang stands at this day.

Paosua during this time dwelt with the Emperor in all prosperity; but one thing he observ'd, that he never saw her Laugh, which was very unpleasing to him; therefore he try'd several ways to win a Smile from her. At the same time a Difference arising, and overtures and threatnings of War being betwixt him and the Tartars, he put his Militia in a posture of Defence; which done,

and to teach them Alarms, he fir'd his Beacons when there was no need: whereupon the Palaces, and all places every where were throng'd with the gather'd Soldiers; which too often repeating, and no appearance of any Enemy, gave her occasion to laugh heartily, to the great joy of the fond Emperor: Which false Alarms being so commonly, when they came to be real, and not being believ'd, brought on that negligent carelesness in not obeying, that it lost him his Life and Empire.

Amongst other things also, Paosua took great delight in the noise which Silk makes when torn by force; wherefore the Emperor to recreate her, always spent his time in her Presence, with tearing and rending of Silk.

Mean while the Emperor sent a Party to King Xin to fetch his fled Son again; but Xin refus'd to deliver the Prince, unless he should be declar'd Heir to the Empire: The Emperor enrag'd thereat, march'd with an Army against Xin; who unequal to the Emperor, yet of greater Policy, joyn'd with the Tartars, and in the Night falls suddenly on the Emperor's Quarters: where∣upon the Beacons being fir'd as before, the Soldiers seeing the Flame, suppos'd that the Emperor as formerly was onely caressing of his Empress, neglected their Duties; and therefore making no resistance, most of them were taken sleeping by the Enemy, and the Emperor himself slain by his Brother and Son.

But to return; As Trigaut tells us, several eminent Persons Study this My.* 30.41 stery of Dragon-Knowledge, and are sent for from remote Places to advise withal when publick Buildings are to be erected, that they may so lay their Platform suting with the benevolent Signatures from the posture of the Dra∣gon, that the Edifice may for ever after be more free from Casualties: for these Astronomers, as our Astrologers, observe the good and evil Aspects of the Planets, with the several Configurations of the fixed Stars, so they take their Marks from the situation of Mountains and Rivers, and whatever else makes a variety, that signifies good success, on which they say, not onely the preservation of the House, but the welfare and Honor of the Family depends.

Semedo calls these Surveyors Tili.

Others (saith he) which they call Tili, endeavor to to observe, not onely the Situation of the Earth, but the Posi∣tions of the Planetary Aspects in the celestial Houses, so to make more hap∣py their terrestrial Habitations.

It is a very ancient Custom, and us'd to this day, to take their Observations of good or ill success, from the Colour, Spots, Motions, Legs, and Shell of a Tortoise. And likewise, as the Augurs of old, from the Notes of Birds, and noise of Beasts, and also whate're they meet with in the Morning, the reflect∣ing shadows of the Sun on peculiar Houses; for if at their going out in the Morning they meet any one in Mourning Apparel at their Door, Bonzies or the like, they look upon it as an ill Omen. In short, whatsoever inconvenience happens to peculiar Houses, Cities, Provinces, or the whole Empire, they ascribe it to their miserable Fortune, or something or other that is wrongly plac'd in the Houses, Towns, or the Emperors Palace.

All Streets, Shops and Markets, are full of these Astronomers, Surveyors, Soothsayers, Prognosticators, or in a word, Juglers and Deluders, promising good Fortune to all. Many of these are blind, and most of them poor People, yet notwithstanding they will still hearken to their cheating Fopperies. The blind Men run along the Streets playing on Pipes, but the Women beat on lit∣tle Kettles, whereby they give notice to all those that will be cozen'd and

[illustration]

know their Fortunes. Neither are obscure Hamlets onely full of these Delu∣ders, but also great Cities and Courts of Grandees swarm with them; with which Practice onely some maintain themselves, keep brave Houses, and ga∣ther great Riches; for High and Low, Noble and Ignoble, nay, the Emperor himself, and all the Magistrates respect them.

They say that some of these Fortune-tellers reside on desolate and solitary Mountains, between the Clefts of Rocks and barren Hills like Hermits; whi∣ther also great numbers of People resort to know the Events of future things. Some onely write strange Characters and▪ Chinese Letters on Boards, contain∣ing the future Condition of the Enquirers; yet their promising oftentimes hath a double meaning.

These Wizards have many times horrible Toads that sit near them, with a thick gray speckled Skin, and opening their Jaws, (as they say) with their poisonous Breath blast and wither the Grass round about them.

These generally sit bare-headed, being close shaven, and with their Feet naked, picking their Ears whilst they mutter several words to themselves.

In the time of the Emperor Hiaou, who Reigned Anno 142. before the Nati∣vity of Christ, many Women, especially at the Emperor's Court, Studied Ma∣gick and Charms, by which making themselves to appear much fairer than they were, they subjected the Male Sex according to their pleasures. Of these some got into the Prince Guei's Court, the Emperor's Son begotten by a lawful Wife, but without his knowledge, because he, according to the Chinese Wri∣tings, was of a good and pious Nature: but attaining to years, he betook him∣self, being ensnar'd by the fore-mention'd Charms, wholly to lasciviousness.

Amongst other things, they say there are certain Drugs, by the Chineses call'd Kuan, which if the Powder thereof be given any Man to drink by a Woman, it makes them mad after them, like our Love-Powders: But they had worse Ingredients, with which they occasion'd Distempers, nay, Death on whom∣soe're they pleas'd; by which means Li, the Emperor's Son, begotten by one

of his Concubines, was kill'd in the nineteenth Year of his Age, together with his Wife, Children, and most of his Family, except one Nephew.

But the whole Empire is strangely besotted with the study of Alchymie, there∣by* 30.42 to get the Philosophers-Stone, by which they not only Inrich themselves by turning all things to Gold and Silver, but also that Elixar makes them Immor∣tal, which many Emperors before and since the Nativity have endeavor'd to at∣tain to.

The Chineses affirm, That there are Rules and Commandments of both these Arts, found out first by very Ancient, Learned, (which the Chineses reckon amongst their Saints) and afterwards from one to another, deliver'd to their Successors: They say also, that these first Inventors, after having▪ perform'd many excellent and soveraign Works, ascend both with Soul and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 toge∣ther to Heaven, when they began to grow weary living on Earth.

They also tell us, That anciently a Person liv'd without the Walls of the City Nanchang, which assisted many needy People, and •…•…ast p•…•…ntiful▪ Alms amongst the Poor, because he by the Art of Chymistry could make pure Silver. He also (say they) had by the help of Divine Arts, a Dragon, who threaten'd the Ruine of the City; after which, having Chain'd him to an Iron Column of an exceeding bigness, he, his whole House and Family ascended up to Hea∣ven; For this reason, the Citizens out of a Superstition, erected a great Chap∣pel for him; and the foremention'd Iron Column, the better to keep up the re∣putation of the Fable, is there to be seen at this day.

But however they decline the converting of Metals into Gold or Silver by the Stone, yet the Emperor himself, and most Eminent Persons of the Empire, make it a great part of their business to study Immortality, from the promis'd Restauration of Youth, by the wonderful Operations of this Elixar: To which purpose, as there are many Students, so there is no want of Masters; and the whole City of Peking every where pester'd with their Laboratories; and though never so much deluded, yet fresh hopes carry them on with a fervent desire to bring their Work to Perfection; being perswaded by these Mountebanks, that their failings happen'd from some mistakes, but now, if they would begin again, they make no question, being since better inform'd, to finish the so long expected and happy Work.

But before we leave our Alchymists, take this from Martinius, which he tells of the Emperor Hiaou, who had not his equal amongst the Chineses, He was as their Histories say, much transported with a belief, that by this Art he might not onely be the Wealthiest, the Happiest, and the Greatest of all Princes, but also be Crown'd with Immortality: From hence he receiv'd the Title of Van Sin, that is, Ten thousand Years, which hath descended to all the Emperors to this Day.

To this great purpose he built a new Palace accordingly, all of Cedar, Cy∣press, Camphire, and the like sweet smelling Woods; the scent of which, as they say, might be perceiv'd (a) twenty one Chinese Furlongs from thence.* 30.43

Amidst this wonderful Structure, he rais'd a Tower all of Copper, of twen∣ty Rods high, (a marvellous piece of Work) with a winding Pair of Stairs in the middle, from the bottom to the top: There was also a Copper Bason, Cast in the form of a Hand, which every Morning was fill'd with early De•…•…v, wherein the Emperor steep'd the Oriental Pearls to soften them, being part of the Preparations of the Medicines of Immortality: But at last they wrought up∣on his Belief so far, that the Elexar was ready, which Drinking, would so per∣petuate

Youth, that he should live according to his Title, Ten thousand Years, that is, He should be Immortal.

The Longevity-Potion being brought, was set on the Table, which should begin the Work of Youths Renovation; when one of his Councellors, a Minister of State, first disswading him from the taking of it, suddenly threw the Liquor down upon the Floor; at which, the Emperor much incens'd that he should lose his expectation of Immortality, which had cost so much time and treasure in Preparing, consulted with what Death he should punish so bold an Offen∣der; when he that stood thus liable to his fury, spake thus mildly and undis∣compos'd to him.

Sir, You cannot put me to Death, for I have drunk the same Medicine of Immortali∣ty already, and am Immortal; so if I die I am guiltless, because the Medicine wants the promised Efficacy, and therefore use your pleasure; yet I suspect, that if your Indignation fall upon me, what I have drunk will be of no Defence, and I feel I shall certainly suffer Death, being conscious of the Deceit of these that are Trapanners for Bread. Which mol∣lifying Speech so pacify'd the Emperor, that he gave him his Life; yet how∣soever, the Emperor prosecuted the same business, to make himself Rich, Hapyy, and Immortal.

There are also a third kind of Philosophers, by Semedo call'd Taokiao, and by Trigaut, from the first Promoter, Lonzu; as likewise by Semedo, Tunsi or Tusi, being the first broacher of this Doctrine, which agrees with the Epicureans, who affirm, a 30.44 That there is no pleasure after death, and therefore they indulge what e're in their life seems to be easie and happy, so to prolong their lives, to continue their present welfare they use all means possible, and not onely study Longevity, but also how to be Immortal by ingenious discoveries for self-preservation.

But though Laotan accounts the Summum Bonum to consist in Pleasures, yet Martinius finds him to be no way Atheistical, but declares it every where pro∣bable, that Laotan hath acknowledg'd one Supream Deity, saying, Tao, or Great Understanding hath no Name; he hath Created Heaven and Earth, he is without shape; moves the Stars, though he himself is immoveable; and because I know not his Name, I will call him Tao, or Supream Understanding, without form.

The same Philosopher makes mention in another place, of The Creation of the Heavens.

It is not to be credited, what the Fathers report out of their Stories con∣cerning this Philosopher Laotan, that he lay conceal'd, being lock'd up in his Mothers Womb eighty one, or according to Trigaut eighty years; and after∣wards forc'd his passage into the World through her right side; wherefore ac∣cording to Trigaut he is call'd Lauzu, and by Martinius, Laosu; and and last of all, Laotan, that is, Old Philosopher: The time of his Maturation, or rather Im∣prisonment in the Womb, was (as they say) nine times nine Years, which the Chineses account the fulness of Perfection, and all things that are perfect: And because Laotan was one of their greatest and most learned Stages, they invented the foremention'd number, as if Nature had spent so many Years in perfecting of him.

This Laotan was born in the Kingdom of Zu, (for China contain'd anciently many and several Kingdoms) at this day the County Fungyangfu, of the Pro∣vince of Nanking, in the City Mao, Anno 603▪ about twenty four Years before Confut, the Prime Philosopher amongst the Chineses.

The third Sect (saith Martinius) is also like the Epicurean, they place Happi∣ness* 30.45 in Pleasures, and make it their chief studie to prolong their Life, expect∣ing nothing after Death. Amongst this are many Sorcerers, and such as use Magick, and is indeed the vilest of all Sects; the followers thereof nevertheless praise the Morality of our European Doctrine.

According to Trigaut, Laotan left not one Book of his Doctrine, nor as it ap∣pears, would teach no new Opinion; but some of his followers call'd Tansu, after his death, nam'd him, The Head of Learning, and Collected several Books in a handsome Stile, from divers other Opinions and Writings. These also live unmarry'd in Cloysters, in which they make their Pupils, and are as leud and wicked, as the followers of the foremention'd. They never cut the Hair of their Heads, but are distinguish'd from others, by wearing a Hat or Bonnet of Wood upon the knot which ties the Hair on the Crown of their Heads.

Other of this Sect that are Marry'd, with great Zeal observe the Tenets of their Fraternity at home in their own Houses: They Honor, as they say, amongst many other Images, The Lord, or King of the Heavens, but one that is Bodily, and as they say in their Books, hath had many troubles: They also affirm, That the King of the Heavens, which Reigns at this day, is call'd Ciam; but he who Govern'd them formerly, was nam'd Leu. This Leu, say they, on a certain time sitting on a white Dragon, descended to the Earth, and invited Ciam (who they affirm was a Magician) to a Dinner: But whilst Leu, making himself merry at the Table, Ciam getting upon the White Dragon, ascended up to Heaven, and took possession of the Celestial Realm.

Leu thus prevented from returning by Ciam, yet obtain'd a Grant from The new King of Heaven, for the Dominion over certain Mountains in this Countrey, where they suppose he still lives, bereav'd of his old Dignity.

They Worship therefore according to their own confession, a foraign Rob∣ber and Tyrant for their God.

Besides this their Supream Power, they Worship another, which is a triple Deity, one of which is Lauzu, the chief of their Sect.

These also hold forth Rewards after Death; and many of those which are most Holy, and observe their Rules, enter Soul and Body into Paradice, being capable of all Heavenly Joy; which to affirm, they shew many Images of the Departed, which were translated thither in the Flesh.

The peculiar Office of the Priests of this Sect is to clear Houses, which they believe are haunted with Evil Spirits, which they do by setting up Papers Painted with horrid Resemblances, and making a hideous cry and noise through all the Rooms, as if they were Possest themselves.

These Priests have their Residences in the Emperor's Temples, Consecrated to Heaven and Earth, and in Person attend the Emperor's Sacrifices, either when he Offers himself, or his foremention'd Magistrates, by which means they are in great esteem and request.

The Musick which fills up the Ceremony, the Priests perform themselves, Playing on several Instruments which may be pleasing to them, but seems very harsh to us of Europe.

They are also sent for to Funerals of the Grandees, before which they walk in costly Habits, Playing on Horns, Sagbuts, and other Instruments: They also spend their time in warming new Houses, and conduct new Marry'd People alongst the Streets in State, which at certain times is done at the charge and appointment of the Magistrates.

A Correct TIDE TABLE shewing the tr•…•…e Times of the High-Waters at London-Fridge to every day in the Year, 1692. By IOHN FLAMS•…•…EED, M. R. S. S.

1692.	Ianuary	Februar.	March.	April.	May.	Iune.	Iuly.	August.	Septemb.	October.	Novem.	Decemb.
Days.	H.		M.	H.		M.	H.		M.	H.		M.	H.		M.	H.		M.	H.		M.	H.		M.	H.		M.	H.		M.	H.		M.	H.		M.
1	M	7		18	8		55	8		40	10		18	10▪	☉	22	11		15	11		43	1		05	2		30	2		56	4		07	4		23
A	7		47	9		31	9		16	10		40	10	49	11		45				1		35	2		50	3		17	4		26	4		40
2	M	8		18	10		09	9		48	11		13	11		5				0		18	2		01	3		10	3	☉	37	4		47	4		58
A	8		51	10		45	10		19	11		39	11		41	0		17	0		52	2		25	3		28	3	56	5		09	5		16
3	M	9	☉	26	11		20	10		50	☉					0		50	1	☉	24	2		47	3		46	4		16	5		32	5		35
A	10	02	11		53	11		20	0	03	0		06	1		19	1	53	3		07	4		04	4		37	5		57	5		55
4	M	10		38				11		48	0		27	0		33	1		47	2		20	3		26	4	☉	23	4		59	6		•…•…1	6	☉	15
A	11		13	0		23				0		50	0		58	2		14	2		43	3		43	4	43	5		24	6		46	6	36
5	M	11		49	0		51	0		15	1		11	1		21	2	☉	39	3		03	4		00	5		05	5		51	7		11	6		58
A				•…•…		16	0		42	1		33	1		44	3	01	3		22	4		18	5		29	6		19	7		35	7		20
6	M	0		•…•…3	1		39	1	☉	05	1		54	2		07	3		21	3		41	4		36	5		58	6		48	8	☉	01	7		43
A	0		52	2		00	1	26	2		14	2		30	3		41	3		59	4		53	6		27	7		18	8	29	8		07
7	M	1		19	2	☉	18	1		45	2		32	2		53	3		59	4		16	5	☉	14	6		57	7		48	8		55	8		33
A	1		45	2	34	2		04	2		50	3		14	4		18	4		33	5	37	7		31	8		18	9		20	8		59
8	M	2		08	2		50	2		21	3		07	3	☉	34	4		36	4		5•…•…	6		03	8		05	8		49	9		45	9		27
A	2		29	3		04	2		37	3		24	3	53	4		56	5		11	6		30	8		42	9		20	10		12	9		55
9	M	2		48	3		17	2		53	3		42	4		12	5		17	5		33	7		00	9		15	9	☉	48	10		39	10		26
A	3		04	3		30	3		08	3		59	4		32	5		38	5		56	7		34	9		48	10	17	11		07	10		57
10	M	3	☉	19	3		42	3		24	4	☉	18	4		53	6		03	6	☉	21	8		11	10		20	10		45	11		33	11		28
A	3	34	3		55	3		38	4	37	5		15	6		27	6	47	8		47	10		51	11		1•…•…	11		59	11		59
11	M	3		48	4		08	3		53	4		58	5		38	6		51	7		15	9		23	11	☉	21	11		36					☉
A	4		01	4		22	4		08	5		20	6		04	7		18	7		47	9		59	11	49				0		26	0	30
12	M	4		14	4		37	4		25	5		46	6		30	7	☉	47	8		21	10		35				0		00	0		51	0		59
A	4		28	4		54	4		43	6		14	6		57	8	17	8		57	11		11	0		16	0		25	1		15	1		29
13	M	4		42	5		14	5	☉	02	6		43	7		26	8		50	9		35	11		44	0		41	0		48	1	☉	38	1		56
A	4		56	5		35	5	24	7		15	7		57	9		24	1		14				1		03	1		10	2	01	2		20
14	M	5		11	5	☉	59	5		50	7		48	8		28	9		59	10		51	0	☉	15	1		24	1		31	2		23	2		42
A	5		27	6	25	6		18	8		22	8		59	10		35	11		28	0	43	1		44	1		51	2		44	3		03
15	M	5		45	6		54	6		48	8		56	9	☉	31	11		12				1		09	2		04	2		11	3		04	3		22
A	6		06	7		26	7		21	9		31	10	03	11		48	0		03	1		33	2		21	2		30	3		24	3		39
16	M	6		28	8		01	7		57	10		06	10		36				0		35	1		54	2		37	2	☉	47	3		42	3		57
A	6		52	8		39	8		34	10		39	11		10	0		23	1		05	2		13	2		53	3	04	4		00	4		14
17	M	7	☉	19	9		19	9		12	11	☉	12	11		43	0		56	1	☉	32	2		30	3		07	3		20	4		18	4		32
A	7	49	9		59	9		51	11	44				1		27	1	55	2		46	3		22	3		37	4		37	4		50
18	M	8		23	10		39	10		28				0		15	1		55	2		18	3		01	3	☉	37	3		54	4		57	5	☉	09
A	8		59	11		19	11		05	0		16	0		47	2		20	2		37	3		15	3	51	4		12	5		19	5	29
19	M	9		37	11		57	11		38	0		46	1		17	2	☉	41	2		55	3		29	4		07	4		32	5		41	5		51
A	10		18							1		14	1		46	3	00	3		11	3		41	4		24	4		49	6		05	6		14
20	M	10		58	0		32	0	☉	10	1		40	2		13	3		18	3		25	3		54	4		42	5		12	6	☉	31	6		38
A	11		38	1		03	0	40	2		06	2		37	3		34	3		39	4		07	5		00	5		36	6	58	7		04
21	M				1	☉	32	1		09	2		29	2		59	3		50	3		52	4	☉	21	5		21	6		03	7		25	7		33
A	0		16	1	57	1		36	2		50	3		18	4		06	4		05	4	36	5		45	6		30	7		52	8		05
22	M	0		52	2		20	2		00	3		11	3	☉	39	4		22	4		19	4		52	6		11	6		59	8		22	8		39
A	1		24	2		41	2		23	3		31	3	56	4		37	4		33	5		11	6		40	7		30	8		54	9		15
23	M	1		54	3		01	2		45	3		51	4		14	4		52	4		47	5		32	7		11	8	☉	02	9		27	9		51
A	2		20	3		19	3		05	4		11	4		32	5		08	5		02	5		55	7		45	8	34	10		10	10		28
24	M	2	☉	43	3		36	3		24	4	☉	32	4		50	5		24	5	☉	19	6		20	8		22	9		07	10		35	11		07
A	3	03	3		54	3		42	4	52	5		09	5		41	5	36	6		48	8		57	9		40	11		11	11		46
25	M	3		21	4		11	4		01	5		14	5		28	5		59	5		56	7		19	9	☉	34	10	14	11		46	☉
A	3		38	4		29	4		21	5		36	5		48	6		19	6		17	7		53	10	10	10		47				0	22
26	M	3		55	4		48	4		41	6		00	6		08	6	☉	39	6		40	8		30	10		46	11		20	0		20	0		56
A	4		12	5		10	5		03	6		25	6		30	7	01	7		07	9		08	11		21	11		53	0		53	1		28
27	M	4		29	5		35	5	☉	26	6		50	6		51	7		25	7		37	9		47	11		54				1	☉	25	1		55
A	4		46	6		02	5	52	7		16	7		13	7		50	8		11	10		26				0		23	1	54	2		20
28	M	5		06	6	☉	29	6		20	7		44	7		36	8		18	8		46	11	☉	05	0		26	0		53	2		21	2		42
A	5		27	6	58	6		48	8		16	8		00	8		50	9		23	11	41	0		55	1		21	2		46	3		03
29	M	5		51	7		30	7		18	8		36	8	☉	26	9		22	10		01				1		22	1		49	3		08	3		21
A	6		16	8		05	7		48	9		00	8	52	9		56	10		39	0		16	1		47	2		15	4		28	3		37
30	M	6		43				8		20	9		28	9		19	10		31	11		18	0		48	2		12	2	☉	39	3		47	3		52
A	7		13				8		51	9		55	9		47	11		08	11		56	1		17	2		34	3	04	4		06	4		06
31	M	7	☉	45				9		21				10		15					☉		1		43				3		26				4		20
A	8	20				9		51				10		45				0	32	2		07				3		47				4		34

M stands for Morning, A for Afternoon, ☉ for Sunday.

This Table may be made to serve the under-written places by

Adding	h.	m.
For Tinmouth-Haven, Hartlepool, and Amsterdam.	0	30
•…•…rest	1	00
Scilly	1	45
Mounts Bey	1	55
Bridlington Peer, and Humber	2	00
Fowey Looe and Plymouth	3	13
Dartmoutò, Harborow and Hull	3	30
Torbay and Tinmouth	3	40
Exmouth, To•…•…sham and Lymt	3	50
Wey•…•…outh	4	20
Bridgewater and Tex•…•…l	4	45
Portland Harestew, and without the Ulit	5	40

Substracting.	h.	m
For Leith, Ma•…•…s, and Gourits Gut	0	15
Gravesend, Rochester, Ramm•…•…skins	1	00
For Bu•…•…y of the Nort, and Fi•…•…shing	1	20
Shoe Beacon, Portsmouth Red-sand and Ostend	2	30
Spithead, Harwict, Dover, Calis	3	00
Orfo•…•…dness, Gunfleet, Hastings, Shortham, Diep	4	00
Needles, and •…•…armouth Peer	4	40
St. Hellens and Haver de Grace	•…•…	•…•…0

But Note, That in such of these places as lie open to the Sea, and where no great Rivers are, the Quarter-Moon high-waters hold out longer than the times shewed by this Reduction, near half an hour.

As also that, When by reason of long Droughts in Summer, or continual hard Frosts in Winter, the Fresh Waters are low; or when the Wind blows hard at N. or N. W. the Tide•…•… may hold up longer in the River of Th•…•…ts, than the times shewed in the Table. But when the Wind is strong at W. or W. by S. or there are great Freshes, they hold not out so long, but the difference is seldom above half hour.

London: Printed for William Co•…•…t at the Marriner and Anchor on Little-Tower-hill near the Mi•…•…ories-End.

Im•…•…▪ 30 Octobris 16•…•…1. Robert Southwell. P. R. S.

Names.	Longitude.	Latitude.
Metropolis	D.	M.	D.	M.
Nanking	1	26	32	40
Chief Cities
Fungyang	0	30	34	48
Sucheu	3	30	31	52
Sunkiang	4	30	31	10
Changcheu	2	50	32	45
Chinkiang	2	28	32	49
Yangcheu	2	15	33	6
Hoaigan	2	12	34	17
Lucheu	0	8	33	4
Ganking	0	20	31	20
Taiping	1	10	32	20
Ningque	1	10	31	40
Chicheu	0	10	31	36
Hoeicheu	0	55	30	18
Great Cities
Quangte	1	50	31	32
Hocheu	1	0	33	50
Chucheu	1	26	32	31
Siuchen	0	3	35	3

The tenth Province, Chikiang.

Names.	Longitude.	Latitude.
Metropolis	D.	M.	D.	M.
Hangcheu	3	10	30	27
Chief Cities
Kiating	4	0	31	15
Hucheu	3	3	30	57
Niencheu	2	24	29	33
Kinhoa	2	2	28	57
Kiucheu	1	37	28	42
Chucheu	3	5	28	12
Xaohing	3	30	30	16
Ningpo	4	46	29	40
Taicheu	4	25	28	38
Vencheu	4	4	27	38

The eleventh Province, Fokien.

Names.	Longitude.	Latitude.
Metropolis	D.	M.	D.	M.
Focheu	2	40	25	58
Chief Cities
Civencheu	2	9	25	0
Changcheu	1	10	24	42
Kienning	1	0	27	0
Ienning	0	57	26	34
Tingcheu	0	55	25	40
Hinghoa	2	35	25	27
Xaouu	0	2	27	10
The great City
Fouing	4	0	26	33
Garrisons
Phumuen	4	25	27	0
Foning	4	8	26	15
Tinghai	3	22	26	10
Muihoa	3	21	25	52
Xe	3	28	25	50
Haikeu	3	50	25	29
Ganhai	2	3	24	45
Hiamuen	1	59	24	35
Chungxe	1	26	24	30
Tungxan	0	57	24	15
Hivenchung	0	46	24	0
Iungting	1	18	24	33

The twelfth Province, Quantung.

Names.	Longitude.	Latitude.
Metropolis	D.	M.	D.	M.
Quancheu	4	2	23	15
Chief Cities
Xacheu	3	42	24	42
Nanhiung	3	10	25	32
Hoeicheu	2	46	23	9
Caocheu	1	0	23	30
Chaoking	4	45	23	30
Caoheu	5	40	22	33
Liencheu	7	12	22	0
Liucheu	6	20	28	58
Kiuncheu	6	36	39	40
The Great City
Loting	5	9	23	25
Garrisons
Taching	1	5	24	20
Tung	1	22	24	17
Hanxan	1	10	23	25
Cinghai	1	14	23	25
Kiazu	1	29	23	12
Kiexo	1	49	22	50
Hiung	6	30	21	30
Iungching	5	49	23	45
Ciungling	8	10	19	30

The thirteenth Province, Quangsi.

Names.	Longitude.	Latitude.
Metropolis	D.	M.	D.	M.
Queilin	7	32	25	54
Chief Cities
Liucheu	8	42	25	0
Kingyven	9	46	25	2
Pinglo	7	0	25	26
Gucheu	6	33	24	2
Cincheu	8	0	24	2
Nanning	9	30	23	20
Taiping	12	20	23	20
Iunning	12	7	23	8
Chingan	11	55	24	0
Tiencheu	11	30	24	11
Garrison Cities
Sungen	10	25	24	5
Vuyven	10	30	23	52
Funghoa	9	55	24	5
The great City
Suching	12	25	24	6
Garrisons
Xanglin	12	47	23	57
Ganlung	13	57	24	4

The fourteenth Province, Quoicheu.

Names.	Longitude.	Latitude.
Metropolis	D.	M.	D.	M.
Quoiyang	11	46	26	0
Chief Cities
Sucheu	9	2	27	53
Sunan	10	20	27	39
Chinyven	9	23	27	34
Xecien	9	42	27	55
Tungyn	8	45	28	20
Liping	8	35	26	42
Tuche	10	3	25	55
Great Cities
Pugan	13	5	25	52
Iunning	12	20	25	2
Chinning	12	5	25	0
Garrison Cities
Puting	12	7	26	4
Pingyve	10	32	27	0
Lungli	11	9	26	27

The fifteenth Province, Iunnan.

Names.	Longitude.	Latitude.
Metropolis	D.	M.	D.	M.
Iunnan	14	25	25	0
Chief Cities
Tali	16	56	25	27
Linyaw	14	19	24	6
Zuhiung	15	24	24	56
Chinkiang	14	4	24	29
Munghoa	16	38	25	23
Kinfung	16	30	25	52
Quangnan	13	25	24	0
Quangsi	13	35	24	14
Chinyven	16	26	24	37
Sungning	15	48	27	33
Xunning	17	18	24	46
Chief Garrisons
Kiocing	13	48	25	35
Yaogan	15	50	26	3
Cioking	16	40	26	28
Vutin	14	59	25	27
Cintien	13	52	26	4
Likiang	16	58	26	54
Iuenkiang	15	33	23	54
Iungchang	17	42	24	58
Great Cities
Pexing	16	8	26	44
Lanking	15	55	27	3

The manner of the Building of the Cities in China.

MOst of the Cities in all China are of one Model and Fashion, and ex∣ceed each other only in Bigness and Commerce; for most of them are square, with broad and high Walls of Brick or Free-stone, Fortifi'd round about at an exact distance, with high Watch-Towers, not unlike those of the ancient Romans; surrounded with broad Moats; and within, with Pal∣lasadoes.

[illustration]

The Entrances into the City have always double Gates, one before ano∣ther, with Portcullases, between those two Gates is a large Court, wherein the Soldiers are Exercis'd that belong to the Guard: These Gates are not oppo∣site but oblique, so that they cannot see through them both at once: The first hangs on a double Wall, which appears like our Bulwarks. Above the Gates, on the Arch are high Towers, which the Chineses call Muen Leu, in which the Soldiers keep Guard, and are Magazines where their Arms are kept.

Every Metropolis, and almost all the small Cities, have a little distance* 30.46 without the Walls in a pleasant and frequented place, or near the Road, a Tower, by Peter Iarrik and others call'd Chimes, which the Chineses look up∣on to be so auspicious, that no Man goes about any business of consequence, before he hath Saluted these Edifices, from thence expecting their better Fortune. One of these Towers, by which we may judge all the rest, is be∣fore discrib'd in the Province of Xantung: They have at least seven, nine, or ten Galleries of Free-stone, and very artificially built, in manner like a Pyra∣mid; they are not onely Erected in or near the Cities, but some of them on the highest Mountains.

These Towers are not much unlike other Structures, from their quality* 30.47 call'd Culeu (which here we should name Hourly Towers) which are built at the Publick Charge, one or two in every City, according to the bigness thereof: On every one of these Towers is a Water-Glass, for in stead of Watches or Hour-Glasses, the Chineses use Water Glasses, which shew the Hour of the Day; for the Water falling out of one Glass into the other, lifts up a Board, Carv'd with the Figures of the Hours, and time of the Day: There is also one, who constantly observes the Hand which points, and by the beating on a great Drum, gives notice thereof to the People every Hour, what the Clock is; he also puts forth another Board out of the Steeple, on which the Hour of the Day is Painted with Golden Figures, of a Foot and a half long.

The same Person which Watches the Hours, hath an Eye also (because he looks over the whole City) if any Fire should accidentally happen in one House or other, and by beating on his Drum, raises all the Citizens to the quench∣ing of it: He whose House is set a Fire through his own carelesness, suffers Death without mercy, because of the danger which threatens the neighboring Houses, all built of Wood.

On these Time-telling Towers, the Governors often meet to keep their Festivals.

Pagodes or Temples.

NOt far from these Turrets stands generally a Pagan Chappel, besides a Temple Consecrated to the Spirit or good Genious of the City.

In these, all the Governors or Magistrates, on the entring into their Offices, take their Oaths of Allegiance, and the like, as if before the God or Protector of their City.

In former Ages, the Chineses in these Temples honor'd only the fore-menti∣on'd Spirits; but at this day Worship other Idols.

Great numbers of these Pagodes are through all China, and are likewise built in solitary places, on the tops and declinings of Mountains.

Most of these Pagodes are inhabited by Priests, who live there upon the an∣cient Revenues granted them of the place: The Pagodes also afford good Lodg∣ings and Entertainment for Travellers, who there find plenty of all things.

The Pagodes or Temples are within furnish'd with Images, to the number in some of above a thousand, and hung round about with black Lamps, which burn Night and Day, in Commemoration of those, as they conceive, which liv'd Piously, and dy'd Happily.

Some Images sit on Tables, as if they liv'd and were consulting together.

At the entrance, or behind the other Images stand horrible shapes, Horn'd Fiends, with open Mouths, and Hands with grievous Claws.

In the middle commonly appears an Altar, whereon sits an Image of some times thirty, forty, fifty, nay a hundred Foot high, to which the Temple is Consecrated, besides several lesser Idols on each side thereof; before the Image stands generally a thick, but hollow Cane, full of little Reeds or Pens, in∣scrib'd with Chinese Characters, which they believe foretel future events: On each side are Perfuming-Pots, which are continually supply'd, and in the mid∣dle stands a Woodden Charger, in which the Priest puts his Offerings, when he Invokes the God on some exigent, to grant him a favorable sign of good suc∣cess: The Altar is Colour'd Red, with which no common Houses may be Painted.

A Pagode or Temple, which was formerly the Hall of a Palace, belonging to a grand Eunuch, near the City of Peking, and afterwards on the Emperor's Command given to the Iesuits for a Chappel, Trigaut says, was before set forth after this manner:

In the chief Isle stood a great Altar of Bak'd and Hewn Stone, curiously Wrought, and Painted Red, after the manner of their Temples: Upon the middle of the Altar sat a great and horrible Monster, Bak'd of Clay, Gilt from top to bottom.

The Chineses call'd this Image Tuan, and suppose it Commands over the Earth and Riches thereof; wherefore we with the ancient Poets should call

it Pluto: It had a Scepter in one Hand, and a Crown on its Head, both not un∣like the Marks of our Kings. On each side of the Isle stood two great Tables, every one Guarded by five Infernal Judges, which were also Painted on the Walls, sitting on Seats of Justice, and Condemn'd (as they said) the Sinners to Everlasting Torments, every one according to his Condition: Before them stood many Furies, far more terrible (with tormenting Scourges) than those which we represent; and in such manner those Devils seem'd to punish the Criminals, that they struck a Terror to the Living; for some lay broyl'd on Gridirons, others boyl'd in Oil, others again rent to Pieces, some cut through in the middle, torn to Pieces by Dogs, bruis'd in Mortars, and other such like cruel Punishments.

The first of the fore-mention'd Infernal Judges seem'd to examine the Ma∣lefactors, which as the Chineses suppose, he re-views in a Looking-Glass; this done, he sends them to the other Judges, according to the several Punish∣ments which they are to suffer: Amongst them was one, whose Office was to Punish by Transmigration, sending the Souls of the Malefactor into worse Bodies than formerly they possess'd; transforming Tyrants to Tygers, de∣bauch'd Persons into Swine, others into such Beasts as best suit with their In∣clination: But for Petty Crimes, the Rich, they only became poor and despi∣cable People.

There were also a great Pair of Scales, in one of which stood a Sinner, and in the other a Prayer Book of the Doctrine of the Idols, which weigh'd down the Sinner, and releas'd him from Punishments.

In the middle, before the resemblance of Hell, flow'd a River of a strange Colour, into which many were dragg'd; cross the River lay two Bridges, one of Gold, and the other of Silver, over which pass'd those that had been true Pagan-Worshippers, and wore several Badges of their Offices and Service shewn to the Idols; and had for their Guides the Servants of the Idols, under whose Defence they past through the midst of all the Torments of Hell, and came at last to pleasant Fields, Groves, and Vallies.

In another corner were drawn the Jaws of Hell, belching out Flames, Ser∣pents and Furies, towards the Gates of Hell, which were made of Copper; many other more of that kind were also seen: In several places of the Temple was written on Scrols, That whosoe're calls a thousand times on this Image by Name, shall be freed from all these Tortures.

It will not be unnecessary to give you here two Platforms of two several Pagodes or Temples.

Directions for a little Temple or Pagode, cover'd all over.

1

THe Prime and only Gate of the Temple.

2

A Partition of Wood between two Pillars of Stone or Wood, on which two Gygantick Figures are Painted; By this means, the sight out of the Street into the Temple is prevented, though the Doors are open.

3.

An erected Stone, in form of a Consecrated Bason, in which the Romans keep their Holy-Water, in which lies Fire to burn the Perfumes that are put in the same.

4.

Body of the Temple.

5.

A great Table before the Altar, curiously Varnish'd, Painted, and Gilt, on which stand Tapers, and Perfumes always burning. On the Table stand al∣so two Cases, and a Cane full of little Pipes or Straws, wherewith they Cast Lots.

• ...

6.

A great Altar, on which some Images stand.

7.

Two lesser Altars, on each of which are other Representations.

8.

Pedestals of Stone, on which the Pillars of Wood or Stone rest, which hold up the Roof, and make three Divisions.

9.

Two small Pools or Ponds, with Water and Fish, open on the top, from whence the Light shines into the Temple, being in stead of Windows, for no other Light comes into the Temple, but from those places where they are, or through the chief Gate.

10.

Two Chambers before the Gate that leads into the Temple, in which stand two great shapes of Horses and other Images.

11.

Two Boards made fast to the Walls of the Temple, Ingraven with Su∣perstitious Directions, to throw their Lots before the Images, with the foresaid Straws, which stand on the Table.

12.

A great Drum on a Woodden Bench, on which they give several strokes, after having ended their Prayers to the Images.

13.

A great Bell hanging at the Wall of the Temple, made like ours, on which they also strike twice or thrice with a Stick, after they have ended their Devotions.

14.

A Bench with holes, wherein they put their Umbrelloes, or other Marks of Honor, which are carry'd before the Mandarins, and likewise before their Ima∣ges, when they go Processioning.

15.

The place where those that Kneel to Pray before their Images, and Cast Lots.

Directions or Draught of a Temple, one of the biggest and stateliest in all China.

1

THe chief Gate in the first Wall that surrounds the Temple.

2

Two Gates on each side of the foremention'd.

3

First Court before the Temple, open on the top.

4

A great Pool, with Water and Fish.

5

A Bridge to go over the Pool.

6

A great cover'd Hall, which spreads it self before the whole Structure.

7

A second open Court, much bigger, Pav'd with Free-stone.

8

Little Chambers on each side of the second Court.

9

The chief Hall or Chappel in the Temple, cover'd with a handsom Roof.

10

Pillars of the two Halls, which in some Temples are of Wood, and in others of one intire Stone.

11

Little Doors of the Chambers, with a Gallery, through which they pass be∣fore they go into the Chambers.

12

The place whither those repair to Kneel and shew Reverence to their Ima∣ges, and draw Lots.

13

A very curious and well-made Table, Gilt and Varnish'd, whereon in a Case stand Straws or little Canes, with which they draw Lots; and likewise Per∣fuming Pans, and burning Tapers; over it also hangs a lighted Lamp.

14

A great Altar with one, or several Images.

15

A Stone Pedestal close by the Wall, on which stand many whole and half Images.

16

A Stone, cut in manner of a Bason, in which stands a Chafindish with Coals, wherein Gilt and Silver'd Paper is burnt by those that come to Wor∣ship the Images: In some Temples generally stand, in stead of the fore-men∣tion'd Stone, many Copper Pans, large, and neatly made.

17

Two Boards made fast on the Walls of the Temple, Ingraven with their Su∣perstitious Belief.

18

A great Bell, made like those of Europe, but without a Clapper, on which they strike with a Staff three or four times, after they have finish'd their Prayers.

19

A great Drum on a Woodden Bench, on which they also strike, as on the Bell.

20

A Bench of Wood with holes, in which they stick the Umbrelloes and other Badges of Honor that are carry'd before the Mandarins, and likewise before the Images in time of their Precessioning.

Triumphal Arches.

IN several Cities, to their no small Ornament, are divers Triumphal Ar∣ches, most of them of hewn Marble, with great Art and curious Imagery, richly wrought, after the manner of the Goths; they are, as anciently amongst the Romans, built in Commemoration of those which have done some great Service to that City or Countrey; sometimes also for the Citizens, that have attain'd to the heighth of their Learning.

They are chiefly built in the Eminentest Streets and most Populous places, and consist in three Portals, the biggest in the middle, and the two lesser on each side, through which they pass.

On both sides stand Marble Lions, and other fine Imagery; on the Ceilings are Celestial Signs, Birds, Flowers, Snakes, Serpents, and the like, done very Artificially.

Those places that are void of Statues are curiously Carv'd or adorn'd with other Imagery, and are so Cut, that they seem Pendant in the Air. It deserves no small admiration, how such vast Stones could be Wrought and Cut through, that they seem rather like loose Chains of divers Links, than singly Wrought.

The whole Arch rests on high Pillars, and both before and behind of one fa∣shion; The upper part of the Roof generally consists in three Stories or Par∣titions, every one divided, with some •…•…hings resembling our Architecture; Upon the Summit of the Arch lies a blue Stone, cover'd with a small Gilded Arch, on which the Emperor's Name in whose Reign the Arch was built is Engraven; Beneath in the Front appears another broad Stone, whereon is an Inscription, with the Name of the Person in honor of whom, and for what good Service it was erected.

Buildings.

THe Artificers and Tradesmens Houses in the Cities are not built with any great art, because the Chineses regard more their Ease and Con∣venience than Ornaments; yet though they are not ver•…•… stately, they are convenient and sufficiently comely: But the Houses of the Grandees are very magnificent and large.

The Chineses, as Adam Schall witnesseth, use no Stone for their high Build∣ings, but onely Timber joyn'd and fastned to one another with Iron Rings, after the same manner as our Masts in great Ships are; which thus conjoyn'd is colour'd over with Chinese Varnish, or Wax call'd Cie, and sometimes Gilded, to the no small lustre thereof.

They take no delight in many Stories, never raising them higher than two,* 30.48 though generally but one, they counting it a hard labor to go up Stairs or Ladders.

The lower part of their House is onely inhabited, it being divided into handsom Chambers and Halls: As to the out-part of the House, it is but mean (except the great Gate and other lesser Wickets, which are stately built before Noble-mens Houses) but the inner part is pleasant, and very curiously wrought, all shining with the Varnish Cie. They are generally built of Wood, yea, the Emperor's Palace it self, though the Walls which separate the Halls and Anti-Chambers are commonly of Brick, but the Roof rests on wooden Pillars, and not on Walls, as ours do, and not cover'd with Tyles of Clay. They look not forwards through Windows, Persons of Quality accounting it ill Breed∣ing to open a Casement into the Street. Every House hath several Yards or Halls one behind another; the privatest or last of which is in habited by the Women, who are kept so close, as if in Prison.

The Chineses, according to Trigaut, when they begin to Build, erect first the* 30.49 Pillars of their Houses, which are all of Wood, for Stone is of no esteem amongst them; nay, the Pillars in the Emperors Courts and Governors Hou∣ses are also of Wood: On the rais'd Columns they lay great pieces of Timber, and on them the Roof: The Walls are made last of all of Clay or Mortar, which if they should chance to fall, yet the Timber-work would stand, and the Roof-remains firm and whole. The order in which the Pillars stand, is the same with all other open places; for every Court of the Governors is divi∣ded into several base Courts or Quadrangles pav'd with Free-Stone; the Floors of them being somewhat lower than those of the Chambers, they ascend a few Steps up to them and the Galleries.

And again in another place the same Trigaut saith, That the Chineses are not* 30.50 to be compar'd to us in Architecture, neither for beauty nor durance; for they build according to Mans life, and (as they say) onely for themselves and not for others; whereas we on the contrary build for future Ages.

The Chineses dig no Foundations, but lay on the Ground which they design to build on, very great Stones; or if they chance to dig Foundations, they are never above two or three Yards deep, though for exceeding high Towers, so that they seldom last one Age. Nor in like manner their Clay Walls, which give them the trouble of a constant and daily repairing; from whence it happens also, that their Houses are for the most part of Wood, or rest on wooden Posts; in which there is no small convenience, because the Walls may be repair'd without medling with the other parts of the Houses, for the Roofs rest not on the Walls, but on Columns. Thus far Trigaut.

Palaces, or Governors Courts.

THe Palaces are all built at the Emperor's Charge for Residences for the Governors, as well Civil as Martialist: And the Emperor doth not onely provide Courts and Ships for his Governors, but also all man∣ner of necessary Furniture, Provisions and Servants; nay, when a Governor (which is most remarkable) either goes to another Province, or serv'd out the time of his Office (which sometimes happens to be in half a year) he may take all the Furniture with him, and then again new is provided for his Successor.

The Houses of the Magistrates exceed all other in beauty, bigness, and Or∣namentals, and may justly be call'd Courts or Palaces.

In every Metropolis are fifteen, twenty, or more such publick Edifices, in the chief Cities; at least eight, and four in the lesse, all after one Model, except that the one is bigger than the other, according to the Quality of the Go∣vernors.

The great Palaces have four or five Halls, with as many Porches that stand before them.

At the Front of every Palace three Gates, the biggest in the middle, every one adorn'd on each side with great Lyons of Marble. Before the greatest Gate is a large Court Rail'd in, which glitters exceedingly with the Chinese Varnish. In the middle of this Court stand two Towers, or Musick-Rooms, ready pro∣vided with Drums, and all sorts of Instruments to play on whene're the Go∣vernor goes in or out to sit on the Bench of Justice. Beyond this Gate is a spacious Hall, wherein those that Plead, or have any Business with the Go∣vernor, wait; on each side thereof are small Apartments for the Judges of the lower Bench; beyond are two Rooms, wherein Persons of Quality, that come to visit the Governors, are received; in them are Stools and Benches, and all things necessary for Entertainment. In these also the right-Hand is given to the Civilists, or Citizens, and the left to the Martialist. Passing through these Chambers you come to another Gate, which is seldom open'd but when the Governor keeps a Court-Day. The middlemost is of an extraordinary bigness, and none but Lords and Noble-men are suffer'd to go through it, all other Persons walking through the side-Gates. Beyond this Gate is another large Court, at the end whereof stands a great Apartment rest∣ing on Columns, and is call'd Tang. In this Chamber or Hall the Governor sits on the Bench; on each side thereof Servants, Messengers, and other Offi∣cers, have little Houses for their Residences.

These Officers never remove with the Governor, but live there during their life-time, being maintain'd at the Emperors Charge, and serve one Lord after another, without changing their Habitations.

[illustration]

Behind this Apartment is another inward Chamber, much statelier than the first, which is call'd Sutang, that is, The Privy-Chamber; in which onely the greatest Friends to the Governor give their Visits, and pay Respects; about it on the out-side the Governors Houshold have their Dwellings; behind it opens the greatest Gate, where also are the Governors own Lodgings, and a little apart his Wives and Concubines, being all neatly built, and conveniently contriv'd. There are also Warrens, Gardens, and all things fit for Countrey Recreation.

A Palace belonging to an Eunuch, not far from the City Peking, is by Trigaut, with the following Platform, thus described:

On each side before the Gates stand two Marble Stones, in a manner like Steps to get on Horseback from; before the Entrance of the Palace runs a Wall about six Foot high; behind which opens a small Entry or Alley, in the middle whereof stands the prime Portico, or chief Stone Gate, to which they go mounted on Steps, with two Chambers on the right, and three on the left-hand, which have their Entrances into the little Alley; beyond this Gate opens a great Court, where on the right-Hand stand three, and on the left-Hand four Chambers; At the end of this first Court is another Gate, which they first ascend on Steps, and having pass'd through it, descend again on the other side into a second Court; in the middle whereof on each side, a Gate or Door with Steps leads to the Halls that are on both sides of this Court; behind which is also a great Hall, and beyond that a third Court of the same form as the second; and at last appears a stately Garden, surrounded with a Wall of twenty Hand high, and cut through in the middle with a pav'd Way.

A Draught of the first Ground-plat of a House for Chineses of indifferent Quality.

1

THe chief Door of the House under a small Gallery, which serves in stead of a Penthouse,

2

Prime Courts pav'd with Free-Stone.

3

Chief Halls in the House.

4

A wooden Partition, with a little Room in the middle in manner like a Chappel, in which stand Carv'd Images, and before them perfuming Ves∣sels and Lamps.

5

A narrow Entry behind the Partition, which hinders the sight into the chief Hall.

6

Two inner Chambers.

7

Two Halls or Dining-Rooms.

8

A great House for Poultrey, Cattel, and the like.

A Draught of the second Ground-plat of a House for a Rich Chinese, or Mandarin of ordinary Quality.

1

A Portal before the Gate.

2

The chief and onely Gate of the whole House.

3

The Entry or Gallery.

4

A Partition of Wood to prevent the sight from without into the House.

5

An open Court pav'd neatly with Free-Stone.

6

Cover'd Halls.

7

The chiefest Hall.

8

A Wooden Partition with a Chappel in the middle, in which the Images stand, as also Candles, Lamps, and Vessels to burn Perfume in before them.

9

A narrow Entry behind the wooden Partition, which hinders the Prospect into the Hall and open Court.

10

Chambers in which the Master of the House Lodges.

11

Narrow Entries, through which they go into all the Chambers and inner-

12

Apartments for Slavesses, and other Female-Servants.

13

Little Chambers for Slaves and Men-Servants.

14

A Stable for Cattel.

[illustration]

A Draught of a third Ground-Plat of Royal Houses, and the Houses of very rich Mandarins.

1

THe Front Gate.

2

The chief and onely Door of the House.

3

The Entry or Gallery.

4

A Partition of Wood, which prevents the sight from without into the House.

5

Open Courts cover'd neatly with square Free-Stone.

6 7

Chief cover'd Halls.

8

Little Entries, through which they go into all the Courts and Chambers of the House.

9

A Partition of Wood in the last Hall, with a Chappel in the middle, in which as before stand Carv'd Images, Candles, Lamps, and perfuming Vessels.

10

Narrow Entries behind the great wooden Partition, which hinders those from being seen that walk in the Hall.

11

A wooden Partition in the first Hall between the first chief Court, which stops the prospect into the other open places.

12

Pedestals of the Pillars, which support the Roof of the first Hall, which stands at the end of the first Court.

13

Handsom Chambers, in which the Lord of the House resides.

14

Lesser Rooms, in which his Concubines, Slavesses, and other Women dwell.

15

Small Apartments for Servants and Slaves.

16

The Stable. Thus much concerning their Houses.

Of their Shipping.

FRom the building of their Houses we may conjecture what their Ship∣ping may be, notwithstanding they are us'd in another Element, and serve for other occasions.

The Chinese Vessels are several, viz. Warlike, Imperial, Ships for the Gover∣nors, others that carry the Fish sent to the Emperor's Court, Longzons, Snake-Vessels, or rather Pleasure-Boats, and the like, besides floating Villages on Canes, joyn'd together with a tough Twig call'd Rotang.

An incredible number of Vessels are continually found in China, Sailing from one place to another; for the Countrey is Navigable in most parts, by convenience of the Rivers every where; for the Way from the City Makao to the Metropolis Peking, (being a Tract of about three hundred German Miles) may all be travell'd by Water, along Rivers or artificial Channels, except one days Journey, which is over the Mountain of Mintin, between the City Nan∣hang, of the Province of Quantung, and the City Nanking in the Province of Quangsi.

In like manner, they can go from the Province of Chikiang in their Barges along the Rivers through that of Suchuen; nay, there is scarce any City, either little or great in all China, to which they cannot come by Water, because the whole Countrey is not onely naturally full of Rivers, but are also divided and sub∣divided by industry into several Channels and Rivulets: But their Ships that lie in several Bays and Harbors resemble Woods.

Such an innumerable and vast number of Shipping are in the Province of Fokien, that the Inhabitants thereof proffer'd the Emperor of China, when on a time he resolv'd to War against the Iapanners, to make him a Bridge or Cawsey of Ships, that should reach from their Coast to Iapan, and well it might have been done, if they could have endur'd the turbulency of the Sea.

Amongst all other, the Imperial Ships belonging to the Governors are the* 30.51 best and stoutest, and indeed in curious Work and Ornamentals, exceed ours in Europe: they shew in the Water like Towers or Castles, and are on both sides divided into several Apartments; in the middle is a stately Room provided with all manner of Necessaries, and Hung with Tapestry, and furnish'd in State, with whatever belongs to a Princes Palace; in stead of Glass Win∣dows they have Silk varnish'd and painted with Flowers, Birds, Trees, and the like, which is so close that no Wind penetrates. Round about the Ship on the Deck are Galleries and Rails, between which the Sea-men or Mariners can do their Business without any trouble or disturbance. The whole Ship is varnish'd with the Wax by the Chineses call'd Cie, which gives a great lustre, being also mix'd with divers Colours; the in-side is painted with Birds, Beasts, Cities, and the like, in Golden Colours (the proper Livery of the Emperor,) which are worthy of observation, and very delightful to the Eye. They use no Nails in all their Ships, because the Timber and Planks are pegg'd together with wooden Pins.

The Chinese Vessels are in length equal with our Mediterranean Galleys, but are not so high and broad; on a Ladder of Leather with twelve Steps they get into them. The Prow, where the Drummers beat and Trumpeters sound their Levets, is made like a Castle. Upon the sound of the Drums and Trumpets all the other Vessels give them the way, unless it be a Mandarin of greater Quality,

then the inferior gives way to the superior, without any the least disturbance or dispute, all which Cases being order'd by the Law, according to which every one must govern himself; wherefore on the Head of every Ship stands written in great Golden Letters of a Foot and a half long, the Quality of every Governor; from both the sides flie divers colour'd Silk Flags and Penons.

In calm Weather there are People, which in stead of Horses, Tow the Ves∣sels by a Line, or Row them: They also use their Oars just as the Fishes their Fins or Tails, with very great dexterity and swiftness, to the no little manife∣station of their Ingenuity. They also Steer a Ship with a single Oar after the same manner as we our Boats.

Exceeding stately are those Ships which every three Moneths to the num∣ber of five, come with Silk-Stuffs and Garments from the Metropolis of Nan∣king to the Court of Peking, and are by the Chineses call'd Lungchychuen, as if they would say Ships of Dragons Clothes, because they are sent to the Emperor, whose Arms and Marks are Dragons; they are Gilt all over, and colour'd Red. To these all the Governors Vessels are inferior, and must give them the Way where∣soe're they meet them.

Swift Streams, which between the Hills and Valleys have great Falls, are Row'd up by the Chineses with a sort of little Boats with two Oars or Steerers, one before at the Head, and the other at the Stern; by means of which they guide their Boats between the Rocks with great dexterity and ease, as if they had a Horse by the Reins, though sometimes the Channel is so narrow, that the Vessels can scarce pass through the same, but are forc'd to go round about the Stones, which lie scatter'd and cumber the Channel every where.

This troublesom Rowing, though an ingenious Invention of the Chineses, hath rais'd this Proverb amongst them, That their Boats are Paper, and their Wa∣termen Iron, because they are made of very thin Boards, like our slit Deal, which are not nail'd, but fastned together with Withs, in the Chinese Tongue call'd Rotang; by which means the Boats, though often beaten by the strong Current against the Rocks, split not, but bend and give way.

In the third County Sucheufu, of the Province of Nanking, the Inhabitants keep many Pleasure-Boats onely for their Recreation, all of them being richly gilded and painted with several colours to the Life, so that we may rather call them stately Houses than Ships. Many oftentimes spend their whole Estates in these Vessels, being too indulgent to Wine and Women.

In a delightful Lake call'd Si, near the chief City Hangcheu, in the Province of Chekiang, are also very gallant Vessels, which Row up and down in the same in fair Weather for their pleasure. All things about these Vessels are either gilded or painted with various colours, where they always highly Treat, and are presented with Stage-Plays, and other such like Divertisements. The Ships in the interim furnish'd with all manner of Necessaries, Sail without fear of Shipwrack cross the Lake, notwithstanding many by sudden Storms or Tem∣pests are in the middle of their Mirth cast away.

They have also a kind of Gundelo's, in the Chinese Tongue call'd Lungschen, that is, Serpent-Boats, from their resembling of Water-Snakes, and their be∣ing Painted and Carv'd all over with various Serpents; some over-grown with Hair, and hoop'd in with broad Iron Rings, are also joyn'd together with Ribbons of divers colours, very neatly, and with great art interwoven toge∣ther. The Masts, which are generally three, and hung with Silk Penons and Flags, have an Idol upon the top of them, as also one on the Prow of the

Ship; on the Stern are many Ensigns, hung full of Tufts of Hair, Silk Flags, and long Feathers; the whole Vessel is hung round about with Gold and Silk Fringe; under the Deck sit the Rowers, generally to the number of ten or twelve, richly Cloth'd in Silk, and Gilded Crowns on their Heads; at the sound of a Drum they strike their Oars (which are made like a Spoon) into the Wa∣ter, and make such quick way, that they seem to go as swift as Lightning; in a Gap in the Stern oftentimes hangs a Boy, a Jugler, who leaping into the Water, makes pleasant sport for the Passengers.

In the Yellow River are a kind of Carriages, or rather floating Villages, con∣sisting in great thick Reeds, by the Indians call'd Bambu, or Bambo's, which are so closely ty'd together with Withs, by them nam'd Rotang, that the least drop of Water cannot get through them. On these Floats are Huts and little Houses of Boards and other sleight Materials, cover'd with Roofs made of Mats, in which the Chineses dwell with their Wives and Children (in someto the num∣ber of two hundred) as on the Main Land, and never inhabit on the Shore: They drive along with the Stream down the Rivers, or else are Tow'd against the Current with a Line, for Sails they use none.

Those that reside in these floating Villages drive a Trade with all sorts of Merchandise, and carry them from one place to another on the River: at the Towns before which they stop, they run Stakes into the Ground, to which they make fast their floating Isle.

There are also some in China, which with their whole Families reside in or∣dinary Vessels, and Sail in Fleets of four or five hundred together, Trading through the whole Empire; so that from whence these Fleets remove, it seems as if a Forrest moved. They keep likewise all manner of tame Cattel in those Vessels, especially Swine; and wheresoever they arrive, they generally stay several Moneths.

Father Martin doubts not, but that the Chinese Merchants have anciently, as at this day, furrow'd the Seas as far as the Red Lake: for in these modern Times they build great Ships call'd Pancum da China, which in the Chinese Tongue signifies A Wooden Palace; neither have we small testimonies of it through all India.

That the Chineses (saith he) have antiently frequented the Seas, and Sail'd with their Ships to remote Countreys, doth not darkly appear by the Voyage of one Luseng, sent out by the Emperor Ching or Xi, Anno 214. before the Nativity of Christ, to discover the Northern Countreys; for he, amongst others, proffer'd the Emperor some Geographical Descriptions of several Countreys in the World, and especially of China, and the Islands lying in the East Sea, otherwise call'd Mare Eoum; from whence some will conclude, that the Name Cingala (which signifies Sand-plats of the Chineses, on which a Fleet of Ships suffer'd Shipwrack) hath its original: From hence is also deriv'd Ceilon, or Sin∣lan, that is, Inhabitants of China, or Chineses: Moreover, that the Chineses of the Island St. Laurence or Madagaskar, is affirmed by the Chineses that reside on this Island, especially at the Bay of St. Clare, where Men of white Complexions speak the Chinese Language.

This Negotiation of the Chineses extended it self to all the Islands in the Oriental Sea, and to India it self, till the time of the Portuguese first coming thi∣ther; but afterwards it was neglected, partly for the remoteness of the Places, and partly out of fear of the Portuguese: But Iapan, the Philippine Isles, Macassar, Iava, Camboya, Sion, and Cochinchina, the Chineses frequent with their Ships laden with Merchandise to this very day, especially those of the Province of Fokien;

for scarce any other Chineses frequent the Sea, or go to foreign Countreys against the Laws of the Empire.

The Emperor Hiaou, who Anno 140. before the Incarnation began his Reign, after having by means of the General Chankieng subdu'd the Kingdoms of Ynpei, (at this day Tungking and Laos) Tavon and Takia, lying near the West, sent a Fleet of Ships to the East through the Chinese Sea, or Bay call'd Sang. But those Places to which the fore-mention'd Fleet Sail'd, were not describ'd by the Chi∣nese Geographers, which is no wonder; for as these People have a great and high opinion of themselves, and account foreign things not worth their know∣ledge or description; therefore we cannot say whether this Fleet went to Iapan, or to the Isles Linson, Ceilon, Iava, Camboya, and the like Places.

The timely finding of the Magnet or Load-stone, and Compass, by the Chineses, give also no small testimonies of their Navigation.

As Martinius saith, the Properties of the Magnet, and its respecting the North and South, or the Compass, was known to the Chineses many Ages before the Incarnation, and before the People of Europe; for when in the Reign of Zing, Anno 1115. before the Birth of Christ, the Cochinchineses, by the Chineses call'd Kiaochi, had the first time sent an Agent to the Emperor, with a white Hen or Pheasant for a Present, the Agent was by the Emperor's Tutor call'd Cheu∣cung, a great Astronomer, presented with a piece of Workmanship artificially wrought, which of it self without ceasing pointed directly towards the South, not onely when it was carry'd by Land, but by Water also.

This Piece was with two Syllables call'd Zinan, which is like that where∣with the Chineses at this day call the Load-stone; which serves for an infallible testimony (as Martinius saith) that the use thereof was found out onely by the Chineses at that time. It is not like our Compass divided into thirty two Points, but onely into four, which respect the four chief Winds, as East, West, South, and North.

The Chineses are little experienc'd in the Mystery of Navigation, not being able to take an Observation of what Latitude they are in with a Quadrant, but govern themselves onely by their Compass and Evening-Star: At the rising of a Storm or Tempest they chuse not Sea-room as our Mariners, but running with their Ships ashore, leap over-board, and cry Sequa, Sequa.

I will here annex what I have receiv'd concerning the Chinese Ships, from the Writings of David Wright, who resided a considerable time in the Island of Formosa and China.

The Chineses (saith he) call their great Ships Zoen, and not Jonks, or Ioven∣cheu, as most have written, but by that Name understand our Christian Vessels; some of them carry a thousand one hundred Last, or twenty two hundred Tun, some a thousand, others six hundred, others two, and many less.

Their Men of War have a Fore-Castle, and another along the Quarter-Deck, which are higher than the sides of the Ship; in which the Soldiers keep in the time of a close Fight, and serve also for Gun-Rooms, wherein they keep their Arms and Ammunition.

Their greatest Ships of War carry not above forty Guns, some thirty, and others twenty, and ten; all the Guns which they carry in their Vessels being smaller than ours, some carrying not above eight pound Ball, others scarce four, three, two, or one; some are Cast of Copper, others of Brass.

Men of War with forty Guns carry eight hundred Men; those with ten, two hundred, and generally more Soldiers than Sea-men.

The Arms which they use are Musquets, Pikes, Darts, Bowes, Shields and Swords, with Fire-balls, and the like, besides many Fire-ships.

Their Men of War are made after another manner than ours, with broad Sterns; and also broad before, yet not above three Foot▪ and from the mid∣dle they run narrower towards the Head; they have no Keel, but are flat at the bottom; the biggest as well as the smallest carry two Masts, without Yards, Mizne, or Boltsprit. The Sails are made of Rushes and Cane Leaves in this manner:

First they make Net-work of split Reeds, as big as the Sail they intend to make, which spreading on the Ground, they lay five double Leaves of Canes all over it, and on these another Network made just like the undermost, all which is twin'd fast together round about and in the middle: which be∣ing thus made, are fastned to the Yard with Ropes, like those of the Dutch Hoys; they loose and fasten the Strings one by one, and the Sail when taken from the Yard, is rowl'd up and laid along in the Ship; the Ropes wherewith they tie them are made of Hair, but their Cables of Canes or Reeds; the Sails have neither Braces nor Bowlings, but abundance of small Ropes, which are fastned from the top down to the bottom of the Sail, and all knotted together about a Fathom distance from it.

The Anchors are made of a sort of exceeding strong Wood, which sinks in the Water like Iron, and fastens in the Ground, with Flooks like ours; but they have no Anchor-stocks nor Rings, but through the end where our Anchor∣stock is made fast, runs a Rope.

The Chineses carry no Flag-staffs, but in stead thereof a Mast, which stands in that part of the Ship where our Mizne-Mast stands: their Flags hang at the end of a long Stick on the top of the fore-mention'd Mast; which Stick is drawn up by a Rope that runs through the top, and is made fast about the middle thereof; on the other end is a Rope, with which they pull down the end of the Staff, and hoise up the other to which the Flag is fastned; they also carry Flags and Penons on their Fore and Main-Mast, according to the inser∣ted Sculpture.

The Men of War generally bear a round Circle in their Flags, and not (as Linschot tells us) three Crescents with seven Stars, after the Mahumetan manner, one half Red, and the other yellow: and the whole Circle is surrounded with forty three Specks.

When any Ships come to an Anchor, then their Rudder, which is of another fashion than ours, they hoise Aboard, and put on again when they set Sail.

They have another sort of Vessels, by those of the Province of Fokien call'd Koeya, which are much lesser, the greatest carrying not above fifty, and the smallest twenty Tun, bearing onely one Mast.

A third sort call'd Sampan, or Champan, have also one Mast, but six Oars.

A fourth nam'd Lantya, have neither Sails nor Masts, but are like Barges, and carry'd with sixteen Oars, eight on each side, and to every one eight Men. These Vessels are not onely long, but bear a breadth, and serve against the Py∣rats, which much molest the Rivers.

The Emperor keeps great numbers of these Vessels for the safeguard of Travellers and Merchants, and likewise keeps great Fleets of them upon the Sea-bordering Provinces, for defence of his Havens and Harbors.

All the Emperor's Ships and Lantayes carry in chief, the Imperial Arms in their Flags, being a Dragon with five Claws on each Foot.

When any of their Ships coming from a foraign Countrey, stands in for the Shore, they can immediately know from whence it comes, and what her Loading, never asking from whence, or what their Freight, for they give no∣tice thereof in this manner: The Pilot at the beating on Drums and Kettles, standing on the Stern, begins to make signs with the Staff in his Hands, and sometimes waves it over his Head, then behind his Back, then up in the Air, and annon down to his Feet; then laying the Staff down, he makes as many strange signs with his Hands and Arms, as he did before; which done, he takes the Staff up again, and begins a new, whilst the Pilots of those Ships that Ride at an Anchor in the Harbors, exactly observe his motions, and thereby know all what they desire concerning the Vessel; which strange kind of signs and tokens the Netherlanders believe are not to be done by Humane Reason, but by Necromancy and Arts of the Devil.

Common Roads, or High-Ways.

ALl strangers may justly wonder at the Roads and common High-ways that are so many, and withal, strangely and artificially contriv'd by Humane Industry, for the conveniency of the Traveller; especially in all the Southern Provinces, the Ways are first Levell'd and Pav'd with Stones, because they use not many Horses nor Wains: The highest Mountains are also turn'd into good Roads, by cutting and making Passages through the Cliffs on each side: Hills and tops of Mountains are Levell'd, and Vallies fill'd up therewith, to the great ease of Travellers.

There are also on certain places, as at every Stone, (lying ten Chinese Fur∣longs from one another) Messengers or Posts, which speedily convey all Let∣ters, the Emperor's and Governor's Edicts from one place to another, by which means, nothing that is strange or News happens, but in few days, it is spread through the whole Empire.

At every eighth Stone, being a Tract of a days Journey, are publick Houses or Inns, for Entertainment, call'd Cungyuon and Yhi, which entertain all Go∣vernors, Magistrates, and other Imperial Officers, of what Degree soever, with their several Trains, at the Emperor's Charge; but they must by a Harbenger pre-acquaint the Hoast or Master of their coming, with the quality and number of their Attendance, so that when they come, they find all things in a readiness, not onely Provisions, but also Horses, Sedans, Porters, and Vessels, if there be occasion for them; for whatsoever he desires to have, he gives notice thereof to the Inn-keeper, by a Letter, in the Chinese Tongue call'd Pai.

In like manner, the Shores and Banks of Rivers are like the High-ways, handsomly made up, without any Trees or other hindrances, within eight Foot from the Water, that those which Tow the Vessels by Land, may have a clear Passage.

And also the Walls of several places are rais'd from the ground with great square Stones, and over-laid with Stone Bridges of divers Arches, where oc∣casion requires it; so that the Chineses in this Point, not onely exceed the anci∣ent Romans, but may also with all other People strive for the Palm, for though the Chineses are not comparable to the Europeans, in the Building of stately and strong Houses; yet in the erecting of Stone Bridges of exceeding bigness, and many Arches, they far exceed them, as may appear by the Description of se∣veral before-mention'd.

Rivers, Streams, and Channels.

AMongst the Rivers which moisten the Countrey of China, the Kiang and Hoang, or Yellow River, deserve the first place, partly for their long course through almost the whole Empire, and partly for their greatness and abundance of Water.

The greatest Rivers are in the Chinese Tongue call'd Kiang, but the less, Ho.

The Yangzu-Kiang, or for its excellency, by the Chineses call'd Kiang, as if they would say, The Son of the Sea, divides all China into a North and South part.

The River Kiang gliding from the West to the East, takes its Original out of the Mountain Min, which runs in a ledge of Hills, from the utmost Western Borders of the Province of Suchuen, into the Kingdom of Sifan, and extends Northward to the City Guei.

It hath several Names from the several Countreys through and by which it passes; its first Name is Min, from the Mountain Min, its Spring and Ori∣ginal, from whence it rushes with great force of Water, by the chief City Chingtu, in the Province of Suchuen, and divides it self by the spreading into seve∣ral Branches, and Incloses great part of the County Chintingfu, especially at and near the Metropolis Chingtu, in such a manner, with his Meandring Reaches and crooked Windings, that it lieth like an Island, and at the City Sincin, it changes its Name into that of Takiang, and passes from thence, inrich'd with the Wa∣ters of other Rivulets; as the Lunghoa, from the East-side, and Chocang, Cin, and Tatu, from the West-side, by the City Sui, into the Stream of Mahu; from thence going on Eastward to the City Liucheu, where it is call'd Linkiang, and gliding to the City Chunking, receives the great River Pa with this Name; then passes North, through the County of Chunkingfu and Queicheufu, Southward of the City Queicheu or Patung, in one and thirty Degrees Northern Latitude, out of the Province of Suchuen, into that of Huquang, and then takes again the Name of Takiang, not far from the City of Queicheu.

To this place it tumbles with many Gulfs, and great force of Water through crooked Vallies, amidst dangerous Rocks and amazing Precepices, which the Chineses in their Sailing, with great dexterity and nimbleness, know how to shun: But afterwards begins to glide more gentler, where on the North it falls in the Lake Tungting; and passing thence, this Lake and the chief City Vuchang enters the Province of Kiangsi, and there receives out of the Lake Poy∣ang, by which it passes on the North, great abundance of Water, and the name of Iang•…•…u Kiang.

From thence falling into the Province of Nanking, a little after makes an Isle can Sango, Eastward from the City Sosing, where expatiating it self two Leagues, goes Northward through the whole Province of Nanking; and to the West and North by the City Nanking it self.

In the County Taipingfu, Southward from the City Nanking, the Kiang di∣vides it self into two Arms, and makes the Island on which the little City Vu∣hu stands situate, which afterwards against Nanking unite themselves again: On the South-West side of the City Taiping, the Kiang is press'd between two Hills belonging to the Mountain Tienmuen, through which it passes like a Gate; for which reason the Mountain is call'd Tienmuen, that is, Heaven Gate; then running by Chinkiang, at last disembogues it self through a great Bay into the Ocean; wherein lies in a small Isle the City Cinkiang, Garrison'd with Soldiers,

and Fortifi'd with Ships; on both sides the Shores, are for the most part built with great and small Cities, Villages and Hamlets.

Before its fall from the City Kieukiam into the Sea, a Tract of above a hun∣dred Leagues, the Kiang glides so gently, that the Ships may Sail up the same, with or against the Wind, and some Tides, especially Spring-Tides, (a strange thing to relate,) the Water running up so far in the Countrey, that Sea-Fish are there taken.

In this Stream lie several Isles, as Pequey, that is, of the white Tortel, in the third County Hoangcheufu, of the Province of Huquang.

In this County Kincheufu, of the Province of Huquang, a little Island call'd Peli, which signifies, An hundred Furlongs, lies near the City Chikiang, in the Ri∣ver Kiang: In ancient times, as the Chineses write, it was nine small Isles, which afterwards by the falling of the Waters and increase of Sands, became one in∣tire Island.

On the South-side of the City Kiangning, lies an Island call'd Pelu, famous, because not far from it, the Armies of the Southern Provinces were in the time of the Family Sung, beaten and utterly routed.

Near the City Kiang, lieth the Isle Chancung, and on the South-West side an∣other, call'd Tengxu.

The Yellow River, the second in Magnitude, and most famous in all China, and by them nam'd Hoang, is so call'd from the colour of the Water, occa∣sion'd by the Yellow Mud or Clay Earth, which from the Spring to the Sea it glides over: It is always disturb'd and made thick by a Yellow Soil, which it carries along; because this Mud, which gives the denomination, and doth not as in other clear Waters, shine from the Ground, but discolours, being rais'd by the swift and strong Current of the Water (after the manner of Rivulets which swell by Rains) the whole River, as hath often been found by experience; for when its Water is for a little while put into a Vessel, or Glass, the sediment sinks so fast down to the bottom, that it makes almost a third part; and in∣deed, this River at the first sight seems to be a Pool or flowing Mud, but the swift Current of its Waters manifests the contrary: Those that frequent this River, make the Water clear by casting in Allom, which drives the Lees to the Ground, and fills the fourth part of the Vessel. It is a great wonder, from whence such abundance of Clay or Mud proceeds, considering it hath never been seen clear or bright; nay, the Chineses say, That its Water cannot be clear in the time of a thousand Years, insomuch that they have a Proverb from thence amongst them, viz. when they speak of things that are never like to happen, as altogether impossible, they say, When the Yellow River shall be bright. Moreover, the Hoang, as a Foraigner, entering from without into China, takes Original out of the Southern Amasian Mountains, otherwise call'd Quonlun, and by the Inhabitants, Otunlao, which lie not far from the great Mogul's second Court, nam'd Laor, or from the Kingdom of Tibet; Nay, the situation of the places shew, that the River Ganges in Bengale, the Meson in Laor, and other fa∣mous Rivers which moisten the Countries of Siam and Pegu, have their Origi∣nals from these Mountains before-mention'd; for the Chineses also manifest, that many great Rivers, have their head Springs and Fountains there; leaving these Mountains, it runs by Sifan and Tanyu, a Tract of above 300 Leagues, with abundance of Water to the North-East, from whence descending to the East, it approaches China, near the County of Linyaofu, in the Province of Xensi, at the West end of the Great Wall, along which it rushes, and passes on through a part

of the Kingdom of Tanyu, between the Desart Karacatay, otherwise Samo; after∣wards through the Desart it self, with a swift Course, and several Branches to the East and North, a Tract of two thousand Furlongs; from whence it turns South-West to China, and in forty Degrees and eighteen Minutes Nor∣thern-Latitude, runs through the Gate Se in the Great Wall of China, and shoots along between the Province of Xansi and that of Xensi, and in the Latitude of thirty six Degrees enters into the Province of Honan, and out of that into the Province of Xantung, near the City Cao; from whence it runs towards the South-East, and passes on through the Northern part of the Province of Nan∣king, and discharges it self at last with great violence into the Sea, in thirty two Degrees and a half Northern-Latitude.

The Hoang generally falls with such an incredible swiftness, that no Boats can Row against it, but are forc'd up with a far greater number of Toers than in the River Kiang. In some places it is above half a League, and others more, and extending it self in length above eight hundred Leagues, oftentimes rises above its Banks, and covers all the neighboring Countreys with Water and Mud. The Chineses describe the Hoang in these, or the like words:

The original of the River Hoang is between the Southern Mountains of Quonlun or Amasian Hills, by the Inhabitants call'd Otunlao. The Water which makes this River springs from above a hundred Fountains, which makes the Lake call'd Singcieu, which is forty Furlongs wide; the Water running out of it along a Channel makes another lesser Lake, from whence the Hoang runs Northward, through a little towards the East, and soon after washes the Province of Xensi, and runs direct East, then passing on Northward by the Sandy Fields or Wildernesses, from whence it streams Southward into China, and through the Province of Xantung discharges it self into the Sea. Thus far the Chinese Writer.

In former times this River us'd also to run through the Province of Peking and Xantung, but its Course is since by the art and labor of the Chineses led ano∣ther way, thereby to prevent the overflowing the fore-mention'd Countreys, which by reason of their Champain Lands that extend themselves a great way in breadth and length, should not be subject to its often inundating Streams; yet nevertheless the Chineses have left a little Branch thereof, as a testimony of its ancient Course thither.

After having given you an account of the two famous Rivers, the Kiang and Hoang, take a brief Relation of all the particular Streams, both small and great, which distinctly water every Province in the Empire of China.

THe River Io takes its original out of the Lake Si, lying Westward of the Mountain Iociven in the County of Pekingfu, from whence it passes through the Emperor's Palace, and gliding through it with many artificial Trenches, and meandring Inlets, waters the Gardens, and also makes several Lakes.

The Stream Lukeu, which is call'd Sangean, takes its beginning in the County of Taitungfu, in the Province of Xansi, out of the Mountain Iueny; from whence it runs North-East, and at the City Hoaigin receives the River He, which makes the Lake Kiuncun; and thence proceeding on its Course enters Northward of the Fort Guei, into the Province of Peking, where en∣larged by the Stream Guei, which hath its original in the same County Tai∣tingfu▪ out of the Mountains near the City Quangchang, it divides the whole

Territory Pekingfu, and gliding Southward by the City Paogan with a broader Channel, passes under a large Stone Bridge, and receives the Stream Caoleang, which out of the Yellow Kiver through the Great Wall falls into the Province of Peking; from thence passing towards the South-East, rowls along South-West by the Metropolis Peking, where a Stone Bridge with many Arches lies over the same, then bending Southerly passes East by the Cities of Fungan and Iungein, where after having receiv'd the Rivers Yo and Pe, disembogues it self at last in the Bay of Sang.

The River Kiuto hath its original in the Province of Xansi, out of the Mountain Cinhi, from whence it glides Eastward by the Cities Tai and Kicchi, and aftewards Southerly receives by the way the Stream Linsui, with which to the Northward of the City Henping, it enters into the Province of Peking, which it almost cuts through, the Counties Chintingfu, Paotungfu, and Pe∣kingfu, and at last near the Garrison of Tiencin discharges its Waters, being joyn'd with the River Guei, into the Sea: It receives by the way several Brooks and Rivulets, as in the County Chinting, near the City Lingxui, that of Quei; more Eastward, the Stream Fi; near the City Tuilo, the Ta; in the County Paoting by the City Poye, the Kinguen; afterwards the Channel call'd In, which out of the Mountain Yekon stretching from the North to the West, glides round about within the City, and with its winding Arms makes the Island Pehoa, and at last the Streams Ye and Fan.

The River Ye divides Northward the County Paotingfu, beginning Westward in the Mountain Culeang, reaches towards the South by the City Ye, and re∣ceives by the way in the County Xuntienfu, the Fan; glides Eastward between the Mountain Non, and Southward by the City Paoting, where it unites its Waters with the River Kiuto.

The Chokiang hath its beginning in the Province of Xansi, out of the Moun∣tain Kieu, lying near the City Sin, from whence it runs Eastward through the utmost Northern Point of the Province of Honan; to the North, by the City Xe; and passing through the Counties Xuntefu and Quangpingfu, en∣ters the Province of Peking; from whence it glides through the Lake Talo into the County Chintingfu, and at last poures its Waters into the River Guei, in the Territory of Hokienfu, near the Mountain Si and the City Sing. This Stream Chekiang receives several Rivulets by the way.

The River Guei, which rises in the Province of Honan in the County Guei∣choeifu, on the West side of the City runs along to the North by the same; from thence entring the Province of Peking, glides to the North-East between the Borders of the Province of Peking and that of Xantung; receives near the City Lincing in the Province of Xantung, the Water of the Channel Iun; and in the County of Hokienfu, the River Chaohang; and at last with the Kiuto, disem∣bogues it self near the Garrison Tieucin, into the Bay of Sang.

The Water of this River hath a peculiar property at the place where it re∣ceives the artificial Channel Iun, as the Netherlanders in their Embassies to the Emperor of China have twice observ'd, that is, Throw nine Sticks of an equal length into the River, and six of them, after a little lying still, will move to the South, and three to the North.

This River in its Course receives several Rivulets, as the Si, Chang, Ki, Ming, and Fu: The Si takes its beginning in the Mountain Cu, Northward of the same City, in the County Chungtefu and Province of Honan, and passes through the County Quangpingfu; Southward, to the City Quangping; and Eastward, to the Guei.

The Chang, which hath its original near the City Lugan in the neighboring Mountain Sin, in the Province of Xansi, runs from thence through the Province of Honan, Northward of the City Changte, and accordingly into the Guei, and in the way thither by the City Luching, receives a small Rivulet, which hath its original in the Mountain call'd Lin.

The Ming, a Stream whose Fountain Head is Northward of the City Quang∣ping, takes its Course South-East towards the Guei.

The Fu, which begins in the Province of Honan, in the County of Lu∣ganfu, Northward from the City Liching, runs through the Province of Honan into the Guei.

The River Ki takes original with several Branches in the County Guehoei of the Province of Honan, especially in the Mountains Sumei and Choayang, from whence one Branch runs by the City Ki, and then glides North-East into the Guei.

The Hoei belongs properly to the Province of Pingyangfu, and springs from the Mountain Vanquo, near the City Ieching; from whence passing Westward, glides by the South-side of the Cities Hia, Vanciven, Lincin and Pu, where it falls into the Yellow River, and by the way Northward receives the Kiang.

The Sin, which waters the Ce, a City in the Province of Xansi, almost sur∣rounding the same, hath his Fountain in the County of Pingyangfu, Northward from the Mountain Mien; from whence it passes Southward into the County of Hoaikingfu, Eastward from the City Vucheu, and joyns with the Yellow River.

The River Tan, which cuts through a part of the little County Ce, in the Province of Xansi, beings to the Northward from the City Caoping, and runs Eastward in the Province of Honan, where it unites with the River Ki.

Tan signifies Red, for the Water thereof is of a bloody colour; notwith∣standing (as the Chineses relate) it hath been clear formerly, but hath receiv'd that colour from the Blood of a Loyal Governor call'd Pe, who was his own Executioner on the Banks of the fore-mention'd River.

The Streams Iang and Io begin Northward in the Mountains of the County of Ienping, and pass through the same to the South, but at the City Vunning unite themselves into one Body, which Eastward of the Garrison Yu discharges its Waters into the Bay of Cang.

Through the same County run also two other Rivers, viz. the Y and Cie; the first begins above the County Pekingfu, from the Mountain Petam; the other out of the East-Tartary without the Great Wall, where it divides it self into two Arms, the one call'd Hing, and the other Hoang. The Rivers Y and Cie make one Channel near the City Lo, and disembogue themselves in the Bay of Cang.

The Guei, a pleasant River in the Province of Peking in the Western part of the Province of Xensi, in the County Linyaofu, near the City Gueiyven, and runs from thence winding to the South-East through the Counties of Cungchangfu, Fungciangfu, and Siganfu; to the North by the chief City Sigan, where it re∣ceives the River King, and poures at last its clear Waters into the Yellow River, near the City Puching in the County of Siganfa.

The River King spreads it self with several Branches, as the Streams Kin and Haoting through the County Pingleangfu; from whence it goes on Eastward, leaving the City King to the West, afterwards Southerly poures its Waters East from the chief City Sigan, into the River Guei.

The Stream Yao, which takes original out of Sifan, otherwise call'd Prester-Iohns Countrey, or Tibet, descends Southward through the County of Linyaofu,

and with great abundance of Water, roaring like Thunder, rowls along Nor∣therly by the City Linyao, and at last enlarg'd with the Stream Tahia, falls into the Yellow River near the Mountain Ciexe.

The Stream Hoan (another besides the fore-mention'd great River Hoang) springs up in the Mountains Taise or Ulum, in the County of Kingyangfu; from whence gliding towards the South by the City Hoang, and near the City Fun∣given, in the County Siganfu, unites it self with the River Kiang.

The Yung, Guei, Puon, Ring, and U. are Rivers, which glides through the County Fungyangfu, all of them contributing their Waters into the River Guei.

The Han, or Tungchan, a Stream which begins in the County of Cungchangfu, in the Mountains Cheuchi, through which falling Eastward, afterwards winds Southward, then enters the County of Hanchungfu; through which it cuts espe∣cially with two Branches, one Eastern, which begins about the City Fung; the other Western, which comes out of the Mountains about the City Mincheu; then both these Branches uniting, glides (enrich'd with Water Navigable for Ships, by the Name of Tan) South-East, and pass through the County of Cing∣yangfu into the Province of Huquang: From thence the Han runs through the Counties of Siangyanfu and Chintienfu, and at last, after a long Course, poures its Waters into the Lake Yeuchi, and the River Kiang near the City Hanyang.

Several Rivulets discharge their Waters into this Stream, into which the River Guei glides out of the Mountains Io through the Counties of Siganfu and Hanchungfu.

The River Vuting runs out of the Mountains near the City Ganting through the County of Ienganfu, Southward by the City Cingkien, and poures its Waters united with the Stream Kiemo, into the Yellow River: It is generally by the Chi∣neses call'd The Unconstant, because in its Course amongst the Sands it is some∣times shallow, and sometimes deep.

The Stream Kiemo passes through the same County from the South to the North, and begins in the Mountains Kicinu; and gliding Westward by the Ci∣ties Paogan and Iengan, and with the Vuting falls into the Yellow River.

The Water of this Stream is said to be so thin and aerial, that no pieces of Timber nor wooden Vessels can swim upon it, but sink like Iron.

The River Io runs to the South by the Garrison Xaucheu, towards the East, and unites it self Southward of the Fort Culang with the River Hoanting, which comes out of Tibet, and running both through one Mouth, fall into the Yellow River. How far this River Io glides Westward, is not mention'd by the Chineses.

THe Stream Yo runs by the City Chaoykieu in the County of Cinanfu, and* 30.52 takes its original out of the neighboring Mountain Hosien.

The River Ci takes its beginning in the Stream Sun in the County of Yen∣cheufu, and passes North-Eastward through the County of Cinanfu; beyond which it divides it self into two Branches, the one call'd The Northern, and the other The Southern Cing, and both discharge their Waters in the Xangen Bay; at the dividing it receives the River Mingto, which glides Westward out of the Mountain Minxe.

The Stream Ven, which passes through the County Vencheufu, begins near the City Taigan; from whence gliding by the Cities Ningyang and Vengang, disem∣bogues near the City Cinning, Westward of the Lake Nanuang in the Channel Iun.

The River Si begins near the City Suxui; from whence running Westward, divides its self into two Arms, (the Eastern whereof is call'd Tang) between which the City Kooheu lieth like an Island: both these Arms uniting them∣selves again, and enrich'd with the Water of the River Io, fall through one Mouth into the same Channel Iun.

The Pelang, a River which springs out of the Mountains near the City Sin∣tai, in the County of Cinanfu, passes Northward through the Territory of Cin∣cheufu, and gliding by the Cities Changlo and Xeuquan, discharges its Waters into the Bay of Xang: on the way the Rivers Hoaoquei and Chi flow into the same 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the West side, and on the East the River Si.

The Stream Kiao runs from the South to the North through the middle of the County of Lucheufu, beyond the City Pinghtie, and poures its Waters Westward of the Fort Haicolang into the Cangang Bay: Kiao signifies Mud∣stream, because of the thickness of the Water.

The River Vi begins in the County Cincheufu, Northward of the City Mung, in the Mountain Tapico; from whence it descends Northward through the County of Laichenfu, beyond the City Camie, and disembogues into the Bay of Xang. This River being stopt in its Course by one Zansin, when his Coun∣trey was invaded, with Bags fill'd with Sand, which drowning the Champain defeated his Enemies.

The Y or Su begins in the Mountains, Westward of the City Kiu, belong∣ing to the County of Cincheufu, and Southward from the City Mungin; from whence gliding South by the East-side of the City Y, it enters the Province of Nanking, and then falls into the Channel Nun, Northward from the Yellow River.

The Stream Hucu springs in the West from the Mountain Lie, Northward from the City Po in the County of Tungchanfu; from whence gliding Eastward it unites with the Channel Iun, Southward from the City Iangco in the County of Iencheufu.

Eastward from the City Kao, the Si flows out of the Lake Lui, and runs towards the South into the Yellow River.

THe Streams Kinxui, Iu, Xeleang, Pien, Cu, Quei, and the Yellow River, cut* 30.53 through the County of Caifungfu.

The River Kinxui, which comes out of the Mountain Xeyang, in the County of Honanfu, goes Eastward through Caifungfu into the River Pien, which takes its beginning out of the Yellow River in the County of Caifungfu, Westward of the City Hoin, and glides East by the South side of the Kity Caifung; from whence running on to the South-East through the County of Queitefu, it passes by the West side of the City Ningling, then passes on through the County of Fungyangfu in the Province of Nanking, and by the City Lingpi unites it self again with the Yellow River.

The Stream Quei divides the County of Caifungfu with several Branches, and seems to take its original out of the Lake Si, Westward from the City Hiu; from whence it passes East, and afterwards South through the same County, and by the West side of the Cities Hiangching and Xinkian, then passing through the County of Fungyangfu in the Province of Nanking, where changing its Name, and taking up that of Ing, at last falls Southerly into the Hoai.

The River Cin, which begins in the County of Caifungfu and the Mountains Iuling, North from the City Iu, runs East to the City Ienling, then gliding Southward, unites with the Stream Quei.

The River Iu, takes Original out of the Lake Quanching, lyeth West from the City Iu, where it joyns it self with the River Scenal, and from thence flows through the County Iu; afterwards East, through the North part of the Coun∣ty Nanyangfu; and at last turning its course through the County Iunningfu, to∣wards the South, it falls into the River Hoai, near the City Quang.

The Xoleang, whose Head is in the County Honanfu, Southward from the Mountains Xeyang, flows from thence Southerly, to the West side of the Coun∣ty Caifungfu, and unites its self at the entrance into the County Iuningfu, with the River Iu.

Through the County Queitefu flows the Streams Pien; describ'd before the Cin and Hoang, or Yellow River.

The River Ciu begins in the County Caifungfu, Westward from the City Chinglieu, and runs Southward through the County Queitefu, by the South-side of the City Queite; afterwards East, and again South, by the Mountain Tang, and enters near the City Tangxan into the Province of Nanking, and soon after into the Yellow River.

The Rivers Lo and Ganyang, otherwise call'd Von, pass by the City Liu, where they loose themselves under-ground several Furlongs, but soon after appear again.

The Ki, which divides the County Hoaikingfu, comes out of the Mountain Vanno, where falling under-ground, soon after makes the Lake Taye; from whence gliding Eastward into the Yellow River, is call'd, the Ci.

Through the County Honanfu, the Rivers Chan, Kien, Ko, or Lo, and Y: The River Y begins near the City Luxi, in the Mountain Lu; and gliding Eastward, unites with the Co or Lo, near the City Honan.

The Lo or Co, an excellent River, comes out of the County Siganfu, from the Mountain Lo, in the Province of Xensi; from whence it passes North, North-East, by the East side of the City Iunning, where it receives the River Hivenhu, and unites it self at last near the City Hanan with the River Y; with which it glides from thence into the Yellow River.

The Stream Kien, which begins in Mount Pexe, to the Southward of the Yel∣low River, runs Eastward into the River Y; and Eastward from the City Honan, the River Chan glides to the North.

The Rivers Yo or Pe, Tan, Pie, and Hoai, through the Territory Nanyangfu.

The Pe or Yo, beginning in the North of this County in the Mountain Yu; from whence it runs South, and passes through the Territory Cingyangfu into the Province of Huquang, gliding Eastward by the City Quanghoa, and immediately after into the River Tunghan.

The Pie, which begins Westward from the City Yu, runs Southward, and unites with the Stream Pe, on the Borders of the Province of Huquang.

The Tan begins at the West side of the City Nuihiang, and shoots from thence South-East by the South part of the Towns Checheuen and Sinye, and at last falls into the Pe.

The Palu, which begins on the Northern Borders of the Province of Hu∣quang, glides North-East into the River Hoai, East from the City Quang.

The Sienul springs out of the Mountain Ri, near the City Tenfung, in the County Honangfu, from whence it glides South-West into the Territory Iu, Eastward from the Lake Quangching.

The Chu, which begins in the County Chintufu, Southward from the City Ginxeu, passes South through the same, and towards the West by the City Nin∣kiang,

unites with the Stream Yoyung, which coming out of the County Tung∣chuen, receives another River near the Mountain Loking, which hath its Original in the Territory Chintufu.

The Chu, thus inrich'd with Water, glides to the South, and takes the Name of Chung, and so passes on through the County Sincheufu, and at last towards the East, through the County of the City Lincheu, and disembogues Southward of the City Hokiang, into the River Kiang.

The Kiang, which from North to South runs through the whole County of Chingtufu, under the Name of Takiang, runs Southward by the West side of the City Muen, and receives on the East the River Yolung; after which it divides near the City Sinfung into several Branches, which about and near the City Chingtu, joyn together, and surrounding the City and adjacent Countrey, make it an Isle: One of these Branches which run to the Southward of the City, is call'd Kin, and generally also Damask River, because its Water gives a great Gloss to Silk, if it be wash'd therein: Another, more towards the West, is call'd Chia or Hoanglang, that is, Yellow Dragon, for it is said, that in the time of the Family Han, a Yellow Dragon was seen in the same; but glides towards the South, through the County of the City Muicheu and Kiating, and falls at last near the City Muicheu, into Kiang or Taking.

The Lungchoa running out of the County of the City Muicheu; to the South-West and North, by the City Gueiyven, discharges its Water in the Che or Cin.

The Cin, which begins in the Mountains Cinsing, in the Territory Yacheufu, falls Southward through the same County, by the East side of the City Yacheu; afterward through that of Kiating; and at last Westward, by the City Kiating, where it unites with the River To or Tatu.

The River Chocung, which hath its Original in the Territory of Kiungchoa, in the Mountain Gomui, passes through the Southern parts thereof, and through the County of Kiating, into the Stream Takiang or Kiang: This River is eminent amongst the Chineses, for a wonderful accident that happen'd to a Woman, who walking along its Bank, saw a great Cane standing on the Wa∣ter, from which hearing a noise, and pulling up the Cane, found a Child in∣clos'd therein, which she carry'd home with her, who breeding it up, not long after became a great Conqueror, and was call'd Yelang, and first on the West side of this River, Planted the Kingdom of Yeleang.

The To or Tatu which runs towards the Kingdom of Sifan, is a Branch led from the River Kiang, cut by Command of the Emperor Yu, to prevent the over-flowing of the River Kiang.

The Chexu washes the South-West side of the Province Suchuen; from whence it glides North-East, and falls on the West side into the Lake Mahu: Some∣what Northerly, the River Lu takes the same course and so ends.

The Pa, taking Original in the Northern Mountains of the County Paoning∣fu, moistens the same, and runs Eastward by the City Pa, to which it gives denomination; and afterwards passes Southward through the County Xun∣kingfu, and near the Mountain Iohoan, receives the River Chai; near the City Tacho, the River Lin; near the City Riu, the Stream Yu, and unites it self in the County Chungkingfu; near the Mountain Tu, with the River Sihan or Sung, and Feu, which all of them with their conjoyn'd Streams fall into the River Kiang, Southward from the City Chungking.

The Pa, a River which is so call'd, because with its Meandring Reaches it represents the Chinese Character call'd Pa, which signifies Enough.

The Feu, begins in the North part of the Province of Suchuen, in the Coun∣ty Lungganfu, on the South-West side of the City Lunggan; passing from thence South, through this and the Territory Chingtufu; and Eastward, by the City Tungchuen; from whence it bends East, and glides through the County Chun∣kingfu, where, near the Mountain Pu, it mingles with the Ta.

The Chuen, which springs in the Mountains Northward from the City Quang∣gan, in the County Xankingfu, and gliding South by the West side of the City Quanggan; more Southerly by the West side also of the City Gochi, at the end of the County, falls into the River Sung or Sihan: In it are thirty six deep Water∣falls, where it descends violently with great noise.

The Sung, by some call'd Sihan, begins in the Province of Xensi, in thirty Degrees and fifty Minutes Northern-Latitude, at the East side of the Garrison Mincheu, from whence it passes Southward, and in thirty three Degrees and forty Minutes North-Latitude, enters the Province of Suchuen; then running through the County Paoningfu, by the West side of the City Zangki, receives the Tung, falling out of the Mountain Xeyen; so gliding by the City Paoning, enters at last into the Territory of Chungkingfu, and near the Mountain Fu, joyns with the Rivers Pa and Feu, which all loose themselves near the City Chungking in the River Kiang.

The Xe, which rises in the Mountains, Westward from the City Kien, passes Southward through the Mountain Tapa, and with several Windings, glides Eastward by the City Lenting and Xehung; then passing on South-East, makes way through the County of Xunkingfu, and mixes at the South-end thereof with the River Sihan or Sung.

The Xemuen or Heng, runs through the South part of the Territory Siucheu∣fu, by the South-West side of the City Siucheu, with great force and Precipices, call'd the Bell, because it makes a noise like a Bell, re-sounding with Ec∣choes.

Lastly, the River Xemuen falls in the Kiang: The Stream Cingy, also passing on the East side of the same Territory, fills the River Kiang.

The Cing and Tosiang, cut through the Territory Queicheufu; the first which takes Original in the Lake Cingyven, and falls joyn'd with the Tosiang, which glides out of the Lake Cienking into the Kiang, Eastward from the City Quei∣cheu: Cing signifies Clear, because its water is clearer than any other Rivers in this Province.

The Tahoa, which passes through the South side of the County Chunkingfu, glides Northward by the West side of the City Vulung, and falls on the West side also of the City Changxu, into the River Kiang.

The Kiu or Kiukiang, begins with two Branches, the one call'd Piniao, in the South part of the Province of Queicheu, Westward from the City Luken; and with the other, in the Province of Suchuen, Southward of the Mountain Fu∣yung, from whence it glides North-East along the South-East side of the Pro∣vince of Suchuen; afterwards running Northerly into the County Chunkingfu, falls Eastward of the City Changxeu into the River Kiang: By the way, the Ciu receives on the North side of the Garrison Pingchai the Nanyang; and in the County Vunkingfu, the Stream U, Northward from the City Pengxui.

THe Han, which runs through the North part of the Countrey Vuchanfu,* 30.54 falls Westward of the little City Vuchan, into the Kiang: The water of the Han is exceeding cold, insomuch, that it makes the Air about the same

temperate in the Dog-Days; for which cause, the Kings in times past built a Palace over the same, to reside in the Summer.

The Io springs in the Mountains, Southward from the City Vuchan, and runs Northerly through the middle of the City into the Kiang.

The Sui takes Original in the Mountains, Eastward from the City Tangzan, and glides North-West into the Kiang; through the South part of this County passes another Branch, which also discharges in the Kiang.

The Cha divides the whole County Teganfu, and takes Original in the Moun∣tain Tahaung, from whence it passes Southward by the East side of the City Sui, and inlarg'd with the Stream Tuen, on the West side, and with others on the East side, out of the Lake Tuigmung, by the West part of the City Tegan; at last, mixt near the City Iungmuug with the River Hoan, which comes out of the Lake Tungmung, it falls by the Name of Hoan into the River Han.

The Ki, which glides through the County of Hoangcheufu, out of the Lake Uheu, Westward by the City Ki, falls into the River Kiang: The same Terri∣tory is also cut through by two other Streams, viz. Hi and Lungsiang, which both coming out of the North, mingles with the Kiang.

The Mie, which glides through the County Yocheufu, springs from the Moun∣tain Tienho, from whence it shoots North-West into the River Siang, and with that into the Kiang.

The Lieu, begins in the Lake Pexa, which produces four Rivers, and gliding North-West through the Territory Chanxafu, empties it self into the County Io∣cheufu in the River Siang.

The Mielo proceeds from the joyning of two Streams, viz. Lieu and Chao, originally springing out of the County Paokingfu, and passing Westward by the City Siangiin, at last falls into the River Taohao, or Siang: The Mielo re∣ceives by the way another Stream call'd Can, which comes out of the Lake Pe∣xa: This River is eminent, because it was the occasion of a great Feast, by the Chineses call'd Tuonu, which with all Solemnity, is kept on the fifth day of the fifth Moon, through all parts of China, in Commemoration of a Loyal Go∣vernor, who not able to serve his Master the Emperor any longer, Drown'd himself in this River.

The Siang rises at the conjoyning Borders of the Province Huquang, and that of Quangsi, in the Mountain Siung; from whence it passes North, through the County Iungcheufu, where on the West it receives the River Yu; and out of this Territory, entering into that of Hengcheufu, glides afterwards through that of Changxafu, where it also receives the Names of Mielo, by the West part of the City Siangyan, where it unites with the River Tahoa, but retains the Name of Siang; and at last, falls through the Territory Yocheufu into the Kiang: Its wa∣ter may compare with Crystal for clearness, and though it be very deep, yet the Stones that lie in the bottom may plainly be discern'd.

The Siao, which begins in the Mountain Kieny, at the South-West side of the City Ningyven, passes from thence close by the East side of the City Iung∣cheu; and towards the North, mixes with the Siang; receives by the way North∣ward, from the City Ningyven; on the West, the River Cin, and Rivulet Xu; on the East, the Hoang.

The Chinghiang and Ciencieu, glide from the South to the North through the County Ciencheufu, afterwards mixing their Waves together, pass along one Channel North-West, through the Territory Hengcheufu, thence pour their wa∣ters into the Siang.

The Lofeu, which comes out of the Northern Mountains in the County of Changxafu, runs to the South by the City Xeu, and to the Southward of the City Siatang falls into the River Siang.

This River is call'd Lofeu because of its excellency, and for the abundance of Lampreys that breed in the same.

The Gu, which begins in the Mountains near the City Vucang, glides from the South to the North through the County Paokinfu, and passes over many Rocky Falls, and receives on its West side, Southward from the City Paoking, the River Tuleang; and in the Territory Xincheufu, near the City Xopu, another Rivulet call'd Xo; from whence it passes along the West side of the County of Changxafu, where it is nam'd Taohoa, and winding towards the East, joyns at last near the City Siangyn, with the River Siang.

This River in the County of Paotingfu hath forty eight very troublesom and difficult places for Vessels to pass, and most of all on the North side of the City Paoting, where there are so many head-strong Falls from broken Rocks, that the Chineses have set up a Copper Pillar there, to make fast their Vessels to, till such time as they have furnish'd themselves with all manner of Necessaries for their Voyage, for it would be impossible else to get up their Boats by so many Rocks against the Stream.

The Ching, which passes from the Mountains Eastward from the City Pao∣king, glides to the North by the City Hencheu, where soon after it falls into the Siang.

The U begins in the Mountain near the City Iung, and runs by the City Changning.

The Lang, otherwise call'd Yvon and Kiu, takes original in the Province of Queicheu, Southward from the Garrison Taping, where it is call'd Tiechung, and passes from thence Northward through the County Sintienfu, then Eastward through the Territories Chinyvenfu and Sucheufu, and enters into the Province of Huquang, near the City Yveni; from whence gliding North-East through the Counties Xincheufu and Chatefu, it falls at last into the Lake Tungting.

The Xin, passing by the East side of the City Xincheu, falls into the Iuen.

On the South side of the City Lui are five Rivulets, viz. Hiung, Yeu, Yuen, Xin, and Muon; besides one of the same denomination, which runs by the City Cienkiang, and disembogues in the Tan.

By the City Kingling glides the River Y, which falls also into the fore-men∣tion'd Tan.

The Lungmuen passes by the East side of the City Chingyang, having its ori∣ginal in a Mountain of the like Name.

Westward from the City Choxan begins the River C•…•…ngyang, and runs North∣ward by the City Fang; then by the Name of Tanghia bends Eastward, and dis∣charges its Waters also in the Tan.

The Water of this River suddenly takes all Spots out of Garments, and har∣dens the Edge of Iron and Steel.

By the City Choxan rushes also the Xangyang, which hath a very great Water∣fall; If any one throw a Stone into it, there immediately (as they say) arises a Thunder Shower.

The Hiung grows from the conjunction of nine Rivulets in the little County Cincheufu, viz. Lang, Vry, Hiung, Xin, Lung, Sui, Quei, Vu, and Hiung; from whence it glides along one Channel through the County of Xincheufu, to increase the River Yven.

The Y or Cing, which begins Westward of the Garrison'd City Xi, passes Northward, and going through the County of Kingcheufu falls into the Kiang.

The Can runs Westward by the City Nanchang into the Lake Poyang, as the River Licufan to the East.

THe Cau or Chan, which runs through the middle of the Province of* 30.55 Kiangfu from the South to the North, takes its original in the County Cancheufu, Eastward from the City Xuiking; from whence it glides South ward by the City Hoeichang, and afterwards takes its Course Northerly; where, not far from the City Cancheu, to which it gives denomination, it receives the River Chang.

This River begins in the County of Nanganfu, Westward from the City Nangan, on the joint Borders of the Provinces of Kiangsi and Huquang. Both these Rivers commixing their Waters, make a great Channel on the North side of the City, and divide almost the whole Province of Kiangsi; then gli∣ding Northward first through the County Cancheufu, afterwards through that of Kiegan, Eastward from the City Kiegan it self; lastly, passing through Linki∣angfu and Nanchangfu, fall Westward from the City Nanchang into the Lake Poyang.

By the way the Can receives several Streams and Rivers, which all have their original in the Province of Kiangsi, viz. To the East in the Territory Can∣cheufu, the River U hath its beginning; near the City Utu, the Kien and Cang; near the City Cancheu, as in Kieganfu, the Stream Lu; near the City Kiexui to∣wards the West, the Rivers Tao, Sui, Xoin, and Sengting; in the County of Lin∣kiangfu Westward, the River Yven; in Nanchangfu, the Hoayang and Xo; by the City Kiegan, in the Stream Can, begins the dangerous Rock call'd Xotapan: for from this City the going down this River is very Craggy, and dreaded also for the many Vessels that have perish'd there on its Sands and Shelves, over which the Water hastes with great swiftness.

There are eighteen Places where they say the most danger is, from whence the Name Xopatan, which signifies Eighteen Water-falls, is derived.

Most Vessels take an experienc'd Pilot with them from the City Kiegan, to carry them through the fore-mention'd Places: The greatest danger is at the City Hoangcung.

The River Yven, or Yu, springs in the Mountain Yangchi, Northward from the City Iuencheu, and in the County of Linkiangfu falls into the Chan.

The Lu, which begins in the Mountain near the City Iungfung, runs not far from the City Kiexui, and receives near the Walls of the City two Rivers, viz. the Xanglu and Hialu; then gliding towards the West, bends afterwards a little to the North-West, and alters its Name, first into that of Luyuen, then in∣to that of Lap, and disembogues into that of Chan.

The River Kie or Ven passes through the Jurisdiction of the City Kiexui, and with its winding Course makes almost the Chinese Letter Kie, that is, Hap∣piness, from whence also the City hath the Name Kiexui, which is, Happy in Waters.

Out of the Mountains near the City Iungsin, springs the Rivulet Senting, which signifies Whistle, because its Waters gliding swiftly through the Rocks and Stones, make a pleasant noise like that of a Flajulet.

The River Xo, otherwise call'd Kin, springs near the City Vanca, in the County of Iuencheusu; from whence it glides Westward by the City Xancao,

and unites with the River Hoayang near the City Kuicheu, which both run into the Can. Its Water (according to the common Relation of the Chineses) is good against many Distempers.

The Lungki, which springs out of the Mountain Pochang in the County of Nanchangfu, glides North-East by the West-side of the City Fungsin, afterwards through the Territory Nankangfu, and poures its Waters at last near the City Gang into the Lake Poyang.

The River Sieu, which running out of the County Iuencheufu, Northward from the Mountain Kinki, glides Eastward into the Territory Nanchangfu, by the South side of the City Ning; then gliding North-East, enters the County Nankangfu, and at last falls into the Lake Poyang.

THe Po, which springs out of the Mountains in the Territory Hoeicheufu* 30.56 in the Province of Nanking, and glides South-West through the same, passes through the County Iaocheufu into the Province of Kiangsi; then West∣ward, and enlarg'd with the Waters of the Stream Poyven, glides to the South by the City Iaocheu, and in the Territory Iaocheufu falls into the Lake Poyang.

Along this River the Earth is carry'd out of the fore-mention'd County Iaocheufu, of which the best Porcelane in all China is made.

The Kiencie, which begins Northward of the Mountain Suihan, runs West by the North-side of the City Yukan, where it falls into the Lake Poyang.

The Xangjao springs in the Mountains near the City Ioxan, and glides North∣ward by the City Quangsin, afterwards to the South through the same County, and disembogues, having wash'd several places in the County Iaocheufu, in the Lake Poyang, and by the way receives on its Northern Shore th•…•… Water of the Rivulets Se and Ko.

Almost out of the same place, though more Southerly, •…•…uns the Yo, and through this County takes the same Course towards the North by the City Iungfung, and to the South by the City Queiki. The Rivulet C•…•…, coming out of the South, falls into the same.

The Hiui, which begins in the Mountains Southward fro•…•… the Quangchang in the County Kienchangfu, passes North-West by the North s•…•…e of the City Kienchan; from whence it enters into the County Vucheufu, and falls into the River Lienfan. Near the City Kienchang the Rivulets Lung an•…•… Kieukio, through one onely Channel, run into the same, both originally out of the Eastern Mountains of this Territory.

Two other Rivers, viz. the Lu and Cing, gliding from the South to the North through the County Vucheufu; by the City Vucheu, into the River Hiui, with which they fall into the Stream Lienfan.

The Lienfan runs by the North-West side of the City Veuche•…•…, and afterwards cutting through the County of Nanchangfu, disembogues on the East side of the Nanchang into the Lake Poyang.

This River is remarkable for the use which the Chineses ma•…•… of its Water, for that not being subject to the alteration of the Weather, is properly made use of in their Hour-glasses, which run there with Water as ours with Sand.

The Hoai beginning in the Province of Honan, out of the Mountains near the City Funge, passes from thence into the Province of Nanking▪ by the City Hokieu, through the Territory Fungyangfu, and crosses the same from the East to the West, then falls at last, near the City Hoiang, into the Yello•…•… River, and with that into the Sea.

By the way this River receives several others, viz. in the County Ienningfu of the Province of Honan, the Su; in this County of Fungangfu Southward, another call'd Hoai, Peca and Fi▪ to the North, the River Ing, Co, and Vi; which three last have their original out of the Province of Honan.

The Fu rises in the County Fungyangfu near the City So, on the East side of a Lake which lies at the Foot of the Mountain.

Three Rivers surround the County Sucheufu, like an Isle, making it Navi∣gable in several places; the first is call'd Leu; the second, Sung, which glides towards the City Ukiang; the third, Ulang, runs towards the East: all of them have their original out of the Lake Tai, and discharge themselves into the Sea.

Leang, a little River, proceeds from the Fountain Hoci, lying on the Hill Hoei, in the County of Sucheufu, and near the City Vucie falls into the Lake Ta: The Water thereof is by the Chineses accounted the best, excepting one, in the whole Empire, and is in great esteem amongst Persons of Quality. Not a Vessel which passes this way but buyes of it, being ready Bottled, for a small Price, though any one that will stay, may freely take as much as he pleases for nothing. It is Transported to remote Provinces, nay, to the Imperial Court at Peking; for they account it the best to make their Drink Cha withal, by boyl∣ing it with the Herb Tee, and therefore it is much in request.

The Singan begins in the County Hoeicheufu, Westward of the City Hoeicheu; by which passing, it is afterwards increas'd with the Waters of several Rivolets; the first of which comes out of the City Hoeicheu; the second, out of those near the City Hieuning; the third, from those about Vuyen; and the fourth, out of those near▪ Cieki. The Singan runs straight along through Rocks and Val∣leys to Sungan, a City in the Province of Chekiang, and hath by the way three hundred and sixty Water-falls, of which the most troublesome to pass lies near the City Hoeicheu, and is call'd Liucung; then entring into the County Nien∣cheufu in the Province of Chekiang, passes Southward by the City Sungan, and from thence towards the South-East, and to the South by the City Nieucheu, where bending Northward, it changes its Name into that of Che or Chekiang, (from whence the whole Territory, which it almost cuts through the middle from South to North, receives denomination) and accordingly through the County of Hangcheufu; towards the East, by the City Hangcheu; where ta∣king the Name of Cientung, it runs East, and at last in thirty Degrees North-Latitude falls into the Sea.

The Che receive•…•… several Streams out of the Territories Kinhoafu and Kiu∣cheufu from the South and East, as Ven, Chanyo, Kin, Tingyang, Co, Puyang, and Ho, which all through one Channel fall into the same near the City of Tunglin.

The Min begins on the Boundaries of the Provinces of Fokien and Chekiang, by the City •…•…gciveu of the County of Chuchenfu; from whence it passes Sou∣therly through the County of Kienningfu; Westward, by the City Puching and Kienning, as accordingly East by the City Yenping (where it receives the River Siki) through the Territory Yenpingfu; from whence bending Eastward, it enters the County Focheu, and glides by the South side of the Garrison Xuikeu, where the M•…•… falls into the same; then Northward by the chief City Focheu, and at last on the North side of the Garrison Xeching disembogues into the Sea in twenty six Degrees Northern-Latitude. From the City Puching to the Gar∣rison Xuiken▪ the same River falls with great force of Water through Valleys, Rocks and Cliffs, but from thence glides on but slowly: With how much

swiftness the Water runs between the fore-mention'd two Places appears by this, that they can go from Puching to the Metropolis Tiocheu with the Stream in three days, whereas they are fifteen days Toeing up against it: The Chan∣nel winding up and down is very dangerous, and dreadful by reason of the swift Current, abundance of Rocks, and narrowness of the Channel, which in many places between the Rocks is no wider than to permit a small Chinese Ves∣sel to pass through, from whence it oftentimes happens that several suffer Wreck. From the place where this River hath its original, to that where it terminates, it receives many Rivolets and Streams, as on the East, the Tung; on the West, the Kiao, Kieukio, Cu, and Siki; on the South, the Rivers Ionki, Min, and Tachang or Nantai.

The Tung, which comes out of the Mountain Vanche in the County of Kienningfu, falls Southward of the City Kienning into the Min.

The Kiao, which passes through the Territory of Focheufu, rises out of the Mountain Siuefung, shoots from thence Eastward to the North of the River Min, by the South side of the City Lienkiang, and at last discharges its Waters into the Ocean.

The Brook Kieukio, which begins in the Mountain Vuy, in the County of Kienningfu, runs from thence South-West, and unites with the Brook Hochung, which hath its original in the Hill Ukiun in the Territory of Xaounfu; from whence it passes South by the City Kienyang, and at last falls with its Waters into the River Min, near the City Kienning.

The Cu, which begins in the Mountain Ukiun in the County of Xaounfu, glides from thence first Southward, then Eastward by the East side of the City Xaonu, then bending to the South in the County Ienpingfu, it fa•…•…s into the Ri∣ver Si, near the City Sianglo; from whence both these Strea•…•… run through one Mouth Easterly, then Southward, and poure their Wate•…•… united with the River Situ, Westward from the City Ienping, into the Min.

The Siki springs Northward in the Territory of Tingcheufu, out of the Lake Kiao, then runs Southward, so East, and enters into the County •…•…enpingfu, and to the North by the City Lunggan, and by the City Xu, whe•…•… it receives the Brook Taisu, and unites it self at last with the River Cu.

In the Siki, along which they Sail down to the City Ienping, •…•…e many Water∣falls and dangerous Shoals, two especially near the City Cing•…•… namely Kieu∣lung and Chancung; in the passing by, the Sea-men to preven•…•… the danger of Shipwreck therein, tie Trusses or Bundles of Straw befor•…•… the Bowe of the Ship, which bear off the violence of the blow and keep her back.

The River Yeuki, which rises in the County of Ienpingfu▪ out of the Moun∣tain Yucuang, takes its Course Eastward by the North side of the City Yeuki, and turning to the North, falls into the Min.

The Rivolet Tachang begins West from the City Iungfo, and r•…•…ning East by the City Focheu, finishes Northward by the Name of Nantai into •…•…e Min.

The Chang, which hath its original Northward from the Ci•…•… Lungnien, in the County of Changcheufu, runs East by the North side of the •…•…es Changping and Changtui, then from the East part of the City Chancheu, (which is also in the South) it falls at last Southward into the Sea with two Arms.

More to the South in the same County glides the Xeching, from the West to the East, and loseth it self Northward of the Garrison Tungxan into the Sea.

The Kieu, directing its Course from North to South through the County of Civencheu, discharges its Waters Southward into the Sea.

The Brook Lan and River Si, which run from North to South through the Territory of Foningfu, fall both into the Sea; the first towards the West breaks forth in the Mountain beyond the City Fogan, the other comes out of the Mountain Lan.

The Ting hath its beginning in the Territory of Tingcheufu, Northward from the City Tingcheu, and receiving Southward of the same the Brook Ven, pro∣ceeds by the City Xanghang; then entering the County of Chaocheufu in the Pro∣vince of Quantung, receives near the City Chingiang, the River Ching, with which at last it loseth it self Southward in the Sea.

THe Brook Iokio begins with a Branch in the Mountain Ho, in the Coun∣ty* 30.57 of Hoeicheufu, and with another out of the Territory of Chaocheufu, Northward from the City Pingquen; both joyning near the City Kieyang, run Southward by the East part of the City Chaocheu, and at last dividing into two Arms, fall into the Sea, which on the East side of the City is call'd Go.

The River Ly rises in the Mountain Northward from the City Changlo, and Westward of the City Haifung shoots it self into the Sea, opposite to the Island of Ciexing.

The Tung takes its original in the Mountains in the County Cancheu, in the Province of Kiangsi, tends on Southward into the Province of Quantung, through the County of Hoeicheufu, and at last terminates in the Sea.

Another River call'd Ceng, shoots out of the fore-mention'd Tung above the City Hoeicheu, and runs Southward through this and the County of Quang∣cheufu, and gliding through the Lake Go, dischargeth it self Northward from the City of S•…•…an into the Sea.

The Siang▪ also call'd Kio, springs from the Rivers Chin and Vu, Southward of the City •…•…ocheu, and bends its Course into the County of Quangcheufu, where near the City Cingyven it receives the River Talo coming out of the Lake Quen, and falls at last Westward from the City Quancheu or Ranton, into the River Ta.

The Chin springs out of the Mountain Muilin, beyond the City Nanhiung; the Vu out of the Mountain Chang, in the County Haocheufu. The Rivers Chin and Siang run •…•…oth quite through whole Province of Quantung.

The Tao flows out of the Lake Quen, Southward through the County of Quancheufu, and falls near the City Cingyven into the River Siang. Tao signifies a Peach, from the abundance of that sort of Fruit growing on its Banks. By the way the Tao takes in the River Hoang.

The Brook Yu•…•…▪ which hath its source beyond the City Cunhoa in the County Quancheufu, runs South-West, and thence Eastward from the City Canton.

The River Xangu passing through the County of Lotingfu, is receiv'd by the River Ta.

The River Mekiang glides through the Territory of Nanhiungfu. Mekiang sig∣nifies A River of Ink, because its Water is as black as Ink; notwithstanding which the •…•…sh is not the worse esteem'd.

The River King appearing first on the Boundaries of the Provinces of Quangsi and Quantung, passes on from the North to the South, but through the last Eastward by the City King, to which it gives that Name, and opens a wide Mouth into the Sea.

The River Lungmuen takes its source in the Western Mountains about the City King in the County of Liencheufu, and from thence passing through the King∣dom of Tungching loseth its self in the Sea

The River Lien springs out of the Mountains, near the City Linkan, and Southward by the East side of the City Liencheu, descends into the Sea, through the same County the Sanya, which hath its Original in the Mountains, North∣ward of the City Suiki, in the County Liucheufu, resigns to the Sea.

The River Tunglui, shoots from the North to the South through the County Caocheufu; the Xo likewise, though more Eastward, glides to the West by the City Xaocheu, where it receives the Stream Hencang.

THe River Ly, otherwise call'd Quei, takes its Original on the Boundaries* 30.58 of the Provinces of Huquang▪ from whence it passes through the County Queilingfu, Westward in the Province of Quangsi, by the way taking in the Brook Quon, (which comes out of the East, Southward from the City Quonyang,) and fall∣ing down with a great force and noise through Mountains and Vallies, half in∣virons the City Quelin; whence gliding Southward, it entertains the River Yang, which comes Northward out of the Mountain Sumo, West from the Mountain Ly; then turns with a Branch Eastward, to the City Yangeo (where out of the Northern Mountains, in the County Pinglofu, the River Pinghuen falls into the same) then turns again Southward, and runs again through the County Ping∣lofu, Westward by the City Pinglo; and at last unites its self with the River Ta, in the Territory Gucheufu.

The River Lieu, otherwise call'd Xo or Xokiang, and Kung, begins in the Province of Queicheu, near the Garrison Cinping; from whence it passes South∣ward through the County Tuchefu; thence Eastward, by the City Tucho, through the Territory Kingyven, Northward by the City Kingyven, and so turning and winding into the Province of Kiangsi; thence Eastward, into that of Lieucheu; at last, it unites with the River Talo, otherwise call'd Lieucheu, near the chief City Lieucheu.

The River Tolo, otherwise call'd Lieu, rising in the County Lipingfu, of the Province of Queicheu, near the Garrison Cheki, runs Southward through the same, by the West side of the City Lungeung, where a little more Southerly it meets with the River Yung, and enters Westward of the City Hoaiyven, into the County Lieuchefu, of the Province of Quangsi; at last, joyning with the River Lieu or Xo, near the City Lieucheu, it keeps on Eastward of the City Laiping, where it receives the Lui; then from the City Siang, it glides Southward, and at last augmented with the Water of several Rivers, it pours through the Coun∣ty Cincheufu, and Eastward of the City Cinchen into the River Ta.

The Streams Lie, Teng, Quei, Feu, and Lin, flow through the County Pinglofu, from the North (where, except the Quei, they all have their Original) to the South, and accordingly, through a part of Gucheufu, where they all discharge their Water into the River Takiang.

The River Yung extends through the whole County Gucheufu, rising on the East side of the City Hingye, out of the Mountains Ho; from whence it runs Southward, and soon after East, and returns from thence Northward, by the West side of the City Yung, to which it gives denomination; then passes East∣ward again to the West of the City Gucheu, into the River Taikiang, or Ta.

The Stream Ly, Springs out of the Lake Xan, in the County Quangsifu, of the Province of Iunnan; from whence it marches Southward, and enters next into the Province of Quangsi, by the City Lung; then proceeds on its Course East, with many Inlets through the County Taipingfu, where it receives the Rivers Leung and Tungly; from the North afterwards through that of Nanning∣fu;

and at last, near the City Nanning, unites it self with the Southern Puon.

The Mosale, or Moxale, or Xale, springs out of the Lake Siul, in the County Tulifu, of the Province of Iunnan; from whence it runs Eastward through the same County, and first South-East, afterwards South, through that of Zuhi∣ungfu, by the East side of the City Zuhiung, where it receives the River Lung∣chuen; then proceeding on its Course through the County Iuenkiangfu, Linganfu, and the Kingdom of Tungking, falls at last with the River Canlang into the Sea; In the Kingdom of Tunking it inlargeth it self, and becomes Navigable to the Metropolis Tungking.

The Mosale takes in by the way several Rivers and Brooks; as from the North, the Kio; from the West, Lungchuen, Polo, Tunghoa, Taolieu, Ta, Xanno, Iuen; and from the East, Singsien.

The River Kio, gushing out of the Mountain Suki, in the County Yaoganfu, passeth Southward through the same into the Masole: The Polo which comes out of the Lake Zinglung in the Territory Zuhiungfu, (joyning on the way by the River Tunghoa, out of the County Kiutungfu,) and with the River Ta, falls into the Mosale.

The Ta, which riseth in the County Kintungfu, Southward from the City Kintung, stretches from thence Eastward through the County Chinyvenfu, and mixes first with the Polo, afterwards with the Moxale.

The River Xanno springs on the South side of the City Chinyven, and running South-East, dischargeth its Waves in the Confines of the Counties, Iuenkiung∣fu, Zuhiungfu, and Nanganfu into the Moxale.

The Iuen, takes its way from the West through the County Iuenkiangfu, Southward from the City Iuenkiang, and unites with the Moxale.

The River Singsieu, hath its scource out of the Mountain Yolung, in the Coun∣ty Iunnanfu; and somewhat more Southerly, the River Xanno unites with the Mosale.

To the Northward, near the City Fu, in the County Quanguan, runs a Brook or Rivulet, call'd Nanmo, into the River Ly; its Water is said to be continually warm, and good for many Distempers.

Westward from the Garrison Usa, in the Province of Suchuen, appears the River Ven, Puon, or Northern Puon, properly call'd Pepuon, that is, Northern Pu∣on; and passing from thence Southward into the Province Queicheu, is inlarg'd by the River Ciesing, which begins beyond the Mountain Cingping, in the Pro∣vince of Iunnan.

Another Northern Branch, also nam'd Pepuon, or Northern Puon, issues out of the Lakes Che and Ven, and unites with the Northern Branch before-mention'd, below the Fort Ganchang.

The River Pexe, which breaks forth in the County Kiocingfu, of the Pro∣vince of Iunnan, Northward from the City Kiocing, in the Mountain Fuking looseth it self in the Pepuon.

The Northern Puon thus united, passeth through the South part of the Pro∣vince of Queicheu, and joyns with the Southern Puon, which riseth in several Branches or Brooks out of the Province of Iunnan; besides which there are the Pepuon, which comes out of the County Iunnanfu, Southward from the Moun∣tain Cocing; the River Hikien, the Stream Von out of the Lake Fusien, and the Ri∣ver Lu, out of the Pool Ylung.

The Southern Puon thus augmented, runs on towards the East, and unites with the Northern Puon, in the little County of the City Iunning, of the Province

of Queicheu, by the City Tinging, in twenty five Degrees and twenty Minutes Northern Latitude.

The Southern Puon being thus united with the Northern, casts forth one Chan∣nel Southward into the Province of Quangsi, but retains the Name of the Sou∣thern Puon; after having run a considerable course, it entertains the River Mun∣gung and Chiugpi, the one from the North, and the other from the South; then proceeds on its way Eastward, through the County Tiencheufu, Singenfu, Nan∣ningfu, and by the South side of the City Nanning, where Eastward it takes in the River Lis, which comes out of the Lake Xan, in the Province of Iunnan; and somewhat farther two other Rivers, namely, the Go and Cieu, out of which it passes through the County Cincheufu, and near the City Cincheu unites with the River Lieu and Ta; for here the Puon looses its Name, and is call'd Ta, which holds the same Course through the County Gucheufu, where on the South it receives the River Iung, and runs through the Territory Chaokingfu▪ into the Province of Quantung, glides Southward by the City Chaoting and Lo∣ting; and Southward from the City Quancheu or Canton, looseth it self.

The River Kinxa, takes its Original in the Province of Iunnan, out of the South side of the Lake Tien or Quienning, bends its Course Northward through the County Iunnanfu; in like manner through Vutingfu, and in twenty seven De∣grees and thirty Minutes North-Latitude, enters on the South into the Pro∣vince of Suchuen, Westward from the Garrison Le; and at last falls East from the Lake Mahu, into the River Mahu.

Another Branch also call'd Kinxa, runs by the City Tinghuen, of the Province of Suchuen; and Westward from the Mountain Ulang, finisheth its Course.

Another River likewise call'd Kinxa, issues out of the Kingdom of Sifan, and enters the Province of Iunnan, through the Territory Likiangfu, on the East side of the City Linsi; proceeds Northward by the City Likiang, then through the River Ciokingfu; from thence Eastward by the North side of the City Pex∣ing, where it sends forth a Branch towards the South, through the North part of the County Yagon, having its Channel inlarg'd from the several Rivers which it receives in the Province of Suchuen, near the Confines of the Province of Queicheu, and joyns with the River Kinxa, which comes out of the Province Iunnan.

Another River passes more Northward out of the Kingdom of Sifan, also call'd Kinxa, and sometimes Lekie; it passes by the Mountain Luyni, into the Province Iunnan, thence through the County Iungningfu; from West to East by the North part of the City Iungning, and through the Lake Lacu, where it re∣ceives the Stream Loye, which comes out of the South; and falling last into the Province of Suchuen, mixes with that Kinxa which flows out of the Pro∣vince of Iunnan, Southward from the Mountain Ulung: Kingxa signifies Gold-Dust, so call'd from its plenty of Gold.

Thus far of the Rivers and Brooks, which Water the Empire of China in se∣veral places, to its great fertility, and make it Navigable almost through the whole Empire; nay, in such manner, that several Counties and Provinces di∣vided and surrounded by them, lie like Islands separated from one another, by the Streams that flow between them.

There are also many deep-cut Channels, besides Lakes, Pools, and Springs, abounding in Fish.

Standing—waters, or Channels.

THe Countrey of China is cut thorow in many places with Moats or Ar∣tificial Channels, for the conveniency of Navigation from one City to another.

Among many others, one of these Channels call'd Iun, deserves no small admiration, being with an incredible Charge digg'd from the Province of Nanking, through that of Xantung to the Metropolis of Peking; by means of which, from most places in the Empire, all sorts of Goods are brought in Ships to Peking.

It begins on the Northern Borders of the Province of Nanking in the County Hoaiganfu, Northward from the City Socien; near the Northern Shore of the Yellow River, out of which Ships from all parts of the Empire are brought into it; from thence it extends North-West through the second Territory Ien∣cheufu of the Province of Xantung, to the City Cining, Southward from the Lake Nanyang; then through that of Tungchangfu, and the Lake Nanyang; from whence at last, at the end of the County, near the City Lincing, beyond the Lake Cang, it falls into the River Guei.

But because the Water in this Channel is too shallow in many places for great Ships, therefore there are above twenty Sluces or Water-gates in the same, in the Chinese Tongue call'd Tungpa, very strong and firm, of square Stone. Eve∣ry Sluce hath a Gate or opening, lock'd with great Planks to keep out the Wa∣ter, being by means of a Wheel and an Engine drawn up with little trouble, to give way for the Water and Ships, till you come to the second Gate, where they do the like, and so likewise at all the rest: But half way, before you come to the City Cining, they tap as much Water through a great Water-gate out of the Lake Cang, as they need; then Locking up the Gates again, keep the Wa∣ter from running out too much, and so leaving the Ground bare, for the Wa∣ter in the Lake is higher than the adjacent Countrey; so that in a small Tract of Land, they reckon above eight Water-gates, which resist the force and pow∣er of the Water.

When the Ships are come to the Lake Cang it self, they cross not the same, but with much more ease, pass along a Channel made by the sides of the Lake, with brave Banks on each side: At every Water-gate are People which Toe the Ships by a Line through the Sluces, for a small reward.

In this manner the Ships go out of the Yellow River to Peking.

Certainly, should the best Builders or Surveyors of Europe come and behold the length of this Channel, or thickness and heighth of the Banks on each side, and the ornament of the Sluces, which are all of hewn Stone, they would justly wonder at the wisdom of the Chineses, and their Industry, in undergoing that labor, which scarce any other People would be able to perform.

In the Province of Peking, in the County of Pekingfu, near the City Cho, there is also a very long Channel call'd Tocang; another in the eighth County Xao∣hingfu, in the Province of Chekiang, describ'd before; besides many more, which would be too tedious to mention.

Lakes and Pools.

IN the County of Pekingfu, Westward from the Metropolis, lies on the* 30.59 Mountain Iociven, a Lake call'd Lis, which is ten Furlongs in Circumfe∣rence.

On the South side of the Mountain Tienxu, Northward from the chief City, is a Lake, made by the confluence of several Springs, wherefore it is call'd, Kienlung, that is, Of nine Springs, which number, because the Chineses account it Fortunate, hath much increas'd their Superstitious Belief concerning the Em∣peror's Tombs that are there.

On the South-West side of the City Paoting, close by the City Moat, is a small, but very pleasant Lake, call'd Lienhoa, that is, Lien-Flower, whereon the Citizens and Neighboring People make great Feasts and Entertainments in Pleasure-Boats, built for that purpose.

In the County Hokienfu, near the City Hie, is a very deep Lake, nam'd Vo, the Water of which, at the throwing of a Stone therein, becomes of the Co∣lour of Blood: If the Leaves of the adjacent Trees chance to fall into it, in a short time Swallows flie out of it, insomuch, that the Leaves seem to turn into Birds, as is related of the Scotch Barnacles, or Soland Geese.

In the Territory Sintivyfu, Northward of the City Nangsin, begins a great Lake, call'd Talo, and extends as far as the City Kiulo, in the County Xuntefu.

Nor far from the little City Hanping, is another lesser Lake made by two Springs; the one with very hot, and the other very cold Water, though they lie both close together.

In the County Tamingfu, near the City Niuhoang, lies a Lake call'd Luece, eighty Furlongs in compass; near the City Taming, the Pool Caoki, and another bigger, call'd Chanfung or Moma, both brackish.

Westward from the Mountain Feukieu, is a Lake that proceeded there, from the sinking of a City, call'd Siun.

In the County Iungpingfu, near the City Changlei, lies a Lake of thirty Fur∣longs, call'd In; it is Oval, and extends almost to the Sea.

IN the Territory Pingyangfu, at the Foot of the Mountain Xevyang, is a Lake* 30.60 of a considerable bigness, on which the ancient Emperor Xun, as the Chine∣ses write, us'd to Fish.

Near the City Kiang, begins the Lake Iu, that is, Brackish, (for all the Water thereof is as Salt as that of the Sea) and stretches from thence to the Jurisdicti∣on of the City Ganye; it is in Circumference a hundred and forty Furlongs.

In the County Taitungfu, Westward from the City Taitung, lies the small Lake Kiuncu, that is, Honest Man, because hereabouts liv'd one that would ne∣ver accept Gold when offer'd; it is made by the River He.

On the Mountain Yenking, near the City So, is a deep Lake, of a Furlong in Circumference.

In the Territory Taiyvenfu, Westward from the City Che, lies the Lake Tien.

IN the County Siganfu, on the South side of the chief City, is a considerable* 30.61 large Lake, call'd Fan, which is made by the uniting of two Rivers; ano∣ther on the North-East side, not natural, but cut by Command of the Empe∣ror Hiaou, serves for a place of Recreation: It is moreover, adorn'd with a

stately Palace, to which belong pleasant Woods, and Flowry Meadows, where∣on, the Emperor also, to Recreate himself, caus'd Plays and other Pastimes to be Presented to him: The same Emperor also Commanded a Lake to be digg'd on the South-West side of the same City, calling it Queming; on which, he oftentimes caus'd his Soldiers in Vessels to make Sea-Fights, thereby, to make them experienc'd therein; for intending to invade the Southern Provin∣ces, which abounded with Ships, he instructed them by this Jesting Exercise, how to behave themselves in real Engagements.

On the South side, the Emperor made a third Lake, and near it a pleasant Court, call'd Silen, to solace himself in, after the end of those pretended Fights: He plac'd also in this Lake a great Stone▪ Fish, rais'd, and fasten'd in the bot∣tom of the Water like a Rock, that the Sea men Sailing by the same, might learn to shun Rocks and Shelves: Against Rainy weather (as the Chineses say) this Fish makes a hideous noise, the force whereof is imagin'd to be much ad∣vantag'd by a Neighboring Eccho. Moreover, the Chineses relate, that this Emperor on a certain time Dreamt, That this Fish being gotten with a Hook in his Presence, crav'd his Aid; and that he the next day, really taking a Fish in the Lake, remember'd his Dream, and freed the Fish; whereupon, throwing his Net in again, he found two inestimable Pearls, which the Chineses call Mingy∣ven, that is, Stones of a clear Moon, because on the Increase and Decrease of the Moon, they grow dimmer or brighter, as is generally reported of the Moon-Stones.

Moreover, there are some that affirm, that such like Stones are yet in China, and being kept in the Emperor's Palace, are accounted unvaluable; and that when the Emperor took up the foremention'd Pearls, he said, Certainly, this is the Gift of that grateful Fish which I set at liberty.

WIthin the City Cinan, in the County Cinanfu, on the West side, is the Lake* 30.62 Taiming, out of which runs a Channel to the Lake Coyng, which is also within the Walls of the said City; Out of both which Lakes, there run through the whole City convenient Navigable Moats: This Lake Taiming also extends towards the Lake Cioxan, which is on the North-side, without the City.

Near the City Changkieu, is the great Lake call'd Peyun, which abounds in Fish, and inricheth the adjacent Grounds with excellent Fruit, Linko and Lien-Flowers.

In the County Yencheufu are five Lakes, namely, Nanuang, South from the Ci∣ty Ven; Toxan and Fauly, near the City Tingtao; Leangxan, near the City Tung∣ping; and Lui, which in the Chinese Language signifies Thunder, because in the mid∣dle thereof is a Stone, whose Body resembles that of a Dragon, and the Head, a Mans, and is by the Chineses call'd, The Spirit of Thunder; they affirming, that by striking on its Belly, they hear a noise or voice: There are likewise in this County many other Lakes, but of less note.

In the County Tengcheufu, near the City Laiyang, is the Lake Hiyang; and in Tungchanfu, the Lake Ho.

IN the County Kaifungfu, lies Westward from the little City Hiu, the small* 30.63 Lake Si, and another near Iengling; two other Lakes, call'd Lieu, from the abundance of Willows which grow on their Banks, lie one near the City Chin, and the other by Sincheu.

On the West side of the City stands the Lake Kiuming, made by the Imperial Family Sung, for a place wherein to Exercise the Naval Militia, and represent Sea-Fights: This Lake is exceeding pleasant, being built round about with many stately Palaces and Pagods, and also Marble Columns Inscrib'd with Verses extolling the Lake.

There are also other lesser Lakes, amongst which is one, call'd Tungmuen, near the City Chin, which is exceeding clear, and without any Weeds.

In the County Queitefu, on the South side of the City Queite, is the Lake Nan, over which lies a Stone-Bridge with many Arches; Westward from the City Ciu, is the Lake Si; and in the same County, a very small Lake call'd Chokin, about which many Silk-Weavers have their Habitations, invited thither by the goodness of the Water, from which the Silk receives an excellent Gloss; and thereupon, the Lake takes its Name: The word Chokin signifying, A Washing place for Silk Damask.

Eastward from the City Iuching, stands the Lake Menchu.

In the County Hoakingfu, Northward from the City Ciyven, is the Lake Tay, which is made by the River Ki.

In the Territory Iunningfu, Westward from the City Iunning, is the Lake Si, yielding a very pleasant Prospect, as being surrounded with many Buildings, for the Entertainment and Recreation of the Citizens.

Westward from the small City Iu, lieth a Lake of a hundred Furlongs; in the City of Iu, to the North, stands the Lake Quanching.

ON the Mountain Tienchi, near the City Mien, in the County Chingtufu, in the* 30.64 Province of Suchien, there is a Lake, which by Rain is not observ'd to increase, nor in dry Seasons to decrease.

On the South-East side of the City Chingtu, is a Pool call'd Yolung, which the Emperor Sui caus'd to be made for the exercising his Marriners and Souldiers in Ships of War, when he resolv'd to invade King Chin.

Vansui is a Lake of four hundred Furlongs, digg'd like a Moat round about the City Chingtu, but broadest on the North side; of the Earth which was digg'd out of the same, the Walls of the City were made.

Southward from the City Cai, in the County Queicheufu, stands the Lake Cin∣gyven, a hundred Furlongs square, being the source of the River Cin.

Westerly of which, and East from the City Ta, is the great Lake Vanking, whose Shore is all set with stately Trees, and inviron'd with Flowry Meadows, Fruit-Trees, and Populous Villages.

In the County Mahufu, Southward from the City Mahu, is a Lake also call'd Mahu, that is, Horse Lake; for the Chineses say, that in this Lake a Horse appear'd, Wing'd like a Dragon, from which the Family Tang gave the City, Lake and River that denomination.

In the little County Muicheu, whose chief City is of the same Name, stands a great Lake call'd Hoang, that is to say, Circular, because it surrounds the whole City, yet it is broadest towards the West: The Shore is built all along with handsome Houses, which standing round like a Ring, the City may justly be call'd, The Stone thereof; near it is a long Bridge call'd Sive.

On the East side of the City Kiating, is a small Lake call'd Ningyve: By the City Pukiang is another Lake nam'd Yotan, on which they say the Emperor Hoangti Anno 2500. before the Incarnation, study'd Chymistry.

THere are two Lakes in the County Vuchangfu, one near the City Kiayn,* 30.65 and the other near that of Puki.

In the Territory Hanyangsu, part within and part without the Walls of the City Hanyang, is the Lake call'd Langquon.

On the West side, at the Foot of the Mountain Kieuchin is the Lake Taipe, two hundred Furlongs in bigness.

In the County Sianyangfu, near the City Nanchang, within a Temple, is a Pool call'd Chinchu, that is, Lake of Pearls; for if any Person walk apace round the sides thereof, the Water arises out of the Ground like Pearls, whether natu∣rally or artificially cannot easily be resolv'd.

In the Territory Teganfu, Eastward from the City Tegan, is a great Lake of nine hundred Furlongs, call'd Iunmung.

In the Province Hoangcheufu, near the City Hoangpi, stands a Lake call'd Vu, that is War: for in the time of the Kings it was a Place ordain'd for the Exer∣cise of Ships.

Near the City Hoangmui is another bigger Lake call'd Vihu, and not far from it the Lake Taipe; and Eastward from the City Ki, the Lake Kinxa.

In the Territory Kingcheufu, on the East side of the City Kongcheu, is the Lake Tung, forty Furlongs in bigness, pleasant and full of Fish, with which the Ci∣tizens often Feast and make Merry in Vessels on the same.

In the County Yocheufu, at the South-West side of the City Yocheu, is a great Lake call'd Tungting, which (as the Chineses say) had its original from a Deluge; and this seems to be confirm'd by the many Isles that lie in the same, namely Kiun, Kinxa (signifying Sand of Gold,) Kiue, and Pecio, built full of Pagodes and Cloysters, which are inhabited by some poor Religious Order.

Amongst others is a floating Isle, on which is also a Cloyster built, for the Roots of Trees and large Canes knitted and joyn'd together keep up the Earth by their continual growing to one another, without the least danger of ever breaking.

In the County Changxafu, on the middle of the Mountain Taihu, near the City Lieuyang, lies a great fathomless Lake: On the Mountain Xepi another of thirty Furlongs call'd Pexa, out of which run four Brooks, of which one is the Rivolet Lieus; the rest fall into the River Iuping.

On the North side of the City Siangyn, lies the Cingcao; which moistning the County Iocheufu, unites it self with the Lake Tunting.

In the County Hengcheufu, Eastward from the chief Kity Hengcheu, is a very deep Lake; the Water whereof being of a green colour the Chineses highly esteem for the making of their Drink, or Wine call'd Sampsou.

In the Territory Chantefu, near the Cities Luugyang and Iuenkiang, lies the Lake Chexa, and unites it self with the Lake Tungting.

In the County Iengcheufu near the City Tan, is a great Water-fall, which im∣mediately turns to a Pool, in which grow yellow Lien-Flowers, which are sel∣dom found of that colour in any other place.

In the little Territory Cingcheufu, near the City Hoeitung, stands the Lake Cingpo, full of great Rocks and Stones, on which the Chineses often make Merry.

In the small County Chincheufu, not far from the City Hingping on the Moun∣tain Xemeue, is a small Lake call'd Yen, whose Water continues warm all the Winter. Twice a year great numbers of wild Geese flie thither out of the North and South; wherefore this Lake is call'd Ien, that is, A Goose.

IN the Territory Nanchangfu, in the Province of Kiangsi, on the South-East* 30.66 side of the City, stands the Lake Tung, very much noted for the clearness of its Water, and the abundance of Fish which is in the same.

The great Lake Poyang, otherwise call'd Pengli, near the City Nankang, North-East, is three hundred Furlongs long, and forty broad, borders West∣ward on the County Nankangfu; Eastward on Iaocheufu: part of it, which respects the City Yukan, is call'd Kanglang: It contains several Isles, as to the South, Langma, Xuihung, and Pipa, lying near the City Yukan; more North∣ward, Ingcu, Chuki, Checien, and the Mountain Ki, lying on an Island Eastward of the chief City Pehoa, and Westward of the little Isle Teuxu. It receives in the South, the River Kan; in the East, the Logan; and in the North, the River Kiang.

In the County of Kienchangfu, without and within the chief City, lies a Lake, the one part call'd Kinquei, and the other Kao.

Near the City Nangfung is also the little Lake Vansui.

In the Territory Linkiangfu, near the City Iuencheu, is the Lake Funghoang, which not being very big, neither increases by abundance of Rain, nor decrea∣sed by excessive Drought.

In the County Kieganfu, near the City Kiexui, lies the Lake Kien, and near Ganfo the Pool Mie, signifying Hony, so call'd from the exceeding sweet Fish which it produces.

In the Territory Xuicheufu, near the City Sinchang, there is a Lake, whose Water is never muddy, but always very clear.

In the County Iuencheufu, on the East side of the City Iuencheu, the Lake Tung spreads it self, and is call'd The Pleasure of the County, for the Chineses often make Feasts on the same, and have built several Retreats and Banquetting∣houses on its Banks.

The Lake Mingyo affords the City a Moat, through which it is brought with convenient and Navigable Channels, which on the East side run into the Lake Tung.

THe Lake Cienli is situate in the Territory Kiangningfu, Eastward near the* 30.67 City Lieyang, containing a thousand Furlongs, which to the South is united with the Lake Tai, in the County Sucheufu.

Without the Gate of the City Taiping, a small Lake call'd Hiuenuu lies on the South-West side, not far from the City Liexui, Westward from the Lake Tanyang, and extends from thence to the Borders of the City Taiping.

In the County Sucheufu, on the West and South-West side of the City Su∣cheu, is the great Lake Tai, which according to the Description of the Chineses, takes up the space of thirty six thousand Paces.

Near the City Changxo is the Lake Xang, united on the North with the Lake Cienli.

In the Territory Yangcheufu stands the Lake Piexe, Northward from the City Kaoyeu, where a digg'd Channel runs into it.

In the County Hoaiganfu, on the East side of the City Hoaigan, lies the Lake, or rather a great Pool, call'd Hing, full of Canes.

In the Territory Luchenfu is the great Lake Cao, and another less, nam'd Pe, which joyn near the City Lukiang: In the first lies the Mountain Ci, that is to say, Orphan, because it stands alone.

In the County Taipingfu, on the South-East side of the City Taiping, begins the Lake Tanyang, by the Chineses reckon'd to be three hundred Furlongs large, and extends from thence to the City Liexui.

In the little Territory wherein is the City Cheucheu, near the City Civenciao, begins the Lake U, and reaches to the City Laigan.

The little County Siucheu boasts of the Lake Ta; near which (they say) a Countrey Maid, afterwards Mother to the Emperor Lieupang, Conceiv'd by a Spirit, and brought forth the chief of the Family of Han.

In the County Hancheufu, near the City Changhoa, on the Mountain Cienking, is a Lake of two hundred Paces in bigness, famous for its Golden-colour'd Fishes, which the Chineses from thence call Kinyu.

In the Territory Hangcheu, Westward from the City of the same Name, is the famous Lake Si, between which and the Wall is onely a Stone Street of seven Furlongs for a convenient Walking-place. The Lake, whose Water for its pleasantness is much esteem'd both by Natives and Strangers, containeth forty Furlongs in circumference, and is surrounded with Hills in manner like a Theatre; round about the Hills (out of which flow many Brooks and Ri∣volets, distinguish'd by several Channels) are Pagodes, Palaces, Cloysters, Col∣ledges, Groves, Tombs, and very delightful Gardens. On its Shore are broad Ways Pav'd with Free-Stone; and across the Lake lie Bridges of Ships, over which they pass from one side to another, and in the passage take a view of the whole Lake. The Ways are all along shaded with Willow Trees, planted di∣rect in a Line, and ever now and then Seats or Arbors, with Benches for Pas∣sengers to rest on; insomuch that it is a question, which of the two are here most to be admir'd, the workmanship of Nature, or the artificial Adornments of the Place? The Water is clear as Crystal, the least Stone being seen in the bottom; but near the Shores the Water, being low, is over-grown with the Flower Lien.

This Lake hath no way for the Ships to go out or in at, for the Water is onely let out in time of great Rains, through little Rivolets, or through a Sluce which is Northward from the City; yet nevertheless there are many Ships built on its Banks, which may justly be call'd Golden Palaces, for their being so richly Gilded and Painted with various Colours. In these Pleasure-Boats they make Feasts, Plays, and other Entertainments; wherein the Chine∣ses have all things that can be invented to recreat the Mind. The Vessels thus stor'd with all manner of Necessaries for delight, Sail to and again in the Lake without fear or danger of Shipwrack; so that it is no wonder why they call this Place and City A delightful Garden, or Earthly Paradice.

In the County Kiucheu, near the City Kaihoa, lies the little Lake Pehiai, so call'd from the white Crabs which it produces, for Pehiai signifies a White Crab.

In the Territory Ningpofu, near the City Tunghoa, is a little Pool, but very deep, call'd Yapoi, whose Water (as the Chineses say) grows exceeding clear, when the City hath a pious and good Governor, but when a bad one, muddy and thick.

In the County Tingcheufu, near the City Vuping, lies the Lake Loxui, that is, Green Water, so call'd from its green colour, with which this Water is so deeply Dy'd, that it makes all things green which are wash'd in the same.

On the East side of the City Tingcheu, is a Pool call'd Cingcao, of one Furlong, but very deep; near which grow Trees, whose Leaves are continually green.

In the County Hoeicheufu, Westward from the City Hoeicheu, is the Lake

Fung, ten Furlongs in circumference; in the middle of it are two Isles, built with Banquetting-houses, wherein the Citizens Caress one another.

This Lake is surrounded with a Stone Wall, and a Bridge also, which not onely leads from one side to the other, but also from one Island to another. The Shore is planted with shading Trees, and built with Colledges.

In the County Liencheufu, five little Lakes call'd U, surround the City King.

In the Territory Tincheufu lies the Lake Kiao.

THe Lake So lies in the County Queilingfu, in the Province of Kiangsi, on* 30.68 the West side of the City Queiling, being seventy Furlongs in compass, and in it a Hill call'd In, makes a little Island.

In the Territory Gucheufu, on the East side of the City Gucheu, is a small Lake call'd Go, in which King Pegao is reported of old to have fed ten tame Crocodiles, feasting them onely with Criminals and Malefactors.

Within the Wall of the Garrison Cinping is a Lake call'd Ciseng, out of which the Inhabitants fetch their Water, the hard and stony Ground thereabouts not yielding them any Pits or Wells.

In the County Tuchufu, on the West side of the City Pingcheu, is a Lake which bears the same Name with the City.

In the Territory Iunnanfu, on the South side of the chief City Iunnan, is the Lake Tien, otherwise call'd Quinming, which extends Westward, and is five hun∣dred Furlongs in circumference: It receives increase of Water out of the Puon, which descends out of the Mountain Kaoming into this Lake; and on the South side makes the River Kinxa, which runs Northward.

In the County Talifu, Eastward from the City Tali, is a very long Lake call'd Siul, which abounds in Fish, it begins Southward near the City Tali, and ends Northward at the City Leankiang.

This Lake makes nine Creeks or Inlets, and hath three Isles which rise up into Hills, besides four others very low and fruitful.

The Mosale also takes its original out of this Lake, which after having run through this whole Countrey, falls into the Province of Tungking, where aug∣menting its Stream, it makes the Channel which carries Ships of great Bur∣then to the Court of Tunking.

In the County Linganfu, near the City Xeping, lies the Lake Ylung, above a hundred and fifty Furlongs in circumference, and hath three Isles in the midst of it.

Another call'd Tungha appears Westward from the City Tunghai, eighty Fur∣longs about; its beginning is near the City Hosi.

In the Territory Chinkiangfu, Southward from the City Chinkiang, is a great Lake call'd Fusien, a hundred thousand Paces over; and another lesser nam'd Ming, lies near the City Yangcung.

In the County Iungningfu, on the East side of the City Iungning, is a great Lake with three Isles of equal bigness, each having a rising Mount about two hundred Rods high.

In the County Kioungfu, near the City Koleang, at the Foot of the Mountain Kiechiung, is a Lake or Pool call'd Changyen.

In the Territory Kioungfu, near the City Kienchuen, lies the Lake Kien, which is sixty Furlongs in circumference. Out of it flow three Brooks call'd Chuen, which represented by these Chinese Characters 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, signifie Water; from whence the City hath also receiv'd its denomination.

In the County Vutingfu, on the North-West side of the City Vuting, is the Lake Hoeineao, which word signifies Breeding Birds; because the Leaves of a certain Tree which fall into it, turn into a sort of Birds, so black, that the In∣habitants look upon them as little Devils or Spirits.

In the County Cintienfu, between two Mountains, Westward from the City, is a great Lake call'd Che, otherwise The Sea Cingxui, into which certain little Rivolets descend out of the Mountains.

In the County Iunchangfu, on the East side of the City Iungchang, is the Lake Chinghoa, wholly cover'd with Lien-Flowers.

On the South side of the City Pexing lies the Lake call'd Chin, which broke out from the Ruins of a great City, which (as they say) through the wickedness of the Inhabitants was swallow'd up in the Earth with all the People, onely one Child, by sitting on a piece of Timber in the Water, escap'd that general Destruction. Its chiefest Inhabitants were said to be of the House of Chin; from whence the Lake hath its denomination. It is also call'd The Starry Sea, from the Weeds, which, shap'd like Stars, drive upon the Water.

Springs.

IN the County Fuencheufu, in the Province of Peking, near the City Hiaoy, are many hot and boyling Springs, almost like the sulphurous Waters in Italy. If the Chineses observ'd and minded these things sufficiently, they might perhaps easily discover the same, if not greater Operations in them, than are found in any of ours in Europe; for having peculiar Tastes and Co∣lours, they may probably also have in them no less Vertue and Efficacy in Medicine.

Near the City Lo, in the County Chungpingfu, is a very pleasant Spring, re∣markable onely for the clearness of its Water.

Another like this in the Territory Kingyangfu, is call'd Xingxui.

In the County Cinanfu, in the Province of Xuntung, they reckon above seventy two Springs on the South side of the City Cinan; amongst which one call'd Kiuti exceeds all the other in excellency of Water.

In the County Yoncheufu of the same Province, near the City Ningyang, is the the Spring Tao; of which, because the word signifies Robber, the famous Phi∣losopher Confut, though he was exceeding thirsty, refus'd to drink, so much he abhorr'd the very Name of Vice.

In the Territory Tencheufu, in the same Province, near the City Chaoyiven, is a Spring call'd Hanuen, a Monster of Nature, out of which at the same time flows Water both cold and hot; wherefore it hath that Name, for Hanuen signifies Cold and Hot.

THere is a delightful Spring nam'd Ping in the Province of Honan, at the* 30.69 South side of the City of the same Name, near which stands an Ascent of Stone for those that please to stand upon, and behold the Fountain.

In the Territory Nanyangfu, in the Province before-mention'd, near the City Nuihan, is a Spring whose Water is highly esteem'd of by the Chineses, who believe it to have an Operation effectual to the prolongation of humane Life.

On the South-West side of the City Iu, is a Fountain, which for the hotness of its Water is call'd Ven, that is to say, Hot.

In the Territory Chintufu, in the Province of Suchuen, near the City Nui∣kiang,

is a Spring, whose Water is observ'd to ebb and flow at the same time with the Sea, though very remote from thence.

On the West side of the City Xunking rises a Spring call'd Tieyu, that is to say, Milky, from the sweetness of its Water.

NEar the City Kixui, in the County Hoangcheufu, in the Province of Hu∣quang,* 30.70 is the Spring Loyu, whose Water is particularly famous for making of good Tee.

On the Mountain Kingmuen appears the Fountain Sinlo, whose Water is esteem'd of great Vertue.

WEstward from the City Nankang, in the Province of Kiangsi, is the* 30.71 Spring Lien, whose Water in its fall glitters like Cloth of Silver, pro∣ducing thirty Rivolets.

In the County Vucheufu in the same Province, near the City Kinki, is ano∣ther pleasant Fountain; and another call'd Puensin, within the Walls of the City Xuicheu.

IN the County Sinkiangfu, in the Province of Nanking, within the City Xang∣hiu,* 30.72 is a Fountain of pure Water call'd Iung, in the midst of a Temple.

Out of the Mountain Kin, lying in the River Kiang, in the County Chinki∣angfu, issues a Fountain call'd Chungleang.

IN the Territory Choaking, in the Province of Quantung, near the City Singing,* 30.73 on the Mountain Tienlu, is a Spring or Pool, from which upon the throw∣ing of a Stone into the same a noise is heard like Thunder; soon after which the Skie overcasting poureth down Rain, wherefore it is call'd The Dragons Pool.

THe County Pinglofu in the Province of Quangsi, hath two Springs, one* 30.74 Northward from the City Pinglo, call'd Caning, and the other near the City Xo, call'd Yoxan.

On the South-East side of the City Queiyang, a Fountain of very sweet and clear Water falls into a Pool, which is never perceived either to increase or decrease, how much Water soever is drawn out of, or let into it.

Near the City Pingtin, in the County Tungginfu, is a strange Spring call'd Can∣keng, out of which through one onely Mouth flows two several sorts of Water, the one clear, and bright, and the other thick and muddy, which after having forsaken their Spring, go each a contrary way, as if at enmity one against another.

On the East side of the City Chinning, is a Fountain of exceeding cold Wa∣ter, notwithstanding the adjacent Earth is heated by a Fire which continually burns under Ground.

Near the Garrison Picie is a Fountain of very pleasant Water, call'd Tro.

NOrthward from the chief City Iunnan, on the Mountain Xang, is a cold* 30.75 Spring, counted good to strengthen the Joynts or Limbs.

On the South-East side of the City Cioking, in the County Ciokingfu, rises a Fountain of warm Water, which cures by Bath those that are troubled with Swellings, proceeding from redundant Humors.

There is yet another Spring in this County call'd Hiangxui, that is to say, Sweet-smelling Water, because of its fragrancy, especially in Lent; at which time the Inhabitants make Offerings to this Fountain, and drink the Water mix'd with their Liquor made of Rice.

Mountains, Hills, and Valleys.

THe Empire of China is in many places flank'd with rows of Mountains to a vast length; not far from which are situate some or other of their chief Cities.

The Chineses hold all great Mountains in such high veneration, that there is nothing which they adore with a more superstitious zeal; and as our Astrolo∣gers make their Prognostications from the observation of the Course of the Heavens, so they from the Mountains; first from their situation and shape, then from the Gardens, Rivers, Springs and Lakes that are in and about them.

In the observation and chusing of Mountains they are no less curious than superstitious, imagining that in them all their happiness and prosperity con∣sists, because the Dragon, whom they account the chief Instrument of their fe∣licity, resides in a Mountain. But of this their Mountainous Superstition, a more particular account may be seen in Father Martin's Preface to the History of China.

FIve Leagues Northward from the Metropolis Peking, is a Mountain call'd* 30.76 Thienxen, wherein the Tombs of divers Chinese Emperors are very richly and magnificently built.

On the South-West side of the City is a Mountain call'd Iociven, crown'd with most stately Palaces belonging to the Tartarian Family of Iven.

Here the Tartar Emperors us'd to retire, to shelter themselves from the ex∣cessive heat of the Sun in the Summer.

In the same County, near the City Changpling, is the Mountain Pefeu, out of which run two Rivers, which meet at the Village Feu.

In the same County, not far from the City Pa, is a Mountain nam'd Nan, overgrown with a Wood of Canes twelve Furlongs in circumference, in the midst of which is a noble Palace: and not far from thence is that high and steep Mountain nam'd Puon, having upon one of its tops a Stone, which though of a huge bulk, totters and shakes at the least touch; the like whereof we have in a certain Cave in Derby-shire.

Near the City Iungjung is the Mountain Chinquon, forty Furlongs about, and on its South side a Hill call'd The Flower, from the various colour'd Stones thereon.

Not far from the City Cunhoo is the Mountain Mingque, so call'd from a Fire burning within it, which seems to pierce it through in such a manner, that looking in at a Hole on the right side, there appears the form of a bright Half-Moon.

By the City Phingco are the Mountains Kie and Siuvu, out of which they dig a sort of Coals, that serve the Inhabitants for Fewel.

In the County wherein is the City Paoting, near the City Huon, is the Moun∣tain Yki, on which they say the Emperor Yau's Mother resided.

Hard by the City Hiung lies the Mountain Tahiung, out of a Rocky part whereof springs a clear Fountain.

Near the City Ie is the Mountain Lungcie, on which appears the foot-steps of a Dragon.

Not far from thence is a Valley call'd Tunglo, which being surrounded with high Mountains, onely one narrow Passage left, is much resorted to, as a very secure place in time of War.

The County wherein is the City Hokien hath few and little Mountains; the onely remarkable one call'd Si, is near the City Ching; on the top whereof, spreading it self into a large and fruitful Plain, is built a pleasant Village.

In the County wherein is the City Chingting, and near the City Cinking, is a very high Mountain call'd Changuen; upon whose top, reaching above the Clouds, is a very soveraign Spring, and a stately Cloyster for Priests, built by Queen Xayang, in memory of a great Cure she receiv'd by drinking the Water of the fore-mention'd Spring.

Near the City Kioyang is another Hill, out of which gusheth also a healing Fountain, and whereon grow divers kinds of Physical Herbs.

By the City Ki are the Mountains Curi and Tiaopuon, eminent for the Defeat which Hansini of Chinya received there.

Not far from the City Chanhoang is the Mountain Ulna, so call'd from the Statues of five Horses Cut in yellow Stone, over which the Family of Sung built a rich Chappel.

In the County of Xantefu, near the City Xaho, is a Mountain, famous for its many Caverns; it is call'd Tang, that is, Bath, from a Fountain of warm Water thereon, exceeding good against all kind of Scurf.

Near the City Nuikeu is the Mountain Pungcio, producing divers Physical Drugs.

There is likewise the Mountain Cu, that is, Orphan, because it rises onely with one top, and stands distant from all others.

In the County Tamingfu, near the City Chinfung, lies the Mountain Cieu, fa∣mous for the Emperor Kau's Tomb.

Near the City Siun is the Mountain Feukieu, having a Lake on the West∣side, which proceeded from the sinking of another City, call'd also Siun.

Nor far from hence is likewise the steep and high Mountain Cukin.

In Iungpingfu, on the South-East side of the City Iungping, is the Mountain Sang, of a dreadful heighth; out of which spring many Brooks.

Near the City Hiengan, is a Mountain call'd Lungciven, and upon it a Spring, whither the Chineses repair in dry Weather to Pray to the Dragon for Rain.

Eastward from the same City is that high Mountain nam'd Tu, surrounded with pleasant Woods.

Near the Garrison Iungcheu is one nam'd Lungmuen, that is to say Dragons Gate, so call'd, because the River Linhoang flows out of Tartary between those Mountains through the Great Wall into China.

Near the Garrison Xanghai are Mountains of a great heighth.

IN the County Taiyvenfu, are many Mountains, but none remarkable, except* 30.77 the Mountain Kiecheu, North-East from the City Taiyven: Kiecheu signifies Tying of a Ship, for it is Recorded, that the Emperor Yu ty'd his Ship to this Mountain, when he Sail'd up the Stream Fuen.

By the City Kioching is the Mountain Hukive, out of which they dig abundance of the best sort of Iron to make Working-Tools of.

Near the City Pingting is the Mountain Cio, eminent for a Chappel or Cloy∣ster of Priests.

By the City Kafau, is the Mountain Siue, that is, Mountain of Snow, because it is always cover'd with Snow.

The Mountain Xeleu, lying in the Jurisdiction of the City Chin, is notable for its heighth, in which some say, it exceeds all besides.

In the County Pingyangfu, near the City Siangling, lies the great Mountain Golung, which extends Northward by the Cities Fuensi and Fuensan, and runs South, to the Towns Kioyao and Yeching, where it unites with the Mountain Ulao, and stretches in a continu'd Ridge to the Province of Xensi, and further Westward.

In the Mountain Kiao, near the City Kioyao, they say the Crown and other Imperial Ensigns of the ancient Emperor Hiangti lie bury'd.

Near the City Pu is the Mountain Xeuyang, eminent for the Residence of two Philosophers of the Royal Extraction, who chose rather to quit the Pomp of Empire, and retire from the World, than to attend upon the wicked Empe∣ror Cheu.

Near it stands the Mountain Lie, where the Emperor Xun, extoll'd amongst the Chineses for his Pious Life, follow'd Husbandry, before he was advanc'd to the Crown. This Mountain to this day, produces neither Thorn nor Bram∣ble, nor any hurtful Plant; and this they imagine to be an effect of the said Emperors Piety.

In the County Taitingfu, near the City Henyven, is a part of the Mountain Heng, much resorted to for its rare Flowers and Physical Herbs; but there is one Tree thought to be of great Vertue, to which their Superstition will not suffer them to lay an Ax.

Near the City So, lies the Mountain Iueney, so call'd from a belov'd Female, Singer to King Guei, who is bury'd there.

By the City Quangchang, stands the Mountain Hiang, eminent for a great and old Wood of Pine-Trees; in the middle of which stands a Pagod Temple, and Cloyster for Priests.

Near the City Lingkieu, is the Mountain Tape, out of which they dig a sort of Vermillion, of which they make a kind of Red Ink to Print with.

Near the City So, is the Mountain Yenking.

In the County of Luganfu, near the City Changeu, is the Mountain Fakieu, so call'd from the abundance of Turtle-Doves that breed thereon; it is very Woody, and hath a strong Fort built upon it, which is the safeguard of the County.

By the City Tunlieu is the Mountain Lin, on which one Heuy, a famous Arch∣er, shot with seven Arrows seven Birds flying one after another.

Near the City Lucing is the Mountain Funieu, that is, Cow Rider, from an old Cow, which is reported to have there destroy'd several Men, till at last, by an unknown Man, it was dragg'd into a hole of the Mountain, neither of them be∣ing ever after heard of.

In the County Fuencheufu, on the West side of the chief City Fuencheu, is the Mountain Vanhu, remarkable for its heighth; it is so call'd from Ten thousand Men, which, they say, getting upon the same, escap'd the violence of a great Deluge.

Near the City Hiaoy is the Mountain Kaotang, in which are divers boyling Springs and Pits, by reason of Fire which burns within the Earth.

IN the County Siganfu, near the City Linchang, is the Mountain Limon, on* 30.78 which is a Spring of Water, clear as Chrystal, and of a strange quality, for though it hath not above five Foot Water in depth, yet it is extreme cold above, and at the bottom, so hot, that it is not to be indur'd.

Near the City Lantien, is the Mountain Io, out of which they dig a kind of Earth, which is us'd in the Dying of Clothes: Hard by, on a steep Mountain call'd Ciepuon, stands a Fort, for the securing of the High-way.

Not far from the City Nucung, is the Mountain Taipe, which, by the Chinese Astrologers, is accounted The eleventh Mansion of Happiness. They say, that beat∣ing on a Drum on this Mountain, causes Thunder, Lightning, and Tempestu∣ous Weather; wherefore all Persons are strictly Commanded not to touch a Drum near the same.

Near the City Xunghoa, is the Mountain Kanciven, so call'd from a Brook of exceeding sweet Water, which springs on the top thereof; where there is also a stately Garden and Banquetting-House.

In the County Fungciangfu, near the City Khi, is a very high Mountain, call'd Nan, which extends from thence into the County Siganfu, to the Cities Lantien and Hu.

On the North-East of the City Paoki, is the Mountain Chincang, whose top seems to represent a Turky-Cock: They said, that Thunder or turbulent Wea∣ther is foretold by a great noise, which is heard above thirty Furlongs off in the Vallies adjoyning to it.

At the same place is the Mountain Xecu, so call'd from ten Stone Drums, plac'd there by King Siven, that his Hunters might give a signal of Chase one to another.

On the East side the City Mui, is the Mountain Taipe, whose exceeding high tops are in the midst of Summer cover'd with Snow.

Not far from thence lies a Mountain call'd Quan, Fortifi'd with a brave Ca∣stle, for a safeguard of the County: Here Faulcons, and other such like Birds for the Game, are frequently caught.

In the County Hangcheufu, near the City Sihiang, begins the Mountain Tapa; and runs from thence into the Province of Suchuen, to the City Pa.

By the City Loyang, is the Mountain Yoniu; so call'd from the Effigies of a most Beautiful Maiden of Stone said to have grown Naturally in that place.

Near the City Siyang, is a very scraggy and steep Mountain, call'd Cuking.

By the City Fung, is also a Mountain nam'd Cuye, having in it seventy two Caverns; near which stands the Mountain Nanki which hath a great Lake upon it: Not far from thence is the Mountain Vutu, out of which they dig a Plant call'd Hiunghoang, good to expel Poyson and all Pestilential Virulency.

In the County Pingleangfu, on the East side of the City Cingyven, is the Moun∣tain Yo; on which are found Pebbles emulating Diamonds for clearness.

Near the City Hiating is a Valley of thirty Furlongs in length, but so deep and narrow, that it hath little Light; yet nevertheless, a High-way pav'd with Free-stone leads through it.

In the County Cungchangfu, on the North-West side of the City Hoeicin, is a very great and high Mountain, nam'd Sivi, from the Snow with which it is continually cover'd.

Northward from the City Fokiang, is the Mountain call'd Xecu, that is, Stone-Drum, because (as the Chineses write) this Mountain by making of a noise, fore∣tels War.

By the City Ching, is the Mountain Loyo; at the top whereof stands a great Image of a Lyon, out of whose Mouth runs a Spring.

There is also the Mountain Cheuchi, which extends to the Jurisdiction of the City Siho, and on its top hath a Plain of about twenty Furlongs.

In the South-East from the City Cin, is the Mountain Pochung, on which grows an Herb call'd Hoako, which eaten causeth Barrenness: There are many other Mountains in this County which are not remarkable.

IN the Territory Linyaofu, near the City Lan, Northward, is the Mountain* 30.79 Kaolan, which makes an Arch about the City like a Stage, and gives a plea∣sant Prospect over all the adjacent Countries: Near it is the Mountain Pexe, whereon, they say, the Valiant General Leanghoei, Besieg'd by the Tartars, made Offerings to obtain Water for his Forces; whereupon, immediately a Spring appear'd.

Near the City Ho is the Mountain Ciexie, with two spiring tops, between which, as through a Gate, runs the Yellow River.

Beyond the City Lan, is a pleasant Valley nam'd Yu, which being Water'd by the Yao, a Branch of the Yellow River, inricheth the Grounds and Meadows thereabout.

In the County Kingyangfu, Northward from the chief City Kingyang, is the Mountain Taipe; in the middle of which is the Spring of the Stream He.

By the City Hoan, is the Mountain Ulum, Fortifi'd with a Castle for defence of the County.

Near the City Chinning is the Mountain Lo, whereon stood twenty seven Images, which, the Chineses affirm, grew there naturally, and were not made by Art.

In the County Ienganfu, North-East from the City Iengan, is the Mountain call'd Chingleang.

IN the Territory Cinanfu, near the City Changkieu, lies the Mountain Hoang,* 30.80 which spreads from thence to the City Cichuen, and runs through the Juris∣diction of the City Ceuping.

By the City Changxan, begins the Mountain Changpe, and extends to the City Cenping; on the top whereof stands a very noted Chappel.

Near the City Taigan, is a great Mountain call'd Tai, accounted forty Fur∣longs high; it is full of Caverns and very deep Precipices; there are built up∣on it many Pagod Temples, and indow'd Cloysters of Priests.

Near the City Laiu, is a Mountain nam'd Taxe; out of which they dig Iron.

In the County Yencheufu, near the City Kioheu, is the Mountain Fang, fa∣mous for the Tombs of the Ancient Philosopher Kungfuti's Parents.

Hing, is a Hill near the City Nungyang; so call'd, from the abundance of Ar∣menian Plums which grow on the same.

By the City Cou, is the Mountain Chaugping; on which, some say, Kungni was Born, in a City of the same name; whereof, the Ruins are yet to be seen.

By the City Ie, is the Mountain Ie, Crown'd with divers Villages.

Near the City Tunping, a Mountain nam'd Fung is so interlac'd with Woods

and Fields, that it makes a most delightful Landskip: The Chineses compare it to Damask Silk.

In the County Tungchangfu, not far from the City Kaotang, lies a Mountain call'd Minxe, which signifies A Sounding Stone; for that on the top of this Moun∣tain stands a very high Pillar, which, on the least touch with the Finger, makes a noise like a Drum.

In the County Chingcheufu, near the City Chusing, lies a great Mountain call'd Langsie, which extends East from thence to the Sea: On it are many Villages built, the first when the Emperor Xi Encamp'd thereabout with thirty thou∣sand Men.

By the City Yxui is the Mountain Tapien, having a flat top of ninety Fur∣longs.

In the Territory Tencheufu, Northward from the chief City Tengcheu, lies the Mountain Tengheng; noted for the Defeat which Hansiu gave to King Si.

By the City Foxan is the Mountain Chifeu, which with a Promontory runs into the Sea: There is also another Mountain call'd Cheuy, from whence a round Stone runs into the Sea; which by the Chineses is call'd Cheu, that signi∣fies Pearls.

In the County Laicheufu lies the Mountain Hoang, so call'd from a certain Virgin who had here a Temple Consecrated to Her: On the Shore, near the City Siene, is the Mountain Lao.

WIthin the Walls of the City Kaifung, is a Hill call'd Y, full of Gardens and* 30.81 stately Palaces.

Near the City Siangching, is the Mountain Xeu, being in great Veneration among the Chineses, for its Fortunate shape and position, and is the first men∣tion'd in the Books of Tiungxu, which Treats of that kind of Divination which they deduce from the observation of the Mountains.

By the City Siuching, is the Mountain Kicu, in which is a stately Grotto, made by the Emperor Hoangti, for his Summers Recess.

North-West from the City Cu, is the Mountain Cu, on which King Si, ha∣ving hid much Treasure, afterwards put to Death all those that were privy to the burying thereof, that so he might keep it secret: Nevertheless, his Son, though then very young, taking notice of the Action, when he came to the Crown, caus'd all the Gold to be taken up.

In the County Gueichoeifu, near the City Ki, lies the Mountain Cinivien, out of which runs a Brook, whose Water both washes and shaves at once, that is, when apply'd, makes bare all Hairy parts of the Body.

In the Territory Hoaikingfu, Northward from the chief City Hoaiking is the Mountain Tai, which in former Ages Vomiting Fire, rent asunder, making a Gap of thirty Rods, from whence flows now a slimy unctious Water, serving for many uses in stead of Oil, and being not unpleasing to the Taste.

Towards the South-West is a double Mountain, call'd Iquan; between which, as through a Gate, the River In hath its Course.

About the City Hiang, towards the South, lies the Mountain King, out of which the Emperor Hoangti is Recorded to have all the Copper which he us'd, both for his Weapons of War, and his Houshold Utensils.

In the County Nanyangfu, on the North side of the chief City Nanyang, is the Mountain Yu, on which thirty six Pearls are constantly found, never either more or less.

About the City Niuhang, towards the North-East, begins the Mountain Tai∣pe, and extends South-East to the City Chechuen: There lies also the Mountain Tienchi, and upon it a Lake, whose Water is held for a great Cordial.

In the County Iunningfu, is the Mountain Tienchung, which they call, The Cen∣ter of the World.

By the City Simang, is a very high and pleasant Mountain, whose top, if co∣ver'd with a Cloud, the Chineses immediately after expect Rain; like the Table-Mountain at the Cape of Good Hope, and the Wrekin in Shropshire.

The other Mountains of this Province are in the County of Changtifu; by Tangin, the Hill Simeu, out of which runs the River Tang: West of the City Lin, the steep Mountain Yang.

In the Territory Hoaikinfu, North of the City Liyven, the Wooddy Mountain Voangae.

In the County Hananfu, near the City Hanan, the great Mountain Pemang.

In the County Nanyangfu, South of the City Quanxan, the Mountain Huy.

In the County of In, near the City Luxa, a Mountain of the same name.

IN the Province of Suchuen, Westward from the City Quan, begins the Moun∣tain* 30.82 Cinching, spreading above a thousand Furlongs, and hath the fifth place of Esteem among the Chineses, who hold, that those which they call Xensiens, or Immortal People, meet often there.

By the City Gan, towards the East, lies the Mountain Lunggan, Crown'd with pleasant Woods and Fountains: There are also the Ruins of a Palace, built by the Kings of Cho.

Near the City Chungking, is the Mountain call'd Toyung, swarming with Apes and Monkies.

Not far from the City Xefang, towards the North, is a Mountain call'd Ta∣fung, whose Head pierces the Clouds, and sends forth from the top a River, which running down very steep, makes a great noise in the fall; from the top of this being reckon'd sixty Furlongs Perpendicular, you may take a Prospect over all the other Mountains, and see the City Chingtu; it extends from the ut∣most Western Borders of the Province of Suchuen, to Prester Iohn's Countrey, or Sifan; and in a continu'd Ridge, reaches to the City Guei: Out of these Moun∣tains the great River Kiang takes its first Original.

By the City Cangki, towards the North, is the Mountain Iuntai, which for its heighth, is call'd The Throne of Clouds.

Near the City Pa, lies to the North-East the Mountain Iu, out of which, (though craggy and difficult to ascend) Precious Stones are digg'd.

Not far from thence▪ towards the West, lies the Mountain Pingleang, on whose top is a delightful Plain, surrounded with other higher Mountains of the County.

By the City Sike, lies the great Mountain Nannim, which rises aloft with twelve high Spiring Heads, upon nine whereof are Salt-pits.

In the County Chungkingfu, Northward from the chief City Chungking, on the Shore of the River Feu, is a Mountain, which for its shape is much Idoliz'd by the Chineses, by reason it represents (at least they imagine so) the Idol call'd Fe, who is Figur'd sitting with his Legs a cross, and his Hands on his Bosom a cross: This Mountain-Image, which whether Natural or made by Art, the Chi∣neses themselves have not under Record, may be judg'd by his Eyes, Nose, Mouth, and Ears, which are seen at half a Mile distance: A more particular Description is given by Athanasius Kircher, in his Atlas Chinensis.

Near the City Ho, towards the South, lies the Mountain Lungmuen, on which stood formerly a Pagod Chappel, with a Library of thirty thousand Books, call'd Siyali; first built by a Noble-man of that name.

By the City Fungtu, is the Mountain Pungtu, accounted amongst the seventy two Mountains; so highly extoll'd in the Book of Taosu.

Near the City Penxui, is the Mountain Fonien; on which are many Salt-pits.

In the County Queicheufu, Northward from the chief City Queicheu, is a Moun∣tain nam'd Chekia, on which are seen the Ruines of a Palace, once the Residence of the Kings of Sufo.

Northward, beyond the City Van, lies the Mountain Tulie, which reaches so high into the Clouds, that no Bird can flie over it.

On the Mountain Si, which lies Westward from the City Van, is yet a plea∣sant Garden of the Family Sung, with a Lake, pleasant Groves, and many Fruit-Trees.

On the Mountain Tunghoa, lies the City Ta.

Near the City Leangxan, is the Mountain Kaoleang, which extends a thousand Furlongs East and West.

The Mountain Xehiang, in the same County, is so call'd from its abundance of Musk.

In the Territory Lungganfu, Northward from the chief City Lunggan, lies the Mountain Cungtung; which from thence in a continu'd Ridge runs towards the Countries of Sifan, or Prester Iohn's Countrey, and to the Damasian Mountains. Towards the South-East, lies the Mountain Xemuen, a Boundary between Sifan and China.

In the County Mahufu, Westward from the City Mahu, is the Mountain King, which signifies A Looking-Glass, so call'd from the Crystal Fountain which springs from its Foot.

South-East of the City Liucheu, is the Mountain Pao, on which the Air is of such a Nature, that those that have Agues upon them, going thither, are imme∣diately cur'd thereof.

In the little County of Yacheu, near the City Mingxan, lies a Mountain nam'd Mung, which rises with five Spires; on the highest of which is much Manna, by the Chineses call'd Pinglu, that is, Frozen Dew.

By the City Pinchai, is the Mountain Pecui, on which, if Snow melts in the Winter, the Chineses have observ'd, a fruitful Year will follow, if not, the contrary.

Not far from the Garrison'd-City Kienchung, lies the Mountain Tiexe, so call'd from its abundance of Iron Oar.

The other Mountains of less note in the Province of Suchien are; In the Ter∣ritory Kingtufu, South of the City Kingtu, the Mountain Seking: By the City Mien, the Mountain Tienchi: In the County Paoningfu, East of the City Paoning, the Woody Mountains Paon and Menyping: In the County Xungkingfu, West of the City Xungking, the Mountain Co: In the County Sieucheufu, South from the City Sieucheu, the Mountain Xeching: By the City Kingfu, the Mountain Hany∣ang: South of the City Tiucum, upon the River Kiang, the Mountain Lingyuen: About the City Riexan, the far-stretching Mountain Chungpoe: West of the Ci∣ty Han, in the County Queicheufu, a high and steep Mountain: On the Shore of the River Kiang, the Mountain Co: West of the City Chuniking, the Wooddy Mountain Cyuyun: In the County Lungganfu, the Mountain Talo: In the Coun∣ty of Ziencheues, North of the City Chungkiang, the Mountain Tunquon, wherein

are Copper Mines: Near the City Lochi, the pleasant Mountain Ciepion: In the County of Muichen, the Mountain Gomui, and part of the Mountain Min: West of the City Muichen, the Mountain Peping, shining like a Torch in the Night: North of the City Kiatung, the Mountain Mienkiang: Near the City Iung, a high Mountain of the same name: South-West of the City Liuchen, the double-pointed Mountain Fiang: By the City Iunking, the Mountain Cunglai, on which Ice is found in midst of Summer: On the shore of the River Kinxa, a Mountain of a hundred Furlongs: By the City Ufa, the Mountains Tain and Umueu: Near the City Chinchiun, the Mountain Utung: Near the City Ly, the Woody Mountain Iuliang.

IN the Province of Huquang, in the County Vuchangfu, South-East from the* 30.83 chief City Vuchang, is the Mountain Tayuon, which hath Golden colour'd Stones and Earth.

Southward from the little City Vuchang, is a Mountain of the same denomi∣nation, on which they say, in the time of the Family of Cin, a Man appear'd all Hairy, and ten Cubits high.

North-East, near the City Kiayu, on the shore of the River Kiang, a Moun∣tain nam'd Chepie, is remarkable for the overthrow which Caocao gave to Cheuyu.

Southward by the City Kungyang, a Ridge of Hills extends two hundred Fur∣longs over a great Cave.

Southward from the City Hinque, lies the Mountain Chung, having on it a Lake with Water as black as Ink.

Southward from the City Tungxan, is the Mountain Kienyvon, that is, Of nine Palaces, so call'd from the nine Apartments, built on the same by the Sons of King Cyngan, for places of Retirement to Study in.

In the County Hanyangfu, South West of the City Hanyang, lies the Moun∣tain Kieuchin, or, Of nine Maids; so calld from nine Sisters that liv'd and dy'd Virgins there, and study'd Chymistry.

In the County Siangyangfu, Southward from the City Kiun, is a great Moun∣tain call'd Vutang, which with a great number of Spring-heads, rises up to the Skie; upon it are twenty four Lakes or Pools; there are also many stately Tem∣ples with Cloysters, the Residences of Priests.

Eastward from the City Ingxan, is the Mountain Tungting, with a great Cave of incredible depth: Not far from it, to the South, is a Mountain nam'd Kie, on which the Ruins of the ancient City Kieyang are to be seen.

Westward from the City Hoangmui, is the Mountain Sucu, Crown'd with a Chappel which is Consecrated to four Chineses, who were in high Veneration for their skill in Physick, and also a stately Tower with nine Galleries.

In the County Kincheufu, Southward from the City Changyang, is the Moun∣tain Fang, which is said to be of such a Nature, that in Spring and Harvest not the least breath of Wind can be perceiv'd thereon, but in the Summer continual Blasts blow strongly out of its Caverns, as in Winter they blow into them.

Westward near the City Sungki, begins the Mountain Kieucang, which ex∣tends to the River Kiang, and with a double row of continu'd Rocks, incloses the same, and makes the way between to be long and dangerous.

Southward from the City Quei, lies the Mountain Cutai, which is Crown'd with a Palace of the old Emperors.

In the County Yocheufu, on the South side of the chief City Yocheu, is the Mountain Pauo, famous for a stately Temple and Cloyster, situate between two Lakes.

In the Lake Tungting, at the South-West part of the City Yucheu, the Moun∣tain Kiun makes an Island; at the South-East end of the City the Mountain Uxe produces littles Stones, which by the Physicians, amongst other Medi∣cines, are given for sore Throats.

By the City Linsiang the great Mountain Tayang shoots up with seventy Spiry Heads; and another Westward from the City Hoayang nam'd Tung, that is a hundred Furlongs, full of Pine-Trees: There is likewise the Mountain Fangtai.

Eastward from the City Pingkiang lies the Mountain Tiengo, five hundred Furlongs in circumference, and is in the Book of Tausu accounted the twenty fifth amongst the famousest Mountains; and is likewise famous amongst the Chinese Physicians for the producing of many Physical Herbs.

By the City Gaukiang, towards the South, is the Mountain Hoang, that is, Yellow, for the Earth and Stones about it are of a yellow colour; wherefore it is call'd also Kinhoa, that is, Golden Flower.

In the County Changxafu, Westward from the City Changxa, lies the Moun∣tain Iamo, so call'd from the Muscovy Glass which is digg'd out of it in great abundance.

Westward from the City Ninghiang, towards the South-West, lies the biggest Mountain Taihiu, which rises with three Spires; the middlemost whereof hath on the top of it a great and fathomless Lake.

There is likewise the Mountain Xepi, and upon it a Lake of forty Furlongs call'd Pexa; out of which flow four Rivolets, the one nam'd Lieu; the rest glide towards the Stream Iuping.

At the same place is the Mountain Tungyang, the third in order amongst the famous Mountains, describ'd in the Book of Tausu.

By the City Xeu lies the Mountain Sucung, which hath a Spring of hot Wa∣ter, and thirty six rising Piques, besides many other large Mountains.

In the County Paokingfu, East from the chief City Paoking, the Mountain Lung riseth with four Spires, which are of such an equal heighth, that they seem every where to be one intire Head; in the middle of them is a Lake, out of which run two Rivolets, the one nam'd Lien, which glides to the City Siang∣kiang, and the other the Chao.

In the Jurisdiction of the City Vuchang, Easterly, lies the Mountain Chang∣mo; which extending a great way, and having very inaccessible Ways, is in∣habited by wild People, which are not under the Dominion of the Chineses, but live safe and secure amongst themselves.

In the County Hengcheufu, Westward from the chif City Hengcheu, appears the Mountain Taceu, where (according to the Chinese Writers) Silver Mines have been open'd in former Ages.

By the City Hengcan begins the Mountain Heng, which extends eighty Fur∣longs, with seventy two Spiry Hillocks, ten great Valleys, thirty eight Springs, and twenty five Brooks.

By the City Queiyang is the Mountain Xejen, sometime call'd The Stone-Swallow, because after Rain Stones are found upon it, exactly resembling Swal∣lows, which Physicians by their several colours distinguish into Males and Females, and use them in Physick.

The Mountain Hoayn, pleasant to the Eye, and for its fair Prospect call'd The Flower, rises up in the Jurisdiction of the Cities Linuu and Lanxan.

By the City Taoyven, towards the West, lies the Mountain Lolo, the forty se∣ond in order in the Book of Tausu.

On the North-West side of the City Changte, over a great Valley call'd Lung∣muen, a Bridge leads from one Hill to another; under which is a Rivulet.

In the County Xincheufu, North-West from the City Xincheu, is the Moun∣tain Tayeu, the twenty sixth in order in the Books of Tansu.

There is also the Mountain Siaoye, whereon a thousand Books were found, which they say were hid there in the time when the Emperor Xi commanded all the Books in China to be burnt.

By the City Kiuyang is the Mountain Locung, on which, they say, breeds a Bird that never Sings but before Rain; upon it is a Lake which takes up the compass of about a thousand Acres.

In the County Iungcheufu, Westward from the City Iungcheu, is the Moun∣tain Kiungyo, observable for the abundance of brave Cypress▪Trees which grow on it.

In the Territory Chingtien, near the City Kingmuen, is a Mountain of the same Name, which formerly serv'd for a Wall and Boundary between the Northern Provinces and the Kingdom of Cu.

By the City Tangyung lies the Mountain Cucai, the thirtieth in order in the Book of Tansu; upon it are Trees and Stones of a red colour, and a Rivulet of sweet-smelling Water.

In the County Chingyangfu, North-West from the City Chingyang, is the Mountain Tiensin, which hath a plain of a hundred Furlongs on its top, which is surrounded with other rising Hillocks in stead of Walls. The Physicians highly esteem this Mountain for the abundance of soveraign Herbs which they have from it.

By the City Chinxan is the Mountain Canglo; on which (they say) a Coun∣trey-man for several years gathering Chesnuts against an approaching Famine which he foresaw, thereby preserv'd himself and his Neighbors from perish∣ing with Hunger.

Not far from thence is the Mountain Nuiqua, so call'd from a Woman so Nam'd, whom the Chineses adore as a Goddess, for some great and publick Action done by her in her Life-time.

Southward from the City Tungtao begins the Mountain Fecu, and serves for a Boundary between the Province of Huquang and that of Queicheu.

To these may be added in the Territory Hangcheufu, North of the City Ho∣angcheu, the Mountain Pui; North of the City Machin, the wooddy Mountain Molin; near the City Ling, the large spreading Mountain Vanyang; in the Ter∣ritory Changtefu, West of the City Changte, the Mountain Lo; by the City Tang, the high Mountain Suvang; in the County Chincheufu, South of the City Chin∣cheu, the Mountain Hoanycung; by the City Iunghing, the high and steep Moun∣tain Pipa; North of the City Songing, the high and cold Mountain Kelyng; South of the City Nanquei, the fruitful and pleasant high Mountain Tuting; and some others.

EAstward by the City Funghing lies the Mountain Xifung, the thirty ninth* 30.84 in the Books of Tansu.

In the County Iaocheufu, Eastward from the City Iaocheu, is the Mountain Macie, the fifty second in the Book of Tansu.

By the City Yukan lies the Mountain Xehung, that is, Stone Rain-bowe, because the Water falling from the same represents a Rain-bowe.

In the County Quangsinfu, Northward from the City▪ Quangsin, the wooddy

Mountain Ling, the thirty second in order in the Book of Tausu, produces great variety of Flowers and Herbs, and also excellent Crystal.

By the City Yeyang the Mountain Paofung hath on its Summitie a Stone-House built, which pierceth into the Clouds.

Southward from the City Queili the Siang, a high and broad Mountain, di∣stinguish'd by the many Meadows, Woods and Villages which are upon it, affords a delightful Prospect.

Westward lies the Mountain Lunghu, the thirty second in order in the Book of Tausu; it rises with two Spiry Tops, which because they seem to oppress one another, the uppermost of them is call'd Lung, that is, Dragon; and the un∣most Hu, that is, Tyger.

In the County Nankanfu, North-West from the City Nankan, the Mountain Quangliu, the ninth in order in the Book of Tausu, spreads it self five hundred Furlongs, and is inhabited by many Orders of Religious Persons in their Way.

By the City Tuchang lies the Mountain Iuenxin, the fifty second in order amongst the famous Mountains describ'd in the Books of Tausu; and more Northerly the Hill Xepie.

Northward from the City Tegan is the Mountain Quenlun, on which is a Stone of that bigness, that a hundred Men may with ease lie on the same, with∣out touching one another.

Northward from the City Hukeu lies the Mountain Yechung, that is, Stone-Clock; for the Water of the Lake being driven by the Wind against this Moun∣tain, makes a noise like a Bell.

On the Shore of the River Kiang, by the same City, the Mountain Matang is noted for the many Ships that have been lost on the same; for if any Vessel chance to go never so little from the Shore, the Current being so exceeding strong, drives them against the Rocks, and splits them in pieces.

In the County Kienchangfu, Westward from the chief City Kienchang, the Mountain Masu, the thirty sixth in order in the Books of Tausu, extends four hundred Furlongs.

By the City Quanchang the Mountain Chunghoa divides it self at the top into several Hillocks, whereof all are barren, except one, which being green, and full of Trees, is crown'd with a Temple.

In the County Vucheufu, Northward from the City Vucheu, is the Mountain Sangkiu; on which (they say) is a strange Image, in the shape of a Man, which according to the several variations of the Air changes its colour; so that the neighboring People know certainly by it what Weather they shall have.

In the County Linkiangfu, on the North side of the City Linkiang, is the Mountain Comao, the thirty third in order in the Books of Tausu. Many Omens of good fortune the Chineses fancy to themselves in this Mountain.

By the City Sinkin is the Mountain Iosu, the seventeenth in order in the Books of Tausu.

In the Teritory Xuicheufu, on the East side of the City Xuicheu, is the Moun∣tain Tayu; in the midst of which is a pleasant Grove and a stately Chappel.

By the City Xangcau lies the Mountain Lungfung; on which, a day after Rain, there appears a great Flame of Fire in the Night, but never in dry Sea∣sons. The People thereabouts, being much inclin'd to Superstition, say that this Flame is the Spirit of the Mountains, and for that reason have built a fair Chappel on the South side of the City Sinchang, and Consecrated it to Fire.

In the County Iuencheufu, on the South side of the City Iuencheu, lies the Mountain Niang, so call'd because it is onely visible, but not accessible, by rea∣son of its dangerous Cliffs, which seem to fall every Minute; it is three hun∣dred Furlongs in circumference, and produces a Spring, whose Water is so ex∣ceeding cold all the whole year, that it cannot be drunk till it hath stood a con∣siderable time in the Sun.

In the County of Kancheusu, on the East side of the City Kancheu, is the Mountain Tiencho, on which, in the Night, appears a Light like that of kindled Coals. There are some which suppose it to be Serpents, which (as they say) vomit forth Precious Stones, (whereof they wear one on their Heads) and swal∣low up the rest again.

Near the City Ningtu lies the Mountain Kincing, the thirty third in order in the Books of Tausu.

The Chineses fancy that the neighboring Hills are peopled with Satyrs, and other strange Monsters in the shape of Men.

In the County Nanganfu, on the West side of the City Nangan, is the Moun∣tain Sihoa, that is, Western Flower; for Si signifies Western, and Hoa, Flower.

There are also in this Province, by the City Iaoicheu, on the Lake Poyang, the Mountain Cienfo; by the City Yukaw, the Mountain Hungyai; in the County Kieukiangfu, South-East of the City Kieukiang, the Mountain Taku; on an Isle of the same Name, in the Lake Poyang, East of the City Tegan, the Mountain Poye; by the City Pengie, in the Lake Poyang, the inaccessible Mountain Siaofu; near the City Kinki, the far-stretch'd Mountain Iunglin, having thirty six Tops; in the County Kieganfu, by the City Ganfo, the Mountain Uncung, in circuit eight hundred Furlongs; by the City Sinfung, the large Mountain Hiang, pro∣ducing Medicinal Drugs, and several others, of which there is nothing re∣markable to mention.

IN the County Kiangningfu, South West from the City Kiuyung, lies the* 30.85 Mountain Mao, which in the Books of Tausu is accounted the first for Pleasure and Happiness.

North-East from the chief City Nanking, the Mountain No bears on its Head a Temple, wherein are plac'd a thousand Images.

Towards the South-East from the City Nanking is the Fang, a Mountain onely remarkable, because on the Commands of the Emperor Xi it was by five thousand Men digg'd through, to prevent (as he thought) the Prediction which the Mountain-gazers gave out from their observation of this Mountain, concerning the subversion of his Empire.

On the South-West side of the City Nanking, the Mountain San juts into the River Kiang, and towards the River side hath divers Iron Chains fast∣ned to it, not (as the Chineses ridiculously affirm) because it should not run away, but that the Ships may take the better hold with their Hooks; other∣wise this Mountain being of very hard Stone, the Vessels must needs strike against it.

In the County Fungyangfu, near the City Linhoa, lies the Mountain Iunonu, so call'd from the abundance of a sort of Mineral, which we commonly call Muscovy Glass, digg'd out of the same.

Near the City Xeu lies the Mountain Cukin, whereon in former Ages a great piece of Gold being found, and proving good against many Distempers, the Chineses say that it was made by the art of Chymistry.

By the City Hutai lies the Mountain Moyang, or Shepherds-Hill, so call'd from a fair Virgin who kept Sheep on the same.

In the Territory Sucheufu, at the South-West side of the City Sucheu, near the Lake Tai, lies the Mountain Liguien, remarkable for the many fair Build∣ings which crown the same.

By the Lake Tai the Mountain Siu is coronetted with a stately Chappel and Cloyster.

Within the City Changxo the Mountain Yu extends to the West several Furlongs.

In the County Sungkiangfu, on the South-East side of the City Sungkiang, on the Shore of the River, is the Kin, onely remarkable in this County; upon it stands a great Fort, and at the Foot thereof a considerable number of Ships for the securing of the Havens thereabouts.

In the County Changcheufu, by the City Vusie, is the Si, a Mountain out of which they dig Tin.

In the Territory Chinkiangfu, on the North-West side of the City Chinkiang, lies the Mountain Kin, which makes an Isle in the River Kiang; upon it are several fair Temples and Cloysters for Priests: There also springs out of it a Brook call'd Chungleang, whose Water is much esteem'd amongst the Chineses; so that it is exceeding pleasant both by Art and Nature.

In the Territory Hoaiganfu lies the Yocheu, in the Sea near the City Hai, a Mountain very remarkable for a most stately Chappel and Cloyster, to which many People from all Parts in China come to make Offerings.

By the City Lukiang in the County of Lucheufu, the Mountain Taifu hath many pleasant Groves and delightful Ascents.

By the City Sosung lies the Mountain Siaoku, with two high Spiry Tops, between which being a Valley runs the River Kiang: on one of the Spires is a great Chappel and Cloyster.

Southward from the City Chicheu lies the Mountain Kieuhoa, that is, Nine Spires and the Flower, for it consists of so many Hills, and appears hanging down like a Flower.

In the County Hoeicheufu, on the West side of the City Hoeicheu, is the Mountain Hoang, the greatest in the whole County; it reckons twenty four Brooks, thirty two high Tops, and eighteen obscure Valleys.

In the little Territory of the City Quangte, near the Towns Quangté and Kienping, lie several great and pleasant Mountains; the most famous of which are the Hang and Ling: the first whereof, lying on the West side of the City Quangte, pierces the Clouds, yet nevertheless hath a Spring on the top thereof, which overflows continually.

The Mountain Ling, not inferior to the others in heighth, hath also a steep and craggy Ascent, and at the top is fifteen Furlongs in circumference. Near it, at the entrance of a Passage, stands the Image of a Priest, who (as they say) was thus transform'd.

Besides these above mention'd, there are in this Province, by the City Iung∣chiung in the County Gunkinfu, the steep and cavernous Mountain Feu; South-East of the City Taiping, the Mountain Tienmen; within the Walls of Ning, the pleasant Hill Lingyang; by the City Tung in the Territory Chicheufu, the Mountain Hing, very rich in Fruit-Trees, especially the Armenian Plum; by the City Hicuning, the Mountain Ki, a hundred Rods high; with some others which have not been thought worthy to be nam'd.

IN the Territory Hangcheufu in the Province of Chekiang, on the South side* 30.86 of the City Hangcheu, the Mountain Funghoang divides it self upwards into exceeding high Spiry Heads; yet on each of them is a Steepled Chappel with nine Galleries.

On the Eastern Shore of the Lake Si, near the City Hangcheu, the Mountain Xeceng lifts up a Temple with a Turret, and about it nine Galleries.

By the City Lingan begins the great and steep Mountain Tienmo, extending above eight hundred Furlongs, and the thirty fourth in order in the Books of Tausu; it overlooks most pleasant Woods, and Fields of Rice, and hath grow∣ing upon it great store of rare Mushrooms, which, being Pickled, are from thence sent through all China. Tienmo signifies Eye of Heaven, because this Moun∣tain on two several Precipices hath two Lakes, which the Chineses call Eyes, with which it looks up to Heaven.

By the City Chung hoa the Mountain Cienking hath upon it a Lake which pos∣sesseth the space of two hundred Acres, very remarkable for yellow Fish, by the Chineses call'd Kinyu, that breed therein.

The Tiencho, a Mountain which lies South-West from the City Hangcheu, is partly very craggy, and partly pleasant and delightful; it hath one top call'd Filaifung, all of hard Rocky Stones, and within full of Holes or Caves; upon it also are several fair Temples and Cloysters, to which (they say) above three thousand Priests belong, most of them betaking themselves to a most solitary Life, and chusing to dwell in those dark Caves, out of which not being able to get without the assistance of some from without, they are upon occasion drawn up by Ropes; after which manner they receive Alms from those that pass by, which sometimes amounts to no small value; for this Place is all the year long (especially in May) frequented both by Strangers and Natives. Tilaifung signifies To come flying; which Denomination it receiv'd from an Indian Priest, who so soon as he saw this Mountain said, This is the Hill which we miss out of India, certainly it is flown hither.

The County Kiahingfu is for the most part Champain, having onely one Mountain or Hill nam'd Utai, on the North-West side of the City Kiahing in the Lake Tiensing, which affords the City a Moat; upon it are five pleasant Gardens and Banquetting-houses, built by Persons of Quality for Places of Re∣creation; from whence also the Hill hath receiv'd its Denomination, for Utai signifies Five Altars.

To the North side of the City Niencheu in the Territory Niencheufu, lies the Mountain Ulum, which in a manner surrounds the City; it upholds two Lakes, one of which, though not far distant from the other, hath clear, and the other muddy Water.

The Mountain Tuichung rises out of the Valley Kieuli, through which flows a little River; upon it are the Chappels and Gardens of the famous Philoso∣pher Nienculin, to whom those that Travel that way pay their Visits, in com∣memoration of so eminent a Person. They say that here he made Fishing his chief Recreation when he hid himself from the Emperor, because he would not accept of the prime Place in the Government, which was so far urg'd upon him, that the Emperor himself coming to him, lay with him a whole Night in one Bed, so great an esteem did the greatest of the Chinese Emperor's set upon Learned and Pious Men.

In the County Kinhoafu, Northward from the City Kinhoa, the Mountain

Kinhoa extends it self rhree hundred and sixty Furlongs in circumference, and is the thirty sixth in the Books of Tausu; on which the Chineses say that the Contest was between Venus and Pallas.

By the City Yu is the Mountain Kiming, the biggest in the whole County, high and difficult to ascend; on the top thereof appears a fair Palace.

Near the City Pukiang lies Sunhoa, a Mountain whereon (according to the Relation of the Chineses) the ancient Emperor Hoangti's Daughter resided, and devoted her self to Virginity.

By the City Iungkang the Mountain Fangnien is by Stone Steps ascended to the top, where a great Bridge leads cross a Valley.

In the County Kiucheufu, on the South side of the City Kiucheu, lies the Mountain Lano, the eighth in the Books of Tausu.

Near the City Kiangxan begins the Mountain Civen, and from thence ex∣tends above three hundred Furlongs.

Through these Mountains a Way runs to the Province of Fokien, though over many Precipices, very troublesom to Travellers; but most of all in the steep and high Mountain Sienhoa, to ascend which are built three hundred and sixty Stone Steps like a pair of winding Stairs: On its highest Top is a fair Tem∣ple, and many Inns, or Houses of Entertainment for Travellers.

In the County Chucheufu, near the City Cinyun, begins the great Mountain Hocang, the thirteenth in order in the Books of Tausu, and spreads it self three hundred Furlongs towards the Sea, and according to the Chinese Geographers is a thousand Rods high, and not subject to Snow, Hail, Thunder, Rain, or any alteration of Weather.

In the Territory Xaohingfu, on the South-East side of the City Xaohing, is the Mountain Hoeiki, the eleventh in the Books of Tausu; from whence anciently the Province Hoeiki (which compriseth the Eastern Countreys) had its Deno∣mination.

The Mountain Suming, the ninth in order amongst the most famous in the Book of Tausu, rises with two hundred Spiry Heads, hath eight thousand Rods in heighth, and extends two hundred and eighty Furlongs: it begins about the City Yuyao, aud runs South-West to the City Ningpo.

By the City Xing lies the Mountain Tenchi, the twenty seventh in the Book of Tausu, which hath its Denomination from a Lake whose water is Blood-Red.

Near the City Sinchan is the Mountain Vocheu, the fifteenth in the Book of Tausu.

There is also the Mountain Tienlao, the sixteenth in the Book of Taoxu.

In the County Ningpofu, near the City Cuki, the Mountain Lu advances to sight a fair Temple, to which the Chineses often resort with Supplications to their Idols, to have their Dreams Interpreted.

In the Territory Taicheufu, Southward from the City Taicheu, the Mountain Kaicho, the nineteenth in the Book of Taoxu, is remarkable for the Stones there∣on, which are all perfectly square.

By the City Hoangnieu is the Mountain Queiyu, the second in the Book of Taoxu.

By the City Tientai is the red Mountain Cheching, the sixth in the Book of Taoxu; and near it, by a City of the same Name, the Mountain Tientai, ac∣counted eight thousand Rods high, and eight hundred Furlongs about, the famousest, and first in order amongst all those Mountains describ'd by

Taoxu, and, as they say, in happy Auspice: Upon it are many fair Temples and Cloysters.

More Southwardly in the Sea, is a Mountainous Isle, call'd Yohoan, which signifies Precious Circle, so nam'd from its convenient Harbor for Ships, being almost hem'd in with Mountains, and subject to no manner of Winds, having onely one Gap like a Mouth, for the entrance of Ships.

By the City Taiping, lies the Mountain Fangching; on which King Yue liv'd in a private condition.

In the County Vencheufu, South-West from the City Vencheu, in the River Lungyeu, lies the Mountain Cuyu, surrounded with Water; yet on the top there∣of is a Chappel and Cloyster.

By the City Suigan, is the Mountain Siennien, the twenty sixth in the Books of Taoxu.

Near Locing, is the Mountain Yentany, on which is a Lake of ten Furlongs, also nam'd Yentang, that is, A Bath for Geese, because the Wild-Geese, which ac∣cording to the several Seasons of the Year, change their Stations, generally make it one of their resting places.

ON the North side of the City Fokien, in the County Fokhenfu, in the Pro∣vince* 30.87 of Fokien, begins the high and large Mountain Sive or Fung, and runs from thence to another County to the Cities Cutieu, Mincing, and Leyuen; to∣wards the South side of the Metropolis, lies the Mountain Fang, which hath a Valley of forty Furlongs; and on the neighboring Hills many Orange, Ci∣tron, and Lemon-Trees.

About the City Iungfu, towards the North, a famous and high Mountain, nam'd Kaoca, the seventh in the Books of Taoxu, yields a delightful Prospect by its ancient Woods, and the stately Cloysters built on it.

In the County Civencheufu, Southward from the City Civencheu, is the Paocai, a Mountain, which on its top hath a Turret with nine Galleries, and serves for a Land-mark to Sea-men: Eastward lies the Mountain Siaoso.

In the County Changcheufu, towards the East side of the City Changcheu, is the Cio, a Mountain, on which (according to the Chinese Writers) stands a Stone of five Rods high, that before Rain or Tempestuous Weather, shivers and shakes like a Tree, blown by the Wind: Nearer the City lies another Mountain call'd Kieulang, which joyns to the former, and is remarkable for a Crystal Fountain.

In the Territory Kienningfu, on the North-East side of the City Kienning, lies the high Mountain Xin; from whose top the Sun-rising may be seen over all the other Mountains: There is also the Ciaoyven, the thirteenth in the Books of Tausu.

But that which exceeds all the other in Fame and Bigness, is the Mountain Vuy, near the City Zunggan, upon it are many Pagods or Cloysters, the Resi∣dences for Priests and solitary Persons; amongst which are divers Noble-men, who despising the World, live thus retir'd to serve their Idols with the greater Zeal.

By the City Pucing is the Mountain Yuleang, one of the ten greatest in all China.

Southward from the City Ienping, lies the Mountain Yuevang, on which the Kings of Iue us'd to have many Palaces for Retiring places, from the heat in Summer: more Southerly, are the Mountains Kieusieu and Yeuki.

In the Territory Zincheufu, is the Mountain Kin, or Gold, so nam'd, from its Gold-mines, which the Family Sung caus'd to be open'd: It lies South from the City Tincheu, near the City Xanhang, on the Eastern shore of the River Ting; it is so pleasant, that it appears like an excellent Landskip; upon it are three little Lakes, which, they say, turn the Iron that is thrown therein, into Copper.

In the County Hinghoafu, towards the South side of the City Hinghoa, lies the Mountain Hucung; upon which, the Chinese Mountain-Gazers make many Ob∣servations: Towards the South-East from the City, is the Mountain Goching, having a large Village at its Foot.

There are besides in this Province, in the County Ienpingfu, the Mountain Tung, which surrounds the City Sianglo: Through the Borders of Kiangsi, runs the great Mountain Pechang: West of the City Ienping, the great Mountain Hu∣on: By the City Singlieu, the high Mountain Tiung: West from the City Ning∣hoai, the Mountain Lungmien: South of the City Tinquien, the Mountains Leang and Linting: East of the City Tincheu, the Mountain Liensung: South-East of the City Xaonu, the Mountain Cietai: North from the City Taining, the Moun∣tain Kingoa: A little above the City Foning, the Mountain Lunxen: South of the same City, the high Mountain Hung: On the same side of the same City, the Mountain Nanquin: West of the City Ningte, the Mountain Hoeung: North of the City Foning, the Mountain Lunizen: North-East from the same, the Mountain Talao, having six high Precipices, with several others.

IN the Province of Quantung, the vast Mountain Talo begins near the City Cing∣quen;* 30.88 from whence it reaches to the Jurisdiction of the City Hoaicie, lying in the Province of Quangsi; upon it dwell a Wild and Salvage People, which are not under the Dominion of the Chineses: Within the Walls of the City Can∣ton, lie three Hills, Crown'd with stately Buildings; the first call'd Iuesieu, the second, Fan; and the third, Gheu.

By the City Xunte, is the Mountain Lungnien, out of which springs a Foun∣tain as clear as Crystal; it produces also Red Stones, of a strange and wonder∣ful form, with which, the Chineses build their Artificial Mounts.

Near the City Ungyven, is the Mountain Lichi, and in the middle of it a Lake which proceeds from eight Rivulets, whose Water is good against many Di∣stempers.

In the County Nanhyungfu, lies the noted Mountain Nuilen, on the top whereof stands a Chappel, Consecrated to the General Chankieuling.

In the Territory Hoeicheufu, near the City Polo, begins the Mountain Lefeu, one amongst the ten greatest Mountains in the whole Empire: It rises from the joyning of the Mountains, Lo and Feu, and extends to the Jurisdiction of the chief City Quancheu, and to the City Cengching: Its heighth is accounted to be three thousand six hundred Paces, and its Circumference three hundred Furlongs: It hath fifteen steep Hills, and above four hundred seventy two Holes or Caverns: The Chinese Mountain-Gazers look upon it as one of the chief Mountains for Divination.

By the City Lungchuen, near the City Kieyang, lies the Mountain Cangpu, which extends to the Sea, where on the Shore it ends in a most dreadful Pre∣cepice: They say that Flowers and Birds grow and breed on the same, of so strange a kind, as are found in no other places. By this City Kieyang lies a Moun∣tain of the same denomination, divided, as it were, into Arms or Branches; one of which extends to the City Hinning, of the County Hoeicheufu; and the other towards the City Haifung.

By the City Hoeilay, lies the Mountain Pehoa, so call'd from the Flowers which continually grow upon it, for it produces several Flowers, according to the season of the Year.

By the City Chinkiang, are also many great Hills which lie close together, and wherein there are many deep Caverns, but not pry'd into by the Chineses; for that, as it is said, many going to dig in them, never came out alive, none know∣ing what became of them, or whither they went.

In the County Chaokingfu, at the North side of the City Chaoking, lies the Mountain Ting, on which, according to the Writings of the Chineses, stands a Stone two hundred Rods high.

In the Jurisdiction of the City Suhoci, lies the Mountain Sin, that is, The Mountain of Chastity, so call'd from a Maid, who vowing Solitude and Chastity, Liv'd and Dy'd there a Virgin, in pure Devotion to the memory of one, who having been her Lover, and Bethroth'd to her, was accidentally devour'd by a Tyger; her Parents, in vain, endeavoring to force her to Marry some other Person, to avoid which constraint, she fled to this Mountain, on which are two Temples built and Consecrated to her.

By the City Teking lies the Mountain Koleang, eminent for its producing a sort of Trees, which because of the exceeding hardness of their Wood, are call'd Iron Trees.

In the County Kaocheufu, on the East side of the City Kaocheu, is the Moun∣tain Feu, which is of such a heighth, that this onely (as the Chineses say) appear'd with its Crown above the Water, in the time of their general Deluge, and that some were preserv'd alive on the same.

Near the City Tienpe lies the Mountain Koleang, which is said to be of that quality, that its Inhabitants neither feel excess of heat in the Summer, nor cold in the Winter, but enjoy all the Year long continual Spring.

By the City Hoa, lies a brave and pleasant Mountain, nam'd Pao, that is, Pre∣cious; to which the Inhabitants resort in great companies to Recreate them∣selves.

In the Territory Liencheufu, near the North side of the City Liencheu, lies in a private place the great Mountain Uhoang; famous amongst the Chineses, upon a supposition they have, that the Fruit which grows there, is found no where else, and that if any one should presume to carry any away with him (having liberty to Eat as much as he pleases there) he would never find his way out of the Mountain.

From the City King towards the West, the way through the Mountains is so troublesome to find, that Mayven, a General of the Chineses marching with an Army against the Emperor of Tungking, caus'd Copper Columes to be set up in the same, that thereby he might find that way out again at his return; to this day one of them may be seen, standing on a steep ascent call'd Fuenmoa, where the Boundaries are between the Kingdom of Tungkin and China.

In the County Luicheufu, Southward from the City Luicheu, is the Mountain Kingliu, on which, from a flash of Lightning, sprung a Fountain.

Another Hill nam'd Tatunglai, near the City Cuiki, on an Isle in the Sea, near the Shore; hath seventy Furlongs in Circumference, and eight Populous Villa∣ges, which maintain themselves with fishing for Pearls.

There are moreover in this Province, in the County Quancheufu, near the City Tunguen, the Mountain Heufu making an Isle in the Sea: Near the same City, the Mountain Tahi, on the Sea-shore: In the County Hoeucheufu,

the Mountain Lofeu, extending from the City Changing, to the City Polo: In the County Xaocheu, near the City Lochang, the Mountain Chang: North of the City Nanking, the high and far-spreading Mountain Tecafung: By the City Xihing, the fair and pleasant Mountain Sicung: Near the Moat of the City King, the Mountain Heng: About the City Linxan, the high Hill Loyang.

THe Province of Quangsi possesses an endless Ridge of barren and unacces∣sible* 30.89 Mountains.

In the County Queilufu, towards the North-East of the chief City Queilin, ap∣pears the Quei, a Mountain so call'd, from the abundance of Trees nam'd Quei; these Trees suffer no other to grow near them, nor in the same places where they have stood formerly. The Mountain Tosieu lies also near the City Queilin, and hath a very fine Colledge. More Northward, in the same Tract of Land, lies the Mountain Xin, with three high Precipices; on the top of one of them stands a Palace, so high, that the Chineses affirm it to be in the third or purest Region of the Air, above all the Clouds.

By the City Hingquan, lies the Mountain Haiyang, which reaches to the City Lingchuen; upon it is a Pool which breeds four Footed Beasts, and Horn'd Fish, which Monsters, the Chineses believe are to Recreate the Dragon, there∣fore dare not offer to kill any of them.

The Mountain Hoa, that is, Flower, so call'd from its pleasant Prospect, lies on the Shore of the River Quei, near the City Yangso.

By the City Iungfo lies the Mountain Fungcao, that is, Phenix Nest,; the Chi∣neses affirm, that the Bird Phenix bred, and made his Nest on the same, and that under the Phenix Nest, a very Precious and unvaluable Stone hath been found.

About the City Cyven lies the Mountain Siang, Crown'd with a fair Temple and Cloyster.

Northward, beyond the City Queilin, a Ridge of steep Hills runs along with seven rising tops, which exactly represent the shape of The great Bear, wherefore it is call'd Chiesing, that is, Hill of the seven Stars.

In the County Lieucheufu, lies Southward from the City Lieucheu, the Moun∣tain Sienie; from whose several observable things, as its deep Caverns, Spiry Point, which like a Pillar of one intire Stone, shoots up in a straight and Per∣pendicular Line, its Stone Image of a Horse, &c. the Chineses Draw in their Fancy many lucky Omens.

Northward of the City Siang, rises the Mountain Xintang, which is so high and steep, that it is almost inaccessible; yet on its top hath a pleasant Lake, full of Fish, and surrounded with Trees; whereupon the Chineses, who are ve∣ry curious to see such things, climbe up this Mountain with great labor and trouble; reporting, that for its pleasant Situation, it was formerly frequented by a People, which they say, never Die, and are call'd Xincien.

In the County Kingyvenfu, Northward from the City Kingyven, appears the Mountain Y; onely remarkable for its standing alone, for whereas others are very high, and extend a vast way, this stands alone like a Pyramid, and there∣fore eminent amongst the Chineses.

In the County Pinglofu, at the South-West side of the City Pinglo, begins the Mountain Kai, and extends to the City Lipu; on the East side is the steep and great Mountain Iung, which hath nine craggy Hills; on the West side lies the Hill Monica, that is to say, The Crown of Eyes, because it hath two great

Stones which appear like two Eyes on its top, so exactly form'd by Nature, that scarce any Artist could match them; the Ball of the Eye may easily be distinguish'd, for round about are two Streaks, one white, and another black, as in our Eyes.

By the City Fuchuen appears the Mountain Sin, on which by a flash of Lightning eight great Holes were made.

Not far from the City Ho lies the Mountain Kiue, so call'd from the abun∣dance of Golden-colour'd Apples that grow thereon.

Southward from the City Sieugin lies a pretty high Hill nam'd To, which is inaccessible one way, but towards the City ascended by Stairs made by Nature.

In the County Guchenfu, Northward from the City Gucheu, the Mountain Tayun begins near the Metropolis of the County.

By the City Teng lies a very pleasant Mountain nam'd Nan, from which the Chineses make many strange Observations.

By the City Yung begins the Mountain Tayung, which reaches to the Juris∣diction of the Cities Pelieu, Hinge, Yolin, and Cin.

Near the same place is the Mountain Tuki•…•…o, the twenty second in the Book of Tausu; it hath eight steep Spires and twenty Caverns.

By the City Yolin lies the Mountain Han, that is, Cold, because it is so exceed∣ing cold, that no Man can live on the same, notwithstanding it lies under a very hot Clymate.

Soutward from the City Pope lies the Mountain Fiyun, remarkable because in the Rocks thereof appear Prints of Mens Feet, some four Spans long: The whole Mountain is barren and full of Caverns.

Northward from the City Pelieu lies the great Mountain Kilieu, which hath many Precipices, and is the twenty second in the Book of Tausu.

Westward from the City Yung lies the Mountain Ho, that is, Fiery, so call'd because every Night appears a Fire like a lighted Torch on the same.

They say that these Lights are little Insects, which we call Glow-worms, and that they run out of the River upon the Mountain, from whence they give that Light.

The great Mountain Xepao lies also in this County, hath great Woods of Trees and Indian Canes, and nourishes a multitude of Tygers.

In the County Chincheufu, at the South side of the City Sincheu, lies the Mountain Pexe, the one and twentieth in the Book of Tausu, and advances its Top call'd Toucu above the Clouds; on the North side is the Mountain Lungxe, the largest in the whole County, overspread with many pleasant Groves and Corn-Fields.

By the City Quei lies the great Mountain Nan, which thrusts up twenty four Spiry Hillocks.

In the County Nanningfu, on the East side of the City Nanning, rises the the Mountain Heng, so call'd, because in the middle of the River Yeu or Puon it receives the Water, which with great force is driven by the Stream: The Family Sung caus'd a Fort to be built on the same for a Defence of the Coun∣trey.

There are besides in this Province, North-East of the River Hung, the Mountain Hocio; North of the City Heng, the Florid Mountain Sieulia; East of the City Yunghung, the Mountain Suchung; having Iron Mines; West of the City Naning, the Mountain Moye; in the Territory Taipingfu, near the City

Lung, the very high Mountain Cieuling; East of the City Taiping, the Mountain Peyun; not far from thence, the Mountain Gomui; and near it, the Mountain Kin; by the City Co, in the County Sumingfu, near the Rity Hiaxe, the wooddy Mountain Pelo; in the Territory Chinyanfu, the high and pleasant Mountain Iun; in the Garrison'd County Sugenfu, East of the City Sugen, the Mountain Tosieu; by the City Vuyuen, the Mountain Kifung, and a little farther the Moye; in the Territory Suchingfu, near the City Suching, the high craggy Mountain Lengyum; by the Cities Fulo, Tukang, and Suling, the Mountains Tanping, Sie∣cung, and Lyfang, and not far thence the Mountain Xipi.

IN the Territory Queiyangfu, on the East side of the City Queiyang in the Pro∣vince* 30.90 of Queicheu, lies the Mountain Tengen, signifying Copper Drum, from the sound of a Drum (as the Chineses affirm) that is heard upon it against Rain.

In the Territory Sunangfu, on the South side of the City Sunang, rises the Vancing; to which there being no Ascent but onely one way, the Inhabitants find it a safe place of refuge in time of War. On the South-West side lies the Mountain Lungmuen; by the City Vuchuen, the great Mountain Tanien; on which reside many People unknown to the Chineses.

In the County Sinyven, near the Moat of the City Ciniven, rises the Moun∣tain Xeping, which signifies Stone Pillar, because an entire Stone is erected there, which, as they say, is a hundred Rods high.

On the North-West side of the City Sinyven, lies the Mountain Sikiung, on which anciently stood a City, whereof the Ruines yet remain.

In the Territory Tuchofu, near the City Pinglang, lies the Mountain Kaiyang, fortifi'd with a Castle.

On the North side of the City Hokiang is the Mountain Ching, to whose top leads onely a narrow Foot-path, which is guarded by a strong Fort.

About the City Fuiugning lies the Mountain Hinglang, ascended by Stone Stairs, which are guarded by the Inhabitants to secure the Passage.

By the City Pincheu lies the Mountain Lotung, which extends twelve hun∣dred Rods, and near the City Cinping piercing the Clouds with its Spiry Top, is call'd Hianglu.

In the little County of the City Pugan, on the North-East side thereof, ap∣pears the Mountain Puonkiang, which extends to the Kingdom of Gannan and the Fort Ganchoang: On the South-West side is the Mountain Tangpi, out of which they dig Quicksilver and the Mineral Hiunghoang.

In the little County Iunningfu, near the City Muy, rises the Hungyai, a very high Mountain, terrible to behold. There is also a Hill nam'd Lincing, over∣grown with Indian Canes.

By the City Tinging lies the Mountain Quangso, which extending a hundred Furlongs, hath a Fort for the safeguard of the Way.

In the little County of the City Chinning, near the City Xenk, appears the Mountain Magan, so nam'd from its resembling a Saddle.

The small Territory of the City Ganxun hath but one Mountain, which lies on the East side thereof, and is call'd Niencung, which though very high, is not above ten Furlongs in compass.

In the Garrison'd County Sintienfu, on the North side of the chief City Sin∣tien, is a very high Mountain call'd Pie, which pierces the Clouds, and runs up like a Pyramid, for which reason it is nam'd Pie, which signifies A Pencil, with

which the Chineses Write. On the North side lies the Mountain Yangpo, which for its pleasantness and variety of colours may be resembled to a Picture. The Mountain Caimiao, lies on the North-East side, from which Water falls, where∣on the Sun-beams reflecting continually, represent a Rain-bowe.

Westward from the Garrison Pingao lies the Mountain Loco, which signifies Harts▪horn, so call'd from the abundance of broken Stones which stick out of the same.

There are also in this Province, North of the City Queiang, the high craggy Mountain Nannang; In the County Suchenfu, South of Suchen, the inaccessible Mountain Go; West of the same City, the Mountain Tienyung; In the Terri∣tory Xecienfu, South of Xecie, the Mountain Pipa; East of the same, the Heu; In the County Tunganfu, East of Tungan, the Mountain Tung; South of the City, the Tungyai; On the South-East side, the Cloud-piercing Vienpi; On the South-West side, the wooddy Mountain Pechang; In the County Lipingfu, North of Li∣ping, the Mountain Patung; East of the same City, the pleasant Mountain Kin∣ping, call'd The Gilded Wall; East of the City Tanki, the high Mountain Tungquen; also the Mountain Taiping, with its rising Top Metien, and square Cavern Tun∣qui; In the County Putingfu, North-West of Puting, the high craggy Mountain Ki; and East of the same City, the Magan; East of the chief City of Pinguefu, the Mountain Pie; By the City Yangy, the craggy Mocing; In the County Lung∣tefu, by the City Pingtu, the high high Mountain Iunctao; By Taiping, the Rocky Mountain Cohai; East of Picie, the craggy Mountain Mohi; North of the Garrison Cingping, the Mountains Lochung and Cosung.

IN the County Iunnanfu, within the Walls of the chief City Iunnan, is the* 30.91 Mountain Uhao, adorn'd with many Cloysters and Temples, and divers other Buildings.

Westward from the Lake Tien and the City Iunnan, lies the far-spreading and high Mountain Kingki; and on the North side of the same City is the Mountain Xang, which produces a Spring with very cold Water, which ne∣vertheless is exceeding good against all manner of pain in the Joynts and Limbs.

In this County also is the Mountain Lo, being high and slender, appears like a Spire, and with the Mountain Kinki, riseth above all the other Mountains in the County. On the North-West side lies the Toyang, full of Cloysters, the Residences of Priests.

In the County Talifu, on the West side of the City Tali, is the Mountain Tiencang, which extends three hundred Furlongs, and rises up with eighteen high Spiry Heads: Upon it is a very deep Pool.

By the City Chao is the Mountain Fungy; where there is also an artificial Mount of Earth; under which two hundred thousand Men belonging to the King of Nanchao lie bury'd, they being all slain in a Battel against the Chineses, under the Conduct of the General Tangsiengu: After which Victory the King∣dom of Nanchao, which contains all that lies towards the South over the Ri∣ver Gangas, was by the Family of Han subdu'd.

By the City Tengchuen, towards the South-West lies the Mountain Kico, fa∣mous for many stately Pagods and Cloysters. From this Place the knowledge of the Pagan Religion is thought to have come first to the Chineses.

On one of the Mountains near the City Chao, a steep Spiry Hill call'd Tinsi shoots up a thousand Rods above the Mountain on which it rises: and at the

Foot thereof lies a Fort for defence of the Ways. The other Mountains of les∣ser remark are Xuimo, Chung, Tungi, and Lofeu.

In the County Linganfu the Mountain Uchung bears on the middlemost of three Spiry Risings the City Omi.

By the City Ning the Mountain Vansung, so call'd from the Pine-Trees it bears.

Near Tunghai is the Hill Siau, which (as the Chineses say) hath a Spring whose Water clears and whitens the Skin of those that drink it, and also makes lean People fat.

In the Territory Cuhiungfu, on the West side of the City Cuhiung, are the Mountains Minfung and Viki, from the last of which flow above a thousand Brooks, which makes it all over very Flowry and fruitful.

Northward from Quantung lies the high Mountain Cieupuon, which sinks in the middle, and makes a deep Cavern.

Near the City Nangan is the Piaolo, full of Silver Mines. The others are Heu, Southward from the City Sinhoa; Minfung, Westward from the City Cuhi∣ungfu; and Umung, Eastward from the City Tingyven.

In the County Chinkiangfu, on the South side of the City Chinkiang, near the Lake Vusien, the wooddy Mountain Yokeu thrusts up one Spiry Hillock.

On the East side of the same City is the Mountain Kinlieu, which at the ri∣sing of the Sun glisters like Gold.

By the City Kiangchuen, towards the South, the Mountai Si sends forth seve∣ral Rivulets.

Not far from thence is the Mountains Puon and Quen, in one of which stands a Temple and Cloyster, inhabited by Priests.

In the County Munghoafu, on the South-East side of the City Munghoa, the Mountain Guaipo over-tops all the other Mountains in the County. On the South-West side lies the Mountain Tunghoang, which is so call'd from the Chi∣nese Phenix, which (as they say) died on the same, after having Sung very sweetly a considerable time. On the North side lies the Mountain Tiencul, that is Ear of Heaven, because there is such a perfect Eccho on the same, that the Voyce, though utter'd never so softly, is repeated again.

In the County Quangnangfu, on the East side of the City Quangnang, is the Mountain Lienhoa, that is, Lien-Flower, because it represents the shape of that Flower.

Near the City Tai is the Mountain Yocyven, so call'd from a pure Spring which rises on its top; for Yocyven signifies An excellent Spring.

In the County Sinyvenfu, on the West side of the City Sinyven, is the Moun∣tain Polung, with many Hills, which running along in a Ridge, rise higher and higher, and appear like swoln Waves of the Sea; wherefore it hath the Name Polung, that is, Many Waves. On the North-East side lies the Mountain Nalo, which abounds with Tygers and Leopards.

In the Territory Iungningfu, on the South-East side of the City Iungning, is the Mountain Canmo, which being all a Rock, stands apart from other Moun∣tains in a great Plain.

By the City Volu is the Mountain Lopu; By Hinglo, the Mountain Pouo; By Lochuho, the Mountain Lovi.

In the County Xunningfu, on the North-West of the City Xuuning, lies the Mountain Loping; on the North side the Mountain Mengpa, which is inhabited by salvage People.

In the Garrison'd County Kioungfu, on the East side of the City Kiocing, is the Mountain Kuking, which hath a Spring, whose Waters (if we may believe the Chineses) given to Children to drink, sharpens their Wit.

In the Territory Sokingfu, near the City Kienchuen, Westward, lies the Kin∣hoa, a Mountain which abounds in Gold, and extends from thence in a con∣tinu'd Line through the Kingdom of Sifan. One of the Hills belonging to it shines all over like Gold.

On the South side of the City Siking lies the large Mountain Fauchang.

By the City Kienchuen is the Mountain Xepao; on which on a Column of Stone is the Image of the Idol Fe, an Elephant, Lyon, Clock, and Drum, all of one piece, yet every Representation of a particular colour; but by whom erected is not known.

In the County Vutingfu, on the East side of the City Vuting, is the large Mountain Umong, rising with twelve Spiry Heads.

About the City Lokiven, Northward lies the Mountain Hinkieu, which is barren and craggy, yet plain on the top, and ascended onely by a long and narrow Path, just broad enough for one Man; so that it affords a safe refuge for the Inhabitants in the time of War.

By the City Hokio lies the Mountain Sokien, which is commonly call'd The continual Spring, because it feels none of the alterations which usually attend the several Seasons of the year. On its West side is a great Cavern like a deep Pit, in which stand two Images, one of a Man, the other of some kind of Beast.

The Chineses write, That if any one chancing to come near these Ima∣ges speaks aloud, there follows immediately Thunder and tempestuous Wea∣ther.

In the County Cintienfu, on the North side of the City Cintien, is the Moun∣tain Iuecu, fifty Furlongs in circumference; and on the North-West side the Mountain Into, the Air whereof is so very pure and wholsom, that those who inhabit there live very long, and free from all Diseases, nor are ever trou∣bled with that excessive Heat, with which in the Dog-days other places are infested.

By the City Kiucin is the Mountain Kiusna, so call'd from the divers-colour'd Stones thereon, being in the form of a Horse.

In the Territory Likiangfu, on the North-West side of the City Likiang, which looks towards the Kingdom of Tibet lies the Mountain Sieu, so call'd from the Snow, which never melting is always found upon it.

In the County Iuenkiangfu, on the North-East side of the City Iuenkiang, is the pleasant Mountain Lecekia, signifying Fair Tower; On the East side, the great Mountain Iotai, with twenty five Spiry Tops.

In the County Iunchangfu, on the East side of the City Iungchiang, is the Mountain Gailo, or Ganlo; upon which is a deep Pond, from which the Hus∣bandmen take Observations whether the approaching Year will be fruitful or not, by taking notice in the Spring-time, whether its Water falls or rises. There is also a Stone, which representing a Mans Nose, sends forth out of the Nostrils two Fountains, one with cold, and the other with warm Water.

Near the City Laye lies the Kaoli, a great and high Mountain.

By the City Iunping lies the Mountain Ponan, very troublesom and danger∣ous to ascend.

Near Xintien, is the Mountain Mocang, one of whose Tops seems to kiss the Skies.

The Mountain Funko, which lies Westward from the City Ienping, hath a Fort of the same Denomination.

These are the most remarkable Mountains of this Province; besides which there are North of the City Caoming the high Mountain Sieucao: By the City Synning, the Golden Mountain Kiuma: South of Queniang, the Pecio: North of the same City, the Mountains Yleang and Kocing: South of the City Lyngan, the high Mountain Puonchang: North of the chief City of the County Kingtungfu, the high and far stretching Mountain Munglo: And not far from thence, the Garrison'd Mountain Pingtai: North of Quangsi, in the County Quangsifu, the Mountain Fiaco: Within the Walls of the same City, the Mountain Chungfien: About the City Mile, the Mountain Siaolung: By the City Cheneye, the Woody Mountain Xingan: By the City Loleang, the Mountain Xemuon; through which runs a Road ten Furlongs broad: By the City Yeco, the Mountain Yceng: Near the City Malnug, the high topt Mountain Quenfo: West of the chief City, in the County Yaoganfu, the Mountain Kienlien: On the East of the same City, the Mountain Tung, o'respread with pleasant Groves: On the North of the Moun∣tain Lolo, and by the City Zayao, the Mountain Luki: South of the City Pexing, the high Mountain Rieulung: On the East side, the Mountain Tung; on the West, the Utung: On the North-West side of the City Sinhon, the Mountain Talung: On the North side, the Checung, on which is a warm Spring: By the Garrison Chelo, the Mountain Munglo: By the Garrison Taheu, the steep Moun∣tain Olun: By the Garrison'd City Mangxi, the high Stony and Cavernous Mountain Singxe: By the Garrison Mengyang, the high Mountain Queikive, so full of Holes, that it is said to have been Undermin'd by Evil Spirits.

As to what concerns the Temperature of the Air, and Quality of the Soil in the several Countries of China in particular, having heretofore spoken of it in general, we find in the Chinese Books of Geography this account given.

The Temperature of the Air, and Quality of the Soil.

IN the first little County, wherein stands the City Chin, in the Province of Xensi, the Air, in regard of the Countrey, lies very high, and is much colder than in other places; but in most parts of the Province of Xensi, the Air is pleasant and temperate.

It Rains very seldom in the Province of Xantung.

In divers places of rhe Province of Honan the Air is very Temperate, and consequently Healthful; as likewise in the County Houiking.

The Air of the Province of Fokien is generally hot, but clear and Healthful; except in the County Tincheufu.

The Southern part of the Province of Quangsi, is under a warm Climate.

The Air of the Province of Iunnan is much hotter than that of the other Pro∣vinces, as being nearer to the Line, and for the most part agreeing with that of India.

The Soil of the Province of Peking, is in most places Barren and Sandy, though Champain; but in the second County Paotingfu, very pleasant and Fruitful of all things; and so likewise in the seventh Territory Tamingfu: In the eighth County of this Province grows the Root Gingten.

In the Jurisdiction of the City Yenking, the first of the three Cities without

the bounds of the Province of Peking, are store of Vines; yet the Inhabitants know not how, or rather (which is most probable) will not make Wine of Grapes, but content themselves with Liquors made of Rice, which are ex∣ceeding good, and so well approv'd of by the Jesuits, who went thither from Europe, that they us'd no Liquor else, except at Mass.

The Province of Xansi produces Vineyards and Grapes, much sweeter than in other parts in China; so that the Chineses, if they would, might make excel∣lent Wine in great abundance; but in stead thereof, they have a way of drying their Grapes like Raisins, which, when so order'd, are Vended in all parts of China.

The Fathers which Promulgated the Gospel in this Province, took a conve∣nient course to Press their Wine themselves which they use at Mass, and fur∣nish'd others of their Fraternity in the Neighboring Provinces therewith; whereas, formerly with great trouble and charge they sent for their Wine from the City Makao.

The second County Pingyangfu, of the Province of Xansi, is partly Cham∣pain, and partly Mountainous; but of the Champain, which is very Fruitful, not an Acre lies Untill'd.

The fourth County Luganfu, of the same Province, is very Pleasant, and though small, yet abounds with all manner of Provision.

The fifth County Fuencheufu, though Hilly, yet on the Hills themselves hath some places capable of Tillage; and beneath, divers thick Woods and Forests, stor'd with Venison, fruitful Corn-fields and Meadows for Pasture.

The Province of Xensi is more subject to Drought than any other Province, and very often infinitely endamag'd by swarms of Locusts, which like a vast Army devour the Fruits of the Earth, and lay waste all before them: This Pro∣vince particularly produces the Physical Plant Rhubarb.

The first County Siganfu, of the Province of Xensi, hath both Pleasant Moun∣tains and Fruitful Plains, producing all store of Fruits and other Provision: The second likewise is both Manur'd, and not behind in natural Fertility.

The third Territory Hanchungfu, hath many rank Pastures and rich Fields.

The fourth Pingleangfu, hath many pleasant Mountains, which are not alto∣gether barren.

The Soil of the whole Province of Xantung is inrich'd by the many Rivers, Lakes, and Brooks that are in the same, and hath plenty of all kind of Neces∣saries, as well Rice, Barley, and other sorts of Corn, as of Beans, Hau, and divers sorts of excellent Fruit, but Drought and Locust do often great hurt: Nevertheless, the Countrey is naturally so exceeding Fertile, that they say, the Harvest of one Fruitful Year stor'd them for ten Years, in such plenty, as to spare great quantities to other Countries: Particularly, it yields large Pears and Apples of several sorts, Chest-nuts, Small-nuts, and great abundance of Plums, which are dry'd and sent to other Countries.

The first County Cinunfu, yields not, for pleasure, to any other of the Nor∣thern Provinces, for all manner of Grain or Fruits, especially Wheat and Rice, which grow there in great abundance.

In like manner, the second County Yeucheufu hath many delightful Fields, Wooddy Mountains, and in most places, is well Cultivated.

The third County Tungchangfu hath a Plain and Rich Soil, produces great store of Grain, and wants in a manner nothing of what is requisite for the su∣staining of Mans Life.

The Province of Honan is in some parts Champain, and in others Moun∣tainous, especially Westward; yet the Soil being every where Fruitful, no place lies Untill'd, except towards the West, where several craggy Mountains ob∣struct the Husbandmans Labor: The Fields produce Rice, and all other sorts of Grain: They have all manner of European Fruits, and that in such abun∣dance, that they are bought at very cheap Rates; so that it is no wonder this Province is by the Chineses call'd A Paradice of Delight; for the Eastern part there∣of is so pleasant, and every where so improv'd by Tillage, that those who shall for several days Travel through the same, may fancy they walk through a most delightful Garden.

But above all, for richness of Soil, are the Counties Queitefu and Changtefu, as being for the most part Plain, without any Mountains.

The third Territory on the contrary is very barren and Sandy; yet that de∣fect is much supply'd by the conveniency of its Rivers. The fifth County Hoai∣kingfu again is exceeding Fertile; as also the sixth and seventh, being Honanfu and Nanyangfu; the last well Water'd with Rivers and surrounded with Moun∣tains, so abounds with Provision, that it is able to furnish whole Armies there∣with. In like manner the little County, in which stands the City Iu, is very Fruitful.

The Province of Suchuen hath many pleasant Pastures and rich Corn-fields, yet is Mountainous in several places: The Physical Drugs which this Coun∣trey produces, as well Herbs as Minerals, are much esteem'd, and from thence Transported to Europe; among others the true China-Root, and best Rhubarb.

The whole Territory Chingtufu is partly Champain, and in some parts with Mountains; the Plains are inrich'd by Natures Hand, and the very Moun∣tainous parts by good Tillage, are made Fruitful; all the Fields are Water'd by Rivulets, either Natural or Cut, insomuch, that whoe're Travels through them, hath, for three days, an exceeding pleasant Journey.

In the County Paoningfu, of the Province of Suchuen, in a Pagod-Temple in the great City Kien, grows an Indian Fig-tree, in the Portuguese Tongue call'd Arvor de Rayes.

In the Country Xunkingfu grow great store of Gold-colour'd Apples, a Root call'd Soozanem, and Chest-nuts which melt in the Mouth like Sugar.

The Territory Siucheufu, though craggy and Mountainous, produces among many other things requisite, abundance of Indian Sugar-canes, and an excellent Fruit call'd Lichi.

The County Chunkingfu hath store of Meutang-Flowers, and the Fruit Licheu.

The Territory Queicheufu, Fruitful of its self, is also by the Inhabitants very much improv'd by Tillage, no spot of Ground being left Unmanur'd, except some Sandy and Stony Mountains, which lie especially towards the North: Among other excellent Fruits, this Countrey abounds in Oranges and Lemons.

The first little County, wherein stands the City Tungchun, is exceedingly in∣rich'd by the abundance of Rivers which Water the same.

The small Territory belonging to the City Kiating, is a pleasant place, and yields plenty of Rice and other Grains.

By the fourth Garrison'd City Chinhiung grow a sort of Beans, which the Chi∣neses for their hardness call The Stone-Beans; they grow on Shrubs, and are ex∣ceeding good against Heart-burning.

The County of Huquang for its Fruitfulness is call'd Iumichity, that is, The

Countrey of Fish and Rice; it is also call'd The Corn-store-house of the Chineses (as Sicilie was anciently call'd, The Store-house of Italy) from its abundance of all things, especially Corn, and all manner of Grain, which it not onely yields to its Inhabitants, but in a plentiful manner furnishes all the neighboring Countries.

The County Vuchangfu is advantag'd by the many Streams and Channels that run through the same, and along whose Banks grow abundance of Reeds, of which they make Paper.

The second Honia, among other things, produces in particular great plenty of Lemons, Oranges, and Cytrons: Nor are the fifth and sixth Territories in∣ferior; which last yields all manner of Provisions.

The seventh County Iocheufu, is very much inrich'd by three Rivers, viz. the Kiang, Siang, and Fungi, and brings forth incomparable Fruits, especially Oran∣ges and Lemons.

The eighth County Changxafu, generally Champain, but in some places Mountainous, hath a fat and fertile Soil, and plenty of all things, Rice grow∣ing there in abundance, without danger of withering in the dryest Seasons, because there seldom wants Rain, which if there should, the Husband-man supplies it sufficiently with Water, which by an Engine is drawn out of the Lakes and Streams over their Fields, so to moisten the Roots of their Plants.

The County Hengcheufu is a delightful and well Till'd Countrey, yielding all manner of Provisions, and among the rest, Paper-canes: Much of the same Nature are the tenth and fourteenth Counties.

In the Territory Chingyangfu grows a Plant, which like our Ivy runs up in height, bears Yellow Flowers, and some White. The utmost end of the Sprigs are very thin, like Silken Threds; they say, that a small Branch thereof being laid to the Naked Body, occasions Sleep, and therefore is call'd Munghao, that is, Flower of Sleep.

The County Nanchangfu, the first of the Province of Kiangfi, having every where a fruitful and fat Soil, is Till'd in most places: In like manner, the se∣cond Territory Iaocheufu is made very pregnant by several Rivers that run through it.

The Chineses also esteem the fourth County Nankangfu, for its affording them all kind of Necessaries; the low Grounds yielding plenty of Rice, Corn, and Shell-Fruit; the Mountains store of Wood for Fuel.

The sixth County Kienchangfu, is, though Mountainous, a Pleasant and Fer∣tile Countrey; as likewise the seventh Vuchenfu, (through which run many Rivers) it yields store of Gold-colour'd Apples; nor is it wanting in all sorts of Fruit and other Provisions: No less Pleasant and Fruitful is the eighth County Lingkiangfu, esteem'd by the Chineses; as also the ninth Kieganfu, though Hilly and Mountainous: But above all, the tenth Territory Xuicheufu, a∣bounds in Rice-Fields; as appears by its paying three thousand Bags of Rice for Custom Yearly; when as it contains onely three Cities, of which, the chief at this day call'd Xuicheu, was in the time of the Family Tang nam'd Micheu, that is, City of Rice: Not much short of this in plenty is the eleventh County Iuencheufu.

The fourth County Sunkiangfu, of the Province of Kiangnan, though small, is not to be left out of the Fruitful Countries: The fifth Changcheufu, being a plain Countrey and Water'd by several Rivers, exceeds many other Territories in the goodness of its Soil; producing an excellent kind of Grain. The seventh Yan∣cheufu hath also a delightful and fertile Soyl.

The ninth County Lucheufu, being water'd by the Lake Cao, possesses in most parts thereof very luxuriant Plains: In like manner doth the eleventh, Taipingfu.

The Province of Chekiang, by reason of the many Brooks, Rivers and Lakes which wash the same, is a rich Magazine of Plenty: And though Chokiang hath many Mountains on its South and West parts, yet they are all Till'd▪ ex∣cept those which are stony; and they also afford Timber, fit for the building of Ships or Houses. In most parts are store of Mulberry Trees, which are Prun'd yearly like our Vines, thereby the better to provide Food for the Silk-Worms; for the Chineses suffer them not to grow too high, having by the expe∣rience of many years learn'd, that the Leaves of the Orange-Trees, and those that are most kept down, yield the best Silk.

In the County Hucheufu, the third of the Province of Chekiang, grows Cha, which is call'd Riaicha.

In the fifth Territory Kinhaofu grows a sort of great Plumbs, which being dry'd, are sent from thence to most parts of China.

The whole County of Ningpofu, in the Province of Chekiang, hath a fertile Soil, except where it is full of Rocks and Mountains.

The eleventh County Vencheufu flourishes all along till you come to the Mountains in the Province of Fokien, which extend themselves a vast way.

The Province of Fokien is for the most part over▪spread with Mountains, which in many places are cover'd with pleasant Woods, especially on steep Ascents: The Timber is good for the building of Ships, Houses, and the like. That part also which is plain, is for the most part Sandy and unfit for Tillage: but to supply that defect, the Water is led thither in little Channels, whereby those places that are barren by Nature, are rendred productive by the Art and Industry of Man.

The sixth County Tingcheufu hath abundance of all things requisite for the subsistance of Mankind, notwithstanding it is very Mountainous.

The seventh Territory Hinghoafu in the Province of Fokien, is the fertilest and pleasantest in the whole Countrey, and especially abounding in Rice, as ap∣pears by its paying seventy two thousand Bags of Tribute, whereas it onely contains two Cities.

The little Territory of the City Foning hath also plenty of Provision, not∣withstanding it is every where full of Mountains.

The Province of Quantung is a rich Store-house of Plenty: The Fields are so bountiful in the production of Rice and Wheat, that they are Sown twice a year, each Harvest yielding the Husband-man a most plentiful Crop, by rea∣son the whole Province feels neither Frost nor Snow, insomuch that the Chi∣neses have a Proverb concerning it, viz. That in the Province of Quantung are three unusual things, The Skie without Snow, The Trees always green, and The Inhabi∣tants continually spitting Blood, that is to say, a red-colour'd Spittle occasion'd by the continual chewing the Leaves of Betel with Faufel or Araka, a Composition made of burnt Oyster-shells.

In the same Province also are every where many excellent Fruits, as Pomegranates, Grapes, Pears, Chesnuts, Indian Figs, Indian Nuts, Anana's, Li∣chin, Lunggon, Ieucu, or Muskmelons, Apples, and all sorts of Citrons.

The fifth Territory Iaocheufu in the Province of Quantung, hath a fertile Soyl, except in some places where it is oppress'd with Rocks.

The sixth Chaokingfu yields store of sweet Wood, and amongst the rest that which the Portuguese name Pao de Rosa, that is, Rose-Wood.

The ninth County Luicheufu exceeds in many things all the other Territo∣ries in the Province of Quantung:

In most parts of this Countrey grows a Twig, which the Chineses call Teng, and the Portuguese, Rosa.

The Province of Quangsi is not altogether so delightful as that of Quantung; yet in some measure is supply'd with Provisions: The whole Province is full of Hills, except the South part, which reaches to the Shore, where it is all Till'd and Manur'd.

The third County Kingyvenfu is a Craggy and Mountainous Countrey, yet produces Araka, little Indian Nuts, and the Fruit Lichias.

The sixth Territory Cincheufu, is a pleasant Place, and not so barren as the former.

The Province of Queicheu is the craggiest and unfertilest Place in all China, being nothing but a continu'd and inaccessible Ridge of Mountains.

In the fourth Territory Chinyvenfu grow a sort of Flowers, highly esteem'd by the Chineses, Granates, and Golden Apples.

The first County Iunnanfu in the Province of Iunnan, is a very pleasant Countrey, having plenty of all things, and rises in some places in Hills and high. Mountains, and in others extends a vast way on plain and Champain Grounds: It produces Rose-Wood.

In the second County Talifu in the Province of Iunnan, grow European Figs, which the Chineses call Vuhoaquo, that is, Fruit without Flowers, because they grow without ever having any Blossoms; for Vu signifies Without; Hoa, Flower; and Quo, A Blossom. There likewise grows Cha or Tee.

The third County Langanfu yields Rice, Wheat, Honey, and Wax; and also all sorts of Fruits which grow in India. It is partly Champain, and partly Mountainous.

The fourth Territory Cuihungfu is a plain Countrey, flourishing with Corn-Fields, brave Meadows, and Pastures for Cattel.

The whole County Kingtungfu produces chiefly (and therefore in great abundance) Rice.

The Territory Quangnangfu is by the Chineses, for its excellent fertility, call'd The Golden Land.

In the fifth Territory Iunnanfu, where stands the Garrison'd City Cioking, are store of Pine-Apples; as likewise in the sixth.

The seventh abounds with Silk, Ebony-Wood, Date-Trees, and Araka, which the Inhabitants chew with Betel-Leaves, as also the Indians, who call it Makinnang.

Thus much of the temperature of the Air, and fertility of the Soyl of China; as to what concerns their manner of Husbandry, and the Description of some Plants that belong properly to China, we will here Treat at large.

Of their manner of Husbandry.

AS to what concerns Husbandry, no People in the World are more skil∣ful and experienc'd than the Chineses: They say (and not without some Ground) that a Man may live without all Arts, except that of Husbandry, which is amongst them esteem'd the onely Business of Conse∣quence. They say continually that Husbandry is the greatest and chiefest

[illustration]

Work of the Empire, and that even Kings and Magistrates ought seriously to concern themselves in it. And it comes to pass by the great Priviledges and Encouragements allow'd to the Husband-man, that not one Spot of Land is left unimprov'd, if it be either naturally fruitful, or can be made so by Art: and because it is a great part of their care to keep their Ground in heart by frequent Dunging and Manuring, they use many more sorts of Dung than are in use amongst us, as Man's Dung, Ox Legs stamp'd, Hogs Bristles, &c. insomuch, that the Chineses, though stor'd with great abundance of preci∣ous things, nothing is lost, how mean soever it is, but is all improv'd to the great benefit of the whole Empire. Where there is want of Water, it is con∣vey'd, though a considerable way, out of the Rivers, along digg'd Channels; (by which means all China is made Navigable) and conducted from low to high places by means of an Engine made of four square Planks holding great store of Water, which with Iron Chains they hale up like Buckets. It is re∣ported, that several of their Emperors and Empresses did in ancient times pra∣ctise Husbandry.

The Emperor Ven, who began his Reign Anno 197 before the Incarnation, pro∣moted Husbandry, then decay'd by the continual Wars, with great zeal, and put his own Hands to the Work, that by his Example he might oblige all the greatest Noble-men to follow him. He caus'd all Women to plant Mul∣bery-Trees, and breed Silk-Worms, from the Example of his Empress, whom he enjoyn'd to set the fore-mention'd Trees, and breed Silk-Worms in his Pa∣lace; insomuch that all the Clothes she wore, and which were us'd in their Religious Ceremonies, were of her making.

It is credible that from hence the high Feast, which the Chineses call Hinchun, hath its original: This may well be term'd The Countrey-man's Holiday; for in the beginning of the Spring, when the Sun is in the Aequator, this Day is by the Chineses through the whole Empire kept with great Solemnity, by all de∣grees of Persons in every City, and in the Metropolis Peking it self after this manner:

One of the chiefest of the Nobility, Crown'd with a Garland of Flowers, goes to the Eastern Gate of the City, with all manner of Instruments Playing before him, and attended with a number of burning Torches and Flags. Behind fol∣low a Train of Men, which carry several Dishes of Meat to Trees, whereon hang the ancient Monuments of Husbandry, being either made of Wood or some other Material, and set forth with Silk and Cloth of Gold. In several places through which they pass, stand Triumphal Arches, and all the Streets are hung with Tapestry. In this manner the Nobleman goes to the Eastern Gate, as it were, to meet the approaching Spring.

The chiefest Pageantries of this Solemnity are, A Cow of Bak'd Clay, so big, that forty Men are scarce able to carry it: The other is a Youth, whom they call The Careful and Industrious Spirit, who going bare with one Leg, and the other cover'd with a Stocking, continually strikes the Cow on the Back with a Switch: Then follow divers Countrey-men, carrying Spades, Shovels, Axes, and the like Tools, us'd in Husbandry; yet nothing of what they carry or do, but represents a peculiar Secret; as by the continual beating on the Cow, they signifie, what care the Husband-man must take in the Manuring of his Lands; by the Youths going with one Leg bare, and the other antick∣ly clad, they express what speed they must use to go to their Labor, and scarce allow time to Clothe themselves.

When the whole Train is led to the King's or Governor's Palace, the Stone Cow is bereav'd of all her Garlands and other Ornamentals: Out of her open'd Belly (like as from the Trojan Horse) little Clayie Oxen are drawn in great numbers, of which the Emperor sends one to every Governor, with ad∣monishments, that the Subjects would be careful and diligent in the Tilling of their Lands, and leave not an Acre unsow'd; and among other Ceremonies, the Emperor himself Plows, and throws Seed on the Ground that day.

The Emperor Hiaou, though when he was grown very old, betook himself three years before his Death to Husbandry, and forsaking all kind of State Af∣fairs, Plough'd and Sow'd the Ground himself, that by that means he might shew good examples to his Subjects, and stir them up in like manner to Hus∣bandry: Then enquiring out experienc'd Planters, commanded them to go through his whole Dominions, and teach all People the way of Husbandry: to which purpose, they found out all sorts of Implements or Tools useful in Tillage, and many other the like things which are requir'd in Husbandry; so that we may now cease from wondering, that formerly mean Rusticks were rais'd from the Plough to the Imperial Throne and sole Monarchy of all China, when we see that Emperors descended from the Throne to the Plough, nay, which is more, manag'd the Empire and the Plough at once.

The ancient Chinese Emperors and Kings have had several Laws concerning* 30.92 Husbandry, amongst which were these.

The nineteenth part of whatsoe're the Soil produces, falls to the Emperor.

The Governors ought in time of Famine to take notice of the Subjects Goods and Estates, and Tax them according to their Quality.

The dividing of the Ground was after this manner; every Person was to have an equal share, and one Family no more than the other: All the Fields were divided into great Squares, and these again into nine lesser, of which each Person had one to Manure; but the middlemost was either the Empe∣ror's or the King's Square, which was also by eight Overseers Till'd on the Emperor's Account.

The eight Squares were call'd Peculiar Acres, but the middlemost, The Cammon or Free Square, which when left Untill'd, no Man was permitted to Manure his own.* 30.93

The Emperor Xinnung first Invented the Plough and other Necessary things for Husbandry, and taught the Inhabitants to Sow Wheat, Rice, Barly, Maiz or Turkish Corn, and other Grains.* 30.94

The Emperor Yu, who Raign'd Anno 2207. before the Nativity, hath written many things concerning Tillage, viz. after what manner the Fields of every County, are to be Till'd and Sown; for he had gain'd excellent knowledge of the Nature of several Soils, to which he attain'd by his own Industry: And observing their Situation among Rivers, concerning which he also wrote seve∣ral Treatises, and from his Writings the Chineses observe several Rules in their Tilling, according to the several qualities of the Ground.

The Mountains are also in China Manur'd after a peculiar manner, but in no Province so much, as in that of Fokien, because there are the most Moun∣tains.

Michael Boem observes, that the Countrey of China is exceeding fruitful, not onely in the producing of Indian, (especially the Southern Provinces) but also all sorts of European Fruits, besides others, solely belonging to it self: It is a wonder to consider, how many excellent Fruits the Inhabitants in the fifteen Provinces of China enjoy; for those Provinces which want any sorts of Fruits are furnish'd by their Neighbors with those which they have not; by which means they have all the Year long fresh Fruits, even in the midst of Winter; for in some Provinces, the Fruits are ripe in November, December, Ianuary, and February; in others, in March, April, May and Iune; and in some, in Iuly, August, September and October.

The manner of Nursing up of young Plants amongst the Chineses and most Indians is three several ways: The first is by burying of the Fruit and Seed toge∣ther in the Ground; for the Chinese Gardners put whole Golden Apples and other Fruits in the Earth, and then Plant the Sprouts which shoot from the Seed at a distance from one another, by which means they grow in a short time to be great Trees, and bear excellent Fruit.

They Graff their Trees also after the same manner as we do ours; and not onely Graff Trees, but also Flowers, by which means, one Stalk, if Graffed, bears several Flowers of divers shapes and Colours the next Year.

The third way of Nursing up of Plants, is by Lopping, as they do in Vine∣yards, and by cutting off Sprigs from old Trees, and Planting them again; after which manner they increase their Manga and Goyava; sometimes onely the Leaves, as the Paparja, which in a short time run up to be high Trees.

It is to be observ'd in Trees, of what size or sort soever, the Chineses intend should speedily grow to Perfection and produce Fruit, they Plant the cut-off Branches that day when the Sun enters the fifteenth Degree of Capricorn, which never fails to shoot forth in a short time; for they have either observ'd by ex∣perience, or learnt from the Ancients from time to time, that onely this day is fit for that business, viz. that if a Sprig of what Tree soever be Planted or set in the Ground on that day, it will very suddenly become a Fruit▪bearing Tree.

Plants.

DIvers sorts of strange Herbs, Trees, Roots, Canes, and Flowers grow in the Countrey of China, some of which are proper to China onely; others again common to that, with other Countries, especially India. Most of the Provinces yield each of them many Herbs, which are of a strange Soveraign Vertue.

In the seventh County Kingyangfu, in the Province of Xensi, grows an Herb* 30.95 in manner like a Tuft of Yellow Hair, wherefore it is call'd Kinsu, that is, Silk of Gold, or Golden Thred of Silk-worms, for Kin signifies Gold, and Su, Silk: It is of a bitterish Taste, but more cooling than heating; cures suddenly all man∣ner of Scabs and Breakings-out in the Body, without leaving the least Spot behind.

In the same County is a sort of Rice, exceeding good to cleanse the Body, and especially to provoke Urine: There are also several sorts of Beans, which are an excellent Remedy against Poyson.

In the eighth County Ienganfu grows a Flower nam'd Meutang, which signi∣fies* 30.96 King of Flowers; it is highly esteem'd by the Chineses, being bigger than a common Rose, and also resembling the same, but spreads its Leaves out fur∣ther; and though it smells not so sweet, yet is pleasanter to the Eye, and with∣out prickles; the colour of it is a pale Purple streak'd with White; there are also some which are Red and Yellow. It grows on a Tree not unlike our Birch-Trees, and is Planted in all Gardens through the whole Empire of Chi∣na, though with great Care and Industry; for in warm places it must be pre∣serv'd from the heat of the Sun.

By the Garrison'd City Hocheu, grow those Trees that produce Mirobalans, and others, whose Wood is the Drug call'd Santalum.

In the County Cinanfu, of the Province of Xantung, grows a kind of Fruit call'd Linkio and Lieu.

In the third County Changtefu, in the Province of Honan, grow several sorts* 30.97 of Wormwood. In the County Hoangcheufu, in the Province of Huquang, grows White Wormwood, so call'd for its excellency by the Chinese Druggists. On the Mountains, in the County Fangyangfu, in the Province of Kiangnan, is Red Wormwood, both being us'd by the Chineses against many Distempers, especi∣ally against Heat.

The true and real China-Root grows onely in the Province of Suchuen, but* 30.98 that sort which is Wild in all parts of China, for there are two sorts; Wild and Tame, both which are by the Chineses call'd Folcin, or as some say, Lampatam.

None but that which is Wild, being of a Reddish Colour within, is brought over to us: It is not so big as the true and Tame Root, neither hath it that Pow∣er, yet is not altogether void of Efficacy.

The true Root, as they say, grows onely in the Province of Suchuen, under the Ground, in old Woods of Pine-Trees, almost after the same manner as Po∣tatoes in India; wherefore the Chineses write, that it grows from a tough Slime or Pitch of the Pine-Tree, which dropping on the Earth, fastens in the Ground, and becomes a Plant, which spreading all about over the Earth, breeds a Root under Ground, sometimes as big as a Childs Head, and in Weight and Form not unlike Coco-nuts, from which the Shell or Rind doth not differ much, though not so hard and thick, but much weaker and thinner; under the Rind

is a Kernel or white Spungy Flesh, which is highly esteem'd by the Chineses, and us'd amongst their Medicines; yet if they want this, they despise not the fore-mention'd Wild sort, though it is not altogether of so powerful an Ope∣ration.

The Wild China-Root grows also in Cochin-China, on the Coast of Malabar, and several other places in India.

The China-Root, as Michael Boem writes, is by the Chineses call'd Pe Folcin; by the Portuguese, Pao de Cina; and in Europe, China, among the Chineses it grows only in the Provinces of Iunnan, Quamsi, Quantum, Kaoli, and Leaotum: The Plant or Tree is surrounded with many Thorns, which touch not the Leaves.

The Chineses eat the Pith of the Root of this Tree in Broth, which is whol∣some and us'd against the Gout, Ulcers, Stoppings in the Stomach, Lameness, Dropsie, Pain in the Legs and Body, and many other Distempers; the heaviest of them is accounted the best, and the White esteem'd before the Red: The Powder of this Root taken with Sugar, and us'd like a Conserve, is generally with good success given against Distempers in the Breast. They say, that the use and knowledge of this Root was Anno 1535. by the Portuguese brought into India and Europe.

Another Bastard China-Root of the same Vertue, as the Wild Root, grows in Brasile, especially in the Province of Parayba, where the Inhabitants call it Ivaspecanga.

In the eighth County Iungpingfu, in the Province of Peking; and in that of* 30.99 Xansi near the City Leao, grows the most excellent and famous Root in all Chi∣na, by the Chineses call'd Ginseng, and by the Iapanners, Nisi. The Chinese name Ginseng is taken from the shape, because it represents a Man (in the Chinese Tongue call'd Gin) striding with his Legs; it is much smaller than our Man∣dragora, or Mandrake; yet we need not doubt but it is a sort of it, because it is exactly like it, and hath the same Operation. The dry'd Root is of a yellow Colour, hath very few or scarce any Strings, by which it draws Nourishment; is streak'd round about with blackish Vains, as if drawn with Ink; yields when chaw'd an unpleasant sweetness, being mix'd with bitterness; a quar∣ter of an Ounce of this Root taken in Syrup, exceedingly revives the Spirits, and if taken in a greater quantity, strengthens those that are Sick and Weak, and pleasantly warms the whole Body.

Those that are of a hot and strong Constitution indanger their Lives by using the same, because of its too much increasing and heighthning the Spirits; but on the contrary, it recovers those that by long Sicknesses or other Causes are consum'd and grown weak. It oftentimes restores those that lie a dying, and with the help of some other Physick restores them to their Health again. Many other Vertues the Chineses ascribe to this Root, and give three pound of Gold for one pound of it. The same Root is sometimes to be had in Holland; but because of its excessive dearness is little us'd.

The Provinces of Xensi and Suchuen, according to Martinius, bring forth ex∣cellent Medicines, especially the Root Rhubarb, in the Chinese Tongue call'd Taihoang. This Root (says he) grows not wild, as some affirm, but on the con∣trary requires great care and pains in the Planting of it: it is of a yellow Co∣lour streak'e with Flames, not hollow, but firm and hard, and in som places having Knobs and Swellings: The Leaves are somewhat like our Cabbage Leaves, but much bigger. The Chineses make a Hole through the Root, and hang them out to dry in the Shade, for being dry'd in the Sun they lose their Vertue.

Most of the Rhubarb which is brought into Europe, comes for the most part out of the Provinces of Xensi and Suchuen; being brought from China and Persia by Sea to Batavia, and from thence to Holland; or else out of China by Land to Kaskar, Astrakan and Russia, or through Thebet and Persia by Venice to Italy; for those of Tebet and Mogor frequent the Province of Suchuen, and from thence bring the Rhubarb hither. Thus far Martinius.

Matthiolus gives us another Description of Rhubarb in his Comment upon Di•…•…s∣corides, which agrees with that of Michael Boem, in his Chinese Flora, and with Baptista Ramusio, formerly Secretary to the State of Venice, in his Preface before the Voyage of Marcus Paulus Venetus, which is to this effect▪

Though (say they) Rhubarb grows in all parts of China, yet it grows in greater abundance in the Provinces of Suciven, (perhaps Suchuen) Xensi, and in the Jurisdiction of the City Socieu near the Great Wall, than in any other place. The Earth in which it grows is red and Clayie, occasion'd by its being conti∣nually moistned with Springs and Rain: The Leaves, according to the Plant, are two Handfuls long, narrow below, broad at the end, and the edges there∣of cover'd with a hairy Wool: When they are come to their f•…•…ll growth and maturity, they immediately grow yellow and lank: The Stalk shoots a Hands∣breadth with the Leaves above the Earth; from the middle of the Leaf runs a thin Stalk, which bears Flowers not unlike a great Pink; likewise towards the top, which is of a sharp and strong smell: The Root or Stalk which is in the Ground, is of a dark Copper colour, one, two, and sometimes three Hand∣fuls long, and as thick as a Man's Arm; from which shoot forth other lesser Roots, which are cut off from the same. The Root Rhubarb, when cut asun∣der, shews a dark yellow Flesh streak'd with red Veins, out of which drops a red slimy Juice. Moreover, if any one immediately hangs these moist pieces up to dry, then, as experience hath taught, the moisture instantly vanishes, and the Root growing very light, loses all its Vertue; therefore those who are ex∣perienc'd herein, first lay the pieces of green Rhubarb on Tables, and turn them twice or thrice in a day, that so the Sap or Juice may soak and dry by degrees into the pieces, and remain in them; four days after, when the moisture is dry'd up, they put the pieces on Strings, and hang them from the Sun in the Shadow to dry by the Wind.

The best time to dig up the Rhubarb is in the Winter before the Trees begin* 30.100 to Bud, because at that time (about the beginning of April) the Juice and Vertue unites and gathers together. But if the Root of Rhubarb be digg'd up in Summer, or at that time when it sends forth green Leaves, which is a sign of its not being ripe, then it never comes to the perfection of the Rhubarb, which is digg'd up in the Winter.

One Wagon full of Rhubarb Roots which is full of moisture, costs one Scudo and a half: The Juice when dry'd up abates so much of the weight, that of seven Pound of green, there scarce remains one Pound when dress'd. The Chi∣neses call it Tayhuan, that is, High Yellow.

This Plant is discours'd of at large by the fore mention'd Authors, and par∣ticularly Michael Boem makes a curious Disquisition, whether the Rhaponticum of Alpinus be the same with that which is commonly brought out of Muscovy, and takes much pains to prove that that which grows in China is much better than that which is brought by Russia into Europe.

In the County Chungkingfu, belonging to the Province of Suchuen, grows in* 30.101 great plenty a Fruit by the Chineses call'd Lichi, and by the Portuguese of Makao,

[illustration]

[illustration]

Lichias: but in greater abundance in the Southern parts of the Province of Fokien; yet the best sort in the County Hinghoafu: It grows on very large and high Trees, whose Leaves resemble those of a Laurel-Tree: On the tops of the Boughs hang Clusters of Fruit like Grapes, not altogether so thick, but on longer Stalks: It bears the shape of a Deers Heart, and is as big as a Coco-Nut, having a thin shrubby and knotty Shell, like that of a Pine-Apple, which may easily be pull'd off with the Fingers: within is a white juicy Kernel of a pleasant taste, and smelling like a Rose: The ripe Fruits are of a Purple colour, so that the Trees shew as if hung round about with Purple Hearts, a Sight delightful to behold: within the Flesh is a Stone, which the smaller it is, the better the Fruit is esteem'd of.

This Fruit may justly be call'd The King of Fruits, since in so ample a mea∣sure it both delights the Eye and pleases the Palate, which seems never satisfi'd therewith: The Kernel of it melts in the Mouth like Sugar.

Another Fruit nam'd Lungyen, that is, Dragons-Eye, grows in China; it is not* 30.102 much unlike the former, though smaller and rounder like our Cherries; but the Shell of the Fruit Lichi is somewhat harder and thicker. Both these Fruits are dry'd and sent from this Province through the whole Empire as a Dainty: nevertheless the dry'd are not comparable to the green, because all the Juice is dry'd out of them. They also press a Juice out of the Fruit Lichi, which the Chineses call Wine, which is very sweet, but very scarce to be had. The ripe Fruit Lichi is generally brought fresh out of the County Chinkingfu.

A particular Description of both these Fruits may be seen in the foremen∣tion'd* 30.103 Author Michael Boem, in his Book call'd Flores sinarum regionis.

In the same County Focheufu in the Province of Fokien, grows a Fruit call'd* 30.104 Muigiuli, that is to say, Fair Womans Plumb. These Plumbs are of an Oval Figure, bigger and much better than Damask Prunes.

In the County Kingcheufu, belonging to the Province of Huquang, grows an* 30.105 Herb which the Chineses call Herb of a thousand years; nay, affirm that it never fades, but is as it were immortal.

To drink the Water wherein the formention'd Herb hath lay'n to soak, makes white Hair black, and is said to be exceeding good to prolong Life, and restore Youth to the Aged.

In the County Changtefu, in the Province of Huquang, grow all sorts of Golden Apples; amongst which are some that by the Chineses are call'd Winter Apples, for when all the others fall off, these begin to grow ripe, and are of a sweet taste.

In the Province of Kiangsi and other places, grows (for the most part in Lakes and standing Waters) a Plant with a Flower, by the Chineses call'd Lien, and by the Portuguese, Fula de Golfon.

The Flower Lien shoots up two or three Yards above the Water on hard and strong Stalks, and is of several Colours, as Purple, White, Parti-colour'd, Red, &c. onely Yellow is a Colour peculiar to those that grow in Iuncheufu, a County of the Province of Huquang.

This Flower exceeds our Lilies in bigness, and much more in beauty, but is in scent rather worse than better. We should call this Flower The great Lilie, because it differs not much in fashion, especially when it opens its Leaves.

To this Plont belongs also a sort of Fruit like a Ninepin, which is above a Span lang, and a Hand thick. The top or point of this Fruit is fast to the Stalk, on which the Flower hung before, the Cod stands upright, and hath se∣veral

Partitions fill'd with Fruits bigger than Hazle-Nuts, or French Beans: each Fruit is without cover'd with a green Rind, and within fill'd up with a white Kernel, or Pith of a delightful taste, whether fresh or dry'd.

This Fruit is by the Chinese Physicians highly esteem'd, and accounted an excellent Food; wherefore they are generally given to sick Persons that are upon their recovery.

The Leaves of this Plant are very big, sometimes two Handfuls broad, and for the most part round: They lie and drive on the Water like those of our Water-Lilies, and joyn by long Stalks to the Root. The Root, which is thicker than a Mans Arm, sends forth a very fine Stalk two or three Ells long, di∣stinguish'd with Joynts like a Cane: The outward Shell is firm and whole, but the Flesh is parted, and in several divisions: The dry'd Leaves are by Grocers and other Tradesmen us'd in stead of Paper to wrap or wind their Wares in. The Root also is very excellent, and esteem'd a Dainty of great value in the Summer, when it is taken to cool and expel Heat; so that nothing belongs to this Plant but what is useful.

In China are whole Lakes (a pleasant thing to behold) overgrown with Flowers, not wild, but produc'd by Art, by throwing once a year the Seed into the Water. Moreover, divers Persons of Quality keep great Earthen Vessels fill'd with Slime and Water in their Gardens, wherein they Sowe the foremention'd Flowers.

In the Lake Hung, on the East side of the City Hoaigan in the Province of Kiangnan, grows a kind of high Reed, which by the Inhabitants of the whole County are burnt in stead of Wood, very few Trees growing in that Coun∣trey.

In all parts of the County Kiahingfu in the Province of Chekiang, in standing* 30.106 Water, grows a Fruit call'd Peci, which is no bigger than a Chesnut, and hath a Kernel cover'd with a dark-colour'd Skin, white within, full of Juice, and of a pleasing taste, harder than an ordinary Apple, and somewhat sowerer.

This Fruit is said to be of such a Nature, that the Juice of it softens Cop∣per to that degree, that it may be chew'd in the Mouth.

In the County Kinhoafu in the Province of Chekiang, grows a small Tree with* 30.107 one Flower, which the Portuguese in India call Mogorin; It is very white like a Iessamin Flower, yet fuller of Leaves, and of a sweeter smell, insomuch that a few of them put in any Room perfumes the whole House; wherefore it is not undeservedly held in great esteem amongst the Chineses, and the Tree thereof preserv'd with great care in the Winter in Earthen Pots.

In the same County grows also a Tree call'd Kieuyen, which produces a* 30.108 kind of fat substance like Tallow, of which pure white Candles are made, and are not subject to grease the Fingers though often handled, like those which are of Tallow. The Tree hath pretty big Leaves, somewhat like those of our Pear-Tree, with white Blossoms like our Cherry-Trees: after the Blossom follows a round Cod as big as a Cherry, cover'd with a blackish thin Skin, which incloses a white Pith appearing through the Skin, which cracks when the Cod is grown ripe. The Cods thus ripe, are pull'd off and boyl'd in Wa∣ter; by which means the Flesh melting, becomes perfect Tallow when grown cold again; then the remaining Kernel being press'd produces store of Oyl, which they use not in Sallets, but burn in Lamps: In the Winter the Leaves are quite red like Copper, which is pleasant to behold, for they appear at a distance like Red-woods: At last the Leaves falling off afford excellent

Feeding (by reason of their fatness) for Sheep and other Cattel, which so Fed grow exceeding fat.

On the Mountain Loseu, by the City Polo in the Province of Quantung, grows a very long and thick Cane, the Body thereof being ten Handfulls in cir∣cumference.

On the Mountain Chang, by the City Lochang in the same Province, grows a black Cane, of which the Chineses make their Pipes, and many other things, which seem as if made of Ebony Wood.

On the Shore of the River Kinxe, near the City Kinhao, grows abundance of thick Canes, which the Inhabitants beating into thin Shreds, Weave and make Clothes of them.

The Shore of the River Tao, in the County Xaocheufu in the Province of Quantung, is all Planted with Peach-Trees, from whence it hath its Denomi∣nation, for Tao signifies A Peach.

In the County Chaokingfu in the same Province, grow divers sorts of sweet Wood, and amongst others Rose-Wood, by the Portuguese call'd Pao de Rosa; of which they make Cabinets, Stools, Tables, and the like: It is exceeding good Wood, of a dark Red, with several Veins, and looks naturally as if Painted: It grows also in the County Iunnanfu in the Province of Iunnan.

In most parts of the Province of Quantung, and on the Island Aynan, grows a* 30.109 kind of Plant, by the Chineses call'd Teng, and by the Portuguese, Rota, which seems like a Rope naturally twisted together; for it runs along the Ground and over the Mountains like a Rope; it is full of Prickles, and hath long green Leaves, and though scarce a Finger thick, extends it self a whole Furlong in length, and in such abundance over the Mountains, that it makes the Way, by its twining and twisting together, unpassable: It is an exceeding tough Plant, and cannot be broke; wherefore the Chineses make Cables and Tackling for their Ships of it; and slitting it into thin Twigs, make Baskets, Hurdles, and the like, of them, but most of all exceeding fine Mats, on which the Chineses, from the meanest Person to the Emperor himself, sleep or repose themselves, they being very cool in the Summer, and by the Chineses long Custom of sleeping in that manner, are judg'd very easie, notwithstanding they are spread on the bare Floor. Of the same Plant they make Quilts and Bolsters for their Beds, which they fill with divers sorts of Perfumes. The whole Isle of Ainan is overgrown with it, especially with the white, which is the best.

In most parts of China grows a Flower call'd Quei, but no where in such* 30.110 abundance as in the Province of Quangsi, especially in the County Quelingfu, from whence the chief City Quelin hath its Denomination, for Quelin signifies Flowry Green. This Flower grows upon a high Tree, whose Leaves are not un∣like those of the Laurel or Cinamon-Tree: It being very small, and of a yellow Colour, smells very odoriferously: When display'd, it hangs a consi∣derable time on the Tree without withering; when it falls off, the Tree within a Moneth after Buds again, and in Harvest smells so strong and sweet, that it may be scented at a very considerable distance.

The Chineses prepare many Dainties of this Flower, both to please the Pa∣late, and to delight the Smell. This also is the same Flower which steep'd in the Juice of Lemmon the Turks use to colour their Hair with: The Trees thereof suffer no other to grow near them, nor grow in places where others have grown.

In the County Lieucheufu in the Province of Quangsi, on the Shore of the* 30.111

River Lieu, grow many Willow Trees. There are likewise several excellent Herbs, good against many Sicknesses; amongst which the Herb Pusu, that is, Immortal, so call'd by the Chineses, because they always preserve it green in their Houses.

In the County Gucheufu in the Province of Quangsi, grows a Tree nam'd* 30.112 Quanglang, which in stead of Pith or Marrow, incloses a kind of thin Matter like Honey, in stead of which it is often us'd, being no less pleasing to the Palate.

In the Territory Cincheufu, in the Province of Quangsi, grows an Herb call'd Yu; of which the Inhabitants make their Clothes, which are richer than Silk, and amongst them of greater value. There also grows a Tree, whose Wood is like Iron, it being much harder than our Box-wood. The same County likewise produces excellent Cinamon, in the Chinese Tongue call'd Kueypi, which onely differs from the Ceylon Cinamon in this, that it is more biting on the Tongue, and of a better scent.

The Chineses in ancient times us'd to carry Cinamon from the Island Ceylon, (which was, according to Boem, so call'd by the Chineses from the many Ships which suffer'd Shipwrack on the same; or else Ceylon, or rather Sinland, signi∣fies, according to Martinius, People of China, or Chineses) by Sea to Ormuz, from whence it was carry'd by Land to Aleppo in Syria, and Greece. The ignorant sort of People suppos'd that it came out of the Moors Countrey and Egypt, whenas it never grew in that Countrey, though sometimes a Fleet of four thousand Ships came Laden with Gold, Silk, Precious Stones, Musk, Porcelane, Copper, Allom, Nutmegs, Cloves, and chiefly Cinamon, into the Bay of Persia. The Merchants, as the same Boem tells us, call'd Cinamon (otherwise by the Chineses nam'd The Bark of the sweet Tree) Cina and Momum, which signifies Sweet and well scented Chinese Wood.

In the County Lipingfu in the Province of Queicheu, grows an Herb like* 30.113 Hemp, which the Chineses call Ko, and make their Summer Garments thereof, which are an excellent Wear against the excessive heat of the Sun: It also grows in the County Nankangfu, in the Province of Kiangsi.

In the Southern Provinces of Iunnan, Quangsi, Quantung, Fokien, and on the* 30.114 Isle Ainan, grows in great abundance a Tree by the Chineses call'd Fanyaycocu; by the Eastern Indians, Papayo; by the West-Indian Inhabitants, Pinoyuacu; and by the Portuguese Mamoua: It produces a Fruit which springs out of the top of the* 30.115 Body of the Tree, looking red within, and having in stead of Pith a thin Juice, that may be eaten with a Spoon. They are accounted to be very cool∣ing, and to abate lascivious Desires, and cause Barrenness.

This Tree (a strange thing!) hath no Branches, but onely Leaves, which grow on the top thereof; from amongst which Leaves sprout out white Flow∣ers, which afterwards become Fruit. The Fruit hath no set-time of the Year to ripen in, but successively ripe Fruits are to be found on the Trees every Moneth in the Year. The Chineses call it Fanyaycocu, that is, Fruit of the Fanyay; for Kocu signifies Fruit; and the Portuguese, Maman, because it hangs on the Tree like a Teat. The Fruit, Leaves, and whole Tree, are pleasant and de∣lightful to the Eye. The Tree springs first from the Seed of its Fruit, and af∣terwards new Trees from the Strings which shoot out of the Root: The Leaves and part of the Body of the Tree being put into the Ground, grow very speedily and in a short time to a high Tree.

Anno 1626. the Papayo-Tree being Sow'n, grew in Naples: It had a whitish

Root full of Strings, a whitish Stem or Body, eighteen Inches long and a Fin∣ger thick, of the same colour with the Root, spongy and round, not unlike the Body of the Wonder-Tree, and notch'd after the same manner under the Leaves, which when green hang by a long Stalk round about the Body of the Tree, sloaping from the middle upwards, all of them four or five Inches broad, divi∣ded like the Fig-Leaves into five parts, but notch'd much deeper, smooth, and of a pleasant Green; all of them fell off in the Winter, and the Body with the Root also wither'd away by degrees: But we may doubt whether this Tree was the right Papayo, because, according to Michael Boem, the Fanyacu, or Papayo, hath its Leaves onely on the top, and not as this in Naples, from the middle upwards.

Peter de Valla, by Letters to Fabius Columna, gives quite another Description of the Papayo, which (saith he) is a Plant like our Fig-Tree, but much pleasanter; the Fruit like our ordinary Melons, oval, smooth, and with a green Rind; the Flesh within of an Orange colour, and tasting like a sweet Orange, but more Spicy and pleasanter; the fresh Seed blackish, when dry'd turns to a Chesnut colour, and is about the thickness of Coriander Seeds, but longer; the Flesh thereof being cut through in the middle looks whitish, is tough, tastes sweet, and is like old Musk▪melons Seed; the Stalk of the Fruit, though green, yields like those of Figs: The Tree is full of Branches like the Fig-Tree.

The experienc'd and Learned Physician, William Piso, makes mention of two* 30.116 sorts of Papayo growing in the West-Indies, where it is call'd Pinoguacu, a Male and Female; of both which he hath a particular Description, which may be seen at large in his Natural History.

To conclude, most agree in this, that the Papayo-Tree grows not of it self, but is Planted: What Countrey it properly belongs to is not yet certainly known, but it is by most believ'd to be a Stranger to India, and brought thither from a foreign Countrey.

In no Place, except China, grows that Tree and excellent Fruit, in the Chinese* 30.117 Tongue call'd Supim; it is of a Golden colour, bigger than an ordinary Apple, and hath within its Shell or Rind, a soft and red Pulp, within which are se∣veral Stones: The dry Fruit is very like an European Fig, and keeps good ma∣ny years: The Chinese Physicians use it often in their Compounds. In the Province of Quantung it ripens in Ianuary, February, and March; but in Xensi, Honan, and other Northern Provinces, in Iune, Iuly, and August.

The Tree laden with this Fruit affords a pleasant Prospect, and is constantly watch'd against the Birds.

There also grows a Tree in the Province of Quantung, and in the Island Ainan, with Leaves of half the size of a Man of ordinary Stature: The Root thereof grows half in the Ground, and the other half out, and bears red Flowers, and a Fruit like our Figs. The ripe Fruits are also red, and the Flesh within tastes also like our Figs, and are ripe in Iuly and August.

The Fruit by the Chineses call'd Cienko, is by the Indians and Portuguese call'd* 30.118 Goyaun: It seems to those that are not us'd thereto, to have no good savor, but indeed smells very Spicy, and is desir'd afterwards by those that at first dis∣relish'd it, because it warms, and hath a soveraign healing power, and is ex∣ceeding good to stop a Loosness, and fortifie the Stomach: Within it are ma∣ny little round Stones, from which the Trees grow, though quickerby Setting a Bough thereof in the Ground: The Boughs bear great store of Fruit and

sweet-smelling Leaves, which rubb'd to pieces smell very strong, and are ac∣counted excellent Medicines against Feavers: The Fruit is also in the Portu∣guese Tongue call'd Pera, that is, Pear, because it is exactly like a Pear.

In India this Fruit ripens in November and December, and for the most part continues in all the other Moneths; but in the Province of Quantung, in Iune and Iuly.

On the Island Hiamxan, lying near China, in Makau, and in Malacca, grows a* 30.119 Tree and Fruit nam'd Giambo, which is of two or three sorts; for in India are red, white, and yellow, which smell like Roses: the first hath a white, and the second a pale yellow Flower: The Body and Boughs are Ash-colour'd, the Leaves smooth, a Hand-breadth long, and three Fingers broad: The Fruit is as big as a Pear, with a thin sweetish spongy Flesh; it is pleasant to the Eye, either quite red or white, or partly red and partly white: On one Bough grow Flowers, green and ripe Fruit together. They are very cooling, and the onely thing in great Feavers to quench Thirst.

The Indians make a Conserve of this Fruit, exceeding good against Agues and other Distempers arising from the Gaul. In stead of Seed it incloses a round Kernel; but the yellow sort hath two Kernels, or rather one divided into two parts: the Flesh of the yellow is very sweet and luscious: the red ripens in India in October and November, but the yellow in some places in March, and in other places in Iuly.

The Pipa is a Fruit of a yellowish Green when it is ripe, sweet of taste like* 30.120 our Plumbs, and cover'd with the like sort of Skin, within it lies a hard oval Stone; it is generally gather'd ripe in February and March: The Tree, by rea∣son of its fine Leaves and Flowers, is very pleasant to behold.

The Fruit Yata hath a green, knotty, and prickly Shell, like a Pine-Apple;* 30.121 within which is a waterish Pulp as white as Snow, hiding in little Reposito∣ries hard and black Stones: The bigger this Fruit is, the better it is esteem'd. The Tree grows chiefly in Malacca, from whence it was transplanted into China, where it grows in some plenty: In some places the Fruit is ripe in October and November, and in others in February and March.

The Fruit Manko, by the Chineses and the Indians call'd Manga, and by the* 30.122 Turks, Ambo, grows most plentifully in the Southern Provinces of China: In India are several sorts, the biggest whereof weigh two, and sometimes three Pound, especially if they grow on a Bough Prun'd to a Cedar-Tree, of whose Fruit they borrow the Coat and rough Shell.

Their Pruning on other Trees is much like ours in Europe, but not in the Mango-Tree, a Bough of which being cut off, is ty'd to the Bough of another Tree, and daub'd all about with Clay, by which means the Boughs in time growing together bear Fruit. The ripe Fruits sometimes all upon one Tree* 30.123 are of several Colours, some green, others yellow, and some red; or as others* 30.124 write, greenish yellow, and reddish: It hath a bitter Kernel within a hard and woolly Shell, as big as an Almond: there are also some without Stones. The Flesh of those that are ripe is of a kind of Purple colour, and exceeds all other in lusciousness: Some account it the best Fruit in the World: They are ripe in April and May, and continue till November.

The Tree, according to Garcias, on which this Fruit grows, is like a Pear-Tree, high and full of Boughs; the Leaves are very thin, ten Inches long and three broad, with a thick sinew in the middle.

Garcias had a Tree which bore Fruit twice in a year, viz. in May and August;

[illustration]

[illustration]

the Fruit thereof is cool and moist: Of the green Fruits they make a Con∣serve: they are also Pickled and boyl'd in Rice and Water. The Netherlan∣ders at their Return from India use them in stead of Pickled Cucumbers or Girkins: The Indians account them hot and very Feaverish, but they are ra∣ther moist and cooling. The Stones thereof calcin'd into a Powder, kill the Worms in the Belly, and are a present Remedy against a Loosness. The fresh Kernel is suppos'd to destroy the Worms because of its bitterness.

Acosta tells us, That the Fruit being slic'd and laid to soke in Wine is counted for a dainty Banquet. It is also laid in Sugar, thereby to preserve it the longer; and sometimes open'd with a Knife is fill'd with Ginger, Garlick, and Mustard-seed, and laid to steep in Salt, Oyl, and Vinegar, or else is eaten with Rice, or Pickled like Olives: It grows in many places in India, as in Ma∣labar, Goa, Surrat, Balagate, Bengale, Pegu, and others; but the best sort is judg'd to grow in Ormus, the second in Surrat, and the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 in Balagate.

A Fruit nam'd Mangan, which grows on the Isle Iava, is by the Inhabitants accounted above all Cordials in the World, whether Lapis Bezoar, or any other: It is as big as a Coco▪Nut, and joyns close together till grown ripe, for then it cracks and bursts asunder; within lies the Seed wrapp'd up in Wooll, which if not taken off in time, is blown away by the Wind. This Fruit is so dear, that it can scarce be purchas'd with Money. Moreover, the parts split from each other stick so fast at the bottom to the Stalk, that the strongest Man cannot pull them from it.

In many places in China grows also Cotton, but in greatest abundance in the Province of Nanking, especially near the City Xangchai, where there are said to dwell two hundred Cotton-Weavers, it being in that place and two neighbor∣ing Villages, the onely thing whereby the Inhabitants maintain themselves. The Seed, according to their Relation, was brought out of other Countreys into China about five hundred years ago. The Herb or Plant on which the Cotton grows in China, hath a wooddy Stalk of a Foot and a half long, or two Foot high, and being cover'd with a darkish red Bark or Rind, divides it self into several short Branches: The Leaves like those of a Vine are divided into three parts, and hang on rough Stalks of two or three Inches long: The Blos∣som or Flower is like those of Mallows, and ends in Saffron, or (as others say) blue and Purple Stalks; after the Flower follows round Fruit as big as a small Apple, which when grown ripe cracks in two or three places, and shews the white Cotton which is in it; under it is an Oval and white-colour'd Seed, which tastes like an Almond or Pine-Apple.

Another Plant also which produces Cotton, but grows like a Tree, and hath smoother Leaves, grows in Egypt and Arabia; where by the Egyptians it is call'd Gotnel Segia,, and shoots up to the heighth of ten Cubits; the Leaves hang on Violet-colour'd Stalks, and are divided into five parts; when grown to matu∣rity, the Fruit is almost of the same fashion, though bigger, with brown Seed. Of these Cotton-Trees they make the fine Clothes call'd Sessa in Arabia.

The County Chucheufu is full of ancient Pine-Tree Woods, of which the Chi∣neses build their Houses and Ships.

It is said, that by the Singian, that is, Earth of Pine-Trees, are such exceeding large Trees, that eighty Men cannot grasp one of them; and some of so vast a compass, that they can inclose thirty Men in their hollow Trunks.

In the same County in the Province of Chekiang, in the River Luyeu, by the City Kingning, grow great Woods of Canes, which the Chineses by a general

Name call'd Cho; (for there are several sorts) the Indians, Mambu; the Portu∣guese, Bambu; and the Hollanders, Bamba's: some smaller, others bigger, but all of them as hard as Iron, and oftentimes two or three Span thick, and to∣wards the bottom about the bigness of a Man's Thigh; nay, there are some of such a thickness, that the Indians make Boats of them, by onely splitting them in the middle, leaving on each side onely two of the undermost Joynts, there sitting on each end a naked Indian with a Paddle in each hand, with which they Row these Boats with great swiftness against the Stream. Of the thickest parts of these Canes they make Vessels to put Water or Merchandise into, the Wood thereof being about three Inches thick: The least of them are half a Rod high, and the biggest much higher; wherefore they are not unjustly by some call'd Trees, and particularly by Garcias compar'd to the Poplar; some are green, others quite black, and most of them Massive; the Portuguese in India call them Bambu Macho, that is, Man's Cane; though the last sort grows not in China but in India: They grow in Rocky places, shooting upright, though sometimes by Art made crooked, the better to be us'd for the making of Pala∣kins: They consist from top to bottom of Knots or Joynts, about a Hand∣breadth from each other; out of which shoot some straight Branches.

Piso tells of two sorts of Bambu or Mambu that grows in India, the one small, though fuller within, the other bigger, and less fill'd, which in heighth and firmness exceeds all other Canes. A more exact Description whereof, toge∣ther* 30.125 with their use, both in Physick and in the making of divers Utensils, may be found in the abovemention'd Author, in his Mantissa Aromatica, and also in Martinius.

In the Gallery of the high School at Leyden are kept two of the foremen∣tion'd* 30.126 Canes, broke off at both ends, which were brought Anno 1601. out of the East-Indies; the smallest is about one and twenty Foot long, distinguish'd by twenty nine Joynts at the bottom, seventeen Inches in circumference, and fourteen on the top; the biggest is a Foot and a half longer, and three Inches thicker: how big the whole Canes were, may be guess'd by these pieces.

In many places of China grow also Sugar-Canes, especially in the County* 30.127 Tungchuenfu in the Province of Suchuen, out of which they press great store of good Sugar. But those Canes were in a manner useless amongst the Chineses, till of late years that they were taught this Art of making Sugar, as it is said, by an Indian Priest upon this occasion: This Priest's Ass on which he us'd to Ride, running into a Cane-Field, was detain'd by the Owner thereof for satis∣faction for the damage which he had done; whereupon the Priest, that he might make satisfaction without the forfeiture of his Ass, taught him the Art of boyling Sugar out of the Canes.

In the Province of Quantung, and many other places in China, grows a Rose* 30.128 which changes its colour twice a day, first it is of a yellowish colour, then Purple, and anon quite white: It hath no smell, and grows on a little Tree. Concerning which change of colour Kircher makes a curious Enquiry, and takes upon him to give the reason thereof in his China Illustrata.

Ioannes Baptista Ferrarius largely describes a sort of Chinese Rose, by the Inha∣bitants* 30.129 call'd Fuyo, by others nam'd The Indian and Japan Melleuwe, which by the same Ferrarius was brought out of the West-Indies to Rome; where being Sow'd it grew up in a short time: It is of a Milky colour, but afterwards changes to white and red, and at last turning to a Purple, fades and withers: In India it is in one day of three several colours (and flourishes onely one

day) viz. in the Morning it is White, at Noon, Red, and Purple at Night.

The Province of Quantung produces a Fruit, by the Chineses call'd Yencu; by* 30.130 the Portuguese, Iambos, (and the Tree Iambeiro;) by the Malabars, and those of the Canaries, Iambali; by the Indians, Tufa; by the Persians and Arabians, Tufat; by the Turks, Almat; and by the Hollanders, Pampelmoes; the Tree whereon it grows is prickly like the Lemon Tree, but somewhat bigger; the Flower or Blossom being also like that of the Lemon, is white and smells very oderi∣ferously, and out of which they Distil sweet Water: The Fruit much exceeds the greatest Lemons in bigness, for it is oftentimes as big as a Mans Head: The Shell is in Colour like that of the Golden Apple; the Pulp, red and sweet, mixt with a little tartness, and tasting like a Grape which is not quite ripe; so that often times a Liquor is Press'd out of them to drink, in the manner of Cherry-Wine, Perry, or Syder; it remains good a whole Year.

Garcias tell us, that this Fruit is in high esteem amongst the Indians, and that it was brought first thither a few years since from Malaka, where it grows in great abundance; and gives a farther Description much to the same purpose with what hath been already deliver'd.

There are two sorts of these Trees, very like one another; (yet their Fruits differ a little) and resemble not only in fashion and shape, but also in bigness our European Apple-Trees.

The Flowers and Fruits of Iambos moisten and cool, smell very sweet, and are therefore by the Indians accounted amongst the greatest Dainties; they ge∣nerally use them in Physick, for being Preserv'd in Sugar, they are exceeding good against hot Distempers, because by their coolness and moistness, they quench Thirst in Feavers, and revive the Spirits.

In the County Chivencheufu and Changcheufu, in the Province of Fokien, grow* 30.131 abundance of Golden-Apples, which in weight and bigness differ little from the European, but surpass them in Scent and Deliciousness; neither doth the Tree differ much from the European, but the Fruit differs from that which grows in other parts of China, and both Tastes and Smells exactly like a Muskadel-Grape, so that it yields not to any kind of Fruit that Europe affords: the Golden and thick Rind is easily Pill'd off; in like manner, the Meat is distinguish'd by a thin Skin, which is easily broken.

The Inhabitants Preserve the Fruits (after having Press'd the same between two Boards) in Sugar, and so keeping them a whole Year, both furnish their Neighbors, and send of them into foraign Countries.

In most parts of China, in all standing-Waters, they Sow a Seed, which with* 30.132 small Leaves covers all the Water: The Fruit thereof call'd Linkio, grows in great abundance under the Water, and is in fashion like a three-sided Spire: The Rind which is green and thick, and red at the corners, turns black when dry'd: The Kernel thereof is very White, and tastes like a Chest-nut, but is twice or thrice as big.

The Lake Malo lying in the fifth County Xuntefu in the Province of Peking, is much noted for the fore-mention'd Fruit.

In the Southern Provinces of China, and especially in the Province of Quei∣cheu,* 30.133 by the little City Pugan, grows a Fruit, by the Chineses call'd Pacayao; by the Malabars and Malaers, Palan; by the Iavans, Piesang or Pysang; by the Brasilians in the West-Indies, Bananas; by the Arabians in Egypt, Mauz; by some in Europe, Indian-Figs, and Adams-Apples, from the Opinion of a Franciscan Monk, who holds this Fruit to be the same with that which Adam eat in Paradise, and

with the Leaves whereof being very large, he cover'd his Nakedness.

The Tree, or rather Sprout, is according to Acosta, a fine Plant, and grows eighteen or twenty handfuls high, and being as big about as a Mans Thigh, consists of many Barks, which lie close one upon another; it grows to the heighth of a Granate-Tree without Branches, for it spreads its Leaves like Canes. Boem writes, that the body thereof is thick, round, and green, not firm nor massie, but swell'd with a Watery moysture; it seems to consist of abundance of roul'd-up Leaves, which are nine handfuls long, and two and a half broad; or according to Alpinus, three or four Yards long, and about two* 30.134 broad, insomuch, that one Leaf may cover a Man all over, nay, wind round about him. The young Leaves extend in length and heighth like Indian Canes, being first roul'd up together, but when grown old, begin to open; through the middle long-ways, runs a pretty thick and long Vein, yet nevertheless, they are subject to crack and rent at the edges, if ruffl'd by the Wind; and on each side many cross Veins, which are of a sad Colour underneath, but up∣wards of a pale Green; from the top of the Tree grows a Stalk with ruddy Colour'd Flowers, like a Pine-Apple, each of them is bigger than a Tulip or Lilly, but round, or rather Oval; afterwards it produces a Branch, divided into many Joynts, on each of which hang ten or fourteen Figs, so that this Bough is sometimes loaden with a hundred, or two hundred Figs: Or as Boem saith, from the middle of the Leaf shoots one single Branch with Flowers, which also grow to be Figs, to the number sometimes of above a thousand on one Bough, which one man is scarce able to carry; some of the Figs are as small as a Damsin, others as big as a great Pear, according to the Boughs on which they grow. The Fruit it self is very sweet, hath a Yellow Shell, with a soft, sweet, and well-scented Pulp, which tastes like Preserv'd Rasberries; be∣ing boyl'd either in Honey or Sugar, and afterwards dry'd, it is counted good against Phlegmatick Humors. The Fruit is all the Year long to be had in the Southern Provinces of China, but in the Northern, it bears onely great Leaves, and yields no Fruit; though it requires six Moneths to ripen, yet ripe Figs may be had every Moneth, since this Tree observes no set-time, but Buds, Flowers, and is Ripe in several places all at one time. If one Bough be cut off from the* 30.135 Tree, or one Fig pluck'd from a Bough, the Tree will never produce either Bough or Fruit more, but withering, is cut off, and given in India for Food to the Elephants.

This Plant, as some say, grew first from a Sugar-Cane, Graffed on the Root of another Plant, call'd Colokasia, very common in Egypt; and indeed you may perceive the nature of both in the same, for the Leaves are as long as those of Sugar-Canes, and as broad as those of Colokasia; it is always Green, and never bare of Leaves.

The common Opinion is, that from the Mouth of the Flower, open'd at* 30.136 the right time, drops a kind of Spittle, which is suppos'd to be its Seed, since young Sprouts grow out of the Root or Foot of the Tree, before ever the Flow∣er opens.

The Chineses in the Province of Quangsi, in the County Pinglofu, make Clothes of the Red Muisu Leaves.

In divers places in China, and especially on the Isle Ainan, grows a Fruit-Tree, by the Chineses call'd Polomie; by the Portuguese, from the Indians, Giaka and Ia∣ka; by those of Surat, Pana's; by those of the Canaries, Panasu; by the Arabi∣ans, Panax; by the Persians, Funax; and in Kalicut, Ionceras.

The Tree in the Chinese Tongue properly call'd Polomioxu, that is, Polomy Tree, is, as Acosta tells us, very tall and big about, hath pale Green Leaves, about a Hand big, with a hard sinew in the middle; it bears a small num∣ber of a very large Fruit, which grow not on the Boughs, but on the main Body of the Tree (as Peter Martyr saith) as if the Boughs refus'd to carry so great a burthen, notwithstanding they are very tough and strong.

Acosta saith, that the Fruit Iaka is long, thick, dark Green, hard, and hath a thick Shell: Martin affirms, that it is so hard and thick, that it must be open'd with an Ax: It is full of Green Thorns with Black Points, very like the Fruit Durion, but not sharp nor prickly, though seeming so; when ripe it hath a strong Scent: The smallest of this sort of Fruit is bigger than the greatest Pumkin, especially that which grows in Malabar, but that of Goa is lesser and of a worse Taste. Martinius saith, That the Iaka or Polomie is accounted the big∣gest Fruit in the World: And Boem affirms, That one of them alone is a Mans burthen: It is White, and hath a firm Pulp, with little Husks, wherein are se∣veral Nuts or Kernels like Chest-nuts, (sometimes enough to suffice ten or twenty Men) longer and thicker than Dates, and cover'd with Ash-colour'd Shells; Earthy, of an ill Taste, and causing Wind if eaten Raw, but if Roasted like Chest-nuts, well-tasted; they are said to provoke Leachery, for which reason the Common People esteem them highly.

Every Chest-nut-like-Kernel is inclos'd in a Yellow and tough Husk (like that of the Fruit Durion, yet not without a little difference) and being Boyl'd, tastes like a sweet Chest-nut.

This Fruit is by the Chineses call'd A Bag full of Honey-Chest-nuts; it tastes much better than a Mellon, but is counted unwholsome and hard of Digestion. The Pith about the Kernels, which the Portuguese call Cocobarka, is by how much harder, so much the better; the softness of the Skin, is a sign of the ripe∣ness of the Fruit; it ripens commonly in May and Iune.

Another sort of Iaka, call'd Champidaka, grows not only in China, but on the* 30.137 Island Iava, and several other places in India; and that after the common manner, not on the Body of the Tree, as the first sort; it is of a better taste, and wholsomer than the common Iaka: The Tree spreads it self very much, and is extraordinary high, and broad Leav'd; out of the calcin'd Shells of these two prickly Fruits, the Indians make a Composition, which they use in stead of Sope or Lye to scowr Clothes with.

In the Southern Provinces, Quantung, Quangsi, Iunnan, Foquieu, and on the* 30.138 Island Ainan, grows in great abundance a Fruit, by the Chineses call'd Fanpolomie; by the Brasilians, (acording to Piso) Nano; (according to Lerius,) Panaco; by the Spaniards in New-Spain, Iajama, from its likeness with a Pine-Apple; and by the Portuguese, Ananas, which they hammer'd without doubt from the Brasilian name Nana.

The Fruit (as Acosta tells us) was first brought from the Province of St. Cruis in Brasile to Peru, and from thence to the East-Indies, and lastly to China: The Plant of this Fruit grows like an Artichoke, but without prickly Points; but about the same bigness, upon the top of it are Ears which lie upon one ano∣ther: As it grows to Maturity, there shoot forth from between the Leaves several colour'd Flowers, for the most part Blue, consisting of three Leaves, which at the Ripening of the Fruit fall off: The Leaves, out of which the Ana∣nas grow, are twenty in number; longish, Indented about the edges, and sharp at the ends like a Sword, and are very like the Leaves of Aloe; small, Reddish,

[illustration]

or Black Grains lie Inclos'd in the Fruit, which being Sow'd or put into the Ground produce others.

The ripe Fruit is very Juycie, and of a sweetish taste with a mixture of sowr∣ness; of a deep Vermillion Colour, or (as Acosta says) Yellow, as big as a Mel∣lon or Cytron, or (as Boem writes) as a Pine-Apple; the edges are of a lively Colour, good smell, nay so strong it is, that any Person walking may smell in what House they hang up in to ripen: It is generally without full of whitish knobs; the ripe Fruit is crown'd with a young Plant, which cut off, and without Root, (for it hath none put into the Ground) bears Fruit the next Year; every Plant produces onely one Fruit a Year, and that Fruit a new Plant, which when cut off and set in the Ground, the old is pull'd out, and thrown away as unfruitful; the Root is like that of an Artichoke; the Fruit slic'd and steep'd in Wine, gives it an excellent Savor and Rellish, but bites the Tongue and heats the Palate: The Juyce thereof refreshes the fainting Heart, revives the Spirits, and strengthens a squemish Stomack: Moreover, its Juyce or Wine (much more the Distill'd Water) is exceeding good against the Gravel: The Root also is a Remedy to cure the fore-mention'd Distemper: But those that are troubled with, or are careful to avoid Agues, must be sure to abstain both from the Fruit, and all that belongs to it.

China also produces several sorts of Spices and Aromatick Plants, in the Sou∣thern Province, bordering upon India, though in no great abundance, viz. Pep∣per, in the Chinese Tongue call'd Hucyao, which grows in the Province of Iunnan. Cinamon (as already we have made mention) in the Province of Quantung and Quangsi: But there is exceeding good Ginger in great abundance, which they call Sem Kiam, and store of Coco-nuts in the Southern Provinces, and especi∣ally on the Isle Ainan: But because all those Plants and Fruits have been large∣ly describ'd by others, it would be needless to make rehearsal thereof.

In several places in China grows the Plant Tee or Cha, so call'd by the Chine∣ses,* 30.139 by which Name it is known among us; and Cia or Tchia and Tsia, by the

Iapanners; though amongst the Chineses, according to the several places wherein it grows, it hath several Denominations; as likewise from its goodness, for the Inhabitants of the thirteenth County Chucheufu in the Province of Nanking, call the best Tee Sunglocha; those of the third County Hucheufu, in the Province of Chekiang, Kiaichai; those in the Province of Fokien, Ziazcha.

The Water or Liquor in which this Plant is boyl'd, is also by the Chineses* 30.140 properly call'd Tee and Cha, and Chia or Tsia by the Iapanners: There are those which say, that Tsia or Chia in general signifies Meat and Drink; as Loe Chia, Will you please to have Meat or Drink?

The Plant The, according to Martin and Trigaut, is a Shrub and no Tree, grows about the b 30.141 height of an European Rasberry-bush, or Rose-Tree, and c 30.142 dividing it self into several Boughs, is like the Mirtle-Tree, and partly tastes like it, yet grows not Wild but is Planted: d 30.143 The Boughs and Stalks of the whole Sprout, are from top to bottom, always full of Leaves and Flowers: The Leaves are thin, sharp before, and notch'd round about, in shape Oval, in bigness like those of the Granate-Tree; and though of one shape, yet are of such several bignesses, that on one Sprout four or five sizes of Leaves are to be seen: The first and biggest grow on the undermost Boughs, and are like the Leaves of Garden-Balsom: The second size much less than the first; so ac∣cordingly the rest which grow higher, still lessen more and more; but as much as the uppermost Leaves abate in bigness, so much they increase in value; for one of the first rank of Leaves dry'd and prepar'd, costs five Pence; the second sort, fifty; the third, ten Shillings; the fourth, if rightly prepar'd, thirty; the difference of the Value, follows from the difference of the Vertue, which ac∣cording to Trigaut, is very considerable; insomuch, that they often give for one Pound of the best, two, sometimes three Duckets: In Iapan, the best cost ten, and twelve Duckets.

The Flowers of the The are of a Yellowish White, in bigness and shape like the Eglantine, but not in smell, which according to Martin, is faintyish. After the falling off of the Flowers, there remains a Cod or Husk, which is first Green, and afterwards turns Black, in it lies a round Black Seed, like those of Roses: This Seed Sown, yields a new Plant in three years time.* 30.144

The Root is full of Strings, divided into several Knobs, which lie not deep in the Ground, but are just cover'd with the same, and are for no use; all the Vertue of this Plant consisting onely in the Leaves; the freshest and youngest of which are made use of in the making their Drink Cha; they gather them in the Spring, one by one, and immediately put them to warm in an Iron Kettle over the fire, then laying them a on fine light Mat, roul them together with their Hands: The Leaves thus roul'd up, are again hang'd over the fire, and then again roul'd closer together, till they are dry, and then put up carefully in Tin Vessels, thereby to keep them from all moystness; Trigaut tells us, that the Chineses dry not the Leaves over the fire, but in the Sun.

In the using of these Leaves is some differnece betwixt the Iapanners and Chi∣neses, for they (says Trigaut) throw some of the Leaves into a Pot of boyling Water, which when the Vertue of the Leaf is sufficiently infus'd into it, they Drink hot, without eating the Leaves: The Chineses, as the Lord Tulp tells us, boyl the Leaves with a little Salt and Sugar, to take away the bitterness in a certain Liquor which they drink warm; or else they put a Handful of The Leaves in a Pint-Pot, then pour it full of scalding Water, and about two or three Minutes after, Drink the same very hot.

The Chineses generally, both Night and Day, drink of the Liquor wherein the fore mention'd Leaves are boyl'd, and not onely ordinarily at Table, but have it ready upon all occasions at great Entertainments; and the greatest Nobles and Princes think not much to prepare it themselves, and have in their Palaces Hearths of rich Stone, principally made for that purpose, and are much look'd upon according to the richness of the Utensils they use therein.

The Water of the Fountain Hoei, in the County Chancheufu, of the Province of Kiangnan, is accounted the best by the Chineses to make their Drink Cha; and for that use bought by the Grandees, and from thence carry'd to the remotest Provinces, nay to the Emperor's Court at Peking.

The Chineses also drink their Cha out of peculiar Earthen Dishes, which add a curious smell to the Liquor, almost like that of Juniper, Cypress and Aloes-Wood; some of them are to be seen, being brought from thence hither.

The best of these Cups (according to Martinius) are made in the City Guihing, (in the Province of Kiangnang) which from whence takes its Denomination, for Guihing signifies Glory of the Earth; these are for this reason by the Chineses cho∣sen before those of the Province of Kiangsi, notwithstanding those are clearer and brighter, because they give a pleasant scent and taste to the Liquor, for which cause they are highly esteem'd by them; and in the whole City before nam'd, they do in a manner nothing else but make Tee-Cups, some of which they sell very dear.

The Chineses highly extol the Vertue of the Liquor Tee, and chiefly ascribe the reason that they are never troubled with the Stone nor Gout, to the same; for, say they, to drink it after Meals, takes away all indigestion and rawness of the Stomach, and causes Digestion, makes those that are inebriated sober, and restores them fresh power and Senses, removes giddiness and pains of the Head, occasion'd by excess of Drink, because it consumes the abundance of Moistures; and those that are call'd upon to vigilancy, by drinking the same expel their drowsiness, and become very vigorous and fit for Business; it pro∣longs life also, fortifies the Sight, and is commended by the famous Physi∣cian Nicholaus Tulp, for the wholsomest Plant that grows: And for a more particular enumeration of its Vertues, the said Physician may not unfitly be∣consulted.

Moreover, the Chineses not onely use this Drink, but also the Indians, Tartars, those of Tibet, Mogor, and almost all the People on the Shore of the Oriental Sea; and of late years it hath been in use in divers parts of Europe, where it is pre∣par'd after the same manner as amongst the Chineses, excepting that we put a little Sugar-Candy into it, to abate the bitterness of it, as it appears to our Palates.

It is doubted whether this Plant and the use thereof were known to the Chi∣neses in former Ages: Trigaut tells us that they have not us'd it long, because in the old Chinese Books not one Character or Letter is found that expresses the same. Others affirm, that this Plant or Herb grew many Ages ago wild, and without Planting, but that the Setting or Sowing of it, its Vertue and manner of making Liquor thereof was known but of late to the Chineses. The Herb at this day grows not wild, but is planted with great care on Hills, and Set about three Foot distant one Plant from another. It grows in no other place but China, Siam, Iapan aud Tunking; but in no part of China in greater abundance than in the thirteenth County Chicheufu in the Province of Nanking.

In the seventh County Iuenki in the Province of Iunnan, and in the third

County Kingyuen in the Province of Quangsi, grows the Fruit call'd Areka (al∣ready spoken of) otherwise call'd Fausel, which the Inhabitants, as most of the Indians, chew with the Leaves of Betel, which colours their Spittle red: It is in the Countrey Language nam'd Makinnang.

Beasts.

AS the Countrey of China is bless'd with divers sorts of Trees, Plants and Herbs, so it likewise abounds with four-footed Beasts, Birds, Fishes, and creeping Animals.

In all parts of China, especially in the Province of Quantung, are Harts, Stags, Bucks, Hares, and the like, which by Travellers are seen in great Herds. Great abundance of Deer are also in the Province of Huquang.

China also is every where stor'd with such like Sheep as are found in Persia and Tartary, viz. having long and thick Tails, which trail after them, and weigh sometimes forty Pound, and are extraordinary good Meat.

About the tenth Garrison'd City Tieki in the Province of Suchuen, and in the County Iungningfu in the Province of Iunnan, are a sort of Cattel with long, thick, and curl'd Hair on their Tails, which the Chinese Soldiers wear on their Helmets and Ensigns in stead of Feathers. Of this Hair they also make Tape∣stry, and exceeding good Clothes to keep out Rain. Great store of these kind of Cattel are also in the Kingdom of Tibet.

The Kine in the Counties Chingcheufu and Tengcheufu in the Province of Xan∣tung, have a certain Stone found in their Maw, which they call Nicuhoang, that is, The yellowness of a Cow, because of the yellow colour, for Nicu is A Cow, and Hoang, Yellow. This Stone differs in bigness, and is sometimes as big as a Goose Egg, but is not so firm as a Bezoar Stone, and therefore much lighter, yet in greater esteem amongst the Chinese Physicians: it appears to those that look on it like yellowish Chalk. It is, as the Chineses affirm, of a cold Tem∣per, but dries up the Rheum in the Head extreamly: Its Powder, if thrown into boyling Water, immediately cools the same, but cold Water being pour'd upon it, a Vapor arises from it, and presently soaks up the Water.

According to Martinius, this Stone is by Bellenius call'd the Gall-Stone; and by the Arabians, as the same Author writeth, Haraczi.

In the County Luicheufu in the Province of Quantung, is a Beast, by the Chi∣neses* 30.145 call'd The flying Cow, because of its swiftness in running, for they say it can run three hundred Furlongs in a day: It hath a long round Horn on the Head.

In the County Cincheufu in the Province of Quangsi, is a Horn'd Beast like an Ox, whose Horns are much whiter than Ivory. This Beast is strangely desirous of Salt; whereof the Hunters taking their advantage, lay whole Bags full before it, which it falls upon so greedily, that it suffers it self rather to be taken, bound, and kill'd, than to desist from licking the Salt-Bags, which is the onely way they have to take it.

In the Province of Peking are Cats with white long Hair, and hanging Ears,* 30.146 which by Ladies and Persons of Quality are kept for their pleasure, but will not catch Mice, being perhaps fed with other Dainties; yet there are other good Mousing Cats, which are not so well fed as the former. And amongst the rest is a Cat call'd Xumxu, of a yellow colour (though some are black) with* 30.147 very shining Hair, being an excellent Mouser.

These Creatures are naturally wild, but when taken by the Chineses are made

tame, and hang Silver about their Necks: Some of them are sold for nine Scudo's.* 30.148

In the Province of Peking, about the Garrison'd City Siven, are great Mice* 30.149 with yellow Hair, in great esteem amongst the Chineses.

In the Province of Xantung are Wolves, which devour both Men and Plants.* 30.150

In the Province of Xensi are many Bears, whose fore-Feet are by the Chineses* 30.151 accounted a great Dainty.

In the Mountainous County Linyaofu in the Province of Xensi, are many wild Bulls, and Beasts like Tygers, or Panthers, or Leopards, and according to Martinius call'd Pau, and by Boem, Hiven Pao: The Chineses make Clothing of their Skins.

In the Province of Suchuen, and likewise in the fifth County Chucheufu in the Province of Quangsi, is the Beast which the Greeks call Rhinoceros, that is Nose-Horn, because of a Horn which it hath on its Snout or Nose.

The Elephants which are seen in most parts of China, are all brought out of the Provinces of Iunnan and Quangsi, where they breed in great numbers, the Inhabitants making use of them in time of War.

The whole Province of Chekiang is infested with fierce Tygers; but on the Mountain Kutien, near the City Kaiho, breed Tygers which do no hurt to Men. In the neighboring Countreys again they are very wild, and of a cruel Nature; yet the wildest of them being brought to this Mountain grow imme∣diately tame. Tygers breed also on the Mountain Xepao in the County Gu∣cheufu in the Province of Quangsi. There are likewise ravenous Tygers and Leopards in the Mountain Nalo in the County Chinyvenfu in the Province of Iunnan.

In the County Nanningfu in the Province of Quangsi, are great wild Boars,* 30.152 with Tusks of a Foot and a half long, which with a strange motion of their Bodies they strike at all Persons which come near them, and certainly tear them to pieces.

In no part of China are so many good Horses as in the Province of Iunnan,* 30.153 especially in the County Iunnanfu, and by the Garrison Moping; likewise in the Province of Suchuen, near the Garrison'd City Po.

On the Mountain Holan in the Province of Xensi, by the Garrison'd City Ninghia, are many wild Horses.

The Chinese Horses are generally of no high size, but very fat, broad But∣tock'd, and strong for Travel; they are Ridden with a Bit, and without being beaten, observe their Masters words of command.

In the County Cungkingfu in the Province of Suchuen, on the Mountain Ta∣yung,* 30.154 are Baboons, which in bigness and shape are very like a Man, and so fu∣riously lustful after Women, that oftentimes surprising them in the Way, they Ravish them.

In the Province of Fokien, by the third little City on the Mountain Puon, as the Chineses write, there is a hairy Animal very like a Man. The same Crea∣ture call'd Tuse, is found in the Kingdom of Gannan.

In the Province of Xansi, about the City Leao, and especially in the third County Hangcheufu in the Province of Suchuen, in the second Paoningfu, and about the City Kiating, by the sixth Garrison'd City Tienciven, in several places in the Province of Iunnan, and many other parts towards the West, there is great store of Musk, which a kind of Matter taken from the sweating of the Navel (in form of a Purse) of a certain Beast like a Deer, in the Chinese Tongue

call'd Xe, and the Musk Xehiang, that is, Scent of the Xe, for Hiang signifies Scent; or according to Michael Boem, and Philip Marinus, in his History of the Kingdom of Tunking, Xehiang signifies properly A sweet-scented Hart.

Philip Marinus before mention'd describes the Musk which this Beast pro∣duces in this manner:

They have (meaning those of Laos) the natural and true Musk out of the Kingdom of Goai. In the Woods lurks a Deer which the Chineses call Yehiam, that is, Musk-Deer, which is as big as a Doe or Hart, though, to speak truth, I know no Beast that hath greater resemblance with it (except the Head, which is like that of a Wolf, and hath two long Teeth) than an old wild Boar: it is of a sadder colour than a Deer, and so slow in motion, that the Hunters thereof are onely troubled to rouze it, for then it stands still, and suffers it self to be kill'd without making the least resistance. Moreover, the Musk which they take from this Beast is of divers Prices: After they have taken it they draw all the Blood from it, and keep it apart from his Navel; they also cut a Bag which is full of Blood, or sweet-scented Moisture; then they flay and cut it in many pieces. When they will make the best Musk of it, they take one half of the Beast, the hind part from the Kidneys, which with a little Blood they stamp in a great Stone-Mortar till they have made it a Pap, with which after it is dry'd they fill little Bags made of the Deers Skin. There is a worse sort, made of the fore-part of the Beast as far as the Kidneys; but the worst of all is made of the whole Beast toge∣ther: And this last is the Musk us'd in these Countreys of Europe. Thus far Marinus.

When this Beast, as the Chineses write, is carry'd out of the Kingdom of Lu into that of Laos, it dies instantly, like a Fish which is taken out of the Water.

Birds.

IN the Province of Xensi, about the Garrison'd City Mincheu, and by the sixth Garrison'd City Tienciven in the Province of Suchuen, are Hens, whose Bo∣dies are cover'd with Wool like that of Sheep in stead of Feathers: they are little, and have short Legs, but are very valiant; great Ladies keep them for their pleasure. The like sort are also in Kambodia and Siam. But Kircher ob∣jects against this Relation, and maintains by several Arguments, that they are rather fine curl'd Feathers or Doun, than Wool.

In the County Nanningfu in the Province of Quangsi are a sort of strange and wonderful Hens, which evacuate long Threds, such as are generally Spun of the Cotton which grows on Trees, and (if they be not immediately taken from them) swallow them up again.

Another sort of wild Hens call'd Ieki, breed on the high Mountains in the Provinces of Xensi and Quangsi, and are of an extraordinary bigness, having white Heads and divers colour'd Feathers, with Bunches both on their Backs and Breasts, wherefore they are by some call'd Toki, that is, Cammel-Hens.

In the first County Chingtefu in the Province of Suchuen, is a strange and* 30.155 wonderful Bird, which the Chineses call Tunghoafung, that is, The Bird of the Flower Tung; Fung signifies a Bird, and Hoa a Flower; and Tung is the proper Name for the Flower, for it grows out of the Flower Tunghoa, and lives so long as the Flower of the Tree continues: We might justly call it A Living Flower,

partly for its likeness and beauty, and partly for its shortness of life: It hath a reddish Bill, tastes very sweet, and is very admirable to behold, being of all sorts of Colours.

In several parts of China is a Bird nam'd Chin, whose Feathers mix'd with Wine made of Rice, and afterwards pounded very small, is so deadly a Poyson, that no Medicine whatsoever can expel the same.

In the County Xincheufu in the Province of Huquang, breeds a Bird on the* 30.156 Mountain Lekung, which never makes a noise but against Rain, and thereby gives warning thereof to the Husband-men.

In the County Kiahingfu in the Province of Chekiang, the Chineses catch cer∣tain* 30.157 Birds nam'd Hoangcio, which steeping in Wine made with Rice, they sell all the year long for a great Dainty.

In the first Territory Queilingfu in the Province of Quangsi, are many curious Birds, whose various colour'd Feathers the Chineses Weave amongst their Silk-Stuffs.

In the County Kiocingfu in the Province of Iunnan are Swallows with divers* 30.158 white Spots under their Bellies, some bigger, some lesser: The Chinese Physi∣cians Distill an excellent Water from them, which cures all Distempers inci∣dent to the Eyes.

The Province of Quantung abounds with a sort of Ducks, which are brought* 30.159 up with great care by the Inhabitants; they are in most parts of China, but no where in such abundance as in Quantung.

These Ducks, Hatch not their Eggs as with us, but the Chineses put them into a warm Oven, or bury them in hot Dung after the same manner as it is said the Egyptians do at Grand Cairo.

The Chineses also on Ship-board breed whole Coops full of Ducks, setting them on the Shore at Low-water, there to feed on Oysters, Crabs, and the like. Several Companies of them belonging to divers Vessels, oftentimes mix them∣selves together in the Water and on the Shore, but towards Evening at the Ringing on a Bason return to their several Vessels.

The Chineses also use Ducks to Weed their Rice.

In most parts of China is found a Bird in the Chinese Tongue call'd Louwa,* 30.160 which is smaller than a Goose, and not unlike a Raven, with a long Bill and Neck like a Crane, at the end crooked, with Feet like a Swan, and a very wide Maw, excellent for Fishing.

This Bird seems to be the same with that which Pliny calls by the Greek Name 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, which signifies Asse's Cymbal, because of its strange noise, and is by him describ'd in the following words:

The 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 (saith he) differs not much in shape from a Swan, except in the Throat, in which, being of an extraordinary bigness, this unreasona∣ble Creature stores all that it gets: After it hath gotten its fill, the gorged Store comes up again into the Mouth, and from thence being chew'd, goes into the Belly.

Thus far Pliny.

The Chineses fish with these Birds, teaching them to catch Fish as here we teach our Dogs to Hunt: Their Fishing is in this manner:

The Fisher-man goes with little Boats, or Floats of Canes joyn'd close toge∣ther, puts out into some River or Lake with the foremention'd Birds; which being let out, immediately dive under Water, and shoot down with great swift∣ness. So soon as any of these Birds have overtaken a Fish in the Water, he swallows him up into his Maw, and immediately rising again comes to the

[illustration]

side of the Boat, where the Fisher-man forces open his Bill, and pulls the Fish out of his Maw with great dexterity; then puts the Bird over-board again, to catch more Fish after the same manner.

But to prevent these Birds from swallowing the Fish, which they are very greedy of; they lock their Throats, by putting on an Iron Ring about them, beyond which the Fish cannot pass.

Those Fish which by reason of their bigness cannot be swallow'd, they bring up in their Bills, giving timely notice to the Fisher-man, by a noise which they make, that so he may be ready to take the Fish from them; nay some∣times one Bird helps another (if the Fish be very big) to bring him to the Boat, each holding a part thereof in his Bill.

If any Bird, after his being put over-board, Dive not instantly under Wa∣ter, it is cruelly beaten with a Cane, till the Feathers flie off, thereby to break it of its slothfulness.

After they have taken a considerable number of Fish, the Iron Ring is taken off from them, that then they may Fish for themselves, which makes them an∣other time the willinger to Fish for their Masters.

The Fisher-men pay yearly for every Fish a certain Tribute to the Emperor.

The Birds before-mention'd are very dear, one of them (which is any thing dextrous in fishing) being sold for fifty Tail of Silver, every Tail being an English Crown.

Iohn Gonzalves of Mendoza, in his Description of the Empire of China, calls these Fishing-birds Sholfers, and gives an account of their Fishing, much to the same purpose as hath been already describ'd.

The Chineses (says he) have a peculiar way of Fishing, which is very plea∣sant and good. The Emperor keeps in every Town built near Rivers certain Houses, in which every year young Sholfers are bred up, with which they Fish in certain seasons, after this manner:

The Masters of the Fowls take them out of their Coops, and carry them

down to the Shore, where they keep many Boats to Fish with, and fill them half way full of Water, then they tie their Crop with a String under their Wings so close that they cannot swallow the Fish; then they throw them into the Water to Fish, which they do with great eagerness, and Dive with great dexterity and swiftness under the Water; after having been a while out of sight, they appear again with their Bill and Throat full of Fish, and come fly∣ing towards the Boat, and evacuate the Fish in the Water which is in the Boat, that so they may be kept alive.

In the County Nanningfu, of the Province of Quangsi, are a kind of small Par∣rets, in bigness and shape like Mag-Pies.

On the craggy Mountains of Suchuen are very large Mag-Pies, and in the same County, near the Garrison'd City Ydmui great store of Larks.

In the Provinces of Quantung, Quangsi, and Iunnan, are both tame and wild Peacocks; they are in no other Provinces, unless brought from thence.

In the County Hoaiganfu, in the Province of Nanking, are more Quails and Pheasants than in any other part of China.

In the County Taipingfu, in the Province of Nanking, lies an Island nam'd Hoa, in the River Kiang, which seems to be nothing but a hollow Rock, in which are an incredible number of Owls; from whence the Island hath gotten its Denomination.

In the Province of Xantung are great store of Poultrey, Pheasants and Wood-Cocks, insomuch that they are bought there extraordinary cheap.

Very remarkable is a Bird properly call'd Fung, and by addition of the word Ciang, is nam'd Fungciang, in regard the appearance of the Bird (which is very seldom and always alone) is by the Chineses look'd upon as a good Omen, and ve∣ry fortunate to the whole Empire. Boem also writes, that if this Bird disappears suddenly from the sight of Men, it is a sign of one or other sad event, or threat∣ning danger to those of the Royal Blood. The Chineses have this Bird in great veneration, so that the Figure of it is frequently seen among them, both in their Paintings, Tapestry, Weavings, and their Imbroyderies of Gold, Silver and Silk, and the greatest of the Nobility have the Effigies of it often wrought on their Clothes. Martinius will have him to be the Phenix, or else an unknown sort of Crane, resembling a Peacock in head, and variety of Colours; it is said to breed in the Mountain of the Kingdom of Tang.

The same Martinius tells us, that in the County Munghoafu, in the Province of Iunnan, is a Mountain, from the Chinese Phenix call'd Funghoang; because this Bird (as they say) dy'd on the same, after he had sung a while very melodiously. They also add, that all the Birds about the latter end of Harvest meet on the same, and there bewail the death of their Phenix: The Inhabitants observe al∣so that time, and climb up the Hill in the Night with Lights to catch Birds, and return from thence loaden with their purchase.

In the Province of Xensi are Bats as big as Hens or Geese; they are by the Chineses accounted great Dainties, who prefer their flesh before that of Poultry. The like Bats being all over Hairy, and Headed like Apes or Cats, and as big* 30.161 as Pigeons, Hens, or Geese, are found in several parts of Asia, as in the King∣dom of Mogor, in the Countrey of Kasmir in Surrat, and on the neighboring Isle, as also in Brasile; they flie in great shoals in Surrat, like Wild-Geese, and in the Evening are seen to hang on Trees; and because of their extraordinary big∣ness, appear so strangely, that they strike amazement to such as never saw them before: Wherefore the Netherlanders surpris'd with the sudden sight and novel∣ty

[illustration]

thereof, call'd them Flying Apes; yet they may well be reckon'd amongst the other sort of Bats, having their Wings Skinny and not Feather'd, and because they have Ears and Claws, and lay no Eggs, but suckle their Young: they are as big as a Cat, with a thick Hairy Breast and Belly, and likewise are cover'd all over from their Neck to the Claws with a Skin like a Sprit-Sail; they seem to differ from all other Bats, besides that, this Skin like a Sail is fleshy underneath, but on the top cover'd with soft Hair like a Conies, of an Ash-colour: Moreover, their Wings are not as those of other Bats, drawn together, and spread out again with folds; therefore we shall find, if these and the Bats of Brasile, or any other in India be compar'd together, that there is a great difference betwixt them. The whole Creature is about three Foot long, and of a proportionable breadth; hath a thin Tail of a Span long, which seems to be fasten'd to the fore-mention'd Skin, which covers the whole Body from Head to Foot, like a Sprit-Sail; the Legs are also cover'd with a soft yellow Wool; the Feet are arm'd with sharp Claws, with which it holds all things that it seizes on, especially Fruit; it hath a long Head of an ugly aspect and wide Mouth, little Teeth, and round short Ears, consisting of a thin Skin. Kircher tells us, that those Bats have not Quilly, but Sinnewie Wings, with which they flie in the Air like ordinary Bats; yet, that their Nervous Wings are so well distinguish'd in length, that they show as if they were Feather'd. They breed in thick Woods, and hang by their Claws on the hollow Bodies and Boughs of Trees, or on the Roofs of Huts, appearing with their Sail-like Skins, rather like Sachels than Animls, by which means they escape the fury of other Creatures their Enemies: They annoy the Cattel exceedingly by sucking their Blood and Milk, which is their best Food.

Moreover, (according to Bontius) on the Island Iava, breed ordinary Bats in the Woods, which are as big as Pigeons, which the Iavans eat for a great Dain∣ty: They often come into the Houses at Night, if the Windows or Doors chance to be left open in the Day, and fastning themselves like Leeches to the

Feet of those whom they find asleep, suck great abundance of Blood from them, which more amazes than hurts them when they awake.

Fishes.

BEcause of the many Rivers, Pools and Lakes, the Countrey of China abounds with variety of Fish, especially the Province of Xantung, which by reason of its Neighborhood to the Sea, hath, besides the Fish taken in Rivers and Lakes, great store which are got in the Sea, in such abundance, that for the value of a Peny they purchase ten Pound weight of Fish.

Also there is incredible store of Fish in the Province of Huquang, and like∣wise in that of Kiangsi, especially Salmon.

In the River Kiang, about the City Kieukyang, though some Leagues from the Sea, store of Fish is caught, as Cod, Dolphins, and Salmon.

In the River Lofeu, by the City Xeu in the Province of Huquang, are excel∣lent Lamprees in abundance.

The Yellow River amongst the rest breeds a Fish nam'd Xehon, that is Marbled Flower, so call'd from the Marble Spots on its Skin: It is caught in no other place but near the City Paote in the Province of Xansi, and is in great esteem amongst such as take upon them to understand Eating: They are taken chiefly in the Province of Fokien near the City Hunghoa.

The River Tan, which glides close by the chief City Nanyang in the Province of Honan, hath Fish of a perfect red colour, which are onely seen and caught in the beginning of Summer; for the remaining time of the year they hide them∣selves.

The Chineses ridiculously believe, and some have written to that effect: If any one besmears his Feet with the Blood of this Fish, he may walk on the Water as well as on the Land. They add moreover, That if the Water be stirr'd at that time, it immediately turns red, together with all the Fish, which at that present appear; wherefore it hath the Name of Tan, that is, Red.

The County of Ningpofu in the Province of Chekiang, lying near the Sea, is well provided with Sea-Fish, which they dry in the Sun, as Oysters, Crabs, and Lobsters, with which they furnish most parts of China.

In the beginning of Summer is caught a Fish nam'd Hoang, that is to say,* 30.162 Yellow, because of its yellow colour. This Fish is of such a Nature, that it will not last one hour good after it is taken out of the Water; but it is exceedingly valu'd amongst the Chineses: they put it into Vessels with Ice, and so bring it to Market; for which purpose they preserve Ice in the Winter to keep the fore-mention'd Fish in in the Summer.

In a Lake of the compass of two hundred Acres, lying on the Mountain* 30.163 Cienking in the County Hancheufu in the Province of Chekiang, they catch Fish of a Golden colour, from which they are call'd Kinyu, for Kin signifies Gold, and Yu, a Fish, having a Scale which shines as if sprinkled with Gold. They scarce ever exceed a Fingers length, yet have Tails split into two or three parts, sometimes intire and broad, which make them appear fair to the Eye: They are by the Chineses kept with great care alive in their Houses or Gardens in neat Vessels made for that purpose. The Grandees often with their own Hands catch this Fish, which on the other side, as if it knew who was its Lord, and what pleasure it did him, comes as it were on purpose with his Compa∣nion

and plays just above the Water. One of these Fishes, if it be perfect and sound, costs sometimes three or four Crowns.

In the watry Valley on the Mountain Haiyang, near the City Queiling in the Province of Quangsi, are Four-footed and Horn'd Fish.

In the River Siang, in the County Changxafu in the Province of Huquang, and* 30.164 in the great River Kiang, where it runs through the Province of Nanking, are a sort of Fish, by the Chineses from the Portuguese corruptly call'd Xanel. A great quantity of this Fish pack'd up alive in Ice in peculiar Vessels, is sent to the Emperor to Peking, every Week two Ships Lading of them as long as the time of Fishing continues; and though it be above two hundred Leagues by Wa∣ter, yet in eight or ten days they finish their Journey: for Night and Day the Vessels are Toed by a Line, and new Toers taken so soon as the old ones begin to be tir'd, which at appointed places, like our Stages, stand ready: for by a Letter sent before they acquaint them with the Hour when they shall be there; and if any neglect happen herein, the Governors forfeit their Lives. No Cost nor Charges are spar'd to procure the Emperor this excellent Fish, of which he gives some to his Council of State.

The County Chinkiangfu in the Province of Iunnan, hath many Rivers, Pools and Lakes abounding with Fish, and amongst others one, out of which the Physicians draw an excellent Medicine against all kind of Scurf and Scabs.

In the same County by the City Yangcung, in the Lake Ming, is a black co∣lour'd* 30.165 Fish nam'd Cing, which is said to be good against many Diseases.

In the County Fungciangfu in the Province of Xensi near the City Pingyang,* 30.166 they take a Fish call'd Xe, that is, Stone, which being dry'd and beaten to Pow∣der, keeps Moths out of Clothes if strow'd on the same.

In the Sea before the County Taicheufu in the Province of Chekiang, the Chi∣neses catch many Haions, or Seals, whose Skins they send to Iapan to make Scab∣bards for Swords, and through all parts of China, making great profit of them; as the said Skin is us'd amongst us, for the making Cases for Watches, and Han∣dles for Knives.

Serpents and creeping Animals.

IN the County Fungchiangfu in the Province of Xensi, is a sort of black Ser∣pent, of which the Chineses make a Medicine to expel Poyson, and cure many Distempers.

In the County Nanyangfu in the Province of Honan, are Serpents, whose Skin is generally full of white Spots. The Wine in which they have been steep'd, is an excellent Remedy against Stiffness of the Joynts or Limbs.

In the County Hoangcheufu in the Province of Huquang, are Serpents which heal the Leprosie and Scabbiness.

On the Mountain Citien, by the City Caihoa in the Province of Chekiang, are very great Serpents, which have no manner of Poyson.

In the County Gucheufu in the Province of Quangsi, are (as the Chineses write)* 30.167 Serpents several Rods in length, no wonder then if they are affirm'd to be the biggest in the whole World. Michael Boem saith, That these Serpents, call'd Gento, are found on the Isle Ainan in the Provinces of Quantung, Quangsi, and some other places, and are without doubt the biggest of all Serpents, being about eighteen or twenty Foot long: they are said to swallow whole Deer, but are not accounted very poysonous; when hungry they leap out of Hedges

or Bramble-Bushes, then rising upright and standing on their Tail, encounter whatever they meet, whether Man or Beast; sometimes from a Tree set upon Travellers, and winding about their middle, destroy them: Their Gall is ac∣counted by the Chineses good for sore Eyes.

In the Province of Quangsi, and in many other places in India, is a sort of* 30.168 Serpents, by the Portuguese call'd Cabros de Cabello, that is, Serpents of Hair, or Hairy Serpents; in the Heads whereof a Stone is found, by the Portuguese nam'd Piedro del Cobra, or Serpent-Stone, good against Wounds or the Bitings of the same Serpent, which otherwise would destroy in twenty four Hours: It is round, and of a blue colour, in the middle pierc'd with white; being laid to the Wound it sticks fast thereon of it self, but when impregnated with the Poy∣son, it falls from it, then thrown a while into Milk, it returns to its natural Quality; if it sticks the second time to the Wound, it is a certain sign that all the Poyson is not drawn out, but if it falls off, then the Patient is certainly past danger.

This Stone hath been experienc'd with good success upon divers, both Men and Beasts, according to the testimony of Kircher and several others.

There is also a Root good against the Bitings of these Serpents, which the Portuguese call Rais de Cabro, that is, Serpent-Root, which being chew'd so long till the Patient Sneezes two or three times, cures him.

This Vertue is not onely in the natural, but also the artificial Stone made of some of the pieces of the natural Stone, or of the Head, Liver, Teeth, and Heart of the Serpent, mix'd with Terra Sigillata, or Seal'd Earth. The Brach∣mans, though proffer'd never so great a Sum of Money, will not teach this Art to any.

Moreover, there is another very venomous Serpent amongst the Chineses, which by biting kills a Man in few Hours; out of which also they draw a Me∣dicine, good against several Sicknesses, after this manner: The Tail and Body is put into a Kettle of the best Wine, leaving onely the Head, which is put through a Hole made in the Lid thereof; out of which the Serpent at the boyl∣ing of the Wine, which is hung over a great Fire, breathes forth all the Poyson through its gaping Mouth. The Flesh, the Head being cut off, is given to the Sick, and preserv'd, being (as they say) the onely precious thing to expel Poy∣son, like Treacle, or other soveraign Medicines.

The Province of Xensi is exceedingly infested with Locusts, which devour all the Product of the Fields, insomuch that at some times there is not one Blade of Grass to be seen, notwithstanding the Inhabitants, both great and small, at Command of their Magistrates, kill and destroy them in the Fields. There are often in such thick great Swarms, that by Clouding the Sun they darken the Earth; but they make some amends with their Bodies, for the Chi∣neses boyl these Locusts for a Dainty Dish.

In the County Tegaufu, of the Province of Huquang, and in the County Ping∣lofu in the Province of Quangsi, are little Worms, which make white Wax after the same manner as the Bees do their Honey-Combs; but the Combs of these Worms are much less, and extraordinary white; neither are they bred up by Hand, but wild. Of the Combs the Chineses make Candles, as we of our Wax, but they are much whiter, and being very dear, are onely us'd by Persons of Quality; for besides their whiteness they give an excellent scent when lighted; neither do they spot the Clothes they drop upon, and burn also very clear and bright.

In several Inlets or Creeks along the Sea-shore of China, and also under the Island Ainan, is a Land and Sea-Monster, in the Chinese Tongue call'd Hayma, that is, Sea-Horse, for Hay signifies the Sea, and May a Horse: It is knownto us by the Name of Sea-Horse, as it was to the Greeks by that of 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that is, River-Horse, not for its likeness to a Horse, but for its bigness, for the word 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 in the Greek is apply'd to those things which are to be represented big∣ger than ordinary. It is by the Chineses represented like a Horse with a Mayn, but having on each side of the Mouth long Teeth sticking out like Horns. The Head (according to Boem, who saw these Beasts wading in shallow places on the Coast of Cafruria, opposite to Mosambique) is from the Mouth to the Shoul∣ders three Cubits long; on his nethermost Jaw grow two very long and crooked Teeth, and on the uppermost also two thick ones, though shorter, which jut upon them; between lies their Tongue: Their Skin is very hard, inso∣much that it can scarce be pierced with a Lance; it hath no Hair, except at the end of the Tail, which shines like black Horn; each Hair is about the bigness of a Straw, and which bending is not easily to be broke. The Caffers, both Men and Women, make Bracelets of the Hair, which serves both for an Orna∣ment about their Wrists, and is said to prevent the Palsie. Of the Teeth (says Boem) in India and Goa, are made Garlands, Images, and also Crosses. It hath also been found, that these Teeth are great stoppers of Bleeding; though expe∣rience hath taught us, that the Teeth of these Horses have not always the same Vertue, but certain times must be observ'd in the killing of this Beast, that then his Teeth may have the fore-mention'd Power in a greater measure.

No place in China feeds more Silk-Worms than the Province of Chekiang; for it not onely furnishes its own Inhabitants, and all China with Silk-Stuffs of divers sorts, but also the neighboring Countrey Iapan, the Spaniards on the Phi∣lippine Isles, nay, India and the remotest Countreys in Europe; for the Hollanders buy great store of Silk at Hocksieu in the Province of Fokien, which is all brought thither out of the Province of Chekiang.

The Silk-Stuffs made in this Province are accounted the best in all China, and are to be had at so cheap a Rate, that ten Men may go clad in Silk at less Charge than one Man in Cloth in Europe. They Prune their Mulberry-Trees once a year, as we do our Vines, and suffer them not to grow up to high Trees, because through long experience they have learn'd, that the Leaves of the smallest and youngest Trees make the best Silk, and know thereby how to distinguish the first Spinning of the Threds from the second, viz. the first is that which comes from the young Leaves that are gather'd in March, with which they feed their Silk-Worms; and the second is of the ould Summer Leaves, and it is onely the change of Food, as the young and old Leaves, which makes the difference in the Silk. This is perhaps the reason why the Silk which is made in Europe is courser than that made by the Chineses. The Prices of the first and second Spinning also differs amongst the Chineses, whenas most Silk-Throsters in Europe make no difference therein. The best Silk is Spun in March, the coursest in Iune, yet both in one year. The breeding of the Worms is all one, and requires as much trouble and care as in some places in Europe; therefore it is plainly false, and a Romance, That all the Silk in China is produc'd by the Silk-Worms on the Trees without care or labour.

Martinius tells us, That the breeding of Silk-Worms, and making of Cotton and Silk, is an ancient Invention of the Chineses; for the Wife of the Emperor Ya, who Reign'd Anno 2357. before the Navity of Christ, is said to have been the

first Inventress and Teacher thereof to her Subjects: for though the breeding of Silk-Worms was not unknown to the Chineses at that time, yet they were ignorant in the Art of making Clothes of the same, as it generally happens in the beginning of all things. To the Chineses justly belongs the honour, that from them originally the Art of making Silk was translated to other Coun∣treys of Asia and Europe.

In the Province of Xantung the Silk Threds are Spun on Trees and in the Fields, not by tame Silk-Worms, but another kind of Worm like a Caterpiller which Spin not their Silk in manner of a Ball or Egg, but in long Threds of a white colour, which are blown to and again by the Wind on Trees and Hou∣ses, from whence the Inhabitants fetch them; almost after the same manner as our long Spider-Threds in Cobwebs, which flye up and down in Summer. Of this Silk they also make Silk-Stuffs as well as of that Spun by Silk-Worms, and much stronger, though somewhat courser.

Divers Animals in the Greek Tongue call'd 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, or Creatures which live in the Water as well as on the Shore, are in several places of China.

In the County Hoeicheufu in the Province of Quantung, breeds a Monster of Nature, by the Chineses call'd Hoangcioyu, that is, Yellow-Bird Fish; for it is nei∣ther Bird nor Fish, but both; that is to say, all the Summer it is a Bird of a Saffron colour, and flyes in the Mountains, but at the end of Harvest it betakes it self to the Sea and becomes a Fish, and being caught in Winter, is (as the Chineses say) very sweet and good Meat.

In the County Chaocheufu in the same Province, are many Crocodiles in the River Zo, which oftentimes hurt the neighboring People.

On the East side of the chief City Gucheu in the Province of Quangsi, is a lit∣tle Lake nam'd Go, in which King Pegao in ancient times kept ten Crocodiles, to which he threw Malefactors to be devour'd by them; those which were guiltless or innocent, being (as the Chineses say) found untouch'd, were taken out again and releas'd.

In the Province of Huquang, in the River Siang, is a Beast which chiefly re∣sembles a Horse, but with Scales on its Body, and Claws like a Tyger: It is of a cruel Nature, and seizes on Man and Beast, especially in Harvest, for then it often comes out of the Water, and runs all over the Countrey.

In the River Iun, in the same County Chaokingfu in the Province of Quantung, breeds a Fish, by the Chineses call'd The Swimming Cow, because it often comes out of the Water and engages with its Horns the tame Cow; but if it stays long out of the Water its Horns turn yellow, and lose their hardness, by which means it is forc'd to return to the Water, where it becomes a Fish again, and the Horns obtain their former hardness.

In the County Changtefu in the Province of Honan, breeds a Fish in the Ri∣vers, by the Chineses nam'd Hagul, that is, Child, because when caught it cries like a Child. In shape this Fish differs little from a Crocodile, hath a long Tail, and goes on four Feet: The Fat thereof once set on fire, cannot be quench'd either by Water, or any other means.

In China also are many Land and Sea-Tortoises, or Turtles, call'd Quei, espe∣cially in the County Chunkingfu in the Province of Suchuen, and in the Island Pequei, that is, Isle of Turtles, lying in the River Kiang, and the Province of Huquang; some of them are very big, and others small and handsom, which the Inhabitants keep in their Houses; some are no bigger than a small Bird.

The Chineses relate of a strange accident that happen'd there to a Soldier, who being accidentally by his Enemies thrown into the River, was by a Tor∣toise (which it is likely he had formerly fed and set at liberty) carry'd like an Arion on a Dolphins back to the opposite Shore.

In the fourth County Hoeicheufu, in the Province of Quantung, are seen at Sea, Turtles of such a vast bigness, that afar off they seem to be Rocks, some having Shrubs and other Plants growing on their Shells.

In some Provinces of China, and especially in Honan are flying Turtles, with green, and others with blue Wings on their Feet, by the spreading out of which they push themselves forward, leaping after the manner of Grashoppers: The Feet of these Turtles, are for the Rarity thereof, in great esteem among the Chineses; those that have green Wing'd Feet are call'd Lo Mae Quey, Quey sig∣nifying A Tortoise; Lo, Green; and Mae, Wings.

In all places near the Sea are plenty of Oysters, almost as good as our Colchester-Oysters, especially in the County Tencheufu, in the Province of Xan∣tung.

In the eleventh County Vencheufu, of the Province of Chikiang, are small Oy∣sters, of which it is reported, that from the Powder of them, dry'd and stamp'd, and Sown like Seed along the Fields in Marsh Ground, there grow Oysters of a very sweet Rellish; most of the Sea-bordering places abound also with Crabs and Lobsters.

Minerals, Stones, and Earths.

THrough all China are an innumerable company of Mines, which abound in all sorts of Mettal, and in particular Gold and Silver in great store, though there be an Edict in China not to Dig for them; because (as the Chineses say) Men are generally kill'd in the Mines, by the dangerous Damps and Vapours that arise from the Earth: But to gather Gold on the Shores of Rivers is free for every Man, after which manner they get great store; and Gold is rather a Commodity or Merchandize it self amongst the Chineses, than a Purchaser of other Commodities.

In the Province of Iunnan they gather great quantities of Gold out of the cleans'd Sand; but if the Mines might be open'd, the Chineses could not expect greater abundance of Gold or Silver from any other place: from whence there is a Proverb amongst them, wherein those that are seen to spend their Estates in Riot and Prodigality, are ask'd, Whither their Fathers be Receivers of the Empe∣rors Revenue in the Province of Junnan? There are also in this Province Mines of Tin, Iron, and Lead.

The Province of Fokien hath Copper, Tin, and Iron Mines, and in some places Gold and Siver Mines also: Particularly in the sixth County Tingcheufu, in the same Province, the Mountain Kin, that is, Gold, is so call'd from its Gol∣den Mines which were open'd by the Family Sung.

The Mountains in the Province of Queicheu, inclose (as the Chineses write) Gold, Silver, Quicksilver, and the like rich Mettals, all which might easily be gotten, if the Mountaineers, or Inhabitants of the Mountains could be sub∣du'd and brought to Obedience; but now the Chineses have no more benefit than the fore-mention'd People will give them out of their free Wills in Barter for Salt, or any other Necessaries.

The County Hengcheufu, in the Province of Huquang, hath many rich Sil∣ver Mines which may not be open'd.

All over the Province of Suchuen great store of Iron, Lead, and Tin is Digg'd out of the Mountains: China hath also divers sorts of Precious and ordinary Stones.

In the Province of Suchuen are the best sort of Load-stones to be found; as also in the Provinces of Huquang and Honan.

In the little County Lincheufu, in the Province of Suchuen, is a sort of Green Stone call'd Lapis Lazuli: and likewise in the seventh County Nanganfu, in the Province of Honan: and in the Territory Honanfu of the Province of Iunnan.

In the seventh County Kaocheufu, in the Province of Quantung, and out of the Mountain Tiniang, in the second Talifu, in the Province of Iunnan, they Dig ve∣ry excellent Marble, which the Chineses cut in thin Squares to make Tables, Walls, and the like Ornaments for their Houses; for this Marble is naturally streak'd with several Colours, in such a manner, that it represents Mountains, Rivers, Trees, Landskips, and the like, as if done by a great Artist with a Pencil. This Marble is call'd Tienciang, from the Mountain out of which it is Digg'd. There is also very good Marble in the County Iunnanfu: Out of the Mountains near the Garrison'd City Siven, in the Province of Peking, they Dig white and red Marble or Porphyre-stones, and also exceeding good Crystal, which is also found on the Mountain Ting, in the County Quanglingfu, in the Province of Quangsi: In the same Province are Agats, for their colour and hardness highly esteem'd.

By the little City Queiyang, in the County Hengchufu, in the Province of Hu∣quang, on the Mountain Xeyen, are Stones found after Rainy Weather exactly re∣sembling Swallows; which we have already mention'd among the Mountains.

On the Mountain Queiyu, in the County Taicheufu, in the Province of Chekiang, all the Stones, as well great as small, grow naturally square.

In the County Cunchangfu, in the Province of Xensi, they gather little blue Stones with white Veins or Streaks, which are highly esteem'd by Persons of Quality; for the common Opinion is, that being burnt to Chalk and pounded very small, they are good to prolong Life.

On the Mountain Pao, in the fifth County Hoangcheufu, in the Province of Huquang they find Stones, of which, some if laid in the Sun, turn Red, others Yellow, and retain that Colour for a considerable time.

Out of the almost inaccessible Mountain Io, by the City Pa, in the County Paoningfu, in the Province of Suchuen, they Dig Precious Stones.

Out of the Mountains Vutu, in the third County Hangchungfu, in the Pro∣vince of Xensi; and in the fourth, Cungchangfu; and also in the Province of Su∣chuen, by the Garrison'd City Po, they Dig a Mineral, by the Chineses call'd Hi∣unghoang: It is of a deep yellow, or sometimes Vermillion, distinguish'd with black Spots; it is like a Chalky Stone or hard Earth, and is accounted an ex∣cellent Medicine against many Malignant Feavers and Agues, dangerous Heats in the Dog-Days, if laid to steep in Wine, and drunk up.

Out of the Mountain Tape, by the City Lungkieu, in the County Taitungfu, of the Province of Xansi, they Dig Earth so Red, that it is us'd in stead of Ver∣million to Print the Red Chinese Characters with.

Out of the Mountain Nieuxeu, in the County Siganfu, in the Province of Xensi, is Digg'd a certain White Earth, which is us'd by the Women in stead of White Lead, to make them Beautiful, by taking away all Spots and Freckles

in the Face: The Chineses call it Queiki, that is, Fair Woman.

The Mountain Io, in the Province of Xensi, produces a certain Blue Earth or Mineral, with which they make a kind of Starch for their Linnen.

Through all the Province of Xansi, they Dig a sort of Coal, firm and slick like Jet or black Marble, such as those of Luker-land, or like our Cannel-Coal in Derby-shire: The Chineses, especially the Common people, burn these Coals (call'd Mui) on their Hearths, in their Kitchins or Chambers, but first break them very small, (they being Digg'd in great Pieces) and then mixt with Water, make them into Balls; they are a long while a kindling, but once light∣ed, they cast a great heat, and keep in a great while: The Northern Chineses burn also Wood, Cane, and other Fuel.

In the same Province are wonderful Fire-pits, like our Water-pits; they are in most places, and serve in stead of other Fires, for the poor people to boyl their Meat over; which they do after this manner, the Mouth of the Pit is shut very close, except a little hole just big enough for the Pot to stand in; and so the Inhabitants Boyl their Meat without trouble: They say that this Fire burns dull and not bright, and though it be very hot, yet sets not the least Stick of Wood a fire, if thrown into the same; nay that which is more, it may by being put into a great hollow Cane, be carry'd from one place to the other, so that every man may use it when he pleaseth; and by opening the Mouth of the Cane, out of which the heat strikes, Boyl a Pot with Meat, yet never hurt the Cane in which the Fire is Inclos'd.

Out of the Mountains Kie and Siuvu, in the Province of Peking, by the City Pingeo, they Dig another sort of Coal, which they burn for ordinary Fuel.

On the Mountain Io, in the Province of Xensi, by the little City Chinyven, are very bright Stones found, not unlike Diamonds.

The Province of Iunnan produces Rubies, Saphyrs, Agats, and the like Pre∣cious Stones, call'd by a general Name Iemin.

In the County Kincheufu, of the Province of Huquang, and in the County Quei∣lingfu, in the Province of Quangsi, are very excellent Stones found, with which the Chineses temper their Ink, as the European Painters their Colours.

In the County Nanhingfu is a black Stone, very like the Chinese Ink, with which they write on Boards, as we do with Chalk: There is also a Stone which is so hard, that the Inhabitants make Stone Axes and Knives thereof.

Out of the Mountain Tiexe, lying in the Province of Suchuen, by the Garri∣son'd City Kienchang they Dig Stones, which melted in the fire produce Iron, very good to make Swords and Faulchions of.

By the City Siaoxan is a Quarry, which furnishes all China with Free-stone.* 30.169

In several places in China, especially in the fourth County Nieucheufu, in the Province of Chekiang, is a kind of Gum, in the Chinese Tongue call'd Cie, which drops out of the Trees, and is very like Gum or Oyl of Turpentine: The Chi∣neses gather it in the Summer, and cleansing the same, Colour it how they please; the best is yellow like Gold, and the next black; before it is dry'd it yields a malignant Damp, which makes the Faces of those which are not us'd to it, swell and look pale for a time, but they soon recover again: It dries ve∣ry leasurely when any Chests or Cabinets are Varnish'd with the same, but when once dry, it never melts again: What a curious and shining thing this Gum is, Europe hath long since seen by the Cabinets and Chests that are brought hither from China and Iapan: The Chineses varnish all their curious Wood-Work with the same; as also their Ships, Houses, Tables, Bed-steads, Closets, and

all their Houshold Utensils, to the great lustre thereof. Trigaut gives us this following Account of this Gum, viz.

In China is a certain Gum like Musk, press'd out of the Bark of a Tree, and thick like Pitch, of which the Chineses make a Varnish, by them call'd Cie, and by the Portuguese, Ciaro. With this Cie they Varnish their Tables, Presses, and other Housholdstuff, as also their Ships and Houses, and Colour it how they please: The Work thus Varnish'd shines like Glass, and is very beautiful to the Eye, and acceptable by reason of its smoothness, and conti∣nues many years. By means of this Gum the Houses of the Chineses and Ia∣panners shine in such a manner, that they dazle the Eyes of the Beholders. With this also they represent the colour of all kind of Wood. And for this reason the Chineses, by whom this Gum is us'd, account Table-clothes alto∣gether superfluous; for if the shining and Crystal-like Tables acciden∣tally, by spilling of any Grease upon them, are bereav'd of their lustre, they are restor'd to their former beauty, by being wash'd over with warm Water, because nothing can soak through the hard Gum. Besides this Gum there is an Oyl, press'd out of the Fruit of another Tree, not unlike the former; the use thereof is also one and the same, but gives not so great a Gloss.

We have several kinds of Varnish amongst us, in imitation of the Chineses, but far short of it, the true Preparation thereof being doubtless unknown to us, or but imperfectly discover'd.

Out of the Mountains in the eighth County Ienganfu in the Province of* 30.170 Xensi, is digg'd a slimy Moisture, generally call'd Peters-Oyl, which the Chineses use in their Lamps, and against Scabs.

In the Province of Suchuen is abundance of yellow Amber, which is gather'd on the Coast of Pomeren, and in other parts of the same Province another sort of a reddish colour.

Martinius speaks of great quantities of artificial Amber, made of the boyl'd Gum of Pine-Trees, and sold by the Chineses; so exactly imitated, that it was not to be distinguish'd from the best; neither is it a certain sign of true Am∣ber, to attract Chaff or other light things; for the falsifi'd and artificial, if rubb'd, hath an attracting power as well as the natural.

In the Provinces of Iunnan they also have Amber which is somewhat redder than the Pomeran; for yellow they have none.

The Salt which the Chineses have, is not onely made in the Sea-bordering Provinces, but there are also Inland Waters of which they make Salt without any great trouble.

In the County Hokienfu in the Province of Peking, are large Fields, which extending to the Sea-side, are wash'd by the Sea Water, which leaves great quantities of Salt upon the Banks.

All the Water of the Lake Ieu, lying in the County Pingyangfu in the Pro∣vince of Xansi, is as salt as Sea-Water, and Salt also made of it by the Inha∣bitants.

In the County Kingyangfu in the Province of Xensi, are two Pools of salt Water, of which they make abundance of Salt.

In the Province of Iunnan, on the North-East side of the City Yaogan, is a great Pit of salt Water, out of which is extracted exceeding white Salt, with which the whole County Yaoganfu is furnish'd. The Pit is call'd Peyencing, that is, Pit of white Salt. The first finding of this Salt is ascrib'd to the Sheep, be∣cause they us'd to lick the Earth thereabouts, and scratch up lumps of Salt

with their Feet, till the Inhabitants at last observing the same, found salt Wa∣ter and Earth there.

China abounds with Salt in all places; so that besides the great plenty for common use, the Salt-Trade brings great Revenue into the Emperor's Trea∣sury, there being an incredible number of People which Trade in that Com∣modity.

Every Province in which Salt is made, pays yearly a certain weight of Salt to the Emperor for Tribute.

On the Mountains in the Province of Suchuen are Salt-pits, which supply all the Inhabitants of that Province with Salt; which is a great testimony of God's Providence to these People, considering this part of China lies remote from the Sea, and could not be furnish'd with Salt from any other places, but with exceeding great trouble.

These Pits are some of them a hundred Paces deep, as being on inhabited Hills of salt Earth: The Mouth of one of them is not above three or four Hands∣breadth wide: They are search'd with an Iron Instrument in form of a Hand, which being let down in the Ground, by reason of its great weight and sharp Fingers, presses through the same, then drawn up again shuts close, and brings up a handful of Earth; which they do so long till they come to salt Earth and Water, which is afterwards pull'd out with a Tub or Bucket, which hath a Co∣ver at the top, and a Hole in the bottom, through which the Water running as the Vessel goes down thrusts it open, but when it is full and pull'd up by a Rope it falls and shuts again: which salt Water being taken out and set over the Fire, its watry part evaporates forth▪ and leaves white Salt in the bottom; yet is not altogether so salt as that which is made of Sea-Water.

There are Salt-pits also in the County Queicheufu. And likewise in the Ter∣ritory Kiahingfu in the Province of Chekiang, are very great Salt-pits, in the Fields near the Sea, where they make abundance of Salt. Also in the County Hoaiganfu, not far from the City Hoaigain, and in several other places bordering on the Sea.

In China onely is that kind of fine Earth of which is made that rich Mate∣rial of those we call China-Dishes, and this Stuff is call'd Porcelane. Some falsly affirm, That the Matter of which the Porcelane is made is prepar'd of pounded Egg-shells, or Sea-Cockles, adding, That it must lie a hundred years under Ground before it can be us'd. Others tell us, That the right Porcelane is made of a hard chalky Earth, which is first beaten to Powder, and ground to Meal, and then is thrown into Troughs made of gray Stone full of Water, and there left to soak so long till it becomes a Pap; mean while a thin Skin comes over it, of some of which they make Porcelane, as fine and clear as Crystal, which on pain of Death may not be carry'd out of the Countrey, but must all be brought to the Court, and deliver'd to the Emperor and his Council: The next sort is made of the uppermost Stuff under this Skin; and this is the finest Porcelane we have in Europe: and so the nearer this Mucilage is to the bottom of the Troughs, still so much the courser is the Porcelane made thereof, the bottom of all being not much better than our Earthen Ware. But Martinius, Trigaut, and other Iesuits, who were Eye-witnesses, write with more probability, That the Stuff of which they make their Porcelane, is a dry Earth, like Chalk and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Sand, and (according to Trigaut) yellow.

This Earth is digg'd in the fourteenth County Hoeicheufu in the Province of Nanking, and from thence carry'd in square Lumps or Cakes, each weighing

about three Catties, to the Province of Kiangsi, along the River Po. And in this Province, at a Village call'd Sinktesinu, near the City Feuleang, in the fourth County Iaocheufu, the best Porcelane in all China is made: for though there be Earth in other places, of which the Porcelane might be made, yet it is no way to be compar'd to that which is made in the Village.

It is to be observ'd, that Porcelane cannot be made in the fore-mention'd place, where there is such an abundance of Earth, either for want of Water, or because the Water is not so proper for the making of it.

Those which dig the Earth carry it not themselves to the Province of Ki∣angsi, but generally sell Cakes or Lumps thereof to other People, who main∣tain themselves by carrying of them thither; yet not one Lump may be car∣ry'd away before it is mark'd with the Emperor's Arms, thereby to prevent the falsifying of it.

The Porcelane Vessels are made after the same manner as our Potters make their Earthen Ware. The Vessels, Plates or Dishes, as soon as form'd, are Painted with various Colours, as yellow, red, blue, or any other. That which is of a Saffron colour, and Painted with Shapes of Dragons, is sent to the Empe∣ror and his Council; and the red, yellow, and blue, is sold amongst the com∣mon People.

To colour the Porcelane blue they generall use a certain Weed, which in the Southern Provinces is found in great abundance.

The Baking of these Vessels is after this manner: Being shap'd, and having stood a while in the Wind and Sun to dry, they are put into an Oven, which is for fifteen days after made extraordinary hot, and both all that while, and for fifteen days longer are stopp'd so close, that the least Air cannot get in or out of it; then the Oven is open'd, and the Vessels remaining therein left to cool by degrees; for if the glowing Vessels should be taken out of the Oven and put in∣to the Air, they would crack to pieces like Glass; after the expiration of thirty days the Furnace is open'd in the presence of an Officer, appointed by the Em∣peror for that purpose; who examining what is Bak'd, takes of every sort the fifth piece for the Empeor, by virtue of an ancient Law. 'Tis said, that of the pieces also of broken Porcelane, first beaten, and afterwards sifted, then mix'd with Water and kneaded in a Lump, are new Vessels made, but cannot be brought to their former lustre.

It is observable, that though some use the fresh Lumps which are brought to them, and make Porcelane of it, yet others, more curious, let them lie a while till they grow as hard as a Stone. The Earth thus dry'd, when they in∣tend to use it, is beaten like the broken pieces of Porcelane, and also sifted and mix'd with Water, then kneaded into Lumps or Cakes, of which they make Porcelane as of the fresh Earth.

Besides the goodness of the Stuff, and curious fashioning, the Porcelane Ves∣sels are of a high value, because they can endure extraordinary hot Liquors in them without cracking; also the pieces, if joyn'd with Iron, or small Cop∣per Wyre, hold any Moisture without leaking.

Through all China are People which are experienc'd in this Art, and carry a curious small Drill, with a Diamond at the end thereof, with which they •…•…ake the Holes in the Porcelane.

In China are also divers sorts of Paper made, sometimes of Canes and the Leaves thereof, and sometimes of Cotton, Silk and Hemp: The Paper made of Cotton is not inferior in whiteness to the French Paper.

In the County Vuchanfu in the Province of Huquang, is abundance of Paper made of Canes and the Leaves thereof, which grow there.

There is also good Paper made in the County Lucheufu, in the Province of Kiangnan.

There are more ways of making Paper among the Chineses (as Trigaut wit∣nesseth) than among us: The same Author affirms, that the Chinese Paper is ve∣ry rotten, apt to tear, and not durable; so that no Paper, whatsoever sort it be, can compare to ours in Europe: But whereas he saith, that it cannot bear on both sides to be Written or Printed, it is a meer mistake, because several sorts of Chinese Paper are found in the Netherlands, which not only by the Hol∣landers, but the Chineses also are written on both sides without the least sinking. The Chinese Paper is of several sizes, some two Foot and a half long, and two broad, some six Foot long, and three broad, which sort is brought from China into Holland.

China also in several places produces Sugar, 〈◊〉〈◊〉, Honey; and in the Moun∣tains abundance of Salt-Petre.

Of the Shape, Nature, and Complexion of the Chineses.

THe Chineses in Colour and Complexion are like the People of Europe, especially those of the Northern Provinces, for those in the Southern, by reason of their Neighborhood to the Line and Heat of the Sun, are of a brown Complexion.

The Hair of their Beards is stiff and short, and appears not till full Man∣hood; so that a Chinese of thirty years, looks a•…•… Youthful as an European of twenty.

The Colour of the Hair, both of their Heads and Beards, is generally black, and it is accounted a dishonor in China to wear long Hair.

Their Eyes are small, somewhat oblong, black, and standing out: their Noses are small, and not high: their Ears of an indifferent bigness, in which the Chi∣neses, as also in their other Features differ little from the European, though in some Provinces they have flat, and in a manner square Faces.

In the Province of Quantung and Quangsi, most people on every little Toe have two Nails, which is also common amongst those of Cochin-China; and some say that in former times they had six Toes on every Foot.

All the Women are of little Stature, white Skins, brown Eyes, and extraor∣dinary small Feet, in which last they account their chiefest Beauty to consist; for though a Woman be never so fair, yet she is accounted homely if she hath great Feet; insomuch, that the Mothers Swathe and Rowl up their Daugh∣ters Feet from their Infancy, that by these Swathes (which they wear all their Life-time) they may prevent the natural growth of them: This Swathing of their Feet often occasions in tender Bodies such a pain, that they sometimes become lame of their Feet and decrepit; yet the Women generally Dance pret∣tily, and make strange gestures with their bare Arms.

Some will have it, that this Swathing was inven•…•…ed by some politick and jealous Person, that by this means they might be kept at home, and prevented from walking the Streets, which in that Countrey •…•…edounds to the dishonor of the Women, and disesteem of the Men.

But, as Martinius tells us, this Custom was deriv'd from Taquia, an ancient Empress of Che, who, though exceeding all other Women in Beauty, had ex∣traordinary small Feet, which extreamly troubled her in going; her Wo∣men hereupon in flattery imitated her, and also to make their Feet smaller Swath'd them; and this Custom to this day is of such Authority among them, that should they behold a second Helen, they would look upon her as a Monster if she had great Feet.

Others say, that Taquia was no Woman, but a Spirit in Female shape, with Goats Feet; which, because she would not have them discover'd, she kept con∣tinually wrap'd up; and that from thence it hath also been a Custom for Wo∣men to cover their Feet, which if they do not, it is accounted very ridiculous: Moreover, in this they resemble Taquia, that their Feet seem so little in their Shoes, that they appear no bigger than Goats Feet.

The Chineses, both Men and Women, before the Conquering of the Empire of China by the Tartars, are said to have wore long Hair on their Heads, with∣out ever Shaving it, except Children, who till the fifteenth year of their Age Shav'd their Heads, only leaving a long Lock on their Crown; after that time they suffer'd their Hair to grow without Shaving, till they came to twenty years of age, (which was the time that Men putting on their Hat of Manhood, an ancient Custom like that of the Toga Virilis amongst the Romans) and let it hang loose over their Shoulders: In the twentieth year they ty'd up their Hair, and wore a Cap or Hat over it made of Horse-hair, or Silk; but this Cap was not us'd by the Women, who went only with their Hair ty'd up, and adorn'd with Gold, Silver, Precious-stones, and all manner of curious Flowers, and the like.

But there hath been since a great alteration in the Shaving and Wearing of their Hair; for all those Chineses which were subdu'd by them, were forc'd to Shave their Hair according to the Tartar fashion, only reserving one Lock be∣hind on their Heads, wherefore the Hollanders generally call them Shaven Chi∣neses, as those who refusing to submit to the Tartars, and to Shave off their Hair, joyn'd with the Rebel K•…•…xinga, are call'd Unshaven Chineses: •…•…ut in for∣mer times they took such a Pride in their long Hair, that they rather chose to Die, than lose the least Lock thereof; nor was it only Pride but something of Superstition that made them so concern'd in long Hair, for they like the Ma∣humetants entertain'd a simple Imagination, that they should be pull'd up to Hea∣ven by their Hair. Nevertheless, the Priests us'd in ancient times to Shave the Hair of their Heads and Beards every eighth day.

The Chineses also have a strange Opinion of themselves, accounting none equal to them, and looking upon all Affairs of foraign Kingdoms and People as not worthy their knowledge nor description; insomuch, that we find not any one Countrey which they have frequented with their Ships, mention'd in their Histories, when as they are very exact in the describing of those Coun∣tries within their own Dominions: Moreover, all the Names with which they express foraign places are ridiculous, and signifying either Barbarians, Slaves, or the like, for they never take notice of the proper and true Names of Strangers; as for example, they ridiculously name the Iapanners Vocu, which by them signi∣fies The Countrey of a Barba•…•…ian Language; and the Tartars, Nucieu.

All the Northern Chinefes, or the Inhabitants of the seven Northern Provinces, especially those of the Province of Peking, are Inferior to those of the Southern Provinces in Learning, Arts, and other Exercises of Ingenuity, but are Valianter and better Soldiers.

In like manner, the Southern Chineses are very Politick and Civil, and the Northern Rough and Unpolish'd: As for the Inhabitants of the Province of Xensi, they are very Civil and Courteous, yet they are as dull in Learning as the other Northern Chineses. Those of the Province of Fokien are much inclin'd to Riot and Lasciviousness, yet are they Politick, of great Understanding, and subtile in the way of Merchandize, very full of Fraud: They are addicted to Literature, and have many Learned Persons among them; yet they are by the other Chineses accounted a People of a Salvage cruel Nature, as seeming to have retain'd some of the antique Barbarism, because they were the last that im∣brac'd the present Laws and Customs of the Chineses.

The Inhabitants of the little City Vu•…•…iven, in the Province of Quangsi, are in high credit amongst the Chineses for their Policy and Understanding; many of them being chosen for Governors and High-priests.

The City Xaohing, in the Province of Chekiang, sends forth the most Ingeni∣ous and best Orators in all China; insomuch, that there is scarce a Governor but hath one of this City for his Council.

The Inhabitants of the eleventh County Vencheufu, in the Province of Cheki∣ang, have been of old much given to the abominable Sin of Sodomy, which is grown so habitual among them, that neither Law nor shame restrains them from acting it publickly.

Several Mountains lying in the twelfth County of Xincheufu, in the Pro∣vince* 30.171 of Huquang, are inhabited by Wild and Salvage People call'd Vulinman: Concerning the Original of these People, the Chinese Writers give us this fabu∣lous account.

King Kaosin Warring against a Robber nam'd U, was driven by him to ut∣most extremity, for the Robbers. Valor and Experience in War was such, that he often Defeated King Kaosin, and Routed all his Forces; wherefore Kaosin caus'd to be Proclaim'd amongst his Souldiers, that he would give twenty thou∣sand Ounces of Silver and a City, with his youngest Daughter, to any one that would bring him the General U's Head: While this Edict was in force, King Kaosin's Dog call'd Puonho, ran into the Enemies Army, which lay at that time Incamp'd in a Wood, and killing the General U, brought his Head to the King, who exceedingly rejoyc'd at the Death of so great an Enemy, yet thought himself not oblig'd to perform what the Proclamation had promis'd, as concluding it very unseemly for a Beast to Marry a Woman: Which his Daughter hearing, urg'd the Sacredness of the Edict, and of the King's Word, which ought not to be broke; and thereupon she was Marry'd to the Dog, by whom, in six years time she had six Sons and six Daughters, who by Marrying one another, bred a Generation of Dog-like Natur'd People.

But it is to be suppos'd, that this Fable was feign'd by the Chineses, because they accounted none to be Humane, which are not of their Countrey, or ob∣serve their Laws.

Yet in the Journal of a Monk, written in the second Book of Navigation and Travels, Collected by M. Gio Baptista Ramusio, we find this for the confirmation of these Dogs.

The Tartars returning through the Wildernesses, came to a Countrey, in which (as the Ruthens, which had been there, relate) they found a Generati∣on of Wild Women, who after they had been ask'd by several Interpreters what People they were that Inhabited that Countrey, answer'd, That all the Women of that place were of humane shape, but the Men like Dogs: And that upon this

occasion, whilst the Tartars stay'd in this Countrey, the Dogs met together on one side of the River, and leap'd (being Winter) into the Water, and after∣wards roul'd themselves in the Sand, which by the excessive cold, Froze up∣on them, and Arm'd them with a kind of a Coat of Mail: This having done several times together, the Tartars falling upon them, threw their Darts at them; but the Dogs running amongst the midst of them, made a great slaugh∣ter among them, and drove the Tartars out of the Countrey, and took Posses∣sion thereof. Thus far Baptista.

The Inhabitants of the eighth County Taiping, in the Province of Quangsi, are by a Chinese Writer call'd Barbarians, because (having cast off the Chinese Laws and Government) they go bare-footed like Salvage People, and live without Law, Rule, Order, or Decency, killing one another upon every slight occasion.

Also on the Mountains in the ninth County Cuncheufu, in the Province of Kiangsi, there live many wild People, which (according to the Relation of the Chinese Writers) live after a Salvage and Bestial manner.

Likewise on the Mountains in the Province of Queicheu inhabit a People, for the most part Wild and untractable, for they observe not the Chinese Laws or Customs, but live of themselves under several Governors of their own Elections: They often Sally out upon the Chineses which live near them, sometimes forcing them to a Peace, which at their pleasure they break again, never suffering any that are not for their way of Living to come amongst them.

To reduce this Countrey to Reason, the Emperors have often sent Forces thither, but with little success that ever was heard of.

Those of Queiyangfu, in the time of the Family Taiming, first apply'd them∣selves to study the Learning and Customs of the Chineses, by which means not a few of them have attain'd to the highest degree thereof.

The People of the second County Sucheufu, of the Province of Queicheu are strong Limb'd and Valiant, and withal, Courteous and Civil, yet have some∣thing of Wild in their manner of Living; they go with their Hair loose, bare-footed, and the Soles of their Feet have contracted such a hard Cal∣losity, that they fear not to tread on the sharpest Stones, and most prickly Thornes.

Those of the third County, though somewhat of a Salvage Nature, yet they have mix'd therewith a kind of Clownish Civility.

The Mountaineers of the sixth County Tungganfu, in the Province of Quei∣cheu, were formerly the most Cruel and Barbarous People in all that Province, Proud of themselves, Fraudulent, and having a Custom among them to kill their old People; but have of late, by their conversing with the other Chineses, learnt something of Morality.

The City Hinghoa, in the Province of Fokien, is famous for the Industrious∣ness of its Inhabitants, in Learning, Arts, and ingenious Faculties.

The Inhabitants of the seventh County Yancheufu, of the Province of Kiang∣nan, are much inclin'd to Lasciviousness.

The Northern Mountaineers, as in the County of the Garrison'd City Pu∣ting, of the Province of Queicheu, trouble not themselves with Learning, Man∣ners, or Civility, every one doing what they please, living without Laws or Go∣vernment.

The Inhabitants of the Mountain near the Garrison'd City Lungli have by their Conversing with the neighboring Chineses learn'd several of their Customs; yet going always Arm'd delight in War and the noise of Arms.

Those of the Province of Kiangsi are politick and subtle, and many of them attain to the highest degree of Literature, and thereby are rais'd to great Pre∣ferments.

The Inhabitants of the City Sucheu in the Province of Nanking, are exceed∣ingly inclin'd to dainty and delicious Fare, and love the Art of Candying and Preserving in Sugar.

All the Inhabitants of the ninth County Ningpofu in the Province of Chekiang, are great lovers of salt Meats, whereupon this proverbial Sentence passes upon them, That they cannot rot after Death, being so much sa•…•…ted during Life.

The People of the Province of Iunnan, by reason of their Neighborhood to India, participate with them in their Customs; and the main thing wherein they differ from the rest of the Chineses is this, namely, that whereas in all parts of China besides they Lock their Women up in their Houses, and suffer them not to be spoken with or seen by any Man, or ever to come out of their Houses into the Streets, here the Women walk abroad upon their occasions as in Eu∣rope. They exceed the rest of the Chineses in Courage and Valour, being ne∣ver daunted at the Engaging of an Enemy, and training up their Elephants to War. They are friendly, Courteous, and Civil to Strangers, and more tracta∣ble to embrace the Christian Religion than any of the Chineses besides.

On the North-side of the fourth County Cuihungfu in the Province of Iun∣nan, before the Tartars coming into China in the time of the Family Iuen, dwelt a People call'd Kinchi, that is, Golden-Teeth, because they us'd to cover their Teeth with thin Plates of Gold; which is also a Custom amongst those of the eighth Garrison'd City in the same Province.

The Inhabitants of the twelfth County Xunningfu in the same Province, are very barbarous and inhumane; some of them take pleasure to make their Teeth black; others Paint several Images on their Faces, rubbing in their Skin, first pierc'd with a Needle, a kind of black Colour.

The Inhabitants of the first Garrison'd City Kiocing of the same Province, are good Husband-men, but very litigious, often spending in Law that which they have labour'd for the whole year, and all for a trifle; yet they are not the onely People possess'd with this fond humor, but may be paralell'd in this Nation, especially in some parts of Wales.

The People of the second Garrison'd City Yaogan, in the same Province, are (according to the Chinese Writers) prodigiously strong, and therefore delight more in War than Peace.

The Inhabitants of the third Garrison'd City Cioking in the same Province, are valiant, prudent, and stout People; they Fight generally with Bowes and Arrows.

Though the Inhabitants of the sixth Garrison'd City Likiang, Extracted from the ancient'st Inhabitants of China, do not fully observe the Chinese Laws, be∣cause of their nearness to other People, whose Customs they have learn'd, yet nevertheless they partly observe those of the Chineses: They are very much ad∣dicted to Drinking and Jollity, spending whole Days and Nights in Singing, Dancing and Revelling; they are good Horsemen, and use Bowes and Ar∣rows.

It is scarce to be believ'd, how strictly the Women (I mean those of high

Quality, for the ordinary Women walk the Streets) are kept through all China, from the natural jealousie of the People: Their Residences are made after such a manner, that they cannot see nor be seen by others: They are seldom permitted to go out, except on extraordinary occasions, and are carry'd in Sedans made for that purpose, and so closely shut, that there is not the least Crevise through which they may be seen. Moreover, they spend their time in breeding little Dogs, Birds, and the like.

Characters and Languages.

THe Chineses have no Letters like the People of Europe, and other parts of the World, which any way agree in a certain Order or Rule of an Al∣phabet, neither have they any such thing as Vowels and Consonants, or other Literals that can be joyn'd to make Words of; but they have Cha∣racters, Signs, or Images, or what you please to name them, in stead of the Letters of the Alphabet, for every Word or Name which they speak hath a certain Figure or Character, by which it is express'd: This Figure consists in Strokes and Specks, which as they differ in shape, so in signification one from another; they are joyn'd without Art or Method, as it were by accident ex∣pressing the Name or Thing which they design: Therefore the Chineses use as many Figures or Characters as there are Things which they would express.

The Chineses (saith Trigaut) express not with any Letters of the Alphabet their Language in Writing, as almost all other People on the Earth, but draw as many Figures or Characters as there are Words and Things to signifie; so that if any one would Translate a Dictionary out of English into their Language, he would need as many several Characters as there are Words. As to what concerns the number of these Characters, though according to the greatness of any Sub∣ject, the more of them are requir'd, yet they have brought them all within the compass of seventy or eighty thousand; all which stand written in order in a Book call'd Haipien: besides which there is another much shorter (which teaches to Read, Write, and Understand their Books) which at most contains not above eight or ten thousand. If in their Reading they chance to meet with a Word which they understand not, then they turn to their great Dictionary, like one who learns the Latine or French Tongue; by which we may conclude, that the more Characters the Chineses know, the more Learned they are accounted: therefore it must be one of an exceeding Memory, that will be reckon'd a Scho∣lar amongst them.

Kircher tells us, That at this day none are accounted amongst the number of the eminently Learned, which have not attain'd to the perfect knowledge of eighty thousand Characters, though any one that will learn to speak the Lan∣guage hath enough of ten thousand: Neither do the Chineses themselves know all these Characters, the vulgar Person learning no more than he thinks may serve him in his way of Trading.

In like manner saith Trigaut, He that knows ten thousand Characters, hath obtain'd those which are commonly us'd in Writing.

Martinius makes the learning of the Chinese Characters so hard, that to know them throughly requires a whole Age, for he affirms, that he spent ten years in the learning of them, and yet at the expiration of that time, he had attain'd no farther knowledge of them, than to understand a small Prayer-Book.

It is strange to consider, that the Chineses make the great distinction of their

vast number of Characters by no more than nine Specks, by adding or leaving out any of which, another signification is produc'd: As for Exaample, one straight Stroke thus—signifies One; the same Stroke, cut through with ano∣ther like a Cross in this manner † signifies Tzi, or Ten; another being added to the bottom of the Cross † signifies Thou, or Earth; and with a third on the top † Vam, that is, King; one Speck being added on the left-side of the uppermost Stroke † signifies Iu, or Gu, that is, A Pearl; and so all kinds of Minerals, Plants, Animals, &c. are 〈◊〉〈◊〉 by the different position of Specks and Lines.

But this Rule, saith Semedo, is not always certain▪ for the Chineses not onely joyn several Lines •…•…nto one Figure, but make divers of their Significations by joyning two or more whole Figures together; so that a square Figure which signifies 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Sun, joyn'd to another, signifies the Moon, and being added to a third of the same form, expresses Min, that is, 〈◊〉〈◊〉: To signifie a Door they draw a Figure like it, which they call Muen; and to signifie the Heart, a Figure like a Heart: To express Melancholy, or Sadness, the•…•… put the Character which expresses a Heart in the middle of that of a Door, as if the Heart found it self oppress'd in the entrance of a narrow Door: And because Sorrow hath its seat in the Heart, they always add the Figure of a Heart to all those Characters with which they express any kind of sorrowful Object or Consideration.

These Characters are generally us'd, not onely in •…•…ll the fifteen Provinces of the whole Empire of China, but also in Iapan, Corea, Cochinchina, Tungking, Camboya, and Sionei, though every Countrey hath a peculiar Language. By this means the Iapanners, Cochin-Chineses, Chineses, Coreans, and Tungkingans, can under∣stand one anothers Books, as being all written in the fore-mention'd Chara∣cters; yet cannot speak with, nor understand one another: In like manner as the Figures of Arithmetick are us'd all Europe over, and understood by all the se∣veral Nations thereof, yet the words with which they are express'd differ very much; for these Chinese Characters are signs of th•…•… things which they signifie, and are by all in general understood: therefore it is one thing to know the Chinese Characters, and another to speak their Language; insomuch that a Foreigner endu'd with a great Memory, may by often reading the Chinese Books, attain to the highest degree of their Learning, though he cannot Dis∣course with, nor understand them.

These Chinese Characters seem to be of the same Original with the People themselves; for (according to some of their ancient Histories) they have been in use amongst them three thousand seven hundred and thirty years. Many ascribe the first Invention of them to the Emperor Fohi, who 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to Reign Anno 2952. before the Incarnation, and (according to Kircher) three hundred years before the Flood. But it is to be observ'd, that the old Chinese Characters differ'd much from the modern; for the first Chineses took not their significations from joint Figures, but, from the representation of natural things, as Birds, Beasts, In∣sects, Fishes, Herbs, Trees, Minerals, and the like; •…•…y which, put in order, and joyn'd several ways, the Chineses at first declar'd their Thoughts and Appre∣hensions.

When they treated of fiery things, they us'd 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and Dragons, which being plac'd in several orders, had such and such significations; and in ex∣pressing aerial things, they made Figures of Birds; and for watry, Fishes; for earthly things▪ Beasts, Plants, Trees and Leaves; for Stars, Specks and Cir∣cles; and in like manner for things of another nature.

The forms of the ancient Chinese Characters were of seventeen sorts: The first, invented by the Emperor Fohi, consisted (according to their Chronicles) of Serpents and Dragons; wherefore the Book which he writ of Astronomy is call'd The Book of Dragons: In it are Serpents strangely twisted together, and in several forms, after the manner of those things which they signifie there∣with: But at this day few Chineses understand these Characters, Age having worn out the knowledge of them.

The second sort are taken from 〈◊〉〈◊〉 belonging to Hu•…•…bandry, joyn'd to∣gether, and were first us'd by the Emperor Xin, in his Book of Agriculture, or Husbandry.

The third sort consists in the placing of several Feathers of the Bird Tunghoa∣hang, which is by them accounted the best Bird that flies. It is said that the Emperor Xanghoang us'd the•…•…e Characters in his Book of Birds.

The fourth sort consists of Shell-fishes and Insects.

The fifth, of Roots and •…•…erbs.

The sixth, of the Feet of Birds, which the Emperor Choanghang us'd.

The seventh, being an Invention of the Emperor Iao, consists of Turtles.

The eighth, of Fowls.

The ninth and tenth, of Herbs.

The eleventh, of Representations of the Planets.

The twelfth and thirteenth were formerly call'd The useful Characters of Laws and Constitutions.

The fourteenth consist of Characters expressing Rest, Joy, Knowledge, Light, and Darkness.

The fifteenth, of Fishing.

The sixteenth cannot be read nor understood.

The seventeenth and l•…•…st sort was us'd for Superscriptions on Letters, Deeds, Bonds, and the like.

But the modern Chineses grown wiser by Experience, and finding a great confusion and trouble in the representing of so many Beasts, Plants, &c.) in∣vented a far shorter way of joyning Specks and Lines together.

THe Language of the Chineses is, for its antiquity, by many accounted for* 30.172 one of the seventy two Tongues of the Tower of Babel: But certain it is (according to the testimony of their Books) that it hath been in being for three thousand six hundred years. It is not all one, but differing in the several Kingdoms or Provinces which now make up that Empire.

Trigaut tells us, that •…•…very Province differs so much from another in their Language, that they 〈◊〉〈◊〉 understand one another, notwithstanding they use the same Books 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Characters.

The Inhabitants of the County Taipin in the Province of Quangsi, speak quite another Language from the Chineses.

In like manner those of the seventh County Lipingfu of the Province of Queicheu, speak a different Language, altogether unknown to the other Chi∣neses.

In the Province of Fokien the Inhabitants use not one Dialect but every County hath a peculiar Speech, insomuch that the one cannot understand the other.

Those of the Province of Fokien, who speak a gross and ungraceful Language, use in stead of N the Letter •…•… for Nanking is by them call'd Lanking; the Suburbs

of Hoksieu or Focheu, Lanthai; which the Portuguese and Hollanders, with whom they Trade, have follow'd.

Those of the second County Sucheufu in the Province of Queicheu, knew no∣thing of any Letters formerly, though they express'd themselves by writing Figures on Boards, but have lately learn'd the vulgar Characters.

Besides the several Dialects belonging properly to each Province, after the reducing of them to one sole Empire, another Language was instituted, which was made common through the whole Realm. This Language is by the Chineses nam'd Quonhoa or Quonthoa, that is, Court, or Pleading Tongue; because it is most us'd at Court, by the Mandarins, Governors and Magistrates: It is also known by the Name of The Mandarins Language, but is least of all us'd in the Province of Fokien. This was done, because it hapned oftentimes that all the Magistrates were Foreigners or Strangers in the Province, where by the Emperors Order they were plac'd, and that they might not be necessitated to learn a strange Language, there was a general one Instituted in the whole Empire.

In this Language they not onely try Causes, but all well bred People or Strangers speak the same with the Natives in every Province, in the same man∣ner as the English, French, Italians, Germans, and other People use the Latine Tongue through all Europe.

The Iesuits which are sent to China to promulgate the Christian Religion, learn all of them this general Language, because those which belong'd to each se∣veral Province are neither useful nor elegant, nor spoken by People of Qua∣lity, except in their Houses to their Servants, or in other Countreys, thereby to put them in mind of their Native Countrey. This Language is also spoken by Women and Children, because long custom hath conquer'd the difficulty of learning it. Tradesmen speak the Language of their own Province; and though they all understand the Mandarins Tongue, yet they speak it not.

This general Chinese Tongue is very brief and short, and though rich and abounding in Characters above all other Languages, yet inferior to them in scarcity of words; for the number of the words exceed not sixteen hundred, and according to Semedo, not above three hundred twenty six. All the words end almost in a Vowel, yet some few of them with M or N; and (which is re∣markable in this Language) there are no Dissyllables or Polysyllables, but all Monosyllables, or words consisting of one syllable onely, I mean all radical and fundamental words, for Appellatives or Names of Places and Things, are compounded of two or three words clapt together, as Tunghoafung of Fung, a Bird, Hoa a Flower, and Tung the Name of the Flower: and herein it is para∣lell'd even by our English Tongue, whose fundamental words being originally Saxon, are for the most part Monosyllable, as Tree, Stone, Hand, Eye, &c. It hath many Diphthongs, or double Vowels joyn'd together in one syllable, I say Vow∣els after our way of speaking, meaning the force of Vowels; for Vowels are no us'd by the Chineses, but as every thing, so every word hath its peculiar Sign: wherefore▪ it may be ask'd, Are there so many Signs in so small a number of words as the Chineses 〈◊〉〈◊〉? or, How can they with so few words express all things which their thoughts comprehend? In answer hereof I say, That the Chinese Language is very comprehensive, that is to say, it hath few words, but oftentimes one word signifies ten or twenty several things, which are not to be distinguish'd but by the different sound and pronunciation in speaking, which distinction is so small, that Strangers •…•…an scarce observe the same; insomuch

that one might say, this Language was rather Artificially invented, than Na∣turally proceeding from the necessity of Discourse; therefore they that will rightly understand the sense of the words, had need be as attentive to the Tone in Speaking, as the Accent in Writing.

To make the Chinese Tongue the easier, (for it is very hard to learn) the Iesu∣its have from the Method of Musical Notes, as Ut, Re, Mi, Fa, Sol, taught to know the high and low Sounds which the Chineses observe in their Speaking: To this purpose Iacob Pantoja first found out these five Signs, which written over the Chinese words after the European manner, are thus express'd 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. And by these five Marks of Sound, Foraigners learn the Language, though not without great Pains and Study; partly, because of the manifold Characters of the words, and partly, by reason of the difficulty of hitting upon the several Tones or Sounds.

The first Sign of the five Sounds or Tones mark'd thus 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, agrees with Ut in Musick; and the Sound or Pronounciation is in the Chinese Tongue call'd Cho Pim, as if they would say, The first agreeable Tone. The second Sign 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 agrees with Re, in Chinese call'd Pim Xim, that is, A clear and even Voice. The third Sign 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 agrees with Mi; this Sound in Chinese is call'd Xam Xim, that is, High Voice. The fourth Sign 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 agrees with Fa, and is by the Chineses nam'd, Kiu Xim, that is, High Voice of the Goer. The fifth U agrees with Sol, and is by the Chineses call'd Ge Xim, that is, Proper Voice of the Enterer.

According as any word written in European Letters is mark'd with these Signs, it must be utter'd in a different Voice or Sound, as it is written by the Chi∣neses with several Characters, and hath also there its several significations: As for example, the word Ia, written with European Letters, according as it is mark'd with any' of the five Signs, signifies several things, and must also be ut∣ter'd with a difference of Sounds; for the Word or Syllable Iâ, with this Sign 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 signifies A Tooth; Iā with a strait Stroke, A Voice; Ià with a sloaping Stroke towards the Left, Excellent; Iá with a sloaping Stroke towards the Right, A Deafness; Iă with a Semi-Circle, He Goes.

In like manner, the Syllable Ko, is by the Chineses Ton'd ten several ways, and each Tone hath a peculiar signification; as also, each signification a pecu∣liar Mark, whereby it is distinguish'd from the other; so that no Language in the whole world is so Univocal or containing so many several meanings under one word as the Chinese; and the Marks that distinguish the significations of a word by the Accent, are so many, that the difference of Sound can scarce be discern'd in all; insomuch, that not any one Book can be understood from a Reader by the Auditor, an Ocular Inspection being absolutely necessary to di∣stinguish by the Marks the difference of the Sound, and by consequence, the double sense of the words, which cannot be distinguish'd by the Ear; nay, that which is more, it often happens in their Speaking, that when one cannot understand the others sense, notwithstanding he speaks plain and distinctly, he is not only necessitated to repeat his Discourse, but also to write it; and if they chance not to have Pen or Paper, they do it with Water on a Table, or with their Fingers in the Air, or express the meaning with the Hand of the Auditor: This happens most amongst the Learned and Eloquent part of the People, who study to speak more exact and quai•…•…t than ordinary, according as they write in their Books.

The reason of the Univocalness of this Language seems to proceed from no∣thing else, but that these People from •…•…ll Ages have endeavour'd more to write

well than speak well, because their best Language to this day consists in Wri∣ting and not in Speaking; therefore it also happens, that Messages are not deli∣ver'd by word of Mouth, but in Writing, though it be in one and the same City; for though this Language be very scanty of words, nevertheless, it is the pleasing∣est and most ingenious of all others; for whereas in any action we cannot express the manner of doing but in several words, the Chineses often comprehend it in one word: As for example, the word Nien, among them signifies Taking hold with two Fingers; Tzo, Taking hold with all the Fingers: In like manner, we make several uses of the word Are, when we say They are a Bed, are at Table, are at the Tavern; but the Chineses express the being and manner of being in one word; we also say, The Foot of a Man, the Foot of a Bird, the Foot of a Beast, never omit∣ting to add the word Foot: But the Chineses to express the Foot of a Man, say, Kio, that of a Bird, Cua, that of a four footed Beast Thi.

The Chineses, considering they have no Alphabet, are accustom'd from their Infancy to express themselves by this way of sign'd Sounds, and very much wonder how we of Europe can write down their Words in Latin Letters, and pronounce the•…•… so plainly.

They use not the Sound of the Letter R. which they cannot Pronounce, nor ever put two Consonants together, without a Vowel between; so that to this day they call the Franks, Falankes, by whom perhaps, they, as well as the Moors, understand all the People of Europe, except the Greeks.

A•…•… for the Language of the Tartars it is much easier to learn, seeming in some measure to agree with the Persian, and having some Characters or Letters like the Arabick.

The Alphabet of this Language is said to consist of sixty several Letters, which may the rather be, because some of them have the force of Consonant and Vowel joyn'd in one, as La, Le, Li, Lo, Lu; Pa, Pe, Pi, Po, Pu.

In Reading they descend down-wards like the Chineses, and proceed from the Right to the Left side, as anciently the Hebrews and other Easterly Nations, and at this day the Arabians and Chineses.

FINIS.

Notes

• * 1.1

  Martin Histor. Sinen. l. 2. pag. 54.
• a 2.1

  A Chinese Strong-Water.
• a 2.2

  As the Dutch call it.
• a 2.3

  Chinese Suckets.
• a 2.4

  Captain Nobel.
• * 2.5

  October.
• a 2.6

  The Ambassador.
• * 2.7

  November.
• * 2.8

  Four Months the River Hoksieu in China not navi∣gable.
• a 2.9

  A kind of Corn.
• * 2.10

  December.
• * 5.1

  Trigaut.
• * 6.1

  A Conderin is a small Chinese Weight.
• * 8.1

  A Letter to the Gene∣ral Talavja.
• * 9.1

  The General's Answer.
• * 9.2

  Nobel desires a Pass for the Blyswiik Frigat.
• * 10.1

  Nobel's Request to the General.
• * 10.2

  The General's Factor's Proffer to Nobel.
• * 10.3

  Nobel's Answer.
• * 11.1

  Novel and Vander Does Discourse with the Gene∣ral.
• * 11.2

  His Answer.
• * 11.3

  Ianuary 1667.
• * 11.4

  Blyswiik Frigat sets Sail.
• * 11.5

  Liu-lavja comes to the Netherlanders in the Lodge.
• * 11.6

  Nobel and Vander Does go to the General.
• * 12.1

  The General's Order for the seized Batavian Chinese Goods.
• * 12.2

  Are carry'd away.
• * 12.3

  Nobel and Vander Does come to the Vice-Roy.
• * 12.4

  Nobel and Harthouwer go to the General.
• * 12.5

  Cannot be admitted 〈◊〉〈◊〉 have Audience.
• * 12.6

  Letters sent to Holland.
• * 12.7

  Van Hoorn Dines with the chief Factor.
• * 12.8

  The Ambassador re∣ceives order to go his Journey.
• * 12.9

  Leave Hoksieu.
• * 12.10

  But twenty four Hollan∣ders are suffer'd to go to Peking.
• * 12.11

  Ambassador proceeds on his Journey.
• * 12.12

  Ambassadors Expences.
• * 12.13

  The City Ienping.
• * 12.14

  February.
• * 12.15

  The City Kienningfoe.
• * 12.16

  The City Poutchin.
• * 12.17

  Presents Landed▪
• * 13.1

  The Ambassador leaves Poutchin.
• * 13.2

  Territory▪ Chekiang.
• * 13.3

  Division.
• * 13.4

  Names.
• * 13.5

  Cities.
• * 13.6

  Borders.
• * 13.7

  Borders.
• * 13.8

  Towns.
• * 13.9

  Borders.
• * 13.10

  Towns.
• * 13.11

  Borders.
• * 13.12

  Towns.
• * 13.13

  Borders.
• * 13.14

  Names.
• * 13.15

  Towns.
• * 13.16

  Borders.
• * 13.17

  Towns.
• * 13.18

  Fortresses.
• * 13.19

  Islands.
• * 13.20

  River Che.
• * 13.21

  Lake Sikin.
• * 13.22

  Lake Pehiai.
• * 13.23

  Pool Papou its strange quality.
• * 13.24

  Bird Hoangcio.
• * 13.25

  Fish Hoang.
• * 13.26

  A strange quality of a Mountain.
• * 13.27

  Oysters.
• * 13.28

  Fruit Peci, its strange quality.
• * 13.29

  Hower Mogorin.
• * 13.30

  Tallow Tree.
• * 13.31

  Reven•…•…es paid by this Province to the Emperor.
• * 13.32

  Mountains Iakoling.
• * 13.33

  T•…•…anchia, Sunthia▪
• * 13.34

  March.
• * 13.35

  City Kiucheu.
• * 13.36

  City Iansjenne.
• * 13.37

  City Sinching.
• * 13.38

  City Fujang.
• * 13.39

  Chankeeuw, the Suburb of Hancheu.
• * 13.40

  Consult what to present the Governor withal.
• * 13.41

  Pingtouw visits the Am∣bassador.
• * 13.42

  The Ambassador goes to the General.
• * 13.43

  The Governor refuses the Presents.
• * 14.1

  Complementing Letter to the General.
• * 15.1

  To the Conbon.
• * 15.2

  Presents sent from the Conbon to he Ambassador.
• * 15.3

  General's Present.
• * 15.4

  Nobel and Vander Does go to the General.
• * 15.5

  Goes also to the Conbon.
• * 15.6

  And to Manchu.
• * 15.7

  They concluded to send for a Ship with Merchan∣dize, and from Hoksieu to Ningpo.
• * 15.8

  Van Hoorn writes to Har∣thouwer concerning it.
• * 15.9

  Presents for the Pingtouw.
• * 15.10

  Orders not to Transport Silk.
• * 15.11

  Chekiang produces much Silk.
• * 15.12

  Histor. China.
• * 15.13

  Borders of the Province Nanking.
• * 15.14

  Worth:
• * 15.15

  Division▪
• * 15.16

  Borders.
• * 15.17

  Towns.
• * 15.18

  Names.
• * 15.19

  Walls.
• * 15.20

  Gates.
• * 15.21

  An antient Palac•…•… of the Emperors.
• * 15.22

  A strange Tower.
• * 15.23

  The Pagode Paolinxi.
• * 15.24

  Porcellane Tower
• * 15.25

  Borders.
• * 15.26

  Names.
• * 15.27

  Towns.
• * 15.28

  Borders.
• * 15.29

  Towns.
• * 15.30

  Names.
• * 15.31

  Borders.
• * 15.32

  Towns.
• * 15.33

  Towns.
• * 15.34

  Borders.
• * 15.35

  Names.
• * 15.36

  Borders.
• * 15.37

  Towns.
• * 15.38

  Borders.
• * 15.39

  Names.
• * 15.40

  Borders.
• * 15.41

  Towns.
• * 15.42

  Borders.
• * 15.43

  Towns.
• * 15.44

  Borders.
• * 15.45

  Names.
• * 15.46

  Towns.
• * 15.47

  Come to Sucheu.
• * 15.48

  The Conbon Presents the Ambassador.
• * 15.49

  Shift the Goods.
• * 15.50

  The Conbon sends Pro∣vender.
• * 15.51

  The Ambassador Com∣plemented by a Mandarin.
• * 15.52

  Leave Siucheu.
• * 15.53

  Haven Masters belong∣ing to Hanksieu depart.
• * 16.1

  The Ambassador's Let∣ter to the General and Conbon of Hanksieu.
• * 16.2

  The City▪ Usie.
• * 16.3

  April.
• * 16.4

  City Tanyang.
• * 16.5

  City Chinkiang.
• * 16.6

  The Ambassador is in∣vited to the Governor.
• * 16.7

  Presents to the Gover∣nor.
• * 17.1

  Discourse between the Ambassador and two Man∣darins.
• * 17.2

  Wayopoe.
• * 17.3

  City Kayoven.
• * 17.4

  City Paoing.
• * 17.5

  Arrive at Hoaigan.
• * 17.6

  The Ambassador is en∣tertain'd by the Governor of Hoaigan.
• * 18.1

  A Complementing Let∣ter from the Ambassador to the Commissary.
• * 18.2

  Presents to the Ambas∣sador.
• * 19.1

  Letter to the Governor for Barques.
• a 19.2

  Presents.
• * 20.1

  Come to the Yellow River.
• * 20.2

  Weather-makers.
• * 20.3

  Jugl•…•…rs▪
• * 20.4

  The City Taujenjeen.
• * 20.5

  Van Hoorn is displeas'd for staying.
• * 20.6

  May.
• * 20.7

  Pass by several Villages.
• * 20.8

  City Cinning.
• a 21.1

  Presents.
• * 21.2

  Conbon presents the Am∣bassador.
• * 21.3

  The City Tunchang.
• * 22.1

  Leave Linsing.
• * 22.2

  City Linsing.
• * 22.3

  Porcelin Tower of Lin∣sing.
• * 22.4

  River Guei.
• * 22.5

  Iune.
• * 22.6

  Vuching.
• * 22.7

  Tachu.
• * 22.8

  Come to Tienciu.
• * 22.9

  Are Complemented by the General.
• * 22.10

  Entertain'd at a Dinner.
• * 22.11

  Presents sent to the Ge∣neral of Tiencin.
• * 23.1

  Will not accept of them.
• * 23.2

  Arrive at the City of Gioechioe.
• * 23.3

  Leave Gioechioe.
• * 23.4

  Tongsieuw.
• * 23.5

  Come to Peking.
• * 23.6

  Questions to the Am∣bassador.
• * 23.7

  The Generals and Coun∣cels Letter from Batavia is deliver'd.
• * 23.8

  Horses and Oxen are commanded to come to the Court.
• * 23.9

  Shape of the Emperor.
• * 23.10

  Emperor's Questions.
• * 23.11

  Remaining Presents are sent for to the Court.
• * 23.12

  Ambassador is strictly Guarded.
• * 23.13

  The Presents must be shewn to the Emperor.
• * 23.14

  Corean Agents.
• * 23.15

  A Discourse between the Lipou Lilavja and the Ambassador.
• * 23.16

  A List of the Emperor's allowance to the Ambassa∣dor's.
• * 23.17

  Refuses Presents.
• * 23.18

  The two Lipous Questi∣ons.
• * 23.19

  The Ambassador makes Obeisance before the Em∣peror's Throne.
• * 23.20

  State before the Empe∣ror's Throne.
• * 23.21

  The Emperor rises.
• * 23.22

  And likewise the Am∣bassador.
• * 23.23

  Presents to the Zoutai∣zins.
• * 23.24

  Presents to the Lipous.
• * 23.25

  Presents for the Secre∣taries.
• * 23.26

  Nobel and Putmans are sent for to the Lipous.
• * 23.27

  Requests of the Ambas∣sador to the Emperor.
• * 23.28

  Presents to the Empe∣ror.
• * 23.29

  Several Questions of two Lipous to the Ambas∣sador.
• * 23.30

  Ambassador goes to his new Lodgings.
• * 23.31

  Two Lipous ask several Questions of the Ambassa∣dor.
• * 23.32

  Ambassador's Requests▪
• * 23.33

  Ambassador and Nobel brought before the Lipous.
• * 23.34

  Several Questions.
• * 23.35

  Iune.
• * 23.36

  Consult about present∣ing the Council of State.
• * 24.1

  A Letter to the Taisins concerning the Presents.
• * 24.2

  Ambassador and Nobel appear before the Lipous.
• * 24.3

  Ambassador and Nobel again sent, for to the As∣sembly of the Lipous.
• * 24.4

  Several Questions of four Mandarins to the Ambassador.
• * 24.5

  The Ambassador and his Retinue are fetch'd to the Imperor's Feast.
• * 24.6

  Interpreter Genko's in∣formation.
• * 24.7

  The Ambassador and his Council consult about it.
• * 25.1

  The Ambassadors Re∣quest to the Lipous.
• * 25.2

  Emperor's second Feast.
• * 25.3

  Presents for the Gene∣ral.
• * 26.1

  September.
• * 26.2

  November.
• a 29.1

  Officers that provide for Strangers.
• * 29.2

  December.
• * 30.1

  Ianuary.
• * 30.2

  Atl. Si•…•…euf.
• * 30.3

  Emperors Marriages. Semedo.
• * 30.4

  •…•…igant 〈◊〉〈◊〉▪
• * 30.5

  Histor. Sinens. lib. 5.
• * 30.6

  Histor. Sin. l. 1. c. 23.
• a 30.7

  Adam Schall.
• * 30.8

  Adam Scall.
• * 30.9

  Semedo.
• * 30.10

  Mart. A•…•…l. Sin.
• * 30.11

  Trigaut.
• * 30.12

  Martin▪ Histor. Sin. l. 7.
• * 30.13

  Martin.
• * 30.14

  Semedo.
• * 30.15

  Atl. Simns.
• * 30.16

  Martin. Histor. Sini•…•….
• * 30.17

  〈◊〉〈◊〉.
• * 30.18

  Martin.
• * 30.19

  Semed•…•….
• * 30.20

  Martin Sin▪ Histor. l. 4.
• a 30.21

  As the Rom•…•…s call'd Scip•…•…o Africanus the Thun∣der-bolt of War.
• a 30.22

  The Monarch of Eng∣land, and Empire of China, •…•…anslated and chang'd at once.
• a 30.23

  Like our King's-Bench, or Superior Courts of Judicature.
• * 30.24

  Semedo.
• * 30.25

  Martin▪ Histor▪ Sinic. l 9.
• * 30.26

  Trigaut.
• * 30.27

  Semedo.
• * 30.28

  〈◊〉〈◊〉. Hist. Sinens•…•…s
• * 30.29

  I•…•…m Histor. Sinic.
• * 30.30

  H•…•…stor. Sinic.
• * 30.31

  Trigaut.
• * 30.32

  Semedo.
• * 30.33

  Something▪ like our Judges of •…•…yer and Termi∣•…•…er.
• * 30.34

  Like our Visitation o the Clergy or Heraldry.
• * 30.35

  Mandarins Seal.
• * 30.36

  Trigan•…•…
• * 30.37

  Semedo.
• * 30.38

  Trigaut.
• * 30.39

  Semedo.
• * 30.40

  Martin▪ Hist. Sinic.
• * 30.41

  Trigaut.
• * 30.42

  •…•…igaut.
• * 30.43

  About five English Mile.
• a 30.44

  Post mort•…•… nulla 〈◊〉〈◊〉.
• * 30.45

  〈◊〉〈◊〉. Atl. p. •…•….
• * 30.46

  Trigaut.
• * 30.47

  Other Towers call'd Cu∣•…•….
• * 30.48

  Martin. A•…•…l. p. 6.
• * 30.49

  Lib. 5. p. 6.
• * 30.50

  Lib. 1. cap. 4.
• * 30.51

  Ships of the Governors.
• * 30.52

  Rivers in the Provin•…•… of Xantung.
• * 30.53

  Streams in the Province of Honan.
• * 30.54

  Rivers of the Province of Huquang.
• * 30.55

  in the Province 〈◊〉〈◊〉.
• * 30.56

  Rivers in the Province of Kiangsi.
• * 30.57

  Rivers in the Province Quantung.
• * 30.58

  Rivers belonging to the Province of Quangsi.
• * 30.59

  Lakes in the Province of Peking.
• * 30.60

  Lakes in the Province of Xansi.
• * 30.61

  Lakes in the Province of Xensi.
• * 30.62

  Lakes in the Province of Xantung.
• * 30.63

  Lakes in the Province of Honan▪
• * 30.64

  Lakes in the Province of Suchuen▪
• * 30.65

  Lakes in the Province of Huquang.
• * 30.66

  Lakes in the Province of Kiangsi.
• * 30.67

  Lakes in the Province of Nanking.
• * 30.68

  Lakes in the Province of Kiangsi.
• * 30.69

  Springs in the Province of Honan.
• * 30.70

  Springs in the Province of Huquang.
• * 30.71

  Springs in the Province of Kiangsi.
• * 30.72

  Springs in the Province of Nanking.
• * 30.73

  Springs in the Province of Quantung.
• * 30.74

  Springs in the Province of Quangsi.
• * 30.75

  Springs in the Province of Iunnan.
• * 30.76

  Mountains in the Pro∣vince of Peking,
• * 30.77

  Mountains in the Pro∣vince of Xansi▪
• * 30.78

  Mountains in the Pro∣vince of Xensi.
• * 30.79

  Mountains in the Terri∣tory Linyafu.
• * 30.80

  Mountains in the Pro∣vince of Xantung.
• * 30.81

  Mountains in the Pro∣vince of Honan.
• * 30.82

  Mountains in the Province of Suchuen.
• * 30.83

  Mountains in the Province of Huquang.
• * 30.84

  Mountains in the Pro∣vince of Kiangsi▪
• * 30.85

  Mountains •…•…in the Pro∣vince of Nanking.
• * 30.86

  Mountains in the Province of Chekiang.
• * 30.87

  Mountains in the Pro∣vince of Fokien.
• * 30.88

  Mountains in the Province of Quantung.
• * 30.89

  Mountains in the Pro∣vince of Quangsi.
• * 30.90

  Mountains in the Pro∣vince of Queicheu.
• * 30.91

  Mountains in the Pro∣vince of Iunnan▪
• * 30.92

  Laws for Husbandry.
• * 30.93

  He Reign'd Anno 2837. before the Nativity.
• * 30.94

  Martin. D•…•…cas p. 45.
• * 30.95

  Herb Kinsu.
• * 30.96

  Flower Meutang.
• * 30.97

  Wormwood.
• * 30.98

  China-Root. Martin.
• * 30.99

  Root Ginseng.
• * 30.100

  Or rather in Spring▪ as Ramusio will have it▪
• * 30.101

  The Fruit Lichi.
• * 30.102

  The Fruit Lungyen, or Dragons-Eye.
• * 30.103

  Flor. Sin.
• * 30.104

  The Herb Muigiuli.
• * 30.105

  The Herb of a thousand years.
• * 30.106

  The Fruit Peci.
• * 30.107

  Mogorin Flower.
• * 30.108

  Kieuyen, or Fat-Flower.
• * 30.109

  The Twig Teng.
• * 30.110

  The Flower Quei.
• * 30.111

  The Herb Pusu.
• * 30.112

  The Quanglang Tree.
• * 30.113

  The Herb Ko.
• * 30.114

  Fanyaycocu.
• * 30.115

  The Fruit of the Tree Fanyay.
• * 30.116

  Histor. Natur. & M•…•…. L. 4.
• * 30.117

  The Tree Supim▪ Michael Boem.
• * 30.118

  The Fruit Cienko.
• * 30.119

  The Tree and Fruit Gi∣ambo. Mithael Boem.
• * 30.120

  The Fruit Pipa.
• * 30.121

  The Fruit Yata.
• * 30.122

  The Fruit Manko.
• * 30.123

  Boem.
• * 30.124

  •…•…auhin.
• * 30.125

  Mantis. Arom. p. 185.
• * 30.126

  Kilus.
• * 30.127

  Sugar-Canes.
• * 30.128

  Chinese Rose.
• * 30.129

  Flora lib. 4. ca. 6. p. 974.
• * 30.130

  Fruit Iamboes, or Pam∣pelmoes.
• * 30.131

  Golden Apples.
• * 30.132

  Fruit Linkio.
• * 30.133

  The Fruit Bananas, or Mauz.
• * 30.134

  Vesting. in Alpin.
• * 30.135

  Alpinus.
• * 30.136

  Vesting.
• * 30.137

  Fruit Champidaka.
• * 30.138

  Fruit Fa•…•…, Polo, or Ana nas.
• * 30.139

  Tee or Cha.
• * 30.140

  Piso Annotas. in Bort.
• b 30.141

  Piso.
• c 30.142

  Martin.
• d 30.143

  Piso.
• * 30.144

  Martin.
• * 30.145

  Flying Cow:
• * 30.146

  White Cats like Iselan Shocks.
• * 30.147

  The Beast Xamxu.
• * 30.148

  A Scudo is about 2 d.
• * 30.149

  Great Mice.
• * 30.150

  Wolves.
• * 30.151

  Dears.
• * 30.152

  Boars.
• * 30.153

  Horses;
• * 30.154

  Baboons.
• * 30.155

  The Bird Tunghoafung.
• * 30.156

  The Bird Lokung.
• * 30.157

  The Bird Hoangcio.
• * 30.158

  Swallows.
• * 30.159

  Ducks.
• * 30.160

  The Bird Louwa.
• * 30.161

  Piso.
• * 30.162

  The Fish Hoang.
• * 30.163

  The Fish Kinyu.
• * 30.164

  The Fish Kiyu, or Xau•…•…l.
• * 30.165

  〈…〉〈…〉.
• * 30.166

  The 〈◊〉〈◊〉 〈◊〉〈◊〉.
• * 30.167

  Serpent Gento.
• * 30.168

  Serpent Cabros de Cabello.
• * 30.169

  Gum Ci•…•….
• * 30.170

  Peters-Oyl.
• * 30.171

  Vulinman, or wild •…•…∣ple.
• * 30.172

  The Language of the Chineses.